PRODUCT MANUAL

ENGLISH

Intercom Server
Configuration
MANUAL VERSION 3.1/0923
This product manual refers to software
version VirtuoSIS 13.2 and PRO 800 6.4.
 Intercom Server Configuration

COMMEND INTERNATIONAL GMBH

Saalachstraße 51
A-5020 Salzburg – Austria
www.commend.com
Product manual Intercom Server Configuration
Edition September 2023
Version 3.1/0923

Legal Notice
The manufacturer guarantees the functionality of its products as described in the data sheets and/or other
technical documents. For error-free operation of the Commend system, faultless transmission paths are
mandatory. The functionality of transmission paths, in particular of IP networks, is exclusively the respon-
sibility of the operating company of the transmission path and therefore the manufacturer is not responsi-
ble in any manner for any errors and problems resulting from or malfunctioning of the transmission path.
It is not allowed to copy any text of this document without permission of COMMEND INTERNATIONAL
GMBH. The technical data contained herein has been provided solely for informational purposes and is not
legally binding. IoIP®, OpenDuplex® and Commend® are trademarks registered by COMMEND INTERNA-
TIONAL GMBH. All other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their re-
spective owners and are not explicitly marked as such in the text.

Attention
Only authorized service personnel are permitted to carry out the mounting and installation of the Intercom
Servers and equipment.

Number of pages: 552

2 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration

Content
General information 4 Alarm function 308
Intercom Server and subscriber functions 6 Door function 316
Configuration software CCT 800 24 Control desk function 326
Configuration sequence in CCT 800 72 DSP function 362
Establish connection to the Intercom Server 74 Video 377
Receiving, sending, warmstart 79 Speech recording 390
Offline configuration 88 Pre-recorded audio 398
Software and firmware update 91 Time, date 415
Licencing 96 Network function 419
Peer-to-peer audio (P2P) 441
Point-to-Multipoint (P2MP) 445
Launch VirtuoSIS 112
Logic module 446
Create a new VirtuoSIS Instance 130
EventLOG 461
Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations 132
General Intercom features 156
Privacy, busy, re-call request 201 SIP functions 463
Direct dialling, button disabling, hierarchy 212
Direct dialling button, direct dialling module 218
Symphony Bridge 496
Input, output 231
Speech control 249
Call diversion, call transfer 263 IT security 516
Feature with additional interface 268
Group call, All Call 269
Conference 278 Appendix 519
Music, radio conference 287
Public address (PA) 298
Technical Support 552

3.1/0923 3
General information Intercom Server Configuration

General information

Info boxes
ATTENTION:
This information box addresses all necessary configuration options and actions that facilitate error-
free operation. In addition, this box warns you if a certain configuration, option or entered value could
lead to a malfunction of the application or a loss of data.

NOTE:
This information box has several uses, ranging from basic configuration tips to additional notes and
comments on certain settings and events.

GOOD TO KNOW:
This information box provides background knowledge that helps you understand the basic principles
behind the various configurations and the application itself.

New Features
These new features are available with VirtuoSIS 13.2:
 Symphony Control Desk function “On-Hold”. For further information, see page 330.
 Standardisation of licensing for IP and SIP-C cards. For further information, see page 107.
 Distributing Intercom Server configurations. For further information, see page 72.
 New option “Check local call numbers” to identify collisions of call numbers beginning with D0** or
BA**. For further information, see page 51.
 Configurable refreshing of display text when calling over SIP trunk via “Remote-Party-ID”. For fur-
ther information, see page 470.
 Improvements in CCT 800 concerning the configuration of “ICX parameters”, “ICX messages” and
“Button triggers virtual station input” for series CD and EE 380. For further information, see page 227
and see page 238.

4 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration General information

Requirements legend
In the left-hand margin, requirements for the respective features are displayed as follows:
Symbol Requirement
Required firmware version for Intercom Server IS 300, GE 150, GE 300, GE 800 and VirtuoSIS (for
 VirtuoSIS up to firmware version 6.1).

 Required firmware version for Intercom Server VirtuoSIS from firmware version SIS 7.0.

 Required feature level of the subscriber card. 1)

 2-wire [2W] or 4-wire [4W] subscriber card required. 1)

 Only possible with DSP station or with certain DSP software. 1)

No restart required. 2)
1) This information is only displayed if it is required for the respective feature.
2)
This information is only displayed if the configuration of the respective feature does not require a restart of
the Intercom Server with PRO 800 5.1 or higher. An overview of all features without restart can be found on
page 532.

3.1/0923 5
Intercom Server and subscriber functions Intercom Server Configuration

Intercom Server and subscriber functions

The following overview chapters are available:
 Intercom subscriber functions – see below
 Intercom Server functions – see page 19

Intercom subscriber functions

feature level D

feature level A
feature level C

feature level B
Control desk Intercom function D C B A

Advanced Intercom function C B A

Basic function B A

Entry level Intercom function A

GOOD TO KNOW:
 The feature levels of the subscriber cards define which features are available for the individual
subscribers. If the feature is not a subscriber function (i.e. Intercom Server function), no feature level
is required for the feature.
 The feature levels can be expanded with licences (e.g. G8-IP-4D).
 Feature level A is available with VirtuoSIS 7.0. Otherwise, feature level B is required.

In the following table, all available Intercom subscriber functions are listed with the required feature
level and Intercom Server firmware version or upgrade licence (the columns SIP-C / SIP-T refer to the
last available VirtuoSIS software):
VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x

SYM-BRIDGE
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

See page
SIP-C
SIP-T

General Intercom functions

Text parameter - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 158

Optional parameters - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  159
ICX-Parameter - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  160
Tone signals for different operation states B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  162
Minute signal configurable per subscriber B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  163
Length of ringtone B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A - - 163
Dialling at start of the Intercom Server B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 163
Protection against feedback B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  164
Selective disabling of functions B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  164
Selective enabling of functions - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  164
De-bounce time for buttons B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 166

6 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Intercom Server and subscriber functions

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x

SYM-BRIDGE
VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

See page
SIP-C
SIP-T
General Intercom functions

Internal handset function with volume

B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 166
control
Disabling position switch and internal
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 167
handset function
Microphone mute B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  167
Waiting information for microphone mute/
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  167
further connection
Automatic disconnection of conversations
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  168
after time per subscriber
Individual disconnection times per sub-
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  168
scriber
Reconnection with last call B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  168
Reconnection with last call via SIP trunk - - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B B  168
Inquiry/further connection B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  169
Further connection to fix privacy station - - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B B - 170
Lock display contrast - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 172
Hide function menu in idle display B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 172
Subscriber list B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 174
Indication of call number in subscriber list - - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B - - - 174
Search function in the subscriber list - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 175
Permanent subscriber list B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 176
Hide subscribers from subscriber list B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 176
External subscriber list - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 176
Phonebook view for the permanent
- - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B - - - 177
subscriber list
Function list B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 178
Individual F2-menu B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 178
Search function in the function list - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B - - - 179
Permanent function list - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B - - - 180
Individual F2 menu C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 180
F3-Main menu B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 182
Language B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  183
Language Hebrew - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 184
Favourites menu - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 185
Search function in the favourites menu - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B - - - 188
Permanent favourites menu - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B - - - 189
Calling history - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 190
Back-lit display B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 191
Back-lit keypad - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 192
Multifunctional LED B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 192

3.1/0923 7
Intercom Server and subscriber functions Intercom Server Configuration

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x

SYM-BRIDGE
VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

See page
SIP-C
SIP-T
General Intercom functions

Increased volume (incl. voltage monitor-

B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 193
ing)
16 kHz audio bandwidth B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 193
Invert button “0” and button “T” - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 194
EN 81-28 Emergency Call System - - - - - - - - B - - B B B B B - - - 196
User administration - - - C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 198
Busy tone at line fault - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 200
Secretary transfer at line fault - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 200
Privacy, busy, re-call request
Permanent privacy function configurable B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A - - 201
Privacy function activated at the station B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A - - 202
Intrusion function at a private subscriber C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 203
Waiting information for private subscriber B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  203
4 kHz as privacy tone B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 203
Attendant contact for status “privacy” B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 203
Acoustic and visual busy indication B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  205
Automatic re-call in case of “busy” B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  205
Switch off busy signal while waiting for
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  205
re-call
Waiting information for busy subscriber B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  206
Acoustic and visual indication of waiting
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 1) B 1)  206
subscriber
Double minute signal in case of waiting
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  206
subscriber
Intrusion function at a busy subscriber C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 206
Priority call with disconnection of busy
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 207
subscribers
Single priority call C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 207
Send re-call request B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 208
Send re-call request at privacy call - - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B B - 208
Receive re-call request B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 208
Indication of call number and name of the
- - - - - - - - D D D D D D D D - - - 209
phone at re-recall request over SIP trunk
Date and time display at re-call request - - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B - - - 209
Activate call back reminder B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 209
1)
Only acoustic indication available

8 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Intercom Server and subscriber functions

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x

SYM-BRIDGE
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

See page
SIP-C
Direct dialling, disabling of button,

SIP-T
hierarchy

Direct dialling for all subscribers - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  212

Direct dialling for selective subscribers B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  212
Direct dialling configured at the station C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 213
Switch-over direct dialling/normal dialling
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  214
for all subscribers
Switch-over direct/normal dialling for
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 214
selective subscribers
Direct dialling with automatic
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 214
disconnection
Direct dialling – Toggle between stations C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 214
Function keys with direct dialling (only EE
- - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B - - - 215
7000)
Disabling the menu of WS stations - - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B - - - 216
Disabling of the complete keyboard with
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 216
input
Hierarchy level B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  217
Direct dialling button, direct dialling mod-
ule
Direct dialling module allocation only with
- - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B - - - 218
input level detection
Allocation of direct dialling modules
- - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B - - - 218
(WSDD)
Templates B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 219
Line fault B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 219
Direct dialling, call/conversation indication B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 221
Single button B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 222
Control of outputs B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 222
Input simulation B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 222
Input message B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 223
Mixing radio conference - - - D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 223
Indication squelch input - - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 224
PA functions - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 224
dB-range display - - - D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 226
Remote control - - - - - - - - D D D D D D D D - - - 227
Send ICX messages via direct dialling
- - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 229
button
Bonding of direct dialling modules - - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 230
Input, output
Input initiates dialling at a subscriber B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 231
Input changes button of a subscriber B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 232
Activation internal inputs of stations B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 233
Using “IN2”, “IN4” at analogue WS series - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 233

3.1/0923 9
Intercom Server and subscriber functions Intercom Server Configuration

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x

SYM-BRIDGE
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x

See page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Input, output

Using internal inputs as function keys

- - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B - - - 234
(EE 7000 only)
Position switch as input B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 234
“IN2” for external microphone B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 236
“IN2” for handset B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 237
Button triggers virtual station input B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 238
Access outputs via dialling B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  239
Output contacts for system features B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 241
PA announcement with closed attendant
- - - D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 242
contact
Speech control
Conversations in Duplex mode B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  249
Conversations in Full Duplex mode B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  249

OpenDuplex® B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 250
Conversations in Simplex B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  252
Simplex by pressing the button “T” B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 252
Simplex by touching the button “T” B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  252
Volume adjustable separately for func-
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  253
tions
Online volume setting B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  254
Idle audio/microphone volume control - - - C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 256
2-step volume control B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 256
Intelligent Volume Control (IVC) - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B B - - - 258
Improved Duplex-switching B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 260
Handset, headset and internal loudspeaker B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 261
Enhanced handset functionality - - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 261
Voice activity detection - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 262
Call diversion, call transfer
Permanent executive/secretary transfer
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A A  263
chain
Executive/secretary transfer chain C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C  264
Variable executive/secretary transfer chain B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  265
Follow Me C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 265
Manual call transfer activated (calling
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 266
station)
Manual call transfer activated (called
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 266
station)
Automatic call transfer in case of busy
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C  266
(called station)
Automatic call transfer in case of privacy
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C -  266
(called station)

10 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Intercom Server and subscriber functions

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x

SYM-BRIDGE
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x

See page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Feature with additional interface

Application-specific interface - - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 268

Answer back via loudspeaker B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 268
Call indication with flashlight or horn B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 268
Group call, All call
All Call initiator configurable per
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 269
subscriber
All Call receiver 1) B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 270
Automatic All Call answer 2) B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 270
Selective cancelling (during All Call) B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 270
Group call initiator B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 271
Group call receiver (max. 10 groups) 1) B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 271
Group call receiver (max. 90 groups) 1) B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 271
Automatic group call answer B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 271
Selective cancelling (during group call) B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 272
Multiple group calls simultaneously B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 272
Naming of group calls B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 3) - 272
Individual tones for group calls B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 272
Group calls with “push to talk” (PTT) - - - - - - C C C C C C C C C C - - - 273
No group calls during conversations B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 273
Feedback protection for All Call and group
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 164
call
PA synchronisation - - C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 274
Group call with feedback protection - - C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 275
Recording of group calls before broadcast - - C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 276
Extended group call mode (6 storable
- - C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 276
group calls)
Extended group call mode (6 pre-recorded
- - C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 276
group calls)
Group call with pre-recorded audio - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 276
1)
For SIP-C subscribers, the function “auto answer” must be activated
2) Only as initiator available
3)
There is no display indication for SIP-C subscribers

3.1/0923 11
Intercom Server and subscriber functions Intercom Server Configuration

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x

SYM-BRIDGE
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

See page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Conference

Initiate a Simplex conference during a

C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 278
conversation
Initiate an OpenDuplex® conference - - - - - - - - D D D D D D D D D D - 278
during a conversation
Participant Simplex conference B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 279
Participant OpenDuplex® conference C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 279
Initiate conference with pre-configured
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 279
participants (Simplex conference)
Initiate conference with pre-configured
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 279
participants (OpenDuplex® conference)
Extension of an existing conference
- - - - - - - - D D D D D D D D D D - 280
(OpenDuplex® conference)
Party line - C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 281
Attendant contact for pre-configured
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 283
conferences
No busy tone at while talking into pre-
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 284
configured conferences
Manual switch to active pre-configured
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 284
conferences
Display text for pre-configured
- - C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 284
conferences
Pre-recorded audio for pre-configured
- - C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 285
conferences
Priority levels for pre-configured Simplex
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 285
conferences
Switch-off time for pre-configured
- - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 286
conferences
Music, radio conference
Feed-in audio signals (radio, music,
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 287
waiting information, alarm)
Feed-in of music D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 289
Radio conference feed-in, “PTT” button D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 289
Reception of music B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 290
Attendant contact for reception of music B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 290
Music step function with one button B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 291
Participant radio conference (listen only) C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 292
Participant radio conference (listen only,
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 292
fix connection to a channel)
Participant radio conference (listen and
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 293
speak)
Attendant contact for participant radio
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 293
conference
Call relay for radio B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 294
Save reception status B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 294

12 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Intercom Server and subscriber functions

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x

SYM-BRIDGE
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

See page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Music, radio conference

Indication of the selected radio channel in

B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 295
the display
Audio mixing D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 296

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x

SYM-BRIDGE
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

See page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Public address (PA)

Start of PA group calls - - - C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 299

Receiving of PA announcements - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 298
PA coupling - - - D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 300
Playback in idle state (idle audio) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C C - - - 301
Offline mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C C - - - 302
Series AF amplifiers – Operation without
- - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 304
external power supply
Series AF amplifiers – Speaker line
- - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 304
monitoring
Suppress line monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - B B B - - - 304
Series AF amplifiers – Local announce-
- - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B - - - 305
ment
Series AF amplifiers – Offline mode - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B - - - 306
Alarm functions
Silent alarm – Initiation D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 308
Silent alarm – Alarm receivers (max. 10
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 308
groups)
Indication in the display of the initiator,
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 309
how many subscribers are listening
Cancel alarm with code C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 309
Talk to the initiator C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 310
Max. 8 alarms at the same time D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 310
Automatic change of priorities and alarm
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 311
groups if not taken over
Manual change of priorities and alarm
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 311
groups if not taken over
9 reception priorities with 3 different
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 312
reception options
Alarm receivers with alphanumeric display
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 313
(max. 10 groups)
Release keypad despite alarm B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 314
Audio alarm transmission with
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 315
alphanumeric display (max. 1 group)
Reception of chime signal B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 315

3.1/0923 13
Intercom Server and subscriber functions Intercom Server Configuration

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x

SYM-BRIDGE
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

See page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Door functions 1)

Door station with one door opener B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - -  316

Door opener with buttons “0–9” B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - -  316
Door station with several door openers B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - -  317
Door opener time configurable per door
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - -  317
station
Automatic cancelling the conversation
after door opening with a configurable B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  317
time delay
Door opener relay with Flip-Flop function C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 317
Ringing at one station B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B - 319
Ringing at group 0 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  319
Ringing at group 1-89 C C C C C C C C C C C C C B B B B B  319
Tone selection for ringing at a group - - C C C C C C C C C C C B B B B B  320
Forwarding of group ringing C C C C C C C C C C C C C B B B B B  320
Waiting information at the door station
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A2) B  321
during ringing
Automatic door opening with time delay B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  321
Allocation of door opening entitlement B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 322
Access control – 1- to 4-digit codes (can be
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 323
combined)
Access control – Several codes per door
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 323
station
Access control – Same code at several
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 323
door stations (key system)
Access control – Number of reattempts C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 323
Access control – Security call to a control
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 324
station in case of misuse
Access control – Blocking of the keyboard
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 324
in case of misuse
Access control – Control of several door
openers with different codes at one door C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 324
station
Listening to the door station while
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  325
opening
1) Consider required input and output cards
2) Feature level B required for playback of music

14 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Intercom Server and subscriber functions

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x

SYM-BRIDGE
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

See page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Control desk functions 1)

Control desk D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 2) D 2) - 332

Different display indication of call requests
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 333
(call, emergency call)
Acoustic and visual indication of call
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 333
requests
Call request to a control desk B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 335
Third button configurable for call requests - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 335
Disable after dialling B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 335
Disable reissuing of call requests B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 336
Output contacts for call requests
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 336
(call, emergency call)
Waiting information (audio signal) after
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 336
initiating a call request
Call park function D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 337
Cancel emergency calls on site B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 337
Trigger call requests only via ICX
- - - - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B - 337
commands
De-bounce for releasing call - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 333
Call request with confirmation - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 333
Indication of input messages to a control
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 339
desk
Acoustic and visual indication of input
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 341
messages
Output contacts for input messages D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 342
Acknowledge input messages with
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 343
conversation
Line fault monitoring for a control desk D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - -  344
Line fault monitoring for an Intercom
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  344
station
Time delay of line monitoring B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B  344
Automatic acknowledgement of line faults - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B - 344
Expansion Bus error - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B - - - 346
Expansion Bus restart - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B - - - 346
Reactivation of control desk calls B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 348
Reactivation of control desk calls per call
- - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 348
type
Cancelling control desk calls after time B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 349
Cancelling control desk calls after time per
- - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 349
call type
Pre-recorded audio for automatically
- - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 349
ending call
Pre-recorded audio for call suppression of
- - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 349
call requests

3.1/0923 15
Intercom Server and subscriber functions Intercom Server Configuration

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x

SYM-BRIDGE
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

See page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Control desk functions 1)

Manual call transfer - Call transfer to

D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 350
another control desk
Manual call transfer - Call transfer direct
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 351
dialling
Manual call transfer - Deactivate call
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 352
creation
Manual call transfer - Deactivate buzzer D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 352
Manual call transfer - Deactivate call
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 352
indication
Manual call transfer - Transform normal
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 352
call to an emergency call
Manual call transfer - Parallel indication at
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 352
another control desk
Manual call transfer - Taking of calls D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 352
Manual call transfer - Parallel indication at
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 352
a station
Manual call transfer - Selective deletion D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 353
Output contact for manual call transfer D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 353
Call transfer after time - Call transfer D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 354
Call transfer after time - Call transfer direct
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 354
dialling
Call transfer after time - Deactivate call
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 354
creation
Call transfer after time - Deactivate buzzer D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 354
Call transfer after time - Transform normal
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 354
call to emergency call
Day/night transfer D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 355
Output contact for night transfer D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 355
Secretary transfer at day/night transfer D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 356
Call distribution of control desks - - - D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 357
Timeout for call distribution of control
- - - - - - - D D D D D D D D D D D - 357
desk calls
Storing of control desk transfers D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 358
Call transfer cancelling during active call
- - - - D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 358
request
Call type texts for display indication D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 360
Change call types of call requests - - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 360
Conversations as call request D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 361
1) Consider required input and output cards
2)
Only display indication available

16 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Intercom Server and subscriber functions

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x

SYM-BRIDGE
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

See page
SIP-C
SIP-T
DSP functions

Lock AEC B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 362

AEC gain B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 362
Dynamic noise cancellation - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 362
Recording via handset - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 363
Disable loudspeaker equalisation B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 363
Loudspeaker/microphone surveillance B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 364
Audio monitoring B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 366
Audio monitoring – Adjusting of audio
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 367
monitoring at the station
Audio monitoring – Audio monitoring
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - - 370
with audio recording
ICX message with sound pressure level
- - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 370
change
Keypad tones B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 371
Special tones B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 371
Tone generator B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B - 372
Tones for calls to control desks B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 374
Microphone frequency response B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 375
Start beep B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 375
Microphone gain/Line-in gain B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 375
Line-in gain - - - - - - - - - - - - B B B B - - - 376
External loudspeaker gain - - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B - - - 376
Sidetone for handsets and headsets - - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 376
Video
Allocation of a camera to an Intercom
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 379
station
Allocation of observation monitors to a
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 379
station
Allocation of camera texts B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 380
Connection of cameras to certain
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 381
monitors
Connection to observation and main
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 381
monitors
Manual scanning control D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 381
Camera connection during call requests D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 382
Allocation of preview monitors to a
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 382
control desk
Allocation of a main monitor to a control
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 382
desk
Camera connection during input
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 382
messages
Configurable scan time B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 383

3.1/0923 17
Intercom Server and subscriber functions Intercom Server Configuration

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x

SYM-BRIDGE
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

See page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Video

Camera addressing for IP video - - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 386

Configurable ports for the WS camera - - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 386
External cameras with Commend audio - - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 386
Video terminal with additional video inter-
- - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 386
face
Live video menu for stations with
- - - - - - - D D D D D D D D D - - - 387
configured monitor
Camera control during conversation D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 387
Bonding of monitors - - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 388
Speech recording
Speech recording D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 390
Speech recording of subscribers D D D D D D B B B B B B B B B B B B - 391
Parallel switching of recorders D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 391
Speech recording of OpenDuplex®
- - - - - - - - D D D D D D D D - - - 392
conferences
RTP mode - - - - D D D D D D D D D D D D - - - 394
RFC 3550-compliant RTP timestamp - - - - - - - - - - - - - D D D - - - 396
VOX control for RTP speech recording - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B B - - - 396
Pre-recorded audio

Pre-recorded audio1) B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  398

Predefined voice files for system functions B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B  411
Recording pre-recorded audio files with
- - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 413
Intercom station
1) The replay of pre-recorded messages via ICX messages of task 60/80 type 9A is not supported for SIP-C, SIP-T
and SYM-BRIDGE.
Time, date
Display of time and date at stations - B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 415
Display only time at station - - - - B B B B B B B B B B B B - - - 415
Time zones and date formats for
- - - - - - - - B B B B B B B B - - - 417
individual subscribers

18 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Intercom Server and subscriber functions

Intercom Server functions

In the following table, all available Intercom Server functions are listed with the required Intercom
Server firmware version or upgrade licence:

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
SYM-BRIDGE
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

See page
General Intercom functions

VirtuoSIS console with manpage - - - - - - - - - - -      - 112

Calling numbers                  156
Calling numbers up to 8-digits -                 156
Changing the function codes                  157
Sevenfold security against interception                 - 162
Acoustic and visual call indication                  163
Indication of system faults on outputs                 - 166
Extended subscribers - - - -             - 195
Extended subscribers – “Dummy Port” - - - - - -           - 196
Power management - - - - -            - 198
Input, output
Input generates ICX message                 - 235
De-bounce time for inputs                 - 237
Blinking output contacts                 - 241
Fully functional station outputs - - -              - 244
Hierarchy levels for fully functional station
- - - -             - 244
outputs
Parallel outputs                 - 244
Delayed switching of outputs                 - 245
Output generates ICX message                 - 245
Linking inputs to outputs                 - 246
Restore output states at warmstart                 - 246
ICX message for output state                 - 247
Hierarchy levels for outputs                 - 247
Virtual input/output cards                 - 247
Extended clients -                - 248
Conference
Switch-off time for pre-configured
- -               - 286
conferences
Control desk functions
Symphony Control Desk Service - - - - - - - - - - - - - -   - 327
Symphony Control Desk Service: Parking a
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  - 330
call
Symphony Control Desk Service: Putting a
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  - 330
call on-hold
Symphony Control Desk: Call request to
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  - 330
classic control desk

3.1/0923 19
Intercom Server and subscriber functions Intercom Server Configuration

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
SYM-BRIDGE
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

See page
Control desk functions

Buzzer                 - 332
Red lamp at buzzer                 - 333
Call indication                 - 333
Line fault monitoring for an input                 - 345

Video
Video switchers (internal)                 - 380
Video switchers (external)                 - 384
SIP-Video - - - - - - - - - - -       493
Decentralised video system                 - 378
Deleting of monitors at the start of the
                - 388
Intercom Server
Pre-recorded audio
Pre-recorded audio management                  399
Time, date
Time synchronisation -                - 415
Automatic DST adjustment - - - -             - 416
ICX messages with time-controlled
-                - 418
execution
Intercom network functions
Block configuration                 - 419
Network monitoring                 - 427
Network functions
IPv6 support - - - - - - - - - - - -     - 114
Additional network interfaces - - - - - - - - - -       - 115
Address Conflict Detection according to
- - - - - - - -         - 434
RFC 5227
Syslog - - - - - - - - - -       - 434
SNMP - - - - -            - 435
SNMP monitoring and traps for LAN and
- - - - -            - 438
WAN network connections
SIP bindport configuration - - - - - - - - - - -      - 464
Peer-to-peer audio (P2P)
Peer-to-peer audio (P2P) - - -              - 441
P2PMP
Point-to-Multipoint (P2MP) - - - - -            - 445
Logic module
Logic module - - - - - -           - 446
EventLOG
Save ICX messages in the Intercom Server - - - - - - - -         - 461

20 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Intercom Server and subscriber functions

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
SYM-BRIDGE
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x

See page
SIP-T, trunks

Assigning a trunk to an instance - - - - -            - 469

Trunk Name - - - - -            - 469
Use line parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - -    - 470
P-Asserted-Identity - - - - - - - - - - -      - 470
Remote-Party-ID - - - - - - - - - - - - -    - 470
Dialling timeout - - - - -            - 471
Dial 0 at incoming call - - - - -            - 472
After-dial from telephone - - - - -            - 472
DTMF after-dial mode - - - - -            - 472
Password incoming, outgoing - - - - -            - 471
Caller ID IS-block - - - - -            - 472
Waiting time (password) - - - - -            - 471
Hang up after - - - - -            - 471
Max. time simplex - - - - -            - 471
Dial prefix - - - - -            - 471
Telekom Deutschland GmbH CompanyFlex - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  - 474
SIP-T, channels
Remote party ID - - - - - - - - - - - - -    - 470
Pre-dialling - - - - -            - 472
After-dial from telephone - - - - -            - 472
Code numbers - - - - -            - 472
Channel > Trunk assignment - - - - -            - 473
Action sequence 1-4 - - - - - - - - - -       - 473
Reservation incoming extension - - - - -            - 473
Password incoming, outgoing - - - - -            - 477
Waiting time (password) - - - - -            - 477
Hang up after - - - - -            - 477
Max. time simplex - - - - -            - 477
Dial prefix - - - - -            - 477
Pre-dialling - - - - -            - 477
Dial 0 at incoming call - - - - -            - 477
DTMF after-dial mode - - - - -            - 478
Dialling timeout - - - - -            - 477
Caller-ID IS-block - - - - -            - 478
SIP video - - - - - - - - - - -       493
SIP-C
Remote-Party-ID - - - - - - - - - - - - -    - 487
SIP account activated - - - - - - - - - - -      - 487
Authentication ID - - - - - - - - - - -      - 488
Incoming call behaviour - - - - - - - - - - - - -    - 489

3.1/0923 21
22
SIP video
Action sequence 1-4
SIP-C
Intercom Server and subscriber functions

-
-

PRO 800 1.0

-
-

PRO 800 1.1

-
-

PRO 800 1.2

-
-

PRO 800 1.3

-
-

PRO 800 2.x

-
-

PRO 800 3.x

-
-

PRO 800 4.x

-
-

PRO 800 5.x

-
-

PRO 800 6.x

-
-

VirtuoSIS 7.x
-

VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
     

VirtuoSIS 13.x
-
     

SYM-BRIDGE

See page
493
489
Intercom Server Configuration

3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Intercom Server and subscriber functions

IT security
Commend is focused on IT security. Not least for this reason, the Intercom Server provides functions,
which enable maximum secure communication with other devices. For further information, see “IT
security” on page 516.
IT security See page
Password management 516
Ports 517
Certificates 517

3.1/0923 23
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

Configuration software CCT 800

The Central Configuration Tool (CCT 800) is a PC program, with which all features of the Intercom
Server software min. Pro 05.0 can be configured.

NOTE: Configuration sequence in CCT 800

Further information about the configuration sequence can be found on page 72.

Overview
The following chapters describe the installation, program interface and basic functions of the configu-
ration software CCT 800:
 Installation of CCT 800 – see page 25
 Program interface – see page 29
 User account management – see page 33
 Function keys – see page 44
 Tool tips – see page 44
 Arranging windows – see page 45
 CCT 800 basic settings – see page 45
 Station test – see page 46
 Rollback – see page 47
 Copying and pasting column by column – see page 48
 Checking for collisions – see page 51
 Protect configuration with password – see page 53
 Reset individual subscribers – see page 56
 Reset of the entire configuration – see page 56
 Moving of subscribers – see page 57
 Extended copy – see page 58
 Printing the Intercom Server configuration – see page 65

24 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

Installation of CCT 800

Installation on a PC
The “Intercom Server Software Package” is required for installation. This package can be downloaded
from the cLibrary at clibrary-online.commend.com.

GOOD TO KNOW: Correct display of character sets

CCT 800 displays the character sets of the respective system locale configured in Windows. To ensure
proper display of Cyrillic or Hebrew character sets in CCT 800, the respective system locale must be selected
in the computer's operating system.
To change the system locale in Windows:
 Open the control panel,
 click on Region 1),
 click on the tab Administrative,
 click on Change system locale and select the desired region.
 Click on OK to save the change.
 Restart your computer.
1) To access the Region settings in the Windows Control Panel, select either ”Large icons” or ”Small

icons” under the ”View by” option.

System requirements
RAM 1 GB
Processor (x86-64 comp.) min. 2 GHz
Hard disk space 500 MB
.NET Framework 4.7.2
Windows 10 (64 Bit)
Windows 11 (64 Bit)
Operating system Windows Server 2016 (64 Bit)
Windows Server 2019 (64 Bit)
Windows Server 2022 (64 Bit)

 Keyboard and mouse

 Screen with resolution of min. 1280 x 1024 pixels
 Network interface or serial interface

NOTE: Internet access required

As of version 11.1, the installer for CCT 800 requires internet access to download and install
additional software libraries.

Installer dialogue
After launching the installation package and verifying the software requirements, the installer dialogue
shows a list of program components that are already installed, updateable, or not yet installed. If this
is an existing installation, the version numbers of already installed components are indicated by a blue
info symbol on the right, while the version numbers of the components that are included in the
installation package are displayed below their names on the left. Version numbers follow a
<major>.<minor>.<build> structure, such as 11.1.1000.

3.1/0923 25
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

The installation package includes the following components:

 Central Configuration Tool CCT 800
 IPStationConfig
 ComLOG
 VirtuoBRO
 Npcap packet capture and analysis tool
Installation process

The list of software components is displayed when the installation package is launched. Each compo-
nent can be selected or deselected individually for installation. Selecting CCT 800 or IPStationConfig
for an initial installation automatically includes Npcap if it is not already installed. If CCT 800 or IPSta-
tionConfig are subsequently deselected, Npcap remains selected but it can still be deselected separate-
ly.
When updating to a newer version from an existing installation, an “Update” checkbox, or in the case
of Npcap, a “Download and update” checkbox is displayed next to the green “Installed” checkmark
symbol indicating that an update for the component is available. After selecting the desired
components, proceed with the installation.

GOOD TO KNOW:
The installer is designed to quickly and easily install all required components. To uninstall, use the
standard Windows uninstall process. The installer package only updates or installs software compo-
nents within the same release. For example, you can update version 13.0 to a higher build number,
but it's not possible to update from version 13.0 directly to 13.1 using the same installer package. Each
major version has a separate installer package, allowing technicians to have multiple versions of the
software components on their computer for different scenarios.

26 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

If the installation was successful, a message indicating that all operations were successful (left) is
shown. If a component could not be installed, a message indicating that the setup has failed is shown
(right). It is recommended that you save the log files in case you need to contact Commend Technical
Support but the following measures usually remedy any installation problems:
 Restart your computer and repeat the installation process.
 Check your Internet connection.
 Check that Windows is up-to-date and install any necessary updates.

After a successful installation the installer indicates that all components are installed and up-to-date. A
restart may be required.

3.1/0923 27
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

GOOD TO KNOW: WinPcap (valid for CCT 800 versions before 11.1) or Npcap
The requirements for the use of the WinPcap or Npcap program libraries are as follows:
The requirements for the use of the WinPcap or Npcap program libraries are as follows:
 CCT 800 to version 8.1: WinPcap (min. 4.x.x)
 CCT 800 from version 9.0: WinPcap (min. 4.x.x) or Npcap (min. 0.995)
 CCT 800 from version 11.0: WinPcap (min. 4.1.3) or Npcap (min. 1.5). Npcap is recommended and can
be downloaded during the installation process.
For CCT 800 to work correctly, make sure that only one of the two program libraries is installed on
the computer. This can easily be checked using the “Apps & features” application of the operating
system.

NOTE: WinPcap API-compatible Mode

When installing Npcap, the option Install WinPcap API-compatible Mode is selected by default.

Installation dialogue from Npcap

Licence information
To view details about the licence information of the open source components used, you can choose
from the following options:
 In the menu bar, click on ? > Licence Information
 Click on Licence Information in the Startup dialogue.

Licence information

28 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

Program interface
 Double-click on the CCT 800 icon . The following menu bar and toolbar appears:

Overview menu bar

Menu bar
File
Menu Description
Create a new configuration. The area “Cards“ is opened after selection of the
New
Intercom Server type and the server ID.
Open Open an existing CCT 800 file. 1) 2)
Close Close the currently opened CCT 800 file.
Save Save the current CCT 800 configuration.
Save as Save the current CCT 800 configuration with a new file name.
Import Open TE 700 files.
Export Export the configuration (see page 66).
Print Print the configuration (see page 65).
Quit Close the program CCT 800.
1) When opening a file saved in an older version of CCT 800, the file will be automatically converted to the new
format! The new version of the file can no be opened with the older version of CCT 800.
2) When opening a *.cctx file, several checks are performed to ensure configuration data validity. The error mes-

sage may be displayed:

The master data of VirtuoSIS with the serial number <serial number> is not valid:
 If available, restore a valid and recent backup using VirtuoBRO.
 If no valid and recent backup is available, reset the system or deploy a new virtual machine.
In particular, this can be caused by a misconfiguration of the networking between the instances when the data
was received. These checks are performed when sending, receiving and opening a CCTX file.

Intercom Server
Menu Description
Opens the dialogue to receive the CCT 800 configuration of the connected
Receive
Intercom Server (see page 80).
Opens the dialogue to send the current CCT 800 configuration to the connected
Send
Intercom Server (see page 82).
Opens the dialogue to change/set a password for configuration of the Intercom
Change Password
Server (see page 53).
Opens the dialogue to reset the configuration and optionally the Server ID of the
Initialise
Intercom Server (see page 56).
Selective Restart Opens the dialogue to restart the connected Intercom Server (see page 86).
Opens the dialogue to update the software of Intercom Servers, cards and
Firmware Download
stations (see page 91).
Allocate SIS instances Opens the dialogue for the allocation of the VirtuoSIS instances (see page 130).
Opens the dialogue for the selection of the VirtuoSIS key subscribers (see
Determine SIS key subscriber
page 125).
Licence administration Opens the dialogue for the licence administration (see page 96).
Connection Settings Opens the dialogue for the configuration of the connection (see page 74).

3.1/0923 29
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

Intercom Server
Menu Description
Save current connection in Save the entered host IP with the appropriate port number from the drop-down
connection list list.
Save current connection in
current CCT 800 file Save the selected connection to the CCT 800 file 1)

Opens the connection to the Intercom Server that is saved in the CCT 800 file
Activate connection (with CCT 800 6.1 or higher). If no connection is saved in the selected CCT 800 file,
this button is deactivated.
Close IP tunnel Closes the currently opened IP tunnel.
Connect to WAN-regions Establish a connection to a WAN region. 2)
Checking for collisions Opens the dialogue for checking of collisions (see page 51).
Disconnect from WAN-region Disconnect the connection from a WAN region. 2)
Initialise Handset Opens a dialogue for initialising a handset at selective subscribers.
Initialise control desk Opens a dialogue for initialising (deleting) the configuration of control desks.
Reset volume Reset volume of all stations to configured levels.
Lower volume Temporarily reduce volume of all stations. 3)
Pre-recorded audio Opens the dialogue for the allocation of pre-recorded audio (see page 398).
Surface Sensing Calibration of the front panels of cell terminals. 4)
Station test Checks the connection to an Intercom terminal (see page 46).
1) To save the connection, the CCT 800 file also has to be saved. To use the saved connection after start-up, it
must be available in CCT 800.
2) For further information, see the product manual “L8-L3-WAN”.
3) After a warm or cold start, all stations will be reset to default volume.
4) For further information, see the product manual “EB330-EF031”.

Options
Select the desired language of the user interface. The following user languages
are available:
 English
 German
Languages  French
 Italian
 Spanish
 Russian
 Chinese (simplified)
Settings Configuration of certain configurations for the program CCT 800 (see page 45).
Reset all column widths and
All column widths and row heights are reset to the default values for the current
row heights of the current
dialogue.
dialogue
Set row height to optimum of Set all row heights to the optimal value for the current dialogue. The value is not
the current dialogue saved when leaving the dialogue.
Repair S0 blocks The functionality of all S0 connections can be checked.
User
Account management Opens the account management dialogue (see page 33).
Logon Logon to a project with a user name and a password (see page 34).
Logoff Logoff from the active project (see page 35).

30 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

View
Symbol line The symbol line can either be activated or deactivated.
Status line The status line can either be activated or deactivated.
Window
- Shows all open windows, if more than one is open.
Help
Help Opens the CCT 800 online help. 1)
Licence Information Shows the licence information of the open source components.
Info Shows the CCT 800 program version.
1)
The online help can only be started if CHM files are activated. For further information, contact your system
administrator.

Toolbar
The toolbar in the header allows you to make all the desired settings by simply clicking on a button or
directly entering the IP address of an Intercom Server to connect to:
Button Description

Creates a new CCT 800 configuration file.

Opens an existing CCT 800 configuration file.

Saves the existing CCT 800 configuration file.

Cuts the selection and save it in the clipboard.

Copies the selection and save it in the clipboard.

Inserts the saved content of the clipboard.

Prints the active Intercom Server configuration (see page 65).

Opens the information dialogue of the program CCT 800 (version, name of the user or
copyright).
Opens the help dialogue of the active dialogue. The help dialogue can also be opened
via the F1 key of the keyboard.

Opens the dialogue for checking for collisions (see page 51).

Resets all column widths and row heights of the current dialogue.

Sets the row height of the active dialogue to the optimal value until it is exited.

Resets the volume for all subscribers.

Reduces the volume of for subscribers. 1)

Connects to a WAN region.

Disconnects from a WAN region.

3.1/0923 31
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

Button Description
Connects directly to a server
 using previously saved connection settings
 or via a hostname (both IPv4 and IPv6)
 or via a host IP address in IPv4 or IPv6 format. IPv6 addresses must be enclosed
in square brackets, e.g. [fd42:5fdc:3701:fec1::300:1]
If no port number is entered, CCT 800 automatically connects to the standard port
(17000). When specifying a different port number, use a colon to separate it from the
IPv4 or IPv6 address or hostname. For example, [fd42:5fdc:3701:fec1::300:1]:18000.
Opens the configuration dialogue (see page 74).

Saves the entered host IP with the appropriate port number from the drop-down list.

Saves the selected connection to the CCT 800 file. 2)

Opens the connection to the Intercom Server that is saved in the CCT 800 file (with
CCT 800 6.1 or higher). If no connection is saved in the selected CCT 800 file, this but-
ton is deactivated.
Indicates the currently opened IP tunnel, via which CCT 800 is connected with the
respective Intercom Server, the server ID and description of the Intercom Server (with
CCT 800 6.1 or higher). Click on this button to close the IP tunnel.
1)
After a warm or cold start, all stations will be reset to default volume.
2)
In order to save the connection, the CCT 800 file also has to be saved. To use the saved connection after start-
up, it must be available in CCT 800.

32 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

User account management

Setup guide
On the following pages, you will find a detailed step-by-step instruction to set up the user account
management via CCT800. The following illustration provides an overview of the required configuration
steps:

Execute program CCT 800

Login to a project via:

CCT 800 user account

Domain user account

Pre-configured CCT 800

user account

Open User account management

Create CCT 800 Import domain

user account user account

Edit user account information

Configure Section: Roles

Create a role

Allocate permissions

Configure Section: Groups Configure User Roles

Create a group Allocate a role to a user ac-

count
Allocate roles to the group

Configure User Groups

Create/Open project
Allocate a group to a user ac-
count

Setup guide

3.1/0923 33
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

Login to a project
The login to a project is performed using an existing and enabled user account. If no user account has
been created or imported yet (domain user account), the login will be performed with a pre-configured
CCT 800 user account. The following user accounts are available for the login:
1
CCT 800 user account (see below)
2
Domain user account (see page 35)
3
Pre-configured CCT 800 user account (see page 35)
Depending on the activated permissions of the respective user account, certain functions in the menu
bar, toolbar and the project tree are enabled after a successful login. Further information about
permissions can be found on page 36.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Menu User > Logon
 All active CCT 800 files will be closed when logging into CCT 800.
 If there are unsaved changes in an active CCT 800 file for a project, a dialogue will appear asking the
user whether to save the changes, reject them, or cancel the process. If all CCT 800 files are closed,
the following dialogue appears:

Login to a project
 Username: In this field, the username of the respective user account can be entered (case-sensitive).
 Password: In this field, the password of the user account can be entered (case-sensitive).

NOTE: Password safety

Details on the characters allowed when assigning passwords see page 516.

 Use single sign-on: Activate this checkbox to log in with the domain of the user currently logged in
to the PC. The field Username will be completed automatically with the domain name, the field Pass-
word will be disabled, and the user will be logged in automatically with the password of the domain
user account. The respective domain user account must be enabled in the account management (see
page 37).
 Auto logon: Activate this checkbox to log in automatically within five seconds with the current user-
name and password.
 Click on the button OK to log in.

GOOD TO KNOW: Indication of the currently logged-in user

With CCT 800 6.1 or higher, the currently logged-in user will be indicated at User > Logoff. See the
following screenshot:

34 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

1 CCT 800 user account

 In the field Username, enter the username of the user account.
 In the field Password, enter the password of the respective user account.
 Click on the button OK to log in with the respective user.

2
Domain user account
In order to import a domain user account, see page 42. Carry out the following configuration to log in
with a domain user account:
 Activate the checkbox Use current domainuser to log in with the current logged in domain user ac-
count of the PC. The field Username will be completed automatically with the domain name, the field
Password will be disabled and the user will be logged in automatically with the password of the do-
main user account.
 Click on the button OK to log in with the respective user.

3
Pre-configured CCT 800 user account
The pre-configured user accounts are pre-installed and enable an extended operation of the program
CCT 800 after the login. Two pre-configured user accounts with different features are available:
Master
The user account “Master” configures exclusively the user account management:
 Username: master (case-sensitive)
 Password: (non-existent)

NOTE:
 It is recommend to set a password (see page 36).
 The user account “Master” cannot be deleted.
 The name of the user account “Master” cannot be changed.

 Click on the button OK to log in with the respective user account.

DefaultUser
The user account DefaultUser enables an unrestricted operation of the program CCT 800:
 Username: DefaultUser (case-sensitive)
 Password: (non-existent)

NOTE:
 It is recommend to set a password (see page 36).
 The user account “DefaultUser” cannot be deleted.

 Click on the button OK to log in with the respective user account.

Logoff from a project

Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Menu User > Logoff
 All active CCT 800 files will be closed at logoff from a project.
 If there is an active CCT 800 file with unsaved changes at logoff from a project, a dialogue will be
indicated with the request to save, reject the changes of the respective CCT 800 file or cancel the
process.
 The user will be logged-off as soon as all CCT 800 files are closed.

NOTE:
To change the user account, the current user must first be logged out.

3.1/0923 35
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

Account management
Account management is used to configure user accounts, groups, roles and the "ActiveDirectory" ser-
vice. Roles can be assigned to user accounts and user groups with the associated rights to use func-
tions in the menu bar, the toolbar and the project tree of CCT 800. For a configuration example, see
page 42.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Menu User > Account Management
 All active CCT 800 files will be closed when the account management is opened.
 If there is an active CCT 800 file with unsaved changes when the account management is opened, a
dialogue will be displayed prompting the user to save, reject the changes to the respective CCT 800
file or cancel the operation.
 When all CCT 800 files are closed, the following dialogue appears:

User management
The account management is divided into four different sections with the following functions:
User 1 : Configuration of user accounts and allocation of the configured roles and groups to user
accounts (see page 36).
Groups 2 : Configuration of the groups (see page 40).
Roles 3 : Configuration of the roles and permissions (see page 40).
ActiveDirectory 4 : Synchronisation of the CCT 800 “ActiveDirectory” service and import of the domain
user accounts (see page 42).

Section: User
In the section “User”, the configured roles and groups can be allocated to the user accounts.

36 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

General
Creates, deletes and edits the settings of the user accounts.

User account

1
Create CCT 800 user account
 Click on the button Add to create a new CCT 800 user account.
 Click on the button OK to save the settings.

1
Delete CCT 800 user account
 Select the respective CCT 800 user account in the list.
 Click on the button Remove to delete the selected user account.

NOTE:
The pre-configured user account “Master” cannot be deleted.

 Click on the button OK to save the settings.

2
Edit user account information
 Name: In this field, the name of the user account can be changed (case-sensitive).

NOTE:
The name of the user account “Master” cannot be changed.

 Enabled: Activate this checkbox to enable the respective user account. A login with this user account
is only possible if it is enabled.
 Password: In this field, a password for the user account can be entered for the login (case-sensitive).

NOTE: Password safety

Details on the characters allowed when assigning passwords see page 516.

NOTE:
The field Password is disabled if a domain user account is selected. Further information about
domain user accounts can be found on page 42.

 Retype password: Confirm the password that was entered in the field Password.

NOTE:
The field Retype password is disabled if a domain user account is selected. Further information
about domain user accounts can be found on page 42.

 Description: In this field, a description of the user account can be entered.

 Click on the button OK to save the settings.

3.1/0923 37
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

User Groups
Allocation of the configured groups to the respective user accounts. User accounts with allocated
groups (user group) have all configured permissions of the roles included in this group. It is possible
to allocate several groups to each user account. Further information about the configuration of groups
can be found on page 40.

User Groups

Allocate a group to a user account

 Activate the checkbox of the desired group to allocate it to the respective user account.

NOTE:
 The name of the group will be shown in the row and the name of the user account will be shown
in the column.
 If one or more roles will be allocated to a user account via a user group, it is not possible to change
the allocation of the respective roles for this user account via the Section: User.

 Click on the button OK to save the settings.

User Roles
Allocation of the configured roles to the respective user accounts. User accounts with allocated roles
(user role) have all the configured permissions of this role. It is possible to allocate several roles to each
user account. Further information about the configuration of roles can be found on page 40.

User Roles

38 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

Allocate a role to a user account

 Activate the checkbox of the desired role to allocate it to the respective user account.

NOTE:
 The name of the role will be shown in the row and the name of the user account will be shown in
the column.
 If one or more roles are to be allocated to a user account via a user group, it is not possible to
change the allocation of the respective roles for this user account via the Section: User.

 Click on the button OK to save the settings.

3.1/0923 39
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

Section: Groups
In the section “Groups”, the configured roles can be allocated to the groups. A group has all
permissions of the gathered roles. In this way, only one group has to be allocated to a user account
instead of several roles. It is possible to allocate several roles to a group. Further information about
configuring a role can be found on page 40.

Section: Groups
 Name: In this field, the name of the group can be changed.
 Description: In this field, a description of the group can be entered.
 Role: In this field, the name of the available roles is shown.
 Click on the button OK to save the settings.

1
Create a group
 Click on the button Add to create a new group.
 Click on the button OK to save the settings.

1
Delete a group
 Select the respective group in the list.
 Click on the button Remove to delete the selected group.
 Click on the button OK to save the settings.

2
Allocate roles to the group
 Select the respective group in the list.
 Activate the checkbox of the desired role to allocate it to the selected group.
 Click on the button OK to save the settings.

Section: Roles
In the section “Roles”, permissions can be allocated to the roles. The permissions enable the use of
functions in the menu bar, toolbar and the project tree of CCT 800. It is possible to allocate several
permissions to a role.

40 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

Section: Roles
 Name: In this field, the name of the group can be changed.
 Description: In this field, a description of the group can be entered.
 Permission: In this field, the name of the permission is shown.
 Click on the button OK to save the settings.

1
Create a role
 Click on the button Add to create a new role.
 Click on the button OK to save the settings.

1
Delete a role
 Select the respective role in the list.
 Click on the button Remove to delete the selected role.
 Click on the button OK to save the settings.

2
Allocate permissions
 Select the respective role in the list.
 Activate the checkbox of the desired permission to enable it for the selected role.

NOTE:
In order to enable or disable several permissions, select the desired permissions in the list 2 and
press the <space> key on your keyboard.

 Click on the button OK to save the settings.

2
Sort permissions

Sort permissions
 Click on the uppermost checkbox in the row A to enable the filter function B .
 B Select the desired filter mode in the drop-down list. The following filter modes are available:

3.1/0923 41
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

 Checked: Activate this checkbox to show the selected permissions of the respective role.
 Unchecked: Activate this checkbox to show the non-selected permissions of the respective role.
 Click on the uppermost checkbox A to switch between the filter modes.
 In order to disable the filter function click on the icon or switch the mode via the uppermost
checkbox A .

Section: ActiveDirectory
In the section ActiveDirectory the “ActiveDirectory” service synchronises the domain network with the
account management and imports existing domain user accounts. This domain user accounts log-in
automatically to the account management with their domain user name and password.

Section: Active Directory

 Enable ActiveDirectory: Activate this checkbox to enable the “ActiveDirectory” service. It also
displays the current used “ActiveDirectory”.
 Synchronisation interval: In this drop-down list, the synchronisation interval can be selected, with
which the “ActiveDirectory” service will be synchronised automatically (from 1 hour to 24 hours).
Select the entry “inactive” to disable the automatic synchronisation.
 Start synchronisation at: In this field, the countdown can be entered, after which the automatic
synchronisation starts (hours:minutes:seconds). According to the value that was selected in the
field Synchronisation interval, the automatic synchronisation will be performed.
 Last synchronisation: In this field, the date of the last synchronisation is shown.
 Synchronise now: Click on this button to perform the manual synchronisation.
 Name: In this field, the name of the respective domain user account or group is shown.
 Import: Activate this checkbox to import the respective domain user account or group.
 Is Imported: In this field, it is shown whether the respective domain user account or group is already
imported.
 Click on the button OK to save the settings.

Import domain user account

 Click on the button Synchronise now to perform the manual synchronisation and to update the list
of the available domain user accounts and groups.
 Activate the checkbox of the respective domain user accounts or group in the list to select them for
the import into the account management.

NOTE:
If a domain group is selected, all domain user accounts that are allocated in this domain group will
be imported into the user management.

 Click on the button OK to save the settings and to import the selected domain user accounts.
 The imported domain user accounts will be displayed in the section at User > General.
Further information about the configuration of imported domain user accounts can be found on page
37.

42 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

Example: Create and configure a new CCT 800 user account.

 Open the user account management and go to User > General.
 Click on the button Add to create a new CCT 800 user account (see page 36).
 Edit the user account details (e.g. name or password).
 Go to: Roles (see page 40).
 Click on the button Add to create a new role.
 Edit the user account details (name, description).
 The following permissions will be allocated to the created role:
 Menu: File\New
 Menu: File\Open
 Menu: File\Save
 Menu: Intercom Server\Receive
 Menu: Intercom Server\Send
 Menu: User\Account Management
 Project: Intercom Server\General Settings
 Project: Interfaces\Data Interfaces
 Project: Subscriber\General
 Project: Subscriber\Entitlements
 Go to: User > User Roles.
 Activate the checkbox of the desired role to allocate it to the respective user account (see page 36).
 Click on the button OK to save the settings.
 Depending on the allocated permissions, the following functions will be indicated in the menu bar,
toolbar and the project tree in the program CCT 800:

Example: Create and configure a new CCT 800 user account

3.1/0923 43
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

Function keys

Control in the project tree area and tabs

Up

Down

Open folder

Close folder

Jump to configuration window

Control in the project tree area and tabs

Control of tabs
+ change tab

Jump to tree

Control of tabs

Other functions

ctrl
+ S Save file Receive from Intercom Server

ctrl
+ Open file Send to Intercom Server

ctrl
+ Import Start help menu

Other functions

Tool tips
Tool tips are available for new features from PRO 800 1.3. Move the mouse cursor over the new buttons
or drop-down lists to display the feature of the button.

44 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

Arranging windows
If multiple files are opened in CCT 800 it is possible to arrange them horizontally and vertically.

Arranging windows
 1 Click and hold on the desired CCT800 file tab with the left mouse button.
 2 While holding down the mouse button pull file to the desired location. A frame at the future
position of the file appears.
 3 Release mouse button. The moved CCT800 file appears at the desired location.

CCT 800 basic settings

Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Menu Options > Settings > tab General
 The following dialogue appears:

CCT 800 basic settings

 CCT Files: In this field, a directory can be selected, where the CCT 800 files be saved.
 CCT Temp file: In this field, a directory can be selected, where the CCT 800 temporary files be saved
to.
 Auto. disconnect: Activate this checkbox to enable the automatic disconnection of the modem. The
checkbox Inquire is enabled.
 Inquire: Activate this checkbox to indicate a confirmation dialogue before auto-disconnecting.
 Timeout: In this field, the time can be entered, after which the modem be disconnected (600 seconds
by default).

3.1/0923 45
 Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

 Max Number (I/O-PopUp): In this field, the maximum number of entries shown in the I/O popups can
be changed (“40” by default).
 Show startup dialogue during application start: Activate this checkbox to display the splash screen
at the start of the program.
 Split card dialogue horizontally: Activate this checkbox to change the orientation of the card
dialogue between horizontal and vertical split (see page 88).
 Show hint dialogue if no licence is available: Activate this checkbox to show a note if a licence is not
available for the respective feature.
 Number of entries in recently opened file list: In this drop-down list, the number of recently used
CCT 800 files can be changed, which are displayed at Menu > File (by default 4).
 Menu Options > Settings > tab Communication
 Connection type: In this drop-down list, the connection type of the Intercom Server can be changed.
 Host: In this field, an IP address can alternative be entered to the own PC (localhost), via which the
ComAdapter can be used in the network.
 Test Proxy Settings: Click on this button to test the connection to the licence server.

 Proxy server support

If a licence activation is necessary, but there is no direct internet connection to a licence server, a
proxy authentication is available. There are three authentication methods for this procedure (basic,
digest, NTLM).

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to: Menu Options > Settings > tab Communication
2. Activate the checkbox Manual proxy settings
3. Enter the following information:
 IP address: Enter the IP address of the proxy server.
 Port: Enter the port via which the proxy server is accessible.
 Username: Choose a username for the authentication.
 Password: Choose a password for the authentication.
4. Click on the button Test Proxy Settings to test the connection to the licence server.

Station test
Checks the connection to a station via establishing a conversation or playback a tone at the station to
be tested.

Configuration CCT 800

To check the connection, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Station test
2. The following dialogue appears:

Station test

46 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

3. In the field Calling number own station, enter the call number of the subscriber that establish a
conversation.
4. In the field Calling number test station, enter the call number of the station to be entered.
5. Click on the button Build up conversation to establish a call to the test station.
6. Click on the button Start test tone to playback a tone at the test station.
7. In the drop-down list Level, the volume level of the tone can be selected.
8. Click on the button Cancel test tone to cancel the playback of the tone.
9. Click on the button Cancel conversation to cancel the conversation.

3.1/0923 47
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

Copying and pasting column by column

With CCT 800 6.1 or higher, entries can be copied and pasted column by column. This function allows
any configuration parameters (e.g. description, call number or IP address) to be copied from CCT 800
to e.g. Microsoft Excel, edited and then pasted back into CCT 800, making it quick and easy to configure
even large Intercom systems.

Copying columns
To copy columns, follow the instructions below:
 Click on the column description 1 to select the entire column, or select the desired column range 2 .

Copying columns
 Press the keys <Ctrl> and <C> to copy the selected entries into the clipboard.

ATTENTION: Values in drop-down lists are saved as decimal numbers

When copying fields, the displayed values and texts are saved to the clipboard, whereas for drop-
down lists, non-numeric values (“5k6”, “On”, “Duplex” etc.) are saved as decimal values (“1”, “2”
or “3” etc.)! When pasting into drop-down lists, the respective decimal numbers must be used
instead of the text that is indicated in CCT 800 (see page 49)!

Restrictions when copying

The following restrictions apply when copying entries:
 Rows cannot be copied.
 Only single columns can be copied. Some columns only allow single cells to be copied (e.g. check-
boxes).
 Only entries in fields and drop-down lists can be copied.
 Only entries of single or linked fields and drop-down lists can be copied.

48 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

If any of the above restrictions are not observed when copying entries, the copying process is aborted
and the following error message is displayed:

Error message - Copy & Paste

Pasting entries
To paste entries column by column, follow the instructions below:
 Select the field or drop-down list 1 , where you want to start pasting all items stored in the clipboard,
column by column, in descending order 2 .

Pasting entries
 Press the keys <Ctrl> and <V> to paste the saved entries.

ATTENTION: Paste decimal numbers into drop-down lists

When pasting into drop-down lists containing non-numerical values (e.g. “5k6”, “On” or “Duplex”),
you must enter decimal numbers (e.g. “1”, “2” or “3”) instead of the text that is indicated in CCT
800! You can obtain the decimal numbers by pasting the copied values into e.g. Microsoft Excel
(see page 48)!

Restrictions when pasting

The following restrictions apply when pasting entries:
 Entries cannot be pasted by rows.
 Entries can only be pasted into single columns.
 Entries can only be pasted into fields and drop-down lists.
 Entries can only be pasted into single or linked fields and drop-down lists.
 Entries cannot be pasted into deactivated fields or drop-down lists.
 When pasting, the number of available rows per column, in which entries are to be inserted, must
be equal or greater than the number of entries saved in the clipboard.

3.1/0923 49
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

 When pasting, only one field or drop-down list can be selected, starting from which all entries are
pasted column by column in descending order.

If any of the above restrictions are not observed when pasting entries, the pasting process is aborted
and the following error message is displayed:

 Error message - Copy & Paste

50 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

Checking for collisions

Detects existing collisions within a single or several Intercom Servers. To show existing conflicts,
follow the instructions below:
 Click on the button . The following dialogue appears:

Available
Intercom Servers
Select all
available
Intercom
Servers
Start checking
Check access
call numbers
codes of door
opener

Check local Reported

call numbers call number
conflicts

Checking for collisions

Range of functions
 CCT 800 3.1 or lower: Only the check for collisions at inputs, outputs and subscribers is possible.
 CCT 800 3.2 or higher: The check of all available objects is possible (see page 52).
The call numbers of several objects will be checked for collisions (e.g. same number sequence or du-
plicate entry). The check will be carried out not only for objects of the same type (e.g. subscriber or out-
put), also the call numbers of all objects will be compared with each other. Also collisions between
each selected Intercom Server will be determined if several Intercom Servers are selected. Existing col-
lisions has to be fixed manually.

Controlling the surface

 Available Intercom Server: In this field, all available Intercom Servers are indicated. The Intercom
Servers can manually be selected, which be checked for collisions.
 Select all items: Click on this button to select all available Intercom Servers, which are displayed in
the dialogue “available Intercom Server”.
 Check door opener codes: Activate this checkbox to add all configured access codes to doors to the
check.
 Check local call numbers (D0** and BA**): Activate this checkbox to add local call numbers of the
D0** and BA** range to the check. For further information about addresses for inputs, outputs and
interfaces, see note on page 53.
 Start check: Click on this button to start the check for collisions. Only selected Intercom Servers are
considered.
 Collisions: Displays all existing collisions of the selected Intercom Server. The following collisions
are possible:

3.1/0923 51
 Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

 Duplicate entry: The call number of two objects are identical.

NOTE:
With CCT 800800 3.1 or lower, the check for duplicate entries is only possible between objects of
the same type.

 Partially identical number sequence: The call numbers of min. two objects start with the same
number sequence (but the call numbers are not identical).

NOTE:
With CCT 800 3.1 or lower, the check for the same number sequence is only possible between
objects of the same type and between subscribers and outputs.

 Conflict with block prefix: A part or the entire call number of an object is identical with the block
prefix of a selected Intercom Server.
 Duplicate camera number: The camera number is already in use.
 Local use only: The local number of the D0** or BA** range is already in use.
The following objects will be checked for existing collisions:
Object Possible collision at Path in CCT 800
Subscriber Call number Subscriber > General
Input Call number Inputs > General setting
Output Call number Outputs > General settings
Configuration block and
 Block number
additional blocks
Intercom Server > General Settings > tab General

Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Block

Block prefix Block prefix
settings
Function code Function code Intercom Server - Block XX > Function codes
Subscriber > Attendant contacts > desired subscriber
PA number PA number
> tab PA-Number
Network > IP-connection > desired slot > tab WAN-
WAN Pre-dialling code
connections
Network > IP-connection > desired slot > tab WAN-
 WAN ID number subscriber
connections
 S0 ID number subscriber Interfaces > S0 > desired slot

 Interfaces Call number Interfaces > Data interfaces

SIP-T Pre-dialling Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > sub-folder trunks > desired slot
SIP-T Code number Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > sub-folder trunks > desired slot
IP Address, IP - Settings > Card IP address and Use Host IP Address
SIS-IF
Port number Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab TCP/IP > Local Port
Door opener
Access code Subscriber > Door opener > sub-folder subscriber
(optional)
Intercom Server > Cards > Serial Number
IP - Settings > Card IP address
Card IP address
Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals >
IP-Terminal 2) Port number,
Terminal IP Address
Terminal IP address
Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals >
Port number

52 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

Object Possible collision at Path in CCT 800

Intercom Server > Cards > Serial Number
Card IP address IP - Settings > Card IP address
Port number, Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals >
IP-Terminal 2) Dynamic registration / MAC Terminal IP Address
address Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals >
MAC address
1)
Applies only for existing collisions within the same Intercom Server.
2)
Configuration errors resulting in the combination of card IP address + port number + terminal IP address or
MAC address on an IP card will be displayed as a collision.

ATTENTION:
 Each Intercom Server uses the same hexadecimal addresses for inputs, outputs and interfaces. Ad-
dresses ending with “F1” to “FE” will not be considered for the check of collisions. In order to use
these inputs, outputs and interfaces across a network, an up to 8-digit number has to be entered man-
ually!
 If virtual input / output cards are used in slot 15 of an Intercom Server IS300, GE300 or the Plug-In
Server G8-IP32 (e.g. cards IS3-16E, IS3-16A or IS3-8E8A cards in the IS300), call numbers ending with
**F1 to **FE must not be assigned to the inputs or outputs of these cards. Only characters 0-9 and T
are valid.
 Valid entries can be displayed as existing collisions if several Intercom Servers with different block
prefix are selected for the checking!

Protect configuration with password

For Intercom Server, a password can be assigned to prevent unwanted changes to the Intercom Server
configuration. This password is requested before sending and receiving the configuration, initialising
the Intercom Server, performing a selective reboot, and updating the software.

Configuration CCT 800

To define a password for the Intercom Server, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Change Password

3.1/0923 53
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

The following dialogue appears:

Change Password
2. Click on the button Query network to show all Intercom Servers within the selected network.
3. Click on the button Get Data to receive the software information of all selected Intercom Servers.
4. Click on the button Set password to define a new password or to change the existing password. The
following dialogue appears:

Set password

NOTE: Password safety

Details on the characters allowed when assigning passwords see page 516.

5. In the field Old password, enter the existing password (no entry required if no password has been
defined).

NOTE: Delete password

In order to delete an existing password, enter the current password in the field Old Password and
click on the button OK.

54 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

6. In the fields New Password and Confirm New Password, enter the new password.

NOTE: Password assignment

 From VirtuoSIS 10, the password also applies to the SSH connection.
 If you assign a new password, this will be applied to all instances of the current VirtuoSIS Master
from version 10.0 or higher. From VirtuoSIS 10.0 it is no longer possible to assign an individual
password to each instance.
 The password must be at least 12 and a maximum of 64 characters long.
 Passwords assigned up until VirtuoSIS version 9.1 remain unchanged, but in case a new password
is assigned after an upgrade to VirtuoSIS 10.0, you need to obey to the new password rules.

7. Click on the button OK to save the changes.

3.1/0923 55
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

Reset of individual subscribers

All settings of a subscriber can be reset to default settings.

Configuration CCT 800

To reset the configuration of a single station, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Reset subscriber”. A dialogue appears.
3. Click on the button Yes. All previously configured definitions and functions of this subscriber will be
deleted (also all references to the call number of this subscriber, e.g. call request to this control desk,
attendant contacts, direct dialling, protection against feedback). Afterwards, a new subscriber with
default settings will be created.

NOTE: Cannot be changed back

This procedure cannot be made changed back.

Reset of the entire configuration

There are two possibilities for initialising an Intercom Server (reset to default settings):
 With the DIP switches on the motherboard “G3-GEM” (Intercom Server GE 300) or on the processor
card “G8-GEP” (Intercom Server GE 800)
 With CCT 800

Initialise with DIP switches

See the manuals “GE 800” and “GE 300”.

Initialise with CCT800

1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Initialise
2. The following dialogue appears:

Initialise
3. In the field Current Server-ID, the current server ID of the respective Intercom Server is indicated.
4. In the field New Server-ID, the new server ID can be entered (only for Intercom Server GE 300 and
GE 800).

NOTE: Cannot be undone

Available server IDs from “1” to “254” are possible (except “120” to “135”). The current server ID
can also be used.

5. Optionally, activate the checkbox Keep IP-Address to keep the IP address of the GEP card at the
initialisation. Otherwise, the IP address will be reset to default settings.
6. Click on the button Initialise to reset the entire configuration of the Intercom Server to default
settings.

56 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

Moving of subscribers
Previously configured subscribers can be moved to a different subscriber card (e.g. an employee
changes the office within a company. His subscriber can easily be moved to another port without losing
any entitlements or parameters).

Restrictions
 Only for station types: EE 211, EE 311A, EE 411, EE 811A
 Only for cards: Gx-GET, Gx-GED
 Control desks cannot be moved.
 Moved subscribers must have the same station type and card type and has to be located in the same
Intercom Server block.
 Station inputs and outputs are excluded.

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Mark for move to select them for moving”.
3. If two or more subscribers are selected for moving, right-click on one of the selected subscriber and
click on “Move subscribers”. The following dialogue appears:

Moving of subscribers
4. In the left field, select the desired a subscriber.
5. In the right field, select a free port, to which the subscriber be moved.
6. Click on the button Connect 1 to move the selected subscriber.
7. Click on button Disconnect 2 to undo an allocation.
8. Click on the button OK to save the changes.

ATTENTION:
Each subscriber has to be assigned to a port (can also be the original port). Otherwise, the button
OK will not be activated!

3.1/0923 57
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

Extended copy
Selective functions or configurations can be copied from a subscriber or client and added to other
subscribers. The copy/paste process will be verified to avoid configuration errors. The extended copy
function can be used in the following dialogues:
 Inputs / Input messages – see page 60
 Subscriber – see page 61
 Station properties – see page 61
 Alarm triggering – see page 62
 Control desks – see page 62
 Call requests – see page 63
 Attendant contacts – see page 63
 Door opener – see page 64

NOTE: Restriction
Functions and configurations can only be copied or added between cards of the same type (e.g.
configuration copied from GED subscriber card and added to IP subscriber card).

Copy and pasting process

Copying data
To copy functions and/or a configuration from a subscriber, follow the instructions below:
1. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “extended copy”. The following example dialogue
appears:

Copying data
2. In the left pane, select the functions and configuration to copy. In this dialogue, only configured
functions are shown.
3. In the right pane, general information about the selected client is shown.
4. Click on the button Copy.

58 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

Pasting of copied data

To paste the copied data to a subscriber, follow the instructions below:
1. Select one or multiple subscribers in the respective dialogue (multiple subscribers are selected with
the keys “shift” or “ctrl”).
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Extended Paste”. The following dialogue appears

Pasting of copied data

3. In the field General source client information, the data of the copied subscriber is shown.
4. In the field Paste status, possible errors during pasting are shown.
5. To paste the copied data, the following possibilities are available:
 Click on the button Continue if OK to paste functions and configuration, at which no errors are
shown in the field Paste status.
 Click on the button Continue to paste all functions and configuration (even though errors are
shown in the field Paste status).

GOOD TO KNOW:
 Due to the various subscriber types (e.g. analogue, digital, S0 or GTEL) the pasting of
functionalities at these types is limited (if those functions can be added to these types). For
example, extended copying of a subscriber that has a camera will also include the camera at the
destination subscriber(s), if applicable.
 Functions, which only work with certain card types, won‘t be copied to wrong card types (e.g. “C”
instead of “D”).
 The destination client creates those functions which have not been defined yet.
 Before pasting, the destination client is reset to its default configuration.
 The copied data stays available until:
 A new copy action replaces the data in the cache.
 The file, out of which was copied, is closed.
 CCT 800 is closed.

3.1/0923 59
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

Extended copy - dialogue

Inputs / Input messages

NOTE: Configuration required

The copied input has either to be configured as a function of an input message under Inputs > Input
message (see page 223) or as a function of an ICX message-output Inputs > ICX at input (see
page 245).

To copy the input messages, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to: Inputs > General Settings
2. Right-click on the desired input and select Extended Copy. The following dialogue appears:

General Settings - Extended Copy

The following settings can be copied:
Function Functions to copy
All settings under:
 Inputs > Input message > tab Triggering
 Inputs > Input message > tab Call types
General
 Inputs > Input message > tab Operations for Active 1
 Inputs > Input message > tab Operations for Active 2
 Inputs > Input message > tab Operations Error
Control Desks 1) Selected destination control desk
All settings under Inputs > Input message > desired input > tab Attendant con-
Attendant contacts 1) 2) tacts
All settings under Inputs > Input message > desired input > tab Network Moni-
Network Monitoring 1) toring
Data interfaces 3) All settings under Inputs > ICX at input

ICX messages 3) All settings under Inputs > ICX at input > desired input
1)
This function can also be extended copied through Inputs > Input message.
2)
Only internal station outputs can be copied, if the respective output is activated at the destination station (e.g.
ET 8E8A)
3)
This function can also be extended copied trough Inputs > ICX at input.

60 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

Subscriber
Follow the instructions below to copy the subscriber settings:
1. Go to: Subscriber > General
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select Extended Copy. The following dialogue appears:

Subscriber - Extended Copy

All functions defined for the selected subscriber can be copied, with the following exceptions:
 Protection against feedback and the video function cannot be copied.
 Only device internal outputs can be copied. Copying is only possible, if the respective output of the
destination client is activated Subscriber > Station properties.

Station properties
Follow the instructions below to copy the station properties:
1. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Extended Copy“. The following dialogue appears:

Subscriber - Station properties

 The following functions can be copied:
Function Copied function
Station type and general settings (series, audio, de-bounce time, line-monitoring
Station type1) delay).
Additional device Extension modules for subscribers (e.g. ET806, EB2E2A).
Functions and Favourites under:
Functions / Favourites Subscriber > Station properties > Individual F2-menu
Subscriber > Station properties > WS series
Parameters Depending on the station type
Station outputs. Outputs are only copied if no output has been created at this
Outputs
port at the destination station.
Station inputs (incl. input messages). Inputs are only copied if no input has been
Inputs
created at this port at the destination station.
1) If the destination subscriber is already defined (not “digital or analogue standard”), it is only possible to copy
between two identical types. Otherwise, the station type of the initiated subscriber is taken over.

3.1/0923 61
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

Alarm triggering

NOTE: Configuration required

For this function, it has to be configured an alarm triggering under
Subscriber > Alarm triggering for the to be copied subscriber (see page 308).

Follow the instructions below to copy the alarm settings:

1. Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering
2. Right-click on the desired input and select “Extended Copy“. The following dialogue appears:

Subscriber - Alarm triggering

The following settings can be copied:
Function Functions to copy
General All settings under Subscriber > Alarm triggering

Control Desks

NOTE: Configuration required

For this function, it has to be configured a control desk under Subscriber > Control Desks for the to
be copied subscriber (see page 326).

Follow the instructions below, to copy the control desks settings:

1. Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks
2. Right-click on the desired input and select “Extended Copy“. The following dialogue appears:

Subscriber - Control Desk

The following settings can be copied:
Function Function to copy
Buzzer All settings under Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Buzzer
IP/RS232 - ICX All settings under Subscriber > Control Desks > tab IP/RS232 - ICX
Call conversion All settings under Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Call conversions
All settings under Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Tone generator for
Tone generator for buzzer
buzzers
Transfer parameters All settings under Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Transfer parameters

EE880-(functionality)1) All settings under Subscriber > Control Desks > EE 880 Subscriber
1)
This function is only available for EE880 subscribers.

62 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

Call requests

NOTE: Configuration required

For this function, it has to be configured a control desk under Subscriber > Call Request for the to
be copied subscriber (see page 326).

Follow the instructions below, to copy the call request settings:

1. Go to: Subscriber > Call Request
2. Right-click on the desired entry and select “Extended Copy“. The following dialogue appears:

Subscriber - Call Request

The following settings can be copied:
Function Function to copy
All settings under:
General  Subscriber > Call Request > tab Trigger
 Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter
Control Desks All destination control desks of the affected call request
Attendant Contacts Internal station outputs

Attendant contacts

NOTE: Restriction
Only device internal outputs can be copied. Copying is only possible, if the respective output of the
destination client is activated Subscriber > Station properties. If this output is already defined as
an attendant contact, only the configuration will be copied.

Follow the instructions below, to copy the call request settings:

1. Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts
2. Right-click on the desired input and select “Extended Copy“. The following dialogue appears:

Subscriber - Attendant contacts

The following settings can be copied:
Function Function to copy
All settings under
Configuration  Subscriber > Attendant contacts > tab Active at
 Subscriber > Attendant contacts > tab Call No./Function

3.1/0923 63
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

Door opener

NOTE: Configuration required

For this function, it has to be configured a control desk under Subscriber > Door opener for the to
be copied subscriber (see page 316).

Follow the instructions below, to copy the call request settings:

1. Go to: Subscriber > Door opener
2. Right-click on the desired input and select “Extended Copy“. The following dialogue appears:

Subscriber - door opener

The following door opener functions can be copied:
Function Function to copy
All settings under:
 Subscriber > Door opener > tab Door open
Configuration
 Subscriber > Door opener > tab Control station
 Subscriber > Door opener > tab Waiting information
All settings under Subscriber > Door opener > desired subscriber > Forward-
Forwarding Group-ringing
ing Group-ringing
Selected attendant contact and all settings under Subscriber > Door opener >
Access code(s)1) desired subscriber
1)
Only device internal outputs can be copied. Copying is only possible, if the respective output of the destina-
tion client is activated Subscriber > Station properties. If this output is already defined as an attendant
contact, only the access codes will be copied.

64 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

Printing Intercom Server configuration

With CCT 800 3.1 or higher, additional print options to create project or system documentation are
available.

Configuration CCT 800

To print the configuration of one or more Intercom Servers, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu File > Print
The following print options are available:

Option Description
An overview of all plug-in cards with the following information is printed: slot num-
Card Overview
ber, type of card, used card licence, software version and IP address.
An overview of all Intercom Stations with the following information is printed:
Stations Overview Server ID/slot/subscriber port, call number, description, display text, station type,
firmware version and IP address with port.
An overview of all inputs with the following information is printed: address, input
call number, input description, subscriber call number, subscriber description and
Inputs Overview
the configuration of the inputs: input message (IM), ICX at input (ICX), dial via input
(D), alarm input (A), chime-signal (CH).
An overview of all outputs with the following information is printed: address, out-
Outputs Overview put call number, output description, subscriber call number, subscriber description,
input call number and the function “ICX at output” (ICX) if used. 1)
An overview of all licences with the following information is printed: address, card
Licences Overview
type, licence product, licence code, licence state, licence type, generation.
1) Activate the checkbox Enable full functionality to indicate the outputs of Intercom stations.

2. After selecting an option, the following dialogue appears:

Print dialogue
3. Select the desired Intercom Servers from whose configuration should be printed. Click on the button
Select all to print the configuration of all available Intercom Servers.
4. Optional: Activate the checkbox Show printer selection dialogue to open the print dialogue at the
beginning of the printing progress.
5. Click on the button Print to start the printing process.

3.1/0923 65
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

JSON data export

 Offers a fast and simple way to exchange configuration data (all types of servers are supported).
 Important data from the CCTX configuration file (e.g. call number and description of subscribers as
well as inputs and outputs) can be quickly and easily exported to the JSON format. Each entry in the
JSON file has a unique ID.
 There are two kinds of JSON data exports for different use cases:
 “Subscribers, inputs and outputs”
 “Asset management”

JSON data export – subscribers, inputs and outputs

The JSON data export contains data from:
 Subscribers
 Inputs
 Outputs

The following data types are used:

 Bool
 Number
 String

To export the configuration:

1. Go to: Menu File > Export > JSON data export - Subscribers, Inputs and Outputs
2. Select a file path and enter a file name in the dialogue Save as.
3. Click Save to export the JSON file.
The JSON data export file may contain the following objects:
JSON object Type Path in CCT800
Version number Version of the JSON data export
Subscribers Subscriber information
SubscriberID string Subscriber > General > I/S-T
Series string Subscriber > Station properties > Series
StationType string Subscriber > Station properties > Station type
ControlDesk bool Subscriber > Control Desks
“true“ if this subscriber is configured as control desk
CallRequest bool Subscriber > Call Requests
“true“, if the subscriber has configured a call request
CallNumber string Subscriber > General > Call number
Description string Subscriber > General > Description
SubscriberInputs Inputs and virtual inputs on this device
InputId string Inputs > General Settings > Input
InputMessage bool Inputs > Input message
“true“, if an input message is configured
PositionNumber number Number of the input (e.g. 1 = 1st input, 2 = 2nd input etc.)
CallNumber string Inputs > General Settings > Call number
Description string Inputs > General Settings > Description
SubscriberExtInputs Inputs on an additional device connected to this sub-
scriber
InputId string Inputs > General Settings > Input

66 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

JSON object Type Path in CCT800

InputMessage bool Inputs > General Settings > Input message
“true“, if an input message is configured
PositionNumber number Number of the input (e.g. 1 = 1st input, 2 = 2nd input etc.)
CallNumber string Inputs > General Settings > Call number
Description string Inputs > General Settings > Description
SubscriberOutputs Outputs on this device
OutputId string Outputs > General Settings > Output
FullFunctionalityEnabled bool Subscribers > Station properties > Device family >
Outputs > Enable full functionality
“true“, if the output is configured for full functionality
PositionNumber number Number of the output (e.g. 1 = 1st output, 2 = 2nd output
etc.)
CallNumber string Outputs > General Settings > Call number
Description string Outputs > General Settings > Description
SubscriberExtOutputs Outputs on this device
OutputId string Outputs > General Settings > Output
FullFunctionalityEnabled bool Subscribers > Station properties > Device family >
Outputs > Enable full functionality
“true“, if the output is configured for full functionality
PositionNumber number Number of the output (e.g. 1 = 1st output, 2 = 2nd output
etc.)
CallNumber string Outputs > General Settings > Call number
Description string Outputs > General Settings > Description
Inputs General inputs (card inputs)
InputId string Inputs > General Settings > Input
InputMessage bool Inputs > Input message
“true“, if an input message is configured
PositionNumber number Number of the input (e.g. 1 = 1st input, 2 = 2nd input etc.)
CallNumber string Inputs > General Settings > Call number
Description string Inputs > General Settings > Description
Outputs General outputs (card outputs)
OutputId string Outputs > General Settings > Output
PositionNumber number Number of the output (e.g. 1 = 1st output, 2 = 2nd output
etc.)
CallNumber string Outputs > General Settings > Call number
Description string Outputs > General Settings > Description

3.1/0923 67
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

JSON data export – asset management

The JSON data export contains data from:
 Dates and times (from version 2)
 WAN region (from version 2)
 Servers (from version 2 including time of the last configuration change)
 Subscriber cards
 Subscribers (from version 2 including software versions)
 Inputs
 Outputs
 Network interfaces (from version 2)
 LAN connections (from version 2)
 WAN connections (from version 2)

The following data types are used:

 Bool
 Number
 String

To export the configuration:

1. Go to: Menu File > Export > JSON data export - Asset Management
2. Select a file path and enter a file name in the dialogue Save as.
3. Click Save to export the JSON file.
The JSON data export file may contain the following objects:
JSON object Type Path in CCT 800
Version number Version of the JSON data export:
Version 1: CCT 800 12.0 to 13.0
Version 2: CCT 800 13.1 and newer
ConfigurationReceivedTime string Receiving time of the configuration in ISO 8601 format 1).
If the configuration was received with CCT 800 lower than 13.1, then
the field is empty.
JSONExportCreatedTime string Export time of the configuration to JSON in ISO 8601 format
WANRegionNo number Number of the WAN region, if one exists
WANRegionName string Name of the WAN region, if one exists
Server Server information
ServerId string Intercom server > Cards > Server-ID
Description string Intercom server > Cards > Description
Type string Intercom server > Cards > Type
SoftwareVersion string Intercom server > Cards > Software version
SerialNumber string Intercom server > Cards > Serial Number
Modified string Configuration change time in ISO 8601 format 2)
SubscriberCard Subscriber card information
CardId string Intercom server > Cards > Server-ID (without leading zeros) /
Intercom server > Cards > Slot
(e.g. Server-ID 8 and slot 14: 8/14--)
SoftwareVersion string Intercom server > Cards > Software version
CardType string Intercom server > Cards > Card type
CardMacAddress string IP - Settings > MAC Address
CardIPAddress string IP - Settings > Card IP Address

68 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

JSON object Type Path in CCT 800

CardSubnetMask string IP - Settings > Subnet Mask
CardRouterIPAddress string IP - Settings > Router IP Address
Subscribers Subscriber information
SubscriberId string Subscriber > Station properties > I/S-T
(without card type, e.g. 8/14-1)
CallNumber string Subscriber > Station properties > Call number
Description string Subscriber > Station properties > Description
CameraNumber number Subscriber > General > Assignment camera number
DisplayText6Digits string Subscriber > General > Display text EE 311A/411
DisplayText14Dig- string Subscriber > General > Display text EE 811A & camera
its
Series string Subscriber > Station properties > Series
StationType string Subscriber > Station properties > Station type
SoftwareVersion string Subscriber > Station properties > Software version
SoftwareVersionIP- string Subscriber > Station properties > Software version IP box
Box
SubscriberIPAd- string Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > Terminal IP
dress Address
Subscriber- string Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > MAC
MacAddress Address
ControlDesk bool Subscriber > Control Desks
“true“, if the subscriber is configured as control desk
CallRequest bool Subscriber > Call Request
“true“, if the subscriber has configured a call request
SubscriberOutputs Outputs on this device
OutputId string Outputs > General Settings > Output
CallNumber string Outputs > General Settings > Call Number
Description string Outputs > General Settings > Description
PositionNumber number Number of the output (e.g. 1 = 1st output, 2 = 2nd output etc.)
FullFunctionali- bool Subscriber > Station properties > product family > Outputs >
tyEnabled Enable full functionality
“true“, if the output is configured for full functionality
SubscriberInputs Inputs and virtual inputs on this device
InputId string Inputs > General Settings > Input
CallNumber string Inputs > General Settings > Call Number
Description string Inputs > General Settings > Description
PositionNumber number Number of the input (e.g. 1 = 1st input, 2 = 2nd input etc.)
InputMessage bool Inputs > Input Message
“true“, if an input message is configured
SubscriberExtOut- Outputs on an additional device connected to this subscriber
puts
OutputId string Outputs > General Settings > Output
CallNumber string Outputs > General Settings > Call Number
Description string Outputs > General Settings > Description
PositionNumber number Number of the output (e.g. 1 = 1st output, 2 = 2nd output etc.)

3.1/0923 69
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

JSON object Type Path in CCT 800

FullFunctionali- bool Subscriber > Station properties > product family > Outputs >
tyEnabled Enable full functionality
“true“, if the output is configured for full functionality
SubscriberExtIn- Inputs on an additional device connected to this subscriber
puts
InputId string Inputs > General Settings > Input
CallNumber string Inputs > General Settings > Call Number
Description string Inputs > General Settings > Description
PositionNumber number Number of the input (e.g. 1 = 1st input, 2 = 2nd input etc.)
InputMessage bool Inputs > Input Message
“true“, if an input message is configured
Inputs General inputs (card inputs)
InputId string Inputs > General Settings > Input
CallNumber string Inputs > General Settings > Call Number
Description string Inputs > General Settings > Description
PositionNumber number Number of the input (e.g. 1 = 1st input, 2 = 2nd input etc.)
InputMessage bool Inputs > Input Message
“true“, if an input message is configured
Outputs General outputs (card outputs)
OutputId string Outputs > General Settings > Output
CallNumber string Outputs > General Settings > Call Number
Description string Outputs > General Settings > Description
PositionNumber number Number of the output (e.g. 1 = 1st output, 2 = 2nd output etc.)
NetworkCard Network cards available on the server,
including GEP cards with network licenses
CardId string Intercom server > Cards > Server-ID (without leading zeros) /
Intercom server > Cards > Slot
SoftwareVersion string Intercom server > Cards > Software version
CardType string Intercom server > Cards > Card type
CardMacAddress string IP - Settings > MAC Address
CardIPAddress string IP - Settings > Card IP Address
CardSubnetMask string IP - Settings > Subnet Mask
CardRouterIP string IP - Settings > Router IP Address
Address
IPConnection string Network > IP - Connections > *
Composed from: Intercom server > Cards > Server-ID (without
leading zeros) - Intercom server > Cards > Description -> Slot
Intercom server > Cards > Slot
LANConnections Data about LAN connections
Description string Network > IP - Connections > LAN-connections > Descrip-
tion
IPAddressOf string Network > IP - Connections > LAN-connections > IP address
Destination of destination intercom server
IntercomServer
PortNumber number Network > IP - Connections > LAN-connections > Port num-
ber

70 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800

JSON object Type Path in CCT 800

NetworkCard string Network > IP - Connections > LAN-connections > I/S-P
OfDestination
IntercomServer
WANConnections Data about WAN connections
Contains no data if no WAN connections are supported. See also
Network > IP - Connections > WAN-connections
Description string Network > IP - Connections > WAN-connections > Descrip-
tion
IPAddressOf string Network > IP - Connections > WAN-connections > IP address
Destination of destination intercom server
IntercomServer
PortNumber number Network > IP - Connections > WAN-connections > Port num-
ber
PreDiallingCode string Network > IP - Connections > WAN-connections > Pre-dial-
ling code
1)
The offset to UTC (GMT) is placed at the end and starts with “+” or “-”. Examples: For London, it is “+00:00”, for
Berlin it is regularly (CET) “+01:00” and during summer time (CEST) it is “+02:00”.
2) No offset to UTC because this is not known to the intercom server.

3.1/0923 71
 Configuration sequence in CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration

Configuration sequence in CCT 800

In the following, you will find a step-by-step setup guide to configure the stations, cards and Intercom
Server in CCT 800:
1. Establishing a connection between Intercom Server and CCT 800 – see page 74
2. Receiving the configuration of Intercom Server – see page 80. All installed cards, software versions
and the CCT 800 configuration saved in the Intercom Server are displayed automatically in CCT 800.
 If no configuration is saved in the Intercom Server, an Intercom Server offline configuration can
be created. In order to create an offline configuration, no configuration to the Intercom Server is
required. This configuration can be sent to the Intercom Servers within the connected network at
a later time. Further information can be found on page 88.
3. Updating the Intercom Server, cards and station firmware – see page 91
4. Licencing of the cards and Intercom Server – see page 96
5. Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations in IPStationConfig and CCT 800 – see page 132
6. Configuration of the Intercom Server in CCT 800:
 Configuration of Intercom functions – see page 156
 Configuration of SIP functions – see page 463
7. Sending the configuration to the Intercom Server – see page 82

NOTE: Save the latest configuration file on the computer

It is recommend to save the CCT 800 file of the latest version of the configuration on the computer.

8. Warmstart of all Intercom Servers with configuration changes in order to apply the changes – see
page 86
  With PRO 800 5.1 or higher, the configuration can be changed without a restart for certain
Intercom subscriber functions (i.e. the configuration must be sent to the Intercom Server, but no
warmstart is required). An overview of all Intercom subscriber functions without restart can be
found on page 532.

Distributing Intercom Server configurations

Intercom Server configurations can be distributed to any number of VirtuoSIS Intercom Servers. The
Intercom Server on which the configuration is created does not have to run on the same virtualisation
or hardware platform as the target servers. For further information on supported virtualisation and
hardware platforms, see the product manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.

ATTENTION:
 As usual when making major configuration changes to the system, please always consider creat-
ing a backup.
 Do not interrupt the power supply or the network connection during the process.

Requirements
Conditions for successful completion of the distribution process:
 The Intercom Server on which the configuration is created as well as the target server have a base
licence. For further information, see page 118.
 The Intercom Server on which the configuration is created has the same number of instances and
the same server IDs as the target server. For further information, see page 130.
 When sending, it is mandatory that all instances of the VirtuoSIS Master are selected to make sure
that the serial number is successfully adapted.

72 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration sequence in CCT 800

 When sending the configuration, all instances of the VirtuoSIS master must be online

ATTENTION:
If these requirements are not met, this may lead to unexpected behaviour due to an invalid configu-
ration.

Configuration CCT 800

 Licence and configure the Intercom Server on which the configuration is created on one of the sup-
ported virtualisation and hardware platforms.
 Receive the final configuration of all VirtuoSIS instances with CCT 800 and save it as a configuration
file (CCTX file).
 Licence and configure the Intercom Server on which the configuration is applied on one of the sup-
ported virtualisation and hardware platforms with the same number of instances and the same serv-
er IDs.
 Go to: Project > Intercom Server > Cards.
 Make a note of the field Serial Number.
 Open the configuration file (CCTX file) with CCT 800.
 Go to: Project > Intercom Server > Cards.
 Double-click the field Serial Number and enter the previously noted serial number of the target serv-
er for each instance. Only valid serial numbers are accepted. If a VirtuoSIS Master has more than one
instance, the new serial number is assigned to all of them automatically.
 Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Send.
 Select all instances of the target server and send the configuration.

NOTES:
 If the serial number of the configuration (CCTX file) does not match that of the VirtuoSIS Intercom
Server it is sent to, a dialogue appears. It offers to adopt the serial number of all instances of the
Intercom Server.
 This dialogue appears individually for each mismatching serial number and it must always be con-
firmed for the sending process to be carried out.
 If an attempt is made to send the configuration to an Intercom Server without a basic licence (i.e.
with serial number "00000000"), the sending process is aborted.
 The serial number is only checked for VirtuoSIS Intercom Servers, but not for Intercom Servers
such as GE 300 or GE 800.

3.1/0923 73
Establish connection to the Intercom Server Intercom Server Configuration

Establish connection to the Intercom Server

NOTE: Establish connection to VirtuoSIS
For further information, see the product manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.

CCT 800 is able to establish a connection to the Intercom Servers either via a serial or IP interface. The
service “Com-Adapter” controls the communication between computer and Intercom Server. All con-
nection settings can be configured directly in the connection settings dialogue. The COM adapter man-
ages any number of connections to the Intercom system, based on IP and RS-232. The following meth-
ods for establishing a connection to the Intercom Server are available:
 IP connection to the Intercom Server – see below
 Serial connection to the Intercom Server – see page 77

Establish connection via IP interface

Configuration CCT 800
To establish an IP connection between an Intercom Server and computer, via which this Intercom
Server be configured with CCT 800, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Connection settings or click on the toolbar icon
The following dialogue appears:

NOTE: Multiple interfaces simultaneously possible

CCT 800 can save and manage several links at the same time. Typically one link is created for each
new Intercom System or project.

2. In the drop-down list Connection or via the tab IP, select the desired IP interface, via which the
Intercom Server configuration be received and sent.

74 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Establish connection to the Intercom Server

3. The following optional connection settings are available:

Button Description
Click on this button to create a new setting for the selected connection type
Add
(serial/IP).
Export Click on this button to create a separate file including all connection settings.
Save changes Click on this button to saves the changes. 1)
Remove Click on this button to delete the selected interface setting.
Click on this button to import a connection settings file. The setting connections
can be extended or overwritten with the imported settings file. Settings from
Import
previously installed CCT 800 versions can be imported via the file “WCFServer-
Settings.xml”.
Discard changes Click on this button to discard the changes and reload the saved configuration.
1)
Up to 60 different connections can be saved.

4. Click on the button Search to open the network dialogue, via which all Intercom Servers within the
network can be displayed. The following dialogue appears:

NOTE: IP address of the Intercom Server must not be known

As of CCT 800 1.3 all Intercom Servers in the network can be linked without knowing their IP
addresses. CCT800 can discover all Intercom Servers connected to the same LAN broadcast domain
and setup a tunnel to the selected Intercom Server without being in the same IP range.

5. In the drop-down list Network, select the desired network interface.

GOOD TO KNOW: Recently used network interface is selected

With CCT 800 6.1 or higher, the recently used network interface will automatically be selected (if
available).

6. Click on the button Query Network to show all Intercom Servers within the selected network.

GOOD TO KNOW: Colour coding of the rows

With CCT 800 6.1 or higher, single rows of the Intercom Servers can be displayed in different col-
ours (see screenshot above):
 Blue: Selected Intercom Server.
 White: A connection to this Intercom Server can be established via an IP tunnel.
 Green: A direct connection can be established to this Intercom Server.

3.1/0923 75
Establish connection to the Intercom Server Intercom Server Configuration

7. Select the desired Intercom Server, to which a connection be built-up and click on the button Open
IP tunnel. A dialogue appears.
8. An available temporary IP address is automatically suggested. Optionally, an IP address can be
entered manually for the tunnel.
9. Click on the button OK. The dialogue will be closed and the view switches back to the connection
settings dialogue. The connection settings are applied automatically in the fields Host and Port.
10.The following settings of the IP connection can be configured:
Function Description
In this field, the name of the connection can be changed (prefix, followed by
Name
connection or project name).
In this field, the IP address or the hostname (IPv4 as well as IPv6) of the con-
Host nected Intercom Server can be set. Either IPv4 or IPv6 (only when a SIS-IF card
is in use) addresses can be specified.
In this field, the TCP port of the Intercom Server can be changed (When CCT 800
is newly installed, the first automatically created connection previously had port
Port 18000. Starting with CCT 800 version 12.1, the port is set to 17000 if CCT 800
detects a new installation). 1)
In this field, a password can be entered for link authentication. To set the pass-
Password word, navigate to Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab TCP/IP and enter it in
the fields Password 1 to Password 4 2).
Activate this checkbox to start the connection automatically (only if required by
Auto activate
CCT 800).
Disabled Activate this checkbox to disable the respective connection.
In this field, the interval can be changed, in which data is sent for prevention of
Queue interval [ms]
data overflow (recommended: 200 ms).
In this field, the time can be changed, after which an answer has to be received
Send timeout [ms]
from the Intercom Server.
Idle interval [ms] In this field, the interval between idle messages for link polling can be changed.
In this field, the time can be changed, after which an answer to the idle message
Idle response timeout [ms]
has to be received.
1)
This change applies even if the directory for CCT 800 settings has been deleted or if the file "set-
tings.ComADAPT_server.xml" in that directory was deleted prior to starting CCT 800. The settings
directory for a CCT 800 version can be found at %localappdata%\Commend\CCT\{VERSION}, where
{VERSION} denotes the specific version number of the CCT instance that is running.
2)
Details on the characters allowed when assigning passwords see page 516.

11.Click on the button Test to test the connection settings.

NOTE: Connection test failed

If the connections test has failed, repeat the previous steps to establish an IP connection with an
Intercom Server as long as the connection test is successful.

12.Click on the button Save to save the settings.

NOTE:
 In case the PC (with CCT 800) and the Intercom Server, which should be connected, are in the same
subnet, no tunnel is established.
 In case a tunnel is established, the used host IP address in the configuration dialogue is over-
written.
 When closing CCT 800 the tunnel is not closed automatically. It has to be closed manually in the
search dialogue (see page 75).

76 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Establish connection to the Intercom Server

Establish connection via serial interface

GOOD TO KNOW: Requirements for serial interface with RS-232
The PC is connected to the configuration plug of the Intercom Server via the D-Sub cable (for Intercom
Server GE300 and GE800):
NC 1 1
TXD 2 2
RXD 3 3
NC 4 4
GND 5 5
NC 6 6
NC 7 7
NC 8 8
NC 9 9
Intercom Server (9-way D-Submin plug) (9-way D-submin jack) PC

This cable can be purchased at an electric outfitter or ordered under the type “X-KAB-CCT 800”.
Notes:
 RS-232/USB adapters are not recommended.
 For further information, see the product manuals “GE 800” and “GE 300”.

Configuration CCT 800

To establish a serial connection between an Intercom Server and computer, via which this Intercom
Server be configured with CCT 800, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Connection settings or click on the toolbar icon
The following dialogue appears:

NOTE: Multiple interfaces simultaneously possible

CCT 800 can save and manage several links at the same time. Typically one link is created for each
new Intercom System or project.

2. In the drop-down list Connection or via the tab Serial, select the desired serial interface, via which
the Intercom Server configuration be received and sent.

3.1/0923 77
Establish connection to the Intercom Server Intercom Server Configuration

3. The following optional connection settings are available:

Button Description
Click on this button to create a new setting for the selected connection type
Add
(serial/IP).
Export Click on this button to create a separate file including all connection settings.
Save changes Click on this button to saves the changes. 1)
Remove Click on this button to delete the selected interface setting.
Click on this button to import a connection settings file. The setting connections
can be extended or overwritten with the imported settings file. Settings from
Import
previously installed CCT 800 versions can be imported by the file “WCFServer-
Settings.xml”.
Discard changes Click on this button to discard the changes and reload the saved configuration.
1)
Up to 60 different connections can be saved.

4. The following settings of the serial connection can be configured:

Function Description
Name In this field, the name of the connection can be changed.
In this drop-down list, the COM port can be selected, which is connected to the
COM Port
Intercom Server.
Parameters In this drop-down list, a configured parameter can be selected.
Activate this checkbox to start the connection automatically (only if required by
Auto activate
CCT 800).
Disabled Activate this checkbox to disable the respective connection.
In this field, the interval can be changed, in which data is sent for prevention of
Queue interval [ms]
data overflow (recommended: 200 ms).
Retries In this field, the number of connection retries can be changed.
In this field, the time can be changed, after which an answer has to be received
Send timeout [ms]
from the Intercom Server.
Idle interval [ms] In this field, the interval between idle messages for link polling can be changed.
Speed In this drop-down list, the speed/baud rate can be selected.
Parity In this drop-down list, the parity can be selected.
Byte size In this drop-down list, the byte size can be selected.
Stop bits In this drop-down list, the number of stop bits can be selected.
Test Click on thus button to test the connection settings.

5. Click on the button Test to test the connection settings.

NOTE: Connection test failed

If the connections test has failed, repeat the previous steps to establish a connection with an Inter-
com Server until the connection test is successful.

6. Click on the button Save to save the settings.

78 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Receiving, sending, warmstart

Receiving, sending, warmstart

The following methods for managing the Intercom Server configuration are available:
 Receiving the Intercom Server configuration – see page 80
 Sending the Intercom Server configuration – see page 82
 Warmstart of the Intercom Server – see page 86

Status messages
The following states can be shown in the send, receive or restart dialogue:

Status Description
Ok The procedure was executed successfully.
Reached The Intercom Server was found in the CCT 800 file as well as in the network.
Offline This Intercom Server exists in the CCT 800 file, however not in the network.
New The Intercom Server exists in the network, however not in the CCT 800 file.
Unforeseen events happened during sending, receiving or restarting. The state row
Warning
is indicated yellow. Repeated attempts in progress.
The sending, receiving or restart process could not be carried out. The state row is
Failure
indicated red. No retries are carried out.
Restart This Intercom Server is currently being restarted.
Receive This Intercom Server is currently being received.
Sending This Intercom Server configuration is currently being sent.
Data sent Sending of the configuration is completed.
SIS receiving The VirtuoSIS configuration is currently being received.

 Configuration changed, After a configuration change, no restart is required for this Intercom Server. An over-
no restart view of all Intercom subscriber functions without restart can be found on page 532.

Restarting The Intercom server is currently being restarted.

Configuration changed,
The restart of the Intercom server after a configuration change is completed.
restart OK
No restart is required, because the CCT 800 configuration has not been changed for
No configuration change
this Intercom Server.
A restart is required for this Intercom Server or the restart for this Intercom Server is
Configuration changed
delayed.
Canceled The current process was cancelled.

3.1/0923 79
 Receiving, sending, warmstart Intercom Server Configuration

Receiving the Intercom Server configuration

By receiving the configuration from the Intercom Servers, their current configuration can be edited in
CCT 800 (used cards and connected stations are shown in the received configuration file automatically).

Configuration CCT 800

To receive the Intercom Server configuration, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Receive or press the button “F5” on the keyboard
2. If a CCT 800 file has been opened already or received from the Intercom Server, a dialogue appears.
3. Click on the button Yes to update the current CCT 800 file with the received Intercom Server
configuration, or click on the button No to create a new CCT 800 file. The following dialogue appears:

4. Click on the button Query network to indicate all available Intercom Servers within the network.
5. Select the desired Intercom Servers, from which the configuration be received.
6. Click on the button Receive to receive the configuration of all selected Intercom Servers.

GOOD TO KNOW: Safe mode

 When receiving a CCT 800 configuration that prevents an flawless operation of the Intercom Server,
the Intercom Server starts in “safe mode”. In this case, the progress bar is coloured magenta (see
page 550).

80 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Receiving, sending, warmstart

NOTE: Receiving failed

Several checks are performed to ensure configuration validity when receiving. If they fail, the server
changes to the error state and is marked red. Error details can be called up via the button Error
information. A new window opens and displays the error message with the time and server num-
ber:
“The master data of VirtuoSIS could not be received.”
Furthermore the error message may be displayed:
The master data of VirtuoSIS with the serial number <serial number> is not valid:
 If available, restore a valid and recent backup using VirtuoBRO.
 If no valid and recent backup is available, reset the system or deploy a new virtual machine.

This may particularly be caused by a misconfiguration of the networking between instances. These
checks are performed when sending, receiving and opening a CCTX file.

7. When the Intercom Server configuration has been received, click on the button Close to close the
dialogue. All inserted cards and connected stations will automatically be recognised in the CCT 800
file.

Additional receiving settings

Function Description
Ignore different
Activate this checkbox when multiple different passwords are used in networks.
passwords

3.1/0923 81
 Receiving, sending, warmstart Intercom Server Configuration

Sending the Intercom Server configuration

In order to apply the configuration in the Intercom Servers, the configuration in CCT 800 must be sent
to these Intercom Servers.

Configuration CCT 800

To send the Intercom Server configuration, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Send or press the button “F4” on the keyboard
The following dialogue appears:

2. Click on the button Query network to indicate all available Intercom Servers within the network.
3. Select the desired Intercom Servers, to which the configuration be sent.
4. Click on the button Send to send the configuration to all selected Intercom Servers. Under certain
circumstances, a restart has to be performed for the selected Intercom Server to apply the
configuration changes (see page 86).
  If a configuration change can be performed without the need to restart the respective Intercom
Server, the state “No configuration change” will be indicated in the state field of the respective
Intercom Server. An overview of all Intercom subscriber functions without restart can be found on
page 532.

NOTE: Sending failed

Several checks are performed to ensure the validity of the configuration data before sending. If they
fail, sending is interrupted. The server changes to the error state and is marked in red. Error details
can be called up via the button Error information. A new window opens and displays the error
message with the time and server number:
“Sending the configuration data for this VirtuoSIS instance is not possible because the master
data of VirtuoSIS is not valid”.
The cause may particularly be a misconfiguration of the networking between instances. These
checks are performed when sending, receiving and opening a CCTX file.

82 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Receiving, sending, warmstart

NOTE: Sending not possible with missing base licence

Prior to sending the configuration VirtuoSIS must be licenced. If the licence is missing, the serial
number is “00000000”. In that case, a dialogue opens:
„To send the selected configuration, the VirtuoSIS master must have a serial number:
Activate a base licence.“

5. When the Intercom Server configuration has been sent, click on the button Close to close the
dialogue.

ATTENTION: Receiving the configuration after cancelling the sending process

If the sending process is cancelled, the last and not applied configuration that has been sent to the
respective Intercom Server will be displayed when subsequently receiving the configuration!

Additional settings for sending

Function Description
 Restart pre-selected Delays the restart of an Intercom Server at an active condition (by default, this check-
Intercom Server when box is enabled). If this checkbox is disabled, the restart will always be carried out
convenient without delay.
In this field, the delay time of the restart can be entered (max. 999 seconds; 0 = restart
will immediately be performed, default value 30 seconds). If all active conditions are
 Maximum Time Until cancelled before the time is expired, the restart will immediately be carried out. After
Restart [s] the delay time is expired, all active conditions will automatically be cancelled and the
restart will be carried out. Calls, call requests at a subscriber and incoming call
requests with buzzer on a control desk delay a restart. 1)
Ignore different pass-
Activate this checkbox when multiple different passwords are used in networks.
words
1)
The entered delay time is only valid for the next executed restart and will be reset to “30” afterwards. This
applies for the sending, restart and firmware dialogue.

Troubleshooting faulty configuration of the master data of

VirtuoSIS
The following provides guidance on troubleshooting and resolving configuration errors related to the
master data of VirtuoSIS. Two types of messages, namely “Information” and “Error,” are used. When
an “Information” message is displayed (as shown in the first three messages below), step-by-step
instructions to correct the configuration issue are provided in the message. However, it is still possible
to send the configuration data back to VirtuoSIS without following these instructions.
The situation is different when an “Error” message is displayed (as shown in the last two messages).
Here, it is essential to address the error before sending the configuration data back to VirtuoSIS.

 Information messages
The first three messages below demonstrate “Information” messages that guide users through the
necessary steps to correct configuration errors in the master data of VirtuoSIS.

3.1/0923 83
Receiving, sending, warmstart Intercom Server Configuration

Information message 1

Information message 2

Information message 3

 Error messages
The final two messages display “Error” messages that require resolution before sending the
configuration data back to VirtuoSIS.

Error message 1

Error message 2

84 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Receiving, sending, warmstart

This information is displayed when opening a corrupt/faulty configuration file or when receiving the
configuration data from VirtuoSIS.

3.1/0923 85
 Receiving, sending, warmstart Intercom Server Configuration

Restart of Intercom Servers

Configuration changes will be applied in the Intercom Servers at a warmstart. Certain settings will be
reset at the subscribers.
An active password means that the password must be entered every time a warm start is performed.

Configuration CCT 800

To carry out a warmstart of Intercom Servers, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Selective Restart
The following dialogue appears:

2. Click on the button Query network to indicate all available Intercom Servers within the network.
3. Click on the button Restart to perform the restart for all selected Intercom Servers.

GOOD TO KNOW: All settings are set to default values

After a firmware download or licencing, a restart has always to be performed for the respective
Intercom Server, whereas a restart after the sending process of the CCT 800 configuration is only
required for certain functions. The restart dialogue can only be closed after the restart process.

4. When the warmstart of the Intercom Server has been finished, click on the button Close to close the
dialogue.

Additional warmstart settings

Function Description
Activate this checkbox to delay the restart of an Intercom Server at an active condi-
 Delayed Restart tion (by default, this checkbox is disabled). If this checkbox is disabled, the restart will
always be carried out without delay.
In this field, the delay time of the restart can be entered (max. 999 seconds; 0 = restart
will immediately be performed). If all active conditions are cancelled before the time
 Maximum Time Until is expired, the restart will immediately be carried out. After the delay time is expired,
Restart [s] all active conditions will automatically be cancelled and the restart will be carried out.
Calls, call requests at a subscriber and incoming call requests with buzzer on a con-
trol desk delay a restart. 1)

86 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Receiving, sending, warmstart

Function Description
Activate this checkbox to restart each selected Intercom Server individually (instead
Sequential Restart
of simultaneously).
1) The entered delay time is only valid for the next executed restart and will be reset to “0” afterwards. This
applies for the sending, restart and firmware dialogue.

3.1/0923 87
Offline configuration Intercom Server Configuration

Offline configuration
If no configuration is saved in the Intercom Server, an offline configuration can be created. At the of-
fline configuration, all settings are set to default values and must be configured manually. In order to
create an offline configuration, no configuration to the Intercom Server is required. This configuration
can be sent to the Intercom Servers within the connected network at a later time.

GOOD TO KNOW: Offline configuration for VirtuoSIS

As of VirtuoSIS 7.0, an offline configuration of VirtuoSIS is possible in CCT 800. After initialisation, per
default only the SIS-NET card is selected in slot 15 in CCT 800 at Intercom Server > Cards. All other
slots are empty. Subscriber, interface, network and SIP cards can be assigned to any slot.

Create a new offline configuration

Configuration CCT 800
To create a new offline configuration file, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu File > New
The following dialogue appears:

2. Select the desired Intercom Server type via the radio button Intercom Server-Type.
3. In the field Server Details, the Intercom Server ID can be changed.
4. Click on the button OK to confirm the entry. The following dialogue appears:

88 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Offline configuration

The following functions are available in this view at Intercom Server > Cards in CCT 800:

1 Intercom Server area

Function Description
Server-ID Displays the ID of the Intercom Server.
Description In this field, the description of the Intercom Server can be entered.
Indicates the Intercom Server type. Values:
 The type of the hardware server (e.g. GE300 or GE800) or
Type
 the string “VirtuoSIS”, if the system is a software intercom server. In this case, the
next field indicates the platform.
Indicates the platform that is running VirtuoSIS. Values:
 The type of the virtualisation platform if third-party hardware is used (“VMWare”,
“Hyper-V”, “Acropolis AHV” or
 Platform VirtuoSIS
 the hardware platform, if Commend hardware is used. From VirtuoSIS 13.0 com-
pleted by the revision number (e.g. “COMMEND S3 - 2.0”, “COMMEND S6 - 4.0”) or
 for non-supported platforms the value “Unsupported”.
Generation Indicates Intercom Server generation.
Software version Indicates the installed Intercom Server software version.
Upgrade Chip Indicates the upgrade package installed.
Autarkic For further information, see the product manual “G8-IP-32”.
Licences Opens the licence administration dialogue (see page 96).
In this field, the serial number can be entered (is automatically be indicated when
Serial number
receiving the CCT 800 configuration).
Used memory Shows used and available memory of the respective Intercom Server

2 Card area

Function Description
In this drop-down list, the card type of the used plug-in card can be selected for the
Card Type
respective slot. The available plug-in cards depend on the Intercom Server type. 1)
Generation In this drop-down list, the card revision can be selected.
Shows the default software version of the respective plug-in card. If the CCT 800 file
Softwareversion is overwritten, the versions will be updated when receiving the configuration of the
respective Intercom Server.
In this field, the first call number of the subscriber cards can be changed. At sub-
First call number. /
scriber cards, the call number of all subscribers will be changed (max. 4-digits). At
Server-ID
G8-IP-32 cards, the respective server ID is shown.
Licences Shows all active licences for the respective plug-in card.
In this drop-down list, the feature level can be selected (only at plug-in cards with fea-
Working as
ture level “P”).

Add Intercom Server

Multiple Intercom Servers with different types can be added to a single configuration file. Each of the
Intercom Server has its own configuration in CCT 800.

Configuration CCT 800

To add an Intercom Server in CCT 800, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Intercom Server > Cards
2. Right-click within the Intercom Server area 1 and select “Add Intercom Server”.
3. Select the Intercom Server type and change the server ID of the Intercom Server (if required).

3.1/0923 89
 Offline configuration Intercom Server Configuration

Delete Intercom Server

Existing Intercom Servers can be removed from the configuration file. In this case, the entire configu-
ration of this Intercom Server will be deleted in CCT 800.

Configuration CCT 800

To delete an Intercom Server in CCT 800, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Intercom Server > Cards
2. Right-click on the desired Intercom Server and select “Delete Intercom Server”.

 Reset card to default settings

A card can be reset to its default settings with all its direct references, which is assigned to a slot.

Configuration CCT 800

To reset a card to default settings, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Intercom Server > Cards
2. Right-click on the desired card and select “Reset card”.

ATTENTION: Cross-references must be removed manually

Cross-references of other cards (e.g. call transfer of a subscriber) has to be reset manually!

90 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Software and firmware update

Software and firmware update

The Intercom Server software and firmware for cards and stations can be updated with CCT 800. In ad-
dition, the firmware of the VirtuoSIS can be updated via VirtuoBRO or console.

NOTES: Further information

 The latest firmware versions of all Commend products are available on www.commend.com.
 For further information, see the product manual “VirtuoBRO”.

The following methods for updating the firmware are available:

Software update with CCT 800

The software update process in CCT 800 is the same for Intercom Server, cards and stations. During
the update procedure, the full functionality of the Intercom Server is ensured.

Configuration CCT 800

To carry out a software update with CCT 800, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Firmware Download
The following dialogue appears:

Software update with CCT 800

2. Select the desired tab (Intercom Server, Cards, Stations).

3.1/0923 91
Software and firmware update Intercom Server Configuration

GOOD TO KNOW: New firmware types

 The installed software version of the Intercom Server and firmware version of cards or stations are
shown in the column Software Version.
 With CCT 800 6.1 or higher, a distinction is made between the device firmware types “DSP 900A”,
“DSP 900B” for IP stations in the columns Software version and Software version - new for
IP stations.
 In the column Online, the state of the card or station is shown (“Yes”: card/station can be reached,
“No”: card/station cannot be reached at the moment, “---”: is displayed instead of “No” at Inter-
com Servers with software below Pro 05.6. An firmware update is not possible).
 The column Downloadable shows whether a firmware can be loaded for the respective card or
station. The checkbox show downloadable only must be deactivated.

3. Click on the button Query network to indicate all available Intercom Servers within the network.
4. Click on the button Get Data to receive the software information of all selected Intercom Servers.
5. Click on the button ... and select the desired software for the update. In the drop-down list on the left,
the last five selected files are saved for quick access.

ATTENTION:
 For the download of a PRO 800 software, a direct connection between the PC and the respective
Intercom Server GE 300/GE 800 is required. A download via an Intercom Server GE 200/GE 700,
which is connected to an Intercom Server GE 300/GE 800, is not possible!
 For Intercom Servers GE 200/GE 700 with software versions up to Pro 06.0, a software download
is not possible via CCT 800. It is recommended, to update the Intercom Server software with a CCT
version 06.2!

6. Select the desired Intercom Server, card, station to be updated.

7. Click on the button Apply to confirm the selected software for the selected Intercom Server, card or
station.

NOTE: Indication of new software version

The selected software version is shown in the column Software version-new as long as a restart
has not be performed.

8. (Optional) Select the entries (e.g. Intercom Server, cards or stations) in the list on the left, which not
be updated, and click on the button Exclude.
9. Click on the button Download to start the update process. In order to complete the update process,
a warmstart of the respective Intercom Server is required. Further information about the warmstart
can be found on page 86.

ATTENTION:
 The new software will be applied after the restart of the Intercom Server. After that, all download
relevant data will be received from the Intercom Server.
 If a manual restart is carried out, only one software update can be carried out at the same time.
 An executed software download cannot be undone.

92 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Software and firmware update

Additional update settings

Function Description
Activate this checkbox to indicate the description of the Intercom Server, cards and
Show names
stations. The information will be indicated in the bar below of the window.
Activate this checkbox to hide all cards and stations, for which no software down-
Show downloadableonly
load is possible. If this checkbox is disabled, the column downloadable is indicated.
Ignore different passwords Activate this checkbox when multiple different passwords are used in networks.
A filter can be selected to avoid a download of the same or lower software version
Select
for the respective Intercom Server, card or station.
If necessary, the automatic restart of an Intercom Server can be delayed. If the
checkbox Delayed Restart is disabled, the restart dialogue will be opened after the
 Restart settings
sending process and a manual restart has to be performed. The manual restart can
also be delayed.

Software update with VirtuoSIS console

NOTE: Only for VirtuoSIS Master

The following chapter refers to the VirtuoSIS Master only.

Follow the steps below to carry out the VirtuoSIS update via the console:
1. Open the program WinSCP.
2. In the field Host name, enter the host IP address of VirtuoSIS (e.g. “10.10.8.100”).
3. In the field User name, enter the user name (“commend” per default).
4. In the field Password, enter the password (“commend” per default or the password configured while
setting up VirtuoSIS).

NOTE: Password safety

Details on the characters allowed when assigning passwords see page 516.

5. Click on the button Login.

Connection to VirtuoSIS via WinSCP

3.1/0923 93
Software and firmware update Intercom Server Configuration

6. Copy the GEX file into the following VirtuoSIS directory: /tmp.

Copying the GEX file into the VirtuoSIS directory

7. Open a SSH tool (e.g. PuTTY).

8. Activate the radio button SSH.
9. In the field Host Name, enter the host IP address of VirtuoSIS (e.g. “10.10.8.100”).
10.Click on the button Open to start the console.

Connection to VirtuoSIS via PuTTY

11.In the console window, enter the user name “commend”.

12.In the console window, enter the password.

94 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Software and firmware update

13.In the console window, enter the following console command to upgrade VirtuoSIS:
cis-ctl update /tmp/[file name].gex.

Firmware update via PuTTY

3.1/0923 95
Licencing Intercom Server Configuration

Licencing
In the licence administration dialogue, the following actions can be carried out:
 Activation of VirtuoSIS and PRO 800 licences – see page 98
 Assignment of licences to an Intercom Server – see page 102
 Assignment of port-specific licences to a specific port on a card – see page 104
 Assignment of subscriber bulk-licences (L3-SUB and L8-SUB) to the subscriber slots of the
Intercom Server – see page 105
 Deactivation of PRO 800 Licences (i.e. revoke assignment of a licence to an Intercom Server) – see
page 106
 Manual licence assignment for subscriber cards – see page 108
 Create temporary licences (licence can be used 30 days) – see page 110

NOTE: Licence storage

 A maximum of 122 licences can be assigned to an Intercom Server respectively a VirtuoSIS
instance.
 A licenses assignment to an Intercom Server can be revoked. This is supported for hardware serv-
ers (e.g. GE 800), but not for VirtuoSIS.

Licence administration dialogue

Opening the licence administration dialogue:
 Receive the Intercom Server configuration. For further information, see page 80.
 Or open a CCTX file. For further information, see page 29.
 Open the menu: Intercom Server > Licence administration; or go to: Intercom Server > Cards
> button Licences. The licence administration dialogue is shown:

Licence administration dialogue – Structure

96 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Licencing

The licence administration dialogue provides the following views:

 Licence Pool A : The Licence Pool displays licences that can be assigned to an Intercom Server. A
licence appears in the Licence Pool after it has been entered, imported from a file or its assignment
to an Intercom Server has been revoked. The filtering function in the top line allows filtering the li-
cences displayed. A variety of comparison methods are available which can be selected by clicking
on :
 Equals
 Does not equal
 Contains
 Does not contain
 Is like
 Is not like
 Begins with
 Ends with
 Is greater than
 Is greater than or equal to
 Is less than
 Is less than or equal to
When a column header is clicked, the Licence Pool is sorted by the column label. Clicking again re-
verses the order.
 Server Area B : The Server Area displays all Intercom Servers that are in the current configuration.
With the project as the root element, this view contains the Intercom Servers and their card slots.
Subordinate elements are opened via the “+”. The view in the Card Area C is narrowed down ac-
cording to the selection in the Server Area and only shows the selected element. This is marked in
the Server Area with a white background colour.
 Card Area C : The Card Area displays details of the element selected in the Server Area B . These are,
in hierarchical order, Intercom Servers, slots, cards and their licences. Subordinate elements are
opened via the “+”. Unused licences are displayed in the Licence Pool A and assigned from there.
The allocation of used licences can be revoked.

NOTE: Status display for server licences

The background colour of the row in the Card Area and the Server Area indicates the state of the
entry:
 Light blue: The data is up to date and the Intercom Server has a base licence.
 Orange: The data is up to date and the Intercom Server does not have a base licence. This is also
indicated by the serial number “00000000-001”. Assigning a base licence is a precondition for fur-
ther licensing steps. For further information about allocating a base licence, see page 118.
 Grey: The data may not be up to date, since the licence data could not be retrieved from the server.
Possible causes:
 The licence synchronisation requires a restart of the Intercom Server. This may take a few min-
utes.
 If the Intercom Server is not reachable via the currently selected network connection, the net-
work connection must be changed..
Once the Intercom Server becomes available, the background colour changes from grey to light
blue after several seconds. This applies regardless of whether the configuration was received
from the Intercom Server or a CCTX file was opened.

3.1/0923 97
Licencing Intercom Server Configuration

Activation of VirtuoSIS and PRO800 licences

The following methods for licence activation are possible:
 Licence activation in CCT 800 – see below
 Licence activation at the station with an activation code – see page 100

Licence activation in CCT 800

VirtuoSIS and PRO800 licences can be activated with the configuration software CCT 800 by importing
a single licence file, which can be downloaded via the Commend Licence Center with a Licence Certif-
icate Code. Licences activated via CCT 800 on a system with an active Internet connection are automat-
ically listed in the Commend Licence Portal. In this portal, you will find further information about the
activated licence features.

NOTE: Information about the licencing system

Further information about the licence system of Commend (e.g. ordering process or activation via
CLLS) can be found in the product manual “Licence System”.

Configuration CCT 800

NOTE: Activation of licences over proxy server

If the system running CCT 800 does not have a direct Internet connection, a proxy authentication
(basic, digest, NTLM) can be carried out first (see page 100).

To activate a PRO800 Licence, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Licence administration

ATTENTION: Active connection to the Intercom Server required

An active connection between CCT 800 and the respective Intercom Server is required.

The following dialogue appears:

Activation of VirtuoSIS and PRO800 licences

98 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Licencing

2. Click on the button Enter Licence(s) to open the licence pool. The following dialogue appears:

Enter Licence(s)
3. Click on the button Load and select the downloaded licence file. All VirtuoSIS and PRO800 licences
will automatically be added to the licence pool. See the following illustration:

Load Licence(s)
4. After the licence file has been imported, these licences are added to the licence pool automatically.
These can now be allocated to cards of an Intercom Server (see page 102).

ATTENTION: Additional steps required for offline connection

If the system running CCT 800 does not have an Internet connection, the licence has to be activated
manually on the licence server website! Further information about the offline licence activation can
be found in the product manual “Licence System”!

3.1/0923 99
Licencing Intercom Server Configuration

Activation of licences over proxy server

If a licence activation is necessary, but there is no direct internet connection to a licence server, a proxy
authentication is available. There are three authentication methods for this procedure (basic, digest,
NTLM).

Configuration CCT 800

To enable licence activation over a Proxy server, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Options > Settings > tab Communication
The following dialogue appears:

Activation of licences over Proxy server

2. Activate the field Active. The following fields will be enabled.
3. In the field IP Address, enter the IP address of the proxy server.
4. In the field Port, enter the port where the proxy server is accessible.
5. Optional: In the field Username, a user can be entered for the authentication (if required).

GOOD TO KNOW: Supported authentication methods

CCT 800 supports 3 authentication methods. Each requires different notation for the input of the
username:
 basic / digest: Username: USER
 ntlm: Username: DOMAIN\USER

6. Optional: In the field Password, a password can be entered for the authentication (if required).
7. Optional: Click on the button Test Proxy Settings to test the connection to the licence server.
8. Click on the button OK to save the changes.

Licence activation at the Intercom station

NOTE: Only possible with paper licences

This licencing method is only valid for the previous licencing system (i.e. with paper licences). Further
information can be found in the product manual “Licence System”.

If no connection between the system, which is running CCT 800, and the respective Intercom Server is
available, the activation codes can also be entered at an Intercom station with dot-matrix display.

100 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Licencing

Configuration station
To activate a licence at the station, follow the instructions below:
1. Dial the function code 9T8 at the respective station. The following display is displayed:

Licensing
Number _

Server
Slot

Scrolling
X-Cancel
Select the option “Server”

2. Press the button T. The cursor switches to the option “Server”.

3. Enter the Intercom Server ID and press the button T.

GOOD TO KNOW: Where can I find the Intercom Server ID?

The Intercom Server ID can be found in CCT 800 at Intercom Server > Cards in the column
Server-ID of the respective Intercom Server.

4. Enter the slot number of the Intercom Server and press the button T. The following display is
indicated:

Licensing
Server 1- 1
T114-3464-29
- -

Scrolling
X-Cancel
Enter the licence key at an Intercom station

5. Enter the activation code.

3.1/0923 101
Licencing Intercom Server Configuration

Licence administration

Assignment of licences to an Intercom Server

Configuration CCT 800
To assign a licence to an Intercom Server, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Licence administration
The following dialogue appears:

Assignment of licences to an Intercom Server

2. Select the desired Intercom Server in the server area, to which one or several licences are to be
assigned.
3. Click on the button Get Licence Data in order to receive the licence information from the Intercom
Server. The following possibilities for licence assignment are available:
 Drag-and-Drop the desired licences from the licence pool onto the cards of the Intercom Server,
to which they are to be assigned.
 Drag-and-Drop the desired licences from one card to another card of the same Intercom Server .

NOTES:
 To assign an active licence to an other Intercom Server, this licence must be deactivated and
moved to the licence pool first (see page 106).
 Port-specific licences (e.g. L8-IP-4x or L8-ICX) may need to be assigned to a specific port on the
card (see page 104).

GOOD TO KNOW: Upgrade of the Gx-IP-8x licence not possible with Gx-IP-4x
An upgrade of the licence Gx-IP-8x (e.g. G8-IP-8B) is not possible with the licence Gx-IP-4x
(e.g. G8-IP-4D).

102 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Licencing

4. The following functions are available in the card area:

Function Description
In this drop-down list, the licence assignment type can be selected. Further infor-
Licence assignment
mation about the manual licence assignment can be found on page 108.
Address In this field, licences can be allocated to specific subscribers or interface ports.
Licence Product In this field, the licence name of the product is indicated.
In this field, the licence type and the remaining time of temporary licences are
Type
indicated.
Licence Code In this field, the licence code of the product is indicated.
Generation In this field, the generation number is indicated (1 to 15).

State 1) In this field, the licence status is indicated.

Activation pending: The licence is allocated to a card, but not yet activated in the
Intercom Server and at the licence server.
Activated: The licence is activated at the licence server, but not yet in the Inter-
com Server. 2)
Live: Licence is active and the features can be used.
Deactivation: The licence is prepared for deactivation, but still active in the Inter-
com Server and at the licence server.
Deactivated: The licence is disabled in the Intercom Server (not at the licence
server). 3)
Inactive: The licence is deactivated in the Intercom Server and at the licence
server and can either be moved to the licence pool or be assigned to the same or
any other Intercom Server. 4)
A successful connection test is indicated with a green tick mark and a note “con-
Test Licence Server nection via proxy successful”. A failed connection test is indicated with a red
Connection cross and a note “connection via proxy failed”. The red cross is also shown for
incorrect or non-existing proxy server settings.
Activate this checkbox to show all inactive licences that are assigned to the
Show inactive respective Intercom Server. These licences are deactivated on the Intercom
licences Server and licence server and can either be moved to the licence pool or be
assigned to the same or any other Intercom Server. 5)
1) Click on the button Get Licence Data to update the state.
2)
Click on the button Synchronise to activate the inactive licences at the licence server as well.
3)
Click on the button Synchronise to deactivate the inactive licences at the licence server. When the synchro-
nisation process has been finished, these licences are available in the licence pool and can be assigned to
other Intercom Servers.
4) Activate the checkbox Show inactive licences to show inactive licences.
5) Does not apply to expired temporary licences.

5. Click on the button Synchronise to synchronise the licence information between the licence server
and Intercom Server. In order to complete the licencing process, a warmstart of the respective
Intercom Server is required. Further information about the warmstart can be found on page 86.

GOOD TO KNOW: Subscriber cards with feature level “P”

With using a subscriber card with feature level “P”, the feature levels (B, C, D) can be assigned to
the desired subscriber slots in the drop-down list Working as at Intercom Server > Cards.

NOTE: Subscriber bulk-licences must be assigned to subscriber licences

Subscriber bulk-licences (L3-SUB-x and L8-SUB-x) must be assigned to the subscriber slots of the
Intercom Server in CCT 800 at Intercom Server > Subscriber features (see page 105).

3.1/0923 103
Licencing Intercom Server Configuration

Assignment of port-specific licences

Licences, which cannot be assigned to all subscriber slots of a subscriber card (e.g. L8-IP-4D on a sub-
scriber card G8-IP-8x), might be assigned to a specific port so that this licence can be used for the de-
sired subscriber slots (e.g. the licence “L8-IP-4D” can be assigned to port “05” of the subscriber card
G8-IP-8D in order to use this licence for the ports 05 – 08.

Configuration CCT 800

To assign port-specific licences to a specific port, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Licence administration
2. Select the desired Intercom Server in the server area, to which one or several licences are to be
assigned.
3. Click on the button Get Licence Data to to receive the licence information from the Intercom Server.
4. In the field Address, enter the last two digits of the interface port or subscriber address to allocate
the licence to the desired interface port or subscriber. See the following example:

Allocate the desired licence to the interface port

GOOD TO KNOW: Licencing of the interface ports on the GEP card

To use the interface ports “8” and “11” on the GEP card, they must be licenced in CCT 800:
 Interface port “8” (e.g. “1/0-8”): Serial V24 interface. Can be configured in CCT 800 at Interfac-
es > Data interfaces > tab RS232
 Interface port “10” (e.g. “1/0-10”): Interface for ICX protocol and third-party systems (e.g. Pelco,
Milestone or video). Can be configured in CCT 800 at Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab TCP/IP.
For the interface ports above, the licences “Lx-ICX”, “L-COMOPC”, “Lx-IF” and “Lx-PROx” are
available.

ATTENTION: Do not allocate a licence to interface port “11”

The interface port “11” of the GEP card (e.g. “1/0-11”) may not be used for licencing! This interface
can only be used for the configuration in CCT 800!

5. Click on the button Synchronise to synchronise the licence information between the licence server
and Intercom Server. To complete the licencing process, a warmstart of the respective Intercom
Server is required. Further information about the warmstart can be found on page 86.

104 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Licencing

Assignment of subscriber bulk-licences

Subscriber bulk-licences (L3-SUB-x and L8-SUB-x) are allocated to each four subscriber slots of the Inter-
com Server slot to upgrade the feature level of the respective subscriber slots of the Intercom Server
slot.

Configuration CCT 800

To assign subscriber bulk-licences to the subscriber slots, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Licence administration

ATTENTION: Active connection to the Intercom Server required

An active connection between CCT 800 and the respective Intercom Server is required!

2. Allocate the desired bulk-licences (L3-SUB/L8-SUB) to the G8-GEP card of the Intercom Server (see
page 102).
3. Receive the Intercom Server configuration (see page 80).
4. Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber features
5. Activate the checkboxes 1 – 4 and/or 5 – 8 for the Intercom Server, on which the respective subscriber
bulk-licence is allocated, in order to upgrade the feature levels of the respective subscriber slots (1 –
4 or 5 – 8) of a slot (1 – 14). See the following illustration:

Allocate the subscriber bulk-licences to the subscriber slots

3.1/0923 105
Licencing Intercom Server Configuration

Deactivation of PRO800 Licences

ATTENTION: VirtuoSIS licences cannot be deactivated
 Due to copy protection in virtual environments, VirtuoSIS licences cannot be deactivated. Within a
VirtuoSIS Master, it is only possible to move a licence within a VirtuoSIS Instance or from one Virtu-
oSIS Instance to another VirtuoSIS Instance.
 Deactivation and temporary licences are not offered / supported for VirtuoSIS.

In CCT 800, active licences can be deactivated and moved to the licence pool. Licences in the licence
pool can be assigned to other Intercom Servers.

Configuration CCT 800

To deactivate a licence, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Licence administration

ATTENTION: Active connection to the Intercom Server required

An active connection between CCT 800 and the respective Intercom Server is required!

2. Select the desired Intercom Server in the server area, at which the assignment of one or several
licences be cancelled.
3. Click on the button Get Licence Data in order to receive the licence information from the Intercom
Server.
4. Right-click on the desired licence in the card area and select the option “Detach / Deactivate”. A
dialogue appears.
5. Click on the button Yes to confirm the selection.
6. Click on the button Synchronise to synchronise the licence information between the licence server
and Intercom Server. In order to complete the licencing process, a warmstart of the respective
Intercom Server is required. Further information about the warmstart can be found on page 86.
7. When the warmstart process has been finished, the deactivated licences are available in the licence
pool and can now be assigned to other Intercom Servers.

ATTENTION: Additional steps required at offline connection

If no internet connection is available on the system, which is running CCT 800, the licence has to be
deactivated manually on the licence server website! Further information about the offline licence
deactivation can be found in the product manual “Licence System”!

Additional licence settings

Function Description
A successful connection test is indicated with a green tick mark and a hint “connec-
Test Licence Server tion via proxy successful”. A failed connection test is indicated with a red cross and
Connection a hint “connection via proxy failed”. The red cross is also shown at incorrect or non-
existing proxy server settings.
Activate this checkbox in order to show all inactive licences that are assigned to the
respective Intercom Server. These licences are deactivate don the Intercom Server
Show inactive licences and licence server and can either be moved to the licence pool or be assigned to the
same or any other Intercom Server. 1)
1)
Does not apply for expired temporary licences.

106 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Licencing

Licence standardisation for SIP-C & IP licences

Feature VirtuoSIS 13.2 – Licence standardisation for SIP-C & IP licences
VirtuoSIS Licence compatibility between IoIP and SIP-C terminals is available by upgrading the Intercom
LICENCE L-SIS-13
system to VirtuoSIS 13.2 and updating CCT 800 to version 13.2.

Replacing current IoIP devices with Symphony devices previously required purchasing separate SIP-C
licences. Now, by upgrading the Intercom system to VirtuoSIS 13.2 and updating CCT 800 to version
13.2, SIS-IP licences can be used for SIP-C cards and SIP-C licences can be used for IP cards. For
example, switching from a SIS-IP-8 card to a SIS-SIP-C card no longer requires the purchase of new
licences.
Maintaining the same feature levels for Symphony devices and licensed IoIP devices is now possible,
allowing for consistent feature levels and the use of the same licensed features across both platforms.

NOTE: Upgrade licence required for SIP-C feature level A

An upgrade licence is required for SIP-C feature level A. Feature level A does not exist for IoIP. In
this case, the IoIP subscribers remain unlicenced until an upgrade licence is installed.
A SIS-SIP-8A licence can only be used in combination with an upgrade licence UG-8B or UG-1D.

Use cases for licence standardisation

 IoIP licences for SIP subscribers: Replacing IoIP devices with Symphony devices now allows for the
enhancement of the Intercom system with new functionality while keeping the same licences.

 SIP-C licences for IoIP subscribers: Replacing Symphony devices with Commend IoIP devices ena-
bles access to classic features in the Commend system while keeping the same licences.

Example: The example system configuration below illustrates the licence standardisation for IP and
SIP-C card types.
 Slot 1 has a SIS-IP-8 card and can now use an L-SIS-SIP-8D licence. This licence has 8 feature levels
(“D”). All feature levels can be assigned to the subscriber card on “slot 1” and are shown in the
column “Working as”. Note that the card type is no longer displayed in the “Working as” column.
 Slot 2 has a SIS-SIP-T card and is using an L-SIS-SIPT8D licence. Note that this card type continues
to be displayed with the feature level in the “Working as”column.
 Slot 3 has a SIS-SIP-C card and can now use an L-SIS-IP-8D licence. All feature levels can be assi-
gned to the subscriber card on “slot 3” as shown in the column “Working as”. Here as well, note
that the card type is no longer displayed in the “Working as” column.
 Slot 4 has a SIS-SIP-C card and uses an L-SIS-SIP-8D licence. Note that the card type is no longer
displayed in the “Working as” column.

Licence standardisation for SIP-C & IP licences

3.1/0923 107
Licencing Intercom Server Configuration

Manual licence assignment for subscriber cards

With CCT 800 5.1 or higher, licences can manually be assigned to any valid and available slot address
of a subscriber card. After the synchronisation, those licences will be assigned to the respective slot
address, which is not possible with the automatic licence assignment.

Requirements
The following Intercom Servers supports the manual licence assignment for subscriber cards:
 VirtuoSIS / IS 300 / IP-32 (generation 2)
The following configuration software is required:
 CCT 800 (min. 5.1)
A licence can be assigned to any slot address, provided that the manual licence assignment is selected
for the respective Intercom Server. Licences can only be assigned to slot addresses of supported card
types (e.g. IP licences to IP or SIP cards). As of VirtuoSIS 13.2 and CCT 800 13.2, manual licence assign-
ment now also allows licences for SIP or IoIP to be assigned to either card type (SIP-C and IP cards).
When assigning a licence to a slot address, the subsequent slot addresses will be occupied with the
respective feature level. See the following example:
Example: The licence “L-SIS-IP-8D” is assigned to the slot address “2/01”. This licence has 8 feature
levels (“D”). All feature levels can be assigned to the subscriber card on slot “2“.
Slot Card type Licence
1 IP-8D ---- ----
2 IP-8D DDDD DDDD
3 IP-8D ---- ----
4 IP-8D ---- ----

If the last slot address of a subscriber card is reserved, the remaining feature levels (if available) will be
assigned to the slot addresses of the subscriber card in the next slot. If there is no valid card in the next
slot for this licence, the remaining feature levels will be rejected. See the following examples:
Example: The licence “L-SIS-IP-8D” is assigned to the slot address “2/03”. This licence has 8 feature
levels (“D”). Only 6 feature levels can be assigned to the subscriber card on slot “2”. It is not possible
to use this licence for the following card type on the slot “03”. The remaining 2 feature levels are
assigned to the following subscriber card on slot “3”. This is possible because there is also an IP
subscriber card configured for slot “3”.
Slot Card type Licence
1 IP-8D ---- ----
2 IP-8D --DD DDDD
3 IP-8D DD-- ----
4 IP-8D ---- ----

Example: The licence “L-SIS-IP-8D” is assigned to the slot address “2/03”. This licence has 8 feature
levels (“D”). Only 6 feature levels can be assigned to the subscriber card on slot “2“. It is not possible
to use this licence for the following card type on the slot “03”. The following card type on slot “3”
(“SIP-C”) is not valid for this licence. The remaining 2 feature levels will be rejected.
Slot Card type Licence
1 IP-8D ---- ----
2 IP-8D --DD DDDD
3 SIP-C ---- ----
4 IP-8D ---- ----

108 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Licencing

If two or more feature levels are assigned to one slot address, the highest feature level will be used.
See the following example:
Example: The license “L-SIS-IP-8D” is assigned to the slot address “2/03”. This license has 8 feature
levels (“D”). Since the first feature level is assigned from address “03”, only 6 subscribers can be
used on slot “2”. The remaining 2 feature levels are assigned to the subsequent subscriber card on
slot “3”. In addition, a license “L-SIS-IP-8C” is assigned to slot address “3/01”. This license has 8 fea-
ture levels (“C”). At the overlap on the slot addresses “3/01” and “3/02” the highest feature level
(“D”) is used.
Slot Card type Licence
1 IP-8P ---- ----
2 IP-8P --DD DDDD
3 IP-8P DDCC CCCC
4 IP-8P ---- ----

Configuration CCT 800

To assign a licence to a lot address of a subscriber card manually, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Licence administration
2. In the drop-down list Licence assignment, Select the desired licence assignment type of the Intercom
Server. The following options are available:
 Automatic: Subscriber licences will be assigned by feature level in descending order (“D”, “C”,
“B” and “A”).
 Manual: Subscriber licences can be assigned manually. In manual mode, licences for SIP or IoIP
can be used for both card types (SIP-C and IP cards). Further information about the standardisation
of SIP and IoIP licences can be found on page 107.

ATTENTION: Changing the licence assignment

If the licence assignment is changed from “manual” to “automatic” or from “automatic” to “man-
ual”, a dialogue with a warning message appears! By clicking on Yes, licences will possibly be
moved to other slots when changing from “automatic” to “manual”! Therefore, it is recommended
that you create a backup before changing!

NOTES: Licence assignment

 By default, the option “manual” is selected.
 The automatic licence assignment concerns SIS-IP subscriber licences only.
 For a manual licence assignment, the upgrade licence (e.g. L-SIS-PRO7U) must be assigned to the
GEP card.
 In case of overlapping licences, the higher one is used – e.g. if the subscriber licences “C” and “D”
overlap, the licence with feature level “D” is used.

3. Click on the button Synchronise to synchronise the licence information between the licence server
and Intercom Server. In order to complete the licencing process, a warmstart of the respective
Intercom Server is required. Further information about the warmstart can be found on page 86.

3.1/0923 109
Licencing Intercom Server Configuration

Temporary licences
Temporary licences are free to use and have an useful life of 30 days, after the time the licence was
created (switching Intercom Servers off and on reduces this time). This licence class can be used for
testing purposes and emergency situations after hardware defects. A single temporary licence can only
be used once per type and slot.

NOTE: Temporary licences are not available for VirtuoSIS

Temporary licences are not available for VirtuoSIS.

Configuration CCT 800

To create a temporary licence, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Licence administration

ATTENTION: Active connection to the Intercom Server required

An active connection between CCT 800 and the respective Intercom Server is required!

The following dialogue appears:

Enter Licence(s)

110 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Licencing

2. Click on the button Create Temporary Licence. The following dialogue appears:

Create Temporary Licence

3. In the column Count, select the desired amount of the respective licences.
4. Click on the button Create to add the selected temporary licences to the licence pool.
After the temporary licences have been created and added to the licence pool, these licences can be
allocated to the Intercom Server.

NOTE: Remaining time is displayed in the card area

The remaining time of the respective temporary licence is displayed in the card area (see page 103).

3.1/0923 111
Launch VirtuoSIS Intercom Server Configuration

Launch VirtuoSIS
In the following, you will find a step-by-step setup guide to launch VirtuoSIS:
 VirtuoSIS Installation – see below
 Connect to VirtuoSIS – see below
 Basic CCT 800 configuration – see page 113
 Licencing – see page 118
 SIS key subscribers configuration – see page 125
 SIP functions – see page 463
 Symphony Bridge configuration – see page 496
 IT security – see page 516
Further information about creating a new VirtuoSIS Instance can be found on page 130.

VirtuoSIS installation
As first installation step, an OVA template has to be deployed on a hypervisor platform such as VMware
vSphere 7.0. The installation on the hypervisor Microsoft Hyper-V requires a ZIP file, which includes a
VHD file and settings files. In this installation procedure, the following settings have to be configured:
 Keyboard and region
 Hostname, IPv4 and IPv6 address, subnet mask and standard-gateway
 SSH port
 NTP server (optional)
 DNS servers (optional)
 Syslog server (optional)
 Intercom Server number
 IP address SIS-GEP card, subnet mask and gateway

NOTES: Further information

 All other IP settings have to be carried out via CCT 800 (see page 114).
 Further configurations are made with cis-ctl on the VirtuoSIS console. A manpage (help page) is
available for this command.
 For further information, see the product manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.

Connect to VirtuoSIS
As soon as the virtual machine is installed and running, a connection must be established between
VirtuoSIS and the computer, via which the VirtuoSIS will be configured via CCT 800. For further infor-
mation, see the product manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.

112 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Launch VirtuoSIS

Basic CCT 800 configuration

The next installation step is to carry out the basic CCT 800 configuration for VirtuoSIS. For each Virtu-
oSIS Instance, the IP settings as well as the subscriber configuration have to be carried out. During the
state “Setup”, VirtuoSIS restarts every 15 minutes and the conversation time is limited to 30 seconds.

NOTE: Final activation of VirtuoSIS

To continue with the final activation of VirtuoSIS, at least three Intercom stations have to be con-
figured as key subscribers to VirtuoSIS (key subscribers act as network dongles) – This is not
required for Intercom Server S3 and S6.

GOOD TO KNOW: Offline configuration for VirtuoSIS

With CCT 800 7.0 or higher, an offline configuration is possible for VirtuoSIS (see page 88).

Card configuration
Before licencing and configuring the respective card, the desired card types have to be selected. Per
default, only the SIS-NET card is selected in slot 15. Consider the following rules:
 As of VirtuoSIS 7.0, subscriber, interface, network and SIP cards can be assigned to any slot.

NOTES: Restrictions
 With VirtuoSIS 6.1 or lower, VirtuoSIS subscriber cards have to be assigned starting at slot 1 up to
slot 14 if the automatic licence assignment is selected.
 With VirtuoSIS 6.1 or lower, interface, network and SIP cards have to be assigned starting at slot
14 down to 1 (as long as these slots are not yet used for subscriber cards).

 As of VirtuoSIS 7.0, all slots are empty after initialisation.

NOTES: Restrictions
 With VirtuoSIS 5.0 or lower, a subscriber card is preselected for all slots after initialisation. With
VirtuoSIS 5.1 or higher, a subscriber card is preselected for all slots after initialisation when assign-
ing the licences manually. For the automatic licence assignment, the slots are greyed out.
 With VirtuoSIS 5.0 or lower, unused cards are preselected as subscriber cards.

 The following cards are available for VirtuoSIS and can be assigned to the slots shown below:
GEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 NET max. per min. SW
Instance version
SIS-GEP  1
SIS-NET  1
SIS-IP-8               14
SIS-LAN        7
SIS-IF               14
SIS-16A virtual               14
SIS-16E virtual               14
SIS-8E8A virtual               14
SIS-SIP-T               14 3.2
SIS-SIP-C               14 4.0
SYM-BRIDGE               14 10.0

3.1/0923 113
 Launch VirtuoSIS Intercom Server Configuration

GEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 NET max. per min. SW

Instance version
SIS-16Clients virtual               14 5.0
SIS-CSA               14 5.0

Configuration CCT 800

To configure the appropriate cards, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Intercom Server > Cards
2. Select the card in the drop-down list Card type for the desired VirtuoSIS Instance.

IP settings
In the next installation step, the IP settings of the assigned cards have to be carried out.

Configuration IP cards

NOTE: Jump button

Using the jump button in the area IP - Settings, you can quickly switch to the configuration
options in the area IP-Terminals. When switching from IP - Settings to IP-Terminals, the
field Terminal IP of the first subscriber of the IP card whose jump button is clicked is automat-
ically selected.

1. Go to: IP - Settings > tab Common

Y Feature PRO 800 10.0 – IPv6 for SIS-IF cards

With this feature, SIS-IF cards can be configured to use the hosts IPv6 configuration.

2. In case of an SIS-IF card, in the field Use VirtuoSIS Host IP Address select:
 -: The card is set to the IPv4 address from the field Card IP Address.
 IPv4: The card is made accessible via the hosts network interface via IP-protocol version 4.
 IPv6: The card is made accessible via the hosts network interface via IP-protocol version 6.
3. If - is selected in the field Use VirtuoSIS Host IP Address for an SIS-IF card and for all other card types
in the field Card IP Address, enter an IPv4 address for the card
4. In the field Subnet mask, enter a subnet mask for the assigned card.

ATTENTION: Assigning IP addresses

 If NET connections should be used, an IP address and a subnet mask have to be configured for the
SIS-NET card. All servers and NET cards must use the same subnet.
 SIS-SIP cards cannot be configured in this IP settings dialogue. SIS-SIP cards automatically use the
IP address of the host (which is shown at VirtuoSIS Master > Network Settings > tab Inter-
faces)!
 SIS-IF cards can either be configured to use the IP address of the host (IPv4/IPv6) or an individual
IPv4-address. In the latter case, the IP of each card needs to be unique. In case the IP address of the
host has changed, it will be updated when receiving the configuration in CCT 800 the next time.
 To check for conflicting settings use the collision checker introduced on page 51.

5. Go to: IP - Settings > tab NET - Firewall

ATTENTION: VLAN ID
For VirtuoSIS, the field Uplink VLAN ID and Downlink VLAN ID are without function!

6. Deactivate the checkbox Allow NET-ARP for uplink for uplink per instance. A deactivated instance is
no longer connected via NET networking to the remaining instances of its own master.

114 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Launch VirtuoSIS

Configuration Network

NOTE: Configuration
The configuration of the SSH port is done via the console configuration. For further information,
see the product manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.

1. Go to: VirtuoSIS Master > Network Settings > tab Network

2. Deactivate the checkbox NET networking allowed to prevent NET networking between several
VirtuoSIS Masters (activated by default).

NOTE: NET networking allowed

This configuration is convenient if two VirtuoSIS Masters autarkic be operated in parallel.

Configuration DNS settings

NOTE: Configuration
The configuration of the DNS settings is done via the VirtuoSIS console. For further information,
see the product manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.

Additional network interfaces

VirtuoSIS

G LICENCE PRO8U
Feature PRO 800 8.1 and SIS-MI – Additional network interfaces
Additional network interfaces can be used with this feature.
PRO 800

LICENCE SIS-MI

As of VirtuoSIS 8.1 and with the licence L-SIS-PRO8x or newer, several network interfaces can be used
to realize isolated network segments. This will increase availability and security. For an Intercom Server
S3 or S6, two network interfaces are available by default (“br0” and “br1”). Within a virtual environ-
ment (Microsoft Hyper-V or VMware vSphere), it depends on the hypervisor how many network inter-
faces can maximally be used. By default, up to two network interfaces can be used with a hypervisor.
If more than two network interfaces be used (e.g. for further isolated network segments), the licence L-
SIS-MI is required.

PRO8U PRO8U PRO8U SIS-MI

...
Intercom Server S3 Intercom Server S6 VirtuoSIS in a
virtual environment
Additional network interfaces

3.1/0923 115
Launch VirtuoSIS Intercom Server Configuration

Thus, the transmission protocols SIP, IoIP and ICX, which are supported by VirtuoSIS, can be transmit-
ted via isolated network interfaces. Furthermore, IoIP can be split into Intercom stations and network.
For each virtual card at IP Settings, another network interface can be used.

SIP IoIP IF/ICX

(br0)

Intercom Intercom
stations network
IP Settings

ATTENTION: System accessibility

 The network adapter that is equivalent to the network interface “br0” in CCT 800 must not be
removed, otherwise the functionality of VirtuoSIS cannot be ensured anymore!
 Ensure that the network interface, which is used for the communication to VirtuoSIS via a GEP or an
IF card, is available and accessible in the network in order to be able to access the system.
 A distinct assignment of the network interfaces in CCT 800 to the network adapters in the hypervisor
is only possible via the respective MAC address as the names of the network adapters, which depend
on the hypervisor, and the respective configuration for the shown names in CCT 800 may differ (see
also product manual “VirtuoSIS Configuration Guide”).

NOTE: Network segmentation

The following conditions for the network segmentation have to be considered:
 Data transmission from the Linux host and SIP is always done via the network interface “br0”.
 The LAN card can only be allocated to the same network interface to which the NET card is allocated.

116 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Launch VirtuoSIS

Example for several network interfaces

VirtuoSIS on
Microsoft Hyper-V

br3

br2
br1 Intercom Server S6
VirtuoSIS Intercom network
br0
on VMware
vSphere

Intercom Server S3
Example for several network interfaces

NOTES: Network interfaces

 After adding or removing a network interface in a hypervisor, VirtuoSIS has to be restarted.
 It is recommended to choose a name for the network interface depending on its purpose of use
(e.g. “SIP, ICX” and “IoIP, Network”).
 In the selection list of the drop-down field only the network interfaces are shown which are avail-
able in the system. If e.g. a network interface is removed and the configuration is received from
VirtuoSIS, this network interface is not shown any more.
 For the Intercom Server S3 or S6, only the network interfaces can be selected which are available
for the Intercom Server (“br0” and “br1”).
 If a network interface configured in CCT 800 is no longer available in a hypervisor, the fallback
interface “br0” is used. However, the configuration is kept and the respective drop-down list in
CCT 800 is highlighted red in order to indicate a missing network interface that can be re-added in
the hypervisor if required. When an network interface available in CCT 800 is selected in the drop-
down list, the network interface highlighted red can no longer be selected.

Configuration network interface

1. Go to: VirtuoSIS Master > Network Settings > tab Interfaces
2. Enter a name for the network interface in the field Interface Description.

Configuration cards
1. Go to: IP Settings > tab Common
2. Select the desired network interface in the drop-down list Interface.

3.1/0923 117
Launch VirtuoSIS Intercom Server Configuration

Licencing

ATTENTION: Licence administration

 Due to copy protection in virtual environments, VirtuoSIS licences cannot be deactivated!
 Within a VirtuoSIS Master, it is only possible to move a licence within a VirtuoSIS Instance or from
one VirtuoSIS Instance to another VirtuoSIS Instance!
 IP subscriber licences must be assigned to the corresponding IP card! These subscriber licences can
be assigned automatically (i.e. subscriber licences are assigned by feature level in descending order
(“D”, “C”, “B” and “A”) or manually. For further information, see page 108!
 Before licencing the interface and network cards, it is recommended to choose the desired card type
at Intercom Server > Cards! If all 14 slots of a VirtuoSIS Instance are used, an additional VirtuoSIS
Instance (max. 10 VirtuoSIS Instances per base licence Professional/VirtuoSIS Master) has to be cre-
ated! With the base licence Starter, only one VirtuoSIS Instance can be used!

Licence assignment
Subscriber licences can be assigned either automatically (i.e. subscriber licences are assigned by
feature level in descending order (“D”, “C”, “B” and “A”) or manually. The licence assignment can be
changed separately for each VirtuoSIS Instance. With a manual licence assignment, subscriber licences
can be allocated to the desired slot individually. For further information, see page 108.

Base licencing
A base licence enables the use of one VirtuoSIS Master (with up to 10 VirtuoSIS Instances with base
licence Professional or 1 VirtuoSIS Instance with base licence Starter).

ATTENTION: Base licencing

First, it is necessary to allocate a base licence. A base licence creates a serial number for VirtuoSIS –
without this serial number, no further licences can be assigned!

Configuration CCT 800

To activate the base licence, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Licence administration
2. Allocate the base licence to the first VirtuoSIS Instance.
Name Description Allocation of the licence to the virtual card in VirtuoSIS
L-SIS-PROx/ Base licence Professional for up
GEP card of the first VirtuoSIS Instance
L-SIS-x to 10 VirtuoSIS Instances
L-SIS32-PROx Base licence Starter for
GEP card of the available VirtuoSIS Instance
L-SIS32-x 1 VirtuoSIS Instance

3. Click on the button Synchronise to assign the base licence to the VirtuoSIS Master.

NOTES: Further information

 For an overview of the VirtuoSIS Masters, go to Menu Intercom Server > Allocate SIS ins-
tances.
 Further information about licencing can be found on page 96.

Upgrade licence
It is possible to upgrade a lower VirtuoSIS licence to a higher one in order to use the features of a new
VirtuoSIS version.

Configuration CCT 800

To activate the upgrade licence, follow the instructions below:

118 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Launch VirtuoSIS

1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Licence administration

2. Allocate the upgrade licence to the first VirtuoSIS Instance.
Name Description Allocation of the licence to the virtual card in VirtuoSIS
Upgrade licence from a lower
L-SIS-PROxU
VirtuoSIS Professional licence to GEP card of the first VirtuoSIS Instance
L-SIS-xU
a higher one
L-SIS32PROxU/ Upgrade licence for
GEP card of the available VirtuoSIS Instance
L-SIS32-xU VirtuoSIS Starter
Upgrade licence from
L-SIS32-UPG VirtuoSIS Starter to GEP card of the available VirtuoSIS Instance
VirtuoSIS Professional
Upgrade licence from a lower
VirtuoSIS Professional licence to
L-USUB-xx GEP card of the first VirtuoSIS Instance
a higher one with
Upgrade Subscription
Upgrade licence from a lower
VirtuoSIS Starter licence to a
L-USUB32-xx GEP card of the available VirtuoSIS Instance
higher one with
Upgrade Subscription

3. Click on the button Synchronise to finish the licence allocation.

NOTES: Further Information

 With means of an upgrade licence, all VirtuoSIS Instances within a VirtuoSIS Master will be up-
graded.
 The version upgrade licence must be chosen depending on the base licence. A base licence Starter
(e.g. L-SIS32-PROx) requires an upgrade licence for VirtuoSIS Starter (e.g. L-SIS32-12U) and a base
licence Professional (e.g. L-SIS-PROx) requires an upgrade licence for VirtuoSIS Professional (e.g.
L-SIS-12U). This applies regardless of whether an upgrade licence from VirtuoSIS Starter to
VirtuoSIS Professional is installed.
 Further information about licencing can be found on page 96.

Slot licencing
The next step is to attach further licences. Each slot in VirtuoSIS has to be licenced separately. The
following licences can be used for VirtuoSIS:

NOTES: Card handling

 Starting with VirtuoSIS 5.1, cards can be allocated in every slot individually (slot 1 to slot 14).
 Slot 15 is designed exclusively for the SIS-NET card.

3.1/0923 119
 Launch VirtuoSIS Intercom Server Configuration

IP subscriber licences
Name Description Allocation of the licence to the virtual card in VirtuoSIS
Licence for 2 subscribers with fea-
L-SIS-IP-2B Any SIS-IP-8 card
ture level “B”
Licence for 8 subscribers with fea-
L-SIS-IP-8B Any SIS-IP-8 card
ture level “B”
Licence for 32 subscribers with fea-
L-SIS-IP-32B Any SIS-IP-8 card
ture level “B”
Licence for 8 subscribers with fea-
L-SIS-IP-8C Any SIS-IP-8 card
ture level “C”
Licence for 32 subscribers with fea-
L-SIS-IP-32C Any SIS-IP-8 card
ture level “C”
Licence for 2 subscribers with fea-
L-SIS-IP-2D Any SIS-IP-8 card
ture level “D”
Licence for 8 subscribers with fea-
L-SIS-IP-8D Any SIS-IP-8 card
ture level “D”
Upgrade licence for 1 subscriber
from feature level B or C to
L-UG-1D Any SIS-IP-8 or SIS-SIP-C card
feature level D
(with VirtuoSIS 5.0 or higher)

NOTE: Feature levels

If the automatic licence assignment is activated, the licences above will be sorted from the highest fea-
ture level to the lowest by slot number automatically. This means, that the highest feature level will be
applied to the lowest card slot. Alternatively, licences can be allocated manually to the desired slots
(see page 118).

 SIP subscriber licences

Feature PRO 800 4.0 – SIP-C

This feature allows the use of SIP-C cards.

Name Description Allocation of the licence to the virtual card in VirtuoSIS

Licence for 2 SIP-C B subscribers
L-SIS-SIP-2B SIS-SIP-C card
(e.g. help points)
Licence for 2 SIP-C D subscribers
L-SIS-SIP-2D SIS-SIP-C card
(e.g. master station/control desk)
L-SIS-SIP-8A Licence for 8 SIP-C A subscribers SIS-SIP-C card
Licence for 8 SIP-C B subscribers
L-SIS-SIP-8B SIS-SIP-C card
(e.g. help points)
L-SIS-SIP-8C Licence for 8 SIP-C C subscribers SIS-SIP-C card
Licence for 8 SIP-C D subscribers
L-SIS-SIP-8D SIS-SIP-C card
(e.g. master station/control desk)
Upgrade licence for 8 subscribers
L-UG-8B from feature level A to feature level any SIP-C card
B (with VirtuoSIS 7.0 or higher)
Upgrade licence for 1 subscriber
from feature level B or C to feature
L-UG-1D any SIS-IP-8 or SIP-C card
level D (with VirtuoSIS 5.0 or
higher)

120 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Launch VirtuoSIS

ATTENTION: Licence limitations

It is only possible to use the SIS-SIP-C licences in combination with the Intercom Server Software
PRO 800 4.0 and upgrade licence “L-SIS-PRO4U” or a base licence “SIS-PRO4” or higher!

NOTE: Licencing
Before licencing, the desired SIP-C card has to be created (Intercom Server > Cards).

Interface licences
Name Description Allocation of the licence to the virtual card in VirtuoSIS
L-SIS-ICX Single licence for ICX interface GEP card or SIS-IF card
 Allocation to GEP card: With the licence L-SIS-ICX, the first ICX interface can be activated to provide
full functionality. Without licence, the interfaces can only be used for CCT 800 configuration or
ComLOG.

Description 1) Type Application

Depending on the allocated licence (e.g. ICX or ComWIN). Without
n/0-10 ICX/TCP
licence: CCT 800 configuration only
n/0-11 CCT/TCP CCT 800 configuration only
1) “n” is the server ID

3.1/0923 121
 Launch VirtuoSIS Intercom Server Configuration

SIP trunk licences

Name Description Allocation of the licence to the virtual card in VirtuoSIS
L-SIS-SIPT1D Licence for 1 SIP-T D channel SIS-SIP-T card
L-SIS-SIPT8D Licence for 8 SIP-T D channels SIS-SIP-T card
L-SIS-SIPT8B Licence for 8 SIP-T B channels SIS-SIP-T card

NOTE: Licencing
If more single licences are used on one SIS card, the client numbers have to be changed manually.

Network licences
Name Description Allocation of the licence to the virtual card in VirtuoSIS
F L-SIS-LAN-4 Licence for 4 LAN connections SIS-NET or SIS-LAN card

L-SIS-LAN-8 Licence for 8 LAN connections SIS-NET or SIS-LAN card

L-SIS-WAN-8 Licence for 8 WAN connections SIS-NET or SIS-LAN card
L-SYM-BRIDGE Licence for Symphony Bridge GEP card of the first VirtuoSIS Instance
Licence for more than 2 network
L-SIS-MI GEP card of the first VirtuoSIS Instance
interfaces

NOTES: Network licences

 The LAN and WAN licences listed in the table above can be allocated to the SIS-NET card individually
or in combination. Per SIS-NET card, up to 8 connections (LAN and/or WAN) can be configured.
 The LAN and WAN licences listed in the table above can be allocated to the SIS-LAN card individually
or in combination. Per SIS-LAN card, up to 16 connections (LAN and/or WAN) can be configured.
 Consider that a SIS-NET card provides NET connectivity without any additional licence.

Various platform-independent licences

Many other products can be activated via server type independent licences (ComADAPT, ComINT,
ComOPC, ComPLC, ComREC, ComREPORT, ComSCHEDULE, ComVIDEO, ComWIN, Intercom Client,
Milestone Server Interface, Pelco Endura and TETRA). These licences typically have to be assigned to
specific card slots and client addresses.

ATTENTION: Licence limitations

It is not possible to use platform independent licences with VirtuoSIS other than the types mentioned
above!

Licence example
This example is only valid for the automatic licence assignment. The following licences are used:
Subscriber licences
 L-SIS-IP-8B assigned to the GEP card
 L-SIS-IP-8C assigned to the GEP card
 L-SIS-IP-2D assigned to the GEP card
Interface licences
 2 x L-SIS-ICX assigned to the SIS-ICX card (client 1 and client 5 of slot 12)
Network licences
 2 x L-SIS-WAN-8 assigned to the SIS-LAN card (slot 13 and slot 14)

122 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Launch VirtuoSIS

 L-SIS-LAN-8 assigned to the SIS-LAN card (slot 14)

Licencing example

3.1/0923 123
Launch VirtuoSIS Intercom Server Configuration

The VirtuoSIS cards are licenced as follows:

Card 1 Card 2 Card 3 Card 12 Card 13
Subscriber 1 D Subscriber 1 C Subscriber 1 B Interface 1 TCP/IP Connection 1 WAN
Subscriber 2 D Subscriber 2 C Subscriber 2 B Interface 2 Connection 2 WAN
Subscriber 3 C Subscriber 3 B Subscriber 3 Interface 3 Connection 3 WAN
Subscriber 4 C Subscriber 4 B Subscriber 4 Interface 4 Connection 4 WAN
Subscriber 5 C Subscriber 5 B Subscriber 5 Interface 5 Serial Connection 5 WAN
Subscriber 6 C Subscriber 6 B Subscriber 6 Interface 6 Connection 6 WAN
Subscriber 7 C Subscriber 7 B Subscriber 7 Connection 7 WAN
Subscriber 8 C Subscriber 8 B Subscriber 8 Connection 8 WAN
Card 14
Connection 1 WAN Connection 9 LAN
Connection 2 WAN Connection 10 LAN
Connection 3 WAN Connection 11 LAN
Connection 4 WAN Connection 12 LAN
Connection 5 WAN Connection 13 LAN
Connection 6 WAN Connection 14 LAN
Connection 7 WAN Connection 15 LAN
Connection 8 WAN Connection 16 LAN

124 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Launch VirtuoSIS

Allocate SIS key subscriber

ATTENTION: No key subscribers required for S3 and S6
 It is only possible to activate VirtuoSIS key subscribers once!
 When using VirtuoSIS running on a S3 or S6, no key subscribers are required. In this case, the Inter-
com Server itself serves as a hardware dongle.

VirtuoSIS uses connected Intercom stations as dongles to prohibit using a VM image multiple times.
Per VirtuoSIS Master, a minimum of 3 subscribers have to be configured as key subscribers. It is re-
commended to use only control desks or important Intercom stations as key subscribers.

NOTES: Supported key subscribers

 EE 9xxA, ET 9xxA (exceptions: ET 901A, ET 901D), WS-IP, EF 962A: min. DSP 900A 5.3/min, IoIP device
7.1
 ET 9xxH, EF 962H, EF 962HM, AFLS xx, SIS-DONGLE: min. DSP 900B (hybrid) 6.0/min, IoIP device 7.1
 EE 980: min. EE 980 1.0
 AF xxxl: min. AF-I 5.3
 SIS-DONGLE (min. VirtuoSIS 4.x and base licence “L-SIS-PRO4” or upgrade licence “L-SIS-PRO4U”)

Furthermore, it is recommended to use as many Intercom stations as key subscribers as possible. The
high number of key subscribers is important, because 2/3 of the key subscribers must be online to use
the system without restrictions.

NOTES: Requirements to run the system

 Per VirtuoSIS Master, a minimum of 3 key subscribers must be configured – recommended are as
many as possible.
 2/3 of the key subscribers must be online.
 Further information in case of faulty key subscribers can be found in the product manual “Virtuo-
SIS Setup Guide”.

SIS-DONGLE
Instead of a regular Intercom station (within the Intercom system), it is possible to use a SIS-DONGLE
as key subscriber. In this case, the SIS-DONGLE has to be configured as a regular Intercom station,
however no audio functions are available.

SIS-DONGLE

3.1/0923 125
Launch VirtuoSIS Intercom Server Configuration

Overview of allocated key subscribers

The following table demonstrates how many key subscribers can be offline to run VirtuoSIS without
restrictions. The total number of key subscribers is shown in the table header, the min. number of
active key subscribers is shown with a green background and the max. number of offline key sub-
scribers is shown with a red background.

3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19
20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21
22 22 22
23 23 23
24 24 24
25 25
26 26
27 27
28
29
30

126 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Launch VirtuoSIS

Configuration
Configuration CCT 800

NOTES: Requirements for allocating the key subscribers

 The Intercom stations to be used as key subscribers must be online and already configured.
 The configuration has to be send to and received from VirtuoSIS.

1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Determine SIS key subscribers

Selecting key subscribers in CCT 800

1 SIS instances
This dialogue shows the VirtuoSIS Master and the assigned VirtuoSIS Instances. In case the VirtuoSIS
Master is selected, all subscribers of the system are indicated in the key subscriber dialogue. If a Virtu-
oSIS Instance is selected, only the subscribers within this VirtuoSIS Instance are indicated.

2 Configuration dialogue for key subscriber selection

In this configuration dialogue, all subscribers that can be used as key subscribers are displayed.
2. Activate the checkbox Key subscriber selection to select all subscribers you wish to use as key
subscribers (dongle stations).
3. Click on Licence Information to show the current licence information.
4. In the field State, the state of the subscriber is indicated.
5. Activate the checkbox Key subscriber to use the subscriber as key subscriber.
6. In the field Call number, the call number of the subscriber is displayed.
7. In the field Name, the name of the subscriber is displayed.
8. In the field Type, the type of the subscriber is displayed.
9. In the field MAC address, the MAC address of the subscriber is displayed.

NOTE: Activation
After the activation of VirtuoSIS, all subscribers are shown greyed out.

3 Information bar
The information bar indicates the current status of the key subscriber query. It can take up to several
minutes to receive key subscriber information from VirtuoSIS.

3.1/0923 127
Launch VirtuoSIS Intercom Server Configuration

4 Key bar
The key bar indicates the runtime key and the activation key. See the following screenshot:

Runtime key and activation key in CCT 800

1 Activation key
2 Runtime key

NOTE: Writing down the keys

It is recommended to write down the keys after activation. In case of an incomplete registration pro-
cess, it is possible to activate VirtuoSIS manually using these keys. After a successful activation, the
activation key is no longer necessary.

5 Buttons
10.Click on the button Get Data to get or update the current available subscribers.
11.Click on the button Activate to activate VirtuoSIS with the selected key subscribers.

NOTES: Activation
 This button is only available, if 3 or more subscribers are selected.
 It is only possible to activate the VirtuoSIS key subscribers within the same region. A key sub-
scriber activation over WAN is not possible.

12.Click on the button Test Licence Server Connection to check the connection to the licence server.
The following states are possible:
: Connection to the licence server is active.
: No connection to the licence server, check your Internet connection.
13.Click on the button Close to close the “Determine SIS key subscriber” dialogue without saving.

NOTE: Backup
For support purposes, it is recommended to carry out a backup after the activation. For further
information, see the product manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.

Offline activation
If the computer on which CCT 800 is running is not connected to the Internet, it is possible to activate
VirtuoSIS manually after the key subscriber determination. For activation, follow the steps below:
1. Carry out the key subscriber determination (see page 125). If the computer is not connected to the
Internet, no activation key will be created. For the activation, the created runtime key is necessary.
Copy the runtime key, which is indicated in the key bar (see page 128).
2. Open the following website: https://license.intercom-online.cc/Activation.aspx?language=en
3. In the field SN GEP/GEM, enter the runtime key.

NOTE: Runtime key

Be careful to enter the runtime key and not the serial number of VirtuoSIS.

4. In the field Licence key, enter the licence code of the L-SIS-PRO licence (see page 118).
5. Click on the button start activation. An activation code will be generated, which has to be entered in
CCT 800.

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Licence Administration

128 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Launch VirtuoSIS

2. In the card area, right click on the L-SIS-PRO licence and click on the option “Enter/Change activation
code”.
3. In the field Activation code, enter the activation code and click on the button OK.
4. Click on the button Synchronise.

Show key subscribers

Key subscribers are not only shown in CCT 800 in the window Determine SIS key subscribers but also
at Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common. In the column Mutation, every key subscriber
is marked with the key symbol .

Show key subscribers

Troubleshooting in case of an incomplete activation

During the activation process, it is possible to reset already allocated key subscribers and allocate them
again – e.g. in case of a faulty connection to the licence server or incorrectly assigned key subscribers.

ATTENTION: Resetting key subscribers

If the activation is already completed, it is no longer possible to reset key subscribers!

 Open the VirtuoSIS console.

 Enter the following command to reset the key subscribers:
cis-ctl clear-pending-macs
 Enter the following command for restart to delete the old key subscribers in VirtuoSIS:
sudo sv restart commend-sis
 Select the desired key subscribers again (see page 125).

3.1/0923 129
Create a new VirtuoSIS Instance Intercom Server Configuration

Create a new VirtuoSIS Instance

With a VirtuoSIS Professional licence, it is possible to allocate up to 10 VirtuoSIS Instances to one Vir-
tuoSIS Master.

NOTE: Number of supported instances

About the number of supported instances depending on the VirtuoSIS licence see page 118.
Supported instances on Commend Intercom servers (about determining the platform used see
page 89, about supported third-party virtualisation platforms see product manual “VirtuoSIS Setup
Guide”):
Platform Instances
COMMEND S3 - 1.0 to 1.1 up to 1
COMMEND S3 - 2.0 up to 2
COMMEND S6 - 1.0 to 4.0 up to 4
Third-party virtualisation platform up to 10

Configuration CCT 800

To create a new VirtuoSIS Instance and allocate it to the desired VirtuoSIS Master, follow the instruc-
tions below. An VirtuoSIS licence must be installed on the server before:
1. Go to: Intercom Server > Cards
2. Right click on the upper area and select the option “Add Intercom Server”. The following dialogue
appears:

Create a new VirtuoSIS Instance

3. Activate the radio button SIS.
4. In the field Server-ID, enter the desired server ID.

NOTE: Unique system numbers

In order to ensure the correct functioning of the system, pay attention to unique server IDs when
assigning instances within a VirtuoSIS master. This also applies to WAN regions and licence admin-
istration.

5. Click on the button OK.

NOTE: Network address of the new VirtuoSIS Instance

IP addresses and subnet masks are filled in to the dialogue New Intercom Server automatically.
For the newly created VirtuoSIS Instance, the default IP address for the GEP card (“10.10.xxx.1”)
and an IP address for the NET card are allocated. This configuration must be sent via CCT 800 in
order for it to take effect.

130 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Create a new VirtuoSIS Instance

 Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Allocate SIS instances

Indication of instances in CCT 800

1 In the column Not assigned SIS instances, all unassigned VirtuoSIS Instances are displayed.
2 In the column SIS masters and assigned instances, all VirtuoSIS Masters and the VirtuoSIS Instanc-
es that are assigned to the respective VirtuoSIS Master are displayed.
3 With the arrow button, you can switch the VirtuoSIS Instance from the column Not assigned SIS
instances to the desired VirtuoSIS Master in the column VirtuoSIS Master and assigned instances.
4 This bar indicates the current status.
5 Click on Execute to start the assignment or on Cancel to close the dialogue.

How to assign a VirtuoSIS Instance to the VirtuoSIS Master

1. In the column Not assigned SIS instance, select the desired VirtuoSIS Instance.
2. In the column VirtuoSIS Master and assigned instances, select the desired VirtuoSIS Master.
3. With the arrow button , assign the VirtuoSIS Instance to the VirtuoSIS Master.
4. Click on the button Execute to carry out the assignment.

How to delete an assigned VirtuoSIS Instance

1. In the column VirtuoSIS Master and assigned instances, right click on the desired VirtuoSIS Instance
and click on the option “Delete instance”.
2. Click on the button Execute to delete the VirtuoSIS Instance.

NOTES: Deleting VirtuoSIS Instances

 It is not possible to delete VirtuoSIS Instances with allocated licences. To delete these VirtuoSIS
Instances, the licence has to be moved to another VirtuoSIS Instance within the same VirtuoSIS
Master via the licencing dialogue.
 It is not possible to delete all VirtuoSIS Instances, because the licences cannot be deactivated and
therefore one VirtuoSIS Instance has to remain active.
 After deletion of a VirtuoSIS Instance, it is recommended to receive the current VirtuoSIS configu-
ration via CCT 800 again. Otherwise, the deleted VirtuoSIS Instance is still part of the CCT 800 con-
figuration file, which was originally opened or received.

3.1/0923 131
Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations Intercom Server Configuration

Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations

With the program IPStationConfig, the first installation steps for IP, SIP and hybrid Intercom stations
can be carried out. Further configuration is carried out in CCT 800.
IPStationConfig is installed automatically with CCT 800 and can only be used in local networks (LAN).
This means, before the IP terminals are installed at the respective locations, all IP terminals have to be
configured in a local network previously. The PC which is used for configuration does not have to be-
long to the same subnet as the IP terminals. The following chapters are available:
 Network requirements for IP stations – see below
 Compatibility stations – IPStationConfig – see page 106
 IPStationConfig program interface – see page 108
 Configuration of IP stations – see page 117
 Configuration of SIP stations – see page 122
 Configuration of hybrid stations – see page 123
 Station redundancy – see page 124

Network requirements for IP stations

IP addresses and ports
 Each IP subscriber card must have a fix IP address.
 For an IP Intercom station, the DHCP function is available. If the DHCP function is not used, the IP
Intercom station must have a fix IP address.
 In case of a changing public IP address, a dynamic registration of an IP Intercom station is possible.
 The communication to the program IPStationConfig requires the standard UDP port 16399.
 The communication between the Intercom Server and the IP Intercom stations requires the standard
UDP port 16400 (configuration via firewall or router, only one port for audio and signalling data).

ATTENTION: Required firmware versions for communication ports

Communication via port 16400 (Single Port Protocol) is possible with the following minimum firm-
ware versions:
 ET 901: 02.4 Build 03 / 03.1 Build 03
 DSP900 (for ET 908): 03.1 Build 04
Otherwise, the communication is done via port 16400 to 16404.

QoS requirements
 One-way delay max. 100 ms
 Delay jitter max. 50 ms
 0% packet loss for perfect audio quality

Bandwidth
3.5 kHz 7 kHz 16 kHz

Bandwidth (speech and data) 1) 96 kBit/s 96 kBit/s 143 kBit/s

Speech is compressed to 1 x G.711 standard 1 x G.722 standard 2 x G.722 standard
1)
The required bandwidth depends on the desired number of speech links. Bandwidth incl. protocol overhead
per IP terminal, upload and download.

132 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations

Compatibility stations – IPStationConfig

Configuration of the IP, SIP or hybrid stations with IPStationConfig is restricted to the respective firm-
ware version.

ET 901
2.0 build 3
The following settings can be configured:
 IP address
 Subnet mask
 IP address of the Intercom Server
 IP address of the router
 Port number

2.2
The following settings can be configured in addition:
 Additional data to be saved in the ET 901 (colour, description, call number)
 Indication of the firmware version of the ET 901 and the connection status to the Intercom Server
 Definition of passwords for all or single ET 901
 Firmware download in ET 901 (without the need to use CCT 800)
 Use of expansion and option boards (e.g. EB2E2A)

02.4 build 01 / 03.1 build 01

The following settings can be configured:
 Ethernet parameters

02.5 build 01 / 03.2 build 01

The following settings can be configured:
 VLAN parameters
 Dynamic registration on the Intercom Server
 DHCP functionality

DSP900 (for ET 908)

03.1 build 01
The following settings can be configured:
 Ethernet parameters

03.2 build 01
The following settings can be configured:
 VLAN parameters
 Dynamic registration on the Intercom Server
 DHCP functionality

3.1/0923 133
Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations Intercom Server Configuration

SIP stations
SIP 3.6 (build 105)
The following settings can be configured:
 IP address
 Subnet mask
 IP address of the router
 DHCP functionality

NOTE: Settings can also be configured in the web interface

All settings as listed above can also be carried out via the web interface of the SIP station.

Hybrid stations
SIP 3.6 (build 105)
The following settings can be configured:
 Boot mode (run as SIP or hybrid station)
 IP address
 Subnet mask
 IP address of the router
 DHCP functionality

NOTE: Settings can also be configured in the web interface

All settings as listed above can also be carried out via the web interface of the hybrid station.

134 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations

Program interface – IPStationConfig

Program interface - IPStationConfig

Menu bar
Menu Description
File
The configuration of IPStationConfig can be loaded from an XML file. When an
Load XML-Settings XML file is opened while an IPStationConfig configuration is already open, it is
possible to merge the two configurations.
Save XML-Settings Saves the IPStationConfig configuration as XML file.
Print Prints the IP configuration of the IP stations that are listed in the table .
Group by subscriber Groups subscribers by the MAC address
Reset Table-Layout Reset the layout of the table (i.e. placement and width of columns).
Exit Close the program IPStationConfig
1)
If merging is selected, the fields, which are overwritten, are highlighted red.
Station
Query Stations Shows all available IP subscribers within the connected network in the table .
In this drop-down list, the mode for sending the configuration can be selected.
With clicking on the button Write settings, the configuration will be sent to the re-
spective IP stations. The following modes are available:
Write settings
 all: The entire configuration is sent.
 modified: The configuration is sent only to modified stations.
 selected: The configuration is sent only to selected stations.
Clear Settings Removes all IP stations from the table and deletes the loaded configuration.
Firmware Download Carries out a firmware update of the selected IP station (see page 115).

3.1/0923 135
Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations Intercom Server Configuration

Menu Description
Station
Protects a single subscriber or a group of IP subscribers with a password to pre-
Set Password
vent unwanted changes to the IPStationConfig configuration
Set Factory Default
All settings of the selected IP stations are reset to default settings.
(Reset)
Export Settings Exports the IPStationConfig configuration as Excel, text or HTML file.
Searches for the IP stations with the given IP addresses within the connected
Query remote station
network and shows them in the table (see page 112).
1)
Changed settings will applied only after the configuration has been sent to the IP subscriber.
Help
About The IPStationConfig program version is indicated.

Toolbar
With the toolbar in the header, it is possible to carry out all the desired settings by simply clicking a
button or directly entering an IP address of an Intercom Server to connect to.
Button Description
Loads the configuration of IPStationConfig from an XML file. When an XML file is
opened while an IPStationConfig configuration is already open, it is possible to
merge the two configurations.
Saves the IPStationConfig configuration as XML file.

Shows all available IP subscribers within the connected network in the table .
Searches for the IP stations with the given IP addresses within the connected network
and shows them in the table (see page 112).
In this drop-down list, the mode for sending the configuration can be selected. With
clicking on the button Write settings, the configuration will be sent to the respective
IP stations. The following modes are available:
 all: The entire configuration is sent.
 modified: The configuration is sent only to modified stations.
 selected: The configuration is sent only to selected stations.
Cancels the sending process of the IPStationConfig configuration.

Enables the section “Link Config / VLAN” in the table .

Enables the section “Fallback” in the table (see page 111).
Enables the section “SNMP” in the table (see page 112).
1)
If merging is selected, the fields, which are overwritten, are highlighted red.

Network connection
In the drop-down list in the status bar , the desired network card can be selected. A failure in the net-
work connection is indicated with a blinking blue box in the status bar.

136 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations

Table
In the table , the following configuration of the queried IP subscribers is shown:
Function Description
General
In this field, the current boot mode is indicated. The boot mode can be changed at hybrid sta-
BootMode
tions (SIP or Intercom).
Activate this checkbox so that the IP station requests IP address of the IP station, subnet mask
DHCP
and IP address of the router from a DHCP server.
In this field, the IP address of the IP station can be entered. The checkbox DHCP must be
IP-Address
deactivated.
In this field, the subnet mask of the IP station can be entered. The checkbox DHCP must be
Subnet Mask
deactivated.
In this field, the IP address of the router or gateway can be entered via which the Intercom
Router-IP
Servers shall communicate. The checkbox DHCP must be deactivated.
Mac In this field, the MAC address of the IP subscriber is indicated (cannot be configured).
Address

Shows the current state of the main connection. 1) 2) The following states are available:
Station is registered via this connection.
Connection is available but station is not registered via this connection.
Connection is not configured (i.e. this connection has the IP address “0.0.0.0”).
Connection is not available.
In this field, the IP address of the IP subscriber card can be entered that shall be allocated to
Card-IP
this IP subscriber.
In this field, the standard destination port number can be entered (by default, “16400”). The
Port
port numbers must only be changed for special configurations with NAT.
DYN Activate this checkbox in order to activate the dynamic registration via the MAC address.
In this field, a name for the IP station can be entered, which identifies the IP station for the
Host name
DHCP server. If no name is entered, a standard name will be used when using DHCP.
1) Required station firmware: AF-I 6.3, ET901 4.6, IoIP-Device 7.2, WS-TM 2.0 or higher.
2) IPStationConfig version 6.3.5 or higher required.
Basic
Color In this field, color coding can be advised to subscribers. 1)
In this field, the current status of the device in dependency to the program IPStationConfig is
Status
indicated (“Ready”, “Success”, “Timeout” or “Firmware Download”). 1)
In this field, the status of the connection between the IP Intercom station and the Intercom
Online
Server is indicated (online: green icon, offline: red icon).
CallNo In this field, the call number of the IP Intercom station can be entered. 1)
Description In this field, a text for identification of the IP Intercom station can be entered. 1)
Station In this field, the station type (connected to the ET 901) is indicated.
Converter In this field, the used converter is indicated (e.g. ET 901D)
EB-Interface In this field, connected expansion and option boards are indicated.
In this field, the firmware version of the IP Intercom station is indicated. The version number
of hybrid intercom stations in "Boot as SIP" mode is displayed in the format <major>.
Version
<minor> Build <number>, e. g. 04.4 Build 18. The full version number is displayed in the sta-
tions web interface.
In this field, a password can be set for the respective station in order to restrict the con-
Password
figuration of the station (see page 115).
1)
The settings in the columns Color, Status, CallNo and Description are saved in the IP Intercom station (ET 901
min. firmware version 2.2), but not in the Intercom Server configuration.

3.1/0923 137
Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations Intercom Server Configuration

Function Description

Link Config / VLAN 1)

Disable
Activate this checkbox in order to deactivate the offline LED of the IP station.
Offline LED
Uplink and In these drop-down lists, the Ethernet operation mode of the network connections (RJ45) can
Downlink be selected.
Activate this checkbox in order to deactivate the downlink port of the Intercom station or con-
DDP
verter. 2)
Activate this checkbox so that the IP station will stop the communication in case of an IP
ACD
address conflict according to RFC 5227. 3)
In this field, the priority level for transmission of data according to IEEE 802.1P can be entered
Pri
(0 – 7). The priority for the transmission of voice/speech shall be set to level “6”. 4)
In this field, the bit for the “Canonical Format Indicator” can be entered (0 or 1). In standard,
CFI
the CFI bit shall always be set to “0”. 4)
VID In this field, the VLAN ID acc. to EEE 802.1Q can be entered (1 – 4094). 4)
1)
Click on the button Link in the toolbar in order to enable the section “Link Config / VLAN”.
2) This function is available for the following Intercom stations and converters (required minimum firmware ver-
sion in brackets):
 ET 901 (ET 901 3.3)
 EE 900A (DSP900A min. 6.4 or IoIP-Device min. 7.1)
 ET 908A (DSP900A min. 6.4 or IoIP-Device min. 7.1)
 ET 908H (IoIP-Device min. 7.1)
 AF 20I, AF 50I and AF 250I (AF-I min. 6.2)
3) In case of an address conflict:

 the static, manually entered IP address of the respective station remains unchanged. The affected station is
not shown in IPStationConfig anymore. To fix the conflict, the IP address of the station has to be changed
manually in another network with no IP address conflict.
 the IP address assigned from the DHCP server is changed. The DHCP server assigns the station automatically
a new unique IP address.
4) In this field, the so-called “frame tagging” (IEEE 802.1Q) can be configured. This also means that the Ethernet

header is extended by 4 bytes.

Fallback 1)
Shows the current state of the first/second fallback connection. 2) 3) The following states are
available:
Station is registered via this connection.
Connection is available but station is not registered via this connection.
Connection is not configured (i.e. this connection has the IP address “0.0.0.0”).
Connection is not available.
In this field, enter the IP address of the allocated IP subscriber card. This IP subscriber card
Card-IP establishes the fallback connection. For each connection (standard and fallback), a different IP
subscriber card has to be used.
In this field, the port number of the fallback connection can be changed (by default 16400).
Port For each connection of an IP subscriber (standard and fallback), the same port number can be
used.
1) Click on the button Fallback in the toolbar in order to enable the section “Fallback”.
2)
Required station firmware: AF-I 6.3, ET901 4.6, IoIP-Device 7.2, WS-TM 2.0 or higher.
3) IPStationConfig version 6.3.5 or higher required.
4) The second fallback connection is not available for the station type “ET 901”.

138 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations

SNMP 1)
ON Activate this checkbox to enable SNMP.
Trusted Host In this field, the IP address of the central management station can be entered.
Subnet Mask In this field, the subnet mask of the central management station can be entered.

In this field, the IP address of the management station can be entered, which should receive
Trap IP Nr.
the “traps” from the IP station.
In this field, the port number of the respective trap can be entered (standard port UDP 162 – it
Port Nr.
is recommended to not change the standard port number)
1)
Click on the button SNMP in the toolbar in order to enable the section “SNMP”. Further information can be
found in the manual “SNMP”.

Query remote stations

Up to CCT 800 6.1, it is only possible to search for one IP station with the given IP address within the
connected network.
With CCT 800 7.0 or higher, it is possible to search for multiple IP stations with the given IP addresses
within the connected network. The requested IP stations are shown in the table . To search for
specific IP stations in the network, follow the instructions below:
3. Go to: Menu Station > Query Remote Stations or click on the toolbar icon
The following dialogue appears:

Query remote stations

4. In the field Default config port, the default port for reaching the IP stations can be changed (by
default: 16399).
5. In the field Station IP Addresses, enter the IP Addresses that shall be reached (see screenshot above).
Optionally, a port can be defined for a single stations that will be used instead of the default port in
the field Default config port (<IP address>:<port>).
6. Click on the button Query. The requested IP stations are shown in the table (if available).

3.1/0923 139
Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations Intercom Server Configuration

Presets
In the section Presets , it is possible to configure settings and texts for multiple IP subscribers auto-
matically. Thereby, it is also possible to advise e.g. consecutive IP addresses automatically.
1. Change the setting or text in the desired field in the section Presets.
2. Optional, activate the checkbox inc next to the field IP-Addr in order to increase the IP address per
subscriber by one (at multiple selections).
3. Click on the green arrow next to the modified field in order to change the respective settings of the
selected subscribers in the table.

CallNo (call number) / Desc. (description)

For a automatic allocation of the call number and the description, use one of the following variables:
 {ip1} to {ip4} .............................. 1st to 4th byte of the IP address
 {sn1} to {sn4}............................. 1st to 4th byte of the subnet mask
 {ce1} to {ce4} ............................. 1st to 4th byte of the central IP address
 {rt1} to {rt4}................................ 1st to 4th byte of the router IP address
 {mac1} to {mac6} ...................... 1st to 6th byte of the MAC address
 {port}.......................................... port number
 {n} .............................................. automatic increase
....................................................... (Initial value = start value, Increment = value increase)

NOTE: Maximum amount of storable digits for call number and description
 “CallNo”: max. 126 digits
 “Desc.”: max. 126 digits

Ping Target
In the section Ping Target , a ping request can be sent to a network device. Therefore, the IP address
of the used computer must be located in the same subnet as the IP address that shall be reached. Three
ping measurements are executed. The result and the time of the last measurement is indicated.

140 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations

Basic functions – IPStationConfig

Send configuration to the IP station

Follow the instructions below to send the IPStationConfig configuration manually to the IP stations.
1. In the drop-down-list next to Write Settings, select one of the following modes:
 all: The entire configuration is sent.
 modified: The configuration is sent only to modified stations.
 selected: The configuration is sent only to selected stations.
2. Click on the button Write settings to send the configuration to the respective IP stations.

ATTENTION: Unique IP address required

If an IP address, which already exists in the network, is advised to a subscriber, heavy malfunctioning
of the network may occur! Therefore, it is recommended to always receive the current configuration
of the system in order to avoid IP address collisions in the network!

Save the configuration

Follow the instructions below to save the IPStationConfig configuration as XML file on the connected
computer.
1. Go to: Menu File > Save XML-Settings or click on the button Save in the toolbar

Export the configuration

Follow the instructions below to export the IPStationConfig configuration as Excel, text or HTML file:
1. Go to: Menu Station > Export Settings > desired file format

Load the configuration

Follow the instructions below to load the configuration of IPStationConfig from an XML file:
1. Go to: Menu File > Load XML-Settings or click on the button Load in the toolbar
2. When an XML file is opened while an IPStationConfig configuration is already open, it is possible to
merge these two configurations.

NOTE: Merged fields

If merging is selected, the fields, which are overwritten, are highlighted red.

Reset configuration of IP station to factory default

Follow the instructions below to reset the configuration of an IP station to the factory default.
1. Go to: Menu Station > Set Factory Default (Reset)

ATTENTION: Reset to factory default

To be able to reset the configuration of the IP subscriber, the following has to be ensured:
 The connection to the Intercom Server may not be upright (“offline” – a red cross is indicated in the
column “Online”).
 The IP subscriber at the Intercom Server may not use dynamic registration or DHCP.

3.1/0923 141
Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations Intercom Server Configuration

Firmware update
Alternatively to the download via CCT 800, the firmware of the IP Intercom station can be downloaded
to the IP Intercom station via the program IPStationConfig. Follow the instructions below:
1. Select the IP stations to be updated in the table.
2. Go to: Menu Station > Firmware Download
3. Select the desired GEH file and click on the button Open.

ATTENTION: Requirements ET 901

 For an ET 901, this feature is available with firmware version 2.2 or higher!
 Download of the firmware of an ET 901 is only possible, if an Intercom station (i.e. a subscriber) is
connected to the ET 901!

Upgrade to IoIP-Device Firmware

ATTENTION: Upgrade-Requirements
 DSP900A or DSP900B firmware 06.06 Build 2 must be installed to begin the upgrade
 An upgrade is only possible to firmware IoIP-Device 8.0 Build 4 or newer.
 Do not remove the devices from power while the upgrade is running!

Stations with older DSP900A or DSP900B firmware are qualified for an upgrade to IoIP firmware in or-
der to receive further updates. To be able to use this advantage, a conversion to the new firmware type
must be carried out once. Follow the instructions below:
1. In the Version column, check which DSP900A / DSP900B firmware is currently installed on the
stations to be upgraded and if necessary update to 6.6 Build 2. Follow the instructions in the section
on firmware updates.
2. Select one or more stations with the correct firmware version from the device list.
3. Go to: Menu Station > Upgrade to IoIP-Device firmware
4. Select the desired IoIP-Device Firmware file and click on the button Upgrade

Protect configuration with password

A password can be defined for a single or group of IP stations to prevent unwanted changes to the IP-
StationConfig configuration. This password mus be entered before sending or changing the configu-
ration. Follow the instructions below:
1. Select the desired subscribers in the table (multiple selection with the key combination <CTRL> and
<SHIFT>).
2. Go to: Menu Station > Set password
The following dialogue appears:

Protect configuration with password

NOTE: Password safety

Details on the characters allowed when assigning passwords see page 509.

142 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations

3. In the fields New Password and Confirm Password, enter the new password (max. 126 characters).
4. Click on the button OK.

Unlock configuration of an IP station

When receiving the configuration of subscribers with configured passwords, red dots are indicated in
the column Password. For these IP Intercom stations, only the MAC address is indicated. See the fol-
lowing screenshot:

Unlock configuration of an IP station

1. Enter the required password in the field Password. If the correct password is entered, the
configuration of the respective IP station is enabled.

3.1/0923 143
Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations Intercom Server Configuration

Configuration of IP stations
The configuration of an IP station is divided into 3 sections:
 Configuration of the IP stations in IPStationConfig – see below
 Configuration of the IP subscriber cards in CCT 800 – see page 119
 Configuration of the IP subscribers in CCT 800 – see page 120

Configuration of the IP stations in IPStationConfig

ATTENTION:
 In order to put an IP station into operation, valid values must be entered in the fields IP-Address, Sub-
net mask and Card-IP! Make sure that the settings must comply with the configuration in CCT 800 at
IP-Settings > tab Common (see page 119) and at Subscribers > IP-Terminals > tab Common
(see page 120)!
 Changed settings will applied only after the configuration has been sent to the IP subscriber (see
page 114)!

Configuration IPStationConfig
1. Click on Query stations to list the IP subscribers in the connected network or click on the button
Query remote station and enter the IP address of a specific IP station that shall be displayed. See the
following screenshot:

Configuration IPStationConfig

2. In the field IP-Address, enter the IP address of the IP station. The checkbox DHCP must be deactivated.
3. In the field Subnet mask, enter the subnet mask of the IP station. The checkbox DHCP must be
deactivated.
4. In the field Router-IP, the IP address of the router or standard gateway can be entered via which the
Intercom Servers shall communicate. The checkbox DHCP must be deactivated.
5. In the field Mac, the MAC address of the IP subscriber is indicated (cannot be configured).
6. In the field Card-IP, enter the IP address of the IP subscriber card that shall be allocated to this IP
subscriber.

144 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations

7. In the field Port, the standard destination port number can be entered (by default, “16400”). The port
numbers must only be changed for special configurations with NAT.

ATTENTION: Required firmware versions for communication ports

Communication via port 16400 (Single Port Protocol) is possible with the following minimum firm-
ware versions:
 ET 901: 02.4 Build 03 / 03.1 Build 03
 DSP900 (for ET 908): 03.1 Build 04
Otherwise, the communication is done via port “16400” to “16404”.

NOTE: Port 16399

The port 16399 is used by the program IPStationConfig for configuration of the devices.

8. Optionally, activate the checkbox DYN in order to activate the dynamic registration via the MAC
address.

ATTENTION: Function must also be activated in CCT 800

This feature has also to be activated in CCT 800 (see page 119).

NOTES:
 The dynamic registration of an IP Intercom station described above is enabled by transferring the
MAC address of the device in the data payload of the IP packet. If the MAC address can be set man-
ually (e.g. for the Intercom Client), these IP Intercom stations may have different MAC addresses.
 When using redundant network connections, the activation of the dynamic registration is valid for
both, the primary and the secondary link.

GOOD TO KNOW: Short description – Dynamic registration?

By means of this feature, the registration of an IP Intercom station on an Intercom Server even via a
non-static Internet access (e.g. ADSL) is possible (for the Intercom Server, always a static public IP
address is required).
The registration of the IP Intercom station on the Intercom Server is done with the current IP address
and port number. The allocation subscriber and device will no longer be done via the IP address and
port number, but exclusively via the MAC address of the IP device. Thus, several IP Intercom stations
configured for dynamic registration can be registered on the Intercom Server with the same port
number and the same IP address. Consider that static and dynamic devices may never have the same
port number and IP address.

9. Optionally, activate the checkbox DHCP so that the IP station requests the IP address of the station,
subnet mask and IP address of the router from a DHCP server.
10.In the field Host Name, a name for the IP station can be entered, which identifies the IP station for
the DHCP server. If no name is entered, a standard name will be used when using DHCP.

Additional settings
Further information about configuration of additional settings (e.g. description, VLAN or SNMP) can be
found on page 110.

3.1/0923 145
Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations Intercom Server Configuration

Configuration of the IP subscriber cards in CCT 800

ATTENTION: Valid values in CCT 800 and IPStationConfig required

In order to put an IP station into operation, valid values must be entered in the fields Card IP Address
and Subnet mask! Make sure that the settings must comply with the configuration in IPStationConfig
(see page 117)!

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to: IP - Settings > tab Common
2. In the field Card IP Address, enter the IP address of the respective IP subscriber card. For all
subscribers that shall be assigned to this IP subscriber card, the same IP address must be entered in
IPStationConfig Card-IP (see page 117).
3. In the field Subnet mask, enter the subnet mask of the respective IP subscriber card. For all
subscribers that shall be assigned to this IP subscriber card, the same subnet mask must be entered
in IPStationConfig Subnet mask (see page 117).
4. In the field MAC address, the MAC address of the IP subscriber card is indicated (cannot be
configured).

Additional settings
The following settings can be configured in CCT 800 optional:
 Go to: IP - Settings > tab Common
Function Description
In this field, the IP address of the router or gateway can be entered, via which the
Intercom Servers shall communicate. For all subscribers that shall be assigned to
Router IP Address this IP subscriber card, the same router IP address must be entered in IPStation-
Config Router-IP (see page 117) 1)
In these drop-down lists, the Ethernet operation mode of the network connec-
Uplink and Downlink
tions (RJ45) can be selected.
Address Conflict Activate this checkbox so that the IP card will stop the communication in case of
Detection an IP address conflict according to RFC 5227.
1) A router IP address is only required when the IP components are located in different subnets. The router IP
address and the Card IP address must be in the same subnet.

GOOD TO KNOW: Address Conflict Detection (ACD) according to RFC 5227

In case of an address conflict, the static, manually entered IP address of the respective IP card remains
unchanged. To fix the conflict, the IP address of the card has to be changed manually.

 Go to: IP - Settings > tab Extended Settings

Function Description
In this drop-down list, the bandwidth can be selected, which is used in the net-
work by the IP subscriber card for data and speech. The total bandwidth must
Bandwidth in kBit
always be set higher than the value in the drop-down list Databandwidth kBit.
It is recommended to select the entry “unlimited”.
In this drop-down list, the bandwidth can be selected, which is used for data
packets that leave the IP subscriber card. When the bandwidth is reduced, the
Databandwidth
packets leave the cards with a larger time period between them (Traffic Shap-
kBit
ing Algorithm according to Leaky Bucket Principle). This prevents a “Packet
burst” which can lead to a queue overflow at the router.

146 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations

Configuration of the IP subscribers in CCT 800

ATTENTION: Valid values in CCT 800 and IPStationConfig required

In order to put an IP station into operation, valid values must be entered in the fields Card IP Address,
Terminal IP Address and Port No.! Make sure that the settings must comply with the configuration at
IP-Settings > tab Common (see page 119) and in IPStationConfig (see page 117)!

In the following, the connection from the IP subscriber card to the IP subscribers is configured.

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Common
2. In the field Card IP Address, the configured IP address of the respective IP card is indicated (see
page 119).
3. In the field Station type, the type of connected IP station is indicated that is selected at Subscriber
> Station properties > tab Common.
4. In the field Terminal IP Address, enter the IP address that is entered in IPStationConfig in the field IP-
Address for the respective subscriber (see page 117).

NOTE: Subscriber must be assigned to specific subscriber card

The IP subscriber is assigned to the IP subscriber card that is indicated in the field I/S - T.

5. In the field Port No., enter the IP address that is entered in IPStationConfig in the field Port for the
respective subscriber (see page 118).
6. In the field Subnet mask, the configured subnet mask of the respective IP card is indicated (see
page 119).

Additional settings
The following settings can be configured optionally in CCT 800:
 Go to: IP - Settings > tab Common
Function Description
In these drop-down lists, the Ethernet operation mode of the network
Uplink and Downlink
connections (RJ45) can be selected.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Common
Function Description
In this field, the configured router IP address of the respective IP card is indi-
Router IP Address
cated (see page 119).
Activate this checkbox in order to enable the dynamic registration via MAC
Dynamic registration
address. The field MAC address is enabled
In this field, the MAC address of the IP subscriber card can be entered. If the
MAC address checkbox Dynamic registration is activated, the MAC address is configured
automatically.
1)
This feature has also to be activated in IPStationConfig (see page 118).

3.1/0923 147
Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations Intercom Server Configuration

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Extended Settings
Function Description
In this drop-down list, the bandwidth can be selected, which is used in the net-
work by the IP subscriber card for data and speech. The total bandwidth must
Bandwidth in kBit
always be set higher than the value in the drop-down list Databandwidth kBit. It
is recommended to select the entry “unlimited”.
In this drop-down list, the bandwidth can be selected, which is used for data
packets that leave the IP subscriber card. When the bandwidth is reduced, the
Databandwidth
packets leave the cards with a larger time period between them (Traffic Shap-
kBit
ing Algorithm according to Leaky Bucket Principle). This prevents a “Packet
burst” which can lead to a queue overflow at the router.
In this drop-down list, the time can be defined, how often the card checks if the
Card poll time
IP subscriber can be reached.
In this drop-down list, the time can be defined, how often the IP subscriber
Station poll time checks if the card can be reached. It is recommended to activate this feature
when operating an IP subscriber over WAN (dynamic firewall, dynamic NAT).
Activate this checkbox in order to transmit speech packets only when a signal is
VOX-Control active at the microphone. This function shall only be used if the bandwidth in
the network is limited. 1
In this drop-down list, the time can be selected (in seconds), after which speech
VOX-Follow up
packets shall be transmitted when a signal is no longer detected at the micro-
time
phone.
In this field, the bits for DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) Packet Mark-
DSCP
ing can be entered (0 – 63, e.g.: 46 for “Expedited Forwarding”).
Jitter Buffer Start In this drop-down list, the jitter buffer delay time can be selected (in millisec-
Delay onds) in order to prevent packet lost (e.g. caused by an overloaded network).
No decrement of Activate this checkbox in order to prevent the automatic decrement of the jitter
Jitter Buffer buffer below the selected value in the drop-down list Jitter Buffer Start Delay.
Deactivate switch Activate this checkbox in order to deactivate the LEDs of the subscriber with a
LEDs built-in switch (e.g. ET 901).
1)
For an ET 901, this feature is available with firmware version 2.2 or higher.

 Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Extended Subscribers
Function Description
In this drop-down list, the station type of the extend subscriber can be selected.
The options “Non Audio” (any non-audio subscriber, e.g. Intercom Client),
Station type
“WSCM 50”, “WSTM 50” and “dummy port” (e.g. for configuration of a virtual
control desk to transfer calls) are available.
Assignment to In this drop-down list, the Intercom station can be selected, which shall be linked
host-client with the extended subscriber.

148 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations

Configuration of SIP stations

Requirements
 SIP firmware 3.6 or higher
 CCT 800 5.0 (build 1016) or higher (contains the required version of IPStationConfig)

NOTE: Requirements
If at least one requirement is not fulfilled, the SIP subscriber will be indicated as an IP subscriber in
IPStationConfig. Thus, a configuration as SIP subscriber is not possible.

Configuration IPStationConfig
1. Click on the button Query stations to indicate all subscribers in the network.

NOTE: Configurable settings in IPStationConfig

Only the settings as described below are available for SIP subscribers in IPStationConfig. The con-
figuration of the settings can also be carried out via the web interface.

2. In the field BootMode, the operation mode “Boot as SIP” for the SIP station is indicated.
3. In the field IP-Address, enter the IP address of the SIP station. The checkbox DHCP must be
deactivated.
4. In the field Subnet Mask, enter the subnet mask of the SIP station. The checkbox DHCP must be
deactivated.
5. In the field Router-IP, optionally enter the IP address of the router or standard gateway, via which the
SIP station shall communicate. The checkbox DHCP must be deactivated.
6. (Optional) Activate the checkbox DHCP so that the IP station requests IP address of the IP station,
subnet mask and IP address of the router from a DHCP server.

NOTE: Accept settings

To accept the settings, the configuration has to be sent to the SIP subscriber first (see page 114).

3.1/0923 149
Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations Intercom Server Configuration

Configuration of hybrid stations

A hybrid subscriber can be operated either as an IP or SIP station.

Requirements (operated as SIP subscriber)

 SIP firmware 3.6 or higher
 CCT 800 5.0 (Build 1016) or higher (contains the required version of IPStationConfig)

NOTE: Requirements
If at least one requirement is not fulfilled, the SIP subscriber will be indicated as an IP subscriber in
IPStationConfig. Thus, a configuration as SIP subscriber is not possible.

Configuration via IPStationConfig

1. Click on the button Query stations to indicate all subscribers in the network.
2. In the drop-down list BootMode, select the desired operation mode of the hybrid subscriber. The
following operation modes are available:
 Boot as IoIP: Operate as IP subscriber (see page 122)
 Boot as SIP: Operate as SIP subscriber (see page 117).

NOTE: Accept settings

To accept the settings, the configuration has to be sent to the SIP subscriber first (see page 114).

150 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations

Device redundancy
In normal operation, the entire communication runs exclusively via the standard connection between
the Intercom Server and a device. Only in case of disconnection (e.g. failure of IP subscriber card, line
fault, power supply of the Intercom Server interrupted etc.), the communication between the Intercom
Server and the device is automatically routed via the first fallback connection, which still offers
unrestricted operation. Therefore, it is possible to carry out redundant IP subscriber cards or Intercom
Servers, via which a fallback connection is routed. Even if the first fallback connection shows an error,
the connection is automatically routed via the second fallback connection.

GOOD TO KNOW: Classification of activated connections

When the IP subscriber or Windows Intercom Client starts initialising, the standard and fallback
connections will automatically be tested within 20 seconds to define the “active” connection. If at least
two connections are reachable, the “active” connections are classified in the following order:
1. Standard connection
2. First fallback connection
3. Second fallback connection

Requirements
Intercom Server
 Software Intercom Server VirtuoSIS
 Intercom Server GE 800/GE 300/IP-32/IS 300

Station software
 AF-I: min. 5.4
 DSP 900: min. 3.3
 DSP 900A: min. 5.6 (build 1)
 DSP 900B: min. 5.6C
 DUETTO/EE 980: min 1.2
 ET 901: min. 3.7 (build 1)

Intercom Client software

 IC200: min. 3.4.4540.0

Restrictions
 The station type ET 901 only has one fallback connection.
 The fallback function is not supported for the Android and iOS Intercom Client.
 If the standard connection and at least one fallback connection are available, the firmware download
has to be carried out via the standard connection of the respective Intercom Server.

3.1/0923 151
Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations Intercom Server Configuration

Examples for station redundancy

Redundant connection of IP subscribers
The master Intercom Server (server ID “01”) and the secondary Intercom Server (server ID “02”) are
connected separately via an IP connection with the IP subscribers. In case of a line fault, a correspond-
ing message is indicated at both control desk (“line monitoring”).
If the standard connection or an IP subscriber card fails, the connection is routed via the fallback
connection to the secondary Intercom Server. As the Intercom Servers are not networked, the call num-
bers of the affected IP subscribers can be kept with the activated fallback connection. When the master
Intercom Server fails, all incoming calls are displayed at the control desk of the secondary Intercom
Server.

Example: redundant connection of IP subscribers

Redundant connection via networked Intercom Servers

In this example, the master Intercom Server and secondary Intercom Server are networked via a
synchronous link (HDSL or E1). For the standard and fallback connection, different call numbers have
to be configured for the affected IP subscribers.

Example: redundant connection via networked Intercom Servers

152 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations

Configuration: IPStationConfig
Follow the instructions below, to configure the fallback connections for an IP station in IPStationConfig:

Configuration IPStationConfig
1. Click on the button Fallback in the upper menu bar to indicate the fallback settings. See the following
illustration:

Configuration of the fallback connections in IPStationConfig

First fallback connection

2. Card-IP2: In this field, enter the IP address of the allocated IP subscriber card. This IP subscriber card
establishes the first fallback connection. For each connection (standard and fallback), a different IP
subscriber card has to be used.
3. Port2: In this field, the port number of the first fallback connection can be changed (by default 16400).
For each connection of an IP subscriber (standard and fallback), the same port number can be used.

Second fallback connection

2. Card-IP3: In this field, enter the IP address of the allocated IP subscriber card. This IP subscriber card
establishes the second fallback connection. For each connection (standard and fallback), a different
IP subscriber card has to be used.
3. Port3: In this field, the port number of the second fallback connection can be changed (by default
16400). For each connection of an IP subscriber (standard and fallback), the same port number can
be used.

3.1/0923 153
 Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations Intercom Server Configuration

Configuration: CCT 800

The following configuration has to be carried out separately for each connection (standard and
fallback) of an IP subscriber and Intercom Client (up to three times). Depending on the configuration
and the currently activated connection, the respective IP subscriber or Intercom Client may change its
call number.

Enter the same IP configuration as in IPStationConfig for each connection

Configuration CCT 800

Follow the instructions below to configure the fallback connections for an IP station in CCT 800:
1. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Common
2. Terminal IP address: In this field, enter the same IP address, which has been entered in
IPStationConfig for the respective connection (see page 117).
3. Port No.: In this field, enter the same port number, which has been entered in IPStationConfig (see
page 118) for the respective connection.
4. Dynamic registration: Activate this checkbox if the dynamic registration is enabled for the respective
IP subscriber in IPStationConfig. The field “MAC address” is enabled.
5. MAC address: In this field, the MAC address for the connection to the Intercom Server can be
changed (if the checkbox “Dynamic registration” is activated).

 Line monitoring of the fallback connections

Line faults can be indicated at the control desk by a delayed registration of the IP subscriber (e.g. due
to a longer initialisation time of the ports by using certain switches). Within this time range, line faults
can already be indicated at the control desk. If the standard or one of the fallback connections of an IP
subscriber fails, a line fault can be indicated via line monitoring at a control desk. The following con-
figuration has to be carried out separately for each connection of an IP subscriber (up to three times).
The same subscriber ports has to be used as for the configuration of the standard and fallback connec-
tions. Follow the instructions below to configure line monitoring for the fallback connections:
1. Configure a line monitoring for the desired fallback connection of the IP station.
2. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Extended Settings
3. Card poll time: In this drop-down list, the card poll time of the standard and fallback connection can
be selected. The Intercom Server polls the respective IP subscriber card constantly after the selected
time to recognize a line fault, to which the IP subscriber belongs to.
→ Recommended value: 8 [s]

Adjust the polling times to indicate line faults faster

154 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations

4. Station poll time: In this drop-down list, the station poll time of the standard and fallback connection
can be selected. The station polls its allocated IP subscriber card constantly after the selected time
to recognize a line fault. If at least one fallback connection is enabled for the respective IP subscriber,
the value “8 seconds” is automatically used for the entry “Off”.
→ Recommended value: Off
5. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common
6. Line monitoring delay time [s]: In this drop-down list, the line monitoring delay can be selected for
the standard and fallback connection. The recognition of a line fault at this subscriber port is delayed
for the selected time.
→ Recommended value: 8 [s]

Adjust the line monitoring delay to avoid the indication of unintentional line faults

3.1/0923 155
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

General Intercom features

Calling numbers

Rules for call number allocation

One to eight digits from 1 to 99999999, with the following exceptions:
 Same beginning digits with different length may not be used (e.g. 1234 and 123456).
 Function codes (00, 010, 4T, 6T, …) are reserved for internal functions, but can be changed (see
page 157).

NOTE:
There should be no collisions between function codes and station numbers. If a function code
has been changed, this function code can be used as a station number.

 Block numbers may not be used.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
 Call number: In this field, the calling number of the selected subscriber can be entered.
 Description: In this field, an optional text can be entered for the selected subscriber. This text is used
only in CCT 800 for easy identification of the Intercom stations.
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab Inputs
 Call number IN: In this field, the calling number of the station inputs can be entered.
 Go to: Inputs > General Settings
 Call number: In this field, the calling number of the inputs can be entered.
 Go to: Outputs > General Settings
 Call number: In this field, the calling number of the outputs can be entered.

ATTENTION: For Inputs and Outputs

Dialable call numbers (e.g. 101) should be used instead of hexadecimal call numbers (e.g. D101)!

 Call numbers up to 8-digits

As of PRO800 1.1 call numbers with up to 8 digits can be assigned to subscribers, inputs and outputs
(up to PRO800 1.1 only 4-digits).

Restrictions
 Call numbers that begin with the same digit sequence, may not be used (e.g. 22 and 220 cannot be
used together in one Intercom Server).
 The checkbox Enable full functionality has to be activated for a station output with a 8-digit call num-
ber (see page 244).
 Firmware upgrade of all network cards required:
 G8-NET, G8-LAN, G8-CNET-W, G8-CNET-E1: Minimum 5.3.
 G7-GEV, G7-CNET-LAN, G7-WAN, G7-CNET-E1: Minimum 5.3 (only in combination with G7-UPG).

NOTE:
Even “stand-alone” Intercom Servers must use the above mentioned software versions in order
to support 8-digit call numbers.

156 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

 EE880/EE380
 EE880: Can only have a 4-digit number and direct dialling buttons with 4-digits.
 EE380: Can have 8-digit number.
  EE380: Direct dialling buttons only support 6-digits.
 WAN networking
 8-digit numbers cannot be combined with WAN pre-dialling codes.
 Stations with dot-matrix display (e.g. EE811A, EE880) can only display 8 digits (restrictions with 8-
digit call numbers with additional WAN-prefix).
 Stations with small display (e.g. EE311, EE411) can only display 6 digits.

Server IDs
Our recommendation is, to select server IDs below 100 if possible. If more than 60 networked Intercom
Servers are used, consider using WAN networking instead. If this is not possible, note that there may
be conflicts for auto-generated call numbers (numbers starting with “BA” or “D0”). If you have to use
call numbers in a networked system, make sure they are dialable.

Changing the function codes

It is possible to change the codes for system functions, e.g. for music or privacy function.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Function Codes
 Function Codes: In this field, the code of the respective function can be changed (maximum 4-digits;
e.g. “881” instead of “4T” for music. In this case, music is switched on with “881” and switched-off
with “880”).

NOTE:
In case the function code is displayed in the display menu (TT to answer an All Call), only the last
two digits are displayed (e.g. “1933” instead of TT. In this case, only “33” is indicated in the
display menu) e.g.

3.1/0923 157
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

 Text parameter
The text parameter is a user-defined parameter that briefly describes any object with a specific value.
This parameter is allocated to a single e.g. subscriber, input or output and can be requested by a
Commend system or third-party system (e.g. TETRA) via an ICX message in order to e.g. execute an
action.

NOTE: Further information

For further information about the required ICX message, see “Text parameters” in the product manual
“ICX Protocol”.

GOOD TO KNOW: Text parameters can be added automatically

In CCT 800 it is possible that text parameters can be created by different functions (e.g. with address-
ing the camera of an Intercom station at Subscriber > Station properties > Cameras > tab
Addressing, a text parameter will automatically be added for displaying the video stream.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Parameter > Text parameter
 Right-click on the desired e.g. subscriber, input or output and select “Add parameter”.

GOOD TO KNOW: Export/import of text parameters

With CCT 800 6.1 or higher, text parameters of single subscribers can be exported and saved as
GEC file on the computer or imported into CCT 800. It is not possible to export or import text param-
eters of several subscribers in a single file.

Export of a text parameter

 Right-click on a configured text parameter and select “Export parameter”.
 Save the GEC file on the computer.

Import of a text parameter

 Right-click on a configured text parameter and select “Import parameter”.
 Select the desired GEC file on the computer for import.

 Click on the button Configure to open the configuration dialogue.

 Right-click and select “add entry”. The following settings can be configured:
 Name: In this field, the object name can be entered in ASCII coding.
 Value: In this field, the object value can be entered in ASCII coding. All characters of the ASCII table
are valid for the object value (max. 14 characters).

NOTE: Several text parameters possible

It is possible to add several text parameters per e.g. subscriber, input or output.

158 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

 Optional Parameters

In order to use special functions, for Intercom subscribers optional parameters can be configured. For
the optional parameters the parameter numbers 900 to 999 are reserved.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Parameter > Optional Parameters
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add parameter”.
 Parameter: In this field, the desired parameters can be entered (several definitions are separated via
commas).

Register of the optional parameters

Optional
Requirements Description
parameter
No control desk list during conversation at the display. During a conversation
900 PRO 800 1.2 at a control desk, incoming call requests are shown in the display. With this
optional parameters the function is turned off.
901 PRO 800 1.2 Red flashing LED at calling station when the called station is in privacy mode.
902 PRO 800 1.3 6T conference (only one channel displayed in mixing mode).
Simultaneous speaking in a 6T radio channel and listening to the other 6T radio
903 PRO 800 1.3
channels of the conference.
For the configured Intercom subscriber, during a conversation the incoming
904 PRO 800 1.3
call tone is not audible.
Reinitialise call request (only in combination with function “automatic end of
905 PRO 800 1.3
call”).
In case direct dialling is configured for the subscriber, this direct dialling is also
906 PRO 800 2.1
carried out via F1 menu.
The monochrome LCD display is switched to an EE 811 compatibility mode.
This mean that the WS station or Conductor is always working as EE 811 (max-
907 PRO 800 4.1
imum of 14 digit display text). The only difference between that instead of the
button F1, F2 and F3 the Commend help button is shown.
This parameter has to be used in order to make a 7T conversation without a
connected telephone cable on the G3/8-TEL card (e.g. using a dummy sub-
912 PRO 800 3.0
scriber). If the parameter is not used, the 7T conversation is automatically can-
celled).
Reduces the time between calls to several control desks from 32 ms to 8 ms.
915 PRO 800 3.1
This avoids “busy” situations when accepting the call requests.
Indication of active control desk calls with display and buzzer also during night
916 PRO 800 6.1
transfer.
If a call request can not be confirmed, the call request is immediately deleted
918 PRO 800 6.1
from the queue by pressing the Enter key.
919 VirtuoSIS 7.1 Suppression of the acknowledge tone at intrusion for all 6T receivers.
VirtuoSIS 9.1 Indicate no version information at startup. If this parameter is set, the Intercom
921
PRO 800 6.3 station can be used immediately after starting.
Deleting of an unconfigured PA zone that was created manually with ICX (80/
VirtuoSIS 10.0 AD). Requires the ICX option “0000” (deselection of all zones) and the
922
PRO 800 6.3 parameter 922. Without this parameter, only the configured zones will be
deleted.
To recover a call request to a Symphony Control Desk after an interruption,
VirtuoSIS uses the SIP request method REFER. If this parameter is set, the
923 VirtuoSIS 12.0 behaviour of VirtuoSIS version 11.1 and earlier is used, i.e. after an interruption
the call is re-established from the server to the station. In contrast, establishing
the call using REFER works from the station to the server.

3.1/0923 159
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

Optional parameters with upgrade licence

NOTE: upgrade licences required

A PRO 800 upgrade licence is required for the following optional parameters.

Optional Required firmware Required

Description
parameter version upgrade licence
If an Intercom subscriber has a conversation over IAX to
a phone and a second Intercom subscriber want to
establish a conversation to the same phone, subscriber
2 has to wait until subscriber 1 has finished the conver-
sation. By default, after cancelling the conversation from
908 PRO 800 6.0 PRO2U
subscriber 1, the conversation switch automatically to
subscriber 2 and the display which is indicated on the
phone will not be updated. With this optional parameter,
after cancelling the conversation a new conversation
will be established and the display text will be updated.
909 PRO 800 2.1 PRO2U It is possible to dial during a permanent function menu.
If an IAX subscriber starts dialling, the dial tone ends
910 PRO 800 2.1 PRO2U
after the first button press (the tones work as usual).
Deactivation of the automatically sorting of 6T channels
911 PRO 800 2.1 PRO2U
for mixing radio if someone speaks into a channel.
After the configured menu display time, the time in the
drop-down list Permanent menu display will be
913 PRO 800 3.1 PRO3U recessed. Typically used for EE811A/EE900A and WS800
display stations when permanent F2 menu is config-
ured.
If a subscriber in privacy mode has accepted an incom-
ing call from a control desk, the call can be parked with
the button 2 or 3 from the control desk. At a re-call by
914 PRO 800 3.1 PRO3U
the control desk, the call will be activated immediately
and the subscriber in privacy mode does not have to
confirm the call.
Deactivation of the automatic call number indication in
917 PRO 800 6.1 PRO6U menus. By default, the call number of the selected entry
will be indicated after two seconds in the menu.
Use the keys 4 and 5 to accept privacy calls. After
accepting the privacy call, the keys 4 and 5 can still be
VirtuoSIS 9.0
920 PRO9U used for sending callback requests and activating the
PRO 800 6.3
callback reminder. The optional parameter must be set
for each station for which this function is needed.

 ICX Parameters

Pre-configured ICX messages can be sent with dialling a direct dialling code via function code “9T5”.
Follow the instructions below:

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to: Parameter > ICX parameters
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add parameter”.
3. Click on the button Configure to open the configuration dialogue.
4. Right-click and select “add entry”. The field ID is enabled.
5. In the field ID, enter any ID for the ICX message (01 – 99). The fields task, type and data are enabled.

NOTE: Unique ID per subscriber

The ID of the ICX message is always 2 digits long and must be unique per subscriber.

160 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

6. In the field Task, enter the task number of the ICX message (e.g. “40”). In order to send an ICX
message to an other ICX interface, an ICX tunnel message has to be sent with task “6A”.
7. In the field Type, enter the type for the ICX message (e.g. “80”).
8. Optional: In the field Data, enter the data of the ICX message.

NOTE: Further information

For further information about the configuration of ICX messages, see the product manual “ICX
Protocol”.

9. EE 380 only: The column Button number displays the number of the direct dialling button (for further
information, see page 227).
10.Go to: Subscriber > Direct dialling
In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “9T5” followed by the ID of the ICX message
to be sent (e.g. “0=9T501” to send the ICX message with ID “01”).

3.1/0923 161
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

 Sevenfold security against interception

In order to entirely prevent any unwanted listening at the own station, seven different possibilities and
security provisions are available. According to the situation these various security functions can be
activated by the subscriber:
 Ringtone.
 Minute signal.
 Multifunctional LED as a visual indication for activated microphone.
 Turning the station (activating secretary transfer, privacy).
 Activating privacy function by dialling 031.
 Secretary transfer by dialling 02T and the secretary's number.
 Disconnection of microphone by dialling 7 during a running call.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Tone signals for different operation states

In order to inform the user most accurately about the state of their station, different signals indicate the
condition of the station.
Ringtone

Minute Signal 1 Minute

Double Gong

Busy Signal

Privacy Signal

Error Signal

Acknowledgement Signal

Normal Call

Emergency Call

Waiting Information

 Ringtone: Sounds at every new setup of a call on both the caller's and the receiver's station.
 Minute Signal: Sounds one time every minute as a reminder that a conversation is running, two
times if a subscriber is waiting and three times before the conversation time exceeds.
 Double Gong: Signal announcing an All Call or a group call.
 Busy Signal: Is given when the called subscriber is busy.
 Privacy Signal: Shows that the called subscriber has activated the privacy function.
 Error Signal: Is given when the station is operated in an incorrect way.
 Acknowledgement Signal: Is given when a function is activated (e.g. privacy).
 Normal Call: Indication of a normal call (Call 1) at a control desk.
 Emergency Call: Indication of an emergency call (Call 2) at a control desk.
 Waiting information: At the calling station during a normal call or emergency call during a call to a
control desk.

GOOD TO KNOW:
Tone signals can be changed for DSP stations (see page 372).

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

162 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

 Minute signal configurable per subscriber

To have an acoustic indication of a running call, every minute a short signal sounds to indicate the state
of the station (interception protection). The minute signal sounds two times if another station is waiting
for the talking subscriber, and three times before automatic cut off of the conversation. The minute sig-
nal can be eliminated by configuration, but the double and the triple minute signal are sent in any case.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Alarm, Common
 Minute Tone: Activate this checkbox to enable the minute signal for the respective subscriber.

 Acoustic and visual call indication

A conversation between two Intercom stations is announced by a ringtone. Additionally the red lamp
lights at both stations during the conversation. With display stations the name (display text) of the con-
versation partner is indicated in the display.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Length of ringtone
The length of the tone to indicate a call can be configured as desired. The time can be defined for the
entire Intercom Server or for each subscriber individually.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Switch off times
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “add switch off times”.
 Ringtone before red lamp [s]: In this field, the length of the ringtone to indicate a call can be changed
(by default 0.5 seconds).
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX”, this setting can be changed for the entire Intercom Server
block.

 Dialling at start of the Intercom Server

A button sequence can be configured for single subscribers, which is dialled automatically when the
Intercom Server is switched on (e.g. build up a conversation).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “0000=<ButtonSequence>” for the respec-
tive subscriber (e.g. “0000=312” to built up a call to the subscriber with the call number 312; see
page 212).

ATTENTION:
Works only with features within an Intercom Server housing!

3.1/0923 163
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

 Protection against feedback

Intercom stations, which are positioned close next to each other, can be barred against each other to
avoid feedback. If e.g. subscriber 11 is barred against subscriber 10, dialling 11 at station 10 switches
on the error tone. If station 10 initiates an All Call, subscriber 11 does not receive it (All Calls from other
stations can be heard). An Intercom station can also be barred against several other Intercom stations.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Disabling
 Protection against feedback: In this field, the call numbers can be entered that are disabled for this
subscriber to prevent feedback (multiple definitions are separated by commas). If a subscriber is
disabled, the call number of the initial subscriber is automatically entered.

 Protection against feedback for radio conference (optional with

reduction of the volume)
The protection against feedback can be configured for radio conference. Optional, the loudspeaker at
the “barred” subscriber can be switched on with reduced volume (e.g. if one of the two “barred”
subscribers speaks into the radio conference, the other subscriber receives the radio with this volume
level). This volume can be configured selectively for each subscriber.

Additional configuration CCT 800

 Complete configuration steps from above.
 Go to: Subscriber > Call Disabling
 Protection against feedback: In this field, call numbers can be entered, which are to be disabled for
this subscriber in order to prevent feedback (several definitions are separated via commas). At the
disabled subscriber, the call number of the initial subscriber is automatically entered.
 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab 6T Feedback, Radio, Headset
 6T Feedback active: In this drop-down list, the default volume of the 6T mode can be selected for the
respective subscriber.
 6T Feedback mode: In this drop-down list, the volume limit type of the 6T mode can be selected for
the respective subscriber:
 Max: The volume can be increased to a maximum, which is selected in the drop-down list limit.
 Min: The volume can be reduced to a minimum, which is selected in the drop-down list limit.
 Fix: The volume cannot be changed. The volume in the drop-down list limit is permanently
applied.
 6T Feedback limit: In this drop-down list, the maximum volume of the 6T mode can be selected for
the respective subscriber.

Feedback protection for All call and Group call

It is possible to reduce the volume of All call/Group call receivers in the same room to the feedback
protection volume. Therefore the announcement is still audible, but feedback is suppressed.

Configuration CCT 800 as above.

 Selective disabling of functions

Dialling of certain call numbers or functions can be enabled or disabled for single Intercom stations
(e.g. group call).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Disabling

164 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

 Disabling of functions and dialling: In this field, blocked call numbers or functions can be entered for
the respective subscriber (e.g. group call “010,011”; several definitions are separated via commas).
 At more than 10 group calls, a whole decade can be disabled (e.g. “0120” to “0129” can be
disabled by entering “012”).
  Invert call barring: Activate this checkbox to enable all subscriber for calling, which are entered in
 the field Disabling of functions and dialling. Thus, it is possible to initiate calls to subscribers with
higher hierarchy level.
It is possible to enter a call number range of a 4-digit part-call number. All 5-8 digit call numbers will
be enabled, which starts with the 4-digit part-call number.

NOTE:
Still only subscribers are displayed in the F1 menu, which are callable with the common hierarchy
settings.

3.1/0923 165
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

Indication of system faults on outputs

The relay S1 on the G8-GEN (installation board GEAN 700R) or G3-GEM can be used for status
indication of the Intercom Server (e.g. indication via signal lamp):
 Relay closed: Intercom Server in normal operation.
 Relay open: Intercom Server switched off, during restart or Fault.
The relay S2 on the G8-GEN (installation board GEAN 700R) or G3-GEM can be used for status indi-
cation of the cards:
 Relay open: All cards in normal operation.
 Relay closed: At least one card with faults.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > General Settings > tab General
 Relay S1: Intercom Server error and Relay S2: Slot error: Activate these checkboxes to indicate
system faults for the respective outputs.

NOTE:
When the relays are used for this function they may not be configured for other functions.

 De-bounce time for buttons

The de-bounce time for buttons can be configured selectively per subscriber.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common
 Key de-bounce time [s]: In this drop-down list, the de-bounce time can be selected per subscriber.

 Internal handset function with volume control

Intercom stations with position switch (see the corresponding data sheet of the device) can be used as
handset after lifting the Intercom station.

NOTE: Privacy mode

 Turn the Intercom station 90° to activate the privacy mode (see page 167).
 The call volume is set by the handset volume (see page 255).

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

166 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

 Disable position switch and internal handset function

If e.g. an Intercom station with position switch be used as wallmount station, it can be defined that turn-
ing the station (hanging on the wall):
 Does not activate privacy function (or secretary transfer).
 Does not switch to handset volume.
For the wallmount station EE 320, these functions must not be disabled, because a magnet disables the
position switch as soon as the station is in the wallmount bracket.

ATTENTION: Analogue 4-wire Intercom stations

Disabling the internal handset function does not apply for analogue 4-wire Intercom stations.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy
 Permission Privacy: Activate this checkbox to enable the privacy mode and secretary transfer for the
respective subscriber.
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Handset
 Disable internal handset function: Activate this checkbox to do not switch to handset volume when
the respective subscriber is lifted.

 Microphone mute
If during a running call the subscriber wants to prevent the called person from listening to a conversa-
tion going on in his room, it is possible to switch off his microphone by pressing button 7. By pressing
the same button again he is re-connected with the other subscriber. During the time the microphone is
switched off, the conversation partner receives an acoustic and visual signal.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common > Waiting signals
 Microphone mute: In this drop-down list, a configured music program can be selected.
 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy
 Music on Waiting (Busy/Privacy): Activate this checkbox to receive the music program for the
respective subscriber, which is selected in the drop-down list microphone mute.

NOTE: Disable after-dialling

The function “Disable after dialling“ has to be disabled for subscribers (see page 335).

3.1/0923 167
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

 Automatic disconnection of conversations after time per

subscriber
After a configurable disconnection time a running call is interrupted (by default, 6 minutes). The cancel
of the conversation time is indicated by a three time minute signal before the call is cancelled. The
conversation time can then be extended (started once again) by pressing 77. This disconnection can
be deactivated by configuration, so that each call has to be cancelled with button X.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Switch off times
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Switch off times”.
 Switch-off time duplex [s]: In this field, the switch-off times can be changed for Duplex (max. 900
seconds, by default 360 seconds).
 Switch-off time simplex [s]: In this field, the switch-off times can be changed for Simplex (max. 900
seconds, by default 180 seconds).
 Switch-off time full duplex [s]: In this field, the switch-off times can be changed for Full Duplex (max.
900 seconds, by default 360 seconds).
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX”, this setting can be changed for the entire Intercom Server
block.
 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Alarm, Common
 Auto. disconnection: Activate this checkbox to enable the automatic disconnection (at a
configuration without restart, the configuration is applied at the next call).

NOTE:
If a selective switch-off time is configured for a subscriber at Intercom Server > Switch off times
(see above), a call will also be deactivated if the checkbox Auto. disconnection is deactivated.

In case of a conversation between a subscriber with and a subscriber without automatic disconnection,
the conversation is not switched off automatically (depending on calling/called station).

 Reconnection with last call

The last call is set up again by dialling the sequence 0T (also for answer to All Call).

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Reconnect with last call via SIP trunk


NOTE: Only available with configured SIP trunk
The following function is only available with at least one configured SIP trunk. For further information
about the configuration of SIP trunks, see page 466.

Feature PRO 800 6.1 – Reconnect with last conversation partner via SIP trunk
VirtuoSIS If the last call has been set up to a SIP station through a SIP trunk, it can be set up again by
LICENCE PRO6U
dialling the sequence 0T.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

168 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

 Inquiry/further connection
If an inquiry with another subscriber is required during a conversation, the active conversation can be
put on hold by pressing the button 0.
 The dial tone is audible at the station and a second subscriber can be called.
 At Intercom stations with dot-matrix display, the button A can be pressed in order to select a sub-
scriber from the subscriber list.
 It is also possible to initiate e.g. an All Call with answer back.
The waiting subscriber receives the privacy tone and the conversation lamp blinks. Instead of the
privacy tone a music channel for feed-in of waiting information or music can be switched on. All
previously defined music channels can be used as waiting signal. At dot-matrix display stations
“Please wait” is displayed.

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Conversation
20
Anne Long
Please wait

X-Cancel
Then there is a choice of the following two possibilities:
 The second conversation is cancelled with X, the dial tone is switched on again. If desired, further
inquiries can be started. If X is pressed another time, the call to the “parked” subscriber is
established again.
 The new conversation partner can be connected to the “parked” subscriber with button 0.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common / Waiting signals
 Microphone mute: In this drop-down list, a configured music program can be selected (default:
privacy tone)
 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy
 Music on Waiting (Busy/Privacy): Activate this checkbox to receive the music program for the
respective subscriber, which is selected in the drop-down list microphone mute.

NOTE:
“Disable after dialling” has to be deactivated for the respective subscriber (see page 335).

3.1/0923 169
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

 Further connection to fix privacy station


 During a conversation, a subscriber can connect its conversation partner to a subscriber with privacy
transfer, whereby this call cannot be accepted first at the privacy station. E.g. if the call is transferred
to the privacy subscriber, the call between both subscribers is cancelled automatically and the privacy
tone is audible at the transferred subscriber until the call is accepted by the privacy station.

Requirements
The following cards are supported:
Gx-IP Gx-GED Gx-GET

Gx-TEL 1) Gx-TEL4 Gx-IAX 1)

Gx-S0 1) SIS-IP-8 SIS-SIP-T 1)
SIS-SIP-C 1)
1) Transfer to a privacy station on this card is only possible after the call has been accepted.

NOTE: Different cards can be used

The stations can be registered at different cards.

Transfer process

Transfer process
 During a conversation between the subscriber A and B, press the button 0 on the station A. The con-
versation between subscribers A and B is paused.
 The dial tone is audible at the station A and the call number of the privacy station C can be entered.
If an error occurs during dialling or the dial process is cancelled prematurely, the previous conver-
sation will be continued.
 The incoming privacy call is indicated at the station C and the privacy tone is audible at the station A.

NOTE: Call must be ended first when subscriber is busy

If the privacy subscriber is busy, the busy tone is audible at the station B and the subscriber C must
cancel the active conversation first in order to accept the incoming privacy call.

 Press the button 0 at the station an In order to acknowledge the call initiation between the subscrib-
ers B and C. The conversation between the subscribers B and C is ended. Privacy tone is audible at
station B.
 Press the button 0 at the station C in order to accept the incoming privacy call.

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy
2. Activate the checkbox Fix as called for the subscriber, to which the privacy call be transferred.

170 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

Display Indication with stations series EE311A/EE411

In addition to the display functions described here, there are certain indications with special functions
(e.g. privacy, control desk functions), which are shown at the description of the corresponding feature.

Idle state
In idle state (if no conversation is built up and if no special mode like privacy or secretary transfer is
activated) the own calling number is indicated, e.g.:

Conversation
During a conversation the calling number of the conversation partner is indicated in the display, e.g.:

It is also possible to configure an up to 6 character long text, which is indicated in the display of the
conversation partner, e.g.:

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
 Display Text EE311A/411: In this field, a text with up to 6 digits can be entered (for a list of possible
characters see below). If stations without display or with dot-matrix display are used, a text be en-
tered for these stations. In this case, the text is displayed in case of a conversation with a display
station EE311/EE411.

Character font EE311A/EE411

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - > < blank
_ A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z *
+ = / ] a b c d h i k m n o
r t u v w z . :

3.1/0923 171
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

Display functions dot-matrix display

Device version
The device version can be queried at any time by selecting the option “Device Version” in the main
menu. (calling number, name, versions of Intercom Server, subscriber card and station). After 10
seconds or when button X is pressed, the display switches to idle state.

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

GerÄteversion
22
Doc. Snyder
22
Doc. Snyder
GE 800 Pro01.1 GE 700 Pro05.6
GED-4D V03.1 GED-4D V02.3
WS-D V01.0 EE 811 V02.6

X-Beenden
X-Abbrechen
At EE880 control desk additionally the ARM-software version is indicated.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Idle state
This display is shown if no conversation is built up and if no special mode (like e.g. privacy) is activated.
It indicates the calling number and the “Display text EE811A & camera” of the own station. Additionally
the function keys are explained (can be deactivated).

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

22
22 Doc. Snyder
Doc. Snyder
F1-Teilnehmer
F2-Funktionen
F3-Hauptmenü
d-MenÜ

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
 Display text EE811A & camera: In this field, a text with up to 14 digits can be entered for the
respective subscriber.

 Contrast adjustment with arrow buttons

  Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Alarm, Common
 No contrast adjustment: Activate this checkbox for subscribers, which not be able to change the con-
trast of the display in idle state.

Hide function menu in idle display

 For EE811A: Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > EE811 family > tab Inputs, Outputs,
Display
 For WS series: Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series > tab Display

172 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

 Don‘t show function menu: Activate this checkbox to hide the function menu in idle display of the
respective subscriber.

3.1/0923 173
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

Menus

 Subscriber list
In the subscriber list, all subscribers of the Intercom system will be displayed in alphabetical order that
are defined at Subscriber > General > tab Naming in the field Display texts EE811A & camera.

Colour TFT display/monochrome LCD display

 In order to open the subscriber list in idle state, press the button c, select the option “Subscribers”
via the arrow buttons and press the button e.

monochrome LCD display colour TFT display

Subscribers
Santana C.
Scott B.
Sixx N.
Staley L.
Stills S.
Stradlin I.
Search:.......

NOTE:
Full text search will not be supported.

 With the arrow buttons, the desired subscriber can be selected in the subscriber list.
  With PRO 800 1.1 or higher, the subscriber list can be searched with the alphanumeric buttons (see
page 175).
 Feature PRO 800 6.1 – Indication of call number in subscriber list
 VirtuoSIS The call number of the selected subscriber will be indicated if no button is pressed for ap-
LICENCE PRO6U
proximately three seconds.

 Press the button F to establish a call to the selected subscriber.

 Press the button X to close the subscriber list without establishing conversation.

Dot-matrix display
 The subscriber list can be called up by pressing button an In idle state.
 First an alphabetical overview is displayed (if activated). With the arrow buttons, the initial letter of
the searched subscriber can be selected, and by pressing the button F, the first subscriber with the
selected initial letter will be displayed in the subscriber list.

174 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

 With the arrow buttons, the desired subscriber can be selected in the subscriber list. The button A
can be used for page down, B for page up.
 The subscriber list can be searched with the alphanumeric buttons (see page 175).
 The call number of the selected subscriber will be indicated if no button is pressed for approxi-
mately three seconds.
 By pressing the button F, a call will be established to the selected subscriber.
 By pressing the button X, the subscriber list can be left without building up a conversation.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
 Display text EE811A & camera: In this field, the name of the station with up to 14 digits can be en-
tered for the respective subscriber. If the series “811” or “311/411” is used, this text also be entered
in the field Display Text EE311A/411. In this case, the text is indicated on the display of the control
desk EE 311/EE 411 during a conversation.

Deactivation of the alphabet overview of the subscriber list

Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber menus
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add subscriber menu parameters”.
 Show A-Z menu: Activate this checkbox to indicate the alphabet overview for the respective
subscriber.
 Intercom Server-Block: In this drop-down list, the connected Intercom Servers or blocks can be se-
lected, which be included in the subscriber list.
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX”, this setting can be selected for the entire Intercom Server
block.

NOTE:
The A-Z menu is not available for IP terminals (EE900A, WS-IP).

 Search function in the subscriber list

The subscriber list can be searched for letters, characters and numbers by means of the alphanumeric
buttons (1 to 9) of the Intercom station (case-insensitive and full-text search). Press the button X to
delete the last input. The latest input after pressing an alphanumeric button will be confirmed for the
search if the same button is not pressed again within one second. The displayed subscribers can be
selected using the arrow buttons (E and D). By pressing the button F, a call can be established to
the desired subscriber.

GOOD TO KNOW:
 With PRO 800 6.0 or higher, the subscriber list can be searched for Cyrillic characters.
 With PRO 800 6.1 or higher, the subscriber list can be searched for Hebrew characters.

3.1/0923 175
General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

Permanent subscriber list

It is possible to permanently activate the F1 menu for stations with dot-matrix display. This can be
useful for e.g. door and gate stations, where the subscriber index be displayed permanently. The op-
eration and the indication at the display is changed, since the handling is not via the main menu. Scroll
with the arrow keys and select with the number keys.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber menus
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add subscriber menu parameters”.
 Permanent menu display: In this drop-down list, select the entry “Subscriber list” to display this sub-
scriber list permanently in idle state for the Intercom Server block or per subscriber.
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX”, this setting can be selected for the entire Intercom Server
block.

NOTE:
The configuration of the field Permanent menu display in Intercom Server > Subscriber
menus does only apply to stations with dot-matrix display, stations of type EE 980 are not
supported.

Hide subscribers from subscriber list

It is possible to hide subscribers from the subscribers list (e.g. for dummy subscribers).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Alarm, Common
 Hide subscribers from F1-menu: Activate this checkbox to hide the respective subscriber in the sub-
scriber list.

External subscriber list

In case an external System (e.g. Studio) manage a subscriber list (telephone book), this subscriber list
can be displayed at the Intercom subscribers of the Intercom System. It is possible to receive the exter-
nal subscriber list in two different ways:
 Press a button: Via ICX message or F2 menu.

NOTE:
For further information about the configuration of ICX messages, see the product manual
“ICX Protocol”.

 Permanent indication: Via F1 menu. The default F1 menu is replaced with the external subscriber list.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber menus
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add subscriber menu parameters”.
 External subscriber list: In this drop-down list, the subscriber can be selected, which permanently
display the external subscriber menu.
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX”, this setting can be selected for the entire Intercom Server
block.

176 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

 Phonebook view
Feature PRO 800 6.0 – phonebook view for the permanent subscriber list
VirtuoSIS
The indication of the permanent subscriber list (see page 176) in the phonebook view enables
LICENCE PRO6U the representation of up to 4 subscribers. In the phonebook view, subscribers can only be
selected via the arrow buttons, a search with the alphanumeric keypad is not possible.

Requirements
The following station types are supported:
 WS 800 (all versions)
The following firmware versions are supported:
 DSP 800B min. 2.3
 DSP 900A min. 6.2
 DSP 900B min. 6.2
 IoIP device min. 7.0

monochrome LCD display

Subscribers
Santana C. ›
Scott B.
Sixx N.
Staley L.
Down/UP ›Call
 Select the desired subscriber with the arrow buttons.
 Press the button e to establish a call to the respective subscriber.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber menus
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add subscriber menu parameters”.
 Permanent menu display: In this drop-down list, select the entry “Subscriber list” for the respective
subscriber to display the subscriber list permanently in idle state. The checkbox phonebook view will
be enabled.
 Activate the checkbox phonebook view for the respective subscriber.

3.1/0923 177
General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

Function list
The functions indicated in this list can be defined by configuration.

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Functions
1 Last Call
2 All Call
3 Group Call
4 Privacy ON
5 Privacy OFF
6 Music ON
›Execute X-Cancel

Monochrome LCD display and colour TFT display

 Open the main menu with menu button c. Select Functions via arrow buttons and accept with F
or initiate directly with button 2.
 With the arrow buttons a function is selected and initiated with button F or directly initiated via
buttons 1 to 6.
 With x the function list can be left without activating a function.

Dot-matrix display
 The Function List is called up by pressing button B in idle state.
 With the arrow buttons a function can be selected and carried out with button F.
 With button X the Function List can be left without carrying out a function.
The function list can be configured individually for each system and for each subscriber. The function
list can contain any button sequences or calling numbers, so it can be used e.g. as individual subscriber
index.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Functions F2-menu
 Number / Code: In this field, the direct dialling code of the respective function can be changed.
 Deutsch, English, Francais and Nederlands: In these fields, the name of the respective function can
be entered in the according language.

NOTE:
Further information about enabling a language can be found on page 183.

Selective functions in the F2 menu

Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > Individual F2-menu > sub-folder subscriber
 Right-click and select “Add function” (with PRO 800 1.1, max. 252 entries are available per
subscriber; see page 548).
 The selective functions are listed above the general functions in the function list (see page 178).
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Extended Settings

178 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

 Functions general: Activate this checkbox to enable the function list for the respective subscriber.
The display only shows the selective functions if it is configured for the respective subscriber.

NOTE:
 For stations with a dot-matrix display, the checkbox Function general is only available if a
function has already been added for the respective subscriber in the menu “individual F2-menu”
(Subscriber > Station properties > Individual F2-menu > sub-folder subscriber).
 For stations with a monochrome LCD and colour TFT display, a separate list of favourites will be
additionally applied to the “selective functions” in the function list (see page 191).

 Moving and sorting F2 menu entries in CCT 800

Via the toolbox, entries in the F2 menu can be moved and alphabetically sorted for either single sub-
scribers or the Intercom Server block.

This toolbox will be indicated in CCT 800 at Intercom Server - Block XX > Functions F2-menu and
Subscribers > Station properties > Individual F2-menu > desired subscriber. The column Index
shows the current position of the respective entry in the F2 menu.

NOTE:
If this toolbox is not displayed, carry out a right-click on the list and select “Show toolbox”.

 Search function in the function list

The function list can be searched for letters, characters and numbers by means of the alphanumeric
buttons (1 to 9) of the Intercom station (case-insensitive and full-text search). Press the button X to
delete the last input. The latest input after pressing an alphanumeric button will be confirmed for the
search if the same button is not pressed again within one second. The displayed subscribers can be
selected using the arrow buttons (E and D). By pressing the button F, a call can be established to
the desired subscriber.

GOOD TO KNOW:
 With PRO 800 6.0 or higher, the function list can be searched for Cyrillic characters.
 With PRO 800 6.1 or higher, the function list can be searched for Hebrew characters.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber menus
 Search in Functions / Favorites menu: Activate this checkbox to enable the search function for the
function list and favourites menu.
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX”, this setting can be activated for the entire Intercom
Server block.

3.1/0923 179
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

Permanent function list

It is possible to permanently indicate the function list for all subscribers with dot-matrix, monochrome
LCD and colour TFT displays.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber menus
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add subscriber menu parameters”.
 Permanent menu display: In this drop-down list, the permanent displayed function list in idle state
can be selected for the respective subscriber. The following functions are available with up to CCT
800 5.0:
 Functions / Favourites
  The following functions are available as of CCT 800 5.1:
 Functions
 Favourites + Functions
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX”, this setting can be selected for the entire Intercom Server
block.

 Individual F2 menu

NOTE:
This function is only available for subscribers with dot-matrix display.

Subscribers of the F1 subscriber menu can be selected and added to the personal F2 menu. If desired
a direct dialling code can also be assigned. These entries are added to the existing F2 menu. If desired
it is possible to add standard and additional entries in CCT 800. Per subscriber a maximum of 252
entries in the selective F2 menu are possible (as of PRO800 1.1 see page 548).

Adding an entry from the F1 menu

The subscriber is selected in the usual manner via scrolling with D and E and
Masters John browsing with A and B. This row is displayed inverted to show that it is
McRyan Andy selected. After not scrolling for 2 seconds additionally the call number of the
Mellin Julia subscriber is displayed. With F a call could be initiated to this call number.
Michael Roger
---- 1234 ----
Monday George
Musil Sarah
Muther Sam

If C is pressed a new menu is displayed, in which a new entry for this subscriber
can be created in the F2 menu. Additionally a direct dialling code can be advised.

F2-Menu
1234
Michael Roger
› Save
F1-Delete
X-Cancel

180 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

In the first row the direct dialling code is displayed or an empty space if none
has been advised. The code can be added/changed simply by entering an up to
T1_ 4 digit code with the keypad.
F2-Menu
1234
Michael Roger
› Save
F1-Delete
X-Cancel

When the F button is pressed, the entry for the F2 menu is saved with this call number (e.g. “1234”).
The text for the subscriber (“Michael Roger”) is queried from the Intercom Server for this subscriber.
If a direct dialling code has been entered (e.g. “T1”) it is saved as T1 = 1234 enabling conversations to
the subscriber to be built-up with T1. The code may consist of 1 to 4 digits. This direct dialling code
is also displayed when the CCT 800 file is received and at the normal direct dialling configuration of the
station with 9T1 (direct dialling see page 212).

Adding an entry during a conversation

The menu described above can also be displayed during a conversation by pressing C. Therefore
pressing C and F adds an F2 entry for the current conversation partner. The audio transmission of
the conversation is even active when editing in the menu, however the acknowledgment tone is not
output when F is pressed.

3.1/0923 181
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

Changing of the entries of the F2 menu

If C is pressed in the F2 menu while a subscriber is selected, the menu for configuration of this entry
is displayed again.

Deleting an entry of the F2 menu

During editing of an F2 entry (see above), the complete entry including direct di-
alling code can be deleted by pressing the button A.

F2-Menu

X-Cancel

NOTES:
 A maximum of 252 entries per subscriber are possible (as of PRO 800 1.1; see page 548).
 For the WS series a favourites menu can be configured instead of the individual F2 menu (see
page 191).

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

F3-Main menu
The main menu is called up by pressing button C in idle state:
 WS800 With button c
 EE811A: With button C

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Main Menu
1 Subscribers
2 Functions
3 Favourites
4 Settings

X-Cancel ›OK

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

Switch-off time for menus
The automatic switch-off time of the menus can be configured.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber menus
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add subscriber menu parameters”.
 Menu display time [s]: In this field, the switch-off time of the menus can be selected (2 to 1049
seconds, by default 10 seconds).
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX” this setting can be selected for the entire Intercom Server
block.

 Help functions
For most of the possible functions (no matter if they are entered directly or called up in the function
list) the possible inputs are indicated at the bottom of the display as help for the user.

182 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

Volume adjustment
The volume for the different tone signals and conversation modes can be adjusted individually. If the
option “Set Volume” is selected in the main menu, a list for selection of the tone signals and con-
versation mode appears. Select the volume you want to adjust with up and down keys (accept the
selection with button F) or by entering the corresponding number. The Display for adjustment of the
volume appears:
Dot-matrix display

Monochrome
LautstÄrke LautstÄrke LCD display
1 Tone Töne
2 Gong
3 Musik
4 Sammelruf 5
5 Duplex
6 Simplex πndern -/+
X-Abbrechen ›OK X-Beenden ›Speichern
Colour TFT
display

The volume can be changed in steps from 0 to 12 with the arrow buttons or with the buttons 0 to 9
The maximum volume depends on the device and if the maximum volume has been limited by con-
figuration (see page 253). With button F the new volume is saved, with X the mode can be left without
saving any changes.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

Language
Several languages can be loaded for the display of the dot matrix display units. The desired language
can then be selected at each station. By default, the languages English and German are already loaded.
The language which is set as standard for the stations can be configured.
Selecting the option “Language” in the main menu opens a list of all loaded languages. Select the
desired language with the arrow buttons (accept the selection with button F) or by entering the
corresponding number. With button X the list can be left without changing the language.

3.1/0923 183
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Language
1 Deutsch
2 English

X-Cancel ›OK

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server- Block XX > Languages Subscriber Display
 Current display languages: In this field, the currently loaded display languages are displayed.
 The buttons Reset and Delete are used to restore the default language settings.
 Language of the file > Languages: The following display languages are available:
 Dutch
 English
 French
 German
 Hebrew

 Feature PRO 800 2.0 – Hebrew

 PRO 800

LICENCE PRO2U
Allows to select Hebrew as display language.

NOTE: Prerequisites Hebrew alphabet

The following firmware versions are supported:
 EE 811A: DSP 800A min. 2.1
 EE 900A / WS 800I: DSP 900A min. 5.1 or IoIP device 7.0

 Italian
 Polish
 Russian

NOTE: Prerequisites for Cyrillic

The following firmware versions are supported:
 EE 811A: DSP 800A min. 1.1
 WS 800D: DSP 800B min. 1.0
 WS 800I: DSP 900A min. 1.0 or IoIP device 7.0

 Spanish
 Select an available display language and assign it to one of the buttons Set to language by clicking
on it.
 Language of the file > Path of language file: In this field, the directory of the selected database is dis-
played. Click on the button ... to select a different database. A window appears and a GET file can be
selected. Click on the button Load File to load the selected language in CCT 800.

ATTENTION:
If texts are changed in an existing GET file (e.g. for English), these are only applied to the
Intercom Server if a different name is assigned for “Language in plain text” in the GET file
(e.g. “English_new”)!

184 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

Set default station language

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Extended Settings
 Default languages: The following standard languages are available:
 German
 English

NOTE:
If additional languages are required, the languages must first be added to the display languages.

ATTENTION:
After initialising an Intercom Server, only English is activated in the Intercom Server! After sending
the first CCT 800 file, the secondary language (in standard “German”) can be enabled!

 Favourites menu

It is possible to configure an individual list of frequently required functions and subscribers. This list is
indicated separated from the “Function list” in the menu “Favourites”.

NOTE:
The entitlement for the favourites menu can be deactivated (see page 189).

 Open the main menu with menu button c.

 Select “Favourites” via the arrow buttons and accept with F or directly select with button 3. The
configured list of favourites is indicated:

monochrome LCD display colour TFT display

Favourites
1 Kilmister L.
2 Vedder E.
3 Music on
4 Music off
5 McKagan D.
6 Call Transfer
›Execute d-Edit
 With the arrow buttons a function or subscriber is selected and initiated / accepted with button F or
directly initiated via buttons 1 to 6. With x the list can be left without selecting an entry.
 Via the menu button c the menu “Fav. edit” for editing the list of favourites can be opened.

 Edit Favourites
The list of favourites can be created and edited via the display menu of the station.
 Open the list of favourites:
 From menu “Favourites”, or
 from menu “Settings”

Add Favourites
 Various functions and subscribers can be added to the favourites menu:
 If the list has been opened via the menu “Favourites”, press menu button c.
 If the list has been opened via the menu “Settings”, press return button F.

3.1/0923 185
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

monochrome LCD display colour TFT display

Edit Favourites
1 Add
2 Delete
3 Save

X-Cancel ›OK

 In the appearing menu, select the entry “Add” via F.

Add subscriber
 Select the entry “Subscriber” with the button F to open the subscriber list:

monochrome LCD display colour TFT display

Add Favourites
1 Subscribers
2 Functions

X-Cancel ›OK
 Selecting and searching for a subscriber is carried out as described in section “Menus”.
 Pressing F will not initiate a call to the respective subscriber, but the subscriber will be added to the
list of favourites (leaving without making a selection it is possible by pressing the button x).

Add function
 Select “Functions” via F to open the function list.
 In order to add a function to the list of favourites, select the function with the arrow buttons and ac-
cept with F or add the function directly to the list via buttons 1 to 6 (leaving without making a
selection: x).
Further information about saving the added subscribers or functions can be found on page 187.

 Delete favourites
Subscribers and functions can be deleted from the list of favourites:

monochrome LCD display colour TFT display

Edit Favourites
1 Add
2 Delete
3 Save

X-Cancel ›OK
 The subscriber or function to be deleted is selected with the arrow buttons and the menu pictured to
the right is opened via:
 The menu button c (if list of favourites has been opened from menu “Favourites”) or
 the return button F (if list of favourites has been opened from menu “Settings”).

186 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

 In the appearing menu, select the entry “Delete” via the arrow buttons and accept with the button
F or 2.
Further information about saving changes in the favourites menu can be found on page 187.

Save and reject changes

If subscriber and/or functions have been added or deleted, then these changes have to be saved in or-
der that the list of favourites can be updated. After making changes (i.e. adding or deleting favourites),
open the menu pictured to the right via e.

monochrome LCD display colour TFT display

Edit Favourites
1 Add
2 Delete
3 Save

X-Cancel ›OK
 From the appearing menu select the entry “Save” with the arrow buttons and accept with F or
accept the entry directly via pressing button 3.
 When trying to leave the list of favourites with x, without saving previously, the menu pictured
below will be opened.

monochrome LCD display colour TFT display

Save
1 Save
2 Drop
3 Continue

X-Cancel ›OK
With the arrow buttons and acknowledgement with F or direct selection via buttons 1 to 3, one of
the following 3 possibilities are selected:
 Save: Saving/taking over changes made in the list (the list of favourites can then be left with x).
 Reject: Rejecting changes, i.e. changes will not be saved (the list of favourites can then be left with
x).
 Continue: Continue editing the list of favourites.

NOTE:
A maximum of 255 entries are possible per subscriber (as of PRO 800 1.1 see page 548).

 Editing favourites via CCT 800

Additionally to editing the favourites menu via the station the favourites menu can also be defined in
CCT800.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series/CD Series > Favourites > sub-folder
subscriber
 Right-click and select “Add entry”.

3.1/0923 187
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

 Number / Code: In this field, the call number of the subscriber or the function code can be entered.
If a function code is entered, which is not available in the field Functions F2-menu, it is possible to
enter a text in the fields English and German (consider restrictions on page 548).
 English and Deutsch: In these fields (and all further defined languages), the corresponding text of
the field Displaytext EE811A & camera (for a subscriber) or “Functions F2-menu” (for function
codes) can be entered. These texts are displayed in the display of the WS series.
 Right-click and select “Add entries” to add multiple call numbers and function codes at once (several
entries are separated via commas).
 Right-click and select “Add entry” to create an empty separator entry for the permanent favorite list
(see page 189).
 Delete favorites: Right-click on the desired entry and select “Remove entry”.

Moving and sorting F2 menu entries in CCT 800

Via the toolbox, entries in the F2 menu can be moved and alphabetically sorted for either single sub-
scribers or the Intercom Server block. See the following illustration:

This toolbox will be indicated in CCT 800 at Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series/CD Se-
ries > Favourites > sub-folder subscriber. The column Page/Index indicates the page number of the
entry in the favourites menu and the button, which is allocated to the respective function.

NOTE:
If this toolbox is not displayed, carry out a right-click on the favourites menu and select “Show tool-
box”.

 Search function in the favourites menu

The favourites menu can be searched for letters, characters and numbers by means of the
alphanumeric buttons (1 to 9) of the Intercom station (case-insensitive and full-text search). Press
the button X to delete the last input. The latest input after pressing an alphanumeric button will be
confirmed for the search if the same button is not pressed again within one second. The displayed
subscribers can be selected using the arrow buttons (E and D). By pressing the button F, a call can
be established to the desired subscriber.

GOOD TO KNOW:
 With PRO 800 6.0 or higher, the favourites menu can be searched for Cyrillic characters.
 With PRO 800 6.1 or higher, the favourites menu can be searched for Hebrew characters.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber menu
 Search in Functions / Favorites menu: Activate this checkbox to enable the search function for the
function list and favourites menu.
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX“ this setting can be activated for the entire Intercom Server
block.

188 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

 Permanent favourites menu

The favourites menu can be permanently displayed in idle state (e.g. for stations at doors or lobbies).
Handling with permanent favourites fist:
 Change to idle display: c button.
 Change back to permanent favourites menu: x button.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber menus or
Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series/CD Series > Direct dialling settings/Favour-
ites
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add subscriber menu parameters” (only at
Intercom Server > Subscriber menus).
 Permanent menu display: In this drop-down list, the permanent displayed favourites menu in idle
state can be selected for the respective subscriber.
 The following functions are available with up to CCT 800 5.0:
 Functions / Favourites
  The following functions are available with CCT 800 5.1:
 Favourites
 Favourites + Functions
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX”, this setting can be selected for the entire Intercom Server
block.

 Entitlements favourites menu

For each WS station it is possible to control the entitlements of the favourites menu:
 Full access: Display and modification of the favourites menu is allowed.
 Indication only: The favourites menu can be displayed and used for dialling but modification is not
possible.
 No access: The favourites menu cannot be displayed nor modified (the menu entry “Favourites” is
hidden in the display).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series/CD Series > Favourites
 Entitlements Favourites: In this drop-down list, the entitlement of the favourites menu can be se-
lected for the respective subscriber.

3.1/0923 189
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

 Calling history

Feature PRO 800 2.1 – calling history
With the calling history, the last 20 incoming and outgoing calls will be indicated in the func-
tion menu of the Intercom subscribers. With the arrow buttons E and D, the desired call en-
PRO 800

LICENCE PRO2U
try can be selected and by pressing the Enter button, a call will be established to the selected
destination (only for Intercom calls). “9T6” is the default function code to open the calling
history. The function code can be changed at Intercom Server - Block XX > Function
Codes (see page 157).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Calling history
 Group multiple calls: In this drop-down list, the groupings of calls in the calling history can be
selected. The following settings are available:
 Off: Calls from the calling history are not grouped.
 By subscriber: Calls are grouped by subscriber.
 By subscriber and direction: Calls are grouped by subscriber and directions.

NOTE: Calls via SIP trunk will not be grouped

Incoming and outgoing calls via a SIP trunk will never be grouped.

 Show in main menu: Activate this checkbox to show the calling history in the main menu.

 Indication of call number in the calling history for SIP trunk


NOTE: Only available with configured SIP trunk
The following function is only available with at least one configured SIP trunk.
For further information about the configuration of SIP trunks, see page 466.

Feature PRO 800 6.1 – Indication of call number in the calling history for SIP trunk
VirtuoSIS
In the calling history, the call number of SIP stations connected through a SIP trunk to this
LICENCE PRO6U subscriber are now indicated. By pressing the Enter button, a call will be established to the se-
lected destination.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

190 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

Special features A Series / WS series

 Backlit display
For the white display backlight, configurations for the following display features can be set via the
menu of the station or the configuration software CCT.

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Display
7
Intensity

œChange -/+
X-Cancel ›Save

Display
29
Timeout

X-Cancel ›Save

NOTE:
 The display backlight is deactivated automatically after 4 seconds if the button X is pressed in idle
mode of the station (no matter which timeout for the backlight is configured).
 Via configuration, the display backlight switch-off can be deactivated.
 In idle mode the contrast of the display can be set with the arrow buttons.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > EE811 family or
Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series > tab Display
 Display timeout [s]: In this field, the time of inactivity can be changed, after which the backlight illu-
mination is switched to idle mode (max. 999 seconds; 0 = illumination is permanently activated, (by
default 30 seconds).
 Display idle intensity: In this drop-down list, the intensity of the backlight in idle mode can be
selected.

ATTENTION:
 It is not recommended to change the pre-configuration (preconfigured display idle intensity:
“OFF”)! With display idle intensity “OFF” electricity can be saved and the life time of the colour
TFT display can be increased! In case a high idle intensity is configured and the Intercom station
is less used, a screen burn of the idle screen is possible!
 After initialising an Intercom Server only the English language file is active in the Intercom Server!
After sending the first CCT 800 file the second language (in standard “German”) becomes active!

 Display active intensity: In this drop-down list, the intensity of the backlight in active mode can be
selected.
 Contrast: In this drop-down list, the display contrast of WS810 stations and analogue WS800
stations (WS800A) can be selected.

3.1/0923 191
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

 Backlit keypad

ATTENTION:
 The keypad backlight can only be used and configured with external power supply of the WS station!
 This means the checkbox External power supply has to be activated for the WS station see
page 193!

For the white keypad/button backlight the following features can be set via the menu of the station
(WS800/WS810 only) or the configuration software CCT800:
 Intensity of the backlight in 10 steps from 0 to 9.
 Timeout, after which the backlight be deactivated at inactivity (1 to 999 seconds).
 If the timeout is set to “0”, the keypad illumination is permanently active.

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Keypad
7
Intensity

œChange -/+
X-Cancel ›Save

Keypad
30
Timeout

X-Cancel ›Save

NOTE:
The keypad backlight is deactivated automatically after 4 seconds if the button X is pressed in idle
mode of the station (no matter which timeout for the backlight is configured). Via configuration, the
keypad backlight switch-off can be deactivated.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series > tab Keyboard
 Keypad timeout [s]: In this field, the time of inactivity can be changed, after which the backlight
illumination is switched to idle mode (max. 999 seconds; 0 = illumination is permanently activated,
by default 30 seconds).
 Keypad idle intensity: In this drop-down list, the intensity of the backlight in idle mode can be
selected.
 Keypad active intensity: In this drop-down list, the intensity of the backlight in active mode can be
selected.

 Multifunctional LED
Instead of the default red conversation lamp of Intercom terminals, the A series terminals are fitted with
a multifunctional LED, with which the colours red, green and blue will be indicated. The multifunctional
LED can be configured individually in CCT 800 for the following modes:

192 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

 Tone signals: E.g error tone, privacy tone or waiting signal for busy.
 Operating states: E.g emergency call, state group call or state conference listen.

NOTE:
Use of LED Templates with AFLS 10H C and AFLS 10H H and AFLS 10H P requires VirtuoSIS 10.0 or
higher.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Templates (LED+TFT) > tab Template Name
 Template Name: In this field, the name of the respective template can be entered. In the following
tabs, the options for this template will be enabled.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Templates (LED+TFT) > tab Colour assignment-tones
 In the following drop-down lists, the tones can be allocated to a colour (or 2 colours for linking):
 Colour off: In this drop-down list, the colour of the permanent LED can be selected for the
respective DSP signal.
 Colour on: In this drop-down list, the colour of the permanent LED can be selected for the
respective DSP signal.
 Blink mode on / off (ms): In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the LED can be selected for the
respective DSP signal.
 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab General
 Template (LED+TFT): In this drop-down list, a template can individually be assigned to subscribers.

 Increased volume (incl. voltage monitoring)

Instead of the volume levels 0 to 9 available with previous stations, the following stations offer
increased volume levels:
 A series station: Volume levels from 0–11.
 WS series stations: Volume levels from 0–12.

Voltage monitoring:
 The station automatically monitors if the current supply is sufficient for the operation of the station
with the respective volume level. If at higher line lengths the current supply is too low, the volume
level is reduced automatically (in no case lower than volume level 8).
 Therefore the full features of the WS series with increased volume, maximum display and keypad
back-light is only possible with external power supply of the station.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series > tab General
 External power supply: Activate this checkbox to enable volume level 12 if the respective subscriber
is powered by a external power supply.

 16 kHz audio bandwidth

With the Intercom Server generation GE 800 and GE 300 conversations, All Calls, radio conferences and
music are possible with 16 kHz audio bandwidth.

NOTE:
 16 kHz is only possible when the station of both conversation partners support the 16 kHz bandwidth.
 All Calls and group calls in 16 kHz are only possible in systems, in which all receivers support 16 kHz
audio bandwidth.

Supported station types

EE 811A, EE 900A WS Series

3.1/0923 193
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

Supported station types

EE3 11A Intercom Client (depending on sound card used)
EE 380A ET901D with A Series stations
EE 342A All analogue stations
ET 312A, ET 311A EX 200

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common
 Audio: In this drop-down list, select the entry “Digital 16 kHz” for the respective subscribers.

All Calls, group calls with 16 kHz

Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common / Audio
 Activate the checkbox All Calls / Group Calls → 16 kHz.

Speech recording with 16 kHz

Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common
 Activate the checkbox Audio recording → 16 kHz.

ATTENTION:
Voice recording in 16 kHz is not possible with the G8-AUD card!

 Invert button “0” and button “T”


Feature PRO 800 2.1 – invert button “0” and button “T”
PRO 800 For Intercom modules it is possible to invert the screw terminal connection of the button “0”
LICENCE PRO2U and button “T”.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common
 Invert key 0: Activate this checkbox to invert the screw terminal connection of the button “0”.
 Invert key T: Activate this checkbox to invert the screw terminal connection of the button “T”.

194 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

 Extended subscribers

Feature PRO 800 2.1 – extended subscribers
PRO 800 With the extended subscribers feature it is possible to use Stand-Alone modules without using
LICENCE PRO2U a fully-fledged IP subscriber.

Number of extended subscribers per IP card

 G8-IP-8: 2 extended subscribers per card.
 G8-IP-32: 8 extended subscribers (2 per virtual G8-IP-8).
 G8-IP-32 + L8_IP-32-32B: 16 extended subscribers.

Restrictions and function range

 Bidirectional video.
 Direct dialling functions.
 Adding a new extended subscriber is only possible if the IP card addresses “9” and/or “10” are avail-
able. This IP card addresses can also be used by station inputs, station outputs and V24 clients.

NOTE:
By default, extended subscribers are created at the address “9” and “10” of the respective IP card.

 Allocation to client only possible if this client has no direct dialling function (allocation not possible
to e.g. EE380A, Intercom Client, WS with direct dialling via input).
 Allocation to client is only possible if this client has no video function.
 Allocation to host client is only possible within the same Intercom Server.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Extended subscribers
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add extended subscriber function”.
 Client Type: In this field, the client type of the extended subscriber is indicated.
 Station Type: In this drop-down list, the station type of the extended subscriber can be selected. The
following station types are available:
  Non Audio ICCNA
  Non Audio IC200I
 WSCM 50
 WSTM 50
 SIS Dongle
 Dummy port (see page 196)

NOTE:
If an extended subscriber is selected, this device type cannot be changed at Station properties >
tab Common.

 Assignment to host-client: In this drop-down list, a host client can be selected, to which the
respective extended subscriber will be allocated.

NOTE:
For further information about the configuration of the camera and monitor, see the product manual
“Video-WS”.

3.1/0923 195
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

 Extended subscribers – “dummy port”

Feature PRO 800 4.0 – dummy port (non-audio port)
An extended subscriber can be configured as a dummy port with feature level “D” for control
desk functions (non-audio port).

NOTE:
When using an IS 300 or VirtuoSIS Intercom Server, it is mandatory to activate all required licences
before it is possible to configure the extended subscribers.

Dummy ports are displayed in the following directories in CCT 800:

 Intercom Server > Subscriber licences
 Subscriber > General
 Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals
 Subscriber > Control Desks

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscribers > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Extended Subscribers
 Station Type: In this drop-down list, select the entry “Dummy Port” for the respective subscriber.

J
EN 81-28 Emergency Call System

Standards and guidelines

The functionality of an emergency call system is implemented by the requirements of DIN EN 81-28.
The following devices support the standard DIN EN 81-28:
ET 908H ET 962H
ET 970H EF 962H
ES 962H WS 211V I DA
ET 808A Y-LIFT-S

Requirement
The following firmware versions are supported:
 min. DSP800A 3.4 Build 1
 min. IoIP device 7.3 Build 6
 min. PRO 800 6.3 Build 16
 min. VirtuoSIS 9.0

Description
The emergency call system is intended to enable a permanent connection between trapped users and
a liberating organisation via a 2-way voice connection. The liberation organisation should be able to
provide this service at all times. The liberation organisation should be able to respond promptly to all
emergency calls.
In order to ensure the proper functioning of the emergency call release device, the system constantly
checks itself.
The emergency call system must have the following visible signals:

196 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

Call lamp
Indicates whether a user has triggered an emergency call.
According to standard EN 81-28: Yellow signal with picto-
gram in accordance with ISO 4190-5: 2006, Table C.1, no. 1,
which is lit when a real emergency call is detected.

Conversation lamp
Signals whether the speech connection is established.
According to standard EN 81-28: Green signal with picto-
gram in accordance with ISO 4190-5: 2006, Table C.1, no. 8,
which is lit during voice communication.

Out of service indication

If a microphone unit is not equipped with a call lamp and a conversation lamp is not connected, the
function can be deactivated. The alternating flashing of the call lamp and the conversation lamp at 1-
second intervals indicates that ”no service” is available.

NOTE:
The out of service indication is also shown if an EN 81-28 button monitoring via ICX has failed.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscribers > Station properties > tab Extended settings > EN 81-28 Out of service
indication
 The following states can be selected in the drop-down list:
 Auto: The state ”EN 81-28 No service indication” is automatically selected based on identity bits
indicating its capabilities. This is negotiated when the connection is first established. The current
state is displayed in the bracket.
 Off: There is no explicit signal at the Intercom station that ”no service” is currently possible.
 On: If ”No service” is available, the call lamp and the conversation lamp flash alternately.

Add Call lamp at conversation

This option can be used to set whether the call lamp lights up in addition to the conversation lamp dur-
ing a call / speech connection.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscribers > Station properties > tab Extended settings > EN 81-28 Add Call lamp
at conversation:
 The following states can be selected in the drop-down list:
 Auto: The state ”EN 81-28 Call lamp on call” is automatically selected by the amplifier itself. The
current state is displayed in the bracket.
 Off: The status ”EN 81-28 Add Call lamp at conversation” is deactivated.
 On: The status ”EN 81-28 Add Call lamp at conversation” is activated.

3.1/0923 197
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

 Power management
By default, the Intercom Server GE 300 is powered with a 30 W power supply unit, whereby the number
of usable digital subscribers is limited. With using a 60 W (with PRO 800 6.0 or higher) or 70 W power
supply unit, the number of usable digital subscribers can be increased.

NOTE:
For further information about the power management, see the product manual “GE 300”.

Configuration CCT 800

ATTENTION:
The following configuration may only be required for the Intercom Server GE300 (generation 2)!

 Go to: Intercom Server > General Settings > tab General

 Generation: In this drop-down list, select the entry “2” (2nd generation of the GE 300).
 Power Supply [W]: In this drop-down list, select either the entry “60” or “70” (according to the used
power supply unit) to use the full capacity of the power supply unit, by default 30 seconds).
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Extended Settings
 Deactivate power management: Activate this checkbox to optimize the power distribution over all
digital subscriber cards if the respective subscriber has an external power supply.

 User administration

When no user is logged into the Intercom station, it is locked, i.e., the subscriber functions are not
accessible. Incoming calls can always be received, whether a user is logged in or not. Users may log
in manually or automatically at the Intercom station to use its functions.
In order to log in with your user credentials, enter the button T followed by your PIN. At that point you
will be logged in either automatically after the pre-set timeout, or you can log in manually by keeping
the X button pressed for approximately one second.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > User administration > tab User groups
 Name: In this field, the group name can be entered. The following functions are enabled.
 Hierarchy level (local): In this drop-down list, the hierarchy level can be selected per user group (see
page 217).
 Hierarchy level (WAN): In this drop-down list, the level for outgoing conversations can be selected
per user group. If prohibited is selected the subscriber cannot call via WAN connections.
 RGB-LED colour off: In this drop-down list, the colour of the RGB LED can be selected for the state of
the user login (see page 199).
 RGB-LED colour on: In this drop-down list, the colour of the RGB LED can be selected for the state of
the user login (see page 199).
 Blink mode on/off (ms): In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the RGB LED can be selected for
the respective user group.

NOTE:
Up to 8 different user groups can be configured.

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > User Administration > tab Users
 Username: In this field, the name of a user can be entered.
 Access code: In this field, a door opener code can be entered (see page 316).

198 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features

 User pin: In this field, the pin of a user can be entered (4 to 8 digits).
 User group: In this drop-down list, the user group has to be selected for each user name.
 RFID: Activate this checkbox to use RFID keys (radio-frequency identification) for the log-in.

User login
Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Subscriber > User Login > tab General
 Right-click on a user and select “Add User Login”.
 Logout time-total: In this drop-down list, the total time from login to automatic logout can be
selected.
 Logout time-idle: In this drop-down list, the time from the last activity at the station (push of a button
or incoming call) to the automatic logout can be selected.
 Interface external control: In this drop-down list, an interface (ICX) to control the login/logout of a
user with ICX messages can be selected.
 Default user group: In this drop-down list, a group can be selected, which will be logged in all the
time. If no default user group is selected, a manual login is necessary.
 Display username on called station: Activate this checkbox to display the username of the logged in
user of the called station.
 Login via PIN code: Activate this checkbox to enable a login with PIN code entry.
 Login via ICX message: Activate this checkbox to enable the login via ICX messages.

NOTE:
For further information about the configuration of ICX messages, see the product manual “ICX
Protocol”.

States of the user login

Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Subscriber > User Login > tab Pre-recorded Audio
 Login: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be entered for the state “succeed Login”.
 Logout: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be entered for the state “Logout”.
 Tag fail: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be entered for the state “login via tag
failed”.
 PIN fail: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be entered for the state “login via PIN code
failed”.

NOTE:
Up to four different pre-recorded audio IDs can be entered for each station with a configured user
login (see page 398).

3.1/0923 199
 General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration

Offline indication
 Busy tone at line fault

It is possible to configure a busy tone / offline display for subscribers which cannot be reached.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Line monitoring > tab Line monitoring
 Activate the checkbox Line monitoring for the respective subscriber.
 Activate the checkbox Offline at line fault for the respective subscriber.
 Go to: Subscriber > Signal Tones-DSP Stations > tab Signals, Tones 1
 Busy tieline: In this drop-down list, a busy tone can be selected if the respective subscriber is offline.

 Secretary transfer at line fault


It is possible to configure a transfer to a secretary number when calling a subscriber with a line fault.

Configuration CCT 800 (subscriber with line fault)

 Go to: Subscriber > Line monitoring > tab Line monitoring
 Activate the checkboxes Line monitoring and Offline at line fault for the respective subscriber.
 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Talk into, Priority call, call transfer, Recall Request
 Activate the checkbox Call transfer as calling station for the calling subscriber and the checkbox Call
transfer as called station for the called subscriber (see page 266).
 Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
 Secretary Number: In this field, the call number of the secretary station can be entered.
 Secretary Description: In this field, the description of the secretary station will be displayed, which
is entered in the field Secretary Number. The description can be changed at Subscriber > General
> tab Naming in the field Description.

200 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Privacy, busy, re-call request

Privacy, busy, re-call request

Privacy function
If a subscriber does not wish to be called aloud, he has the possibility to protect his station against calls.
If a subscriber protected by privacy is called, both the caller and the receiver are given an acoustic
signal (privacy signal). At the called station the red lamp blinks, with display stations the display text
of the caller is indicated in the display.
The call is taken over by dialling any button or by lifting up the station (with EE311, EF311, EE320,
EE411, EE420 or EE811). Both stations disconnect automatically if the call is not answered within a
configurable time (by default, 30 seconds).
Calling station (“Michael White”)

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Conversation
35
Sam Brown
Privacy Call
Please wait
T-Intrude
X-Cancel

Called station (“Sam Brown”)

Conversation
20
Michael White
Privacy Call

0-Take Call
X-Cancel

There are different possibilities of activating privacy function, either at the station or by configuration,
which are described below.

NOTE:
As of PRO800 1.1 privacy state remains active after a restart of the Intercom Server.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy
 LED when private: Activate this checkbox to enable the blinking LED, while it is turned to the side (on-
ly for analogue stations).

 Permanent privacy function configurable

There are two different types of permanent privacy functions:

3.1/0923 201
 Privacy, busy, re-call request Intercom Server Configuration

 Permanent privacy depending on the called station

Each station can be configured for permanent privacy. In this case, all incoming conversations at this
station have to be taken over with any button or by lifting the station (with EE 411, EE 420, EE 311,
EE 320 or EE 811).
 Permanent Privacy Depending on the calling station
Each station can be configured to permanent privacy when calling another station. These stations
can call to other stations only in privacy. Calls to these stations however are received loudspeaking.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy
 Activate the checkboxes Fix as calling and/or Fix as called for the respective subscriber.

 Privacy function activated at the station

Activate privacy function at the station with 031
Each station entitled for privacy function can activate privacy function with 031. The privacy function
can be deactivated with 030. At a stations with dot-matrix display the following help is displayed af-
ter dialling of 03:

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Dial
03
Privacy
Status: OFF

0-Switch ON
X-Cancel

Privacy function by turning the station

With stations EE 411, EE 311 or EE 811 privacy can be activated by turning the station to the side (no
secretary transfer may be configured). In order to take over a call the station is turned back. Privacy
function by turning the station can be disabled (see page 167).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy
 Permission Privacy: Activate this checkbox to enable the privacy mode at the respective subscriber
with “031”.
 Permission privacy via tilting: Activate this checkbox to enable the privacy mode by turning the re-
spective subscriber.

Indication of the station's status

After dialling 03 the status of the station is indicated with a permanent signal for “loudspeaking” or
an interrupted signal (acknowledgment signal) for “privacy”. At display stations, active privacy func-
tions are additionally indicated:

202 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Privacy, busy, re-call request

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

20
Klaus Kurz
Privacy

d-Menu

311A/EE 411

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

Switch-off time
If a privacy call is not taken over within a configurable time, both stations switch off automatically.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Switch off times
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Switch off times”.
 Switch off time privacy calls [s]: In this field, the switch-off time of privacy calls can be changed (0 =
function disabled, by default 30 seconds).
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX”, this setting can be changed for the entire Intercom Server
block.

 Intrusion function at a private subscriber

When in need of an urgent connection with a private subscriber, the caller has the possibility to pass
on an information by pressing button T. After releasing of button T “Knocking” is ended, both
stations receive again the privacy signal.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Talk into, Priority call, call transfer, Re-Call Request
 Activate the checkbox Intrusion when private for the respective subscriber.
 Allow intrusion: Activate this checkbox to “knock” at the respective called subscriber.

 Waiting information for private subscriber

If a private subscriber is called, in standard the calling station receives the privacy tone. Instead of this
a music channel for feed in of waiting information or music can be defined. All (already configured)
music channels are available. It can be defined separately for each subscriber if he receives the defined
music channel or the standard tone.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common
 Privacy: In this drop-down list, a configured music program can be selected as waiting signal for pri-
vate subscribers (e.g. 4T1).
 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy

3.1/0923 203
 Privacy, busy, re-call request Intercom Server Configuration

 Music on Waiting (Busy/Privacy): Activate this checkbox to receive the defined music program at the
respective subscriber. If this checkbox is deactivated, the selected subscriber receives the standard
privacy tone.

 4 kHz as privacy tone

It is possible to define a 4 kHz Tone as call indication for stations switched to privacy mode.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy
 4 kHz as privacy tone: Activate this checkbox to indicate privacy calls with a 4 kHz tone at the
respective subscriber.

 Attendant contact for status “privacy”

An attendant contact (see page 241) can be configured for stations switched to privacy mode. The relay
is closed as long as the station is switched to privacy mode.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add attendant contact”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab Call No./Function
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacities can be found on page 549!

 Click on the button Configure Functions.

 Right-click and select “Add call no. / function”.
 In the field Call No./Function, enter the code “031”.
 Click on the button Accept to save the changes.

NOTE:
Several outputs can be configured for the same subscriber with either the same or different codes.

204 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Privacy, busy, re-call request

Busy functions
 Acoustic and visual busy indication
When calling a subscriber who is already talking, the caller hears an acoustic signal (busy signal)
indicating that the station is busy. With display stations EE 311/EE 411 the display text of the called sta-
tion is additionally indicated in the display. At stations with dot-matrix display the caller gets the fol-
lowing display:

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Conversation
20 Dave Grohl
Dave Grohl
Busy
0-Wait
T-Intrude
X-Cancel
All incoming calls are stored, also if the subscriber is called from several stations at the same time.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Automatic re-call in case of “Busy”

As soon as the called subscriber finishes his conversation, the new call to the waiting subscriber is
connected automatically. The caller can end the waiting position on his station at any time with X.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Switch-off busy signal while waiting for re-call

If no acoustic signal is desired while waiting for a number to become free, it can be switched off by
dialling 0 (if “Music on waiting” is configured the waiting signal is not switched off!). As indication of
the “waiting position” the red lamp blinks, at stations with dot-matrix display “Please wait” appears in
the display.

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Conversation
20
James Bond
Busy
Please wait
T-Intrude
X-Cancel

Waiting occupies no speech link. The call is set up automatically as soon as the called station is free.

3.1/0923 205
 Privacy, busy, re-call request Intercom Server Configuration

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Waiting information for busy subscriber

If a busy subscriber is called, in standard the calling station receives the busy tone. Instead of this a
music channel for feed in of waiting information or music can be defined. All (already configured)
music channels are available. It can be defined separately for each subscriber if he receives the defined
music channel or the standard tone.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common
 Busy: In this drop-down list, a configured music program can be selected as waiting signal for busy
subscribers.
 Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy
 Music on Waiting (Busy/Privacy): Activate this checkbox to receive the defined music program at the
respective subscriber. If this checkbox is deactivated, the selected subscriber receives the standard
busy tone.

 Acoustic and visual indication waiting subscriber

 Double minute signal in case of waiting subscriber
In order to show a talking subscriber that during his conversation he is called by another subscriber,
two successive minute signals sound on his station. With display stations the display text of the waiting
subscriber blinks in the display after the double minute signal (immediately after the call of the waiting
subscriber, then once per minute).

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Intrusion function at a busy subscriber

When in need of an urgent connection with a busy subscriber, the caller has the possibility to pass on
an information by pressing button T. During this period the conversation partner of the busy sub-
scriber is given an acoustic information signal (privacy signal) and the blinking red lamp. Instead of the
privacy signal a music channel for feed-in of waiting information or music can be switched on. All
previously defined music channels can be used as waiting signal. It is possible to selectively define
which subscribers receive this waiting information.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Talk into, Priority call, call transfer, Recall Request
 Activate the checkbox Intrusion when busy for the calling subscriber.
 Allow intrusion: Activate this checkbox to “knock” at the respective called subscriber.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common / Waiting signals
 Microphone mute: In this drop-down list, a configured music program can be selected as waiting sig-
nal at intrusion.
 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy
 Music on waiting (Busy/Privacy): Activate this checkbox to receive the defined music program at the
respective subscriber. If this checkbox is deactivated, the selected subscriber receives the standard
busy tone.

206 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Privacy, busy, re-call request

 Priority call with disconnection of busy subscribers

 Manual Priority Call: If a subscriber with entitlement for priority calls a subscriber that is busy, he
can activate priority function with button T. The existing conversation is interrupted and the desired
connection is immediately established. A priority call also interrupts functions that the called
subscriber has activated (e.g. conference, call request to a control desk; but no All Calls/group calls).
If all speech links in the Intercom Server are busy and a subscriber with entitlement for priority calls
wants to build up a conversation, another conversation is interrupted, so that a speech link becomes
free.
 Automatic Priority Call: It is also possible to configure that calls from certain subscribers interrupt
existing conversations automatically, without having to press a button.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Talk into, Priority call, call transfer, Recall Request
 Priority call: In this drop-down list, the priority call mode can be selected. the following modes are
available:
 None: This subscriber has no entitlement for priority calls. In this case, the button T is used for
knocking” (see page 206).
 Manual: This subscriber can interrupt conversations between other subscribers with button T.
 Automatic: A call from this subscriber interrupts other conversations automatically.

 Single priority call

Via direct dialling, an entry in the F2 menu or initiation of an input it is possible to allow a single priority
call per subscriber.
 If the code “9T971” is dialled (direct dialling, an entry in the F2 menu or initiation of an input) the
next conversation built-up is a priority call.
 i.e. the call, initiated after dialling the code, is built-up as priority call and interrupts other
conversations, see above.s

ATTENTION:
The configured hierarchies remain active (see above)!

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “9T971” for the respective subscriber (see
page 212).

3.1/0923 207
 Privacy, busy, re-call request Intercom Server Configuration

Re-call request
 Send re-call requests
If a called subscriber does not answer, the station is busy or in privacy mode, a re-call request can be
left at the called station with after-dialling the button 5. The conversation is automatically ended. A
re-call request can be deleted again by calling the station once again and pressing button 6. At each
subscriber any number of re-call requests can be stored. The re-call requests are indicated and an-
swered in order of time.

Configuration via CCT 800 only for receiver required (see below)

 Send re-call requests in case of privacy call


Feature PRO 800 6.1 – Send re-call requests in case of privacy call
VirtuoSIS
In case of an incoming call, the called subscriber can press the 5 button to end the call without
LICENCE PRO6U accepting it and to leave a re-call request at the calling station. With PRO 800 6.0 or lower, an
incoming privacy call has to be accepted first in order to leave a re-call request at the calling
station.

Configuration via CCT 800 only for receiver required (see below)

 Receive re-call requests

A re-call request is indicated at the called station in the following way:

Dot-matrix display: EE311A/EE411: Call number of the caller

Calling number and name of the caller are indicated in is indicated blinking in the display; the
the display, the conversation lamp blinks. conversation lamp blinks.

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

22
Joe Cocker
Please call me

›Re-call

EE 311A/EE 411

The re-call request is answered with button F or by dialling the calling number of the subscriber who
has left the re-call request (stations without function keys can answer re-call requests with 5T). The
conversation is built up automatically and the re-call request is deleted. A re-call request can also be
deleted without building up a conversation by pressing button X for at least one second.

208 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Privacy, busy, re-call request

 Feature PRO 800 6.3 and VirtuoSIS 7.1 – Indication of call number and name of the phone at
 VirtuoSIS re-recall request over SIP trunk
 LICENCE SIS7U With sending a re-call request over a SIP trunk, the name and phone number will be displayed
at the receiver station. All re-call requests are saved in the call history (entries won‘t be deleted
VirtuoSIS at a restart).
LICENCE PRO6U
 Receiver must have feature level “D”.
 Per SIP trunk, only the latest re-call request will be shown at the called subscriber.
 At outgoing calls, the phone number of the station and the name of the SIP call will be dis-
played.
 A re-call is not possible if one of the following functions has been configured for the respec-
tive SIP trunk:
 Auto dialler mode (see page 477)
 Channels (see page 473)

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter185
 Make sure that the checkbox Disable after-dialling is disabled for the respective subscriber.
 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Talk into, Priority call, call transfer, Recall Request
 Activate the checkbox Receive Recall Request for the respective subscriber.

 Date and time display at re-call requests


Feature PRO 800 6.0 – date and time display at re-call requests
VirtuoSIS If a re-call request is left at a subscriber, date and time of the incoming call is automatically
LICENCE PRO6U
indicated.

Date and time is indicated at the called station in the following way:

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

22 22 22
Joe Cocker
Joe Cocker Please call me Joe Cocker
Please call me 01.03.16 11:04 Please call me
01.03.16 10:48 01.03.16 11:47

› Re-call
›Re-call Re-call

NOTE:
This function is not available for seven-segment displays (EE 311A/EE 411).

Date and time will only be indicated if the respective Intercom Server has been time synchronised via
an SNTP server.

Configuration via CCT 800 only for receiver required (see page 208)

 Activate call back reminder

It is possible to activate a reminder for oneself to call another subscriber. it can be activated by pressing
button 4 during a conversation with a subscriber. The conversation is automatically quit and in the
display the call number / display text of the subscriber to be called is indicated.

Dot-matrix display: EE311A/EE411: Call number of the

Call number and display text of the subscriber to be called subscriber to be called is displayed
is displayed, the conversation lamp blinks. linking, the conversation lamp blinks.

3.1/0923 209
 Privacy, busy, re-call request Intercom Server Configuration

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

22
Joe Cocker
Please call me

›Re-call

EE 311A/EE 411

The call back reminder can be carried out with button F or dialling of the call number (stations without
function keys can answer re-call requests with 5T). The conversation is built-up automatically and the
call back reminder is deleted. A call back reminder can also be ended without building up a conversa-
tion by pressing button X for at least one second.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Talk into, Priority call, call transfer, Recall Request
 Activate the checkbox Receive Recall Request for the respective subscriber.

 Scrolling of re-call requests/call back reminders in the display

If several re-call requests / call back reminders have been left at a station, this is indicated in the follow-
ing way:

Dot-matrix display: EE311A/EE411: The first re-call request

“Scrolling” is displayed in addition. is indicated blinking in the display with
points.

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

22
Joe Cocker
Please call me

›Re-call

EE 311A/EE 411

The different re-call requests / call back reminders can be scrolled with buttons D and E and answered
(or deleted) in any order.

210 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Privacy, busy, re-call request

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Restoring of re-call requests/call back reminders after warmstart

Re-call requests and call back reminders can automatically be restored after a warmstart of the
Intercom Server.

NOTE:
The configured hierarchies remain active (see page 207)!

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

3.1/0923 211
 Direct dialling, button disabling, hierarchy Intercom Server Configuration

Direct dialling, button disabling, hierarchy

Direct dialling
PRO 800 1.1 or lower PRO 800 1.2 or higher
Maximum number of digits for
direct dialling targets 8 1) 18 2) 3)
1)
Only up to 4-digit direct dialling codes can be used for 8-digit call numbers.
2)
Required when using 8-digit call numbers (e.g. for control desk call transfers).
3)
Cannot be used directly for direct dialling buttons (e.g. EE 380 and EE 880). An up to 4-digit direct dialling
code has to be configured for the subscriber with an up to 18-digit direct dialling target.

NOTES: Restrictions
 Direct dialling codes cannot be used as direct dialling targets.
 A maximum of 339 direct dialling targets can be configured per station (min. CCT 800 1.1 see
page 548).

ATTENTION:
Configured direct dialling targets require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server. A list of
the memory capacities can be found on page 549!

ATTENTION:
A speed dialling destination can not contain spaces.

 Direct dialling for all subscribers

An up to 18-digit direct dialling target can be configured for each button or button sequence (max. 4-
digits). This direct dialling target is valid for the entire Intercom Server block, but can be replaced by
direct diallings of a single subscriber (see page 212). Button sequences, which require a pause during
dialling cannot be configured (e.g. call a door station and open the door with after dialling). Follow the
instructions below:

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 Direct Dialling: In this field, the desired direct dialling can be entered as follows for the respective
Intercom Server block:
Type of direct dialling Description
1-digit direct dialling code and up to 4-digit direct dialling target (e.g. “1=010” or
Button
“2=011” for group calls). Several definitions are separated via commas.
Max. 4-digit direct dialling code and up to 18-digit direct dialling target (e.g.
Button sequence “T1=010” or “T2=011” for group calls). Several definitions are separated via com-
mas.

 Direct dialling for selective subscribers

An up to 18-digit direct dialling target can be configured for each button or button sequence (max. 4-
digits). This direct dialling target is valid for the selected subscriber (also for „Direct dialling for all sub-
scribers”). Button sequences, which require a pause during dialling cannot be configured (e.g. call a
door station and open the door with after dialling). Follow the instructions below:

212 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Direct dialling, button disabling, hierarchy

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 Direct Dialling: In this field, the desired direct dialling can be entered as follows for the respective
subscriber:
Type of direct dialling Description
1-digit direct dialling code and up to 4-digit direct dialling target (e.g. “1=010” or
Button
“2=011” for group calls). Several definitions are separated via commas.
Max. 4-digit direct dialling code and up to 18-digit direct dialling target (e.g.
Button sequence “T1=010” or “T2=011” for group calls). Several definitions are separated via com-
mas.

 PRO 800
Feature PRO 800 5.0 – function keys with direct dialling
LICENCE PRO5U The function keys F1 to F7 can be configured with direct dialling.

Max. 8-digit direct dialling target (e.g. “T1=010” or “T2=011” for group calls).
Function key (F1 to F7)
Several definitions are separated via commas. 1)
1) If a direct dialling target is configured for a function key, the respective function menu cannot longer be
used!

NOTE: 1-digit direct dialling with feature level A

With feature level A, a 1-digit direct dialling is only possible for ringing at group 0 (e.g. 0=980), see
page 319.

 Direct dialling configured at the station

Add direct dialling
Follow the instructions below to configure direct dialling directly at the station:
1. Enter the code 9T1.
2. Enter the desired direct dialling code (max. 4-digit).
3. Acknowledge with F.
4. Enter the desired direct dialling target (max. 8-digit).
5. Acknowledge with F.

ATTENTION:
If direct dialling is configured for button 9, the code 9T1 can only be dialled if the direct dialling
“T=-” is configured for the respective subscriber!

GOOD TO KNOW: Indication of long direct dialling targets

With more than 6-digit direct dialling targets, the display switches in a rhythm of one second between
the first 5 digits (with an arrow at the right) and the last digits (arrow at the left). The configuration of
direct dialling at the station can be disabled with the direct dialling “9T1=X” in the field Direct Dial-
ling.

3.1/0923 213
 Direct dialling, button disabling, hierarchy Intercom Server Configuration

Remove direct dialling

Follow the instructions below to remove a configured direct dialling from the station:
1. Enter the code 9T1.
2. Enter the button which you want to delete.
3. Acknowledge with F (the selected direct dialling is shown).
4. Press X.
5. Acknowledge with F.

ATTENTION:
If direct dialling is configured for button 9, the code 9T1 can only be dialled if the direct dialling
“T=-” is configured for the respective subscriber!

 Switch-over direct dialling/normal dialling

A button configured with direct dialling can be dialled anyway by pre-dialling the button T (e.g. if direct
dialling is configured for button 1, the call number 12 can be called with dialling the button sequence
T12). Follow the instructions below:

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling “T=-”.

 Direct dialling with automatic disconnection

Calls can be established and switched on active at the Intercom station via direct dialling buttons (i.e.
with 1-digit direct dialling code) as long as the respective direct dialling button is pressed. The call is
terminated automatically when the direct dialling button has been released. Follow the instructions be-
low:

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 Activate the checkbox Disconnect on release. This setting is effective for all direct dialling of the sta-
tion.

GOOD TO KNOW:
The checkbox Disconnect on release can also be activated for individual buttons only (e.g. function
keys F1-F6). Enter the direct dialling button sequence followed by "XX" (e.g. "0=123XX”).

 Toggle between stations

Calls can be established one after the other at Intercom stations via direct dialling buttons (i.e. with 1-
digit direct dialling code), without the need to end the active conversation by pressing X. In this case,
after dialling is not available (e.g. for door opening). Follow the instructions below:

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 Activate the checkbox Toggle Mode.

214 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Direct dialling, button disabling, hierarchy

 Function keys with direct dialling (only EX / EE 7000)


PRO 800
Feature PRO 800 5.0 – Function keys with direct dialling
LICENCE PRO5U Direct dialling targets can be configured for the function keys F1 – F6 of the station EE 7000.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > Ex stations / EE 7000 > tab Function keys
 Short dial selective F1 to Short dial selective F8: In these fields, the direct dialling target can be en-
tered for the function keys. At Subscriber > Direct Dialling, an entry will be created automatically
with the configured direct dialling for the respective subscriber. Example: “F1=2001”, “F8=2008”.
or
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > Ex stations / EE 7000 > tab Function keys
 Input F1 to Input F8: These fields activate the fields Call Number Input next to them. They automat-
ically get populated with values.
 Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input initiates dialling.
 Right-click the subscriber with the calling number of the input and choose Add input initiates dial-
ling.
 Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input initiates dialling > Name of the input.
 Configure the input. For further information, see “Input initiates dialling at a subscriber” on
page 231.

ATTENTION:
In PRO 800 5.0, the function keys have to be configured in reversed order (F1=F6, F2=F5, F3=F4)!

and
 Go to: Subscriber > Direct dialling
 Keys T1 to T6 dial numbers 1 to 6, the PAGE key dials 0. In the field Direct dialling, fill in the values
for the buttons. Example: “1=3001, 6=3006“.

3.1/0923 215
 Direct dialling, button disabling, hierarchy Intercom Server Configuration

 Disabling of buttons
For each station single buttons can be disabled with the direct dialling function.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscribers > Direct Dialling
 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “X” for the button that disabled in an Inter-
com Server block or per subscriber (e.g. “4=X”, for disabling of button 4).

NOTE:
If a number is locked at the Intercom Server and however, direct dialling is configured, the direct
dialling has a higher priority and is carried out.

 Disabling the menu of WS stations


For WS stations, the menu button can be disabled with the direct dialling function.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “F7=-” to disable the menu button in an In-
tercom Server block or per subscriber.

 Disabling of the complete keypad via input

Over an input the complete keyboard of an Intercom station can be disabled.

Configuration CCT 800

 Configure the function “Input changes button of a subscriber” for the respective input (see
page 232).
 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 Direct Dialling: In this field, the input of the respective subscriber can be entered that disable the key-
board (e.g. “T=X”, e.g. for short circuit and “T=T” for the inactive state).
 The following direct dialling is configured for the respective subscriber:
“T=-, 0=X, 1=X, 2=X, 3=X, 4=X, 5=X, 6=X, 7=X, 8=X, 9=X”.

NOTE:
As long the input is closed, the whole keyboard is disabled. When the input is open, dialling can
be carried out with pre-dialling of T.

216 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Direct dialling, button disabling, hierarchy

 Hierarchy level

In order to block calls from certain subscribers to certain stations it is possible to arrange the subscriber
numbers into hierarchy levels. The call relations between the levels can be configured as desired that
means for each of the 15 levels you may define to which level a call may be carried out or not.

General concept
 By default, the 15 hierarchy levels are divided into 8 main hierarchy levels (level 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13
and 15) and 7 interim hierarchy levels (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 and 14) of hierarchy.
 The priority of the levels starts with 1 (lowest priority).
 Each main level is able to call into the next higher level and into all lower levels.
 Each interim level is able to call into the next higher main and interim hierarchy level and into all
lower levels (e.g. level 2 can call levels 3 and 4).
Hierarchy level Can built-up a call too these hierarchy levels
00 (standard) 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15
01 00, 01, 02
02 00, 01, 02, 03, 04
03 00, 01, 02, 03, 04
04 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06
05 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06
06 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08
07 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08
08 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10
09 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10
10 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12
11 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12
12 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14
13 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14
14 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15
15 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Disabling
 Hierarchy: In this drop-down list, the number of the hierarchy level can be selected for the respective
subscriber (if a user is logged in at the respective subscriber at a configuration without restart, the
configuration is applied at the user logout). Further information about user login can be found on
page 199.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Hierarchy levels
 Activate the desired checkboxes of the respective hierarchy level in the corresponding row of a level
(“Level 1” to “Level 15”) to define, to which levels can be called (an activated checkbox means this
level can be called).

3.1/0923 217
 Direct dialling button, direct dialling module Intercom Server Configuration

Direct dialling button, direct dialling module

With CCT 800 1.3 or higher, the configuration dialogues for direct dialling modules and devices with
direct dialling buttons have been unified.

Functions of the direct dialling module

Not every function can be carried out with each direct dialling modules. The following table shows
which function the respective direct dialling module can perform:

“Templates” (LED templates)

Call,

“Mixing radio conferen-

“Send ICX messages via

direct dialling button”
“Control of outputs”

“dB range display”

“Input simulation”

“Remote control”
“Direct dialling,

“Input message”
“Single button”

“PA functions”
Conversation”

ces”
EE 380           
Intercom Client           
WSDD (53V/59V)           
EE 8000           
Conductor           
EE 980           

NOTE: Direct dialling buttons

 The Intercom stations EE 880 and EE 6000 have to be configured in a different way.
For further information about the configuration of direct dialling modules, see the product manuals
“EE 880” and “EE 6000”.
 From VirtuoSIS version 7.1 (VirtuoSIS, S3 and S6), up to 8 direct dialling modules (96 direct dialling
buttons) can be used for an EE 980. For this, min. EE 980 firmware version “one_v1.6.0.bif” is re-
quired.

Allocation of direct dialling modules (WSDD)

For the direct dialling modules WSDD 53V and WSDD 59V an allocation to the desired device is
necessary because the modules are not recognised when reading out the Intercom Server. The direct
dialling modules can be used with all digital and IP WS stations and all devices with input level
detection (e.g. Intercom modules ET808A or ET908A). The modules can be allocated manually to the
inputs (IN1, IN2 or IN3).
 Feature PRO 800 6.1 – Direct dialling module allocation only with input level detection
 VirtuoSIS
In the configuration software CCT 800, the drop-down lists Function: IN1 to Function: IN3 (see
LICENCE PRO6U below) will only be enabled for stations with input level detection. Stations without input level
detection are not compatible with the direct dialling modules “WSDD 53V” and “WSDD 59V”.
A list of all station types with input level detection can be found on page 550.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Direct dialling buttons

218 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Direct dialling button, direct dialling module

 Function: IN1 to Function: IN3: In these drop-down lists, the desired direct dialling module can be
selected for the respective subscriber.

ATTENTION:
The intensity of the background lighting can only be changed via potentiometer on the backside of
the module. For further information about the connection of the power supply and the con-
figuration of the background lighting, see the data sheet “WSDD”!

Templates
There are templates available to indicate the different button/indication functions. With these tem-
plates, it is possible to configure the colour and blink mode of the control desk LED buttons individual-
ly. Different templates can be used for the different button/indication functions.
Templates
Output /
Conversation Call request /
special Line fault
indication input message
functions
Direct dialling, Call, Conversa-   - 
tion
Single button - - - -
Control of outputs - -  -
Button-/indication functions

Input simulation - - - -
Input message -  - 
Mixing radio conferences - -  -
PA functions - -  -
dB range display - -  -
Remote control - - - -
Switching privacy - -  -
Switching headset - -  -
Switch loudspeaker on - -  -
Lock microphone - -  -
Unlock key - -  -
Level switching - -  -

If an indication type should apply for one or more Intercom Server blocks, a configuration in CCT 800
must be made.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Block settings > drop-down list Direct
dialling buttons - block

Line fault
Line faults are displayed automatically in “Direct dialling, Call, Conversation” and “Input message”.
The line fault indication can be configured separately for stations and inputs.
To show line faults on the control desk display, this must be configured in CCT 800.
 Stations: Line fault monitoring must be activated for the respective station, see “Line fault monito-
ring for a subscriber” on page 344.
 Inputs: A line fault call type must be configured for the respective input, see “Call types” on
page 359.

To show line faults on the LED buttons of the control desk, this must be configured in CCT 800.

3.1/0923 219
 Direct dialling button, direct dialling module Intercom Server Configuration

 Stations: An LED button must be configured as “Direct dialling, Call, Conversation” for the respec-
tive station.
 Inputs: An LED button must be configured as “Input message” for the respective input.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > sub-folder subscriber > Tem-
plates > tab Line fault
 Stations colour: In this drop-down list, the colour of the LED button can be selected to indicate sta-
tion line faults.
 Stations blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the LED button can be selected to in-
dicate station line faults.
 Inputs colour: In this drop-down list, the colour of the LED button can be selected to indicate input
line faults.
 Inputs blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the LED button can be selected to
indicate input line faults.

Predefined functions
LED buttons can be referred with predefined functions under “Predefined functions”. These preconfig-
ured functions can be configured individually and detailed under “Direct dialling, Call, Conversation”,
see below.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > sub-folder subscriber > Prede-
fined functions > desired module
 Button no.: In this field, the module and button number is shown.
 Function: In this drop-down list, the pre-configured function can be selected.
 Call number / Button: In this field, the parameter of the respective function can be entered (e.g. but-
ton (0 - 9, T), functions codes, call number of a subscriber, input or output). If this field is empty, no
function is carried out.

NOTE: Restriction of the parameter to 8 digits

The parameters are restricted to 8 digits (e.g. short numbers).

  Description - Call number / Button: In this field, the description of the direct dialling button, subscrib-
er, input or output entered in the field Call number / Button is displayed (only valid if one of the func-
tions “Direct dialling, Call, Conversation”, “Control of outputs”, “Input simulation” or “Input
message” is selected in the drop-down list Function). The description can be changed under Sub-
scriber > General > tab Naming in the field Description.

NOTE: Parameter not available

If the entered parameter is not available (e.g. the subscriber with this call number does not exist),
“???” will be displayed instead.

220 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Direct dialling button, direct dialling module

Button/indication functions
For LED buttons, functions can be configured. Functions created under “Predefined functions” can be
configured in the “Button/indication functions” dialogue.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > sub-folder subscriber > Button-
/ Indication function > desired function
 Right-click and select the desired keypad under “add button” and then select the desired button.

NOTE: Activate LED buttons for Conductor

To indicate functions on the LED buttons of a CD series, activate the checkbox LED-Indication CD
series under Outputs > General Settings.

Direct dialling, Call, Conversation


Using an LED button, a call can be established and ended, an active call request can be displayed and
acknowledged or a number sequence dialable function can be executed.

Configuration CCT 800

 Call number: In this field, the desired call number can be entered.

NOTE: Collision with direct dialling

Each call number can collide with a direct dialling number. Direct dialling has higher priority.

 Delete before press Activate this checkbox to dial the sequence “XX” before dialling the call number.
 Delete after release Activate this checkbox to dial the sequence “XX” after releasing.
 Conversation indication: In this drop-down list, one out of three available templates can be selected.
The template defines the colour and the blink mode of the LED button for the following statuses:
 During a call between the control desk and the call number, which is defined for an LED button of
the control desk.
 If busy – when the call number defined for an LED button of the control desk has a call with another
subscriber.
 Indication call requests: In this drop-down list, one out of seven available templates can be selected.
The template defines the colour and the blink mode of the LED button for a call request (normal and
emergency call).

Configure the template for the conversation indication:

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > sub-folder subscriber > Tem-
plates > tab Conversation indication
 Conversation colour: In this drop-down list, the colour of the LED button can be selected to display
a conversation.
 Conversation blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the LED button during a conver-
sation can be selected.
 Busy colour: In this drop-down list, the LED button colour can be selected to indicate the respective
subscriber is busy.
 Busy blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the LED button can be selected to indicate
the respective subscriber is busy.

Configure the template for call request indication:

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > sub-folder subscriber > Tem-
plates > tab Call request / Input message

3.1/0923 221
 Direct dialling button, direct dialling module Intercom Server Configuration

 Normal call / Active 1 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate a normal
call.
 Normal call / Active 1 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to indicate
a normal call.
 Emergency call / Active 2 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate an
emergency call.
 Emergency call / Active 2 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to indi-
cate an emergency call.

 Single button
Using an LED button, an action can be carried out. An LED button can be configured to function as the
respective button.

Configuration CCT 800

 Button: In this field, the desired button can be entered (1–9, 0, X, T, F4 = D, F5 = E, F6 = F).
 Function: In this drop-down list, the action to be performed when the defined direct dialling button
is pressed can be selected.

 Control of outputs
Using an LED button, an output can be switched. The LED button indicates the state of the output.

Configuration CCT 800

 Call number: In this field, the call number of the output to be controlled can be entered.

NOTE: Controlling a non-dialable output with an ICX message

If the output should be selected via an ICX message (because e.g. in the field call number is
entered a non-dialable call number), select under Outputs > General Settings in the drop-down
list ICX - Message the entry “on change” for the respective output.

 Function: In this drop-down list, the action of the output can be selected.
 Indication output: In this drop-down list, one out of three available templates can be selected. The
template defines the colour and the blink mode of the LED button for the different output states:
open, closed and blinking.

Configure the template of output indication:

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > sub-folder subscriber > Tem-
plates > tab Output- / Special-functions
 OFF / Condition 1 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate the state “out-
put open”.
 OFF / Condition 1 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to indicate the
state “output open”.
 ON / Condition 2 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate the state “out-
put closed”.
 ON / Condition 2 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to indicate the
state “output closed”.
 Blinking / Condition 3 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate the state
“output toggle”.
 Blinking / Condition 3 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to indicate
the state “output toggle”.


Input simulation
Using an LED button, the input level can be simulated.

222 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Direct dialling button, direct dialling module

Configuration CCT 800

 Call number: In this field, the call number of the input to be controlled can be entered.
 Level when pressed: In this drop-down list, the level simulated when the button is pressed can be
selected.
 Level when released: In this drop-down list, the level simulated when the button is pressed can be
released.

 Input message
Using an LED button, an active input message can be displayed and acknowledged.

Configuration CCT 800

 Call number: In this field, the call number of the input which should be controlled can be entered.
Indication input message: In this drop-down list, one out of seven available templates can be selected.
The template defines the colour and the blink mode of the LED button for “active 1” and “active 2”.

Configure the template for output indication:

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > sub-folder subscriber > Tem-
plates > tab Call request / Input message
 Normal call / Active 1 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate “active 1”.
 Normal call / Active 1 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the buttons can be se-
lected to indicate “active 1”.
 Emergency call / Active 2 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate “ac-
tive 2”.
 Emergency call / Active 2 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the buttons can be
selected to indicate “active 2”.

 Mixing radio conferences


NOTE: Mixing radio conference
The function “Reception of multiple radio conferences” must be activated.

Additional configurations have to be made for the indication of radio conference states on LED buttons,
see “Participant radio conference (listen and speak)” on page 293 and see “Audio mixing” on
page 296.

Configuration CCT 800

 Mode: In this drop-down list, the following functions can be selected:
 “Disconnect all”: All connected channels will be disconnected.
 “Switch on”: The radio channel defined for the button will be connected if the button is pressed.
 “Selective Disconnect”: If the buttons for Selective Disconnect and Switch on are pressed at the
same time, an individual channel will be disconnected.
 Channel: In this drop-down list, the channel of the desired feed-in can be selected.
 Indication: In this drop-down list, one out of three available templates can be selected. The template
defines the colour and the blink mode of the LED button for the activated channel and for talking.

Configure the template for radio conference state indication:

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > sub-folder subscriber > Tem-
plates > tab Output- / Special-functions
 ON / Condition 2 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate the connected
channel.
 ON / Condition 2 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to indicate the
connected channel.

3.1/0923 223
 Direct dialling button, direct dialling module Intercom Server Configuration

 Blinking / Condition 3 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate that the
control desk or a squelch input has activated.
 Blinking / Condition 3 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to indicate
that the state control desk or a squelch input has activated.

 Indication squelch input


Feature PRO 800 3.x – indication squelch Input
PRO 800
If the squelch input for the radio subscriber is set, it will be indicated on the direct dialling
LICENCE PRO3U buttons of a EE380A or Conductor.
No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 PA functions

Using an LED button, PA announcements can be started and stopped.

NOTE: LED buttons indicate the state of PA announcements

The state of the PA announcement is shown on the configured LED button. For further information,
see ”PA announcements” on page 298.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > sub-folder subscriber > Button-
/Indication function > tab PA functions
 Mode: In this drop-down list, the mode for selecting and triggering PA announcements can be se-
lected. The following modes are available:
 “Entire selection”: Select all PA zones.
 “Single selection”: Select a PA zone that is selected in the field Zone Nr.
 “Selective start: Trigger a PA announcement in all PA zones that have been selected via the op-
tions “Entire selection” and “Single selection”.
 “Single start”: Trigger a PA announcement in the PA zone that is selected in the drop-down list
Zone Nr.
See the following overview of the function range of the modes:
Pre-recorded audio Pre-recorded audio
Button no. Mode Zone no. Priority Indication
ID “gong” ID “announcement”
01 – 12 Entire selection     
01 – 12 Single selection     
01 – 12 Selective start     
01 – 12 Single start     

 VirtuoSIS
Feature PRO 800 6.0 – manual control of PA announcements
LICENCE PRO6U Manual control to trigger and cancel PA announcements with the drop-down list Function.

ATTENTION: unlock drop-down list Function

In the drop-down list Mode, select either the entry “Selective start” or “Single start” to enable the
drop-down list Function!

 Function: In this drop-down list, an action can be selected for the manual control of a PA
announcement. The following functions are available:

224 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Direct dialling button, direct dialling module

 “Trigger announcement”: Press the selected direct dialling button to trigger a PA announcement
in the selected PA zones. A PA announcement can either be cancelled via an ICX message or by
pressing the button X.

NOTE: Further information on ICX messages

For further information about the configuration of ICX messages, see the product manual “ICX Pro-
tocol”.

 “Toggle announcement”: Press the selected direct dialling button to switch between triggering
and terminating a PA announcement in the selected PA zones.
 “Announcement as long as button pressed”: Press and hold the selected direct dialling button to
trigger a PA announcement in the selected PA zones. Release this direct dialling button to cancel
the PA announcement.
 Zone Nr.: In this drop-down list, the PA zone can be selected for which a PA announcement is trig-
gered via a direct dialling button.
 Priority: In this field, the priority of the triggered PA announcement can be entered (01 to 99; see
page 298).
 Pre-recorded audio ID Gong 1): In this field, the ID of a pre-recorded audio file can be entered for a
gong.
 Pre-recorded audio ID Announcement 1): In this field, the ID of a pre-recorded audio file to be played
back as a PA announcement can be entered (0 = manual PA announcement).
 Indication: In this drop-down list, one out of three available templates can be selected. The template
defines the colour and the blink mode of the LED button for the different modes.

1)The pre-recorded audio for gong and announcement must be loaded for the initiating subscriber of the PA
announcement.

Configure the template of radio conferences state indication:

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > sub-folder subscriber >
Templates > tab Output- / Special-functions
 The following states are indicated on the LED buttons it the respective mode is active.
Colour and blink mode Mode
Idle state entire selection
OFF / Condition 1 Idle state single selection
Idle state selective start
Idle state single start
ON / Condition 2
Active single selection or entire selection (if all zones are selected)
Single selection and active announcement, zone not busy (a zone with a higher
Blinking / Condition 3
priority can superimpose)
Active single start
Condition 4 Active single selection and announcement, zone is busy
Selective start, if zone is busy

GOOD TO KNOW: Mode “active”, mode “idle state”

 If the direct dialling button is pressed, the mode is “active”.
 If the direct dialling button is not pressed, the mode is “idle state”.

NOTE: Further information on PA announcement receiver

Further information about the configuration of PA announcement receiver can be found on
page 298.

3.1/0923 225
 Direct dialling button, direct dialling module Intercom Server Configuration

 dB range display

Changes of the sound pressure level of a feed-in audio signal can send with an ICX message to the In-
tercom Server. The changes can be used for visualization with a direct dialling module or Studio.
Requirements for the dB range display:
 The audio signal must be configured and connected as a radio feed-in, see “Configuration of feed-
in (music and radio)” on page 289
 The control desk must be in mixing mode, see “Mixing radio conferences” on page 223
 The sound pressure levels must be defined, see “ICX message with sound pressure level change”
on page 370.

Requirements
The following firmware versions are supported:
 DSP 800A min. 2.0
 DSP 800A min. 2.0
 DSP 800B min. 1.2
 DSP 900A min. 5.0
 AF-I min. 5.5
 DSP 900B
 AF-D min. 1.0
 IoIP device 7.0

Configuration CCT 800

 Channel: In this drop-down list, the channel of the desired radio feed-in can be selected.
 Indication: In this drop-down list, one out of three available templates can be selected. The template
defines the colour and the blink mode of the LED button for the three level ranges

Configure the template for the sound pressure level indication:

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > sub-folder subscriber > Tem-
plates > tab Output- / Special-functions
 ON / Condition 2 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate the dB range 1.
 ON / Condition 2 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to indicate the
dB range 1.
 Blinking / Condition 3 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate the dB
range 2.
 Blinking / Condition 3 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to indicate
the dB range 2.
 Condition 4 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate the dB range 3.
 Condition 4 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to indicate the dB
range 3.

Configuration CCT 800 (if more than one radio feed-in)

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > Conference
 Immediate mix function: Activate this checkbox to use additional feed-in radio conferences.

ATTENTION: Immediate mix function

Individual channels cannot be selected as long as the checkbox immediate mix function is
activated. Thus, the volume control is only possible for the mix function!

It is possible just to display the sound pressure level visually on the direct dialling buttons, so that the
radio channels do not need to be heard:
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab conference
 dB Indication without active connection to 6T-channel: Activate this checkbox to indicate the sound
pressure level on the direct dialling buttons.

226 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Direct dialling button, direct dialling module

 Define the level ranges and ICX messages, see “ICX message with sound pressure level change” on
page 370.

 Remote control

Feature PRO 800 6.1 – Remote control of direct dialling buttons
VirtuoSIS
By pressing or releasing a direct dialling button, a pre-configured ICX command can be sent.
LICENCE PRO6U For further information about sending ICX commands, see “Direct dialling button control” in
the product manual “ICX Protocol”.

NOTE:
 For Conductor no upgrade licence “Lx-PRO6U” is required.
 Up to PRO 800 6.0, this function is only supported by Conductor.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Interfaces > Application-specific interfaces
 In the drop-down list Interface, select the desired ICX interface to output ICX commands.

NOTE: ICX licence required

The licence “L-ICX” is required to output ICX commands.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > sub-folder subscriber > Button-
/Indication function > tab Remote control
 Call number: In this field, the desired call number of the subscriber can be entered.
 Function: In this drop-down list, the action for sending an preconfigured CX command can be select-
ed.

ICX messages
Assigns ICX messages to the direct dialling buttons of modules connected to stations series EE 380 or
stations series CD.

Configuration CCT 800 for EE 380

This section covers the assignment of ICX messages to direct dialling buttons of modules connected
to EE 380 series subscribers. To send ICX messages via direct dialling code, see page 160.

NOTES:
 ICX messages are also displayed in Parameter > ICX parameters > sub-folder subscriber >
tab ICX messages.
 The field ID in Subscriber > Station properties > EE380 > sub-folder subscriber > tab ICX
messages matches the field with the same name in Parameter > ICX parameters > sub-folder
subscriber > tab ICX messages and is a reference to it. The values range from ID 01 to ID 48 for
the button numbers 01/01 to 04/12 under the Condition Pressed and ID 51 to ID 98 under the
Condition Released (for details see below).

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > EE380 > sub-folder subscriber > tab ICX messages.
 Right-click in the window ICX messages and select add button > module nn > nn / bb (nn is the
number of the module 01 - 04, depending on the number of modules configured at Subscriber >
Station properties > EE380 > tab General under Number of configured modules, bb is the num-
ber of the button).
 Select a value in the field Condition. For each button number (field Button number), the Pressed and
Released conditions can be configured independently by selecting it twice in add button.
 Select a value in the field Toggle mode. For further information, see page 214.

3.1/0923 227
Direct dialling button, direct dialling module Intercom Server Configuration

 Select values for the fields Task, Type and Data. For further information, see page 229.

NOTE: ICX messages for EE 380 are displayed in two menus

The ICX messages configured here are also displayed in Parameter > ICX parameters > sub-
folder subscriber > tab ICX messages. Only ICX messages are displayed, whose ID does corre-
spond to a direct dialling button of a configured module.

Configuration CCT 800 for Series CD

This section covers the assignment of ICX messages to direct dialling buttons of modules connected
to CD series subscribers. To send ICX messages via direct dialling code instead, see page 160. The con-
figuration required there is independent of the one described here.
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > CD series > sub-folder subscriber > tab ICX mes-
sages.
 Right-click in the window ICX messages and select add button > Keypad nn > Button b (nn is the
number of the Keypad 01 - 13, one is always available, further ones depend on the number of key-
pads configured at Subscriber > Station properties > CD series > tab General under Number
of configured direct dialling modules, 4 keypads per configured module, b is the number of the but-
ton per keypad 1 - 8).
 Continue like above for EE 380 from the step “Select a value for the field Condition”.

228 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Direct dialling button, direct dialling module

 Send ICX messages via direct dialling button


Pre-configured ICX messaged can be sent by pressing a direct dialling button.

Configuration CCT 800

To enable sending of ICX messages, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Parameter > ICX parameter
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add parameter”.
3. Click on the button Configure to open the configuration dialogue.
4. Right-click and select “add entry”. The field ID is enabled.
5. In the field ID, enter an ID for the ICX message. The ID is equal to the numbering of the direct dialling
buttons of the connected direct dialling modules (1 – 12 for direct dialling module 1, 13 – 24 for direct
dialling module 2. E.g. the ICX message with ID “03” is sent by pressing the third direct dialling
button of the first direct dialling module, whereas the ICX message with ID “24” is sent by pressing
the last button of the second direct dialling module. The fields task, type and data are enabled.

NOTE: Unique ID per subscriber

The ID of the ICX message must be unique per subscriber.

6. In the field Task, enter the task number of the ICX message (e.g. “40”). In order to send an ICX
message to an other ICX interface, an ICX tunnel message has to be sent (task “6A”).
7. In the field Type, enter the type for the ICX message (e.g. “80”).
8. Optional: In the field Data, enter the data of the ICX message.
9. EE 380 only: The column Button number displays the number of the direct dialling button (for further
information, see page 227).

NOTE: Further information

For further information about the configuration of ICX messages, see the product manual “ICX
Protocol”.

ATTENTION: Button and indication functions will be deactivated

If an ICX message is configured for a direct dialling button, configured button and indication func-
tions will be deactivated for this direct dialling button!

3.1/0923 229
 Direct dialling button, direct dialling module Intercom Server Configuration

 Bonding of direct dialling modules


Feature PRO 800 3.x – bonding of direct dialling modules
PRO 800
With this feature it is possible to create a bonding of non-audio clients or a Conductor to audio
LICENCE PRO3U subscribers. This allows you to create or increase the number of direct dialling buttons for an
audio subscriber.

Example
In this example, the host client uses the direct dialling buttons
of an Intercom Client direct dialling module. This makes it
possible to dial via the buttons on your PC and speak with clear
16 kHz Commend audio quality.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Bonding
 Slave 1 to Slave 4: In these drop-down lists, a slave module can be selected to allocate them to the
respective Conductor or non-audio client.

NOTE:
 All audio clients can be used, as host client.
 The following subscribers can be used as slaves:
 All non-audio clients (WS TM, NAC Intercom Client, NAC Android Intercom Client).
 Conductor.
 In case a subscriber is disabled, the subscriber is already used as slave or cannot be used for the
bonding feature.

ATTENTION:
If an ICX message for the button is configured, pre-configured functions for these buttons are not
carried out!

230 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Input, output

Input, output

Dialling functions for inputs

An activated input can initiate different functions in the Intercom Server:
 Simulation of dialling at a certain subscriber, as soon as the input is activated, or
 Change the function of a subscriber's buttons while the input is active.
One input can initiate either dialling or changing the buttons, the functions cannot be combined. The
following inputs can be used:
 An input on a plug-in card Gx-8E8A or Gx-16E.
 An input on the motherboard G3-GEM (GE300) or on the power supply card G8-GEN (GE800).
 An internal input of a station (activation of these inputs see page 233).
 A virtual input (see page 247). These can be activated e.g. with the function “linking inputs to out-
puts” (see page 246).
Depending on the cabling of the inputs, five different switch steps can be indicated (break, 15k, 5k6, 1k5
and short circuit). Applies only for inputs on the plug-in cards Gx-8E8A, Gx-16E, ET8E8A and the
following station types:
CD 800 EE 7000 EE 900A EF 962A
EF 962H EF 963A ES 962H ECCT 80008A
ET 962A ET 962H ET 970A ET 908A
EX 200 EX 7000 WS series ET 970H

The inputs can be wired according to one of the following methods:

IN

2k2 10k

Method 1: 15k

short 1k5 5k6

IN
2k2 6k8

Method 2: 15k short 1k5 5k6

ATTENTION:
With an input on the power supply card G8-GEN (GE800), on the motherboard G3-GEM (GE300) or
with a station internal input only two switch steps can be indicated (break and short). Virtual inputs
can indicate all five switch steps!

 Input initiates dialling at a subscriber

As soon as an input receives a certain level, a configured button or button sequence (max. 8 digits) is
dialled at a subscriber.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input initiates dialling

3.1/0923 231
 Input, output Intercom Server Configuration

 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add input initiates dialling”.
 Inputs > Dial via Input > Input initiates dialling > sub-folder input
 Subscriber 1 to Subscriber 5: In these drop-down lists, the desired subscribers can be selected, at
which the dialling be initiated.
 Dial/Key: In this drop-down list, a separate dial (“Down” (for D), “Up” (for E), “Return” (for F))
can be selected for the respective input level of an input (Break, 15k, 5k6, 1k5 and Short). Alternative-
ly, a 1- to 8-digit button sequence can be entered (0 to 9, T, X).

ATTENTION:
In case the privacy mode is selected, two Levels for the Input has to be configured. Level 1 with
state “Press only” to activate privacy mode and Level 2 with state “Release only” to inactivate pri-
vacy mode!

 Press + Release, Press only and Release only: Select the desired radio button of the respective input
level to define for a single-digit dial if pressing and releasing of the button, only pressing of the but-
ton or only releasing of the button be simulated (does not work for “Disconnect on release”). For a
button sequence only the radio button Press + Release is available.

Example
A foot switch work as press-to-talk button (T) for a certain Intercom station. For the input of the foot
switch, the dialling simulation Press only is configured at “Short” for the desired subscriber Release
only at “Break”.

ATTENTION:
When dialling, “XX” should be configured before the button sequence in order to make sure that the
station is in idle mode before dialling (e.g. “XX21” for calling station “21”)!

 Input changes button of a subscriber

An input can change the function of a subscriber's buttons as long as it is active.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input changes button
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add input changes button”.
 Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input changes button > sub-folder input
 Subscriber 1 to Subscriber 5: In these drop-down lists, up to 5 subscribers can be selected, whose
buttons be changed.
 Level for Input: In this drop-down list, up to four buttons can be selected at the respective input level
of an input (break, 15k, 5k6, 1k5 and short).
 In the first drop-down list of an entry, select the button, which be changed at the respective input
level.
 In the second drop-down list of the same entry, select the desired button, to which the button be
changed at the respective input level.
Example: “Short: 0 = 1”, the button 0 works as 1, as long as the input is short-circuited (also valid
for configured direct dialling of these buttons). As soon as the input is open again, the button
behaves as configured at “Break” (e.g. 0 = 0).

232 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Input, output

 Activation of internal inputs and outputs of stations

Some station types (e.g. EE 311A, EE 811A, ET 800A or ET 908H) have internal inputs and outputs that
can be used for functions like e.g. dialling simulation or attendant outputs. The internal inputs and
outputs of stations has to be activated in the program CCT 800 before they can be used.

NOTE:
Only activated internal inputs of a station are indicated at the tab “Inputs”. Up to 16 internal inputs can
be used per subscriber card (minus the number of subscribers). Outputs are not indicated in the tab
Outputs, but in the pop-up windows for selection of outputs for certain functions (e.g. attendant
contacts or door opener outputs). If inputs and outputs are activated for a station, and then a different
station type is connected, the definitions of the inputs and outputs are not changed!

ATTENTION:
 Station inputs can only handle “open” and “short” state! WS series stations can handle all five input
states!
 As of Server-ID “17” collisions may occur with the automatic assignment of station outputs when
multiple Intercom Servers are separately configured (offline) and then networked afterwards!

Configuration CCT 800

GOOD TO KNOW:
At Subscriber > Station properties, all available subscribers are indicated with the connected sta-
tion type.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab Outputs
 OUT: Activate this checkbox to enable the respective output.
 Call number OUT: In this field, the calling number of the according input can be changed.
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab Inputs
 IN: Activate this checkbox to enable the respective input.
 Call number IN: In this field, the calling number of the respective output can be changed.

 Using “IN 2” and “IN 4” at analogue WS series (WS 500/WS 800)


 Deactivation of privacy switching of “IN2”
The input “IN 2 (PTT)” is pre-configured for connection of a privacy switch. However, this standard
privacy switch of the input “IN 2 (PTT)” can be deactivated.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series > tab Inputs
 IN 2 (PTT): Activate this checkbox to enable the input 2 (PTT) for the respective analogue WS station.
 Call number IN 2 (PTT): In this field, the call number of the input 2 (PTT) can be changed.

GOOD TO KNOW:
An additional internal input “IN 4” is available for the analogue WS series WS800A/WS500A. This
input can be activated/triggered via the “menu button (e.g. to trigger an ICX message). A separate
ICX messages can be configured for the two input levels (open and short; see page 235).

 IN 4: Activate this checkbox to enable the input 4 for the respective subscriber.
 Call number IN 4: In this field, the call number of the input 4 can be changed.

3.1/0923 233
 Input, output Intercom Server Configuration

 Using internal inputs as function keys (only EE 7000)


PRO 800
Feature PRO 800 5.0 – function keys simulated by internal inputs
LICENCE PRO5U The function keys (“F1” to “F6”) can be simulated by internal inputs.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > EE 7000 > tab Function Keys
 Input F1 to Input F6: Activate these checkboxes to simulate the respective function key via an internal
input. The field Short dial selective is disabled.
 Call Number Input: In this field, the call number of the input can be entered, which simulates the re-
spective function key.

ATTENTION:
In CCT 800 5.0, the function keys have to be configured in reversed order (F1 = F6, F2 = F5, F3 = F4)!

An entry is automatically be created at Subscriber > Inputs > General Settings with the config-
ured input for the respective subscriber.

NOTE:
Further information about the configuration of function keys with direct dialling can be found on
page 215.

 Position switch as input

At stations with position switch the position switch can be used as normal input, so that turning of the
station (e.g. initiates an input message or dialling simulation).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab Inputs
 Activate the checkbox IN 3 to enable the input 3 for the respective subscriber. The following dialogue
appears:

 Call number IN 3: In this field, the call number of the input 3 can be changed.

ATTENTION:
In case ICX messages (or EE380 LED button functions) are executed as an input, the make/break
status messages has to be sent in reverse!

234 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Input, output

Input generates ICX message

It is possible to define an ICX message per input state that is sent to the selected interface when the
level is reached.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > ICX at input
 Right-click on the desired input and select “add ICX at input”.
 1. ICX-Interface to 3. ICX-Interface: In these drop-down lists, up to three interfaces can be selected,
at which the ICX messages are output.

GOOD TO KNOW:
If in the drop-down list 1. ICX - Interface the value “----” is selected, only internal ICX messages
will be received. If in the drop-down list 2. ICX - Interface or 3. ICX - Interface the value “----” is
selected, ICX messages will not be received over these ICX interfaces. Here are some examples for
receiving ICX messages:
 Only internal ICX messages will be received:
1. ICX - Interface: ----
2. ICX - Interface: ----
3. ICX - Interface: ----
 Only external ICX messages will be received:
1. ICX - Interface: e.g. ICX 1-0/10
2. ICX - Interface: ----
3. ICX - Interface: ----
 Internal as well as external messages will be received:
1. ICX - Interface: ----
2. ICX - Interface: e.g. ICX 1-0/10
3. ICX - Interface: ----

 Inputs > ICX at input > sub-folder input

 In this folder, an ICX message can be configured for the input states (open, 15k, 5k6, 1k5 and short),
which is sent to the selected interface(s) when the respective input state becomes active.
 Condition: In this drop-down list, the condition of an input level can be selected, at which an ICX
message is sent.
 With this conditions (“break”: Error, “15k”: Idle, “5k6”: Active 1:, “1k5”: Active 2, “short”: Error),
one of the following wiring methods can be used:
IN

2k2 10k

Method 1: 15k

short 1k5 5k6

IN
2k2 6k8

Method 2: 15k short 1k5 5k6

 Task: In this field, the task number of the desired ICX message can be entered.
 Type: In this field, the type number of the desired ICX message can be entered.

3.1/0923 235
 Input, output Intercom Server Configuration

 Data: In this field, the parameter of the desired ICX message can be entered.

GOOD TO KNOW:
Provide the call number of the station in the field data of the ICX message like this:
“Value D000 substitutes the call number of the station which provides the input.”
The substitution takes place when the ICX message is sent.

 System no. receiver/ sender: In this field, the receiver/sender block number can be entered.

NOTE:
 For further information about the configuration of ICX messages, see the product manual “ICX
Protocol”.
 For ICX at input a maximum of 150 digit long ICX messages are allowed. In case the data from an
ICX messages is longer than 22 digits, a not used ICX message is deactivated.

 “IN2” for external microphone


It is possible to use an external microphone with talk button in series that simulates e.g. button T at
the station when the PTT button is pressed (e.g. for radio applications).

Circuit for microphone with PTT button

EP+

EP–

Mic+

Mic–

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab Inputs
 Activate the checkbox IN2 (PTT) to enable the input 2 (PTT) for the respective subscriber
(i.e. ET 311).
 Call number IN2 (PTT): In this field, the call number of the input can be changed
 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab General
 Activate the checkbox IN2 at ext. mic. for the respective subscriber.
 For the respective input, either the function “input initiates dialling” (see page 231, e.g. for PTT
button: short = press only; break = release only for button T) or “ICX at input” can be configured
(see page 235).

236 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Input, output

 “IN2” for handset


It is possible to use an external handset with a PTT button that simulates e.g. button T at the station
when the PTT button is pressed (e.g. for radio applications)

Circuit for handset with PTT button

EP+
10µF

EP–

Mic+

Mic–

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab Inputs
 Activate the checkbox IN2 (PTT) to enable the input 2 (PTT) for the respective subscriber (i.e. ET 311).
 Call number IN2 (PTT): In this field, the call number of the input can be changed
 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab General
 Activate the checkbox IN2 at PTT button of handset for the respective subscriber.
 For the respective input, either the function “input initiates dialling” (see page 231, e.g. for PTT
button: short = press only; break = release only for button T) or “ICX at input” can be configured
(see page 235).

 De-bounce time for inputs

Per input a configurable time can be set: An input has to be active at least as long as the configured de-
bounce time, before it gets activated. If the input is switched off, it remains active as long as the
configured timer value.

Application
 Adjust de-bounce time for piezo-electric buttons.

NOTE:
The de-bounce time can only be used for inputs of interface cards and digital stations without DSP.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > Common
 Input de-bounce time [ms]: In this drop-down list, the de-bounce time can be selected for the
respective input.

3.1/0923 237
 Input, output Intercom Server Configuration

 Button triggers virtual station input

It is possible to trigger 4 virtual station inputs via a button of the station.

Application
 Additional direct dialling buttons.
 Commend key as direct dialling button for stations of series CD and stations of series WS.
 F1, F2, F3 as direct dialling buttons for all other stations series.
 Deactivation of individual buttons (also functions buttons) via simulation of X.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab Virtual Inputs
 Virtual IN: Activate this checkbox to enable the respective virtual input.
 Virtual call number: In this field, the call number of the respective virtual input can be changed.
 Inputs > Key switches input
 Key: In this drop-down list, the button to simulate the input can be selected.

238 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Input, output

 Access outputs via dialling


By dialling the call number of an output at a station the current status is indicated in the display. It now
is possible to activate, deactivate or toggle the output with various code numbers. Several outputs can
be controlled in parallel or one output is controlled by multiple stations.

Output inactive Output active

EE 311A / EE 411

Dot-matrix display

9951 9951
Barrier SW Barrier SW
OFF ON
1-Switch ON 0-Switch OFF
X-Cancel X-Cancel

Dial Dial Monochrome

LCD display
9951 9951
Barrier SW Barrier SW
Status: OFF Status: ON

1-Switch ON 1-Switch OFF

X-Cancel X-Cancel
Colour TFT display

The following codes are possible:

 0: turn off (e.g. 9950 0: deactivate output)
 1: turn on (e.g. 9951 1: activate output)
 T: toggle (off → on/on → off)
 2: output activated as long as button is pressed (direct dialling not possible).

NOTE:
Output does not switch off if display indication has switched off before releasing button.

 3: Activate output until automatic quitting of display indication

The call number of the output and after dialling code can be dialled as follows
 Manually via keyboard.
 Output call number via direct dialling, manual entry of code.
 Via direct dialling at the station.
 Via function list Bat a station EE 811 (with a 14-digit text).

3.1/0923 239
Input, output Intercom Server Configuration

Automatic quitting of display indication

After a button is pressed at the station, the display is updated and a timer is activated (max. 17 min.)
for automatic quitting. If the output has been activated with button 3, it stays active until the display
indication is switched off automatically (by default 30 seconds).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Switch off times
 When activated with button 3: In this field, the time can be changed, after which the display be
switched off automatically (by default 30 seconds).

Switch outputs via direct dialling

It is also possible to activate, deactivate or toggle outputs via direct dialling. The following direct
dialling definitions can be configured-example with output no. 1933:
 2 = 19330XX (to switch off the output “1933”)
 2 = 19331XX (to switch on the output “1933”)
 2 = 1933TXX (to toggle the output “1933” (switch on/off))

ATTENTION:
With after dialling of the button 3 the output is deactivated after 30 seconds (the time configured at
“Dial to output”, see above)!

Parallel outputs
It is possible to configure the same call number for multiple outputs in parallel. The entire group of
outputs is controlled simultaneously. The status of the “master output” is indicated in the display.

Simultaneous control by multiple stations

The same output can be controlled simultaneously by several stations. If the status is changed by a
station (e.g. activation), the modified status is indicated correctly at all other stations.

NOTE:
Via LAN and S0 connections, outputs must be located in the same Intercom Server configuration
block in order to synchronise the display indication at all stations. This Intercom Server configura-
tion block has also to be configured for the respective connections (e.g. IAX, TEL or SIS-SIP-T).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Outputs > General Settings
 Call number: In this field, the call numbers of the respective outputs can be changed (enter a dialable
call number).

ATTENTION:
The default call numbers will not work!

240 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Input, output

 Output contacts for system features

For each station one or several output contacts can be configured for different situations (e.g. conver-
sation, All Call or ringing). The following possibilities can be combined:
 Call indication privacy call: The relay is closed during a privacy call until the call is taken over.
 Subscriber with conversation: The relay is closed during an active conversation.

GOOD TO KNOW: Relay

The relay will be closed independently of the conversation status (i.e. also for privacy call or busy
subscriber).

 Red lamp active: The relay is closed as long as the red lamp / multifunctional LED at the station is on
(e.g. during conversations, no indication of All Calls and audio monitoring).
 Loudspeaker active: The relay is closed as long as a signal is on the loudspeaker (also during All
Calls).
 Conversation with subscriber: The relay is closed as long as the subscriber has a conversation with
a pre-configured station.
 Initiate ringing at a group: The relay is closed when the subscriber initiates ringing to a defined
group, until the call is taken over.
 Receive 4T, 6T, 7T (Radio conference, predefined conference, music): The relay is closed, as long as
the subscriber receives a defined music program, radio conference or pre-configured conference.
 Initiate All Call/Group Call: The relay is closed when the subscriber initiates an All Call or a defined
group call, until the call is cancelled.
 Receive All Call/group call: The relay is closed when the subscriber receives an All Call or a defined
group call, until the call is cancelled.
 Subscriber with Simplex reception (PTT-contact for simplex): The relay is closed as long as simplex
reception is active (during dial tone, during listening of simplex conversation, at reception radio con-
ference/All Call/group call).
  PA announcement: The relay is closed when the subscriber is called with the defined PA-code.

ATTENTION: Memory required for output contacts

Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacities can be found on page 549!

Attendant contacts
Outputs can be assigned as attendant contacts to one or multiple subscribers, which will be closed
when a certain event occurs (e.g. during active conversation or conversation lamp is active). In addi-
tion, PA announcements or user-specific functions (e.g. establish a call, start an All Call or ring at a
group) can be executed automatically as long as the attendant contact is closed.

GOOD TO KNOW: Restrictions

Per subscriber, 339 definitions for attendant contacts are possible (as of PRO 800 1.1 see page 548).
One definition is:
 One or more activated checkboxes at Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab active at.
 One entry at Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab PA-Numbers.
 One entry at Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab Call no./ Function.

Configure output as attendant contact

To assign any output as attendant contact to a subscriber, follow the instructions below:

3.1/0923 241
 Input, output Intercom Server Configuration

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add attendant contact”.
3. Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber
4. Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 By card: Sort the available outputs by card to be able to select them.
 By subscriber: Sort the available outputs by subscriber to be able to select them. Further informa-
tion to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION: Memory required for output contacts

Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacities can be found on page 549!

Controlling of attendant contacts

An attendant contact can be closed when certain events occur that has been triggered by the assigned
subscriber. Follow the instructions below:

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab active at
2. Select the desired event, at which the attendant contact be closed:
Function Description
Call indication
Activate this checkbox to close the output until a privacy call is answered.
privacy call
Subscriber with Activate this checkbox to close the attendant contact during an active conver-
conversation sation. 1)
Red lamp active Activate this checkbox to close the output if the red lamp is activated.
Loudspeaker active Activate this checkbox to close the output if the loudspeaker is activated.
1)
The attendant contact will be closed independent of the conversation status (i.e. also for privacy call or
busy subscriber).

3. (Optional) Blinking output: Activate this checkbox to automatically switch the activated output on
and off.

ATTENTION: Requirement for station outputs

By default, station outputs do not blinking during conversations, because this leads to noise in the
loudspeaker. Activate the checkbox Blinking output during a call for the respective output at
Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab Outputs to enable the respective
station outputs.

 PA announcement with closed attendant contact

If the attendant contact is closed, pre-configured PA announcements can be executed. Follow the in-
structions below:

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab PA-Numbers
2. Click on Configure PA.
3. Enter an up to 4-digit code, which control the PA system.
4. Click on the button Add (several codes can be entered).
5. Click on the button Accept to save the changes.
6. In the field PA-Numbers, the configured codes are shown.

242 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Input, output

Functions with closed attendant contact

If the attendant contact is closed, pre-configured functions can be executed (e.g. establish a call, start
an All Call or ring at a group). Follow the instructions below:

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab Call no. / Function
2. Click on Configure Functions.
3. Right-click and select “Add call no. / function” (several functions can be added).
4. n the field Call no./Function, the following functions can be entered:
Function Description
Enter a call number. The attendant contact is activated during an active conver-
Calling number
sation between the subscriber and the given call number.
Enter the code for ringing at a group (e.g. “980” or “9825”). The attendant con-
Ringing at a group
tact is activated when the subscriber rings at this group.
Enter the code for an All Call or group call (e.g. “00” or “010”). The checkboxes
All Call/Group Call
Initiate All Call/group call and Receive All Call/group call will be enabled.
Enter the function code and the radio channel (e.g. “6T1”, “7T3” or “4T2”). The
Reception Music/radio
attendant contact is activated when this radio channel is received. In case only
conference/predefined
the function code is entered (e.g. “6T”, “7T” or “4T”), the attendant contact is
conference
enabled by receiving any radio channel.
Subscriber with Enter the button “T”. The attendant contact is activated when the speech direc-
Simplex reception tion of the subscriber is switched to simplex.

5. Receive All Call/group call: Activate this checkbox to receive an All Call or group call with the code
that is entered in the field Call no./Function. To enable this checkbox see above.
6. Initiate All Call/group call: Activate this checkbox to initiate an All Call or group call with the code
that is entered in the field Call no./Function. To enable this checkbox see above.
7. Click on Accept to save the changes.
8. In the field Call no./Function, the configured functions are shown.

3.1/0923 243
 Input, output Intercom Server Configuration

 Fully functional station outputs

The station / module outputs can be activated as real outputs. In case the station output is activated as
real output, the output is indicated in the output dialogue (Outputs > General Settings). With
indication in the output dialogue, the station output restrictions are no longer valid for these outputs.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab Outputs
 Enable full functionality: Activate this checkbox to upgrade the respective station output to a real
output.

NOTE:
 In case the station output is enabled as real output, the further configuration is the same as for
normal outputs.
 The checkbox Enable full functionality cannot be used in combination with the checkbox Blink-
ing output during a call (at Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab
Outputs).

ATTENTION:
In case no hierarchy level for the station output is configured the hierarchy level “00” is used!

 Feature PRO 800 2.0

If for the station output no hierarchy level is configured, the hierarchy level from the station
PRO 800

LICENCE PRO2U is automatically used for the station output. If a different hierarchy level is required/
configured for the station output, it has to be configured manually via CCT 800 at Outputs
> General Settings.

Parallel outputs
It is possible to configure the same call number for multiple outputs in parallel. The entire group of
outputs is controlled simultaneously. The status of the “master output” is indicated in the display.

NOTE:
Only outputs of I/O cards can be switched in parallel (no station outputs). However it is possible to use
a station outputs as “master output”.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Outputs > General Settings
 Parallel Call Number: In this field, the call number of the “master output” can be entered for the out-
puts, which be controlled in parallel to the master output (e.g. in the row of the output “9952”,
“9951” is entered as parallel. The outputs “9951” and “9952” are switched with “9951”.
 For the “master output” that switches the parallel outputs, the own call umber has to be entered
in the field Parallel Call Number.

ATTENTION:
In LAN and S0 networks, the outputs has to be in the same Intercom Server block. This Intercom
Server block has also to be configured at the S0 connections!

244 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Input, output

Delayed switching of outputs

It is possible for outputs (no station outputs) to configure a close and an open delay time.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Outputs > General Settings
 Output ON delay: In this field, the output close time delay can be entered for the respective output
(in seconds).
 Output OFF delay: In this field, the output open time delay can be entered for the respective output
(in seconds).
 If a value is entered in both fields, the output is switched as a pulse. In this case, the value in the
field output ON delay is the close time and the value in the field output OFF delay is the duration
of the pulse.

ATTENTION:
If certain values are entered in the field output ON delay, it is possible that these values will
be skipped and other values are given out!

Output generates ICX message

It is possible to define ICX messages for the input states (active, inactive) that is output at up to three
interfaces when the output state is reached.

ATTENTION:
Only possible with input/output cards, not for station outputs!

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Outputs > ICX at output
 Right-click on the desired output and select “Add ICX at output”.
 1. ICX-Interface to 3. ICX-Interface: In these drop-down lists, up to three interfaces can be selected,
at which the ICX messages are output.

GOOD TO KNOW: Transmission of internal or external ICX messages

If in the drop-down list 1. ICX - Interface the value “----” is selected, only internal ICX messages
will be sent. If in the drop-down list 2. ICX - Interface or 3. ICX - Interface the value “----” is
selected, ICX messages will not be sent over these ICX interfaces. Here are some examples for
sending ICX messages:
 Only internal ICX messages will be sent:
1. ICX - Interface: ----
2. ICX - Interface: ----
3. ICX - Interface: ----
 Only external ICX messages will be sent:
1. ICX - Interface: e.g. ICX 1-0/10
2. ICX - Interface: ----
3. ICX - Interface: ----
 Internal as well as external messages will be sent:
1. ICX - Interface: ----
2. ICX - Interface: e.g. ICX 1-0/10
3. ICX - Interface: ----

 Go to: Outputs > ICX at output > sub-folder output

 Conditional: In this drop-down list, the condition of an input level can be selected, at which an ICX
message is sent.

3.1/0923 245
Input, output Intercom Server Configuration

 Task: In this field, the task number of the desired ICX message can be entered.
 Type: In this field, the type number of the desired ICX message can be entered.
 Data: In this field, the parameter of the desired ICX message can be entered.

GOOD TO KNOW:
Provide the call number of the initiator and the output in the field data of the ICX message like this:
 Value D0FF substitutes the call number of the initiator. If the initiator is a door opener, then the
value is substituted by the call number of the station which triggered the door opener.
 Value D000 substitutes the call number of the output. The output must be set as fully functional
output. For further information, see page 244.

The substitution takes place when the ICX message is sent.

 System no. receiver/sender: In this field, the receiver/sender block number can be entered.

NOTE:
 For further information about the configuration of ICX messages, see the product manual “ICX
Protocol”.
 A maximum of 150 digit can be used for an ICX message. In case the data from an ICX messages
is longer than 22 digits, a not used ICX messages is disabled.

Linking inputs to outputs

It is possible to virtually link inputs to outputs.

ATTENTION:
Only possible with input/output cards (not with station outputs)!

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Outputs > General Settings
 Input: In this drop-down list, an input can be selected, which be connected to the output.
 Level ON: In this drop-down list, a level can be selected, which be simulated at the input when the
output is activated.
 Level OFF: In this drop-down list, a level can be selected, which be simulated at the input when the
output is deactivated.

Restore output states after a warmstart

The output states can be restored after a warmstart of the Intercom Server. Even when the Intercom
Server is reconfigured, it is possible to restore the states of outputs.

ATTENTION:
 The output states are not saved at a power failure or turning the power off and back on!
 Only possible for outputs of I/O cards (not for station outputs)!

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Outputs > General Settings
 Activate the checkbox Restore state after restart for the respective output.

246 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Input, output

ICX message for output states

ICX messages can be given out for the output of the own Intercom Server.

ATTENTION:
At outputs with a dialable or local call number (FExx) ICX messages are always output!

Configuration CCT 800 (only for station outputs)

 Activate the station output as real output (see page 244).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Outputs > General Settings
 ICX-Message: In this drop-down list, the option can be selected when an ICX message is output for
the individual outputs. The following options are available:
 Never: ICX messages will not be output.
 On change: At each change of state an ICX message will be output.
 On restart and on change: An ICX message well be output at start/restart of the Intercom Server
and at each change of state.

NOTE:
At the start of an Intercom Server, ICX messages will only be output in the own Intercom Server
via a serial interface!

Hierarchy levels for outputs

In order to allow selective access to outputs it is possible to advise hierarchy levels to the outputs.
Hierarchy relations are handled the same as with conversations (see page 217).

ATTENTION:
No hierarchy for station outputs!

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Outputs > General Settings
 Hierarchy: In this drop-down list, the hierarchy level can be selected for the respective output.

Virtual inputs/outputs

Virtual input/output cards

Virtual input and output cards are available. Operation is the same as with normal input/output cards,
however they are not physically present.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Cards
 Select the desired cards in the respective slot.

3.1/0923 247
Input, output Intercom Server Configuration

Virtual slots “GE 300”

Virtual slots are available for the GE300 Intercom Server. In these slots only virtual input / output cards
can be selected (G3-16E virtual, G3-16A virtual and G3-8E8A virtual).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Cards
 Card type: In these drop-down list, up to three virtual input/output cards can be selected for slots
“(13)” to “(15)”.

ATTENTION:
Please note that virtual input/output cards in slot 15 do not get any standard call numbers. Call num-
bers have to be entered manually.

Extended clients
 Up to PRO800 1.1 a maximum of 224 inputs/outputs can be addressed.
 As of PRO800 1.1 a maximum of 478 inputs/outputs can be addressed (224 “regular” addresses +
254 extended addresses).

Restrictions for networked systems

 In total an Intercom System can address 2040 “remote”, extended clients.
 This limit only becomes active when extended clients are used across networked systems.
 The allocation of the address pool is carried out dynamically.
 Required firmware versions
 PRO800 1.1 in all GE300 / GE800
 G7-UPG (network cards has to be updated to version 5.3
G8-NET, G8-LAN, G3-LAN, E1, W, G7 network cards)
 Compatibility to GE200 / GE700
 Extended client addresses from a GE300 / GE800 cannot be used from the Intercom Server GE200/
GE700.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

248 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Speech control

Speech control

Duplex
ATTENTION:
When using IP subscriber cards, restrictions possibly exist for this function (see page 520)!

 Conversations in Duplex mode

The speech direction is controlled by a so called “speech balance”. Depending on
the background noise, hands free communication is possible from up to seven me-
tres (22 ft.).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab General
 In the drop-down list Duplex mode, select the entry “Duplex” for the respective subscriber.

 Conversations in Full Duplex mode

ATTENTION:
Do not confuse Full Duplex with “OpenDuplex®” at DSP stations (see page 250)!

 The conversation is permanently switched in both directions that means both conversation partners
can talk at the same time.
 There are two possibilities of configuration:
 Full duplex (only one of the conversation partners has to be in mode “Full duplex” to build up the
conversation in full duplex)
 Full duplex both (both conversation partners have to be in mode “Full duplex”).

ATTENTION:
 If “Full duplex” is configured for a station, the station has to be equipped with a suitable
earphone!
 If “Full duplex both” is configured, the station has to be equipped with a gooseneck microphone
or similar (e.g. EE 472), because otherwise feedback would occur!

3.1/0923 249
 Speech control Intercom Server Configuration

The following table shows, how conversations are built up between differently configured Intercom
stations:
Called station
Duplex Full Duplex Full Duplex both
Duplex Duplex Full Duplex Duplex
Calling
station

Full Duplex Full Duplex Full Duplex Full Duplex

Full Duplex both Duplex Full Duplex Full Duplex

NOTES:
 If one of the stations is in mode Simplex, the conversation is always built up in Simplex.
 When in use of DSP stations, this table is also valid for OpenDuplex® (see page 250; i.e.
“OpenDuplex®”instead of “Full Duplex”).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab General
 In the drop-down list Duplex mode, select either the entry “Full Duplex” or “Full Duplex both” for
the respective subscriber.

 OpenDuplex®

OpenDuplex® improves the speech quality in case of high background noise. OpenDuplex® allows
simultaneous talking and listening of both subscribers.

The table on page 250 shows how conversations between subscribers configured to different speech
modes, are built up (the term “Full Duplex” is used instead of “OpenDuplex®”).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab General
 In the drop-down list Duplex mode, select either the entry “OpenDuplex®” or “OpenDuplex® both”
for the respective subscriber.
OpenDuplex® with 16 kHz is only possible with the following station types:
Station type OpenDuplex@ 16 kHz OpenDuplex@ 7 kHz
WS Series  
Digital A series stations (e.g. EE 811A)  
ET 901D + digital A series stations (e.g. EE 811A)  
Digital stations (e.g. EE 811)  
ET 901D + digital stations (e.g. EE 811)  
ET 901A + analogue stations  
ET 908, ET 963  
Intercom Client 1) 


250 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Speech control

Station type OpenDuplex@ 16 kHz OpenDuplex@ 7 kHz

Analogue stations  2) 
1)
Depending on the used sound card.
2)
With restrictions (one side must use handset or gooseneck microphone).

3.1/0923 251
 Speech control Intercom Server Configuration

Simplex
ATTENTION:
When using IP subscriber cards, restrictions possibly exist for this function (see page 520)!

With simplex the direction of speech is controlled manually, e.g. in case of high background noise
(speak: press T, listen: release T).

 Conversations in Simplex
A conversation with a subscriber configured as simplex is always built up in simplex. The speech di-
rection is determined by configuration:
 Simplex - Listen: The speech direction is switched to the selected station, the conversation partner
can answer without pressing any button. This is the most common simplex mode.
 Simplex - Talk: The speech direction is switched from the selected station to the conversation
partner, the conversation partner has to press T for talking.
If both stations are configured to “Simplex Listen” or “Simplex Talk”, the mode is determined by the
calling station.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab General
 In the drop-down list Duplex mode, select either the entry “Simplex-Listen” or “Simplex-Talk” for
the respective subscriber.

 Simplex by pressing the button T

If during a duplex conversation one of the subscribers presses the T button, the speech direction is
switched to his conversation partner. The following two simplex modes are available:
 Duplex again: After releasing of the T button the conversation is in duplex again, so that the
conversation can be continued in duplex e.g. after a noisy machine has been switched off.
 Simplex remains: After releasing the T-button the whole conversation stays in simplex. The speech
direction is switched to the subscriber, who has last pressed the T button, his conversation partner
can answer without pressing a button.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Switch off times
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Switch off times”.
 In this drop-down list Release T-Key, select either the entry “Back to Duplex” or “Simplex remains”
for the respective subscriber.
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX”, this setting can be selected for the entire Intercom Server
block.

 Simplex by touching the button T

If during a duplex conversation one of the subscribers shortly presses the T button, the speech direc-
tion is switched to his conversation partner, until the conversation partner shortly presses the T button
and so turns round the speech direction.

252 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Speech control

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Switch off times
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Switch off times”.
 In the drop-down list Release T-Key, select the entry “Conference mode (tap)”.
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX”, this setting can be selected for the entire Intercom Server
block.

 Volume adjustable separately for functions

For each subscriber a volume level can be configured for the different conversation modes and tones.
During a conversation the volume can be changed at the Intercom station; the maximum and minimum
volumes can be configured. It is also possible to configure a fixed volume level.

2-wire Intercom stations with dot-matrix display/WS series

The volume can be adjusted with the option “Volume” in the main menu of the station (see page 183).

4-wire stations series EE 411, 2-wire stations series EE 311A

The volume can be changed during a conversation with the buttons D and E, with display stations
the volume level is indicated in the display while the volume is changed:

If the volume level is acknowledged with button F, the new volume is stored permanently. If the
volume level is not acknowledged with F, the volume is reset to the configured volume level after
disconnection of the conversation (except the adjustment for music: this volume is stored in any case).

ATTENTION:
If the volume is adjusted at the Intercom station, the configuration “Volume act.” of the Intercom
Server might be different to the configuration stored with CCT 800!

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab Duplex, Simplex, Full duplex
 Duplex active / Simplex active / Full Duplex active: In these drop-down lists, the default volume can
be selected for the respective conversation type and subscriber.
 Duplex mode / Simplex mode / Full Duplex mode: In these drop-down lists, the mode of the volume
limit can be selected for the respective conversation type and subscriber. The following modes are
available:
 Max: At the respective subscriber, the volume of this call type can be increased to a maximum,
which is defined in the drop-down list limit.
 Min: At the respective subscriber, the volume of this call type can be reduced to a minimum, which
is defined in the drop-down list limit.
 Fix: At the respective subscriber, the volume of this call type cannot be changed. The volume in
the drop-down list limit is permanently activated.

 Volume adjustable separately for radio conference and

conversations
For each subscriber a separate volume level can be configured for normal conversations and for radio
conference (see page 253). The volumes can be changed at the Intercom station with the buttons D
and E during a conversation or during reception of radio conference.

3.1/0923 253
 Speech control Intercom Server Configuration

 Online volume setting


It is possible to change the volume settings of stations online in CCT 800without sending the CCT 800
file to the Intercom Server. The changes can subsequently be taken over in the CCT 800 file if desired.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab General
 In the column Online volume control of the respective subscriber, click on the button .... The
following dialogue appears:

 Click on the button Receive to receive the current settings of the subscriber.

Subscriber
 Call number
 Description (e.g. “Station 104“)
 Address ([Intercom Server]/[slot]-[subscriber], e.g. “1/1-4“)
 Station type (e.g. “EE311“)
 Card type: Subscriber card, to which the subscriber is connected (e.g. Gx-GED-4D).

254 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Speech control

Thresholds
 High: In this drop-down list, the threshold level can be selected in dB, at which a switch to the max-
imum volume level is automatically carried out.
 Low: In this drop-down list, the threshold level can be selected in dB, at which a switch to lowest
volume level is automatically carried out.

NOTE:
The volume settings in the drop-down lists High and Low are automatically adjusted when an offset
is defined in the drop-down list Internal (e.g. “High” is set to 75 dB, in the drop-down list Internal -
9 dB is selected → High is automatically set to 84 dB).

 Reduction: In this drop-down list, the volume reduction value can be selected. This setting defines
how much the volume is reduced at level “low” contrary to level “high”.

Microphone gain
 Internal: In this drop-down list, the microphone sensitivity can be selected for the internal
microphone module.

NOTE:
With using the industrial station series EE8000 and the built-in microphone (EM 860, EM 660) as a
noise-cancelling microphone (at very high ambient noises), the microphone gain is set to -15 dB.

 External: In this drop-down list, the sensitivity of the external microphone can be selected (e.g. hand-
set).
 Gooseneck: In this drop-down list, sensitivity of the gooseneck microphone can be selected (if
connected).
 Headset: In this drop-down list, the sensitivity of the headset microphone can be selected (if
connected).

Levels
 Level “Low” at start of Intercom Server: Activate this checkbox to switch the volume automatically
to level “low” at start the of the Intercom Server.
 Level “Low” when button is pressed: Activate this checkbox to switch the volume automatically to
level “low” if a button is pressed.

Volumes
 With the slider “Master”, all volume types can be adjusted. With the different sliders, the volumes
can individually be adjusted for the following features:
Duplex Simplex Full Duplex Handset
Music All Call Gong Tones
Buzzer 6T Feedback Radio

 Click on the button Save to save the volume settings in a desired directory (*ACS, Microsoft Agent
Character File).
 Click on the button Load to load a saved volume setting (*ACS, Microsoft Agent Character File).
 Click on the button Reset to reset a defined volume settings.
 Click on the button Send to send the defined volume settings to the Intercom Server.
 Online: Activate this checkbox to enable an online communication between PC and Intercom Server.
All defined settings are sent in real-time (in this case, no need for button Send). Additionally, the fol-
lowing current data is indicated in real-time:
 Active level (volume high/low).
 Noise level (current ambient noise in dB).
 Click on the button Accept to apply the settings in the CCT 800 configuration that have been sent to
the respective subscriber (via the dialogue “Volume settings”). The configuration dialogue closes.

3.1/0923 255
 Speech control Intercom Server Configuration

NOTE:
The volume of the Intercom subscribers can be changed via ICX messages. For a list of all ICX
messages, see the product manual “ICX Protocol”.

 Idle audio/microphone volume control


An audio signal fed into the system through the line-in or external microphone input can be output
through the station's own loudspeaker when it is idle.

Requirements
 ET 808A, EE 7506D min. DSP800A 3.4 Build 1
 ET 908A, EE 7506I, EF 963A min. IoIP device 8.3
 ET 908H min. IoIP device 8.3
 All AF-hybrid devices min. IoIP device 8.3
(e.g. AF 20H, AF 50H, AF 125H, AF 250H, AF 500H)
 All AFLS devices min. IoIP device 8.3
(e.g. AFLS 10H C, AFLS 10H H, AFLS 10H P, AFLS 10H SC)
 All versions ET 962A min. IoIP device 8.3
(e.g. EF 962A, EF 962H, ES 962H, ET 962A, ET 962H, ET 970A, ET 970H, EF 963A)
 All versions EE 7506I and EE 7506H min. IoIP device 8.3
(e.g. EE 7506I, EE 7506I AF, EE 7506H, EE 7506H AF)

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab General
 Idle Audio Input: In this drop-down list, the input audio source for the idle state can be selected.
When it is activated, it enables the drop-down lists Idle Audio Volume and Audio Source During Con-
versation for the station. The following sources are available:
 Off: No audio signal is output when idle.
 External Microphone: The audio input of the microphone feeder clamps is always put through.
These are labelled “Mic” (e.g. ET 962) or “EM” (e.g. ET 908H). If a subscriber provides both, use
the feeder clamps “EM”.
 Line-In: The input of the feeder clamps “line-in” is used.

NOTE:
Receive the CCT 800 configuration to configure Idle Audio Input.

 Idle Audio Volume: In this drop-down list, the output volume for the loudspeaker which reproduces
the signal in idle state can be selected. The control range depends on the station connected.
 Audio Source During Conversation: In this drop-down list, the input audio source during an active
call can be selected. This setting is used to overrule the automatic switching between Line-in and
internal microphone. The following sources are available:
 Dynamic: The audio signal with the higher volume is used (line-in or mic).
 Microphone: The input of the feeder clamps “mic” is used.
 Line-In: The input of the feeder clamps “line-in” is used.

 2-step volume control


For DSP stations two different volume modes can be configured (“High”, “Low”) for varying ambient
noise levels (see page 254).

256 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Speech control

Automatic volume control

The microphone of the station monitors the current noise level and automatically activates the
adequate volume mode. Additionally it is possible to automatically switch to volume mode “Low”
when a button is pressed at the station to protect the person in front of the station against the high
volume.

[dB]

ambient noise level

high threshold

low threshold

Level: low high low high t

NOTE:
During a conversation or a call request, the automatic volume control is deactivated. This means the
microphone does not monitor the ambient noise level during that period of time (because of different
noise level conditions during the conversation / the call request). But during the conversation / the call
request there is a possibility to toggle manually between the volume modes “High” and “Low” (see
page 257).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Voice control
 Threshold-loud: In this drop-down list, the level can be selected, at which the automatic switching to
volume mode “High” is carried out.
 Threshold-silent: In this drop-down list, the level can be selected, at which the automatic switching
to volume mode “Low” is carried out.
 Reduction: In this drop-down list, the volume reduction value can be selected. This setting defines
how much the volume is reduced at level “low” contrary to level “high” (0 to -9 dB).
 Level “Low” at start of Intercom Server: Activate this checkbox to switch the volume automatically
to level “low” at start of the Intercom Server.
 Level “Low” when button is pressed: Activate this checkbox to switch the volume automatically to
level “low” if a button is pressed.

Attendant contact for Level “High”

 Configure an attendant contact for the desired subscriber for the code “9T92”. The contact is active
when the station is in volume mode “high” (see page 241).

Manual volume control

Manual switching by dialling of a code (the code has to be defined as Direct Dialling, which makes it
possible to entitle single stations):
 9T920: Low
 9T921: High
 9T92T: Toggle (does not work with “Level Low when button is pressed”)
Further information about the configuration of direct dialling can be found on page 212.

3.1/0923 257
 Speech control Intercom Server Configuration

 Intelligent Volume Control (IVC)


Feature PRO 800 4.1 – Intelligent Volume Control (IVC)
Automatic volume control of the loudspeaker and microphone gain in response to the ambient
noise level.

The “Intelligent Volume Control” (IVC) distinguishes between the ambient noises and the voice of the
person speaking. IVC continuously monitors the ambient noise and adjusts the gain of both the loud-
speaker and the microphone of the station in response to the changing noise level. This feature allows
for automatic adaptation of the conversation state at the station to the ambient noise, particularly in
environments where there are large differences in the volume of ambient noise, such as at a railway
station or on a motorway.

Requirements
The following firmware versions are supported:
 DSP800A min. 2.6
 DSP800B min. 2.0
 DSP900A min. 5.6
 AF-I min. 5.5
 AF-D min. 1.5
 IoIP device 7.0
As the ambient noise level increases, the loudspeaker gain will automatically increase, while the
microphone gain will decrease within a specifically defined volume range. Examples of ambient noise
levels include static noises, such as the sound of an incoming train at a railway station, and pulsating
noises, like those produced by a pneumatic hammer.

NOTE:
The IVC does not control the volume during playback of DSP tones.

At a station with a display, the station test for the “ambient noise level” can be accessed by holding
down and 9, and then releasing :

The following information will be shown on the display:

 1: Current ambient noise level.
 2: Minimum volume level.
 3: Current loudspeaker gain.
 4: Maximum noise level.
To cancel the station test, press x (see page 519).

258 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Speech control

Loudspeaker gain
As the ambient noise level changes, the volume of the loudspeaker will be adjusted continuously to
match the noise level. The minimum volume is determined by the configured volume level of the
station. When the ambient noise level increases, the loudspeaker gain will be raised by up to 4 volume
levels (+12 dB). However, the configured maximum volume level (e.g. max. 12 at WS station) cannot
be exceeded. The maximum loudspeaker gain is achieved when the ambient noise level reaches 85 dB
(see illustration below).
volume level example: WS station

12 maximum volume level

11

10

0
40 45 50 55 65 70 75 80 90 95 100 ambient noise level
60 85 (dB)
Example
Consider an intercom station located next to a railway platform with a configured volume level of 7.
When a train arrives at the platform, the ambient noise level rises above 85 dB, causing the loudspeaker
gain at the intercom station to increase by approximately 4 volume levels (+12 dB) to level 11. Once the
train has departed, and the ambient noise level drops below 60 dB, the loudspeaker gain at the
intercom station is decreased to the configured volume level of 7.

3.1/0923 259
 Speech control Intercom Server Configuration

Microphone gain
The gain of the microphone is continuously adjusted to match the ambient noise level. The minimum
volume is determined by the configured volume level of the station. When the ambient noise level
increases, the microphone gain will be reduced by up to 12 dB. The minimum microphone gain is
achieved when the ambient noise level reaches 85 dB, as shown in the illustration below. As the
ambient noise level increases, the person speaking at the station automatically speaks louder due to
the Lombard effect, whereby the useful signal remains approximately the same for the listener and the
ambient noise level will be decreased by the reduced microphone gain.
microphone gain
(dB)

–1

–2

–3

–4

–5

–6

–7

–8

–9

–10

– 11

– 12
40 45 50 55 65 70 75 80 90 95 100 ambient noise level
60 85 (dB)
Example
Consider a station located next to a motorway. When a car passes the station, the ambient noise level
rises above 85 dB, causing the microphone gain to decrease by approximately 12 dB. Once the car has
passed and the ambient noise level drops below 60 dB, the microphone gain is increased by approxi-
mately 12 dB.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Voice control
 IVC: Activate this checkbox to enable the “Intelligent Voice Control” (IVC) for the respective
subscriber (by default, activated).

 Improved Duplex-switching

 In rooms with lots of reverberations and at high volume with a small distance between loudspeaker
and microphone problems with switched Duplex may appear (clipping of speech). This behaviour can
be improved via special configuration.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab General
 High volume duplex mode: Activate this checkbox to improve switched duplex for the respective
subscriber in certain situations.

260 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Speech control

 Handset, headset and internal loudspeaker


By default, the connection of a handset or headset to a station is automatically detected and the
station's internal loudspeaker is muted. It is also possible to set the internal loudspeaker to be
reactivated (9T911), deactivated (9T910) or toggled (9T91T) when a handset/headset is
connected by dialling a code via direct dialling, F2 menu, EE880 button or ICX message. This can be
useful when the handset is set aside and you still want to hear All Calls and regular calls.

Configuration CCT 800

The codes will be configured either as direct dialling, entry in the F2 menu or for an EE880 button:
 9T911: Activate internal loudspeaker
 9T910: Deactivate internal loudspeaker
 9T91T: Toggle internal loudspeaker status

 Handset features
When using a handset, by default the following features exist:

Standard functionality
Hook off handset
When lifting the handset, the internal loudspeaker is muted and the handset loudspeaker is activated.

Hook on handset
When the handset is hung up, the system switches back to the internal loudspeaker. If the subscriber
is still in a call, the call remains active and is not ended by hanging up the handset.

Enhanced Handset Functionality

Hook off handset
At privacy calls, door calls, All Calls and group calls, the call will be accepted or answered.

 Feature PRO 800 3.x – automatic detection of devices with internal handset function (see
respective data sheet)
 PRO 800

LICENCE PRO3U With this feature, the checkbox Extended handset function will be automatically activated.
The automatic activation of the extended handset function requires no further configuration.

Hook on handset
When the subscriber is still in a call, the call is ended by hanging up the handset.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Handset
 Disable internal handset function: Activate this checkbox to not switch to handset volume when the
respective subscriber is lifted.
 External handset installed: Activate this checkbox when an external handset is used. The checkbox
Extended handset function is enabled.
 Extended handset function: Activate this checkbox to enable the behaviour described above when
taking off and hanging up. In addition to this, the drop-down list Select Key on Liftoff is unlocked.
 Dialling of button on hook-off: In this drop-down list, a button can be selected, which is dialled
automatically when the handset is hooked off. The following buttons are available:
 0: Can be used e.g. to start an automatic call request (via direct dialling).
 Enter: Can be used e.g. to automatically answer pending privacy calls.

3.1/0923 261
 Speech control Intercom Server Configuration

 Voice activity detection


With the function Voice activity detection it is possible to detect the cancel of a conversation (no signal
at the microphone) and cancel the conversation automatically.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Voice activity detection
 Switch off time: In this drop-down list, the time can be selected, which is between the cancel of the
conversation and automatic cancelling of the conversation (0 = no voice activity detection). The fields
Sensibility and Input Call-Nr are enabled.
 Sensibility: In this drop-down list, the audio level can be selected for the microphone.
 Input Call-Nr: In this field, the call number of the respective input can be entered, which is used to
cancel the conversation (only required if an input is configured).

NOTE:
In case the voice activity detection is activated after the defined Switch off time the conversation is
always cancelled automatically.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input initiates dialling
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add input initiates dialling”.
 Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input initiates dialling > sub-folder input
 In the drop-down list Dial/Key, enter the entry “X” for the input level “Short”.
Further information about the configuration of inputs can be found on page 231.

262 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Call diversion, call transfer

Call diversion, call transfer

 Call diversion: All incoming calls are transferred to another station.
 Call transfer: In certain situations incoming calls are transferred over a configured call transfer chain
of stations.
Type of call diversion Call diversion destination Trigger
Executive/secretary To a fix configured Own station: 02 and calling number
transfer chain “Secretary station” of secretary station.
Own station: 02T and calling num-
Variable secretary transfer To any desired station
ber of target station.
Own station: Turn, target station: 02
Follow Me To any desired station
and calling number of own station.
Type of call transfer Transfer destination
Automatic in case of busy If the called station is busy, the call is immediately transferred.
If the called station is in privacy mode, the call is transferred after a configur-
Automatic in case of privacy
able time when the call is not taken over.
If nobody answers at the called station if the station is busy or in privacy
Manual call transfer
mode, the caller can switch to the next station with 9.

 Permanent executive/secretary transfer chain

By turning the station to the side (only EE411, EE311 or EE811A) or by dialling 02 and the number of
the station configured as secretary, incoming calls for the executive are automatically transferred to
the secretary. At a stations with dot-matrix display the following help is displayed after dialling of 02:

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Dial
02_
Call transfer

X-Cancel
An activated secretary transfer is deactivated again by dialling 030 or by turning back the station.
With display stations the target of an activated secretary transfer is indicated in the display, e.g.:

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

->22
Joe Cocker
Call Transfer

d-MenÜ

3.1/0923 263
 Call diversion, call transfer Intercom Server Configuration

EE411

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
 Secretary Number: In this field, the call number of the secretary station can be entered.
 Secretary Description: In this field, the description of the secretary station will be displayed, which
is entered in the field Secretary Number. The description can be changed at Subscriber > General
> tab Naming in the field Description.
 Secretary Waiting time when busy [s]: In this field, the delay time can be entered, after which a con-
versation is forwarded to the secretary station when the called station is busy.

NOTE:
 As of PRO800 1.1 Secretary transfers remain active after a warmstart of the Intercom Server.

 Executive/secretary transfer chain

A subscriber who is configured as secretary can again have an aligned secretary. If this subscriber
wants to work undisturbed or leaves the office, he turns his station (or activates secretary transfer with
02 and the secretary's number) and all incoming calls are transferred. So a caller will always reach
somebody who can pass on information.

ATTENTION:
The call transfer chain may be as long as desired, but it may not close in a loop!

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
 Secretary Number: In this field, the call number of the secretary station can be entered.
 Secretary Description: In this field, the description of the secretary station will be displayed, which
is entered in the field Secretary Number. The description can be changed at Subscriber > General
> tab Naming in the field Description.

264 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Call diversion, call transfer

 Variable executive/secretary transfer chain

By dialling 02T and the number of any desired station, incoming calls are automatically transferred
to this station (in case of secretary transfer over tieline, T has to be after-dialled, e.g. 02T 123 T).
The displays of the stations are like “Fix secretary transfer”. Feature level “C” is required for the
subscriber that is transferred.

NOTE:
 As of PRO800 5.0, the variable secretary transfer remains active after a restart of the Intercom Server.

ATTENTION:
By turning the station (i.e. by the position switch), this feature will be deactivated!

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Follow Me
If a subscriber leaves his office and turns his station to the side (only EE411, EE311 or EE811), he can
enter 02 and his own calling number at any station. The calls arriving at his station are then
transferred to this station. During the acknowledgement tone the display shows the number of the
transferred station. See the following illustrations:

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Dial
42
Call transfer

X-Cancel

EE411

This transfer can also be carried out to several stations, one after the other. This prevents unnecessary
This transfer can also be carried out to several stations, one after the other. This prevents unnecessary
All Calls and ensures direct access to the subscriber wherever he is. When the subscriber returns to his
office, all he has to do is to turn his station back to its normal position and Follow Me is cancelled.
Feature level “C” is required for the subscriber that is transferred.

NOTE:
As of PRO 800 1.1 Follow Me transfers remain active after a warmstart of the Intercom Server.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

3.1/0923 265
 Call diversion, call transfer Intercom Server Configuration

Call transfer
A chain of stations is configured for the call transfer chain. All along this chain the calls can be manually
(with button 9) or automatically transferred if unanswered. The different types of transfer can be
combined.

Called station: 
Configuration CCT 800
The call transfer chain is configured like an “executive-secretary transfer chain” (see page 264).
 Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
 Secretary Number: In this field, the call number of the secretary station can be entered for each sub-
scriber in the call transfer chain, to which a call be transferred.
 Secretary Description: In this field, the description of the secretary station will be displayed, which
is entered in the field Secretary Number. The description can be changed at Subscriber > General
> tab Naming in the field Description.

 Manual call transfer

If any station in the transfer chain is called and if the station is busy or if nobody answers, the call can
be manually transferred to the next station in the chain by pressing button 9 at the calling station. The
call can be transferred until the cancel of the chain.
If a station is called (loudspeaking or privacy call), the called station can transfer the calling station to
a configured secretary station by pressing button 9. If the station does not have the entitlement “Call
transfer as called station”, the conversation is built-up (only during privacy).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Talk into, Priority call, Call transfer, Recall request
 Call transfer as calling station: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, which calls into
the call transfer chain.
 Call transfer as called station: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, to which the call
be transferred.

Automatic call transfer in case of busy

If a busy station of the call transfer chain is called, the call will be automatically transferred to the next
idle station of the chain. In case the last station of the chain is also busy, a busy tone will be switched
on. The standard features for “busy” can now be operated.

Called station: 
Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Talk into, Priority call, Call transfer, Recall request
 Call transfer as calling station: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, which calls into
the call transfer chain.
 Call transfer as called station: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber to which the call
be transferred.

Automatic call transfer in case of privacy

If a call comes to a station of the call transfer chain which has activated “privacy function” with 031
or which is configured as “Fix privacy” and the call is not answered within a configurable time, it will
be automatically transferred to the next station of the chain. Should this station also be in “privacy
mode”, the call will be further transferred until the cancel of the chain. If all stations in the chain are in
“privacy mode” and nobody answers, the call will be cancelled after the configured switch-off time.

266 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Call diversion, call transfer

Called station: 
Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Talk into, Priority call, Call transfer, Recall request
 Call transfer as calling station: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, which calls into
the call transfer chain.
 Call transfer as called station: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, to which the call
be transferred.
 Go to: Intercom Server > Switch off times
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Switch off times”.
 Switch off time forwarding [s]: In this field, the switch-off time of forwarding can be entered, after
which the call is transferred (max. 15 minutes; 0 = No transfer in privacy mode).
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX”, this setting can be changed for the entire Intercom Server
block.

ATTENTION:
If the “switch off time forwarding” is higher than the “switch off time privacy call”, then no call
transfer in case of privacy will be carried out!

3.1/0923 267
 Feature with additional interface Intercom Server Configuration

Feature with additional interface

 Application-specific interface

For the control desk terminal CD810, it is possible to send direct dialling button events to a third-party
interface. With this function, the information of the direct dialling button will be automatically sent to
the third-party interface and not into the Intercom Server system. This feature is typically used for
project specific applications.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Interfaces > Application-specific Interface > tab Remote Control Direct Dial
 Interface: In this drop-down list, the third-party interface can be selected, which should receive the
information of the direct dialling button.

NOTE:
This function is only available for the terminal “CD810”.

 Answer back via loudspeaker


The answer back over loudspeaker only works in simplex. The direction of speech is controlled
manually by pressing the talk button T (see page 252). For these subscribers an interface HE505 is
needed.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab General
 In the drop-down list Duplex mode, select the entry “Simplex - Talk” for the respective subscriber.
 Activate the checkbox Mode HE505 for the respective subscriber.

 Call indication with flashing light or horn


Subscribers who are to have their calls announced e.g. by means of a flashing light are configured to
fix privacy. The light keeps on flashing until the call has been accepted. For this subscriber either an
interface HE501 is required, or an output contact “Call indication privacy call” (see page 241).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy
 Activate the checkbox Fix as called station for the respective subscriber.

268 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Group call, All Call

Group call, All Call

All Call
ATTENTION:
When using IP subscriber cards, restrictions possibly exist for this function (see page 520)!

 All Call initiator configurable per subscriber

If a person is not at his desk he can be paged over all stations that are configured for receiving All Calls
by the sequence 00. A double gong sounds, the announcement can be started as soon as the red
lamp lights. The All Call announcement is cancelled by pressing button T. With display stations “00”
is indicated in the display during the All Call:

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Announcement
00
All Call

X-Cancel

EE311A/EE411

After termination of the announcement with T:

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Announcement
00
All Call
Answer Back

X-Cancel

EE311A/EE411 blinking

If only an announcement is to be made the All Call is cancelled by pressing X. If an All Call announce-
ment started with 00 is not cancelled with T or X, it is automatically switched off after a configurable
time (by default 1 minute).

3.1/0923 269
 Group call, All Call Intercom Server Configuration

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls
 All Call initiator: Activate this checkbox to initiate All Calls with the respective subscriber.
 Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Switch off times
 All Call: In this field, the announcement time of All Calls can be changed (max. 1049 seconds or 17.4
minutes; 0 = switch-off time disabled, by default 60 seconds).

 All Call receiver

At the All Call receivers a double gong sounds. With display stations the display text of the caller is
indicated in the display during the announcement. After the initiator has cancelled the announcement
and waits for an answer the receivers get the following display:

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Announcement
54
Lucky Luke
Answer Back

TT-Answer Back
X-Cancel
EE311A/EE411 blinking

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls
 All Call receiver: Activate this checkbox to receive All Calls with the respective subscriber.

NOTE: No display for SIP-C subscribers

No display is possible for SIP-C subscribers.

 Automatic All Call answer

The person being looked for can answer from any station (need not be an All Call receiver) with TT
and is connected to the caller without delay. After start of waiting for the answer back with T the
searching subscriber is busy for all conversations except the answer with TT for a configurable time
(by default 30 seconds). The All Call can also be answered after this time has elapsed, as long as no
new All Call or group call is initiated in the system.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Switch off times
 Answer back All Call: In this field, the time for an answer back of an All Call can be changed (max.
1049 seconds or 17.4 minutes; 0 = switch-off time disabled, by default 60 seconds).

 Selective cancelling (during All Call)

Each All Call receiver can switch off reception during the All Call with button X.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

270 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Group call, All Call

Group call (max. 90 groups)

ATTENTION:
When using IP subscriber cards, restrictions possibly exist for this function (see page 520)!

 Group call initiator

The search process within a group resembles that of the All Call. It is started with 01 and the group
number: 010– 019 (single digit group numbers for max. 10 groups) or 0100 – 0189 (2-digit
group numbers for max. 90 groups). Only one group call can be initiated, not more at the same time.
Instead of pre-dialling “01” a 1-digit code can be configured (see page 157), e.g. “7”: dialling 70 to
79 (single digit group numbers) or 700 to 789 (2-digit group numbers).
With display stations the group call number is indicated in the display during the announcement, after
termination of the announcement with T the display blinks. If a group call announcement is not can-
celled with T or X, it is automatically switched off after a configurable time (by default 1 minute).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Switch off times
 Group Call: In this field, the announcement time of group calls can be changed (max. 1049 seconds
or 17.4 minutes; 0 = switch-off time disabled, by default 60 seconds).

NOTE:
The gong of a group call takes 500 ms; thus longer pre-recorded audio files will be isolated.

 Group call receiver (max. 90 groups)

Each subscriber can be configured to be receiver of one or several group calls. The groups are defined
by configuration the receivers. The receivers of the group calls can be configured as desired (groups
of receivers can also overlap). When using display stations the display text of the caller is indicated in
the display during the announcement, after the initiator has cancelled the announcement and is waiting
for an answer the display blinks. If more than 10 different group calls are required, 2-digit group num-
bers have to be dialled (0100 to 0189).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls / Zones
 Gr. no: Activate the desired checkbox to assign the respective subscriber to the corresponding
group.
 Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common
 Activate the checkbox 2-digit (00-89) if more than 10 groups are required.

 Automatic group call answer

The group call is answered like an All Call with TT. After start of waiting for the answer back with T
the searching subscriber is busy for all conversations except the answer with TT for a configurable
time (by default 30 seconds). The call can also be answered after this time has elapsed, as long as no
new group call or All Call has been initiated in the system.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Switch off times
 Answer back Group Call: In this field, the time for an answer back of a group call can be changed
(max. 1049 seconds or 17.4 minutes; 0 = switch-off time disabled, by default 60 seconds).

3.1/0923 271
 Group call, All Call Intercom Server Configuration

 Selective cancelling (during group call)

Each group call receiver can switch off reception during the group call with button X.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Multiple group calls simultaneously

It is possible to initiate a group call, while a previously initiated group call is waiting for an answer. For
this button “T” has to be dialled before the group number (e.g. “01T0” for group 0).

NOTE:
A normal group call (without pre-dialling T) can be answered with “TT” also by a subscriber which
is not configured as group call receiver.

ATTENTION:
 Only if the first group call was initiated with pre-dialling of T it is possible to initiate a second group
call.
 If the group call subscribers overlap, the group call initiated last is switched through.
 For group calls, which have been initiated in this manner, answer back with “TT” is possible only
from the respective receiver group.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Naming of group calls

For easy identification names can be advised to a group calls. When a group call is dialled the name of
the called group is displayed in dot-matrix display stations.

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Announcement
010 010
South Gates
South Gates

T-Answer Back
T-Answer Back X-Cancel
X-Cancel

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Group options
 Text: In this field, an up to 14-digit text can be entered for the respective group.

 Individual tones for group calls


A DSP tone can be selected for identification of group calls. For playback of the tones DSP stations are
required (see page 362).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Group options
 Tone: In this drop-down list, a DSP tone can be selected for the respective group call.
 In the drop-down list Tone for, select either the entry “Group Call and Ringing” or “group Call” for
the respective group.

272 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Group call, All Call

 Group calls with “push to talk” (PTT)


Feature PRO 800 4.0 – push to talk (PTT)
The speech channel of a group call will not be switched on before pushing T.

The group call starts with 01 and the group number: 010–019 (single digit group numbers for
max. 10 groups) or 0100–0189 (2-digit group numbers for max. 90 groups). Only one group
call can be initialised at the same time.

group calls with ‚push to talk‘

broadcast of group call

with answer back
TT
(hold) (release)

01 group call
number
gong T speak T broadcast of group call
without answer back

broadcast of group call

without answer back;
re-group call possible

X
cancel

Group calls with “push to talk” (PTT)

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls / Zones
 Gr. no: Activate the desired checkbox to assign the respective subscriber to the corresponding
group.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common
 Activate the checkbox 2-digit (00-89) if more than 10 groups are required.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Group options
 PTT mode: In this drop-down list, the following settings can be selected:
 Without Answer TT: The initiator of an All Call or group call is able to cancel the broadcast by re-
leasing button T; an answer isn‘t possible.
 With Answer TT: The initiator of an All Call or group call is able to cancel the broadcast by
releasing button T; an answer is possible by pressing TT.
 Cancel With X: The speech channel is active as long as the button T is pressed; an answer is not
possible. If T is released, the speech channel will be interrupted, not cancelled. By pressing X the
group call is cancelled.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Switch off times
 Answer back Group Call: In this field, the time for an answer back of a group call can be changed
(max. 1049 seconds or 17.4 minutes; 0 = switch-off time disabled, by default 60 seconds).

 No group calls during conversations

It there are multiple stations in one room it can make sense to continue a conversation because the
announcement can also be heard via the other stations:
 Per subscriber, it is possible to define that conversations not be interrupted.
 Per group, it is possible to define that conversations will be interrupted despite configured entitle-
ment.
 All Calls (with 00) always have top priority and interrupt running conversations.

3.1/0923 273
 Group call, All Call Intercom Server Configuration

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Alarm, Common
 Activate the checkbox No group call during call for the respective subscriber (at a configuration
without restart, the configuration will be applied at the next group call).
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Group options
 Activate the checkbox Group Call overlays conversation for the respective group.

NOTE:
The checkbox Group Call overlays conversation works only in combination with the checkbox
No group call during call.

 Feedback protection for All Call and group call

It is possible to reduce the volume of All Call/group call receivers in the same room to the feedback
protection volume. Therefore the announcement is still audible, but feedback is suppressed. For further
information, see page 164.

 PA synchronisation

If the Intercom Server is connected to a third-party PA system, it may be required to delay the playback
of a group call to ensure a free channel in the PA system. Therefore, the Intercom Server must receive
a “ready” ICX message to carry out the group call.
The required incoming ICX message is triggered in the same way as the dialling simulation of the T
button at the initiating subscriber.
Example: “00 40 00 NNNN 000A 82” (NNNN = call number of the initiating subscriber)

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Group options
 PA synchronisation: Activate this checkbox for the desired group to delay group calls until a “ready”
ICX message is received by the respective Intercom Server.

274 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Group call, All Call

 Group call with feedback protection


In order to prevent feedback at group calls it is possible to record group calls before broadcast to the
subscribers of a group. Three types of operation are possible for this function:
 Recording of group calls before broadcast (see page 276)
 Extended group call mode with 6 storable group calls (see page 276)
 Extended group call mode with 6 pre-recorded group calls (see page 276)

Requirements
The following subscriber cards are supported:
 G3-GET/G8-GET (for all analogue Intercom stations)
 G3-GED/G8-GED (for all A devices, e.g. EE 811A)
 G3-IP/G8-IP (for all devices using DSP900A, DSP900B and IoIP device firmware)

Operation
Recording of Group Calls before broadcast
Group Call initiator: C

T Broadcast of Group Call

with answer back
TT
Recording of
04 Group Call
number
Gong the Group Call
before broadcast
7 Broadcast of Group Call
without answer back

X
quit

Extended Group Call mode (6 storable Group Calls)

Group Call initiator: C

0 Playback of recorded
Group Call

T Re-record Group Call

T
Recording of
04 Group Call
number
Save position
(1-6)
the Group Call (hold)

7
(hold) before broadcast
Broadcast of Group Call

Automatic broadcast

X
*
of Group Call after
EQPƂIWTCDNGVKOG
quit
(recording is saved) #PUYGTDCEMYKVJ66EQPƂIWTCDNGRGTUWDUETKDGT

Extended Group Call mode (6 pre-recorded Group Calls)

0 Playback of recorded
Group Call

Playback of the
04 Group Call
number
Save position
(1-6)
pre-recorded
Group Call before
7 Broadcast of Group Call

broadcast

Automatic broadcast *
of Group Call after

X
EQPƂIWTCDNGVKOG

#PUYGTDCEMYKVJ66EQPƂIWTCDNGRGTUWDUETKDGT
quit

Group call with feedback protection

3.1/0923 275
 Group call, All Call Intercom Server Configuration

NOTE:
 Recordings are deleted at a restart of the Intercom Server.
 Maximum recording time: 120 seconds per subscriber card.

 Recording of group calls before broadcast


No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Extended group call mode (6 storable group calls)


Up to 6 group calls can be recorded and played back as often as desired.Required firmware for sub-
scriber cards: min. 3.3.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Group Calls with feedback protection
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add group call with feedback protection”.
 Activate the checkbox Extended mode to enable all following fields.
 Callback after Announcement: Activate this checkbox to enable the callback feature with TT after a
group call for the respective subscriber.
 Playback of recording before broadcast: Activate this checkbox to playback the recorded audio
before broadcast for the respective subscriber. The recording can be repeated if required.

 Extended group call mode (6 pre-recorded group calls)


Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Subscriber > Group Calls with feedback protection
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add group call with feedback protection”.
 Activate the checkbox Extended mode to enable all following fields.
 Playback message ID 1 to 6: In these fields. the ID of a pre-recorded audio can be entered, which is
used as group calls.
 Callback after Announcement: Activate this checkbox to enable the callback feature with TT after a
group call for the respective subscriber.
 Automatic broadcast after [s]: In this field, the time until automatic broadcast of the group call after
playback can be changed for the respective subscriber (by default 4 seconds).
 Overwrite pre-recorded audio: Activate this checkbox to allow overwriting of pre-recorded group
calls for the respective subscriber.

 Group calls with pre-recorded audio


A pre-recorded audio (see page 398) can be played back instead of the gong, before a group call is
initiated.

Advantages
 Compared with the pre-recorded audio with the ID “185” (see page 402; duration max. 2 seconds),
this pre-recorded audio does not have a maximum playback time. This pre-recorded audio will be
played until the end, after which the announcement can be started.
 The pre-recorded audio has only to be loaded at the subscriber, which is initiating the group call (see
page 402). Whereas the pre-recorded audio with ID “185” has to be loaded at each subscriber
(client), which is to receive the group call. Otherwise, only the gong is output at these subscribers.

276 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Group call, All Call

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Group options
 Pre-recorded audio ID: In this field, the ID of a pre-recorded audio can be entered, which is played
back of the group call gong.

NOTE:
For group calls, pre-configured audio files with the ID “1” to “239” can be used.

3.1/0923 277
 Conference Intercom Server Configuration

Conference

 Initiate a conference during a conversation

ATTENTION:
When using IP subscriber cards, restrictions possibly exist for this function (see page 520)!

 Feature PRO 800 6.2 and VirtuoSIS 7.0

 VirtuoSIS Start OpenDuplex® conference during a conversation
LICENCE SIS7U A conversation partner of any conversation can change the active conversation to an
OpenDuplex® conference in a pre-configured block by dialling the button 8 (i.e. this
VirtuoSIS conversation partner is initiator of the OpenDuplex® conference). Up to eight subscribers can
LICENCE PRO6U
be invited per OpenDuplex® conference. If no configuration block is set up, a Simplex
conference is started.

During a conversation between two subscribers, it is possible to invite any number of subscribers into
a Simplex conference or up to eight subscribers into an OpenDuplex® conference. The station must be
entitled to start a conference. Follow the instructions below to initiate a conference during a
conversation:
1. During a conversation, at your station press the button 8 to begin a conference.
2. A dial screen is displayed, the dial tone is audible at the initiator and the conversation is paused until
the conference is started by the initiator.
3. Enter the call number of the subscriber that participate the conference. If the dialling process is
cancelled prematurely, the conversation is switched into a conference with 2 participants.
4. Press the button 8 to start an OpenDuplex® conference or 8T to start a Simplex conference.
5. Repeat the steps 1 to 4 until all subscribers are invited to the conference.
6. By pressing the button X, the conference can be left prematurely by any conference participants (if
configured) or can be terminated by the initiator. For further information, see page 283.

Requirements
The following feature levels are required:
 Initiator Simplex conference:   Initiator OpenDuplex® conference: 
 Receiver Simplex conference:   Receiver OpenDuplex® conference: 
 The following subscribers can be used as initiator and receiver:
 Subscribers of IP, GED, GET and AUD cards
 SIP-C
 SIP-T
The following networks are supported for OpenDuplex® conferences:
 LAN networks (NET and LAN card)
 G8-CNET-W and G8-CNET-E1

Restrictions for OpenDuplex® conferences

 Max. one initiator and up to eight receivers are possible.
 A subscriber can only participate in one OpenDuplex® conference at the same time.
 All subscribers, which are located in the configured Intercom Server block, can be invited.
 When using an Intercom Server IS 300 and a server card G8-IP-32, only the first four subscribers can
be used.
 OpenDuplex® conferences are not available when networking with Intercom Servers GE 700, GE 200
or GE 700-UPG or for the subscriber card G8-TEL-4.
 Each subscriber must support the OpenDuplex® function as initiator or receiver. Analogue subscrib-
ers must use switched Duplex.

278 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Conference

Configuration CCT 800 (simplex conference)

1. Go to: Subscriber > Predefined conferences > tab General
2. In the drop-down list Initiate Conference during conversation, select the Simplex conference (option
Simplex (8T)) that be initiated by the respective subscriber.

Configuration CCT 800 (OpenDuplex® conference)

1. Go to: Intercom Server > General Settings > tab General
2. In the fields Configuration block or Additional Blocks, enter the Intercom Server blocks in which the
OpenDuplex® conference is to be started. The block number cannot be “00”.
3. Go to: Subscriber > Predefined conferences > tab General
4. In the drop-down list Initiate Conference during conversation, select the OpenDuplex® conference
with the Intercom server block number (e.g. option OpenDuplex - Block B0) that be initiated by the
respective subscriber.

 Initiate a conference with pre-configured participants

ATTENTION:
When using IP subscriber cards, restrictions may exist for this function (see page 520)!

Up to 40 Simplex or OpenDuplex® conferences can be pre-configured with conference participants

(Simplex conference with any number of subscribers and OpenDuplex® conferences with up to eight
subscribers). Optional, additional subscribers can be invited to an active conference by the initiator.
The following steps are required to start a conference:

Initiate a Simplex conference

Follow the instructions below to initiate a Simplex conference:
1. Enter the code 7T, followed by the conference channel (e.g. 7T10 to initiate a Simplex
conference on conference channel 10). The station must be entitled to start a Simplex conference on
the dialled conference number. For information about 2-digit conference channel numbers, see
page 280.
2. The Simplex conference is initiated automatically on the respective conference channel with the
initiator and all configured participants.
3. A conference participant can press the button T to talk into the channel. The permission to talk into
depends on the configuration of the conference participants.
4. By pressing the button X, the conference can be left prematurely by any conference participants (for
configuration details, see page 283) or can be terminated by the initiator.

Initiate an OpenDuplex® conference

 Follow the instructions below to initiate an OpenDuplex conference:
1. Enter the code 7TT, followed by the conference channel (e.g. 7TT09 to initiate an
OpenDuplex® conference on conference channel 9). This station must be entitled to start an
OpenDuplex® conference on the dialled conference number. For information about 2-digit
conference channel numbers, see page 280.
2. The OpenDuplex conference is initiated automatically on the respective conference channel with the
initiator and all configured participants.

NOTE:
OpenDuplex® conferences interrupt simplex conferences and active conversations. In case a sta-
tion was participating in a simplex conference when it is invited to an OpenDuplex® conference, the
simplex-conference is resumed after the other ends.

3.1/0923 279
 Conference Intercom Server Configuration

Configuration CCT 800

NOTE:
The channels configured for a conference cannot be used for radio conferences (e.g. conferences
7T1, 7T2 and 7T3 configured → the channels 6T1 to 6T3 cannot be used).

 Go to: Subscriber > Predefined conferences > tab 7T1 – 7T8 or Subscriber > Predefined
conferences > tab 7T9 – 7T40
 7T1 Permission to initiate - 7T8 Permission to initiate: Activate this checkbox for the desired sub-
scribers, which be authorised to initiate a conference on the respective channel.
 7T1 Participants - 7T8 Participants: Activate this checkbox for each subscriber, which be authorised
to attend the respective conference channels.
 7T9 Participants - 7T40 Participants: Activate this checkbox for each subscriber, which be authorised
to initiate and attend the respective conference channels.
 Optional: To activate 2-digit conference channel numbers (09 to 40), to: Intercom Server - Block
XX > General > tab Conference
 Activate 2-digit dialling (6T01-6T64, 7T01-7T40).
With this option inactive, single-digit conference channel numbers 1-8 can be used. With this option
active, all conference channel numbers must be entered with two digits (e.g. 01, 02).
 Optional: Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Conference
 Activate the checkbox Digital receivers only (7T conference) to allow exclusively digital receivers
without a G2/G7-GEK card. If analogue subscribers are in the system, which do not receive the con-
ference, the conference is not switched through without a G2/G7-GEK card.

 Extension of an existing conference

NOTE:
An upgrade licence Lx-PRO6U and PRO 800 6.1 is required for the extension of an existing
OpenDuplex conference.

NOTE:
When extending an existing conference, its conversation mode (Simplex or OpenDuplex®) must
match the configuration, i.e. all participants must be configured for the same mode in Initiate Con-
ference during conversation (see above).
If an attempt is made to extend an OpenDuplex® conference while only a simplex conference is
configured for the initiator, a new simplex conference is created between the initiator and the
receiver. The initiator is switched to the new simplex conference while the previous OpenDuplex®
conference continues for the other participants.

Follow the instructions below to initiate a simplex conference:

1. At the station of the initiator press the button 8 to initiate a conference in OpenDuplex® or Simplex.
2. The dial tone is audible at the station and the initiator leaves the conference during the call number
entry (the remaining participants continue the conference).
3. Enter the call number of the subscriber that participate at the conference. If an error occurs during
dialling or the dial process is cancelled prematurely, the initiator rejoins the conference.
4. To add the subscriber to the conference press the button 8T for Simplex or 8 for OpenDuplex®.
Press the button X to cancel the process. The initiator rejoins the conference.

Requirements
The following feature levels are required:
 Initiator Simplex conference:   Initiator OpenDuplex® conference: 
 Receiver Simplex conference:   Receiver OpenDuplex® conference: 

280 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Conference

The following networks are supported for OpenDuplex® conferences:

 LAN networks (NET and LAN card)
 G8-CNET-W and G8-CNET-E1

 Party line

With the party line, an OpenDuplex® conference can be started, on which entitled subscribers are able
to switch on without the invitation of the initiator for a configurable time. This allows e.g. on-the-fly
channel switching. The party line is started without any pre-configured participants (except for initia-
tor) and the initiator cannot invite any other subscribers. The following steps are required to start a
party line:
 At the station, press the button sequence 7TT and the conference channel (e.g. 7TT1 (1-digit)
or 7TT01 (2-digits) for party line 1), which is entitled to initiate the party line on the respective
conference channel (initiator). For information about 2-digit conference channel numbers, see
page 280.

NOTE:
Only a limited number of party lines are available per Intercom Server block (number of party lines
configurable). Conferences with the lowest conference channel numbers are changed automatically
into party lines in ascending order (e.g. with pre-configured conference channels 7T1 to 7T9 and
four possible party lines, the conference channels 7T1 to 7T4 are changed automatically to party
lines.

 The party line is started automatically on the respective conference channel with the initiator.
 Further subscribers can join this party line by dialling the button sequence 7TT, followed by the
same conference channel (e.g. 7TT1 (1-digit) or 7TT01 (2-digits) for party line 1).
 By pressing the button X, the party line can be left prematurely by party line participants. The party
line cannot be cancelled by the initiator, its is cancelled when all participants have left the party line.

Restrictions for party lines

 Max. one initiator and up to eight receivers are possible.
 A subscriber can only participate in one OpenDuplex® conference at the same time.
 All subscribers, which are located in the configured Intercom Server block, can be invited.
 When using an Intercom Server IS 300 and a server card G8-IP-32, only the first four subscribers can
be used.
 OpenDuplex® conferences are not available when networking with Intercom Servers GE 700, GE 200
or GE 700-UPG or for the subscriber card G8-TEL-4.
 The following subscribers can be used as initiator and receiver of OpenDuplex® conferences:
 Subscribers of IP, GED, GET and AUD cards
 SIP-C
 SIP-T
 Each subscriber must support the OpenDuplex® function as initiator or receiver of OpenDuplex®
conferences. Analogue subscribers must use switched Duplex.

Configuration CCT 800

NOTE:
The channels configured for a conference cannot be used for radio conferences (e.g. conferences
7T1, 7T2 and 7T3 configured → the channels 6T1 to 6T3 cannot be used).

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Conference

 In the field Number of channels, enter the maximum number of party line conferences that can be
executed simultaneously in the respective Intercom Server block.

3.1/0923 281
Conference Intercom Server Configuration

 Switch off time: In this field, the switch off time can be changed, after which each party line partici-
pant is removed from the respective party line (applies also for the initiator; max. 17 minutes, by de-
fault 60 seconds).
 Go to: Subscriber > Predefined conferences > tab 7T1 – 7T8 or Subscriber > Predefined
conferences > tab 7T9 – 7T40
 7T1 Permission to initiate - 7T8 Permission to initiate: Activate this checkbox for the desired sub-
scribers, which be authorised to switch to a party line on the respective channel.
 7T9 Participants - 7T40 Participants: Activate this checkbox for each subscriber, which be authorised
to switch to a party line on the respective conference channels. For information about 2-digit confer-
ence channel numbers, see page 280.

NOTE:
All subscribers can initiate a party line if they are entitled to switch on this party line.

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab General

 In the drop-down list Duplex mode, select either the entry “OpenDuplex®” or “OpenDuplex® both”
for all party line participants. Further information can be found on page 250.

ATTENTION:
If one or more party line participants are located on an IP32 card, consider the supplementary
configuration on page 424!

282 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Conference

Conference functions

Conference participants
Configuration CCT 800 (only for OpenDuplex conferences)
 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab General
 In the drop-down list Duplex mode, select either the entry “OpenDuplex®” or “OpenDuplex® both”
for all conference participants (see page 250).

Configuration CCT 800 (only for Simplex conferences)

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Conference
 Disconnection with [X]: Activate this checkbox so that any subscriber can leave the conference by
pressing the button X. If this checkbox is deactivated, the conference cannot be left by single
subscribers until the initiator cancel the conference.
 Reception display: Activate this checkbox to indicate the description of the talking subscriber in the
display of the conference participants.
 In the section Voice control (PTT), select the desired radio button for the function of the button T.
The following functions are available:
 Hold T-key: Press and hold the button T to talk into and release to listen.
 Tab T-key: Press the button T to talk into until another conference participant presses the button
T.

NOTE:
The functionality differs for SIP-C- and SIP-T-stations, if Hold T-Key is configured: Press T-key once
to talk and press T-key again to listen.

 Optional: In the field Max. speaking time, the maximum speech time can be changed (max. 15 min-
utes, 0 = no time limit). When this time has been exceeded, the conference initiator is switched
through automatically.

 Attendant contact for pre-configured conferences

For each receiver of a pre-configured conference, an attendant contact can be configured that is closed
as long as the subscriber attends the conference (see page 241).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add attendant contact”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab Call no./Function
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacities can be found on page 549!

 Click on the button Configure Functions.

 Right-click and select “Add call no. / function”.
 Call no./Function: In this field, the code of the pre-configured conference can be entered (e.g. “7T1”).
With the code “7T” it is possible activate the respective attendant contact for all participants of con-
ferences.
 Click on the button Accept to save the changes.

3.1/0923 283
 Conference Intercom Server Configuration

 No busy tone while talking into pre-configured conferences

The busy tone can be deactivated, which is switched on at the subscriber when trying to talk into a
channel while an other subscriber is already talking into by pressing the button T.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Talk into, Priority call, call transfer, Recall Request
 Activate the checkbox No busy tone at talk in (conference) for the respective subscriber.

NOTE:
This function is only valid if the radio button Hold T-key is selected at Intercom Server - Block
XX > General > tab Conference (see page 283).

 Manual switch to active pre-configured conferences

(simplex only)
A subscriber can switch to an active conference with a direct dialling code.

Configuration CCT 800 (switch to any active conference)

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “6TTT” for the respective subscriber.

ATTENTION:
 To be able to participate to a conference, the group number must be activated at Subscriber >
Predefined conferences > tab 7T1 – 7T8 or Subscriber > Predefined conferences > tab
7T9 – 7T40. For information about 2-digit conference channel numbers, see page 280.
 Does not work while multiple conferences are active!
 In networked systems, the block number for conferences has to be configured properly to reach
the feeding!

Configuration CCT 800 (switch to certain conference)

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “6T” and the channel number of the 7T con-
ference for the respective subscriber (e.g. “6T03” for switching to 7T conference “03”).

ATTENTION:
 Initiator and participants has to be located within the same Intercom Server!
 For information about 2-digit conference channel numbers, see page 280.

 Display text for pre-configured conferences


A display text can be configured for each pre-configured conference, which is shown in the display of
all conference participants with dot-matrix display.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Predefined conference options
 Text: In this field, an up to 14-digit text can be entered for the respective pre-configured conference.

284 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Conference

 Pre-recorded audio for pre-configured Simplex conferences


Before initiation of a pre-configured Simplex conference, a pre-recorded audio file can be played back
at the conference participants as identification.

NOTE: Pre-recorded audio must be loaded

The pre-recorded audio file must only be downloaded at the initiator of the pre-configured Simplex
conference.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Predefined conference options
 Pre-recorded audio ID: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be entered, which is played
back before the initiation of a pre-configured Simplex conference. Further information about upload-
ing a pre-recorded audio can be found on page 398.

 Priority levels for pre-configured Simplex conferences

Priority levels can be configured for pre-configured Simplex conferences that allow to override various
receiver states in order to put the conference call through. In case one of the conference participants
performs one of the reception functions listed below, the overriding capacity of an incoming confer-
ence depends on its priority level. If the conference call has a higher priority level than the reception
function of the other conference participants, the conference call will be put through automatically.
However, the original speech channel to the overwritten reception functions will be enabled automat-
ically once the subscriber leaves the conference. The speech channel of the conference participant will
be closed from a priority level 8 or 9. The conference is faded as described in the table below:
Priority levels
Reception option Fading: no Fading: yes
Conversation 1–2 3–9
All call initiator 1–6 7–9
All call receiver 1–4 5–9
Waiting for TT 1 2–9
Ringing 1 2–9
Dial tone 1–2 3–9
Keyboard is blocked 1–2 3–9
Busy 1–2 3–9

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Conference
 Activate the checkbox Configurable priority for 7T conferences.
 Go to: Subscriber > Predefined conferences > tab General
 Optional: In the drop-down list Priority for intrusion, a permanent priority level can be selected for
the intrusion subscriber (“Participants” is equal to priority level 0).

Initiate Simplex conference with any priority level

Follow the instructions below to initiate a pre-configured Simplex conference with any priority level:
1. Enter the code 7T, followed by the priority level and the conference channel (e.g. 7T810 to
initiate a Simplex conference with priority level 8 on conference channel 10).

NOTE: Input of priority level will not be shown

The input of the priority level will not be shown on the display of the Intercom station.

2. The Simplex conference will be initiated automatically.

3.1/0923 285
 Conference Intercom Server Configuration

 Switch-off time for pre-configured conferences

A switch-off time can be configured for pre-configured conferences, after which active conferences are
cancelled automatically.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Conference
 Switch off time 7T conference: In this field, the switch off time for pre-configured conferences can
be entered.
 Switch off time 7TT conference: In this field, the switch off time for OpenDuplex® conferences can
be entered.

286 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Music, radio conference

Music, radio conference

 Feed-in of audio signals

The following types of feeding-in audio are possible:
 Feed in via music input (see page 287)
 Feed in via analogue subscriber (see page 287)
 Feed in via digital subscriber (see page 287)
 Feed in via G8-AUD4 (see page 288)
 Feed in via ST801 (see page 288)

Feed in via music input (music only)

Via the music input (GE300: terminals “MUSIC” on G3-GEM, GE800 terminals “MU1” and “MU2” on
G8A-GEN of the 1st housing) it is possible to feed-in an audio signal (e.g. background music) into the
Intercom system.

 Feed in via analogue subscribers


Up to 8 audio signals can be fed in each over the terminals A and B of the first subscriber of a
G3/G8-GET-4D with 0 dB at 600 Ohm (turn the switch on the subscriber card). For the remaining
analogue subscribers the signal has to be adjusted with an external pre-amplifier (e.g. ST801; see
page 288).

ATTENTION:
For the feed-in, use a free subscriber of a G3/G8-GET-4D card. The use of a G3/G8-TEL subscriber is
not supported.

 Feed in via digital subscribers

GE 300/GE 800 with G3-GED-4/G8-GED-4D and Intercom station
Up to 40 additional music programs can be fed in over digital (2-wire) Intercom PCBs, either with 7 kHz
or with 3.5 kHz (feed in with 3.5 kHz requires only half of the audio channels). For each music program
an ECCT 80008 is connected to any subscriber of a G3-GED-4D/G8-GED-4D, the music is fed in over the
terminals “MIC+” and “MIC-” of the ET808.
If both Music and Radio Conference are used, it is not possible to use all 40 music channels and all 40
radio channels. The following combinations are possible:
Radio channels Music channels
1 – 40 1–8
1 – 32 1 – 32
1 – 24 1 – 40

ATTENTION:
The numbers of the channels are the deciding factor, not the amount!

3.1/0923 287
 Music, radio conference Intercom Server Configuration

 Feed in via “G8-AUD4”

With the digital connection- and recording card it is possible to optimally feed-in audio signals into the
Intercom system. All audio inputs and outputs have a galvanic separation, electronic level adaptation
as well as a graphic equalizer for correction of the sound quality.

NOTE:
 For further information about the features and configuration of the G8-AUD4 card, see the product
manual “G8-AUD4”.
 Audio feed-in is also possible with a Gx-DSP IAX. For further information, see the product manual
“Gx-IAX”.

 Feed in via “ST801”


With the ST801 audio interface it is possible to feed-in frequency optimized audio signals into the
Intercom system. Connection of one channel (IN and OUT) to an Intercom subscriber (by default, AB-
CD) in analogue 4-wire technology.

NOTE:
For further information about the features and configuration of the ST801, see the product manual
“Audiocom”.

Precautions
 The subscribers used for feed in cannot be used for Intercom functions any more.

ATTENTION:
Configured music programs require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

 If a pre-configured conference (e.g. “7T1”; see page 279) is already configured, the corresponding
radio conference (“6T1”) cannot be configured any more.

NOTE:
For the required audio channels, see the product manuals “GE800” and “GE300”.

288 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Music, radio conference

Configuration of feed-in (music and radio)

ATTENTION:
If radio conferences 6T41 to 6T48 are used, restrictions apply (see page 548)!

 Feed-in of music
Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Music
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Feed-in of music”.
 Channel (8 channels): In this drop-down list, the program number can be selected. Channel 1 is fed
in at the input “MUSIC” of the 1st housing in standard.
 Channel (40 channels): In this drop-down list, the desired channel can be selected. Activate the
checkbox Music 2-digit dialling (4T01-4T40) at Intercom Server - Block XX> General > tab Com-
mon to enable 2-digit dialling.
 Receiver: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server block can be selected for reception.
 ICX-message: Activate this checkbox to send ICX messages for this channel.
 Digital receivers only (only for Intercom Server GE200/GE700): Activate this checkbox to allow digi-
tal receivers without the need for a G2/G7-GEK card. If analogue subscribers are in the system, which
do not receive the conference, the conference is not switched through without a G2/G7-GEK card.
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common
 Audio: In this drop-down list, the audio quality can be selected for the respected feed-in.

 Radio conference feed-in, “PTT” button

For control of the PTT button, per channel a relay (on G1-GEM/G3-GEM/G8-GEN, Gx-16A or Gx-8E8A)
can be configured, which is activated while talking into the radio channel.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Radio conference
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Feed-in of radio conference”.
 Channel (9 channels): In this drop-down list, the program number can be selected. Channel 1 is fed
in at the input “MUSIC” of the 1st housing in standard.
 Channel (64 channels): In this drop-down list, the desired channel can be selected. Activate the
checkbox 2-digit dialling (6T01-6T64, 7T01-7T40) at Intercom Server - Block XX >
General > tab Conference to enable 2-digit dialling.
 Authorisation channel: In this drop-down list, the authorisation channel can be selected. By default,
the authorisation channel of channel 1 to 48 is the selected radio channel and of channel 49 to 64 the
channel 1.
 Relay PTT-button: In this drop-down list, an output can be selected for PTT control.
 Receiver: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server block can be selected for reception.
 ICX-message: Activate this checkbox to send ICX messages for this channel.
 Digital receivers only (only for Intercom Server GE200/GE700): Activate this checkbox to allow digi-
tal receivers without the need for a G2/G7-GEK card. If analogue subscribers are in the system, which
do not receive the conference, the conference is not switched through without a G2/G7-GEK card.
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common
 Audio: In this drop-down list, the audio quality can be selected for the respected feed-in.

3.1/0923 289
 Music, radio conference Intercom Server Configuration

Reception of music programs (max. 40 channels)

 Reception of music
There are multiple ways to feed-in background music into the Intercom system (see page 287). The
music is muted during e.g. conversations or All Calls.

Operation at the station

 9 music channels: Music is switched on with button sequence 4T1 to 4T9 and off with button
sequence 4T0 (or pressing button X for one second).
 40 music channels: Music is switched on with button sequence 4T01 to 4T40 and off with
button sequence 4TX (or pressing button X for one second).
 While the music is switched on, the volume can be changed with the buttons D and E (this volume
is stored also after the Intercom Server is switched off).

At stations with dot-matrix display reception of music is indicated in the display (see screenshot
below). Display indication can be configured separately for subscribers with a dot-matrix display.

It can also be configured for certain subscribers that the music is switched on automatically after start
of the system.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Music
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Feed-in of music”.
 Display indication: Activate this checkbox to indicate the text in the field Display text EE311A/EE411
and Display text EE811 & camera at the respective feed-in while listening to the music channel.
 Go to: Subscriber > Receiver Music / Radio conference
 Switch Music on at startup: In this drop-down list, the channel can be selected for the respective
subscriber, to which a music program be switched after the start of the Intercom Server.

 Attendant contact for reception of music

For each receiver of a certain music program (audio signal) an attendant contact can be configured.
The relay is closed as long as the subscriber receives this music program.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add attendant contact”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab Call no./Function
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

290 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Music, radio conference

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

 Click on the button Configure Functions.

 Right-click and select “Add call no. / function”.
 Call no./Function: In this field, the code of the pre-configured conference can be entered (e.g. “4T2”).
 Click on the button Accept to save the changes.

NOTE:
Several outputs can be configured for the same subscriber with either the same or different codes.

 Music step function with one button

With a direct dialling code it is possible to step through a definable range of music channels with one
button. It is also possible to define if music is to be switched off between the cycles.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “XX4TTABC” for the respective subscribers.
 A: Lowest channel number
 B: Highest channel number
 C: 0 / 1: (0 = Including 4T0, 1 = Without 4T0)

NOTE:
Does not function with 2-digit music channels.

Example: 4 = XX4TT240
1. Press button 4: music channel 2 is switched on (begin of cycle).
2. Press button 4 again: music channel 3 is switched on.
3. Press button 4 again: music channel 4 is switched on.
4. Press button 4 again: music is switched off.
5. Press button 4 again: music channel 2 is switched on (begin of cycle).

3.1/0923 291
 Music, radio conference Intercom Server Configuration

Reception radio conference

 An Intercom station can operate up to 64 different radio channels. Depending on the entitlements, the
station can select each of these channels, listen to the channel and talk into the channel. The
entitlements for listening and for talking can be configured selectively for each station and for each radio
channel. There are multiple ways to feed-in radio channels into the Intercom system (see page 287).

ATTENTION:
When using IP subscriber cards, restrictions possibly exist for this function (see page 520)!

 Participant radio conference (listen only)

While listening to a radio channel a subscriber can make calls or receive calls as usual. After the
conversation is finished, the radio channel is switched on again. It is also possible to configure that a
subscriber is busy for incoming conversations while listening to a radio channel, except for All Calls
and group calls which are received in any way.
The different radio channels can be switched on with buttons 6T and the number of the radio channel,
e.g. 6T4 for the 4th radio channel or 4T23 for the 23th radio channel. The entitlement for listening
to a radio channel has to be configured selectively for each channel and for each Intercom station.
Listening to a radio channel can be switched off with button sequence 6T0 or, with special con-
figuration, by pressing button X for at least one second.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Receiver Music / Radio conference > tab Switch on with 6TX
 Activate the desired checkboxes to assign the respective subscriber to the corresponding
conferences.
 Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Radio conference
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Feed-in of radio conference”.
 Busy during reception: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, which is feeding in the
radio conference. Subscribers, which listen to this channel are occupied for calls during reception
(applies for all subscribers, which are listening to this channel).
 Disconnection with [X]: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, which is feeding in the
radio conference. The reception can be cancelled by pressing button X (applies for all subscribers,
which are listening to this channel).

 Participant radio conference (listen only; fixed connection to a

channel)
Certain Intercom stations can be configured to switch to a certain radio channel automatically when
the Intercom Server is switched on.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Receiver Music / Radio conference > tab Switch radio conference on
at startup
 Activate the desired checkboxes to connect the corresponding radio channels to the respective
subscriber at start-up.
 Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Radio conference
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Feed-in of radio conference”.
 Busy during reception: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, which is feeding in the
radio conference. Subscribers, which listen to this channel are occupied for calls during reception.
 Disconnection with [X]: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, which is feeding in the
radio conference. The reception can be cancelled by pressing button X (applies for all subscribers,
which are listening to this channel).

292 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Music, radio conference

 Participant radio conference (listen and speak)

The entitlement for talking into a radio channel can be configured selectively for each subscriber and
radio channel. For talking, first the subscriber has to be switched to the mode “Listening” (6T and the
channel number). Then it is possible to talk into the channel with button T. The red lamp of the station
is switched on while talking into the channel. There are two (configurable) possibilities for talking:
 The subscriber talks into the radio channel as long as he presses button T, or until the configured
time for talking exceeds. Then the station is switched back to mode “Listening” again.
 The subscriber shortly presses button T and then can talk until another subscriber shortly presses
button T, or until the configured maximum time for talking exceeds.
All other stations connected to this radio channel receive the subscriber, who is talking into the
channel. After talking, the subscriber stays busy for incoming conversations. This time can be con-
figured (max. 255 seconds). If the station be free immediately after talking, this time delay can be
cancelled with button X.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Receiver Music / Radio conference > tab Entitlement to talk into 6TX
 Activate the desired checkboxes to allow the respective subscriber to talk into the corresponding
conference.
 Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Radio conference
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Feed-in of radio conference”.
 Busy time [s]: In this field, the time of busy subscriber after talking into this radio channel can be
changed (max. 255 seconds). This time is valid for all subscribers talking into this radio channel (by
default 10 seconds).
 Maximum talk time: In this field, the maximum time for talking into this radio channel can be
changed (max. 15 minutes; 0 = no time restriction). This time is valid for all subscribers talking into
this radio channel (by default 60 seconds).
 Mode T-key: In this drop-down list, the function of the T button can be selected (valid for all
subscribers talking into this radio channel). The following functions are available:
 Hold: The T button works as “press to talk, release to listen” button.
 Tab: The subscriber shortly presses button T and then can talk until another subscriber shortly
presses button T, or until the configured time for talking exceeds.
 Go to: Subscriber > Predefined conferences
 Priority for intrusion: In this drop-down list, a priority can be selected for the respective subscriber
for talking into the radio channel. The subscriber with the highest priority is switched through.

NOTE:
This function is only available for the mode “hold T-key” in the drop-down list Voice control
(PTT) at Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Conference (see page 283).

 Attendant contact for participant radio conference

For each participant and for each radio channel an attendant contact can be configured. The relay is
closed, as long as the subscriber receives this radio channel.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add attendant contact”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab Call no./Function
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

3.1/0923 293
 Music, radio conference Intercom Server Configuration

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

 Click on the button Configure Functions.

 Right-click and select “Add call no. / function”.
 Call no./Function: In this field, the code of the radio channel can be entered(e.g. “6T1” or “6T2”).
 Click on the button Accept to save the changes.

NOTE:
Several outputs can be configured for the same subscriber with either the same or different codes.

Call relay for radio


 While listening to a radio conference it is possible to activate a relay by pressing T and after that
pressing button 1to 8. This can be used to control a pilot tone. The configuration of the relay is done at
the subscriber feeding-in with an attendant contact for the fictional call number T1 to T8. If the station
fails during key-press or if the button is pressed permanently, the relay automatically switches off after
15 seconds.

Configuration CCT 800

 An attendant contact has to be configured for the call number “T1” to “T8”of the respective sub-
scriber, which feeds-in the radio channel is configured (see page 241).
 Go to: Subscriber > Receiver Music / Radio conference > tab Entitlement to talk into 6TX
 Activate the desired checkboxes to allow the respective subscriber to talk into the corresponding
conference.
 Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Radio conference
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Feed-in of radio conference”.
 After pressing the T button the pilot tone can be activated with the buttons “1” to “8” for a con-
figurable time. This time can be set in the field Busy time [s] on page 293 (by default 10 seconds).

 Save reception status

With software from Pro 4.6 on it can be defined that the reception status of the subscribers is stored
when the Intercom Server is switched off. If e.g. a subscriber listens to the 6T2 channel before the
Intercom Server is switched off, he will be automatically switched to this channel again as soon as the
Intercom Server is switched on.

NOTE:
This feature does not apply to sending a configuration, i.e. after sending the configuration the
definitions at “Subscriber”-“Receiver Music / Radio conference” becomes active.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Radio conference
 Save Reception State: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, which is feeding in the
radio conference (applies for all subscribers, which receives this channel).

ATTENTION:
The reception status of channels 6T41to 6T48 cannot be restored after a restart of the Intercom
Server!

294 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Music, radio conference

Restricted features while listening

While a station is listening to a radio channel, button T is reserved for talking, so all features activated
with T are not available during this time (e.g. answering an All Call). In order to perform such features,
first the radio channel has to be left with 6T0 and afterwards switched on again. These restrictions
are not valid for stations that are entitled only for listening to a radio channel.

 Indication of the selected radio channel in the display

The display text of the subscriber that feeds in the AF, is indicated in the display of the participant while
listening.

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Radio
6T1
Channel 1
Channel 1
Listen

T-Talk d-Menu

EE311A/EE411

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Radio conference
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Feed-in of music”.
 Display indication: Activate this checkbox to indicate the text in the field Display text EE311A/EE411
and Display text EE811 & camera at the respective subscriber. If this checkbox is deactivated, the
reception of the radio channel is displayed for 10 seconds and switches back to the idle display (au-
dio remains switched through).

3.1/0923 295
 Music, radio conference Intercom Server Configuration

 Audio mixing
Intercom stations can listen to up to 8 radio channels simultaneously. The radio channels are switched
on as usual, with 6T and the number of the channel.

ATTENTION:
Audio Mixing is NOT possible with 16 kHz feed-in! If a 16 kHz feed-in subscriber is dialled the error
tone is audible!

It is possible to switch on more than 8 channels, but only the last 8 channels can be heard (or the 8
channels with highest priority or channels with active Squelch input).
The display jumps to mix mode. The 8 channels can now be heard simultaneously.
 At WS stations the 3 channels that were selected last are shown in the display (or the 4 channels with
highest priority, or channels with active Squelch input).
 At a station EE 811 the 4 channels that were selected last are shown in the display (or the 4 channels
with highest priority, or channels with active Squelch input).
 At a station EE 311 the channel that was selected last (or the channel with highest priority, or a
channel with active Squelch input) is shown with points at the bottom.

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display EE 311A/EE 411

Radio confer. Radio confer.

6T1 Listen
6T1 Listen Funkconfer.
Radio 6T1
Radio confer. 6T2 Listen
6T2 Listen Radio confer.
6T3 Listen
Radio confer. Radio confer.
6T3 Listen 6T4 Listen

With the arrow buttons E and D, the desired channel can be selected. With T it is possible to talk
directly into the selected channel.
With F the selected channel can be listened to separately (display indication of “single mode” like
when switching on a single channel, see page 295). The reception of this single channel stays active for
a configurable time, then “mix mode” is activated again.
A single channel can be switched off by selecting it in mix mode and pressing button X for one second.
With 6T0 all channels are switched off.

Volume
The volume for the radio channels is set with the arrow buttons E and D and saved with F. The
settings stay active until reception is cancelled with “6T0”. By default, the configured volume in the
field Radio active at Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab 6T Feedback, Radio, Headset is used.
 Volume for Single Mode: Select a channel with F; the display has to be in single mode.
 Volume for Mix Mode: The display has to be in mix mode and no channel may be selected (selection
can be deactivated with X and activated with F).

NOTE:
Settings of the mix mode volume influence the single mode volumes.

Priority
Each radio channel can be given a priority, channels with high priority are sent to the front of the list in
Mix-Mode.

296 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Music, radio conference

Squelch input
Among channels with equal priority a radio channel with active squelch input (contact from the radio
system when the channel is active) is sent to the front of the list in mix mode.

Configuration CCT 800

The radio conferences are defined as described at radio conferences (see page 289), with all necessary
definitions (cancel with X or talking into a channel).
 Go to: Subscriber > Receiver Music / Radio conference > tab Common
 Reception of multiple radio conferences: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber to lis-
ten to several channels simultaneously.
 Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Radio conference
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Feed-in of radio conference”.
 Mixing Priority: In this drop-down list, a priority can be selected for the respective radio channel of
a subscriber.
 Squelch-time [s]: In this field, a time can be entered, for which the radio channel stays active after
the squelch input turns inactive (max. 255 seconds).
 Squelch-Input: In this drop-down list, the input can be selected, to which the squelch output of the
radio system is connected.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Conference
 Selective reception [s]: In this field, the time for listening to a single channel can be changed (max.
255 seconds; 0 = selective reception is switched off by pressing the button X (the station is busy
during this time), by default 4 seconds).
 Deselection channel after: In this field, the time of an automatic channel de-selection can be changed
(max. 255 seconds, by default 125 seconds).
 Immediate mix function: Activate this checkbox to switch immediately to the mix function.

3.1/0923 297
 Public address (PA) Intercom Server Configuration

Public address (PA)

 PA announcements

What are PA announcements?
PA announcements are group calls with special PA functions for public address (PA) systems. These
PA announcements can be triggered either via an ICX message or a direct dialling module. The stand-
ard group calls “60” to “89” correspond to the PA zones “1” to “30”.

Priority of PA announcements
Every PA announcement has a configurable priority (“01” to “99”). For receivers and triggers in the
same PA zone, this priority determines whether the PA announcement will be cross-faded when two
or more PA announcements are triggered simultaneously. A cross-faded PA announcement will not be
heard by a receiver.

Trigger of a PA announcement
 Two or more PA announcements can be simultaneously triggered without cross-fades, independent-
ly of the priority for different PA zones.
 When a PA announcement is being broadcast and a second announcement is triggered with a lower
priority in the same or overlapping PA zone, the trigger of the second announcement hears a busy
tone and must wait for the first announcement to finish. The first announcement cross-fades the sec-
ond one.
 When a PA announcement is being broadcast and a second PA announcement is triggered with a
higher priority in the same or overlapping PA zone, the first PA announcement will be cross-faded.
The first PA announcement will not be cancelled and will be broadcast again, after the second PA
announcement is finished. The trigger of the cross-faded PA announcement does not receive any au-
dible or visual notification during the active cross-fade.

Receiver of a PA announcement
 Any announcement with a priority higher than an already-active announcement will be cross-faded
at the receiver.
Example: At the receiver, a PA announcement with the priority “21” cross-fades any PA
announcements (in the same zone) with priorities “1” through “20” but will not cross-fade any PA
announcement with priorities “21” to “99”.

Receiving of PA announcements
Configuration CCT 800 (for PA announcement receiver)
 Go to: Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls / Zones > tab Group 60-69 / Zones,
Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls / Zones > tab Group 70-79 / Zones,
or Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls / Zones > tab Group 80-89 / Zones
All Call / group call
Group number 0–9 10 – 19 20 – 29 30 – 39 40 – 49 50 – 59 60 – 69 70 – 79 80 – 89

PA zone
Zone number 01 – 10 11 – 20 21 – 30

298 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Public address (PA)

 Group 60 Zone 1 to Group 89 Zone 30: Activate the desired checkboxes to assign the respective sub-
scriber as a PA announcement receiver to the corresponding PA zones.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common
 Activate the checkbox 2 digit (00-89).

 Triggering of PA announcements

PA announcements can be triggered and cancelled either via ICX messages or a direct dialling module
(see page 224):
Studio EE 380A Intercom station

Device

Variable PA announcement Fix defined PA announcements

Functions Trigger PA announcements via direct
Deselection/Selection of PA zones
dialling or F2 menu
Areas with many PA zones Few PA announcements
Area of
operations PA announcement always to the
Many PA announcements to different PA zones
same PA zones

NOTE:
 Triggering a PA announcement is the same as triggering a group call. It is possible to broadcast single
PA announcements or combinations of PA announcements.
 For further information about the configuration of ICX messages to trigger or cancel a PA announce-
ment, see the product manual “ICX Protocol”.

3.1/0923 299
 Public address (PA) Intercom Server Configuration

 PA coupling

Announcements to different loudspeaker circuits can be carried out via a PA system connected to the
Intercom Server. The AF-coupling of the PA system is done over the loudspeaker output of a 4-wire
subscriber card (terminals C, D) or via the G8-DSP AUD4 card. The loudspeaker circuits are selected
with inputs of the PA system that are switched by floating contacts of the Intercom Server.
The subscriber that is connected to the PA system is called with an up to 4-digit code (freely con-
figurable), the loudspeaker circuit (or more circuits) is activated by means of one (or more) attendant
contacts. The announcement is cancelled with X, like a normal conversation. The length of the call tone
until the conversation lamp lights can be configured (see page 163).

Configuration CCT 800

 An attendant contact has to be configured for the relay, which activates the loudspeaker circuit (see
page 241).
 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add attendant contact”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab PA-Numbers
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

 Click on the button Configure PA.

 In the dialogue, enter a 1- to 4-digit code for activating the loudspeaker circuit and click on the button
Add (multiple codes can be entered) to add the code to the list PA - announcement.
 Click on the button Accept to save the changes.
 PA-Numbers: In this field, the configured codes for controlling a PA system are indicated.

NOTE:
Several outputs can be configured for the same subscriber with either the same or different codes.

Per subscriber, 339 definitions for attendant contacts are possible (as of PRO 800 1.1 see page 548). One
definition is:
 One or more activations at Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab Active at.
 One entry at Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab PA-Numbers.
 One entry at Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab Call Number/Function.

Extended PA codes
It is possible to enter wildcards for PA codes to increase the available number range.
Example: 2***, 33***, 567*

Application
For telephone interfaces G-TEL / S0 / IAX for direct dialling of extensions in PABXs.

NOTE:
PA attendant contacts are only switched when a full PA number is dialled (not when a number within a
range is dialled).

300 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Public address (PA)

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add attendant contact”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab PA-Numbers
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information about activating station outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

 Click on the button Configure PA.

 In the dialogue, enter a 1- to 4-digit code for activating the loudspeaker circuit and click on the button
Add (multiple codes can be entered) to add the code to the list PA - announcement.
 Click on the button Accept to save the changes.
 PA-Numbers: In this field, the configured codes for controlling a PA system are indicated.

NOTE:
Several outputs can be configured for the same subscriber with either the same or different codes.

NOTE:
For further information about the configuration of ICX messages, see the product manual “ICX Pro-
tocol”.

 Playback in idle state (idle audio)

A feed-in audio signal on the line-in or external microphone input can be output at the built-in loud-
speaker in idle state. This can be combined with “Offline mode” (on page 302).

ATTENTION:
For every fallback control desk “idle audio” and “offline mode” must be configured identically on
redundant systems.

Requirements
Subscribers
 ET 808A, EE 7506D min. DSP800A 3.4 Build 1
 ET 908A, EE 7506I, EF 963A min. IoIP device 8.3
 ET 908H min. IoIP device 8.3
 All AF-hybrid devices min. IoIP device 8.3
(e.g. AF 20H, AF 50H, AF 125H, AF 250H, AF 500H)
 All AFLS devices min. IoIP device 8.3
(e.g. AFLS 10H C, AFLS 10H H, AFLS 10H P, AFLS 10H SC)
 All versions ET 962A min. IoIP device 8.3
(e.g. EF 962A, EF 962H, ES 962H, ET 962A, ET 962H, ET 970A, ET 970H, EF 963A)
 All versions EE 7506I and EE 7506H min. IoIP device 8.3
(e.g. EE 7506I, EE 7506I AF, EE 7506H, EE 7506H AF)

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab General

3.1/0923 301
 Public address (PA) Intercom Server Configuration

 Idle Audio Input: In this drop-down list, the input audio source for the idle state can be selected.
When activated, the drop-down lists Idle Audio Volume and Audio Source During Conversation are
enabled for the station. The following sources are available:
 Off: No audio signal is output when idle.
 External Microphone: The audio input of the microphone feeder clamps is always put through.
These are labelled “Mic” (e.g. ET 962) or “EM” (e.g. ET 908H). If a subscriber provides both, use
the feeder clamps “EM”.
 Line-In: The input of the feeder clamps “line-in” is used.

NOTE:
Receive the CCT 800 configuration to configure idle audio input.

 Idle Audio Volume: In this drop-down list, the output volume for the loudspeaker which reproduces
the signal in idle state can be selected. The control range depends on the station connected.
 Audio Source During Conversation: In this drop-down list, the input audio source during an active
call can be selected. This setting is used to overrule automatic switching between line-in and internal
microphone. The following sources are available:
 Dynamic: The audio signal with the higher volume is used (line-in or mic).
 Microphone: The input of the feeder clamps “mic” is used.
 Line-In: The input of the feeder clamps “line-in” is used.

 Offline mode
Offline mode enables operation with limited functionality when no connection to an Intercom server is
available (e.g. “Playback in idle state (idle audio)” on page 301).

Requirements
Subscribers
 ET 808A, EE 7506D min. DSP800A 3.4 Build 1
 ET 908A, EE 7506I, EF 963A min. IoIP device 8.3
 ET 908H min. IoIP device 8.3
 All AF-hybrid devices min. IoIP device 8.3
(e.g. AF 20H, AF 50H, AF 125H, AF 250H, AF 500H)
 All AFLS devices min. IoIP device 8.3
(e.g. AFLS 10H C, AFLS 10H H, AFLS 10H P, AFLS 10H SC)
 All versions ET 962A min. IoIP device 8.3
(e.g. EF 962A, EF 962H, ES 962H, ET 962A, ET 962H, ET 970A, ET 970H, EF 963A)
 All versions EE 7506I and EE 7506H min. IoIP device 8.3
(e.g. EE 7506I, EE 7506I AF, EE 7506H, EE 7506H AF)
 All versions AF-I min. firmware 5.6, all Versions AF-D min. firmware 1.6

NOTE: Series AF amplifiers

 If the connection between the amplifier and the Intercom Server is interrupted (e.g. line fault, power
failure), the offline mode prevents a restart of the amplifier. This ensures that the existing configura-
tion of the amplifier will not be deleted by a restart. This means the amplifier can be operated as a
stand-alone unit (with limited functionality) without being connected to an Intercom Server (e.g. for
“local announcement” on page 305).
 An active external power supply is required for the amplifier.
 Amplifier series AF-I and AF-D support offline mode independent of the feature level.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio - Features > tab General

302 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Public address (PA)

 Idle Audio - Offline mode: In this drop-down list, offline mode can be configured for the respective
amplifier. The following options are available:
 Auto (Off): The offline mode is selected automatically (on, off). The current state is displayed in
the brackets.

NOTES:
Receive the CCT 800 configuration to configure Offline mode.

 Off: Offline mode is disabled.

 On: Offline mode is enabled.

3.1/0923 303
 Public address (PA) Intercom Server Configuration

Amplifier AF Series
NOTE: Operation of speakers with 70 V or 100 V
 Amplifier models AF 50A, AF 50D, AF 50H and AF 50I provide separate speaker connectors for oper-
ation with 70 V and 100 V.
 Amplifier models AF 125H, AF 250H and AF 500H provide a single speaker connector that can be con-
figured for either 70 V or 100 V operation:
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > AF Series > desired amplifier series > tab Line
Monitoring
 Line: Select the desired value in the drop-down list.

 Operation without external power supply


Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > AF Series > AF 20 > tab Common
 Operation without external power supply: Activate this checkbox to supply digital amplifiers over the
Intercom Server in case of a power supply failure. In case of a power failure, the IP amplifier is
automatically supplied over PoE.

ATTENTION:
If power supply over Intercom Server is used, an attenuation of up to 18 dB is possible, this is equal
to an output power of 0.5 watt! It is only possible to configure the “emergency operation” via
CCT 800 for a number of 20 amplifiers AF20D per Intercom Server!

B Suppress line monitoring

From VirtuoSIS 11.1 line monitoring can be selectively disabled to not notify of specific error types (e.g.
by deactivating “Secondary power supply”, error code 18, when using a UPS for primary power sup-
ply).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Line monitoring > tab Suppress Line monitoring
 By selecting Suppress Line monitoring (...) the corresponding error type is suppressed.
 For further information, see “Line fault monitoring” on page 344.

 Speaker line monitoring


Requirements
 Firmware: min. IoIP device 8.0

Configuration CCT 800

Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > AF Series > tab Line monitoring
Feature licence “L-AF-LM” – speaker line monitoring
The speaker line at the audio output of an amplifier (70 V or 100 V) can be monitored for the
PRO 800
following errors:
LICENCE AF-LM
 Short-circuit
 Short-circuit to ground
 Disconnection
 Impedance changing

304 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Public address (PA)

Feature PRO 800 6.0 – measuring the ground fault resistance

VirtuoSIS
Measuring the ground fault resistance and impedance at the audio output of an amplifier can
LICENCE PRO6U be carried out without the licence “L-AF-LM” and with deactivated speaker line monitoring.
Requirements
The following firmware versions are supported:
 AF-D min 2.0
 AF-I min 6.0

ATTENTION:
 An active connection between CCT 800 and the respective amplifier is required for speaker line
monitoring!
 Speaker line monitoring will not be supported for the amplifier AF20!

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > AF Series > desired amplifier series > tab Line Mon-
itoring
 Line Monitoring: In this drop-down list, the speaker line monitoring mode can be selected. The
following modes are available:
 Off: Speaker line monitoring is disabled. Following functions are disabled in CCT 800.
 60 [s]: Speaker line monitoring is automatically performed in a time interval of 60 seconds.
 60 min: Speaker line monitoring is automatically performed in a time interval of 60 minutes.

NOTE:
With selecting the option “60 [s]” or “60 min”, an error (short-circuit or disconnection) can be
indicated as line fault at a control desk. Further information about line faults can be found on
page 344.

 ICX: Speaker line monitoring can manually be triggered once via an ICX command.

NOTE:
For further information about line monitoring via ICX commands, see the product manual “ICX
Protocol”.

 Line: In this drop-down list, the used loudspeaker line can be selected.
 Tolerance: In this drop-down list, the tolerance for “error at the loudspeaker line” can be selected
(the tolerance value “30%” is recommended).
 Click on the button Measure to measure the current ground fault resistance and impedance of the
audio output of the respective amplifier. The measurements are displayed in the following fields:
  Ground fault resistance [kΩ]: Current ground fault resistance (0,01kΩ to 1,2kΩ).
 Impedance [Ω]: Current impedance value.
 Impedance nominal value [Ω]: Configured nominal impedance value.
 Click on the button Accept to set the current measured value (displayed in the filed Impedance) as
nominal value. The current nominal value is displayed in the filed Impedance nominal value.

 Local announcement

The local announcement enables the play back of audio messages regardless of whether the amplifier
is connected to an Intercom Server or not. The incoming speech signal is received through a
microphone connected to the amplifier and played back through a loudspeaker, which is also
connected to the amplifier. This means, the amplifier can be operated as a stand-alone unit (with
limited functionality) without being connected to an Intercom Server.

ATTENTION:
The function “offline mode” has to be enabled to operate as a stand-alone unit (see page 306)!

3.1/0923 305
 Public address (PA) Intercom Server Configuration

Requirements
The following firmware versions are supported:
 AF-I min. 5.6
 AF-D min. 1.6
 IoIP device 8.3

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Microphone, Loudspeaker, Tones
 Sidetone: In this drop-down list, the volume of the sidetone can be selected. In case of the Series AF
amplifiers it controls the sensitivity of the microphone input “Mic +/-”.
 no sidetone: The function “local announcement” is disabled.

 Offline mode

For information about the offline mode, see page 302.

Amplifier general
Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > AF series > desired amplifier series > tab Inputs or
Subscriber > Station properties > AF series > desired amplifier series > tab Outputs
 The input/output configuration is the same as for all other Intercom subscribers (see page 231).
 Subscriber > Station properties > AF series > Equalizer
 In the drop-down list Equalizer (LS), select an equalizer preset for the loudspeaker. Optionally, the
equalizer settings can be configured manually (see below).
 Subscriber > Station properties > AF series > Volume control via Input
 Right-click on the desired amplifier and select “Add Function”.
 Activate the checkbox of a tone group to enable the volume control.
 Priority: In this field, the priority of the volume control can be changed for the respective subscriber
(by default: 49).
 Volume min: In this drop-down list, the minimum volume for operation range can be selected.
 Volume max: In this drop-down list, the minimum volume for operation range can be selected.

Configure equalizer settings

To configure the equalizer settings, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > AUD > tab Parameter

306 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Public address (PA)

2. Click on the button Configure. The following dialogue appears:

3. In the drop-down list Settings for, select the entry “Loudspeaker” (by default, selected).
4. Activate the checkbox next to the drop-down list Settings for to activate the equalizer. The state of
the amplifier is changed in real-time.
5. Put the slider on the desired position for the respective frequency to adjust the attenuation or
amplification. The current value is shown in the field Value [db].

NOTE: 16 kHz only for AUD2 cards

The frequency 16 kHz is only available with AUD2 cards.

6. In the drop-down list Presets, a pre-configured setting can be loaded by pressing the button Load,
or the current equalizer settings can be saved in the selected preset by pressing the button Save. It
is the same setting as in the drop-down list Equalizer (LS) in the main dialogue.
7. Click on the button Send to send the defined equalizer settings to the Intercom Server. Optionally,
activate the checkbox Online to send the equalizer settings to the Intercom Server in real-time.
8. Click on button Apply to save the equalizer settings and to close the dialogue.

3.1/0923 307
 Alarm function Intercom Server Configuration

Alarm function
The alarm functions can be used for different applications, the two main applications are:
 Silent Alarm: Initiation of an alarm at a preconfigured group by e.g. a threatened officer by pressing
a button or a foot switch. The receivers of this group can listen to the happening at the initiator after
taking over the alarm. The number of listener is shown in the display of the initiator.
 Alarm: Playback of a pre-recorded audio file or an announcement to a pre-configured group (e.g. for
evacuation alarm).
The receivers can be arranged in 10 groups (same groups as on page 271). If a group is used as alarm
receiver, group calls can still be initiated in this group.

ATTENTION:
When using IP subscriber cards, restrictions possibly exist for this function (see page 520)!

Silent alarm

The alarm process

 Initiate with a button
The alarm is initiated with dialling the direct dialling code “9T2” and the receiver group (e.g. “9T201”
to trigger the alarm in receiver group 01). A single subscriber can initiate multiple alarms with different
direct dialling codes. The initiator does not receive any tone signal, but the conversation lamp is acti-
vated by default (see page 309). With dialling the direct dialling code “9T2T” at the initiator, the idle
display state is activated at all receiver stations.

NOTE: Alarm must be trigger via direct dialling

Dialling the code “9T2” and the receiver group directly does not trigger the alarm.

 Initiate via input (e.g. foot switch)

The alarm can also be initiated by activation of an input, which simulates the dialling of the initiating
subscriber (see page 231).

 Alarm receivers
The alarm is indicated at the receivers with buzzer (interval depends on priority), blinking conversation
lamp and blinking display (shows identification of initiator). With dialling the direct dialling code
“9T2T” at the initiator, the idle display state is activated at all receiver stations.

 Monitor the alarm at the alarm group

The alarm is taken over by the receivers with any button, now the receiver can listen to the initiator's
station.

308 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Alarm function

 Indication in the display of the initiator, how many subscribers are listening
The number of listening subscribers is indicated in the display of the initiator, e.g.:

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display EE 311A/EE 411

Alarm
0002
Alarm

 Cancel alarm with code

The alarm is cancelled by entering a configurable code (the code may not start with T), which can also
be activated by dialling simulation of an input. This code has to be defined by Direct Dialling, which
makes it possible to entitle single stations for ending the alarm. Depending on the configuration of the
alarm, single subscribers can switch off reception of the alarm by pressing button X for at least one
second. If during an alarm all receivers (that have already taken over the alarm) switch off reception or
build up another conversation, so that nobody is listening, the alarm is automatically initiated again
after 4 seconds.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add alarm trigger”.
 Subscriber > Alarm triggering > sub-folder subscriber
 Right-click and select “Add new entry”.
 Group: In this drop-down list, the receiver group can be selected (see page 271). If several alarms are
configured with different buttons, a separate entry has to be added for each alarm.
 The following methods for triggering an alarm are possible:
 If a button is used for triggering, a direct dialling has to be configured for the respective subscriber
(e.g. “9 = 9T20” for group 0 or “9 = 9T200” for group 0 with 2-digit dialling: see page 212).
 If an input is used for triggering, a dialling simulation has to be configured for the respective input
(e.g. “9T20” for initiating an alarm in “Group 0”; see page 231).
 Priority: In this drop-down list, the reception priority can be selected for this alarm (see page 312).
 Disconnect: Activate this checkbox to switch-off reception with this receiver group via the button X.
 Attendant contact: in this drop-down list, an output contact can be selected, which is closed until the
alarm (or the corresponding transfer level) is cancelled.
 Indication of alarm: Select evacuation alarm or silent alarm as alarm type (see page 310).
 Last subscriber switches off: restart alarm: Activate this checkbox to automatically initiate the alarm
once again as soon as the last receiver has switched off reception.
 no red lamp during alarm: Activate this checkbox to disable the red lam at the initiator of the alarm.
 Go to: Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls / Zones
 Gr. no: Activate the desired checkbox to assign the respective subscriber to the corresponding
group.

3.1/0923 309
 Alarm function Intercom Server Configuration

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling

 Direct Dialling: In this field, the direct dialling target of the code “9T30” to cancel the alarm can be
entered for the respective subscriber. Any direct dialling code can be entered, but it may not start
with “T” (e.g. “4711=9T30”).
 In the row “Intercom Server configuration block”, this setting can be entered for the entire
Intercom Server block.

NOTE:
 At alarms with high or medium priority the keyboard is locked (see page 312). It is not possible to
quit the alarm via direct dialling (keypad at the receivers is locked).
 If the alarm be switched off via input, the code defined at direct dialling has to be simulated (not
“9T30”).
 If the selected subscriber initiate several alarms with different buttons, these definitions have to be
configured separately for each receiver group and button.

 Talk to the initiator

If this option is configured, the receivers of an alarm can talk by pressing button T after the alarm is
taken over. A talking receiver is heard by the initiator and by all other receivers that have taken over
the alarm.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add alarm trigger”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering > sub-folder subscriber
 Indication of alarm: Select evacuation alarm or silent alarm as alarm type (see page 310).
 Activate the checkbox Receiving stations entitled to talk for the initiating subscriber.

 Max. 8 silent alarms at the same time

If several alarms arrive at a station at the same time, this is indicated in the following way:

dot-matrix display: EE 311A/EE 411:

The first alarm that reaches the station is displayed. The first alarm that reaches the
station is indicated blinking in the
display with points at the bottom.

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display EE 311A/EE 411

Alarm
22 22
Joe Cocker
Joe Cocker Alarm
Alarm
T-Intrude
X-Cancel
X-Accept
After the first alarm has been accepted it is possible to scroll through the alarms with D and E (as
long as no buzzer is active, otherwise volume control of buzzer). With F the selected alarm can be
taken over. Indication of an alarm with buzzer has the highest priority, so a new alarm (also with low
priority) fades an already taken over alarm with high priority until the new alarm is taken over. In order
to avoid this, it is possible to configure that an alarm with low priority is indicated with buzzer only for
a short time if the receiver already listens to another alarm. If this alarm is cancelled, the new alarm is
again indicated with buzzer.

310 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Alarm function

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add alarm trigger”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering > sub-folder subscriber
 Indication of alarm: Select evacuation alarm or silent alarm as alarm type (see page 310).
 Select the radio button “Silent Alarm: Buzzer only once” in the column Indication of alarm for the
respective subscriber with an low priority alarm.

 Automatic change of priorities and alarm groups if not taken

over
Each alarm can be transferred to further groups (or to the same group, with different priority) or deleted
after a configurable time.

Application for “Silent Alarm”

If an alarm is not taken over within a configurable time, it can be transferred to different groups or
deleted. This function can be used e.g. to transfer an alarm to a larger receiver group with higher pri-
ority if it is not taken over.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add alarm trigger”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering > sub-folder subscriber
 Indication of alarm: Select evacuation alarm or silent alarm as alarm type (see page 310).
 In the drop-down list Group, select the desired receiver group. The groups are the same as for group
calls.
 Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering > sub-folder subscriber > Group
 Time [s]: In this field, the time can be changed, after which the alarm is transferred (by default 1 sec-
ond).
 Group: In this drop-down list, the receiver group can be selected (End = the alarm will be cancelled).
 Priority: In this drop-down list, the reception priority can be selected for this alarm (priority levels see
page 312).
 Disconnect: Activate this checkbox to switch-off reception with this receiver group via the button X.
 Attendant contact: In this drop-down list, an output contact can be selected, which will be closed
until the alarm is cancelled or transferred.

NOTE:
If in the previous alarm procedure stations have received the alarm that are not configured as
receiver of the selected level, they still receive the alarm.

 Manual change of priorities and alarm groups if not taken over

The transfer can also be controlled manually by dialling a direct dialling code. Via a direct dialling code,
it possible to entitle single stations for ending the alarm (the initiator as well as the receivers):

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering > sub-folder subscriber
 Indication of alarm: Select evacuation alarm or silent alarm as alarm type (see page 310).
 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 Direct Dialling: In this field, the direct dialling target of the code “9T3” to control the transfer can be
entered. Any direct dialling code can be entered, but it may not start with “T”. E.g:
 With “9T3” and “T” (e.g. “555=9T3T”), the transfer can be disabled. The alarm stays in the current
transfer level.

3.1/0923 311
 Alarm function Intercom Server Configuration

 With “9T32” and the number of the desired transfer level (e.g. “444=9T32”), one of the transfer
levels can be enabled.
 In the row “Intercom Server configuration block”, this setting can be entered for the entire
Intercom Server block.

 9 reception priorities with 3 different reception options

Independent of the alarm type (evacuation alarm or silent alarm), 9 different reception priority num-
bers, which define 3 reception options (“Low”, “Medium” and “High”), are available for each alarm.
These reception options define the following (after the alarm has been taken over):
 If the alarm fades conversations.
 If the alarm fades All Calls and group calls.
 If the receiver is busy for other conversations.
 If the keyboard of the receiver is blocked, so that he can call no other subscribers or functions.
The alarm fades above the functions as described in the table below:
Priority levels
Reception option Fading: no Fading: yes
Conversation 1–2 3–9
All Call initiator 1–6 7–9
All Call receiver 1–4 5–9
Waiting for TTT 1 2–9
Ringing 1 2–9
Dial tone 1–2 3–9
Keyboard is blocked 1–2 3–9
Busy 1–2 3–9

312 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Alarm function

Alarm

The alarm Process

 Initiate alarms via inputs, feed-in alarm signal via subscriber
The AF signal for the alarm announcement is fed in over the terminals A and B of the first subscriber
of a G3-GET-4D / G8-GET-4D with 0 dB on 600 Ohm (DIP switch on the subscriber card has to be turned).

NOTE:
For further information on subscriber cards, see the product manuals “GE300” and “GE800”.

The alarm is initiated by activation of an input, which simulates dialling of the code (“9T2” and the
number of the receiver group) for the subscriber that feeds in the AF.

 Evacuation alarm initiating and receiving

The alarm announcement is switched automatically to all stations within the receiver group, the
number of the initiator blinks in the display.

 Cancel alarm with code

The alarm is cancelled either by dialling simulation of an input (code 9T30) or by entering a configur-
able code at an entitled station (the code may not start with T). Depending on the configuration of the
alarm, single subscribers can switch off reception of the alarm by pressing button X for at least one
second. If during an alarm all receivers switch off reception or build up another conversation, so that
nobody is listening, it can be configured that the alarm is automatically initiated again after 4 seconds.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add alarm trigger”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering > sub-folder subscriber
 Right-click and select “Add new entry”.
 Group: In this drop-down list, the receiver group can be selected (see page 271). If several alarms are
configured with different buttons, a separate entry has to be added for each alarm.
 The alarm can be triggered either by pressing a button (0 to 9) or via an input:
 If a button is used for triggering, a direct dialling has to be configured for the respective subscriber
(e.g. “9 = 9T20” for group 0 or “9 = 9T200” for group 0 with 2-digit dialling: see page 212).
 If an input is used for triggering, a dialling simulation has to be configured for the respective input
(e.g. “9T20” for initiating an alarm in “Group 0”; see page 231).
 Priority: In this drop-down list, the reception priority can be selected for this alarm (priority levels see
page 312).
 Disconnect: Activate this checkbox to switch-off reception with this receiver group via the button X.
 Attendant contact: in this drop-down list, an output contact can be selected, which is closed until the
alarm (or the corresponding transfer level) is cancelled.
 Select the radio button “Evacuation Alarm (Connect to Audio)” in the column Indication of alarm for
the respective subscriber.
 Last subscriber switches off: restart alarm: Activate this checkbox to automatically initiate the alarm
once again as soon as the last receiver has switched off reception.
 Go to: Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls / Zones
 Gr. no: Activate the desired checkbox to assign the respective subscriber to the corresponding
group.

3.1/0923 313
 Alarm function Intercom Server Configuration

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling

 Direct Dialling: In this field, the direct dialling target of the code “9T30” to cancel the alarm can be
entered for the respective subscriber. Any code can be entered, but it may not start with “T”
(e.g. “4711=9T30”).
 In the row “Intercom Server configuration block”, this setting can be entered for the entire
Intercom Server block.

 Max. 8 different alarms at the same time

If several alarms arrive at a station at the same time, this is indicated in the following way:

Dot-matrix display: EE 311A/EE 411:

The last alarm that has been initiated is indicated. The last alarm that has been
initiated is indicated blinking in the
display with points at the bottom.

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display EE 311A/EE 411

Alarm
22 22
Joe Cocker
Joe Cocker Alarm
Alarm
T-Intrude
T-Intrude X-Cancel
X-Cancel
After the first alarm has been accepted, it is possible to scroll through the alarms with D and E, with
F the selected alarm can be taken over.

 9 reception priorities with 3 different reception options

Described at “Silent Alarm” on page 308.

 Release keypad despite alarm

During a reception as of priority 3 the keypad is blocked. It is possible to selectively enable subscribers
to release the keypad, so that they e.g. can switch off the alarm by dialling to an output. In order to
unlock the keypad at the subscriber any key has to be pressed during reception of the alarm.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Alarm, Common
 Activate the field Release keypad despite alarm for the desired subscribers.

 Automatic change of priorities and alarm groups after time

Described at “Silent Alarm” on page 308. Each alarm can be transferred to four different groups (or to
the same group, with different priority levels) or deleted after a configurable time.
This function can be used e.g. to define an alarm with high priority, with no possibility for switching
off, to ensure that all receivers hear the announcement. After a configurable time the priority is
decreased, so that the receivers can build up conversations or initiate All Calls, the alarm has only
background status.

314 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Alarm function

 Audio alarm transmission with alphanumeric display

(max. 1 Group)
By means of a floating contact (terminals “IN1” and “-”, GE 300: on G3-GEM, GE 800 on G8A-GEN of
the 1st housing) a notice of alarm can be transferred to pre-configured stations (feed-in of the alarm
notice at the music input - GE300: terminals “MUSIC” on G3-GEM, GE 800 terminals “MU1” and
“MU2” on G8A-GEN of the 1st housing). This alarm has the highest priority. It fades running
conversations and All Calls. With display stations the display “ALARM” is blinking during the alarm.
Feed-in of music over the music input is not possible in this case.

ATTENTION:
The transmission of the NF-signal in the entire configured Intercom Server block is only possible if the
alarm input is in the same Intercom Server as the AF-feed-in! Otherwise the alarm is only shown in the
display, without audio transmission!

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > Alarm input
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add alarm input”.
 Intercom Server-Block: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server or block can be selected, which is
to receive the alarm message (see page 419).
 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Alarm, Common
 Alarm 1 receiver: Activate this checkbox for the selected subscriber to receive the alarm 1 signal.
 Subscriber > Call Disabling
 In the field Disabling of functions and dialling, the button sequence “4T” will be disabled. Otherwise,
the alarm message can be switched on by entering “4T1” (see page 164).

 Reception of chime signal

By activation of the chime signal input (floating contact, terminals “IN2” and “-”, GE300 on G3-GEM
and GE800 on G8A-GEN), the chime signal is switched to the pre-configured receivers.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Alarm, Common
 Receive Chime-signal: Activate this checkbox for the selected subscriber to receive the chime signal.
 Inputs > Chime-signal
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add chime signal”.
 Intercom Server-Block: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server or block can be selected, which is
to receive the chime signal (see page 419).
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common
 Chime signal: In this drop-down list, the amount of rings can be selected.
 Select the desired radio buttons in the section Chime Signal to define, whether the chime signal will
sound as double gong or as single gong.

3.1/0923 315
 Door function Intercom Server Configuration

Door function

Door opening
ATTENTION:
Configured door stations require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of the
memory capacity can be found on page 549!

 Independent operation of several door stations at the same time

If several door stations ring at the same time, the receiver is always connected to the right door station.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Automatic storage of several door calls

If several door stations ring at the same time, all waiting calls are stored automatically and connected
one after the other.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Indication of the calling door station in the display

With display stations the display text of the calling station is indicated.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Door station with one door opener

For each door station some general definitions have to be configured. In addition the desired way of
ringing has to be configured (“Ringing at one station” or “Ringing at a group of stations”).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add door opener function”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > sub-folder subscriber > tab General
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

 Door opening with buttons “0–9”

Configuration CCT 800
  Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > sub-folder subscriber > tab General
 Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.

316 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Door function

 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

 Button: In this drop-down list, the button to open the door can be selected.

 Door station with several door openers

Multiple door opener contacts can be allocated to one door station (max. 339 contacts per subscriber
min PRO 800 1.1 see page 548). These contacts can be opened at a control station with a button of
choice.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > sub-folder subscriber > tab General
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

 Button: In this drop-down list, the button to open the door can be selected.

 Door opener time configurable per door station

The time, the door opener output remains closed after the door opener button has been released, can
be configured.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > tab Door open
 Time for door opener [s]: In this field, the time to open the door can be changed (max. 255 seconds,
by default 3 seconds).

 End conversations automatically after opening the door with a

configurable time delay
It is possible to configure that the conversation with the door station is automatically cancelled after
the door is opened, immediately or after a time delay.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > tab Door open
 Cancel conversation: Activate this checkbox to automatically cancel the conversation with the door
station after the door is opened.
 after [s]: In this field to the right side, the time delay can be changed, after which the conversation is
cancelled (by default 0 seconds).

 Door opener relay with Flip-Flop function

A Flip-Flop mode can be configured selectively for each door opener relay and for each door opener
button or access code. This function can be used for:

3.1/0923 317
 Door function Intercom Server Configuration

 Switching on a relay (or several relays) with a code (e.g. T1234) and switching it off by entering the
same code once again.
 With after dialling: switching on the relay by pressing the button the first time, switching off the relay
by pressing the button a second time.
 A permanently switched on relay can be switched off with after dialling.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > sub-folder subscriber > tab General
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

 Relay toggle: Activate this checkbox to enable the Flip-Flop function for the respective relay.

318 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Door function

Ringing
 Ringing with chime signal via an input
By activating the chime signal input e.g. by means of a call button, ringing at a group of Intercom
stations can be initiated. A subscriber of this group can now dial to the door station and open the door.

Configuration CCT 800

The receivers have to be configured as chime signal receivers (see page 315).

 Ringing at one station

A station, which is configured as door station, is able to carry out a privacy call to a pre-configured control
station. The call is taken over at the control station with any button. During the conversation, the door can
be opened with after dialling a pre-configured button. A music channel can be defined for feed-in of
waiting information or music at the door station. All defined music programs are available (see
page 203).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy
 Activate the checkbox Fix as calling station for the respective door station.
 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Alarm, Common
 Activate the checkbox Disable after-dialling for the respective door station.
 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 Direct Dialling: In this field, the call number of the control station can be entered as direct dialling
target for the respective call button (e.g. “0=45”).

 Ringing at a group of stations

B Feature VirtuoSIS 11.x

 With this feature, SIP stations can act as receivers for Group Ringing. IoIP devices and SIP devices
can be combined in a group.

A door station can also call to a group of stations. The groups are the same as the max. 90 groups of
group call. The call is taken over with 8T + group no., with F or with T. During the conversation the
door can be opened by after dialling a configurable button:
 Ringing at group 0: 
B  Ringing at group 1–89: 
 Answer a group call with T: 
Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the code “98” and the group call number as direct dialling target for
the corresponding button (e.g. “0=981” for ringing at group “1” with button 0, or “4=9823” for
ringing at group “23” with button 4; see page 271).
 If “T” is included in the direct dialling code (e.g. ringing at a group of stations = 098T0), a snapshot
is activated when the door station is ringing at a group of stations.

ATTENTION:
A speed dialling destination can not contain spaces.

 Activate the checkbox Disable after-dialling for the respective door station.

3.1/0923 319
 Door function Intercom Server Configuration

 Go to: Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls

 Gr. no: Activate the desired checkbox to assign the respective subscriber to the corresponding
group.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Switch off times
 Duration: In this field, the announcement time can be changed (max. 1049 seconds or 17.4 minutes;
0 = switch-off time disabled, by default 60 seconds).

 Tone selection for ringing at a group


A DSP tone for ringing to a group can be defined, which is played back instead of the group call chime.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Group options
 Text: In this field, a max. 14-digit description can be entered for the respective group call.
 Tone: In this drop-down list, an announcement tone can be selected for the respective group call.

NOTE:
 For playback of the tones DSP stations are required.
 The length of the DSP tone is always 500 ms. If the selected DSP tone has more than 500ms the
tone will be automatically cut after the max time.

 Group Call overlays call: Activate this checkbox to overlay conversations of receiving subscribers
with a group call.
 PA Synchronisation: Activate this checkbox for the desired group to delay group calls until a “ready”
message is received by the respective Intercom Server.
 Pre-recorded audio ID: In this field, the ID of a pre-recorded audio file can be entered, which is played
back instead of the gong at group calls. The message only has to be downloaded at the initiating
 subscriber (client). For ringing at a group, pre-configured audio files with ID “100” to “131” can be
used.
 Tone for: In this drop-down list, the intended use of the DSP tone can be selected, which is selected
in the drop-down list Tone.

 Forwarding of group ringing

If the group call is not answered, it is cancelled after a configurable time. But the door call can also be
forwarded to a different group of stations or to a pre-configured station after a configurable time.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > sub-folder subscriber > Forwarding Group-ringing
 Right-click and select “add new group”.
 Transfer- Group: In this drop-down list, the group can be selected, from which the door call will be
forwarded.
 Target No.: In this field, the configured direct dialling target of the group (e.g. “981”; see page 319)
or the call number of the respective subscriber can be entered, to which the door call is forwarded
(target call number max. 6-digits, e.g. at 2-digit groups via LAN a 3-digit function code cannot be
used).
 Time [s]: In this field, the time can be changed, after which the group call is forwarded (by default 4
seconds).

320 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Door function

 Waiting information at the door station during ringing

ATTENTION:
Only for ringing at a group of stations!

In standard the conversation lamp of the door station blinks during ringing. If the door station is
configured as receiver of the called group, also the tone signal is switched on. It is also possible to
configure an audio channel with music or waiting information, which will be switched to the door
station during ringing. All already defined music channels are available (see page 290). For DSP
stations different tone signals can be selected as waiting information.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > tab Waiting information
 Waiting information: In this drop-down list, a music channel can be selected (only configured music
channels).
 In the drop-down list Waiting information, select the entry “always” to receive the waiting
information with the door station, even if it is not within the group call receiver group. If more than
one door station is ringing at the same group, the door station does not receive ringing from the
other door stations.
 Go to: Subscriber > Signal Tones-DSP Stations
 Initiate ringing: In this drop-down list, a tone signal can be selected (only for DSP stations).

 Automatic door opening with time delay

This function can be used e.g. for a door station with day/night transfer: During daytime operation the
door opens automatically when the call button at the door station is pressed. Activating privacy
function for a defined station (turning or 031) changes to night-time operation: pressing the call
button now initiates a normal call. The Intercom station used for changing between daytime and
night-time operation can be the control station or any other station. The station for changing between
daytime and night-time operation can also be switched to privacy mode via an input (e.g. time switch,
see page 231). For automatic door opening a time can be configured, which passes before the door
opener relay closes after the call button has been pressed. During this time normal ringing is carried
out (the call could also be taken over). This informs the inside stations that the door has been opened
and also prevents that everybody recognises that the door is opened automatically.

Configuration CCT 800

 Configure “Ringing at a group of stations”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > tab Control Station
 Control Station: In this field, the calling number of the station used for switching over day-time and
night-time operation can be entered.
 Only control station can open: Activate this checkbox to open the door only by the control station
(switching over).

ATTENTION:
If the door station does not ring to the control station, this checkbox may not be activated!

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > tab Door open

 Activate the checkbox Automatic open for the respective control station. In case it is set to be called
aloud, the door will be opened automatically, but not if it is set to private.
 Activate the checkbox Automatic open when private in addition to the checkbox Automatic open
for the control station to invert this function. A control station in privacy mode will then have
automatic opening active but a loudspeaking control station will require manual opening.
 after [s]: In this column, enter the time delay, after which the door opener relay closes after the call
button has been pressed. During this time, normal ringing is carried out (max. 255 seconds; 0 = door
is opened immediately, by default 4 seconds).

3.1/0923 321
 Door function Intercom Server Configuration

 Time for door opener [s]: In this field, the time to open the door can be changed (max. 255 seconds).
It is recommend to do not enter “0”. Otherwise, the door opener relay would not stay closed when
door opening is initiated (by default 3 seconds).

ATTENTION:
 Pending door calls are not affected by the transfer of the control station. Therefore destination is
affected by the state of the control station at the time of initiation!
 Only works with door opener button 1!
 The keypad of the door station (if existent) cannot be used for other functions when this feature is
active!

 Transfer of door calls to telephone dialler with possibility of

opening
With a telephone interface G3-TEL or G8-TEL Intercom calls can be transferred into the public
telephone net. During a conversation with the door station the door can be opened at the telephone
with after dialling.

NOTE:
For further information about the features and configuration of the telephone interface, see the
product manuals “G3-TEL” and “G8-TEL”.

 Allocation of door opening entitlement

It is possible to allow only certain groups of stations to open doors by after dialling. The entitlements
can selectively be defined per door station.

NOTE:
All groups except group “0”.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls
 Gr. no: Activate the desired checkbox to assign the respective subscriber to the corresponding
group.
 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > tab Door open
 Authorisation group: In this drop-down list, a group to open doors can be selected. The following
options are available:
 No restriction: All subscribers can open this door.
 Group: Only stations of the selected group may open this door (e.g. “Group 2”).

322 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Door function

Access control (door opening with code input)

 1- to 4-digit codes (can be combined)
Doors can be opened by entering a 1- to 4-digit code at the door station. It is possible to configure
several codes per door station or the same code at several door stations (key system), so that general
codes, group codes and single codes can be configured. Per door station a maximum of 123 codes can
be configured (minus 2 codes for each allocated output, see page 548). 1-, 2-, 3- and 4-digit codes can
be mixed.

NOTE:
If a door opener controls several relays with various codes, a relay with the code TTTT would be
triggered by any other relay whenever it is switched.

ATTENTION:
Configured codes require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of the memory
capacity can be found on page 549!
Example: with ten door stations, each with one door opener output, up to 1000 codes can be config-
ured all together, but in this case the memory is nearly full!

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add door opener function”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > sub-folder subscriber
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

 Access code(s): In this field, the access codes to open the door can be entered (e.g. “T0815”; multiple
entries are separated with a comma “,”).
 Button: In this drop-down list, the button to open the door can be selected.
 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > tab Door open
 Time for door opener [s]: In this field, the time to open the door can be changed (max. 255 seconds).
It is recommend to do not enter “0”. Otherwise, the door opener relay would not stay closed when
door opening is initiated (by default 3 seconds).

 Number of attempts
After input of an invalid code the dialling tone changes into an error signal. If reattempts of code input
are allowed, the error signal changes again into the dialling tone and another code can be entered.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > tab Control Station
 Number of attempts: In this drop-down list, the number of allowed code inputs can be selected, be-
fore a call to the control station is established.

3.1/0923 323
 Door function Intercom Server Configuration

 Security call to a control station, blocking of the keyboard in

case of misuse
After the configured number of reattempts overflows (if no reattempts are configured after the first
invalid input), a call to a configured control station is established. The call to this station will be
announced by a special tone. At the control station the call can be taken over with any button. The door
can be opened during the conversation with button 1. The call to the control station lasts until it is
answered by the control station, but the option to switch it off automatically after a configurable time
exists as well. If the call to the control station is transferred via secretary transfer or Follow Me, the door
opener function is also transferred.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > tab Control Station
 Control Station: In this field, the call number of the control station is entered.
 Duration of control station call [s]: In this field, the time can be changed, after which a control call is
switched off (max. 15 minutes; 0 = call lasts until it is taken over, by default 0 seconds).
 Only control station can open: Activate this checkbox to open the door only by the control station
(switching over).

ATTENTION:
If the door station does not ring to the control station, this checkbox may not be activated!

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > sub-folder subscriber

  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

 Button: In this drop-down list, the button to open the door can be selected.

ATTENTION:
If an emergency call “call 2” is configured from the door station to the control desk, an emergency
call is automatically issued upon misuse and not the control station call! Therefore the settings for
emergency call are active and not the ones for control station call!

 Control of several door openers with different codes at one door

station
Several door opener contacts can be allocated to one door station. These contacts can be opened by
entering of different codes at the door station.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > sub-folder subscriber
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

324 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Door function

 Access code(s): In this field, the access code to open the door can be entered (e.g. “T0815”; multiple
entries are separated with a comma “,”).

 Listening to the door station while opening

It can be configured that the speech direction is switched permanently from the door station to the
control station from pressing of the door opener button on until the conversation cancel. In this case
the control station can e.g. hear if the door is closed again.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > tab Control Station
 Activate the checkbox Simplex during opening for the respective door station.

 Transfer of door calls via input

A door call can be transferred by an activated input, which changes the dialling of the call button (e.g.
by a time switch). So it is possible to define different targets for one door station.

Configuration CCT 800

See “Input changes button” on page 232.

3.1/0923 325
Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

Control desk function

General

Symphony Control Desk Service

As of VirtuoSIS 12, the new Symphony control desk service is available in addition to the classic control
desk functions. This allows the simplest configuration of control desk functions and subscription to
queues which support call priorities.
A station can be configured either as a classic control desk or as a Symphony Control Desk Service con-
trol desk. Depending on configuration, the functionality may vary.

Classic control desk

Stations, which are configured as control desk, can carry out the following control desk functions in
addition to the standard Intercom functions:
 Call requests: By pressing a call button on a station, a call can be requested from the control desk.
Active call requests are stored at the control desk and have to be acknowledged manually in order
to establish a call to the respective station. It is not possible to cancel active call requests and there-
fore to decline a not accepted call. Not acknowledged call requests are indicated on the display of
the control desk and an acoustic signal (“buzzer”) sounds. Further information about the configura-
tion of call requests can be found on page 335.
 Classic call parking: During an active call between a control desk and the calling station, this call can
be parked by pressing either the button 2 or 3. This call is displayed at the respective control desk
as call request and can be continued at a later point in time. The call type of the parked call changes
to “call type 3” (on page 359). Further information about the configuration of the classic call park
function can be found on page 337.
 Input messages: Activated inputs (e.g. Gx-8E8A, Gx-16E, station inputs) are stored at the control
desk and have to be acknowledged manually. Not acknowledged call requests are indicated on the
display of the control desk and an acoustic signal (“buzzer”) sounds. Depending on the configuration
and cabling of the inputs, the following switch steps can be indicated:
 Idle mode
 Active 1 (normal call)
 Active 2 (emergency call)
 Short circuit
 Line fault
By default, the switch step “Active 1” is indicated at the control desk with standing display and
buzzer with long interval; the switch step “Active 2” is indicated with flashing display and buzzer with
short interval. Further information about the indication of input messages can be found on page 339.

326 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

M Symphony Control Desk Service

/

Feature VirtuoSIS 12.x

With this feature, it is possible to set up control desks with Symphony Control Desk Service and
manage queues with priorities.

Symphony Control Desk Service allows processing of prioritised call requests in queues. These can be
subscribed flexibly by control desk stations. Functionality according to the following scheme:

Subscribed
TLS (signalling)
to queue:
default port: 19 000 London
SIP/ SIPS (VoIP signalling)
Queues with Control desk
call prioritisation default port: 5 060 (SIP)/5061 (SIPS)

RTP/ RTPS (media)

Stockholm
default port: 10 000–50000
id5 or od5
London

Vienna Call requests

to Queue:
London
VirtuoSIS, S3 or S6
SIP/ SIPS (VoIP signalling)
default port: 5 060 Emergency call
Call requesting
RTP/ RTPS (media) Normal call
device
default port: 10 000–50000

Queues
Name Symphony MX device or
CCT Madrid Symphony BF device
800 London
Paris

CCT 800

Requirements and restrictions

 Minimal versions for firmware/software:
 VirtuoSIS Intercom server min. version 12.0.x.
 Commend CCT 800 min. version 12.x.
 Stations series id5 or od5 as control desk: min. firmware 03.03.01.x.
 Symphony MX devices as call request issuers: min. firmware 03.02.02.x.
 Symphony BF devices as call request issuers: min. firmware 4.5.3.x.
 Feature level D for control desks.
 Feature level B for issuers of the call requests.
 VirtuoSIS must be licenced with a licence “L-SIS-12“, “L-SIS32-12“, “L-SIS-12U“, “L-SIS32-12U“ or
later.
 Synchronisation of the system time via NTP at Intercom server and stations operable.

3.1/0923 327
Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

 For communication with the control desks by default the TLS bind port 19000 in incoming direction
is used. This can be custom configured via CCT 800. Make sure the port is reachable via the network.

NOTES:
 Up to 10 queues can be set up per Intercom server.
 Up to 10 Symphony Control Desks can be set up per Intercom server.
 A control desk can either be set up as a classic control desk or as a Symphony Control Desk. SIP-C
stations of types id5 and od5 can be configured as Symphony Control Desk.

Configuration CCT 800

The configuration in CCT 800 is described below. For further information, see the product manual “Sys-
tem Functions”. For details about configuring video, see page 493.

Basic configuration
 Activate the option “Mode answer call” for the VirtuoSIS Master. For further information, see
page 464.
 Register all stations via SIP at the Intercom server. For further information, see page 149.
 Determine the control desks’ MAC addresses. For further information, see the product manuals
“id5” or “od5”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Authentication.
 Enter the MAC Address.

NOTE:
Configuration of “Authentication ID” and “Password” is mandatory. For further information, see
page 487.

Set up a queue
 Go to: VirtuoSIS Master > Symphony Control Desk Service > Queues > <serial number> -
VirtuoSIS.
 Right click and choose Add queue.
 An input field appears. Enter Queue Name.

Add subscribers to the queue

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Add queues.
 Click Add queues. A dialogue opens.
 Click right and select Add queue.
 Choose a queue in Queues.

 Select a permission level in the field Permission.

 Subscribe (as receiver of calls) or
 Transfer (to the queue) or
 Subscribe & Transfer (receiver of calls and for transferring calls to the queue).

328 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

 Leave the dialogue with the button Close. The field Queues and Permissions [Queue:Permission] dis-
plays the settings chosen.

GOOD TO KNOW: Copying queues and permissions

The copy function allows to transfer an already configured entry in the field Queues and Permis-
sions [Queue:Permission] to other stations:
 Select the field Queues and Permissions [Queue:Permission] of an already configured subscriber.
Copy with either the key combination Ctrl-C or the context menu Copy “Queues and Permissions”.
Copying is supported for SIP-C subscribers, which are not configured as classic control desks, for
Symphony Control Desk call requests or for classic call requests.
 Select one or more non-configured fields in the column Queues and Permissions [Queue:Permis-
sion]. Paste with either the key combination Ctrl-V or the context menu Paste “Queues and Per-
missions”. Pasting is supported for the same kinds of subscribers as copying, as long as they are
located in the same VirtuoSIS Master.
 If the contents of already configured fields are to be deleted, select an empty field as the source of
the copy operation.

Communication to the control desks

 Go to: VirtuoSIS Master > Network Settings.
 Depending on the setup of the network, note IP Address or Hostname.

NOTE:
If an IP address is used to configure the Control Desk Service, then it must also be used for SIP
registration. If DNS is used, the hostname is entered for the Control Desk Service and the SIP server
as well.

 Go to: VirtuoSIS Master > Symphony Control Desk Service.

 Select Fingerprint and copy with Ctrl-C.
 Enter the Fingerprint in the Control Desk. For further information, see the product manuals “id5” or
“od5”.

Call request to queues

Configure call request
 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Add call targets.
 Select Add Call Targets. A dialogue opens.
 Right click and select Add Call Targets.

 Select a queue from Queues.

 Choose a Priority.
 The default value for the call target is displayed in the field Call Target for Calling Device. Leave the
dialogue with the button Close.
 The field Call Target for Calling Device [Queue:Priority:Call Target for Calling Device] displays the
call targets chosen.

3.1/0923 329
Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

 The Call Target needs to be set up in the call requests issuing station. For further information, see
the product manuals “Symphony MX” and “Symphony BF”.

GOOD TO KNOW: Copying Call Targets for Calling Devices

The copy function allows to transfer an already configured entry in the field Call Target for Calling
Device [Queue:Priority:Call Target for Calling Device] to other stations:
 Select the field Call Target for Calling Device [Queue:Priority:Call Target for Calling Device] of an
already configured subscriber. Copy with either the key combination Ctrl-C or the context menu
Copy “Call Targets for Calling Device”. Copying is supported for SIP-C subscribers, which are not
configured as classic control desks, for Symphony Control Desk call requests or for classic call re-
quests.
 Select one or more non-configured fields in the column Call Target for Calling Device [Queue:Pri-
ority:Call Target for Calling Device]. Paste with either the key combination Ctrl-V or the context
menu Paste “Call Targets for Calling Device”. Pasting is supported for the same kinds of subscrib-
ers as copying, as long as they are located in the same VirtuoSIS Master.
 If the contents of already configured fields are to be deleted, select an empty field as the source of
the copy operation.

Parking a call

VirtuoSIS

LICENCE L-SIS-13 Feature VirtuoSIS 13.x - Extend Symphony Control Desk Service by call parking
From VirtuoSIS 13.0, stations running Symphony MX software version 3.5 can park active calls.
For more information on operating the device, see the product manual “Symphony MX”.

A call that has already been accepted can be returned to the queue where it originated from by the
Symphony MX device. It can now be accepted again by subscribers of the queue.

No configuration needed.

Putting a call on-hold

VirtuoSIS

LICENCE L-SIS-13 Feature VirtuoSIS 13.x - Extend Symphony Control Desk Service by feature “on-hold”
From VirtuoSIS 13.2, stations running Symphony MX software version 3.7 can hold calls. For
more information on operating the device, see the product manual “Symphony MX”.

A call that has already been accepted can be kept on-hold by the Symphony MX device. It can later be
restored from that state.

No configuration needed.

Call request to classic control desk

VirtuoSIS

LICENCE L-SIS-13 Feature VirtuoSIS 13.x - Symphony Control Desk Service call request to classic control desk
With this feature, it is possible to display and handle call requests of the Symphony Control Desk
Service on classic control desks.

Call priorities of queues are mapped to classic call priorities:

 Priority “Emergency” equals classic call type “Emergency call”
 Priorities “Normal”, “High”, “Medium” and “Low” equal classic call type “Normal call”

330 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Requests > sub-folder subscriber > tab Control Desks
 Right-click and select the desired control desk via “Add Control Desk”.
About configuring classic control desks see page 332.

Line fault monitoring for call initiators

VirtuoSIS Feature VirtuoSIS 13.x - Line fault monitoring on classic control desks for Symphony SIP-C call
LICENCE L-SIS-13
initiators
With this feature, it is possible to activate line fault monitoring for Symphony SIP-C call initiators.
Line faults are displayed on the assigned classic control desk.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Line monitoring > tab Line monitoring.
 Activate checkbox “Line monitoring” for the subscriber.

3.1/0923 331
 Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

Definition of a classic control desk

In contrast to a normal Intercom station, an EE 311/EE 411 control desk shows the following display in
the idle state:

If a conversation is built up or if a call request or input message comes in, the display text of the calling
Intercom station or input is displayed.

ATTENTION:
Configured control desks require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of the
memory capacity can be found on page 549!

ATTENTION:
Devices of type “Non-audio ICCNA“ cannot be used as control desks.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Buzzer
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add control desk function”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Extended Settings
  Idle display at control desk function: Activate this checkbox to display the call number of the control
desk in the idle display.

GOOD TO KNOW: Recommendation

It is recommend to configure max. 8 control desks per Intercom-Server resp. VirtuoSIS-Instance.

 Control desk
Several control desks can be configured to indicate the call requests or input messages from one or all
Intercom stations or inputs.

ATTENTION:
When configuring Intercom Servers with server IDs higher than 100, the control desk call numbers are
restricted to a maximum of four digits!

 Buzzer
For each control desk, the buzzer for indication of call requests and input messages can be configured
separately. For DSP stations, different tone signals can be defined instead of the buzzer (see page 374).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Buzzer
 Buzzer-mode: Select the desired radio button to define the indication of call requests and input
messages. The following options are available:
 Normal: The buzzer sounds until an incoming call request or input message is taken over.
 Single with repetition: The buzzer sounds once with call 1/active 1 or four times with call 2/active
2, but is repeated every 16 seconds.
 Single without repetition: The buzzer sounds once with call 1/active 1 or four times with
call 2/active 2.
 Buzzer during conversation Normal call/Emergency call: Activate this checkbox to indicate the
buzzer of the control desk immediately during a conversation. If this checkbox is deactivated, a call
of this call type is not indicated before the conversation is cancelled.

332 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

 Buzzer via output: In this field, the call number of an output can be entered, that is closed either in
parallel to the buzzer or instead of the buzzer.
 Buzzer via output Normal call/Emergency call: Activate this checkbox to announce a call of the
respective call type via an output, which is selected in the field Buzzer via output.
 Buzzer at station Normal call/Emergency call: Activate this checkbox to announce a call of the
respective call type with the buzzer of the control station.

 Red lamp at buzzer

Additionally to the buzzer the red lamp of the station can be switched to indicate incoming calls.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Buzzer
 Activate the checkbox Red lamp at buzzer for the respective control desk.

 Call indication
For each control desk, the call indication of call requests and input messages can be configured
separately.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Extended Settings
 Call indication during conversation normal call: Activate this checkbox to indicate incoming normal
calls immediately at the display during a conversation. If this checkbox is deactivated, a normal call
will not be indicated before the conversation is cancelled.
 Call indication during conversation emergency call / Line fault: Activate this checkbox to indicate
incoming emergency calls or line faults immediately at the display during a conversation. If this
checkbox is deactivated, an emergency call or line fault will not be indicated before the conversation
is cancelled.
 Line faults with video: Activate this checkbox in order to display video during a line fault (if available)
at the respective control desk.

 Acoustic and visual indication of call requests

If several call requests or input messages come in at the same time, up to 60 calls can be stored per
control station. If more than this number of calls come in, the remaining calls are not stored. If several
call requests are waiting, this is indicated in the following way:
 Dot-matrix-display / WS 800 / WS 810:
The first three call requests (the call requests with the highest priority) are indicated. The number of
waiting call requests is also indicated.
 EE 311A / EE 411:
The first call request (the call request with the highest priority) is indicated blinking in the display.
 Call 1 (normal call) is indicated with standing display (EE 311/EE 411) or framed with “=====” (EE
811), buzzer with long interval and blinking conversation lamp.
 Call 2 (emergency call) is indicated with flashing display (EE 311/EE 411) or framed with “*****”
(EE 811), buzzer with short interval and blinking conversation lamp.

3.1/0923 333
Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Call Request
Parkdeck 1
======== 20 ========
Elevator
******** 57 ********
Machine Room
-------- 35 --------
œLine 1/3 ›Take Call

EE 311A / EE 411

It is possible to take one call after another at the control station using button F without having to
cancel between the conversations. The calls are sorted in order of priority, calls with equal priority are
sorted in order of time. It is also possible to select any call with the buttons D and E and then take it
over with button F without keeping to the order.

334 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

 Call request to a control desk station

Any button of an Intercom station, except button X and the function keys, can be configured as call
button for a call request to a control station. Two different types of call requests can be configured: Call
1 (normal call) and Call 2 (emergency call). Both call types can be initiated from one Intercom station
with different buttons.

ATTENTION:
 Configured call requests require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server. A list of the
memory capacity can be found on page 549!
 A maximum of 509 call requests can be configured for each subscriber card (as of PRO 800 1.1 see
page 548)!
 Each Intercom Server can store a maximum of 1300 call requests (for all control desks together)!
 Call requests from one control desk to another control desk are not possible!

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Trigger

NOTE: Asterisk after client address

The '*' at the end of the clients address is set if the client is occupied with one of the following func-
tions: Alarm triggering, Call Request, Audio channel - allocation, Feed-in Music, Feed-in Radio con-
ference, Video, Remote Stations and Attendant contact. There's no special function or behaviour
coupled with this sign. It only shows one of the listed functions is configured.

 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Call Request”.

NOTE: Function extension with PRO 800 1.2

The functions Trigger key 3, Call type for trigger key 3 and Snapshot at key 3 are available
with PRO 800 1.2 or higher.

 Trigger key no.: In this drop-down lists, the call button to initiate a call request can be selected (but-
ton 0 to 9, T).
 Call type for trigger key no.: In this drop-down list, the call type can be selected for the call request,
which is triggered by the selected button in the drop-down list Trigger key.

NOTE: Call requests have higher priority

Call request has higher priority as dialling. The button used for triggering the call request is no
longer available for dialling.

 Snapshot at key no.: Activate this checkbox to save a snapshot at a video station whenever the
respective button is triggered, which is selected in the drop-down list Trigger key.

NOTE: Further information about snapshots

For further information about snapshots, see the product manual “Video WS”.

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Requests > sub-folder subscriber > tab Control Desks
 Right-click and select the desired control desk via “Add Control Desk”.

 Disable after dialling

“Disable after dialling” should be configured for stations, where unskilled personnel initiate calls, to
avoid wrong dialling. After a call request is issued, all dialling except X is ignored.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter
 Activate the checkbox Disable after-dialling for the respective subscriber.

3.1/0923 335
 Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

 No new call after repeated initiation

It is possible to disable the possibility of reissuing call requests. This can make sense if the control desk
is dialled via a G-TEL or S0 connection causing call charges.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Control desk system
 Activate the checkbox No new call on new trigger.

 Waiting information (audio signal) after initiating a call request

During a call request, waiting information can be fed in using a previously configured radio channel
(see page 287). The calling station receives the waiting information until the call is taken over.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter
 Calm down signal normal call and Calm down signal emergency call: In these drop-down lists, a ra-
dio channel or DSP tone can be selected for the calling subscriber (only configured radio channels
available).
 Standard (red lamp): No waiting information, only the red lamp blinks.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Control desk system
 Call-park without calm down signal: Activate this checkbox to prevent a calm down signal from be-
ing output to subscribers that are “parked” using the classic method at the control desk.

 Output contacts for call requests

One or several outputs can be configured as output contact for the calling station (e.g. for light call
signalling in nursing homes and hospitals).

 Group contacts and collective contacts for call requests

The same output can also be configured for several Intercom stations. This contact is closed as soon
as a station of this group initiates a call.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > sub-folder subscriber > tab Attendant Contacts
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

 Normal Call: Activate this checkbox to close the selected contact during a “Call 1”.
 Emergency Call: Activate this checkbox to close the selected contact during a “Call 2”.
 Line-fault: Activate this checkbox to close the selected contact during a line fault.
 Parking: Activate this checkbox to activate the selected contact as long as a call request is parked at
the control desk (see page 337). The switch type of the respective contact can be selected in the drop-
down list switch type.

NOTE:
The respective attendant contact remains active at a parked emergency call.

336 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

 Switch type: In this drop-down list, the switch type can be selected for the respective attendant
contact (standard, constant, blinking (1 Hz; 500 ms on/500 ms off) and fast blinking (2 Hz, 250 ms on/
250 ms off)). If the option “standard” is selected, the following switch types apply:
 Normal Call (Call 1): The contact stays closed until the call is deleted.
 Emergency Call (Call 2): The contact opens and closes until the call is deleted.
 Line-fault: The contact opens and closes until the line-fault has been fixed and acknowledged.

 Classic call park function

If a call request is taken over at the control desk a conversation is built up. If this call is parked with the
button 2 or 3, the call remains in the display as a reminder that there is still something to do. With F
the call can be built up once again. If this call is cancelled with X, the classic call park function is can-
celled.
The classic call park function can be initiated after taking over:
 a normal call (Call 1),
 an emergency call (Call 2) without Cancel on Site (see page 337) or
 a previously classic “parked” call.

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

 Cancel emergency calls on site

With this function, call 2 (emergency call) cannot be cancelled at the control desk, only acknowledged.
The buzzer is switched off, the display indication remains, the red lamp lights at the calling station as
acknowledgement for the caller. The call has to be cancelled with X at the calling station. It is also
possible to define that the call has to be acknowledged at the control desk before it can be cancelled
on site with X. Call 1 (normal call) can be cancelled with button X at the calling station as well as at
the control desk by building up a conversation. Via special configuration it is possible to define that
emergency calls has to be parked with button 2 or 3 in order for them to be cancelled on site with X.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter
 Activate the checkbox Cancel on site with [X] for the calling subscriber.

 NOTE:
For call requests for telephone interfaces S0, TEL and IAX, the checkbox Cancel on site with [X]
is automatically activated.

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX> General > tab Control desk system
 Clear emergency call only after acknowledgement. Activate this checkbox to cancel emergency calls
on site with button X only after these calls have been acknowledged at the control desk.
 Delete on site: Activate this checkbox to cancel call requests on site with button X only after these
have been accepted and parked with button 2 at the control desk.
  Delete “Call 2” on control desk at “Delete on site”: Activate this checkbox to delete emergency calls
at control desks in the respective Intercom Server block without pressing the button X at the initia-
tor.

Trigger call requests only via ICX commands

As of CCT 800 7.1 it is possible to trigger call requests only via ICX commands. Further information
about ICX commands to trigger call requests can be found in the product manual “ICX Protocol”. Fol-
low the instructions below.

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Trigger
2. In the drop-down list Trigger key no. of the desired call type, select the entry “----”.

3.1/0923 337
 Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

 In the drop-down list Call type for trigger key no. to the right, select the desired call type, which must
be simulated by the incoming ICX command to trigger this call request.

De-bounce for releasing call

Feature PRO 800 2.1 – de-bounce for releasing call
PRO 800 By using the function call requests will only be set up after a certain amount of receptions of
LICENCE PRO2U key presses or after a definable time of stable press of the release button.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Delayed activation
 Number keystrokes: In this drop-down list, the number of keystrokes to trigger the call request can
be selected. The drop-down lists Duration keypress [s] and Time for resetting delayed mode [s] are
enabled.
 Duration keypress [s]: In this drop-down list, the time of the permanently keystroke to trigger the call
request can be selected.
 Time for resetting delayed mode [s]: In this drop-down list, the time can be selected.
 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Pre-Recorded Audio

Call request with confirmation

 Feature PRO 800 2.1 – call request with confirmation
 PRO 800
When pressed for the first time, a voice memo will be played. If the shutter button is pressed
LICENCE PRO2U again during the playback of this voice memo, the call request is triggered. If the shutter button
is not confirmed again until the end of the voice memo, the call request is not triggered, but
the whole process is restarted.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Pre-recorded audio
 Call release confirmation Normal Call [ID]: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be
entered, which will be played back at the initiator as long as the call request of an emergency call
has not been acknowledged at the control desk.
 Call release confirmation Emergency Call [ID]: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be
entered, which will be played back at the initiator as long as the call request of an emergency call
has not been acknowledged at the control desk.

ATTENTION:
The call request is only triggered if the second key press (to confirm the call triggering) takes place
while the voice memo is playing. The voice memo must therefore contain sufficient ”empty time”
at the end, so that the end user gets time to press the call button again.

338 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

 Indication of input messages to a control desk

The switch steps of activated inputs can be shown at a control desk in the display and/or with the buzz-
er. Depending on the configuration and cabling of the inputs, 5 different switch steps can be indicated
(only inputs on a plug-in card Gx-8E8A or Gx-16E or ET8E9A):
 Idle mode
 Active 1 (equivalent to a “normal call”)
 Active 2 (equivalent to an “emergency call”)
 Short circuit
 Line fault
Inputs on the motherboard G1-GEM/G3-GEM, on the power supply card G8-GEN or internal inputs of
a station can indicate only 2 switch steps):
Activation of the internal inputs of a station see page 233. An input message is acknowledged (like a
call request) at the control desk with button F.

ATTENTION:
 Configured input messages require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of the
memory capacity can be found on page 549!
 A maximum of 509 input messages can be configured for each input/output card (as of PRO 800 1.1
see page 548)!

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > Input message
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add input message”.
 Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Triggering
 In the drop-down lists Break, 15k, 5k6, 1k5 and Short, the desired switch steps for the respective in-
put level can be selected that be shown at a control desk in the display and/or with the buzzer.
 Go to: Inputs > Input message > sub-folder input > tab Control Desks
 Right-click and select the desired control desk via “Add Control Desk”.

 Acknowledgement of input messages

For each switch step of an input it can be configured if a message can be deleted with F at the control
desk, or only acknowledged, while the input is still active.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Operations for Active 1 / Active 2 / Error
 Input becomes inactive when call is still active: In this drop-down list, the type to acknowledge an
input message can be selected when the respective input becomes inactive when the call is still ac-
tive.
 Acknowledgement when input is still active: In this drop-down list, the type to acknowledge an input
message can be selected when the respective input is still active.
 Acknowledgement when input is inactive: In this drop-down list, the type to acknowledge an input
message can be selected when the respective input is inactive.
 Snapshot: Activate this checkbox to save a snapshot at a video station whenever an input message
of this type is initiated (allocation of camera to input at Inputs > General Settings).

Display indication
If an input message is acknowledged, the display changes from “==============” or
“**************” to “--------------” (see page 333).

3.1/0923 339
Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

“Only Active 1” or “Only Active 2”

Two different switch steps can be indicated: “Idle” and “Active 1” or “Idle” and “Active 2”.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Triggering
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add input message”.
 With default wiring definitions, the following wiring method can be used:
IN

Active 1
or
Active 2

 In the drop-down list break, select the option “Idle” and in the drop-down list short, select either the
option “Active 1” or “Active 2”.

“Active 1 and Active 2” and line fault monitoring

Five different switch steps can be indicated: “Idle”, “Active 1”, “Active 2”, “line break” and “short
circuit”.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Triggering
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add input message”.
 With the wiring definitions, one of the following wiring methods can be used (select in the drop-
down lists break: Error, 15k: Idle, 5k6: Active 1, 1k5: Active 2 or short: Error):
IN

2k2 10k

Method 1: 15k

Active 2 Active 1

IN
2k2 6k8

Method 2: 15k Active 2 Active 1

Cancel on site
With this function the input is provided with a flip-flop feature; e.g. with short activation of “Active 1”
or “Active 2” a call is initiated to the control desk in the respective call mode. A call cannot be deleted
from the control desk, but has to be reset by a further level at the input. This is used e.g. in retirement
homes and hospitals where a call has to be reset on site of release, or e.g. with detectors which have
to be reset on the site of release. This function can be configured for all or for single switch steps of an
input.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Triggering
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add input message”.

340 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

 With the wiring definitions one of the following wiring methods can be used (select in the drop-down
lists break: Error, 15k: Idle, 5k6: Active 1, 1k5: Active 2 or short: Active 2):
IN

2k2 10k

Method 1: 15k

Active 2 Active 1 Reset

IN
2k2 6k8

Method 2: 15k Active 2 Active 1 Reset

In this case, also line faults are indicated. Short circuit is equal to a permanent emergency call
(Active 2).
 Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Operations for Active 1/Active 2/Error
 Input becomes inactive when call is still active: In this drop-down list, the type to acknowledge an
input message can be selected when the respective input becomes inactive when the call is still ac-
tive.
 Acknowledgement when input is still active: In this drop-down list, the type to acknowledge an input
message can be selected when the respective input is still active.
 Acknowledgement when input is inactive: In this drop-down list, the type to acknowledge an input
message can be selected when the respective input is inactive.
 Snapshot: Activate this checkbox to save a snapshot at a video station whenever an input message
of this type is initiated (allocation of camera to input at Inputs > General Settings).
 Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Triggering
 In the drop-down list of an input state (break, 15k, 5k6, 1k5 or short), the option “Reset” has to be
selected for at least one input state. Otherwise, a state cannot be deleted.
 In the drop-down list of an input state (break, 15k, 5k6, 1k5 or short), the option “Idle for cancel on
site” has to be selected for the idle state (instead of the option “Idle”).

 Acoustic and visual indication of input messages

For each switch step of an input it is possible to define if the input is indicated at the control desk only
in the display or also with buzzer. Indication of a certain switch step can also be completely deactivated.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Call types
 Active 1: In this drop-down list, the call type of this switch step can be selected for the respective
input. In order to enable this drop-down list, the option “Active 1” has to be selected for at least one
input level of the respective input.
 Active 2: In this drop-down list, the call type of this switch step can be selected for the respective
input. In order to enable this drop-down list, the option “Active 2” has to be selected for at least one
input level of the respective input.
 Error: In this drop-down list, the call type of this switch step can be selected for the respective input.
In order to enable this drop-down list, the switch step “Error” has to be selected for at least one input
level of the respective input.

NOTE:
If e.g. for “Active 1” buzzer indication is configured, but at the buzzer definition of the control desk
“Normal call” is configured without buzzer, “Active 1” will be indicated without buzzer (see
page 359).

3.1/0923 341
 Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

 Go to: Inputs > General Settings

 Display text EE311/EE411: In this field, an up to 6 character long text can be entered, which are indi-
cated in the display of the control desk EE311/EE411 (possible characters see page 171).
 Display text EE811A & camera: In this field, an up to 14 digits long station name can be
enteredentered, which will be indicated in the display of the central control station EE811.

Display indication
Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display

Call Request
CO2-Alarm CO2-Alarm
************** ← “Active 2”
******** 57 ******** Schranken ← “Active 1”
Barrier ==============
======== 20 ========
œZeile 1/2
› Annehmen
œLine 1/2 ›Take Call

 Indication of input messages via blinking conversation LED

An input message from an input with a 4-digit call number beginning with “94” is not indicated with
the buzzer, but with a blinking conversation LED. The call can be configured without buzzer and display
indication, otherwise an acknowledgement would have to be made.

NOTE:
If the function “Indication of Input Messages via blinking conversation LED” is used, the function code
for “Call transfer control desk” has to be changed in order to avoid a collision of call numbers.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > General Settings
 Go to: In the field Call number, change the call number of the respective input to “94xx”.
 Inputs > Input message > tab Call types
 In the drop-down list Active 1, select either the entry “call type 10”(no display, no buzzer) or “call
type 13” (only display indication).
 In the drop-down list Active 2, select either the entry “call type 11”(no display, no buzzer) or “call
type 15” (only display indication).
 Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Operations for Active 1 or Active 2
 in the drop-down list Input becomes inactive when call is still active, select the entry “Quit call” for
the respective input.

 Output contacts for input messages

One or several outputs can be configured as output contact for an input message (e.g. for light call
signalling in retirement homes / hospitals). A maximum of 509 output contacts for input messages can
be configured for each input/output card (as of PRO 800 1.1 see page 548).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > Input message > sub-folder input > tab Attendant contacts
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.

342 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

 Active 1: Activate this checkbox, to indicate the switch step “Active 1” at the respective control desk.
 Active 2: Activate this checkbox, to indicate this switch step “Active 2” at the respective control desk.
 Error: Activate this checkbox, to indicate this switch step “Error” at the respective control desk.
 Switch type: In this drop-down list, the switch type can be selected for the respective output (stand-
ard, constant, blinking (1 Hz; 500 ms on/500 ms off) and fast blinking (2 Hz, 250 ms on/250 ms off)).

NOTE:
The same output can also be configured for several inputs. In this case the contact is closed as soon
as an input message from this group comes in.

 Acknowledge input messages with conversation

It is possible to define that at acknowledgement of an input message a conversation to a definable
station is built up. Per input one call number can be defined.

Application
Input messages can be used similar to call requests when more than two call buttons are required.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Triggering
 Call quits input: In this field, the according call numbers can be entered for the respective input.

NOTE:
 A call request has to be configured for the subscriber, to which a call is made for acknowl-
edgement. Further information about the configuration of call requests can be found on page 335.
 The respective subscriber and the input have to be allocated in the same Intercom Server.

3.1/0923 343
 Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

 Line fault monitoring

 Line fault monitoring for a subscriber
For each Intercom station allocated to a control desk, the line fault monitoring can be configured. A line
fault is indicated at the allocated control desk with a buzzer with short interval and in the display as
follows:
 Dot-matrix display:
A line fault is indicated with a row of stars, e.g.:

Call Request
Elevator Elevator
******** 54 ******** **************

œLine 1/1 ›Take Call › Take Call

 EE 311A / EE 411:
Blinking with an arrow “®:” and the calling number of the monitored Intercom station, e.g.:

If the line fault is acknowledged at the control desk with button F the buzzer is switched off, the display
remains blinking until the line fault is removed. When the line fault has been fixed, this event must be
acknowledged at the control desk by pressing the button F.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Call Request”.
 Activate the checkbox Line Monitoring for the respective subscriber.
 Go to: Subscriber > Call Requests > sub-folder subscriber > tab Control Desks
 Right-click and select the desired control desk via “Add Control Desk”.

 Time delay of line monitoring

The delay time of line monitoring can be defined individually for each subscriber.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common
 Line-monitoring-delay time [s]: In this drop-down list, the delay time to trigger the line-monitoring
can be selected for the respective subscriber.

 Automatic acknowledgement of line faults


Feature PRO 800 4.0 – automatic acknowledge of fixed line faults
Fixed line faults will be acknowledged automatically and must not be acknowledged manually
at the control desk by pressing the button F.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter
 Activate the checkbox Automatic acknowledgement of line faults for the respective subscriber.

344 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

 Line fault monitoring for an input

If an input is defined for line fault monitoring (cabling see page 340), a line fault is indicated at the
allocated control desk with buzzer with short interval and in the display as follows:

dot-matrix display: A line fault is indicated EE 311A/EE 411:

by a row of stars, e.g.: Blinking with “IN:” and the calling number of
the monitored input, e.g.:

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display EE 311A/EE 411

Call Request
CO Sensor CO Sensor
******* D114 ******* **************

› Take Call
œLine 1/1 ›Take Call

If the line fault is acknowledged at the control desk with button F the buzzer is switched off, the display
remains blinking until the line fault is removed.

 Snapshot in case of line fault

In case of a line fault, a snapshot can be saved at a video station.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter
 Activate the checkbox Snapshot at line-fault for the respective subscriber.

NOTE:
For further information about snapshots, see the product manual “Video WS”.

3.1/0923 345
 Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

Expansion module
 Expansion Bus error

If the expansion module will be removed during operation from the main module (see below), the error
will be indicated within 64 seconds at the respective control desk. If the main module is not in operation
(e.g. power failure), the error will be indicated within 64 seconds after the restart or re-registration of
the main module at the Intercom Server. In the meantime, line fault errors of the main module will not
be indicated.

Requirements
Intercom Server software:
 PRO 800 min. 5.0
Configuration software:
 CCT 800 min. 5.0

Requirements for main module (DSP device)

The following firmware types are supported:
 DSP 800A
 DSP 800B
 DSP 900A
 DSP 900B
 IoIP device

Requirements for main module (amplifier)

The following firmware versions are supported:
 AF-I min. 5.6
 AF-D min. 1.6

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common
 Error for missing device: In this drop-down list, the state of the function can be selected for the re-
spective expansion module. The following states are available:
 Auto: The state of this function (on, off) is select by the expansion module. The current state of the
function is indicated in the brackets.

NOTE:
Receive the CCT 800 configuration to indicate the current state of the function.

 Off: This function is disabled.

 On: This function is enabled.

 Expansion Bus restart


If the main module executes a restart (e.g. re-registration at the Intercom Server, restart), this function
prevents a restart of the connected expansion module. A cold start of the expansion module is still pos-
sible.

Requirements
Intercom Server software:
 PRO 800 min. 5.0
Configuration software:
 CCT 800 min. 5.0

346 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

Requirements for main module (DSP device)

The following firmware types are supported:
 DSP 800A
 DSP 800B
 DSP 900A
 DSP 900B
 IoIP device

Requirements for main module (amplifier)

The following firmware versions are supported:
 AF-I min. 5.6
 AF-D min. 1.6

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common
 Prevent restart: In this drop-down list, the state of the function can be selected for the respective ex-
pansion module. The following states are available:
 Auto: The state of this function (on, off) is select by the expansion module. The current state of the
function is indicated in the brackets.

NOTE:
Receive the CCT 800configuration to indicate the current state of the function (see page 80).

 Off: This function is disabled.

 On: This function is enabled.

3.1/0923 347
 Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

 Reactivation of control desk calls

It is possible to define a time for call requests and input messages, after which they switch back to
status “active”.

Maximum time: 98304 seconds (about 27 hours). This is valid for:

 Acknowledged emergency calls with “Cancel on site with X”.
 Acknowledged line faults.
 Input messages (for which an acknowledged state is configured).

Exceptions
 This function is not available for “parked” normal calls.
 It is not possible to differ between call types (e.g. it cannot be defined that an acknowledged call
becomes active again, a parked call at this subscriber however not).
 It is also not possible to define per control desk if call requests become active again-only per call in-
itiator/input (it is not possible that, e.g. an input is switched back to “active” at control desk “101”,
but not at control desk “102”).

NOTE:
After confirmation of line faults or input faults, in general the faults are remain active until the
problem is solved.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Automatic end of call / Reactivation, or Inputs > In-
put message > tab Triggering
 Reactivation time Emergency calls and Errors [s]: In this field, the time can be entered, after which
call requests or input messages of an emergency call or errors are reactivated (0 = no reactivation of
calls).
  Reactivation time Normal calls [s]: In this field, the time can be entered, after which call requests or
input messages of a normal call is reactivated (0 = no reactivation of calls).

NOTE:
If the conversation of an emergency call with “Cancel on site with [X]” is longer than the configured
reactivation time, a buzzer is audible at the control desk during the conversation every 16 seconds.

348 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

 Cancelling control desk calls after time

It is possible to define a time for call requests and input messages after which they are automatically
deleted. Maximum time: 98304 seconds = about 27 hours; is not valid for line faults. The timer starts
when e.g. a call is initiated.

The timer does NOT start when:

 a call is acknowledged.
 acknowledgement of a line fault.
 reactivation of a call after time.
 call transfer to an other control desk.

The timer restart when:

 the call is initiated again,
 the call button is pressed again,
 a call is converted into a call request,
 Classic “Call Park” function,
 or cancel of classic “Call Park” function.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Automatic end of call / Reactivation or
Inputs > Input message
 Automatic end of call Emergency calls [s]: In this field, the time can be entered, after which the call
requests or input messages of an emergency call or error is automatically deleted (0 = no automatic
cancel of calls).
  Automatic end of call Normal calls [s]: In this field, the time can be entered, after which the call re-
quests or input messages of a normal call is automatically deleted (0 = no automatic cancel of calls).

 Pre-recorded audio for automatically ending call


It is possible to play back pre-recorded audio when the timeout for a call request expires (e.g. at
information points: “At the moment there are no available operators. Please press the call button again
or try later”). Different pre-recorded messages can be used for Normal calls and Emergency calls.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Pre-recorded audio
 Automatic end of call Normal calls [s]: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be entered,
which is played back at the time out of a normal call.
 Automatic end of call Emergency calls [s]: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be en-
tered, which is played back at the time out of an emergency call.

 Pre-recorded audio for call suppression of call requests


Different pre-recorded messages can be played back at call suppression of normal calls and emergency
calls.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Pre-recorded audio
 Call Suppression (Normal calls): In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be entered, which
is played back at call suppression of normal calls.
 Call Suppression (Emergency calls): In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be entered,
which is played back at call suppression of emergency calls.

3.1/0923 349
 Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

 Manual call transfer

Call groups
The different call requests and input messages can be transferred either to one common target or
selectively to different targets. The call transfer is activated with a code including the group number of
the call types.
Group Call type
1 Call 1”: Normal call from an Intercom station
2 Call 2”: Emergency call from an Intercom station
All Call requests: All Call requests from Intercom stations (as of Pro 05.5 incl. classic parked
3
calls)
4 All input messages without buzzer
5 Active 1”: Normal call from an input (with buzzer)
6 Active 2”: Emergency call from an input (with buzzer)
7 All input messages with buzzer
8 Line faults (from Intercom stations and inputs)
9 All Call types (as of Pro 05.5 incl. classic parked calls)

Activate the call transfer

The call transfer is activated with codes that can be dialled as follows:
 Direct dialling at the control desk (the code has to be defined by Direct Dialling, which makes it
possible to entitle single stations for call transfer).
 Select from the function list B at a station with dot-matrix display.
 Press a configured button at a control desk.
 Dialling simulation of an input.
 With an ICX message from a PC.
 The prefix “94” activates an additional call transfer. Each control desk several call transfers can be
activated at the same time. If different transfers are defined for the same call type, the last activated
transfer is valid.
 The prefix “95” cancels all previous call transfers and activates only the new one.
Prefix Code Group Parameter Function
94 / 95 -0- X -
Selective deleting of taking of calls or
94 / 95 -4- X Call no. target control desk
parallel indication
Call transfer
Prefix Code Group Parameter Function
94 / 95 -1- X Call no. target control desk Call transfer to another control desk
94 / 95 -2- X Button Call transfer direct dialling
94 / 95 -3- X 0 Suppression Call Activation
94 / 95 -3- X 1 Deactivate buzzer
94 / 95 -3- X 2 Deactivate call indication
Transform normal call to emergency
94 / 95 -3- X 3
call 1)
1)
For inputs special configuration is required see page 352.

350 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

Parallel indication taking of calls

Prefix Code Group Parameter Function
Parallel indication at another control
94 / 95 -5- X Call no. target control desk
desk
Call no. source control Taking of Calls from another control
94 / 95 -6- X
desk desk
94 / 95 -7- X Call no. station Parallel indication at a regular station

ATTENTION:
Call transfers activated with a code are cancelled if the Intercom Server is switched off of restarted
or the control desk is restarted (with F + X)!

Indication in the display if call requests or input messages are (at least partially) transferred to another
control desk (with 94-1-Grp-target no.):

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display EE 311A/EE 411

->102 -->102
Transfer
Transfer
F1-Subscribers
F2-Functions
F3-Main Menu
d-Menu

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 Direct dialling: In this field, enter one of the following direct dialling codes for the respective
subscriber:
 Direct dialling = Prefix + code + group (if parameter be dialled at the subscriber).
 Direct dialling = Prefix + code + group + parameter (if nothing be dialled at the subscriber).

 Types of call transfer

Cancel All Call transfers
Code: 94-0-Grp (95...): All Call Transfers, Parallel Indications and taking of calls are cancelled. Taking of
calls activated at another control desk remains active.

Call transfer to another control desk

Code: 94-1-Grp-Target (95...): All Call types belonging to the selected group are transferred to the
selected. Existing calls are indicated parallel at both control desks. In case of day/night transfer (see
page 355) existing calls are indicated only at the target control desk after activation of the transfer.

Call transfer direct dialling

Code: 94-2-Grp-Button (95...): The direct dialling configured for the selected button of the calling station
is carried out. If “T” is entered for the button, the direct dialling of the call button is carried out. With
this transfer all Intercom functions can be carried out, e.g. transfer to telephone or pager or ringing at
a group).
 If parallel indication at a second control desk is activated, the call transfer direct dialling is not carried
out, the call is indicated only at the parallel control desk.
 “Call Transfer direct dialling” has to be activated for the calling Intercom station, otherwise the Call
Transfer Direct Dialling is not carried out.

3.1/0923 351
Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

Configuration CCT 800

Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter
 Activate the checkbox Call Transfer Direct Dialling for the respective subscriber (changes are ap-
plied at the next active call).

Deactivate call creation

Code: 94-3-Grp-0 (95...): All Calls belonging to the selected group are not created any more (except they
are indicated in parallel at another control desk). Attendant contacts remain inactive too.

Deactivate buzzer
Code: 94-3-Grp-1 (95...): All Calls belonging to the selected group are sent to the control desk and
acknowledged automatically, but not deleted. The calls are still indicated in the display of all called con-
trol desks, but the buzzer is switched off. Attendant contacts are activated as normal.

Deactivate call indication

Code: 94-3-Grp-2 (95...): All Calls belonging to the selected group are not indicated any more at the own
control desk. Indication at other control desks remains unchanged. The calls are active at the calling in-
puts/stations and can be indicated again or transferred to other targets at any time.

Transform normal call to an emergency call

Code: 94-3-Grp-3 (95...): All normal calls are initiated as emergency calls once again. These emergency
calls are indicated at all configured control desks. Attendant contacts are activated like for emergency
calls. This transfer has no effect on existing emergency calls. Input messages active 1 without buzzer
(call types 10 and 13 = call group 4) are converted to active 2 with buzzer and display indication (call
type 7).

NOTE:
Call conversion for inputs is only carried out if “Active 2” is configured for a level (an unused level can
also be used).

Parallel indication at another control desk

Code activate: 94-5-Grp-Target, deactivate: 94-5-Grp-00 (95...): The calls are indicated at both (or more)
control desks. Taking over the calls is possible at each control desk and deletes the calls at all other
control desks.

Taking of calls (calls of another control desk)

Code activate: 94-6-Grp-Source, deactivate: 94-6-Grp-00 (95...): The calls of another control desk are in-
dicated (in parallel) on the own control desk. Taking over the calls is possible at each control desk and
deletes the calls at all other control desks.

Parallel indication at a stations without control desk functionality

Code activate: 94-7-Grp-Target station, deactivate: 94-90 (95...): All Calls/input messages are addition-
ally indicated at a regular station. A station can receive calls from multiple control desks. It is also pos-
sible to execute a parallel indication of a control desk to multiple regular stations.
As acoustic signalization at the receiver the buzzer for “call 1” or “call 2” or the configured DSP tone
for reception Alarm with low or high priority is audible. Visual indication at EE411-display with 6-digit
text, permanent or flashing, and in the EE811 display with call number and the 14-digit long text:

352 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display EE 311A/EE 411

214 214
Main Entrance
Main Entrance

› Take Call
›Take Call
Only the call with the to most priority is indicated.

ATTENTION:
Only calls with buzzer are indicated. If e.g. an input message is acknowledged, it then is only indicated
at the control desk, however not indicated anymore at the parallel station!

Selective deletion
Code: 94-4-Grp-Target: Activated taking of calls and parallel indication of the respective control desk is
deleted. Taking of calls activated at other control desk remains active.

 Output contact for manual call transfer

For each call transfer type (see page 351), one or several attendant contacts can be defined. The atten-
dant contact remains active until the transferred call is accepted.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add attendant contact”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab PA-Numbers
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information on how to activate device outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549.

 Click on the button Configure PA.

 Right-click and select “Add call no. / function”.
 Enter the codes “9491” to ”9498”.
 Click on the button Add.
 Click on the button Accept to save the changes.
 PA-Numbers: In this field, the configured codes for controlling a PA system are shown.

NOTE:
Several outputs can be configured for the same subscriber with either the same or different codes.

3.1/0923 353
 Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

 Call transfer
This call transfer is permanently active that means if a call is not taken over at the control desk within
a configurable time, the calls are transferred to a pre-configured control desk (or the call type or
indication is changed). Per control desk 8 different call transfers with separate times can be defined. A
group of calls can also be transferred to several control desks. The following transfers/transformations
are possible:
 Call transfer (parallel indication at another control desk)
 Call transfer direct dialling
 Deactivate call creation
 Deactivate buzzer
 Transform normal call to an emergency call
Further information about call transfer types can be found on page 351.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desk > sub-folder subscriber > Call transfer
 Group: In this drop-down list, the call group can be selected for that the transfer is valid (see
page 350). The following fields are enabled.
 Time present [s]: In this field, the time can be entered, after which calls are transferred to the pre-
configured control desk (1 to 1000 seconds (~16 minutes)).
 Time absent [s]: In this field, the time can be entered, after which calls are transferred when at least
one call has already been transferred (1 to 1000 seconds (~16 minutes)).
 The time in the field Time absent [s] is usually defined shorter than in Time present [s]. That
means if calls were already transferred, it is assumed that the operator is not at his place and the
calls are transferred faster. As soon as any button is pressed at the control desk, the time in the
field Time present [s] is valid again.
 Function: In this drop-down list, the type of transfer/transformation to be activated can be selected
(see page 351). If the entry “Call transfer” or ”Call Transfer Direct Dialling” is selected, the field
Parameter Call number will be enabled.
 Parameter Call number: In this field, the call number of the target control desk (for entry “Call Trans-
fers”) or a button of the calling subscriber (“0” to “9” or “T”) can be entered as direct dialling button
(for the entry “Call Transfer Direct Dialling”).
 Day/Night: Select the desired radio button to define how the transfer is activated in daytime and
nighttime operation (see page 355). If no day or night transfer is used, select the radio button “Day”.
The following functions are available:
Settings day/night Transfer daytime operation Transfer nighttime operation
Day after time -
Night (without time) - immediately
both (time for day only) after time immediately
Night (with time) - after time
both (time at day and night) after time after time

ATTENTION:
 Calls with suppressed buzzer are regarded as acknowledged calls, therefore they cannot be
converted!
 Acknowledged calls (e.g. via suppressed buzzer) are not transferred after time!
 The status “absent” for the control desk is active, as soon as all configured call transfers are
expired (longest configured transfer time)!
 If an incoming privacy call will be transformed into a normal call at a control desk, a call transfer
by using the function “Call transfer direct dialling” (see page 351) is not possible!

354 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

 Day/night transfer
A control desk can be switched to night-time mode with a code:
 9499: Switch off (nighttime operation).
 9490: Switch on (daytime operation).
 When switching off with “9599”, all transfers previously defined at the control station will not be
active any more after switching on again. This code can be dialled as follows:
 Direct dialling at the control desk (the code has to be defined by Direct Dialling, which makes it
possible to entitle single stations for switching off).
 Select from the function list B at a station EE811.
 Turning the key switch of a control desk EE880.
 Dialling simulation of an input.
 Over an ICX message from a PC (dialling simulation of the direct dialling)

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 Direct Dialling: In this field, the direct dialling code can be entered for the respective subscriber (e.g.
“T9=9499, T0=9490” (switch off with T9 and switch on with T0)).
 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > sub-folder subscriber > Call transfer
 Day/Night: Select the desired radio button to define how the transfer is activated in daytime and
nighttime operation. If no day or night transfer is used, select the radio button “Day”. The following
functions are available:
Settings day/night Transfer daytime operation Transfer nighttime operation
Day after time -
Night (without time) - immediately
both (time for day only) after time immediately
Night (with time) - after time
both (time at day and night) after time after time

 Output contact for night transfer

For the night transfer, one (or several) attendant contacts can be defined. The attendant contact
remains active, until the transfer is deactivated.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add attendant contact”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab Call no./Function
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 233.

ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

 Click on the button Configure Functions.

 Right-click and select “Add call no. / function”.
 Enter the code ”9499” and click on the button Add to save the code.

3.1/0923 355
 Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

 Click on the button Accept to save the changes.

NOTE:
Several outputs can be configured for the same subscriber with either the same or different codes.

ATTENTION:
 Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!
 The attendant contact is only switched with the standard function code 94! If the function code is
changed (at Intercom Server - Block XX > Function Codes) the contact is not switched!

 Secretary transfer at day/night transfer

It is possible to automatically activate secretary transfer together with day/night transfer.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Transfer parameters
 Activate the checkbox Secretary transfer at night switch for the respective subscriber. Further infor-
mation about secretary transfer can be found on page 264.

356 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

 Call distribution of control desk calls


 A call distribution chain distributes control desk calls addressing a certain control desk to other con-
trol desks. The order of distribution can be configured separately for day and night switching.

NOTE:
The own call number cannot be selected.

GOOD TO KNOW: Recommendation

It is recommend to configure max. 8 control desks per Intercom Server.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Line monitoring > tab Line monitoring
 Offline at line fault: Activate this checkbox to skip the respective control desk if not available.
 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desk > tab Call distribution-day, or Subscriber > Control Desk
> tab Call distribution-night
 Control desk 1 to Control desk 14: In these drop-down lists, the composition of control desks can be se-
lected for the call distribution (min. 2 control desks required). The drop-down list Sequence and field
Timeout [s] are enabled

ATTENTION:
 All control desks in the same distribution chain have to be in the same Intercom Server!
 Certain control desk calls will not be distributed:
 Converted door calls (see page 361),
 Calls without a buzzer (call type 10, 11, 13, 15),
 Parked calls (call type 3).
 Certain control desk calls remain displayed at the control desk after the distribution:
 Reactivated calls after time,
 Parked calls (call type 3),
 Acknowledged calls that remain visible.

 If one or more control desks within the distribution chain have a call number more than 4 digits
long, only a maximum of seven control desks can be used for the call distribution.

 Sequence: In this drop-down list, the control desk can be selected, to which the incoming control
desk call is transferred. The call is transferred, if the control desk is neither busy nor logged out
(when a user login is configured, see page 198) and does not have a line fault. Select an option:
 Next call first desk: The new activated control desk call will be transferred to the first available con-
trol desk in the distribution chain.
 Next call next desk: The new activated control desk call will be transferred to the first next higher
available control desk in the distribution chain (based on the last activated control desk).

 Timeout for call distribution of control desk calls


Feature PRO 800 5.0 – timeout
PRO 800
With the timeout, it is possible to configure the delay, after which an active control desk call is
LICENCE PRO5U transferred from one control desk to another available control desk within the distribution
chain.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desk > tab Call distribution-day, or Subscriber > Control Desk
> tab Call distribution-night

3.1/0923 357
 Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

 Timeout [s]: In this field, the time can be entered, after which an active control desk call is transferred
to the first available control desk in the distribution chain (max. 255 seconds).

NOTE:
 The timeout does not apply for new incoming control desk calls.
 An incoming control desk call will only be transferred once if the timeout value is set to “0”.
 If a control desk is configured several times for a distribution chain, it will be considered only once.

 Storing of control desk transfers

It is possible to restore control desk transfers/parallel indication after a warmstart of the Intercom
Server. Even when the Intercom Server is reconfigured the transfer state is saved. Switching is also
carried out for control desks that are connected via CNET-LAN, NET, E1 or S0. The following transfer
types can be stored:
 Day/Night transfer (9499, 9599).
 All manual transfer types, e.g.:
 Taking of calls (94-6-group-source control desk).
 Parallel indication (94-5-group-destination control desk).
 Call transfer (94-2-group-button).
The following transfer type is NOT stored:
 Parallel indication at a stations without control desk functionality.

ATTENTION:
 The transfer states are not saved at a power failure or turning the power off and back on!
 The function “Storing of control desk transfers” is active for an “EE 880” only if the key-switch is
deactivated! At key-switch a simulated button has to be configured! For further information, see
the product manual “EE 880”.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Transfer parameters
 Restore after warmstart: In this drop-down list, the store mode of control desk transfers can be se-
lected. The following modes are available:
 Do not save: The transfer is not saved.
 Restore last state: The state is restored, which was active before the restart.
 Permanent night switch: After a restart, the night transfer automatically is activated.

 Call transfer cancelling during active call request


Feature PRO 800 2.0 – call transfer cancelling during active call request
PRO 800

LICENCE PRO2U
After cancelling the call transfer, All Call requests are displayed only on the control desk 1.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Control desk system
 Activate the checkbox Delete transferred calls at destination control desk at end of transfer.

NOTE:
After expiration of the time, a call can be redirected to another control desk only once. If the call
request is deleted, the call will also be deleted at this control desk.

358 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

Call types
There are different call types for call requests from Intercom stations and input messages available,
which define how the calls are indicated:
 For call requests from Intercom stations, the call types 1 to 15 are configurable, see “Change call ty-
pes of call requests” on page 360.
 For input messages, the call types 4 to 15 are available.
The different call types have the following default settings:
Display indication
EE 311, EE 411, Dot-matrix,
Buzzer EE 880
EE 380 TFT, LCD

Call type indication

Call type indication

in the display

in the display
Standing

Blinking
Normal

Fast
Call type

1 Intercom station “Normal call”  -  -  

2 Intercom station “Emergency call” -  -   
3 Intercom station “Call Park” - -  -  
4 Input “Active 1”  -  -  
5 Input “Active 1”  -  -  
6 Input “Active 2” -  -   
7 Input “Active 2” -  -   
8 Line fault input / Intercom station -  -   
9 Line fault input  -  -  
10 Input “Active 1” - - - - - -
11 Input “Active 2” - - - - - -
12 Input “Active 1”  -  -  -
13 Input “Active 1” - -  -  -
14 Input “Active 2” -  -   -
15 Input “Active 2” - - -   -

NOTE: Different tone signals available

There are different tone signals for the buzzer available. Each call type can be assigned to a tone
signal, see ”Tones for calls to control desks” on page 374. This requires a DSP station (firmware
version DSP 800, DSP 800A, DSP 900, DSP 900A, DSP 900B), an IoIP station (firmware version IoIP
device) or an analogue station (either ET 901 without a particular licence or via G8-GET with licence
Lx-GET-DSP).

GOOD TO KNOW: Call type indication individually configurable

The indication of the call types is individually configurable:
The configuration of the control desk EE 880 can be found in the product manual “EE 880”.
The configuration of the control desks EE 380 and Conductor can be found on page 219.
 Call types of the type “Active 1” are managed as normal calls in the Intercom system.
 Call types of the type “Active 2” are managed as emergency calls in the Intercom system.

3.1/0923 359
 Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration

 Call type texts for display indication

An up to 14-digit text can be defined for each call type, which is indicated in the display of a control
desk with dot-matrix display (valid for the entire block).

Examples
Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display

Call Request
Line Fault Line Fault Door Open
Sam Brown Sam Brown Main Entrance
======== 20 ======== ************** ==============

œLine 1/1 œLine 1/1

› Take Call › Take Call
œLine 1/1 ›Take Call

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Call type texts
 Call type texts: In these fields, up to 14-digit texts can be entered for the respective call types.

 Change call types of call requests


Feature PRO 800 3.x – change call types of the call request
PRO 800
This feature allows you, to change the configurable call types of the call request (“normal call”,
LICENCE PRO3U “emergency call” and “line fault”) to each standard Intercom call type. For a list of all available
call types see page 350.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Call type
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add call request”.
 Normal call: In this drop-down list, the call type can be selected, which is performed instead of a nor-
mal call at a call request.
 Emergency call: In this drop-down list, the call type can be selected, which is performed instead of
an emergency call at a call request.
 Line fault: In this drop-down list, the call type can be selected, which is performed instead of a line
fault at a call request.

360 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function

 Conversations as call request

In order to obtain uniform operation at the control desk, the following incoming calls can be converted
to call requests:
 Loudspeaking calls
 Private calls
 Busy calls
 Ringing from a door (only for ringing at a group of stations; see page 319)
In addition, it is possible to select the call type to which the calls will be converted. If e.g. a call in privacy
mode arrives at the control desk, it is not indicated as private call but as call request, and can be taken
over like any call request with F.

NOTE:
Loudspeaking, private and busy calls from other control desks will not be converted to call requests.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Call conversion
 Loudspeaking call: Activate this checkbox to convert incoming loudspeaking conversations to call
requests at the control desk (after a change of configuration without restart, the configuration is applied
with the next call or door call).
 Privacy call: Activate this checkbox to convert incoming privacy calls to call requests at the control desk
(after a change of configuration without restart, the configuration is applied with the next call or door
call).
 Busy: Activate this checkbox to convert incoming busy calls to call requests at the control desk (after a
change of configuration without restart, the configuration is applied with the next call or door call).
 Ringing from door: Activate this checkbox to convert incoming door calls to call requests at the control
desk (after a change of configuration without restart, the configuration is applied with the next call or
door call).
 Convert to call type: In this drop-down list, the call type can be selected into which the calls will be
converted.
 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Alarm, Common
 Activate the checkbox Conversations as call request for the calling subscriber to convert calls from
this subscriber (except if the checkbox Ringing from door at Subscriber > Control Desks > tab
Call conversion is activated).

3.1/0923 361
 DSP function Intercom Server Configuration

DSP function
Requirements
The following station types are supported:
 IP stations
 Digital DSP stations (e.g. EE 811A, EE 311A)
 Analogue stations via ET 901A
 Analogue stations at a Gx-GET with DSP licence

 Lock AEC

For certain situations it is possible to disable the “Acoustic Echo Canceller” (AEC) of the DSP.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab General
 Lock AEC: Activate this checkbox.

 AEC gain

This option improves speech transmission when microphone and loudspeaker are close together at the
respective subscriber (only when “Gx-DSP-GET“ and “Gx-DSP-GED“ are available).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab General
 AEC Gain: Activate this checkbox.

 Dynamic noise cancellation


 Activate this checkbox to consistently reduce background noise when no one is talking. The following
station firmware versions are supported:

Prerequisites:
Firmware versions
 DSP 800 (digital non A-series devices): min. V3.4
 DSP 800A (A-series devices): min. V1.7
 DSP 900A: min. V1.1
 DSP 800B: min. V1.1

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab General
 Dynamic noise cancellation: Activate this checkbox.

362 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration DSP function

 Recording via handset


 This function allows to output the loudspeaker and microphone signal of the station over the headset-
loudspeaker-connection (mixed together for recording purposes).

Prerequisites:
Firmware versions
 DSP 800 (digital non A-series devices): min. V3.4
 DSP 800A (A-series devices): min. V1.1
 DSP 900A: min. V1.1

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab General
 Recording via handset: Activate this checkbox.

NOTE:
No headset can be used at the same time when the function is used.

NOTE:
In order for calls to be carried out with the volume configured for conversations in “Audio Fea-
tures”, the subscriber must have the “External Handset” function activated. Otherwise, conversa-
tions will be carried out with the volume “Handset”.

ATTENTION:
In case a not galvanically isolated loudspeaker is used at the EP output of a subscriber, the check-
box ext. handset installed (subscriber > station properties > tab handset) has to be set for
the subscriber. If this checkbox is not activated, the Intercom Server changes the volume from Open
Duplex to handset; this also means that the internal loudspeaker changes the volume, if there is a
difference between the volume levels for conversation and handset!

Disable loudspeaker equalisation

This setting disables loudspeaker equalization.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab General
 Disable loudspeaker equalization: Activate this checkbox.

3.1/0923 363
 DSP function Intercom Server Configuration

 Loudspeaker/microphone surveillance

The loudspeaker sends a white noise in configurable intervals (1 minute to 1 hour). The white noise is
received by the microphone, the DSP analyses the spectrum. In the event of a fault there is a permanent
rushing. A faulty loudspeaker or microphone is signalled as a line fault, so the fault can be indicated at
a control desk. In addition the relay OUT1 of the respective station can be defined for indication of
loudspeaker/microphone monitoring.

ATTENTION:
Loudspeaker/microphone surveillance does not work at Intercom stations with an external loud-
speaker, handset, headset or activated handset function. When using build-in kits, the function
depends on construction details.

 White noise: min. DSP software 

NOTE:
As of DSP software 3.0 the loudspeaker/microphone surveillance is carried out with white noise
instead of a DTMF tone. Possibly the values for loudspeaker/microphone surveillance has to be
adjusted.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Surveillance
 Function Relay 1: In this drop-down list, the indication mode of the loudspeaker/microphone
surveillance can be selected for the relay OUT1. The relay acts as an opener contact. That means, it
is closed, as long as no function fault occurs. When a fault occurs, the relay opens (at the same time
as the first reattempt).

NOTE: AF hybrid only

 The option Line-monitoring + Loudspeaker-/Microphone Surveillance OK is only available
for the amplifiers AF 20H, AF 50H, AF 125H, AF 250H and AF 500H.
 The option Line-monitoring OK is only available for the amplifiers AF 50H, AF 125H, AF 250H and
AF 500H.

 Relay Transfer EB2E2A: With this setting, the previously described functionality of the Function Re-
lay 1 can be redirected to an EB2E2A. The redirection can be set to the device output OUT1 or both
OUT1 + OUT2 outputs.

ATTENTION:
Only one EB2E2A may be used. This can be optionally connected to the Intercom module or the IP
converter ET 901.

 Loudspeaker-/Microphone Surveillance cycle time: In this checkbox, the time interval can be select-
ed, in which the loudspeaker sends the white noise (1 minute to 1 hour; None = loudspeaker- /micro-
phone surveillance disabled).

ATTENTION:
With DSP software up to v2.6, a cycle time of up to 15 hours is possible. As of DSP software 3.0, the
maximum cycle time is 1 hour, even if a larger value has been defined in CCT 800.

  Microphone ALM: In this drop-down list, the microphone type for the surveillance can be selected.
All connected microphones will automatically be detected and the microphone surveillance is

364 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration DSP function

enabled for the microphone with the highest priority. An internal microphone has the lowest priority,
followed by a gooseneck and an external microphone.

NOTE:
This function is available with:
 Station firmware min. V02.5
 DSP 900A min. V05.5
 DSP 800B min. V01.7.
 IoIP device V7.0

 Check only once: Activate this checkbox to carry out the surveillance out only once.
 Loudspeaker-/Microphone Surveillance retry time [s]: In this field, the interval for the three
repetitions of the white noise in the case of a fault can be entered (max. 255 seconds).
 Loudspeaker-/Microphone Surveillance volume: In this drop-down list, the volume of the white noise
can be selected. The white noise has to be loud enough to be received by the microphone, but may
not be so loud as to cause overdrive (depending on the distance between loudspeaker and
microphone and on the loudspeaker’s volume). See the following examples:
 Loudspeaker LS1, distance loudspeaker/microphone about 15 cm (5.9“): Volume “4”.
 EE 61AC: Volume “2” (at centre position of potentiometer for volume).
 EE 311, EE 811, ECCT 80061, ECCT 80062: Volume “~4”.
 In case of a higher ambient noise level, the volume of the tone has to be increased (if necessary).
 Reduction -18dB: Activate this checkbox to decrease the volume of the terminal during the
surveillance by 18dB.
 Red Lamp: Activate this checkbox to activate the multifunctional LED of the respective subscriber
during the surveillance.

NOTE:
A call request has to be configured for the respective DSP station to a control desk (see page 335).

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter

 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Call Request”.
 Activate the checkbox Line-monitoring for the respective DSP station.
 Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common
 Line-monitoring delay time [s]: In this drop-down list, the time delay for line fault indication can be
selected for the respective DSP station.

3.1/0923 365
 DSP function Intercom Server Configuration

 Audio monitoring

The DSP station permanently monitors the noise level in the room via the connected microphone. On
exceeding the level, the dial of button 9 is simulated in order to initiate a direct dial or call request to
a defined control desk.

Values for audio monitoring changed

As of DSP software 3.0 the values for audio monitoring volume and integration time have been
changed. They have been adjusted to match the values of SA101 systems.

 Noise level and integration time

 The noise level defines the volume at the microphone of the monitored Intercom station, above
which a call request to the control desk is initiated. The following noise levels are available:
Noise level in dB(A) 60 63 67 70 73 77 80 83 87

GOOD TO KNOW:
The indicated noise levels are guidelines and depend on the position of the potentiometer for
microphone sensitivity and on the sensitivity of the connected microphone.

 The integration time defines how long the volume at the microphone of the monitored Intercom
station has to exceed the defined noise level before a call request is initiated (0 to 15 seconds).

ATTENTION:
New noise levels and integration times are available with DSP software min. 3.0!

Restrictions
 After a call request has been initiated and during an All Call or group call monitoring is deactivated
automatically, because otherwise the signal from the loudspeaker would initiate a call request.
 Audio monitoring has restricted functionality at stations with a gooseneck microphone, handset, head-
set or activated handset function. When using build-in kits the function depends on construction details.
 When audio monitoring is configured for a station, reception of music is not possible.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Audio Monitoring
 Audio Monitoring Trigger: In this drop-down list, the noise level to trigger audio monitoring can be
selected (None = audio monitoring disabled).
 Audio Monitoring Time [s]: In this drop-down list, the integration time can be selected.
 Audio Monitoring permanent: Activate this checkbox to enable audio monitoring is permanently. If
this checkbox is deactivated, audio monitoring will only be carried out once!
 Short integration: Activate this checkbox to define a very short integration time and therefore the
sensitivity is enhanced.

NOTE:
This checkbox has to be activated when the behaviour of the SA101 is required.

 Red lamp: In this drop-down list, the status of the red lamp can be selected when audio monitoring
is enabled. The following states are available:
 On: The conversation lamp of the station is permanently lit.
 Off: The conversation lamp of the station is off in idle state.

366 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration DSP function

 Blinking: The conversation lamp of the station is blinking in idle state.

NOTE:
The conversation lamp is activated permanently for analogue stations (i.e. the microphone is
only activated when the conversation lamp is on).

 A call request (see page 335) or direct dialling (see page 212) has to be configured for the button 9
of the respective DSP station (e.g. to an Intercom station, telephone or radio).

 Adjusting of audio monitoring at the station


Certain audio monitoring settings can be configured at a separate control station with display for all
DSP stations. The audio monitoring menu can be opened at the control station with the function code
“9T4” either via a direct dialling code or an entry in the B menu and with the call number of the DSP
station that be configured.

Configuration at the station

 For the control station, configure either a direct dialling target (see page 212) or an entry in the B
menu (see page 178) for the function code “9T4”.
 Depending on the configuration, either press the direct dialling button or select the entry in the B
menu at the control station. One of the following dialogues will be indicated:

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display

Audio Monitor
10_ 10_
Audio Monitor

X-Cancel
X-Cancel
 Enter the call number of the desired DSP station for which the audio monitoring parameters be
configured (in case of error, the error tone is audible). One of the following dialogues will be indi-
cated:

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display

Audio Monitor
1234
1234 Ticket machine
Audio Monitor
Ticket machine Level 5
Level 9 Delay 4
Delay 5 T-Swap
œChange -/+
T-Swap › Save
œChange -/+ ›Save
In the first row, the call number and in the second row the 14-digit description of the station is indicated.
In row 4 and 5, the following audio monitoring parameters are indicated:
 Level: The noise level defines the volume at the microphone of the monitored Intercom station,
above which a call request to the control desk is initiated. The following noise levels are available:
Audio monitoring level 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Noise level in dB(A) - 60 63 67 70 73 77 80 83 87

3.1/0923 367
DSP function Intercom Server Configuration

 Delay: The integration time defines how long the volume at the microphone of the monitored
Intercom station has to exceed the defined noise level before a call request is initiated (0 to F for 0
to15 seconds).

Changing parameters
The currently selected parameter will be changed:
 D: Decrease by one step.
 E: Increase by one step.
 0 to 9: Direct input of the desired value.
 With button T, it is possible to toggle between the options “Level” and “Delay”.

368 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration DSP function

Saving of parameters
 By pressing the button F, the values are saved in the Intercom Server and de-/activated in the station.
 If no changes are made (e.g. only inquiry), the function is automatically quit after 4 seconds.
 If changes have been made, but F has not been pressed, 6 seconds after the last button press an
automatic save and quit is carried out.
 With button X it is possible to quit anytime without saving.

Indication in the B menu

If the direct dialling codes for adjustment of audio monitoring are configured in the B menu, the value
set for audio monitoring trigger (“Level”) is shown before each entry.

Indication of “level” in the B menu

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

Favorites
6 Station 105
1 6 AM Call 105 6 Station 106
2 6 AM Call 106 3 Station 107
3 3 AM Call 107 6 Station 108
4 6 AM Call 108 4 Station 109
5 4 AM Call 109 5 Station 120
6 5 AM Call 120 6 Station 121
6 Station 122
›Execute -Edit
 By pressing the T button, it is possible to activate/deactivate the audio monitoring of the selected
station in the B menu.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Audio Monitoring
 An audio monitoring function has to be configured for the respective subscriber (see page 366).
 Audio Monitoring Off: Activate this checkbox to disable audio monitoring for the respective
subscriber. If audio monitoring is manually disabled and the configuration is received via CCT 800,
the checkbox Audio Monitoring Off is activated.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Function Codes
 Audio Monitoring settings: In this field, the function code of audio monitoring can be changed (1 to
4 digits, by default 9T4).
 An entry of this function code has to be configured in the B menu (see page 178) or as direct di-
alling target (see page 212) for the respective subscriber.
 It is also possible to configure only the code “9T4” and select the station via after dialling.
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > Individual F2-menu > sub-folder subscriber
 Right-click and select “Add function”.
 Number / Code: In this field, the code including call number can be entered for the indication in the
B menu (e.g. “9T4120”).

NOTE:
Configuration in B menu only possible for max. 4-digit call numbers.

3.1/0923 369
 DSP function Intercom Server Configuration

 Audio monitoring with audio recording

In order to find out why a call was initiated via audio monitoring, it is possible to permanently record
the audio signal at the station. The audio data is saved in a ring memory until initiation of the call. The
control desk can then listen to the recording when accepting the call. For the stations audio monitoring
has to be configured (see page 366).
Audio Monitoring
initiation call initiation

pre-record time overlap time

Record time

Supported cards/stations
 G8/G3-GET: All analogue stations. The licence “Lx-GET-DSP” is required for the used subscriber.
 G8/G3-GED: All A-series stations (e.g. EE 811A, EE 311A).
 G8/G3-IP: With DSP 900A or IoIP device (not: ET 901).
 Playback at the control desk either:
 Automatically when accepting the call, or
 manual playback of the recording by pressing the button 4.
 An announcement tone can be defined, which is audible before playback of the recording.
 Memory: Max 63 seconds per subscriber card.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio recording
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Audio recording”.
 In the drop-down list Recording mode, select the entry “audio-monitoring” for the respective sub-
scriber.
 Announce tone: In this drop-down list, the tone can be selected, which is played back at the control
desk before the recording.
 Announce time [s]: In this field, the playback time of the announcement tone can be entered.
 Record time [s]: In this field, the overall record time (incl. “Overlap time”) can be entered (max. 128
seconds).
 Overlap time [s]: In this field, the recording time after the triggering of audio monitoring can be en-
tered.
 Playback-repeat count: In this drop-down list, the number of playback repeats can be selected.
 Playback-delay between repeats [s]: In this drop-down list, the length of a pause between repeats
can be selected.
 Announce tone before playback: Activate this checkbox to play back the selected tone in the drop-
down list Announce tone before the playback of the recording.
 Automatic playback: Activate this checkbox to automatically play back the recording when the call
is accepted at the control desk.
 Delete after playback: Activate this checkbox to automatically delete the recording after the playback
at the control desk.

ICX message with sound pressure level change

An ICX message can be generated if the sound pressure level changes. With this ICX message, the level
change can be indicated.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Voice control
 Activate the checkbox ICX messages at dB-level changing for the respective feed-in. The following
fields are enabled.

370 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration DSP function

 Range 1: 0 - < Level: In this drop-down list, the range between 0 and the desired level can be
selected.
 Range 2: In this field, the range between level 1 and level 2 is indicated.
 Range 3: >= Level: In this drop-down list, the range from the desired level to infinite can be
selected.

 Keypad tones

Keypad tones can be activated for the DSP stations, so that a tone sounds each time a button is pressed.
For each station the volume of the tone can be set separately.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Microphone, Loudspeaker, Tones
 Keypad tones: In this drop-down list, the volume of the tones can be selected (00 dB = maximum
volume, -42 dB = minimum volume, None = keypad tones disabled).

 Special tones

 Per DSP station it is possible to define two special tones which can be used for signalling of events.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Microphone, Loudspeaker, Tones
 Special tone 1 and Special tone 2: In these drop-down lists, two tones to signal an event can be se-
lected for the respective subscriber. These tones can be assigned to various events at Subscriber >
Signal Tones DSP stations.
The following tone signals are available
Tone signal Duration Tone signal Duration
Telephone: error tone 2 seconds (1s tone + 1 seconds (1s tone +
Alarm
(3 sound) 1s pause) 0s pause)
Telephone: privacy tone 4.6 seconds (600 ms tone 6 seconds (6s tone +
9 tone gong
at calling station + 4s pause) 0s pause)
Telephone: alley busy 0.4 seconds (200 ms tone 1.4 seconds (800 ms tone
Beam me up
tone + 200 ms pause) + 600 ms pause)
3 seconds (1s tone + 16.5 seconds (500 ms tone
Telephone: BT ringtone Call forwarding
2s pause) + 16s pause)
Telephone: BT rapid 0.5 seconds (250 ms tone 4 seconds (1s tone +
Ringtone
ringtone + 250 ms pause) 3s pause)
3 seconds (3s tone + 3 seconds (3s tone +
Bell Announcement
0s pause) 0s pause)
3 seconds (3s tone + 3 seconds (3s tone +
Transition Shine
0s pause) 0s pause)
3 seconds (3s tone +
Mass Transit Solutions Configurable
0s pause)

3.1/0923 371
 DSP function Intercom Server Configuration

 Tone generator

For the following functions different tone signals can be selected.
 Go to: Subscriber > Signal Tones DSP stations > tab Signal, Tones 1
 Dialling tone: This tone is given out when dialling a calling number or function.
 Error tone: This tone is given out when the station is operated in an incorrect way.
 Busy tone: This tone is given out when the called subscriber is busy.
 Busy tieline: This tone is given out when a tieline is busy.
 Acknowledgement: This tone is given out when a function is enabled (e.g. privacy or secretary trans-
fer) and for status indication “Privacy on”.
 Acknowledgement off: This tone is given out as status indication for “Privacy off”.
 Access control: This tone is given out when the correct code is entered at a door station.
 Subscriber > Signal Tones DSP stations > tab Signal, Tones 2
 Privacy: This tone is given out as indication of a privacy call, as called station and as calling station.
 Ringtone access control: This tone is given out as call tone for control call after entering a wrong
code at the door station. This tone can be enabled for door station and control station.
 Ringtone: This tone is given out at every new set-up of a call, as called station and as calling station.
The ringtone cannot be faded out.
 Minute tone: This tone is given out during a conversation once per minute if a subscriber is waiting
and before the conversation time exceeds.
 Waiting signal microphone mute: This tone is given out when the conversation partner enables the
microphone mute.
 Waiting signal for further connection: This tone is given out when the conversation partner enables
inquiry or further transfer.
 Initiate ringing: This tone is given out at the door station as acknowledgement for ringing at a group.
 Go to: Subscriber > Signal Tones DSP stations > tab Signal, Tones 3
 Reception ringing: This tone is given out at receivers of ringing at a group (not at converted call re-
quests).
 Reception alarm with low priority: This tone is given out as reception of an alarm with low priority
(priority 1, 2 or 3).
 Reception alarm with high priority: This tone is given out as reception of an alarm with medium or
high priority (priority 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9).
 Initiator call request: This tone is given out until the call request is taken over.
 All Call: This tone is given out as announcement of an All Call and can be enabled for an initiator and
receiver.
 Group Call: This tone is given out as announcement of a group call and can be enabled for an initiator
and receiver.1)
 Chime-signal: This tone is given out at the pre-configured receivers when the chime signal input is
enabled.
1) For SIP-C subscribers, this feature is not supported.

372 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration DSP function

Each function has its own tone sequence, with the selected sound signal only as long the original
sound signal is switched on. See table below:
Function Tone sequence Function Tone sequence
Waiting signal
Dialling tone 4s tone (continuous tone) 1s tone + 1s pause
microphone mute
Waiting signal for further
Error tone 64 ms tone + 64 ms pause 1s tone + 1s pause
connection
250 ms tone + 250 ms
250 ms tone + 250 ms
Busy tone Initiating ringing pause + 1750 ms tone +
pause
1750 ms pause
250 ms tone + 250 ms
250 ms tone + 750 ms
Busy tieline Reception ringing pause + 1750 ms tone +
pause
1750 ms pause
(64 ms tone + 64 ms
Reception alarm with low
Acknowledgement pause (repetition 3 times)) 2s tone + 2s pause
priority
+ 576 ms tone
Reception alarm with 500 ms tone + 500 ms
Acknowledgement off 4s tone (continuous tone)
high priority pause
250 ms tone + 250 ms
250 ms tone + 250 ms
Access control Initiator call request pause + 1750 ms tone +
pause
1750 ms pause
Privacy 1s tone + 1s pause All Call 2s tone (continuous tone)
Ringtone access 128 ms tone + 128 ms
Group call 2s tone (continuous tone)
control pause
5300 ms tone
Ringtone Chime signal 2s tone (continuous tone)
(continuous tone)
300 ms tone
Minute tone
(continuous tone)

 Go to: Subscriber > Signal Tones DSP Stations

 In these drop-down lists, the desired signal tone can be selected for the respective functions. The
following signal tones are available:
Tone signal Duration Tone signal Duration
500 Hz tone Continuous tone Ringtone 500 / 595 Hz Continuous tone
666 Hz tone Continuous tone Ringtone 500 / 666 Hz Continuous tone
1000 Hz tone Continuous tone 2 sound 3 seconds
2000 Hz tone Continuous tone 3 sound 4 seconds
4000 Hz tone Continuous tone 4 sound 3.5 seconds
Ringtone 500 / 440 Hz Continuous tone BigBen 6 seconds

3.1/0923 373
 DSP function Intercom Server Configuration

 Select the entry “Standard tone acc. to Intercom Server” to enable the standard tone signal for the
respective function:
Function Standard tone Function Standard tone
Waiting signal
Dialling tone 500 Hz 500 Hz
microphone mute
Waiting signal for further
Error tone 500 Hz 500 Hz
connection
Busy tone 500 Hz Initiating ringing 500 Hz
Busy tieline 500 Hz Reception ringing 500 Hz
Reception alarm with low
Acknowledgement 500 Hz 4 kHz
priority
Reception alarm with
Acknowledgement off 500 Hz 4 kHz
high priority
Access control 500 Hz Initiator call request 500 Hz
Privacy 500 Hz All Call 2 sound
Ringtone access
500 Hz Group call 2 sound
control
Ringtone 500 Hz Chime signal 500 Hz
Minute tone 500 Hz Fade-out tone -

 Tones for calls to control desks


At a DSP control desk, tone signals can be used instead of the buzzer for the 15 different call types (see
page 359). The following tone signals are available:
 500 Hz tone, 666 Hz tone, 1 KHz tone, 2 KHz tone, 4 KHz tone
 Ringtone 500 Hz 444 Hz, Ringtone 500 Hz 595 Hz, Ringtone 500 Hz 666 Hz
 2 sound, 3 sound, 4 sound
 Big Ben
 Special tone 1
 Special tone 2
 Fade out tone
 Pre-recorded audio (ID 100 to 131)

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Tone generator for buzzer
 In these drop-down lists, the desired tone signal can be selected for the respective call type.
 Select the option “Standard tone acc. to Intercom Server” to enable the standard tone signal for
the respective call type.

374 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration DSP function

 Microphone frequency response


For feed-in of audio signals over a ECCT 80008 (see page 287) it is possible to activate a linear frequen-
cy response. This is an advantage especially for feed-in of music.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Microphone, Loudspeaker, Tones
 Microphone frequency response mode: In this drop-down list, the frequency range for feed-in of au-
dio signals can be selected. The following modes are available:
 Standard: Disable the linearization and equalization of the frequency response.
 Linear: Linearization of the frequency response.
  MIC480: Equalization of the frequency response and avoidance of feedbacks of OpenDuplex®
calls with increased volume.

NOTE:
The option “MIC480” should be selected exclusively for the microphone “MIC480“.

NOTE:
Use the following device types as default setting ”MIC 480”:
 ET 808A
 ET 908A
 ET 908H
 AFLS 10H C
 AFLS 10H H
 AFLS 10H P

 Start beep

A beep tone can be defined for DSP stations, which is audible every time the Intercom Server starts.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Microphone, Loudspeaker, Tones
 Start beep mode: In this drop-down list, the state of the start beep can be selected.

 Microphone/Line-in gain

The microphone gain of DSP stations can be configured via CCT 800. The external microphone gain
can be adjusted separately (e.g. headset socket of stations EE 811 and EE 311).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Microphone, Loudspeaker, Tones
 Internal microphone gain: In this drop-down list, the internal microphone gain can be selected. The
control range is from -21 dB to +12 dB and is divided into 3 dB steps.
 External microphone gain: In this drop-down list, the external microphone gain can be selected (e.g.
headset socket of stations EE 811 and EE 311). The control range is from -21 dB to +12 dB and is di-
vided into 3 dB steps.
 Gooseneck microphone gain: In this drop-down list, the Gooseneck microphone gain can be select-
ed. The control range is from -21 dB to +12 dB and is divided into 3 dB steps.

3.1/0923 375
 DSP function Intercom Server Configuration

 Line-In gain: In this drop-down list, the Line In gain can be selected (available for ET808A, ET908A
and ET908H). An additional configuration for headset or gooseneck is no longer possible in this case,
as these occupy the line-in input. The control range is from 0 dB to +21 dB and is divided into 3 dB
steps.
 Headset microphone gain: In this drop-down list, the Headset microphone gain can be selected. The
control range is from -21 dB to +12 dB and is divided into 3 dB steps.

 External loudspeaker gain


 Feature PRO 800 6.0 – external loudspeaker gain
VirtuoSIS The external loudspeaker gain over the line-out of DSP stations can be configured via CCT 800
LICENCE PRO6U
(e.g. for WS 800 or EX 7000).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Microphone, Loudspeaker, Tones
 Line-out/External loudspeaker gain: In this drop-down list, the reduction of the external loudspeaker
gain can be selected. The control range is from 0 dB to -15 dB and is divided into 3 dB steps.

 Sidetone for handsets/headsets


It is possible to configure a sidetone for handsets and headsets, which inserts the microphone signal
in real-time in the headset of the speaking person. This function can be activated for the headset
sockets of stations and the volume of the sidetone can be configured.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Microphone, Loudspeaker, Tones
 Sidetone: In this drop-down list, the volume of the sidetone can be selected. The control range is
from 0 dB to -42 dB and is divided into 3 dB steps.

376 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Video

Video

General
The software of the GE 300/GE 800 offers optimal and low-priced control of a video switcher. During a
conversation to an Intercom station with camera, the video is automatically switched to the monitor.
With control desks the cameras can also be switched on during call requests or input messages.

ATTENTION:
Configured video connection requires memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 549!

Following protocols are available

 ULTRAK/VIDEV (for ULTRAK video switcher EUROMAX 250)
 Baud rate for Euromax 250: 19200,N,8,1
 Software version for Euromax: as of V1.10
 Connection to G3-V24, G8-V24
 ERNITEC (for ERNITEC video switcher 500M)
 Baud rate for 500M: 19200,N,8,1
 Connection to G3-V24 or G8-V24
 SOFT VIDEO (Standard-Protocol)
 Connection to G3-V24, G8-V24
 Geutebrück VX3
 Baud rate for Compax III: 19200,N,8,1
 Connection to G8-IF / G3-IF generation 2 (min. Rev. AB)

Monitors
Each Intercom station (control desk) can have one or several allocated monitors, but the same monitor
cannot be allocated to more than one Intercom station. Each station can have allocated a maximum of
9 monitors. There are three types of monitors:
 Main monitor: Reserved for indication of the conversation partner (also busy calls or private calls).
 Preview monitors (the number is configurable): For indication of call requests and input messages
(only for control desks).
 Observation monitors (the number is configurable): For static connection of cameras. Also the main
monitor or the preview monitors can be used as observation monitors.

Cameras
A camera can be allocated to each Intercom station or input. It is also possible to switch cameras which
are not allocated to an Intercom station or input. Each camera can be switched to several monitors at
the same time (depending on the design of the video switcher).

Video WS series
The configuration of “WS video clients” (camera, colour TFT display) is not described in this document.

NOTE:
For further information, see the product manual “Video WS”.

3.1/0923 377
Video Intercom Server Configuration

4-digit camera numbers

It is possible to use 4-digit camera numbers (depending on the type of video switcher being used).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common
 Camera ID’s: Select the desired radio button to define the number of used digits for the camera ID.

Decentralised video system

The main Intercom Server can control cameras that are connected to a video switcher of a sub-central.
This enables a control desk to control video display of remote cameras. In the main Intercom Server a
physical video switcher or the program ComVideo can be used. Depending on the type of video
switcher the video content can be transmitted to the main Intercom Server either via cable (leased
lines) or IP connections.
Example: Video system with IP connection:
Monitor 1

GE 700 #1 1 8

Video switcher Call no. 1000

RS 232
64x8, or virtual
video switcher
1 10 11 64

IP-Network

IP-Video- IP-Video-
Interface Interface
ID=10 ID=11

Monitor 2 Monitor 2

Local video- Local video-

Call no. Call no.
switcher 1 4
switcher 1 4
2000 3000
16x4 16x4

GE 200 #2 GE 200 #3
1 16 1 16

RS 232 RS 232

Camera 2001 Camera 3001

Call no. Call no.
2001 3001

NOTE:
For further information about configuration, see the product manual “ComVideo”.

378 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Video

Camera connection with normal stations

Each Intercom station can have a maximum of 9 allocated monitors (with corresponding expansion of
the video switcher): one main monitor and several observation monitors. During a conversation with
a station allocated to a camera, the video is switched to the monitor. It is also possible to switch any
camera manually to the monitor.

 Allocation of a camera to an Intercom station

A camera can be allocated to each Intercom station. Each camera can be switched to several monitors
at the same time (depending on the design of the video switcher).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
 Number of camera: In this field, the camera number can be entered to allocate the respective camera
to the appropriate subscriber (either the accurate position on the video switcher or a higher number
e.g. “70” → the accurate camera input will then be calculated via configuration see above).

Allocation of monitors
 Intercom station with a monitor (automatic connection during conversations)
If only one monitor is used a camera can be switched on manual, or several cameras can be scanned
on the monitor. During a conversation, the image of the conversation partner will be faded-out and will
be switched on when the call is cancelled.

 Allocation of observation monitors to a station

If several monitors are used (or a split monitor), one main monitor and several observation monitors
can be configured. The defined main monitor is reserved only for pictures of the conversation partner,
to the observation monitors any desired camera can be switched manual.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Video
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Video”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Video > tab General
 Idle screen - camera: In this field, the camera number can be entered, which switches to the monitor
in idle state (max. camera number “255”).
 Go to: Subscriber > Video > tab Monitor
 Position of 1st Monitor: In this field, the lowest monitor number can be entered, which is controlled
from the respective subscriber.
 Activate the checkbox Main monitor present if a main monitor is used for the respective subscriber.

NOTE:
The checkbox Main monitor present is deactivated for the Intercom Client. If this checkbox is
activated for an Intercom Client, the checkbox can be deactivated once, but not activated.

 Observation monitors: In this field, the number of observation monitors can be entered.
 Scan time [s]: In this field, the time for scanning of pictures on the observation monitors can be en-
tered (max. 255 seconds, 0 = scanning disabled).

3.1/0923 379
 Video Intercom Server Configuration

Video switcher (internal)

Configuration CCT 800 (video switcher)
 Go to: Subscriber > Video > tab General
 Control via ICX #1 or Control via ICX #2: In these drop-down lists, the interface can be selected, to
which the respective video switcher is connected.

GOOD TO KNOW:
If in the drop-down list 1. ICX - Interface the value “----” is selected, only internal ICX messages
will be sent. If in the drop-down list 2. ICX - Interface the value “----” is selected, ICX messages
will not be sent over these ICX interfaces. Here are some examples for sending ICX messages:
 Only internal ICX messages will be sent:
1. ICX - Interface: ----
2. ICX - Interface: ----
 Only external ICX messages will be sent:
1. ICX - Interface: e.g. ICX 1-0/10
2. ICX - Interface: ----
 Internal as well as external messages will be sent:
1. ICX - Interface: ----
2. ICX - Interface: e.g. ICX 1-0/10

 Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab Video switcher

 Video switcher - inputs: In this field, the number of available camera inputs of the connected video
switcher can be entered.
 Video switcher - outputs: In this field, the number of available monitor outputs of the connected
video switcher can be entered.
 1st controlled monitor: In this field, the monitor number of the first monitor on the video switch can
be entered, which are controlled in ascending order by the Intercom system (lower numbers cannot
be controlled by the Intercom system).
 1st monitor output: In this field, the number of the 1st used monitor output of the video switch can
be entered.
 Lowest log. camera no. and highest log. camera no.: In these fields, the range of camera numbers
can be entered, which be managed from the respective V24 video switch (e.g. lowest log. camera no.
= 70, highest log. camera no. = 85).
 Camera no. Offset: In this field, the offset value can be entered, which calculates the appropriate phys-
ical camera input of the video switch (e.g. “69”, camera no. = 70 → 70 - 69 = 1st physical camera input).

NOTE: Video switcher

If a subscriber is assigned a video switcher "ICX # 1", the internal video switcher will not be used.

 Allocation of camera texts

A camera text can be allocated to each Intercom station. This text will be indicated on the monitor
during camera connection.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
 Display text EE811A & camera: In this field, the name of the station with up to 14-digits can be entered.
 Go to: Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab Video switcher
 Send camera texts: Activate this checkbox to indicate the text in the field Display text EE811A & cam-
era on the respective monitor.

380 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Video

 Connection of cameras to certain monitors

Each camera, no matter if it is allocated to a station or not, can be switched to any monitor
(independent of a conversation or a call request). This function is mainly used to indicate pictures for
observation on different monitors or on a split monitor. These pictures are faded during conversations
or incoming call requests. It is also possible to scan several cameras on one monitor.

Static connection
Button code Description
96 M R For a camera allocated to an Intercom station
96 M T K For a camera without allocation
M Monitor number (1- to8-digits, always number “1” for 1st monitor, even if a different number has been
defined at “Position of 1st monitor”)
R Calling number camera station (1-8 digits)
K Physical camera number (1- to 4-digits, e.g. “01” for camera “1”)

 Definition of scanning sequences

Scanning of several cameras (input for cameras one after the other, max. 16 cameras) on main, preview
and observation monitors:
Button code Description
97 M R For a camera allocated to an Intercom station
97 M T K For a camera without allocation
M Monitor number (1- to8-digits, always number “1” for 1st monitor, even if a different number has been
defined at “Position of 1st monitor”)
R Calling number camera station (1-8 digits)
K Physical camera number (1- to 4-digits, e.g. “01” for camera “1”)

 Switching-off a monitor
In case of scanning, all cameras are switched off together)
Button code Description
96 M 00 or 97 M 00 -
M Monitor number (1- to8-digits, always number “1” for 1st monitor, even if a different number has been
defined at “Position of 1st monitor”)

 Connection of cameras to observation and main monitors

Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Subscriber > Video > tab Monitor
 Scan time [s]: In this field, the scan time of preview monitors can be entered (max. 255 seconds, 0 =
scanning disabled).

 Manual scanning control

It is possible to influence the automatic scanning (activated with 97) of video monitors via codes. The
scanning can be stopped, started, toggled, +1 and -1 as well as jump to the cancel of the list. The
following codes are possible:
Button code Description
97 M TT0 Stop scanning

3.1/0923 381
 Video Intercom Server Configuration

Button code Description

97 M TT1 Start scanning
97 M TT2 Go back one snapshot
97 M TT3 Go to next snapshot
97 M TT9 Jump to last snapshot
97 M TTT Toggle (switching) start/stop
M Monitor number (0 = all monitors)

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

Camera connection for control desk calls

If a control desk has allocated monitors, cameras can be indicated also during call requests or input
messages. Call requests and input messages are indicated until they are deleted, which means for
example, if “cancel on site” is configured, the camera is still indicated after the call has been
acknowledged.

 Automatic priority control of camera connection (normal call, emergency call)

Incoming control desk calls are indicated in order of their priority and of time.

 Camera connection during call requests

Allocation of only one monitor to a control desk:
 The first incoming control desk call or the call with the highest priority is indicated on the monitor.
 If several calls come in at the same time, the calls can be scanned in a configurable scan-time. During
a conversation to a camera station the allocated picture is indicated, other incoming call requests
(pictures) are faded and switched on again after the conversation is cancelled.

 Allocation of preview monitors to a control desk

 The pictures of incoming control desk calls are indicated on the preview monitors in order of their
priority and of time.

 Allocation of a main monitor to a control desk

 If a main monitor is configured, during a conversation (answer to a call request) the corresponding
picture is removed from the preview monitor and switched to the main monitor. The pictures on the
other preview monitors move up.
 If no main monitor is configured, during a conversation (answer to a call request) the corresponding
picture stays in the preview monitor. At the cancel of the conversation the picture is switched off and
the other pictures move up. If the answered call request is not the first indicated call request, the
corresponding picture is switched to the first preview monitor and the other pictures move up.

Configuration CCT 800

The monitor and camera have to be allocated to a subscriber (see page 379).
 Go to: Subscriber > Video > tab Monitor
 Preview monitors: In this field, the number of preview monitors can be entered.

 Camera connection during input messages

Incoming input messages (messages with and without buzzer) are indicated at the monitor (or on
several monitors). In case of a main monitor - preview monitor allocation the input messages are
indicated only at the preview monitors. The priority of input messages is higher than the priority of

382 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Video

equivalent call requests. If no main monitor is used, pictures of conversations have higher priority than
pictures of input messages. The pictures are switched off as soon as the input messages are
acknowledged by the control desk. The following situations can occur:
 The input is only a short impulse, acknowledged with F: The picture is switched off after
acknowledgement, but can be switched on again manually if desired.
 The input is still active after acknowledgement with F: The picture stays on the monitor as long as
the input is active (for appropriate configuration see page 339).

Configuration CCT 800

The monitor and camera have to be allocated to a subscriber (see page 379).
 Go to: Inputs > General Settings
 Camera No.: In this field, the camera number can be entered to allocate the respective camera to the
appropriate input (position on the video switcher).
 Display text EE811A & camera: In this field, the name of the station with up to 14-digits can be en-
tered.
 Go to: Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab Video switcher
 Send camera texts: Activate this checkbox to indicate the text in the field Display text EE811A &
camera on the respective monitor.
 Go to: Subscriber > Video > tab Monitor
 Preview monitors: In this field, the number of preview monitors can be entered.

 Configurable scan time

If more pictures (call requests or input messages) come in, than monitors are available, it can be
configured that the rest of the pictures are scanned at the last preview monitor. The scan-time is
configurable.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Video > tab Monitor
 Preview monitors: In this field, the number of preview monitors can be entered.
 Scan time [s]: In this field, the scan time of preview monitors can be entered (max. 255 seconds,
0 = scanning disabled).
 Observation monitors: In this field, the number of observation monitors can be entered.
 Scan time [s]: In this field, the time for scanning of pictures on the observation monitors can be
entered (max. 255 seconds, 0 = scanning disabled).

3.1/0923 383
Video Intercom Server Configuration

Video switchers (external)

Connection to Euromax 250

The video switcher EUROMAX 250 of ULTRAK can be connected to an Intercom Server GE 300/GE 800
via an V24 interface card.
The required cable connection is shown in the figure below. The cable between central and video
switcher may not be longer than 10m. The cable is connected to socket 1 of the Euromax 250. Make
sure that this socket is defined for 19200 bit/s. This definition can be carried out either with the terminal
in “Dialogue mode” of the video switcher, or with the configuration program for the video switcher
(ask your sales partner for this program).

NOTE:
For further information, see the product manual “Euromax 250”.

After the video switcher is connected to the Intercom Server all camera texts configured in the Intercom
Server are loaded into the video switcher (if this option has been activated). These texts are loaded
automatically after each restart of the Intercom Server. Now, the video switcher and the Intercom
Server are ready for video operation.
Further information about the configuration of video and camera texts can be found on page 380.
The PC with the configuration program has to be connected to socket 2 of the Euromax 250.

GE 300/GE 800 cable V24 card to Euromax

1
5 5
3 2
2 3
GE 300 / GE 800 Euromax 250
(9-way D-Submin plug) (9-way D-Submin plug)

Connection to Ultrak KXM 1604/3208

The video switchers KXM 1604 and KXM 3208 of ULTRAK can be connected to an Intercom Server
GE300/GE800 via an V24 interface card. The cable between Intercom Server and video switcher may
not be longer than 10m. See the following illustration:
2 2
3 3
5 5
GE 300 / GE 800 Ultrak KXM 1604/3208
(9-way D-Submin plug) (9-way D-Submin plug)

The cable is connected to interface 10 (port no. 3 “RS-232 PC”) of the ULTRAK KXM 1604 (3208). This
interface is in standard already configured to 19200 bit/s / N, 8, 1.

384 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Video

Connection to Ernitec 500M

The video switcher 500M of ERNITEC can be connected to an Intercom Server GE 300/GE 800 via an
V24 interface card. The cable between Intercom Server and video switcher may not be longer than 10m.
See the following illustration:
2 2
3 3
5 5
GE 300 / GE 800 Ernitec 500M
(9-way D-Submin plug) (9-way D-Submin plug)

The cable is connected to the 9-way D submin socket in Slot SIO2 of the 500M. This interface is standard
already configured to 19200 bit/s.

Connection to Geutebrück
Geutebrück video switches (e.g. “Compax III”) can be connected to interface cards (G3/G8 IF,
generation 2) of Intercom Servers GE300 and GE800. The cable for connection you find in the figure
below. The cable between Intercom Server and video switcher may not be longer than 10m.
TXD 2 2 RXD
RXD 3 3 TXD
GND 5 5 GND
GE 300 / GE 800 Compax III Basic 32/16
(9-way D-Submin plug) (9-way D-Submin plug)

Baud rate
 The maximum baud rate of the video switch may be configured to 19200 (baud rate switch of video
switch: 4 = 19200 PAL; C = 19200 NTSC).
 Data bits: N, 8, 1.

Features
 Camera and monitor switch on/off.
 Output of camera texts at start of Intercom Server.

NOTE:
Camera numbers can be assigned to a max. of 255 (0xFF).

Requirements
The following interface cards are supported:
 G3/G8-IF cards of the 2nd generation (min. Rev. AB).
Configuration software:
 CCT 800 min. 1.2.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab RS232
 In the drop-down list Type of connection, select the entry “Compax III”.
 In the drop-down list Baud rate, it is recommended to select the entry “19200”.

3.1/0923 385
 Video Intercom Server Configuration

 Camera addressing for IP video


 Configurable ports for the WS camera
Feature PRO 800 3.x – configurable ports for the WS camera
PRO 800 With the licence it is possible to define a local port for LAN connection and an additional NAT
LICENCE PRO3U translated port.

The configuration of “WS video clients” (camera, colour TFT display) is not described in this document.

NOTE:
 The configured CCT 800 settings will overwrite the web interface settings.
 In networks without a router, the global port number has to be the same as the values in the field
camera port no. and HTTP Listener port.
 For further information, see the product manual “Video WS”.

 Video terminal with additional video interface


It is possible to configure an additional interface for video terminals with built-in monitor (e.g. WS810).
In order to use this feature the terminal has to be configured as follows:

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Video > tab General
 In the drop-down list Control via ICX #1, select the entry “----”.
 In the drop-down list Control via ICX #2, select an additional interface.

Supported interfaces and cards

Only IP interfaces are supported for this function, which are used with G8-GEP, G3-GEP, IS3-GEP or
SIS-GEP and G8-IF, G3-IF or SIS-IF cards.

NOTE:
The first interface must not be configured, as this would disable the local video functionality. However,
you will need to configure the external coupling of the second interface.

ATTENTION:
G8-IP 32 interface is not supported!

386 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Video

 Live video menu for stations with configured monitor


Feature PRO 800 5.1 – live video menu
Up to CCT 800 5.0, the live video menu will automatically be displayed at stations with a
PRO 800
configured monitor. Thus, it is possible to connect to each available camera without
LICENCE PRO5U
permission. With CCT 800 5.1 or higher, the live video menu can individually be enabled for
stations with monitor. Exclusively after an appropriate CCT 800 configuration, a connection to
each available camera is possible for subscribers.

Configuration CCT 800

 Subscriber > Video > tab General
 Show video menu: Activate this checkbox to enable the live video menu for the respective
subscriber.

 Camera control during conversation

It is possible to define that at conversations to stations, to which a camera is allocated, the following
buttons can be used for control of the camera:
Button Description
1 Focus in
2 Camera up
3 Zoom in
4 Camera left (pan)
5 Home
6 Camera right (pan)
7 Focus out
8 Camera down
9 Zoom out
0 Special

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
 Camera No.: In this field, a camera number can be allocated to the respective subscriber. I.e. position
on video switcher (0 = the checkbox Camera control is deactivated).
 Camera control: Activate this checkbox if a controllable camera is allocated to the respective
subscriber.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common
 Camera ID’s: Select the desired radio button to define the number of used digits for the camera ID.
 Go to: Subscriber > Video
 Control via ICX #1 or Control via ICX #2: In these drop-down lists, the interface can be selected, to
which the respective video switcher is connected.

ATTENTION:
When the checkbox control camera is activated, it is not possible to carry out after-dialling functions
for the camera station (e.g. microphone mute, re-call requests, call park of call requests with button
2 or 3)!

3.1/0923 387
 Video Intercom Server Configuration

 Deleting of monitors at the start of the Intercom Server

It is very common that the Intercom system shares a video switcher with other systems. When the In-
tercom Server that is connected to the video system is started, not all video monitors are to be reset.
Only those monitors that have been assigned to a control desk as main, preview, or other type monitor
are allowed to be reset.

Configuration CCT 800

 Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab Video switcher
 1st controlled monitor: In this field, the monitor number of the first monitor on the video switch can
be entered, which are controlled in ascending order by the Intercom system (lower numbers cannot
be controlled by the Intercom system).
 Send camera switch-OFF at start: Activate this checkbox to output “black screen” messages for the
monitors. If this checkbox is deactivated, only the message “00 5E 00 0000 0000 00” is output. If an
Idle screen camera is configured, a black screen is shortly displayed after a restart, followed by the
idle screen.

 Bonding of monitors

Feature PRO 800 3.x – bonding of monitors
PRO 800 With this feature it is possible to create a bonding of non-audio clients to audio subscribers.
LICENCE PRO3U This allows you to add up to 4 monitors to an audio subscriber without a video switcher.

Example

Example 1:
For the host client (CD 810I), no monitor is confi-
gured, this means that the colour TFT display re-
ceives no video. CTDS 50P (non-audio client) is
bonded to the CD 810I and it is configured as main
monitor. This means that each video from a video
conversation to the CD 810I is indicated at the CDTS
50P (non-audio client).

Example 2:
The function “main monitor mirroring” is activated
for the CD 810I. This means that the monitor from
the CD 810I is mirrored to the slave monitor.

388 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Video

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Bonding
 Slave 1-4: The four slave participants that are to be assigned to the corresponding host can be se-
lected from these drop-down lists.

NOTE:
 The following subscribers can be used as slaves:
 All non-audio clients
 WS TM
 Conductor
 If the drop-down list Slave 1 is grayed out for a participant, it can no longer be used as a slave
(e.g. because it is assigned to another participant as a slave).
 The numbering of the monitors is structured in a hierarchical manner: the host participant has
“monitor 1”, the slave participants from “monitor 2” upwards. If Mirror main monitor is activat-
ed, “slave 1”, i.e. “monitor 2”, serves as a mirror monitor.

Configuration CCT 800 (monitor)

NOTE:
Only one main, preview or observation monitor may be configured for a subscriber.

 Go to: Subscriber > Video > tab Monitor

 Position of 1st Monitor: In this field, the lowest monitor number can be entered, which is controlled
from the respective subscriber.
 Main monitor present: Activate this checkbox if a main monitor is used for the respective subscriber.
 Main monitor mirroring: Activate this checkbox to mirror the main monitor by slave “1”. If the check-
box is activated, slave 1 is used as mirrored monitor in case the configured monitor options are not
valid.
 Preview monitors: The number “1” can be entered in this field if this participant serve as a preview
monitor. Only one preview monitor can be used for bonding.
 Scan time [s]: In this field, the scan time of preview monitors can be entered (max. 255 seconds, 0 =
scanning disabled). The scan time has to be configured for the host participant.
 Observation monitors: The number “1” can be entered in this field if this participant serve as a ob-
servation monitor. Only one observation monitor can be used for bonding.
 Scan time [s]: In this field, the time for scanning of pictures on the observation monitors can be en-
tered (max. 255 seconds, 0 = scanning disabled). The scan time has to be configured for the host par-
ticipant.

3.1/0923 389
 Speech recording Intercom Server Configuration

 Speech recording
The transmitted audio signals of a microphone or loudspeaker of a station can be combined to a single
signal and saved by a recording subscriber. Recording is possible for a conversation, alarm, group call,
All Call, Simplex conference or OpenDuplex® conference. The following types of speech recording are
available:
 Speech recording of IoIP audio signals – see page 391
 Speech recording via RTP – see page 394

Requirements
The following feature levels are required:
 Recording subscriber: 
 Recorded subscriber: 

 Feature PRO 800 4.0 – Speech recording of subscribers with feature level B
Subscribers to be recorded must have feature level “B”.

The following Intercom Server cards support speech recording:

 Gx-AUD
 Gx-IP

Restrictions
 If the recorder (e.g. IP, RTP server or AUD) and the recorded subscriber are not located within the
same Intercom Server (except for RTP direct from device), two additional channels are required (4x
PCM with GEV, CNET-E1 and CNET-W).
 When using IP subscriber cards, restrictions possibly exist for this function (see page 520).
 In case an Intercom Server fails and cancels the conversation (e.g. due to a connection failure or in
case of voltage failure), the recording will stop automatically. If the Intercom Server containing the
recorder fails, an ongoing conversation (e.g. with mandatory recording) will be cancelled.
 Recording over a network is not possible with S0 cards.

390 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Speech recording

Speech recording of IoIP audio signals

On the following pages, you will find a step-by-step instruction to configure speech recording of IoIP
audio signals:
 Allocation of audio channels – see below
 Allocation of recording subscribers – see page 391
 Level adjustment for AUD cards – see page 392

 Allocation of audio channels

An audio channel can be assigned to a subscriber in order to configure this as recording subscriber. An
audio channel is required for transmitting the audio signals (microphone and loudspeaker) of the re-
corded subscriber.

Configuration CCT 800

To assign an audio channel to a subscriber, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Subscriber > Speech recording > Audio channel - allocation
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Audio channel - allocation”.
 3. In the drop-down list In parallel to, select the master channel, to which the subscribers be switched.

GOOD TO KNOW: Need of a master channel?

Several recording channels can be assigned to one master channel in order to create a pool of
recording channels. A master channel can be assigned to a subscriber to be recorded, but the sub-
scriber can use all recording channels that are assigned to the master channel.
If a master channel is assigned to a subscriber (slave), this recording of the slave and master is car-
ried out only once. If the two subscribers are not connected by a master channel0, the recording is
carried out separately for each subscriber.

NOTES:
 At least one master channel is required.
 Each recording subscriber can be defined as master channel.

Additional settings
Function Description
Attendant contact In this drop-down list, an output can be selected, which is closed while recording. 1)
In this drop-down list, an ICX interface can be selected as the destination to output
ICX messages
audio card messages. 2)
1)
Outputs from Gx-AUD cards are not suitable for direct switching (because of e.g. switching voltage or iso-
lation). Only indirect switching is allowed.
2) For further information about the configuration of ICX messages, see the product manual “ICX Protocol”.

 Allocation of recording subscribers

A recording subscriber has to be assigned to each call type of the recorded subscriber that be recorded.

Configuration CCT 800

To assign recording to a recorded subscriber, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Subscriber > Speech Recording > Recording

3.1/0923 391
 Speech recording Intercom Server Configuration

2. In the drop-down lists Conversation, Alarm, All/Group Call, Conference and OpenDuplex®
conference, select a recording subscriber for the desired conversation type.

 VirtuoSIS Feature PRO 800 6.2 and VirtuoSIS 7.0

 LICENCE PRO6U
Speech recording of OpenDuplex®conferences
It is possible to record the initiator and all receivers of an OpenDuplex®conference (manda-
VirtuoSIS tory recording also possible).
LICENCE SIS7U

ATTENTION:
 For the drop-down lists Conference and OpenDuplex®conference, a restart of the respective
Intercom Server is required after the configuration has been changed!
 It is only possible to record OpenDuplex®conferences with up to eight participants (instead of one
initiator and up to eight receivers) as the recording subscriber can only record eight audio signals
at the same time!

3. Optional: Activate the checkbox Mandatory recording to mandatory record the respective
conversation type.

GOOD TO KNOW: Mandatory recording of the call types

Conversation (normal and emergency call)
During a call (normal or emergency call), a mandatory recording of the caller and callee is possible.
The conversation is started and recorded only if a recording subscriber is available. Otherwise, the
busy tone is played back at the respective stations.
Alarm, group call and All Call
During an alarm, group call or All Call, a mandatory recording of the initiator is possible. An alarm,
group call or All Call is started and recorded only if a recording subscriber is available for the initia-
tor. Otherwise, the busy tone is played back at the respective stations. A mandatory recording of
receivers is not possible. If a recording subscriber becomes available during an alarm, group call or
All Call, the receivers will be recorded at that moment.
Simplex and OpenDuplex® conference
During a Simplex or OpenDuplex® conference, a mandatory recording of the initiator and all receiv-
ers is possible. A Simplex or OpenDuplex® conference is started and recorded only if a recording
subscriber is available. Otherwise, the busy tone is played back at the respective stations.

NOTE:
 Only for Intercom Server GE 200 and GE 700: Recording of a conversation between 2 analogue
subscribers within one Intercom Server is not possible.
 Recording with the function “Reception of multiple radio conferences” is not possible with
Gx-AUD cards. Only the first channel is recorded.
 The link of a subscriber to an active party line conference is delayed until a free recorder channel
is available (with busy tone).
 For conversation converted to a OpenDuplex® conference, mandatory recording is not possible.
I.e. in this case, the configuration will be ignored and the OpenDuplex® conference will be started.

Level adjustment for AUD cards

NOTE: Available only for AUD cards

The following function is only available for AUD and AUD2 cards.

In CCT 800, the attenuation and amplification of different frequencies can be configured for speech
recording in order to suppress or increase certain frequencies.

Configuration CCT 800

To configure the frequency levels for speech recording, follow the instructions below:

392 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Speech recording

1. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > AUD > tab Parameter
2. In the drop-down list Input level, select the set value of the input level in order to adjust the value to
the codec of the AUD card.
3. In the drop-down list Output level, select the set value of the output level to adjust the value to the
recording subscriber.
4. In the drop-down lists Equalizer (Mic) and Equalizer (LS), select an equalizer preset for the
microphone or the loudspeaker. Optionally, the equalizer settings can be configured manually (see
below).

Additional settings
Function Description
DTMF-identification Activate this checkbox to enable the DTMF identification.

Configure equalizer settings

To configure the equalizer settings, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > AUD > tab Parameter
2. Click on the button Configure. The following dialogue appears:

3. In the drop-down list Settings for, select whether the equalizer settings apply to the microphone or
loudspeaker.
4. Activate the checkbox next to the drop-down list Settings for to activate the equalizer. The state of
the amplifier is changed in real-time.

3.1/0923 393
 Speech recording Intercom Server Configuration

5. Put the slider on the desired position for the respective frequency to adjust the attenuation or
amplification. The current value is shown in the field Value [db].

NOTE: 16 kHz only for AUD2 cards

The frequency 16 kHz is only available with AUD2 cards.

6. In the drop-down list Presets, a pre-configured setting can be loaded by pressing the button Load,
or the current equalizer settings can be saved in the selected preset by Pressing the button Save. It
is the same setting as in the drop-down list Equalizer (LS) in the main dialogue.
7. Click on the button Send to send the defined equalizer settings to the Intercom Server. Optionally,
activate the checkbox Online to send the equalizer settings to the Intercom Server in real-time.
8. Click on button Apply to save the equalizer settings and to close the dialogue.

 RTP Mode
The Real-time Transport Protocol is a network protocol for delivering audio and video over IP networks.
Audio signals from the Intercom system can be transmitted (e.g. for speech recording) via RTP stream
using IP stations or cards.
The following licences are required for speech recording via RTP:
 Upgrade licence “Lx-PRO2U”
 Licence “L-IP-REC-1”

RTP Mode for IP Devices

 Feature PRO 800 2.0 – Speech recording via RTP mode over IP stations
PRO 800
Audio signals of the microphone and loudspeaker of an IP station (mixed to a single audio
LICENCE PRO2U signal) can be transmitted for speech recording via RTP in parallel to IoIP® audio signals (the
station “records” its own audio signals).

Requirements
 DSP 900A (min. 5.1) and PRO 800 (min. 1.4) or IoIP device (min. 7.0).

Configuration CCT 800

To configure speech recording via RTP over IP stations follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Subscriber > RTP Configuration
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add function”.
3. In the field RTP Server IP, enter the IP address of the RTP server. The following fields will be enabled.
4. In the field RTP Port, enter the port of the RTP server
5. In the drop-down list Quality, select the quality of the transmitted audio signals via RTP.
6. In the drop-down list RTCP-interval [s], select the time for the RTCP (RTP Control Protocol) for
receiving audio signals.
7. In the drop-down list Mode, select the recording mode. The following modes are available:
 Off: No recording.
 Only audio: Only audio recording of microphone input.
 Audio + tones: Recording of microphone input and DSP tones (e.g. minute tone).

394 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Speech recording

RTP Mode for IP Cards

 Feature PRO 800 2.1 – Speech recording via RTP mode over IP subscriber cards
PRO 800
Audio signals from the Intercom server can be transmitted for speech recording (as already de-
LICENCE PRO2U scribed, see page 391) also via RTP streams, using an “RTP server” IP subscriber type. Up to 5
audio channels can be processed per IP card simultaneously.

Requirements
 Gx-IP (min. 5.2), PRO 800 (min. 2.1), SIS-IP-8.

Configuration CCT 800

To configure speech recording via RTP IP subscriber cards follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common
2. In the drop-down list Series, select the entry “RTP Server” or the appropriate subscriber.
3. Configure the recorder and the recorded IP subscribers. For configuration instructions see
“Allocation of audio channels” on page 391 and see “Allocation of recording subscribers” on
page 391.
4. Go to: Subscriber > RTP Configuration
5. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add function”.
6. In the field RTP Server IP, enter the IP address of the RTP server. The following fields will be enabled.
7. In the field RTP Port, enter the port of the RTP server
8. In the drop-down list Quality, select the quality of the transmitted audio signals via RTP.
9. In the drop-down list RTCP-interval [s], select the time for the RTCP (RTP Control Protocol) for
receiving audio signals.
10.In the drop-down list Mode, select the recording mode. The following modes are available:
 Off: No recording.
 RTP Server: Audio signals transmitted via RTP.

3.1/0923 395
 Speech recording Intercom Server Configuration

Additional settings
Function Description
In this field, the reserved RTCP port will be indicated, which will be used to receive
 Reserved RTCP port
audio streams if several channels are configured.
In this drop-down list, the reduction of the RTP stream can be selected (with each 3dB
Reduction
levels).
VOX-Control For further information see page 397.
VOX-Follow up
For further information see page 397.
time [s]
Interface
In this drop-down list, an interface can be selected for synchronisation.
synchronisation
In this drop-down list, the mode of the time synchronisation via a SNTP server can be
selected. The following modes are available:
 Off: No time synchronisation.
 On: The subscriber executes the time synchronisation directly via a SNTP server.
SNTP  On via IS: The subscriber carries out the time synchronisation indirectly via the In-
tercom Server, which receives the time from a SNTP server. This mode leads to an
increased delay in the synchronisation process. A SNTP server can be configured for
the respective Intercom Server in the field SNTP Server IP Address at Intercom
Server > Real time (SNTP) (see page 415).
The time stamp of RTP packets can be configured for IP-devices or classic Intercom
servers with IP card in this drop-down list. For SIS-IP cards, this option requires
Timestamp VirtuoSIS 11.0 and CCT 800 11.0. The following selection is possible:
 Commend: Compatibility for connecting with Commend products.
 RFC 3550: Compatibility for connecting with Commend and third-party products.

 VOX control for RTP speech recording

Feature PRO 800 5.1 – VOX control
PRO 800 With the VOX control (Voice Operated Exchange), the transmission of a RTP stream will
LICENCE PRO5U automatically be interrupted as long as no audio is transmitted after a configurable time.

Audio signals of subscribers will be mixed to one single RTP stream that will be transmitted to the RTP
server. If no audio is transmitted in this mixed RTP stream within a configurable time (follow-up time),
the transmission will be interrupted. As soon as audio is transmitted again, the transmission of the RTP
stream will be continued. Each recording will be saved as separate file at the RTP server, also when the
transmission of the RTP stream has been interrupted temporarily. See the following illustration:

396 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Speech recording

Requirements
This function is supported for the following Intercom Servers:
 GE 800 (min. PRO 800 5.1)
 GE 300 (min. PRO 800 5.1)
 VirtuoSIS (min. PRO 800 6.0)

Configuration CCT 800

To enable VOX control for speech recording via RTP, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Subscriber > RTP Configuration
2. Activate the checkbox VOX-Control to enable the VOX control for the respective RTP server. The
drop-down list VOX-Follow up time [s] is enabled.
3. In the drop-down list VOX-Follow up time [s], select the time, after which the transmission of the
RTP stream is interrupted if no audio is transferred.

3.1/0923 397
 Pre-recorded audio Intercom Server Configuration

 Pre-recorded audio
Certain cards and Intercom Servers have a permanent storage which is able to save converted audio
files (so-called pre recorded audio files) for playback at e.g. stations or loudspeakers. Pre-recorded
audio files are converted WAV audio files that can be managed in the pre-recorded audio client of CCT
800 and used in the Intercom Server for various functions (e.g. calm-down signal at call requests or
announcements).

Requirements
Supported cards
The following cards and Intercom Server have a permanent storage for saving pre-recorded audio files:
Interface cards IAX, AUD, TEL
Subscriber card G8-IP-32 Subscriber cards GET, GED and IP
Intercom Server IS 300 (up to generation 2)
Subscriber cards GET, GED, IP (min. generation 3)
8 MB flash memory (7.48 MB audio memory) 2 MB flash memory (1.496 MB audio memory)
Up to 450 seconds at 16 kHz /
90 seconds at 16 kHz
maximum of 90 seconds per audio file
Up to 900 seconds at 7 kHz /
180 seconds at 7 kHz
maximum of 180 seconds per audio file
A maximum of 120 pre-recorded audio files per block A maximum of 120 pre-recorded audio files per card

NOTE: Transmission only possible with audio card

Pre-recorded audio can only be downloaded to Intercom Servers from computers with an installed
sound card.

Supported audio file formats

An imported audio file will be converted automatically, whereby also the storage of the audio file can
be changed. For import, only WAV audio file with audio codec “G.722” or “G.722e” is supported.

ATTENTION: Required sections of a WAV file

The sections fmt, data, and RIFF Subchunk of a WAV file has to be completed!

398 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Pre-recorded audio

Pre-recorded audio management

On the following pages, you will find a step-by-step instruction for the import of audio files, confi-
guration of pre-recorded audio files and the management of playlists. The following chapters are avail-
able:
 Management of pre-recorded audio files in the library – see below
 Management of playlists in the playlist editor – see page 400
 Send the playlists to the Intercom Server – see page 403
 Additional functions in the pre-recorded audio client – see page 405

Management of pre-recorded audio files in library

In the library, all imported audio files can be managed. In this view, audio files can be added to the
library and converted pre-recorded audio files can be added to the playlists for further use in the
Intercom Servers.

Configuration CCT 800

To configure the pre-recorded audio files in the library, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Pre-recorded audio
The following dialogue appears:

Management of pre-recorded audio files in library

2. Click on the pre-recorded audio tree and select the entry “Library” (by default already selected when
opening the pre-recorded audio client). The library is shown pre-recorded audio client.

3.1/0923 399
Pre-recorded audio Intercom Server Configuration

Import of audio files

At the import, audio files are converted automatically (i.e. quality and storage can be changed). To
import audio files, follow the instructions below:
3. In the section “File System”, click on the button Import and select the desired audio files.
Additionally, audio files and playlists can be received from the Intercom Server (see page 410).

NOTE: Existing file can be overwritten or saved as copy

If there are existing audio files with the same data name in the library, they can be overwritten or
the imported audio file can be saved as copy.

When the import has been finished, the following settings are shown in the library of the pre-recorded
audio files:
Function Description
Name Name of the pre-recorded audio file.
File type File type of the pre-recorded audio file.
Samples Original quality of the pre-recorded audio file in the quality prior to the conversion.
Bits Bitrate of the pre-recorded audio file.
Duration [s] Playback time of the pre-recorded audio file.
Size Original memory size of the pre-recorded audio file prior to the conversion

GOOD TO KNOW: Configuration of pre-recorded audio files

The settings of the pre-recorded audio files will be configured separately per playlist, to which the
audio file is assigned.

ATTENTION: Max. 1.496 MB per converted audio file

A single converted audio file must not exceed 1.496 MB! Otherwise, this pre-recorded audio file can-
not be added to a playlist.

Add pre-recorded audio files to a playlist

To add one or more pre-recorded audio files to a playlist, follow the instructions below:
4. Select the desired pre-recorded audio files in the library.
5. Drag-and-Drop the selected pre-recorded audio files onto the desired playlist. If the desired playlist
does not exist already, the following options are available:
 Create playlist: Carry out a right-click on “Playlists” in the pre-recorded audio tree and select
“New Playlist”.
 Import playlists – see page 407
 Receive playlists from Intercom Server – see page 410

NOTE: Additional functions

Further additional optional functions can be found on page 405.

Management of playlists in the playlist editor

With the playlist editor, the individual pre-recorded audio files are grouped to playlists. These playlists
will be sent to the Intercom Server for further use. To configure the playlists in the playlist editor, follow
the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Pre-recorded audio

400 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Pre-recorded audio

2. Select the desired playlist in the pre-recorded audio tree. The following dialogue appears:

Management of playlists in the playlist editor

GOOD TO KNOW: Storage capacity of card types

The blue bar serves as a status indicator about the currently used storage space of the respective
block. See the following illustration:

Beginning with block 1 all audio files will be saved on the blocks in ascending order. 1) The audio
files will be saved in the same block; when the storage space of this block is full, the files will be
saved in the next block (if available). The storage capacity of the playlist must not exceed the
maximum capacity of all available blocks. 2) 3)
Transferred audio files will be dynamically saved to use the storage of each block in the best possi-
ble way. A block has a storage space of 1.496 MB. The following storage spaces are available for
the different card types:
 8 MB (e.g. IAX, AUD, TEL, IP32, IP): The storage space is divided into five blocks with each
1.496 MB. In total, this card type has a storage space of 7.48MB for audio files.
 2 MB (e.g. GET, GED, IP): The storage space is divided into one block with 1.496 MB.
1)
Depending on the card type (2 MB or 8 MB) a different number of blocks are available.
2)
An audio file can only be saved in one block. Thus the storage space of a block may be full at less
than 100%.
3) Up to 120 pre-recorded audio files can be saved per block.

3.1/0923 401
Pre-recorded audio Intercom Server Configuration

3. In the field Name, the name of the playlist can be changed.

4. In the drop-down list Memory Size, select the card type with the specific memory size. The following
memory sizes are available:
 8 MB (e.g. IAX, AUD, TEL, IP32, IP)
 2 MB (e.g. GET, GED, IP)
5. Activate the checkbox Enabled for the desired pre-recorded audio files in the playlist that be sent to
the Intercom Server.
6. In the field ID, enter a unique ID for the pre-recorded audio file, for which the checkbox Enabled is
activated. Free IDs are from 0 to 159 (see “Predefined voice files for system functions” on page 411).

NOTE: Invalid or duplicate IDs

Invalid IDs are indicated with beige background, whereas duplicate IDs are indicated with orange
background.

NOTE: Further information

Further information about tones can be found on page 162.

GOOD TO KNOW: Assembly of re-recorded audio files

It is possible to assembly multiple audio files with ICX messages (e.g. to form sentences). For fur-
ther information about assembling multiple audio files, see the product manual “ICX Proto-
col”.

7. In the drop-down list Client, select one or more clients, which should use the respective audio file.
The following clients are available:
 Client 1 – 4: For the first 4 subscribers of the subscriber card.
 Client 1 – 8 (only for IP subscriber cards): For all subscribers of the IP subscriber card.
 Client 5 (only G8-IP-32/G8-IP-64/Intercom Server IS 300): For the subscribers 5 to 32 (G8-IP-32) or
5 to 64 (G8-IP-64) of the subscriber card.

ATTENTION: Separate allocation not possible

Pre recorded audio files cannot be allocated separately to this subscribers!

 Client 6 – 8: Not used on IP32 card.

8. In the field Destination quality, select the quality of the pre-recorded audio file in the Intercom
Server. The following qualities are available:
 8kHz: The audio file is converted to “G.722“.
 16kHz: The audio file is converted to “G.722e”.

ATTENTION: Restrictions for G8-IP-32 and IS 300

In case the plug-in server G8-IP-32 or the Intercom Server IS 300 is used, every pre-recorded
audio file must exist in both qualities (same ID but each with the destination quality of 8 kHz and
16 kHz)! If the required quality of the pre-recorded file is not available, the standard tone will be
used instead!

402 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Pre-recorded audio

Additional settings
Function Description
Name Name of the pre-recorded audio file.
File type File type of the pre-recorded audio file.
Samples Original quality of the pre-recorded audio file prior to the conversion.
Bits Bitrate of the pre-recorded audio file.
Duration [s] Playback time of the pre-recorded audio file.
Destination size Required memory size of the pre-recorded audio file. 1)
1)
The memory size might be changed by the configured destination quality of the audio file. (see above).

NOTE: Additional functions

Further additional optional functions can be found on page 405.

Send playlists to Intercom Server

Playlists must be sent to the Intercom Server for playback at e.g. stations or loudspeakers. To send pre-
recorded audio files to the Intercom Server, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Pre-recorded audio
2. Select the desired playlist in pre-recorded audio tree that be sent to the Intercom Server.

3.1/0923 403
Pre-recorded audio Intercom Server Configuration

3. Click on the button Download to Server. The following dialogue appears:

Send playlists to Intercom Server

GOOD TO KNOW: Activation of button “Download to Server”

The button Download to Server is activated when the following conditions are fulfilled for the
selected playlist in the playlist editor:
 The checkbox Enabled must be activated for at least one pre-recorded audio file.
 Valid IDs are set for all pre-recorded audio files, for which the checkbox Enabled is activated.
 One or more clients are selected for all audio files, for which the checkbox Enabled is activated.
 A single converted audio file is not bigger than 1.496 MB.
 Maximum 120 pre-recorded audio files are available per block.
 The storage capacity does not exceed the maximum capacity of all available blocks.
Further information about these settings can be found on page 400.

4. Click on the button Query network to indicate all available Intercom Servers within the network.
5. Click on the button Get Data and select the tab Cards.
6. Select the desired Intercom Servers, to which the playlists be sent.
7. Click on the button Download to send the selected playlists to the Intercom Server.

NOTE: Max one playlist per card

Max. one playlist can be loaded per card (existing playlists are overwritten). One playlist can be
downloaded to multiple cards.

ATTENTION:
 When uploading a playlist, the data of each block, which will not be used by the uploaded playlist,
will be deleted (is only valid for card types with a memory size of 8 MB)!
 In order to keep the download time to a minimum, it is recommend to select not more than two
cards per download!

404 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Pre-recorded audio

8. When the playlists has been sent, click on the button Close to close the dialogue.

Allocation of pre-recorded audio

There are two possibilities to allocate and to use the pre-recorded audio:
 Allocation of pre-recorded audio via system tones: Allocation of an ID for system tones (see
page 402). Instead of the system tone the pre-recorded audio is played back at the cards/clients, to
which it has been downloaded.
 Allocation of pre-recorded audio via feed-in: Feed-in of pre-recorded audio via a music or radio con-
ference.

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Music or Subscriber > Feed-in > Radio Conference
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Feed-in of music” or “Add Feed in of radio
conference”.
3. In the field Pre-recorded audio ID, enter the ID of the pre-recorded audio. See table on page 402 for
a list of all available pre-recorded audio IDs. For further information about feed-in see page 287.

NOTE:
 The pre-recorded audio has to be transferred to the same card as the subscriber (used as feed-in).
 The pre-recorded audio has to be allocated to the same client to which the respective subscriber is
allocated (see page 402).
 The pre-recorded audio is played back permanently in a loop.

Additional functions in the pre-recorded audio client

The following additional functions can be carried out optionally in the pre-recorded audio client.

Rename pre-recorded audio files

To rename pre-recorded audio files, follow the instructions below:
1. Carry out a double or right click on a pre-recorded audio file in the library and select “Rename file”.
The following dialogue appears:

Rename pre-recorded audio files

2. Enter the new name of the pre-recorded audio file.
3. Click on the button OK.

Delete playlists
To delete pre-recorded audio files, follow the instructions below:
1. Select the desired pre-recorded audio files in the library.
2. Right-click on the selected pre-recorded audio files and select “Remove files”. A dialogue appears.
3. Click on the button Yes.

NOTE: Pre-recorded audio files are removed from playlists

The deleted pre-recorded audio files will be removed from the playlists automatically.

Export of pre-recorded audio files

Pre-recorded audio files can be exported and saved on the computer. To export pre-recorded audio
files, follow the instructions below:
1. Select the desired pre-recorded audio files in the library.

3.1/0923 405
Pre-recorded audio Intercom Server Configuration

2. In the section “File System”, click on the button Export. A dialogue appears.
3. Select the desired storage path.

Change storage path of library

In CCT 800, the storage path of the library (i.e. pre-recorded audio files and playlists) can be changed.
To change the storage path, follow the instructions below:
1. In the section “Options”, click on the button Settings. The following dialogue appears:

Change storage path of library

2. In the field Library location, enter the desired path or click on the button... and select the desired
directory, where the library be saved.
3. Click on the button OK.

406 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Pre-recorded audio

Playback of pre-recorded audio files in CCT 800 with media player

The media player enabled the playback of pre-recorded audio files in the library. See the following
screenshot:

Playback of pre-recorded audio files in CCT 800 with media player

To playback pre-recorded audio file, follow the instructions below:
1. Select the desired pre-recorded audio file in the library. The file name is shown in the header of the
media player.
2. Click on the play button to start the playback of the selected pre-recorded audio file. The blue bar
shows the current playback time.
3. Click on the stop button to stop the playback of the pre-recorded audio file.

Remove pre-recorded audio files from playlist

To remove pre-recorded audio files from the playlists, follow the instructions below:
1. Select the desired pre-recorded audio files in the library.
2. Right-click on the selected pre-recorded audio files and select “Remove Link”. A dialogue appears.
3. Click on the button Yes.

NOTE: Pre-recorded audio files remain in the library

The removed pre-recorded audio files will not be deleted from the library.

Delete a playlist
To delete an existing playlists, follow the instructions below:
1. Right-click on the desired playlist in the pre-recorded audio tree and select “Remove Playlist”. A
dialogue appears.
2. Click on the button Yes.

Import of playlists
With CCT 800 7.0 or higher, several playlists can be imported at the same time (up to CCT 800 6.1, play-
list can only be imported individually).

Configuration CCT 800

To import playlists, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Pre-recorded audio

3.1/0923 407
Pre-recorded audio Intercom Server Configuration

The following dialogue appears:

Import of playlists
2. Click on the button Import 1 or right-click on the entry “Playlists” in the pre-recorded audio tree 2

and select “Import Playlist”.

The following dialogue appears:

Select playlist to import

408 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Pre-recorded audio

3. Activate the checkboxes of the desired directories with the playlists that are to be imported.

NOTE: Subdirectories are excluded

Only playlists in the selected directories will be imported. Playlists in subdirectories will not be
included for the import.

4. Click on the button OK. The playlists are added automatically to the playlist editor.

NOTE: Playlists of the same name

Existing playlists with the same name will be extended by the pre-recorded audio file of the
imported playlist. Existing pre-recorded audio files will be replaced or excluded from the import.

Export of playlists
With CCT 800 7.0 or higher, several playlists can be exported and saved on the computer at the same
time (up to CCT 6.1, playlist can only be exported individually).

Configuration CCT 800

To export playlists, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Pre-recorded audio
The following dialogue appears:

Export of playlists
2. Select the desired playlists in the pre-recorded audio tree 1 .
3. Click on the button Export 2 or carry out a right-click on the entry “Playlists” in the pre-recorded
audio tree 3 and select “Export Playlist”. The “folder browser” dialogue appears.
4. Select the desired storage path or create a new directory.

3.1/0923 409
Pre-recorded audio Intercom Server Configuration

Receive playlists from Intercom Server

The playlists and pre-recorded audio files saved in the cards of an Intercom Server can be received with
the pre-recorded audio client. To receive the playlists and pre-recorded audio files, follow the instruc-
tions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Pre-recorded audio
2. Click on the button Upload to PC. The following dialogue appears:

Receive playlists from Intercom Server

3. Click on the button Query network to indicate all available Intercom Servers within the network.
4. Click on the button Get Data and select the tab Cards.
5. Select the desired cards, from which the playlists and pre-recorded audio files be received.
6. Click on the button Upload to receive the playlists and pre-recorded audio files from the selected
cards.

NOTE: File format of received pre-recorded audio files

Received pre-recorded audio files are saved either in the format G.722 (7 kHz) or G.722e (16 kHz).

7. When the data has been received, click on the button Close to close the dialogue. The received
playlists and pre-recorded audio files will be shown automatically in the pre-recorded audio client.

410 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Pre-recorded audio

Erase playlists from Intercom Server

The playlists and pre-recorded audio files saved in the cards of an Intercom Server can be erased with
the pre-recorded audio client. To erase the playlists and pre-recorded audio files, follow the instruc-
tions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Pre-recorded audio
2. Click on the button Erase. The following dialogue appears:

Erase playlists from Intercom Server

3. Click on the button Query network to indicate all available Intercom Servers within the network.
4. Click on the button Get Data and select the tab Cards.
5. Select the desired cards, from which the playlists and pre-recorded audio files be erased.
6. Click on the button Erase to delete the playlists and pre-recorded audio files from the selected cards.
A dialogue appears.
7. Click on the button Yes.
8. When the files have been erased, click on the button Close to close the dialogue.

Predefined voice files for system functions

The following IDs for voice files for system messages are available:
 160+: The pre-recorded audio is played back instead of the respective system messages.

ID Description ID Description
160 No tone 175 Waiting tone for busy 1)
161 Info tone 176 Dial tone send
162 Dial tone 177 Dial tone receive
163 Error tone 178 Dial tone for the telephone interface 2) 3)
164 Busy tone 179 Alarm tone low
165 Busy tone (tieline) 180 Alarm tone high
166 Acknowledgement tone 181 Call request normal call initiator

3.1/0923 411
Pre-recorded audio Intercom Server Configuration

167 Acknowledgement tone off 182 Call request emergency call initiator
168 Accept tone (access control modules) 183 Parked call/On hold 3) 4) 5)
169 Privacy tone 184 All Call tone
Control call tone (access control mod-
170 185 Group call tone
ules)
171 Call tone 186 Chime signal gong (IN on GEP/GEN)
172 Minute tone
173 Waiting tone for microphone mute
174 Waiting tone for call forwarding
1)
Waiting information for “busy” after pressing button 0 (see page 205).
2)
Can be used for GTEL, IAX and with PRO 800 6.1 for SIS-SIP-T.
3)
Intercom Server software min. PRO 800 6.0 and licence “Lx-PRO6U” required.
4) Does not apply for emergency calls with the function “Cancel on site” (see page 337). These calls remain

active as call type 2 (emergency call).

5)
While in the “On hold” state the predefined voice file with ID 183 is played, stations equipped with dis-
plays also show this state visually.

412 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Pre-recorded audio

 Recording pre-recorded audio files with Intercom station


Feature PRO 800 3.x – Recording of pre-recorded audio files
PRO 800
With dialling the button sequence “9T01” at an Intercom station, it is possible to create and
LICENCE PRO3U overwrite pre-recorded audio files within the Intercom system.
Example: The calm-down message of a help point can be recorded or changed from a control
desk such as EE811A.

Restrictions
 Pre-recorded audio files can be recorded for up to 30 seconds. With 8 MB of available flash memory,
individual files may contain a maximum of 90 or 180 seconds of recorded audio.
 Up to 120 pre-recorded audio files can be saved per card.
 When using cards with large-sized memory (8 MB), pre-recorded audio files can be recorded until
the limit of the available storage has exceeded. If the mark of 6 MB has been exceeded, pre-recorded
audio files can only be deleted with the pre-recorded audio client in CCT 800 (see page 411), because
the remaining storage is used as buffer.
 When using cards with low-sized memory (2 MB), pre-recorded audio files can only be deleted or
overwritten with the pre-recorded audio client in CCT 800 (see page 411).
 During recording with the 9T01 function, system-based audio messages (e.g, announcements) can-
not be played back at the recording and target station simultaneously. In addition, it may corrupt the
recording.
 Feature level D is required for subscribers that are recording pre-recorded audio files for remote
stations. However, recording for itself is not subject to this restriction.
 An Intercom station cannot receive or send more than one audio signals at a time. As a result, the
target subscriber will have no audio signal available during recordings or playbacks made using the
9T01 function.

Hardware and software requirements

The 9T01 function is available for any subscribers, which are connected to one of the following
Intercom Server or cards:
2 MB storage
Intercom Server or card Requirement
Gx-GED min. Rev. AB
Gx-GET min. Rev. AB
SIS-IP -
8 MB storage
Gx-AUD min. Rev. AB
Gx-IP min. Rev. AC, min. 05.4
IS 300 -
IP32 -
Gx-SUB min. 04.0

3.1/0923 413
Pre-recorded audio Intercom Server Configuration

Recording of pre-recorded audio files

To record a pre-recorded audio file at an Intercom station, follow the instructions below:
1. Dial the button sequence “9T01” at the recording station.

NOTE:
The button sequence “9T01” can be dialled with the following functions:
 Direct dialling
 Selection from the F2 function list at a station with dot-matrix display
 Dialling simulation of an input
 ICX message

2. At this station, enter the call number of the station to be recorded.

NOTE: Call number of own or remote station can be entered

It is possible to enter either your own call number (to record or change pre-recorded audio files for
your own subscriber), or to enter the call number of another station in the Intercom System (to
change a pre-recorded audio file remotely).

3. Enter the pre-recorded audio ID, in which the recording should be saved (001 – 199). The pre-
recorded audio ID is separated into a freely selectable and fixed IDs. Further information can be
found on page 402.
4. The recording mode starts. The following functions are available in the recording mode:
Button Description
Hold T Start recording
Release T Stop recording
0 Start playback
1 Saves the record for the selected subscriber
2 Recording for all subscribers will be saved on the card
3 Delete recording (available only while function is activated)
4 Scrolls through the saved audio files downwards (only during the replay)
6 Scrolls through the saved audio files upwards (only during the replay)
X Cancel recording

5. The save process lasts 60 seconds. In case of an error, a error tone is audible for 4 seconds (cancel
with X), followed by an new recording that can be started by pressing the button 1

ATTENTION: Audio files are available after 2–3 minutes after recording
When using the 9T01 function to overwrite an existing pre-recorded playback message, the new,
error-corrected recording will be available two to three minutes after the time indicated by the
confirmation tone on the calling terminal! During this time, the terminal will stay in idle mode and
will not indicate the progress of the overwriting process!

414 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Time, date

Time, date

 Display of time and date at stations


The current time can be displayed selectively at stations with display. At all multi-line displays
additionally the date is displayed.

Monochrome LCD display Dot-matrix display Colour TFT display

101
101 Station 101
Station 101 08.02.10 09:50

Tu 30. Mar 10 F1-Subscribers

14:40 F2-Functions
F3-Main Menu
d-Menu

EE 311A/EE 411

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab General
 Display time: Activate this checkbox to display the time at the display of the respective subscriber.

 Display only time at station


Feature PRO 800 2.1 – show only time (large)
PRO 800 With the function “Show only time (large)” it is possible to indicate only the time with big
LICENCE PRO2U letters at the display.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > Monitors > tab Monitor
 Show only time (large): Activate this checkbox to only show the time at the date/time indication on
the display of the respective subscriber.
 Subscriber > General > tab Display time
 Display time: Activate this checkbox to display the time at the display of the respective subscriber.

 Time synchronisation
 The real-time feature of the Intercom Server GE 800 and GE 300 uses the SNTP standard to retrieve
the time from a time server.
 During the start up the Intercom Server retrieves the current time in UTC from the configured time-
server (in LAN or internet).
 The time can also be set with an ICX message (when no SNTP server is available).
 Indication of time-sync status via output.

3.1/0923 415
 Time, date Intercom Server Configuration

 Automatic Daylight-Saving-Time (DST) adjustment.

 Time synchronisation interval:
 If a connection exists to the time server exists, the time is synchronised in an interval of 1 hour.
 If no connection exists to the time server exists, the synchronisation is executed in an interval of
5 minutes.
Time and date can be used for the following function:
 Indication of time and date at stations (see page 415).
 ICX messages with time-controlled execution (see page 418).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Real time (SNTP)
 Difference to UTC (+/- HH:MM): In this field, the time deviation to UTC “Universal Time Coordinated”
can be entered.

NOTE:
The entry of the time deviation is entered in the format “hours:minutes” and is divided into 15
minute steps.

  Automatic DST adjustment: In this drop-down list, the region for the automatic DST adjustment can
be selected. The following regions are available:
 Off: No automatic DST adjustment.
 Europe
 US
 The following regions are available with CCT 800 5.1:
 Australia
 New Zealand
 Date format: In this drop-down list, the date format of the displayed date and time can be selected
for the respective subscriber. The following date formats are available:
 Europe: DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS
 US: MM-DD-YY HH:MM:SS
 SNTP Server IP Address: In this field, the IP address of the SNTP server can be entered. The Intercom
Server with the lowest server ID in the network distributes the time to all Intercom Servers within the
configured blocks, which does not have entered a SNTP server IP address.
 Output number: In this field, the call number of the output can be entered for the indication of the
synchronisation state.
 Output is activated: The time of the respective Intercom Server is synchronised with SNTP.
 Output is deactivated: The time of the respective Intercom Server is not synchronised with SNTP.

416 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Time, date

 Time zones and date formats for individual subscriber


Feature PRO 800 6.0 – time zones and date formats for single subscribers
VirtuoSIS Customized time zones can be configured with pre-defined date formats for single subscribers,
LICENCE PRO6U
regardless of the allocated Intercom Server.

If no time zone is configured for a subscriber, the respective settings of the allocated Intercom Server
will automatically be applied for this subscriber.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Time zones
 Right-click and select “Add time zone”.
 Description: In this field, enter a name for the time zone. The following settings will be enabled.
 Difference to UTC (+/- HH:MM): In this field, the time deviation from UTC “Universal Time
Coordinated” can be entered.

NOTE:
The entry of the time deviation is entered in the format “hours:minutes” and is divided into 15
minute steps.

 Automatic DST adjustment: In this drop-down list, the region for the automatic DST adjustment can
be selected. The following regions are available:
 Off: No automatic DST adjustment.
 Europe
 US
 Australia
 New Zealand
 Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Display time
 Activate the checkbox Display time for the respective subscriber. The following settings will be
enabled.
 Time zone: In this drop-down list, the configured time zone can be selected.
 Standard time zone acc. to Intercom Server: The configured time zone of the allocated Intercom
Server is applied for the respective subscriber (see page 415).
 Date format: In this drop-down list, the date format of the displayed date and time can be selected
for the respective subscriber. The following date formats are available:
 Standard date format acc. to Intercom Server: The selected date format of the allocated Intercom
Server is applied for the respective subscriber (see page 415).
 Europe: DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS
 US: MM-DD-YY HH:MM:SS

3.1/0923 417
 Time, date Intercom Server Configuration

 ICX messages with time-controlled execution

 ICX messages can be sent only once, daily or weekly.
 Execution can be linked to the status of an input or output:
 Only when the input or output is active the ICX message is sent.
 A confirmation ICX message can be sent at execution of the time-controlled events
(e.g. for indication in Studio or logging in Reporter).

IDs
For each time-controlled event, an ID has to be assigned. This ID can be used to control the ICX
messages. Consider the following restrictions if the ID is used internally:
 IDs “0001” to “4FFF” has to be unique.
 IDs “5000” to “FFFF” do not have to be unique.

Activation/deactivation of time-controlled events via ICX messages

NOTE:
 A maximum of 32 entries can be configured.
 For further information about the configuration of ICX messages, see the product manual
“ICX Protocol”.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Time-triggered commands > sub-folder Intercom Server
 Right-click and select “Add delayed command”.
 ID: In this field, an ID has to be entered for each ICX message.
 Repeat at weekdays: Activate the checkboxes for the desired days on which the ICX message are to
be output.
 ICX-message at execution: Activate this check box to output a confirmation ICX message when the
time-controlled message is output. If a call number is configured, this results in the following
behaviour:
 Checkbox deactivated: The ICX message is only sent when the input/output is activated.
 Checkbox activated: The ICX message is only sent when the input/output is deactivated.
 Input- / Output state invers: Activate this checkbox to invert the state of the input or output. If
 Call number In-/Output: In this field, enter the number of the input or output that determines wheth-
er the timed ICX message is output.
 Execution time (YY.MM.DD-HH:MM:SS): In this field, enter the time/date when the ICX message is
to be executed.

ATTENTION:
The time must be entered in 24 hour format!

 Task: In this field, the task number of the desired ICX message has to be entered.
 Type: In this field, the type number of the desired ICX message has to be entered.
 Data: In this field, the parameter of the desired ICX message has to be entered.
 System no. receiver/sender: In this field, the receiver/sender block number of the Intercom Server
can be entered.

418 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Network function

Network function
NOTE:
 For information about networking of Intercom Servers via the LAN function, see the product manual
“G8-LAN / G3-LAN”.
 For information about networking of Intercom Servers via the WAN function, see the product manual
“L8-WAN / L3-WAN”.

Block configuration
Intercom Server blocks can be configured in Intercom Server networks (LAN, WAN, CNET-E1, CNET-
W, S0) to define in which housings functions like All Call or group calls be initiated. By pre-dialling a
function code, one Intercom Server or a group of Intercom Servers are selected and then the function
is carried out.

ATTENTION:
If no code number is pre-dialled the functions are carried out in all Intercom Server housings
connected over G8-NET, CNET-E1 or CNETW, but not in Intercom Server housings connected over
LAN/WAN or S0!

Example: CNET-LAN

Example: CNET-LAN
These Intercom Server blocks can be used for the following functions:
All Call Pre-defined conference 7T
Group call Subscriber index
Ringing at a group Chime signal
Alarm Video
Music Call request
Control desk with output of ICX commands (Studio) – required
Radio conference 6T
only for LAN, WAN or S0 networks

NOTE:
Consider the restrictions with mixed operation of Intercom Servers with different software versions of
PRO 800 (see page 422).

3.1/0923 419
Network function Intercom Server Configuration

Define the block numbers

If you want to use 1-digit block numbers for the Intercom Server blocks, consider that most of the digits
are reserved for functions:
Function code Description Function code Description
00 Initiate All Call 94 Call transfer (additional)
01 Initiate group call 95 Call transfer (delete previous)
02 Follow Me 96 Camera connection static picture
03 Privacy function 97 Camera connection scanning
04 Group call with feedback protection 98 Initiate ringing at a group
TT Answer All Call / group call 9T1 Configure direct dialling
0T Reconnection with last call 9T2 Initiate alarm
4T Music 9T3 Cancel alarm
5T Answer re-call request 9T4 Audio monitoring settings
6T Reception radio conference 9T5 ICX messages
7T Initiate pre-configured conference 9T8 Configure licences
8T Take over door call

ATTENTION:
The block numbers may not collide with call numbers of subscribers, inputs or outputs!

All digits except 1, 2 and 3 are reserved for the internal functions (the function codes can be changed;
see page 157). Usually the calling numbers start with 1, 2 and 3, so we recommend to use 2-digit block
numbers.

NOTE:
Hexadecimal block numbers are possible, however no numbers containing “F” may be used (0F, 1F,
2F, ..., CF, DF, EF, and F0 – FF).

420 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Network function

Configuration of the block numbers

Block numbers
Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Intercom Server > General Settings
 Additional Blocks: In this field, up to 13 additional blocks can be assigned to the Intercom Server
(multiple values are separated via commas).

Configuration blocks
In a configuration block, certain settings can be changed for all Intercom Servers in this block (e. g.
switch off times, waiting signals and hierarchy levels).
Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Intercom Server > General Settings
 Configuration Block: In this field, a configuration block can be assigned to the Intercom Server (max.
13 per housing; multiple values are separated by commas). The default value for this field is “00”.

Block numbers

Define the connections

For each connection over a network interface (S0, CNET-E1, CNET-W, CNET-LAN or WAN) it can be
defined, which Intercom Server blocks be reached over this interface. Maximum number of blocks to
be reached per connection:
 LAN: 16
 S0: 10
 CNET-W, CNET-E1: 16

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Network > IP-Connections > desired connection
 Intercom Server blocks: In this field, the block numbers of all Intercom Servers can be entered, which
are connected over the respective interface.

 Prefix for block numbers

In order to free call number ranges for subscribers, inputs and outputs, it is possible to define a prefix
for configuration blocks:
 E.g block prefix “77” → only call numbers “7700” to “7799” are not available.
 The block prefix can be allocated to multiple block numbers.
 E.g block numbers “80”, “81” and “91” can be dialled with “7780xx”, “7781xx” and “7791xx”.

NOTE:
Block prefix numbers are also possible with G7U-GEP and G7 network cards
(exception G7-CNET-LAN cards of the first generation).

3.1/0923 421
 Network function Intercom Server Configuration

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Block settings
 Block prefix: In this field, a prefix can be entered for the configuration block.

Example

Prefix for block numbers

In this example e.g. the All Calls are initiated as follows
 An All Call in housing 1 is initiated with 8100.
 An All Call in housing 2 is initiated with 8200.
 An All Call in housing 3 is initiated with 8300.
 An All Call in all three housings is initiated with 8000.
If these codes are too long, you can configure them as direct dialling codes:

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling codes “100=8100, 200=8200, 300=8300, 900=8000”
in the row of the respective configuration block.
All Calls are initiated as follows:
 An All Call in housing 1 is initiated with 100.
 An All Call in housing 2 is initiated with 200.
 An All Call in housing 3 is initiated with 300.
 An All Call in all three housings is initiated with 900.
If no block numbers are defined, the functions are carried out in all Intercom Server housings connect-
ed over G8-NET, CNET-E1 or CNETW, not in the Intercom Server housings connected over LAN, WAN
or S0.

 Restrictions with WS series in mixed systems

At mixed operation of Intercom Servers with different PRO 800/PRO software versions in the same
config block restrictions for WS series stations apply:
 The station texts are saved with the block-data and are limited to 14 digits up to PRO 800 1.0.
 Because the old station texts are too short for the WS series new, longer texts have been introduced
as of PRO 800 1.1.
 If Intercom Servers with software below PRO 800 1.1 are in the same block as Intercom Server with
software PRO 800 1.1 and above the longer texts are no longer supported. The Intercom Servers with
software below PRO 800 1.1 cannot handle the new, longer texts.

422 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Network function

 Therefore it is necessary to create a block for Intercom Servers with WS series stations, which does
not contain Intercom Server with software below PRO 800 1.1.

Indication in CCT 800

 If Intercom Servers in the same configuration block have different software versions (e.g. Intercom
Server no. 1 with PRO 800 1.0 and Intercom Server no. 2 with PRO 800 1.1) at receiving/opening of
the CCT 800 file the following text is displayed:

 Although the user can configure this manually, a dialogue will appear to confirm the configuration
and explain that no extended texts for WS series stations are stored.
 This configuration can also occur when Intercom Servers are initialised to different server IDs e.g. #1
and #10, see screenshot below) and then networked via NET cards. When initialised the standard
configuration block 00 is used.

3.1/0923 423
Network function Intercom Server Configuration

Special configuration

All Call, group call, 7T/7TT conference, party line

By default, no special configuration required. The selection of Intercom Server blocks is carried out via
pre-dialling. If one or more participants of a 7T/7TT conference or party line are located on an IP32 card,
the following additional configuration has to be carried out:

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > General Settings > tab Extended Settings
 IP32 block distribution: In this field, the Intercom Server blocks can be entered, via which the
respective function is carried out (several definitions are separated via commas; see page 421).

Ringing at a group
Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 Direct Dialling: In this field, the direct dialling codes can be entered for the door station with the
number of the Intercom Server block (e.g. “4=81983” for ringing at group 3 in Intercom Server block
81 with button 4).

Alarm
Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 Direct Dialling: In this field, the direct dialling codes can be entered for the initiator with the number
of the Intercom Server block (e.g. “0=819T201” for initiating the alarm at group 01 in Intercom Server
block “81” with button 0).

Music/radio conference 6T
Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Music or Subscriber > Feed-in > Radio conference
 Receiver: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server block can be selected, which receive the respec-
tive music/radio channel.

Subscriber menu
At stations with dot-matrix display an Intercom Server block can be pre-dialled before displaying the
subscriber index with A (e.g. 82 A).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber menus
 Intercom Server-Block: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server block can be selected, whose sub-
scriber menu is displayed with A without pre-dialling (see page 421).

Chime signal
Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Inputs > Chime signal
 Intercom Server-Block: In the drop-down list, the Intercom Server block can be selected, which re-
ceive the respective chime channel (see page 421).

424 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Network function

Video
Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab Video switcher
 Intercom Server-Block: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server block that will receive the camera
texts at the start of the system can be selected (see page 421).

Telephone interface

ATTENTION:
In order to distribute telephone numbers to control desks and ICX interfaces, the Intercom Server
block must be entered at the relevant connections!

Configuration CCT 800 (for LAN and WAN connections)

 Go to: Networks > IP-Connections > desired connection > tab LAN-Connections or
J Networks > IP-Connections > desired connection > tab WAN-Connections
PRO 800  Description: In this field, a description can be entered for the IP address used for documentation
LICENCE
PRO9U purposes.
 Pre-dialling code: In this field a pre-dialling code can be entered.
 IP address of destination Intercom Server: The IP address of the Intercom Server is entered in this
field.
 Intercom Server-Block: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server block can be selected, via which
the telephone numbers will be distributed (see page 421).

Configuration CCT 800 (for S0 connections)

 Go to: Networks > S0-Connections > desired S0 connection
 Intercom Server-Block 1 to Intercom Server-Block 10: In these drop-down lists, the Intercom Server
blocks can be selected, via which the telephone numbers will be distributed (see page 421).

Control desk
Required only for LAN/WAN/S0 networks.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Block settings
 Control desk system: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server can be selected to transfer call
requests and input messages to a control desk over S0/LAN/WAN, which contains all Intercom
Servers where a control desk is defined or where a call request/input message comes from (also
transferred).
 ICX transfer: In this drop-down list, you can select the block to which acknowledgement messages
for call transfers will be output (task “5B”; type “5x” and “6x”).
If a control desk call transfer is used in an S0/LAN/WAN network, it can be an advantage to define
different Intercom Server blocks for different Intercom Server in the drop-down list
Control desk system.
Example: 3 Intercom Servers (A, B and C, each with a control desk) are connected over S0. The
control desks B and C be able to transfer calls to control desk A. No call requests are defined between
Intercom Server B and C. Each time a call transfer from Intercom Server B to Intercom Server A is
activated, a short connection would be established also to Intercom Server C. This can be avoided
e.g. with the following configuration:
Configuration Intercom Server A Intercom Server B Intercom Server C
“Intercom Server Block” (in the folder
80, 81 80, 82 80, 83
Intercom Server)

3.1/0923 425
Network function Intercom Server Configuration

Configuration Intercom Server A Intercom Server B Intercom Server C

“Intercom Server Blocks” (in the folder
80, 82, 83 80, 81, 83 80, 81, 82
Network)
Intercom Server - Block XX > General >
80 82 83
tab control desk system

Studio
Required only for LAN/WAN/S0 networks.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Block settings
 ICX: In this drop-down list, you can select the block from which Intercom Server block messages will
be output. Messages for call requests and input messages will always be output. If several Intercom
Servers are connected over S0/LAN/WAN with separate “ICX-connection” or “Output dialling to
ICX”, it can be necessary to define different configuration blocks for different Intercom Server hous-
ings in the drop-down list ICX.

NOTE:
For further information about the configuration of ICX messages, see the product manual
“ICX Protocol”.

Direct dialling buttons

Required only for LAN/WAN/S0 networks.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Block settings
 Direct dialling buttons – block: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server block can be selected, in
which the following events will be shown on direct dialling buttons:
 Call indication (except for active call)
 Busy (except for active call)
 Active outputs

426 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Network function

Network monitoring
Any desired input in the networked system can be used for indication of connection errors. At the input
level “short” is simulated when an error occurs, this means an input message has to be defined to a
desired control desk.

ATTENTION:
Network monitoring is only possible within the same WAN region!

Different groups of Intercom Servers can be defined for monitoring. This has the advantage, that
 Group 1: For example, Intercom Servers, which are connected via S0, can be defined with longer
polling times, in order to prevent high connection costs due to constant connection initiation.
 Group 2: For Intercom Servers it is possible to define shorter polling times (e.g. via CNET-W).

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Inputs > Input message
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add Input message”.
 Go to: Inputs > Input message > sub-folder input > tab Network Monitoring
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add monitoring”.
 Waiting time [s]: In this field, the time can be changed for the respective group, which passes after
a restart of the system before the connection test are carried out (max. 1049 seconds (approx. 17
minutes). This time assure that before the start of the network monitoring all connections are built
up. The waiting time is defined per system and is taken over for all groups from group 1 (by default
30 seconds).
 Polling time [s]: In this field, the time between connection tests can be entered for the respective
group (max. 245760 seconds, approx. 68 hours).
 Answer time [min] and Answer time [s]: In these drop-down lists, the time to wait for an answer from
the monitored Intercom Server can be selected for the respective group, after which an error is
indicated (max. 15 seconds or 15 minutes).

NOTE: Restrictions
 At Intercom Servers connected via S0, the time for build-up of connection has to be observed.
 The answer time is not used at NET networks.

 V24 - call number: In this drop-down list, an interface can be selected for the respective group, to
which an Alive message (“00 42 00 D1010000 A4”) with the respective polling values is sent. If the
answer message (“00 40 00 D1010000 A4”) is not received within the entered time in the field
Waiting time, the level “short” is simulated at the respective input.
 Intercom Servers: In this field, the ID of the monitored Intercom Server can be entered for the
respective group (several definitions are separated by a comma).

3.1/0923 427
Network function Intercom Server Configuration

Network redundancy

General
A fallback network can be configured as an additional and redundant network connection. As soon as
the standard network fails, the connection is automatic directed via the fallback connection and
activated conversations are terminated. The following network connection can be used as standard
and/or fallback connections:
 Synchronous Intercom networks (GEV, CNET-W, CNET-E1): Permanently switched data connections
(“dedicated line”).
 Asynchronous Intercom networks (NET, LAN, WAN, S0): Setup of data channel as soon as data is
sent (e.g. dynamic destination routing in an IP network).

Combinations of redundant network connections

Fallback connection
CNET-W CNET-E1 LAN S0

GEV 1)    
Standard connection

1)
NET    3) 
CNET-W    
CNET-E1    

LAN / WAN 2)    3) 
S0    
1)
Network connection can only be used as standard connection.
2) The WAN network connection cannot be used for the fallback function.
3) The same LAN card cannot be used as standard and fallback connection.

Requirements
 Software Intercom Server VirtuoSIS
 Intercom Server GE 800, GE 300, IP-32 or IS 300

Fallback connection for G8-NET

Via the two Ethernet ports of the G8-NET, it is possible to realise a network redundancy connection. If
one of the two cables cannot establish a connection to the switch (e.g. due to a defect), the connection
automatically takes over via the second cable.

428 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Network function

Scheme of a network redundancy

NOTE: Requirements for network redundancy

For network redundancy, the switch must support the “Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol” (RSTP).

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to: IP - Settings > tab NET-Firewall
2. Activate the checkbox Allow packets between up- and downlink to establish a connection over the
uplink and downlink jack between two switches.

Examples for network redundancy

Redundant network cards in master and secondary Intercom Servers
The master Intercom Server (server ID “01”) is connected with the secondary Intercom Servers (server
ID “02” and ”03”) via a HDSL connection, respectively an IP network. If one of the standard connections
or network cards fails, the connection to the affected secondary Intercom Server is routed via the
fallback network.

Example: redundant network cards in master and secondary Intercom Servers

3.1/0923 429
Network function Intercom Server Configuration

Redundant LAN network cards in master and secondary Intercom Servers

If the standard connection or a LAN network card fails, the connection is routed via the fallback
network.

Example: redundant network cards in master and secondary Intercom Servers

Two redundant master Intercom Server rings

The primary master Intercom Server (server ID “01”) is connected with the secondary Intercom Servers
(server ID “10” and “11”) via an IP connection and networked via a synchronous link (HDSL or E1) with
the secondary master Intercom Server (server ID “2”).

430 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Network function

If the standard connection fails, the connection is routed via the fallback connection to the secondary
master and then to the primary master Intercom Server. When the primary master Intercom Server
fails, all incoming calls of the secondary Intercom Servers are displayed at the control desk of the
secondary master Intercom Server.

Example: two redundant master Intercom Servers rings

Configuration: Fallback connection

To enable the fallback function for network connections, follow the instructions below:

Configuration CCT 800 (not for S0 connections)

1. Go to:
 For LAN connection: Network > IP-Connections > desired Intercom Server > tab LAN-
connections
 For CNET connection: Network > CNET-W or Network > CNET-E1
2. Activate the checkbox Fallback mode.

Configuration CCT 800 (only S0 connections)

1. Go to: Interfaces > S0 > tab Telephone-Features
2. Own Tel-No.: In this field, enter the telephone number of the own ISDN connection (max. 24 digits).
The functions at Network > S0-Connections are enabled.
3. Go to: Network > S0 - Connections > desired Intercom Server
4. Right-click and select “Add new entry”.
5. Status check time: In this drop-down list, the time for connection monitoring can be selected.

ATTENTION: Consider dependencies

The function “status check time” also depends on the function “dialling-repetitions”!

6. Go to: Network > S0 - Connections > desired Intercom Server

7. Activate the checkbox Fallback mode.

3.1/0923 431
 Network function Intercom Server Configuration

 Line monitoring of the network connection

NOTE: Requirements
For the following function, at least one control desk must be available in the Intercom system
(see page 326).

A faulty network connection can be indicated by a simulated input level via an input message at a
control desk. One input is sufficient to monitor the standard and the fallback connection. In case of a
network connection fault, the following input level can be simulated:
Network connection status Simulated input level
Standard connection OK, fallback connection OK Open
Standard connection NOT OK, fallback connection OK 15k
Standard connection OK, fallback connection NOT OK 5k6
Standard connection NOT OK, fallback connection NOT OK 1k5

To enable line monitoring for a fallback connection, Follow the instructions below:

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to:
 For LAN connection: Network > IP-Connections > desired Intercom Server > tab LAN-
connections
 For S0 connection: Network > S0-Connections > desired Intercom Server
 For CNET connection: Network > CNET-W or Network > CNET-E1
2. Input for status-indication: In this field, enter the call number of the respective input for network
monitoring.
3. Go to: Inputs > Input message
4. Right-click on the desired input and select “Add input message”.
5. Go to: Inputs > Input message > desired input > tab Control Desks
6. Right-click and select the desired configured control desk via “Add Control Desk”.
7. Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Triggering
8. In the drop-down lists Break, 15k, 5k6, 1k5 and Short, the desired switch steps can be selected for
the respective input level.
9. Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Call types
10.Active 1: In this drop-down list, the call type of this switch step can be selected for the respective
input. To enable this drop-down list, the switch step “Active 1” has to be selected for at least one
input level of the respective input.
11.Active 2: In this drop-down list, the call type of this switch step can be selected for the respective
input. To enable this drop-down list, the switch step “Active 2” has to be selected for at least one
input level of the respective input.
12.Error: In this drop-down list, the call type of this switch step can be selected for the respective input.
To enable this drop-down list, the switch step “Error” has to be selected for at least one input level
of the respective input.

432 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Network function

Routing compatibility
In the following table, the possible combinations to route a logical connection between Intercom
Servers with different network connections are listed:
NET/CNET LAN S0 WAN
NET/CNET    
LAN    
S0    
WAN    

Example: logical connection of Intercom Servers with different connections

In this example, a logical connection can be routed between the Intercom Servers with the server ID
“02” and “03”, since both Intercom Servers are connected with the Intercom Server with the server ID
“01” via different network connections (see table above).

Example: logical connection with a NET and LAN connection

Example: logical connection of Intercom Servers with LAN connections

In this example, a logical connection cannot be routed between the Intercom Servers with the server
ID “02” and “03”, since both Intercom Servers are exclusively connected with the Intercom Server with
the server ID “01” via LAN network connections (see table above).

Example: no logical connection between with two LAN connection

3.1/0923 433
 Network function Intercom Server Configuration

 Address Conflict Detection according to RFC 5227

Feature PRO 800 6.0 – Address Conflict Detection according to RFC 5227
VirtuoSIS
In the case of an IP address conflict, the respective card or IP station will stop its communication
LICENCE PRO6U according to RFC 5227.
Using a dynamic IP address, the respective IP station receives a new IP address from a DHCP
server.
Using a static IP address, the IP address remains unchanged. As long as the IP address conflict
exists, the respective station is not shown in IPStationConfig. To fix the conflict, the IP address
of the station has to be changed manually in another network with no IP address conflict. The
IP address of the card has to be changed manually in CCT 800.
Address Conflict Detection is supported for the following cards:
 G8/G3/SIS/IS-GEP
 G8/G3/SIS/IS-IP-8
 G8/G3/IP-4
 G8/G3/SIS-IF
 G8/G3/SIS-LAN/WAN
 G8/SIS-NET
Address Conflict Detection is supported for IP stations with the following firmware:
 DSP 900A
 DSP 900B
 WS-TM
 WS-CM
 ET 901
 IoIP device
The function “Address Conflict Detection” will be activated for the desired card in CCT 800. If this
function is to be used for an IP station, this function must additionally be activated for the desired
subscriber in IPStationConfig.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: IP-Settings > tab Common
 Activate the checkbox Address Conflict Detection for the respective card.

Configuration IPStationConfig (only for IP stations)

 Open IPStationConfig.
 Activate the checkbox ACD for the respective IP station.

NOTE:
For further information on IPStationConfig see page 132.

Syslog
Log-messages can be transferred via the “system logging protocol” to a syslog-server, which is
available on the network.

NOTE:
For further information on syslog see the product manual “VirtuoSIS Setup-Guide”.

434 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Network function

 SNMP
Feature PRO 800 3.x – SNMP
PRO 800
This feature allows you to use SNMP for the Intercom Server and Intercom IP terminals. Each
LICENCE PRO3U Intercom Server and Intercom subscriber operates as an own “Agent”, this allows you to use
SNMP for the desired “Agents”.

General Definition
The “Simple Network Management Protocol” (SNMP) is a network protocol for controlling and
monitoring network elements (e.g. router, server, switches, IP stations or Intercom Server) via one
central management station/PC. In this process the protocol is controlling the communication between
the monitored device and the monitoring station. SNMP describes the structure of the data packets as
well as the communication process.
The state of the respective device is detected by programs (so called “agents”) which are running
directly on the monitored device. By means of the SNMP, the “management station” is able to
communicate with this “agent” via the IP network.

SNMP is available for following Commend devices:

 Intercom Server
 Intercom Server cards
 Intercom terminals
 Conductor
 All devices with DSP 900A firmware
 WS IP
 WS IP CM
 IoIP device

Management Information Base (MIB)

The respective values (of an “Agent”) read out by the management station, are described in a
“Management Information Base” (MIB). MIBs are description files, in which the single values are listed
in table form.

Using SNMP function

When using the monitoring function via SNMP, the following requirements have to be considered:
 SNMPv2c

3.1/0923 435
Network function Intercom Server Configuration

 MIB according “RFC 1213”

 Support for “IP-MIB” and “IF-MIB”
 Commend-IOIP-MIB
 Private Enterprise Number (PEN): 37568
 Configuration
 The MIB Browser needs a pre-configuration to read out the values (see below).
 In order to use the Commend Intercom devices for SNMP, the terminals need a pre-configuration
via the program IPStationConfig (see page 440).
 In order to use SNMP for a Commend Intercom Server, the Intercom Server needs a pre-
configuration via the program CCT 800 (see page 440).

MIB browser
There are different providers for this type of browser; some MIB browsers can be downloaded from the
Internet as freeware.

Configuration MIB browser

In order to read out the values of the IP terminals, following pre-configuration has to be carried out:
 Port: The port number has to be 161.
 Read Community: The password “public” has to be set.
 SNMP Version: The SNMP version “Version 2” has to be selected.

Read out the MIB values

Different methods can be used to read out the MIB values:
 GET: The value for the desired OID number is read out.
 WALK: All values of the “agent” are read out.
 GETBULK: All values of the currently used MIB are read out.
 GETNEXT: Read out the next value.

Standard MIB
In the following table, the values are listed that can read out with the standard MIB:
System data Name OID Parameter (“value”)
Name or used firmware sysDesr .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0 <Name> or <firmware version>
Object description sysObjectID .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.2.0 <object description>
Operation time sysUPTime .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0 <operation time>
Contact address sysContact .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4.0 <company mail address>
Display text of the IP subscriber sysname .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5.0 <display text>
Description of the IP subscriber sysLocation .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.6.0 <station description>
Number of interfaces ifNumber .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.0 <number of interfaces>
Number of received bytes ifINOctets .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10 <number of received bytes>
Number of received packages ifInUncastPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11 <number of received packages>
Number of sent bytes IfOutOctets .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16 <number of sent bytes>
Number of sent packages IfOutOctetsPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17 <number of sent packages>

436 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Network function

Commend MIB
In the following tables the values, which can be read out with the Commend-IoIP MIB are listed:

NOTE:
In order that the values can be read, the file “Commend-IOIP-MIB.txt” (Commend-MIB) has to be
loaded via the MIB browser. The Commend-MIB can be downloaded at software-manuals.com.

Object Name OID Parameter (“value”)

commendStationCommonSta-
Station series .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.1 <station series>
tionType
commendStationCommonSta-
Station type .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.2 <station type>
tionSubType
commendStationCommonSta-
Firmware version .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.3 <firmware version>
tionSoftwareVersion
commendStationCommonSta-
Hardware version .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.4.0 <hardware version>
tionHardwareVersion
Reason for last commendStationCommonSta-
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.8.0 <warmstart cause>
warmstart tionLastWarmStartCause
commendStationCommonSta-
Call number .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.10 <call number>
tionCallNumber
Display text of the commendStationCommonSta-
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.11 <display text>
station tionStationName
commendStationCommonSta-
Station description .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.12 <station description>
tionLocation
commendStationCommonSta-
Operating time .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.21 <operation time>
tionStartTime
Connection Name OID Parameter (“value”)
commendStationConnectivityIP-
Redundancy mode
Mode
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.6 <redundancy mode> 1)

State primary commendStationConnectivityIP-

connection PrimaryState
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.7 <state connection> 2)

Connection state fall- commendStationConnectivity- <state fallback

.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.8
back connection 1 IPSecondaryState connection 1> 2)
Connection state fall- commendStationConnectivity- <state fallback
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.9
back connection 2 IPTertiaryState connection 2> 2)
1) 0 = Automatically, 1 = Standard, 2 = Fallback
2)
0 = No IP address, 1= Not connected, 2 = Connected
GEP Name OID Parameter (“value”)
GEP card type commendServerGEPType .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.1.1.0 <GEP type>
Used firmware
commendServerGEPSWVersion .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.1.2.0 <firmware version>
version
Reason for last commendServerGEPLastStart-
server restart Cause
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.1.10.0 <reason last restart> 1)
1)
05 = Initialised, 06= CCT 800 warmstart, 248 = Licence timeout, 249 = Download server firmware, 252 = Cold
start, 16 – 25 = Out of memory, 48 – 57 = Internal errors, 254 = Exception, 255 = Watchdog

3.1/0923 437
 Network function Intercom Server Configuration

Server objects Name OID Parameter (“value”)

Used cards and CommendServerCardSlotX-
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.2.X.1.0 <card>
licences WorkingType
Indication which card CommendServerCardSlotX-
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.2.X.2.0 <inserted card>
is inserted InsertedType 2)
Indication which card CommendServerCardSlotX-
is configured with .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.2.X.3.0 <installed card>
CCT 800 InstalledType 2)

Firmware version of CommendServerCardSlotX-

.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.2.X.4.0 <firmware version>
the card VersionType 2)
CommendServerCardSlotX-
Card state .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.2.X.5.0 <state> 1)
State 2)
X = Slot number
1)
working = Card is working, faulty = Card is not working, not initialised = No configuration on card
2) An overview of the available connections and connection numbers can be found on page 439.

Subscriber Name OID Parameter (“value”)

commendServerSub-
State of the subscriber
scriberXState
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.3.X.1 <State> 1)

X = Slot number
1) online = Subscriber connected to the Intercom Server, offline = Subscriber not connected to the Intercom

Server

 SNMP monitoring and traps for LAN and WAN network connections

Feature PRO 800 3.x – connection SNMP

PRO 800 With the licence it is possible to monitor LAN and WAN connections use via “SNMP v2”
LICENCE PRO3U protocol.

Every configured LAN or WAN connection can be monitored (GET requests) via SNMP. In addition
traps can be configured to be sent to a monitoring station in case of a link state change. Every moni-
tored link follows a static addressing scheme based on slot and connection number of the LAN/WAN
card in a certain Intercom Server housing. See the corresponding OIDs in the following table:
Server network Name OID Parameter (“value”)
commendServerNetworkSlotXX/
Connection state
YY_State
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.4.ZZ.1.0 <redundancy mode> 1)

commendServerNetworkXX/YY_-
Connection type
Type
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.4.ZZ.2.0 <connection type> 2)

commendServerNetworkSlotXX/
Connection mode
YY_Fallbackmode
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.4.ZZ.3.0 <connection mode> 3)

commendServerNetworkSlotXX/
Target IP address .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.4.ZZ.4.0 <target IP address>
YY_TargetAddress
commendServerNetworkSlotXX/
Network parameter .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.4.ZZ.5.0 <not available>
YY_NetworkParameter
XX Slot number,
YY Connection number
ZZ Consecutive connection numbers. An overview of the available connections and connection numbers can
be found below.
1) 0 = Not configured, 1 = Connection disconnected, 2= Connected, 3 = Fallback connected
2) 0 = No Connection, 1 = LAN, 2 = WAN, 3 = CNET-E1, 4 = CNET-W, 5 = S0
3) 0 = Standard, 1 = Fallback

438 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Network function

Available connections and connection numbers

Connection Connection number Connection Connection number
GEP 0/01 – 0/04 12 – 15 Slot 8/01 – 8/16 128 – 143
Slot 1/01 – 1/16 16 – 31 Slot 9/01 – 9/16 144 – 159
Slot 2/01 – 2/16 32 – 47 Slot 10/01 – 10/16 160 – 175
Slot 3/01 – 3/16 48 – 63 Slot 11/01 – 11/16 176 – 191
Slot 4/01 – 4/16 64 – 79 Slot 12/01 – 12/16 192 – 207
Slot 5/01 – 5/16 80 – 95 Slot 13/01 – 13/16 208 – 223
Slot 6/01 – 6/16 96 – 111 Slot 14/01 – 14/16 224 – 239
Slot 7/01 – 7/16 112 – 127 Slot 15/01 – 15/8 240 – 247
Example
If you need the connection state of “Slot 8 connection 8”, the following steps have to be carried out:
 Get the correct connection number from the table:
Available connection Connection number
Slot 8/01 – 8/16 128 – 143 → 135

 Insert the connection number into the OID:

Connection state:.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.4.135.1.0

Configuration
In order to enable SNMP monitoring for LAN/WAN connections within an Intercom Server, the trusted
host IP address and subnet mask (IP or network address plus netmask) has to be configured via
CCT 800. In order to enable traps as well, up to two trap destinations can be configured (see page 440).

Traps
Independently from the values of the MIB, so called “traps” are sent. A “trap” is an unrequested
message of an agent to the management station, reporting that an event has occurred, e.g. reboot of
the IP subscriber. For the following events, traps are sent from the agent to the management station:
 Reboot
For each reboot of the agent a trap to the management station is sent. Warm- and cold-start sends
different traps.
OID
warmstart .1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2
Cold start .1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1

 Connection state
In case a redundancy mode changes the state, a trap is sent to the management station.
Connection state Name OID Parameter (“value”)
commendStationConnectivityIP-
Redundancy mode
Mode
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.6 <redundancy mode> 1)

State primary commendStationConnectivityIP-

connection PrimaryState
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.7 <state connection> 2)

Connection state fallback commendStationConnectivity- <state fallback

.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.8
connection 1 IPSecondaryState connection 1> 2)

3.1/0923 439
Network function Intercom Server Configuration

Connection state Name OID Parameter (“value”)

Connection state fallback commendStationConnectivity- <state fallback
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.9
connection 2 IPTertiaryState connection 2> 2)
1)
0 = Automatically, 1 = Standard, 2 = Fallback, 16 = Automatic redundancy mode, 17 = Switch manually to
Intercom Server1, 18 = Switch manually to Intercom Server 2, 19 = Switch manually to Intercom Server 3,
33 = Always switch manually to Intercom Server 1, 34 = Always switch manually to Intercom Server 2,
35 = Always switch manually to Intercom Server 3
2)
0 = No IP address, 1= Not connected, 2 = Connected

SNMP for the Intercom Server

SNMP for the Intercom Server has to be configured via CCT 800.

Configuration CCT 800

NOTE:
 If the trusted host is in a different IP network than the respective Intercom Server, a gateway has to
be configured for the GEP card (at IP-Settings > tab Common > field Router IP Address).
 It is recommend to do not change the default trap port “162” in the field Trap IP1 and Trap IP2.

 Go to: Intercom Server > SNMP

 Right-click on the desired Intercom Server and select “Add SNMP”.
 Trusted Host: In this field, enter the IP address of the management station.
 Subnet mask: In this field, enter the subnet mask of the management station.
 Trap IP1: In this field, the IP address of the trap receiver can be entered.
 Port1: In this field, the port of the trap receiver can be changed (by default 162).
 Trap IP2: In this field, the IP address of the trap receiver can be entered.
 Port2: In this field, the port of the trap receiver can be changed (by default 162).

SNMP for the Intercom terminal

SNMP for Intercom terminals will be configured via the program “IPStationConfig”.

NOTE:
For further information to the program IPStationConfig, see page 132.

Configuration IPStationConfig
 Open the program IPStationConfig.
 Click on the button SNMP in the menu bar to enable the extended settings dialogue “SNMP”:

 Trusted Host: In this field, the IP address of the MIB browser can be entered (“management station”).
 Subnet mask: In this field, the subnet mask of the MIB browser can be entered (“management
station”).
 Trap IP1: In this field, the IP address of the trap receiver can be entered.
 Port1: In this field, the port of the trap receiver can be changed (by default 162).
 Trap IP2: In this field, the IP address of the trap receiver can be entered.
 Port2: In this field, the port of the trap receiver can be changed (by default 162).

NOTE:
It is recommend to do not change the default trap port “162” in the fields Trap IP1 and Trap IP2.

440 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Peer-to-peer audio (P2P)

 Peer-to-peer audio (P2P)


Peer-to-peer audio is an “Auto Discovery protocol” that means that for P2P audio no configuration is
necessary. Peer-to-peer audio is only possible within a network or between individual IP network
nodes. If all “Network requirements” are fulfilled, P2P audio is carried out in the network.

ATTENTION:
If voice recording for an Intercom subscriber is activated, P2P audio is not possible for these
terminals! For voice recording the audio data has to be sent over the Intercom Server! That means,
voice recording always needs one fully-fledged conversation channel!

No configuration via CCT 800 required.

Functionality P2P audio

Each Intercom conversation is established over the Intercom Servers. In case P2P audio is possible and
the conversation is established, the audio data tries to find the shortest path between the devices
(Intercom stations, Intercom modules or Intercom Client). With P2P audio, the devices try to send the
audio data directly between the IP network nodes whereas the conversation information is sent over
the Intercom Server.

P2P audio in a network

(10.10.2.241)
(10.10.1.241)

(10.10.2.1)

(10.10.2.7)
(10.10.1.1)

(10.10.1.7)
G8-GEP

G8-GEP
G8-NET

G8-NET
G8-IP-8

G8-IP-8

(10.10.1.7) (10.10.1.241) 3 (10.10.2.7) (10.10.2.241)

1 2

Audio

(10.10.1.71) (10.10.2.71)

EE 900A EE 900A
(10.10.1.71) (10.10.2.71)

 The conversation is build-up like a non-P2P conversation:

Intercom Server 1 Intercom Server 2
EE 900A → G8-IP-8 → G8-NET → G8-NET → G8-IP-8 → EE 900A

 Step-by-step the system tries to send the audio data via the shortest way between the Intercom
terminals. The steps 1 to 4 are carried out in the first 500 ms after the conversation is established.
 Establishment of the audio connection over the shortest channel in the network.

3.1/0923 441
Peer-to-peer audio (P2P) Intercom Server Configuration

Benefits P2P audio

 Increases the number of speech channels for conversations over IP (see page 443).
 Each not used IP network node saves one jitter buffer (jitter buffer results at the data input in an IP
device) → this leads to lower network delay.
 P2P audio tries to use shortcuts in the Network. Because the audio data tries to use the shortcuts,
less bandwidth on the network is required.

Network requirements
Software
 Network card software min. 5.5.
 IP subscriber card software min. 5.0.
 Station software min. 5.0.

Intercom Server software

 PRO 800 1.3.

General requirements
 A gateway for all IP cards and IP devices should be configured that P2P audio can establish a
connection directly to routers.
 All IP cards, network cards and IP devices should be in the same subnet. In case the devices are not
in the same subnet, P2P audio is only possible within the respective subnet.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > Switch off times
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Switch off times”.
 Ringtone before red lamp [s]: In this field, the length of the ringtone to indicate a call can be changed.
It is recommend to enter a value, which is not lower than 0.5 seconds (by default 0.5 seconds).
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX”, this setting can be changed for the entire Intercom Server
block.

442 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Peer-to-peer audio (P2P)

Number of maximum conversations

Because of the conversation channels, the conversations between the Intercom Server are limited.
Using “uncompressed” conversations, the number of conversation channels for the Intercom Server
GE 800 can be increased.

NOTE:
For further information, see the product manual “G8-LAN”.

With P2P audio, the number of conversation channels in a network for the other Intercom Servers is
also increased.

Overview of number of maximum conversations

GE 300 LAN (onboard) to G8-IP-32 to the Intercom
G3-LAN to the network IS 300 to the network
the network Server
4 conversations or up to 8 8 conversations or up to 4 conversations or up to 8 4 conversations or up to 8
P2P conversations 16 P2P conversations P2P conversations P2P conversations

Consumption of conversation channels

The following example shows how the different conversations occupy the conversation channels:
Example: GE300 with onboard LAN connection (4 conversation channels or up to 8 P2P conversations).
Channel Case 1 Case 2 Case 3
1 P2P non-P2P non-P2P
Fully-fledged
P2P conversation channels

channel

2 P2P non-P2P non-P2P

3 P2P non-P2P non-P2P
4 P2P non-P2P P2P
5 P2P Busy P2P
6 P2P Busy P2P
7 P2P Busy P2P
8 P2P Busy P2P

Consumption of conversation channels

 Case 1: In this case all conversations can be established via P2P audio. It is possible to use the whole
functionality of 8 conversation channels.
 Case 2: In this case 4 non-P2P audio conversations are established. No further conversation can be
established (the other P2P channels are busy).

3.1/0923 443
Peer-to-peer audio (P2P) Intercom Server Configuration

 Case 3: As long as at least one “fully-fledged” conversation channel is available, further

conversations can be established. In this case, a maximum of 3 non-P2P conversations are possible,
in order to establish one non-P2P conversation or up to 5 P2P conversations.

444 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Point-to-Multipoint (P2MP)

 Point-to-Multipoint (P2MP)

What is P2MP?
P2MP (“point-to-multipoint”) is an auto-discovery protocol, which helps to reduce the bandwidth for
group calls, All Calls, music and radio conferences in an IP Intercom System. Instead of an unicast
system, where each subscriber gets an own IP stream, P2MP needs only one stream which is spread
to all IP devices. In case it is not possible for an IP subscriber to use P2MP audio, an unicast connection
will be established instead. P2MP works within the Intercom Server GE800 or VirtuoSIS or over a
“NET”,“LAN”, “WAN” connection between these Intercom Servers.

Examples
Unicast
With PRO 800 2.1 and lower, the whole Commend IP Intercom 5 x 146 kBps
System works as an unicast system, this means that each
subscriber gets an own IP stream from the Intercom Servers. SWITCH

For an All Call to 4 subscribers, 5 IP streams with 146 kbps are

required. This results in a bandwidth of 760 kbps for this All
Call.

P2MP within an IP system

As of PRO800 3.1, the Intercom Servers GE800 and VirtuoSIS try
to use P2MP for each IP terminal. This means that all the
receiving Intercom terminals will only need one IP stream 2 x 146 kBps
altogether.
For an All Call to 4 subscribers with P2MP, only 2 IP streams SWITCH

with 146 kbs are used. This results in a bandwidth reduction of

468 kbps in an Intercom system with only 5 terminals; this
means 62% less traffic!

Abstract
 P2MP is supported for the Intercom Servers GE800 and VirtuoSIS.
 P2MP works independent from the network between the Intercom Servers.
 P2MP is an auto-discovery protocol.
 P2MP domains can be configured for separate networks.
 P2MP reduces the bandwidth for group calls, All Calls, music, conferences and alarms.
 P2MP is automatically switched back to unicast if P2MP isn‘t supported by an Intercom subscriber.
 P2MP works over “NET”,“LAN”, “WAN” connections.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server > General Settings > tab Extended Settings
 Point-to-Multipoint IP Address: In this field, the IP address can be entered for P2MP.

NOTES:
 The IP address “224.0.0.1” is a standard multicast IP, which will be provided by the “IANA” for “all
systems on this network”. This means, this IP address will always be forwarded to all ports.
 IP addresses between “224.0.0.0” and “239.255.255.255” can be used.
 Point-to-Multipoint Port: In this field, the port can be entered for P2MP (e.g. “16400”).

3.1/0923 445
 Logic module Intercom Server Configuration

 Logic module
Requirements
 Upgrade licence “Lx-PRO4U”
 Intercom Server GE 300/GE 800/IS 300/G8-IP-32/VirtuoSIS
 One licence “L-LOGIC-8” per Intercom Server
 CCT 800 min. 4.1
Feature PRO 800 4.1 – logic module
The logic module compares incoming ICX messages and states of objects (e.g. subscriber,
output) and will be triggered by a changing truth of the condition. The triggered logic module
executes different actions (send an ICX message, change internal variables) according to the
truth of the condition.

The logic module is based on Boolean law, which represents the truth value of logic. A truth value can
assume the state ”true” or ”false”. The default state of a truth value is ”false”. Depending on the truth
value, the logic module executes defined actions. The logic module is subdivided into an element
dialogue with up to eight elements which are executed sequentially and an object initialisation
dialogue. Each element consists of a condition dialogue and action dialogue.
See the following illustration:

The logic module is triggered by an element. By comparing an incoming ICX message or an object
value with a defined object, the operator determines the truth value of the condition and thus also the
triggering action of the logic module. Depending on the changed truth value of the condition, the action
executes separate actions (send ICX message and change internal object values). The logic module is
triggered only once for the same truth value and incoming ICX message. The object initialisation
defines the objects and data types used by the elements.
A simplified representation of the functionality of the logic module for the configuration is shown
below:

Overview logic module

446 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Logic module

NOTE:
When the used CCT 800 version of the existing configuration data, the upgrade licence or L-LOGIC-
8 licence is invalid or missing, a hint will appear during the configuration. Nevertheless, the
configuration is still possible, provided at least CCT 800 4.1 is used. In order to deactivate this
dialogue, go to Options > Settings > tab General and deactivate the checkbox Show hint
dialogue if no licence is available.

Compatible object comparisons

Operand 1 and operand 2 can be compared using the following matrix:

Compatible object comparisons

Data type
The data type determines the possible values, operations and meaning of an object. The data types are
defined as follows:
Data type Description
The 8-digit number value consists of numbers (0–9). The number value will be filled with lead-
Integer ing “0“-digits if necessary (e.g. number value 47 will be sent as 00000047; leading “0“-digits
will be removed at the input).
The 8-digit time value consists of numbers (0–9) and will be set in tenths of a second (min. 0.0
Timer sec. - max. 999999.9 sec). The time value will be filled with leading “0“-digits if necessary (e.g.
timer value 999.9 will be sent as 000999.9; leading “0“-digits will be removed at the input).
The 8-digit “Nibble Coded Hex (NCH)” value consists of numbers (0–9) and letters (A–F; Hex).
NCH value The NCH value will be filled with leading “0“-digits if necessary (e.g. NCH value 8080 will be
sent as 00008080; leading “0“-digits will be removed at the input).
The 8-digit call number consists of numbers (0–9) and letters (A–F; Hex). The call number will
Call number be filled with leading “F”-digits if necessary (e.g. call number 1506 will be sent as FFFF1506);
leading “F”-digits will be removed at the input).

NOTE:
If the data type NCH value or call number are changed to integer or timer, all values from A–F will be
replaced by “0”.

3.1/0923 447
Logic module Intercom Server Configuration

Object
The object is defined by a data type, object name and object value. The object names are defined in
the following way:
Object type Description
The object value corresponds to the current call type of the subscriber (1-digit), but not the call
SUB
number. The data type of this object is NCH value.
The object value corresponds to the current call type of the input (1-digit). The data type of this
INP
object is NCH value.
The object value corresponds to the current state of the output (1-digit). The object value
OUT changes whenever the state of the selected output changes. The data type of this object is NCH
value.
The object continuously counts from its configured value to 0.0 seconds (changes also its state
when the timer does not run). The timer runs automatically as soon as the object value is
TMR
unequal to 0.0. The object value can only be defined and changed by commands of the logic
module. The data type of this object is timer.
The object value is a selectable variable with a selectable data type (1-digit). The object value
VAR
can be changed by commands of the logic module.
The object value is a selectable constant with a selectable data type (1-digit). The object value
CON
cannot be changed by commands of the logic module.

ATTENTION:
Each configured input and output must have a dialable call number!

Object name
The object name is used for identification. An object name always consists of the 3-digit object type
(e.g. SUB or INP) followed by the 2-digit index number (01–16 for SUB, INP, OUT, CON, TMR and 40 –
4F for VAR).

Object value
The object value describes the current call type, state or user defined value of an object. The following
object values are available

448 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Logic module

Object SUB:
Object values subscriber 1) Description
(call type of call request)
0 No call request
1 Normal call
2 Emergency call
3 Parking
8 Line fault
1) The object value will be changed, as soon as the call type of the object changes.

Object INP
Object values Input 2) Description
(call type of input message)
0X Not acknowledged input message
1X Acknowledged input message
X = Call type:
0: Not active input messages
4, 5, A, C, D: Active 1
6, 7, B, E, F: Active 2
8, 9: Line fault
2) The object value will be changed, as soon as the call type of the object changes.

Object OUT
Object values Output (state) 3) Description
0 Off
1 On
3 Toggle
3)
The object value will be changed, as soon as the state of the object changes.

Object TMR
Object values Timer (state) 4) Description
0 Timer does not run
>0 Timer runs
4) The object value will be changed, as soon as the state of the object changes.

Object VAR
Object values Variable Description
User-defined value -

Object CON
Object values Constant Description
User-defined value -

Object CAL
 Object values Call state Description
0 No call
0xA1 Call “parked” as caller

3.1/0923 449
 Logic module Intercom Server Configuration

 Object values Call state Description

0xB1 Call “parked” as called
0xA2 Call “loud” as caller
0xB2 Call “loud” as called
0xA3 Call “private” as caller
0xB3 Call “private” as called
0xA4 Call “busy” as caller
0xB4 Call “busy” as called

ICX messages
Construction of an ICX message
 The ICX string consists of numbers (0–9) and letters (A–F; Hex).
 The logic module always uses ICX messages with long format.
 The minimum length of an ICX string are 8 characters; the maximum length are 250 characters.
 The logic module does not control the validity of the ICX string, but the length of the ICX string has
to be even (otherwise an alert appears and the ICX string will be reset to the last valid value).

NOTE:
For further information about the configuration of ICX messages, see the product manual “ICX Pro-
tocol”.

Free variable parameters within an ICX string

For an incoming ICX string, which has to trigger the logic module, it is not necessary to match with the
entire reference ICX string. Parts of the reference ICX string can be replaced by question marks “?” as
wildcard. The logic module compares the incoming ICX message only with the part of the reference
ICX string, which are not replaced by a question mark (see illustration below). This way only a certain
part of an incoming ICX string is required to trigger the logic module.
wildcard characters
(not used for triggering the logic module)

00 62 00 12 FFFF 1234 ????????

FFFF 5678
all valid signs
neccessary part of the ICX string 1234 5678 are possible
which triggers the logic module
FFFF D104
Free variable parameters within an ICX string
Example:
The logic module will be triggered by the ICX message “00 62 00 12 FFFF 1234 FFFF 4321” (call
indication from subscriber with the call number “1234” to subscriber “4321“). The comparison of “IF
ICX == 00 62 00 12 FFFF 1234 ????????” is valid, because the question marks can be any valid
character.

450 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Logic module

Referencing an object
An ICX string can contain the reference of a single or several configured objects (subscriber, input, out-
put, constant, variable and timer) as part of the parameter. The ICX string always uses the current value
of the referenced object. Depending on the configuration, the ICX string uses only a certain part of the
value or if the desired number exceeds the digits, the entire value will be used and the remaining un-
used digits will be filled with leading characters, which are determined by the data type.

NOTE:
For further information about the configuration of ICX messages, see the product manual
“ICX Protocol”.

Syntax
The referenced object is made up of the object, the length specification (separated by a colon) and
is put into square brackets:
NGPIVJURGEKƂECVKQP USWCTG
DTCEMGV

[CON01:8] [VAR08:4]

QDLGEV EQNQP

3.1/0923 451
Logic module Intercom Server Configuration

Length specification
The length specification indicates the number of evaluated digits of the referenced object, which will
be used for the ICX string. The digits of the referenced object are evaluated from right to left. The
minimum value of the length specification is 1; the maximum value is 8.

 When the length specification is longer than the number of digits of the referenced object, the
remaining digits will be filled with leading characters (depending on the data type, see page 447).
 When the length specification is shorter than the number of digits of the referenced object, the
defined amount of digits will be taken, starting from the right.
 When the length specification is equal to the number of digits of the referenced object, all digits
will be taken over.
NGPIVJURGEKƂECVKQP

8-digits [CON01:8] = FFFF1234

3-digits [CON01:3] = 234
[CON01:2] = 34
[CON01:1] = 4
CON01 = 1234
ECNNPWODGT UVCTVUYKVJVJGFKIKV
QPVJGTKIJVUKFG

TGOCKPKPIFKIKVU
object NGPIVJURGEKƂECVKQP YKNNDGƂNNGFWR

CON01 = 1234 [CON01:8] FFFF1234

ECNNPWODGT

QDLGEVXCNWG FKIKVU

object NGPIVJURGEKƂECVKQP

CON01 = 1234 [CON01:2] 34

ECNNPWODGT

QDLGEVXCNWG FKIKVU

Example:
Call number: CON01 = 1234 [CON01:8] = FFFF1234 Will be filled with leading “F”-digits
CON01 = 1234 [CON01:2] = 34 Defined part will be used
CON01 = 1234 [CON01:4] = 1234 Length specification is equal to the
object value
Integer: VAR01 = 789 [VAR01:6] = 000789 Will be filled with leading “0“-digits

452 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Logic module

Referencing an ICX message

An outgoing ICX string and the action “set” can contain a single or several references of the incoming
ICX string, which triggers the logic module as part of its own parameter.

Syntax
The referenced ICX message is made up of the fixed code, the offset, the length specification,
(separated by a colon) and is put into square brackets:
QHHUGV USWCTG
DTCEMGV

[ICX17:8] [ICX25:8]

EQFG length EQNQP

URGEKƂECVKQP

Offset
The offset defines the subsequent digits from where the following digits will be taken. The offset con-
sists of numbers (1–9) with a minimum value of “1“; the maximum value is “63“.

Length specification
The length specification indicates the number of digits, which will be taken from the incoming ICX
string. The digits of the ICX string will be taken from left to right side (see illustration below). The
length specification consists of numbers (1–8) with a minimum value of “1“; the maximum value is
“8“.
Offset = 17 16 digits
Offset = 13 12 digits

[ICX17:8] Offset = 9 8 digits

00 62 00 12 FFFF 1234 FFFF 4321 [ICX17:8] = FFFF 4321

.GPIVJURGEKƂECVKQP 8 digits

Starts with the digit

that corresponds
to the offset value

ICX string which triggers

the logic module ICX string to construct resulting outgoing ICX string

00 62 00 12 FFFF 1234 FFFF 4321 00 80 00 80 [ICX17:8] 1234 5678 00 80 00 80 FFFF 4321 1234 5678
Offset = 16 digits

.GPIVJURGEKƂECVKQPFKIKVU
[ICX17:8] = FFFF 4321 resulting value

3.1/0923 453
Logic module Intercom Server Configuration

Position of the reference within the ICX string

Each reference can replace the parameter of an ICX string, but not the task or type. It does not matter
how many object references are used within an ICX string, as long as the maximum number of valid
digits of the ICX string will not be exceeded and the entire number of digits is even. A single or
several reference can replace the entire or only a part of the parameter. See the following
illustrations:
task type parameter(s)
CON01 = 1234 (call number)
VAR01 = 789 (integer)
00 60 00 81 XXXX XXXX resulting outgoing ICX string

[CON01:8] [VAR01:4]
each valid variation
FFFF [CON01:4] [VAR01:4] is possible 00 60 00 81 FFFF 1234 0789
[CON01:8] 0789

task type parameter(s) the logic module will be triggered by the following ICX message:
00 62 00 12 FFFF1234 FFFF 4321

00 80 00 80 XXXX XXXX resulting outgoing ICX string

[ICX9:8] [ICX17:8]
each valid variation
FFFF [ICX13:4] [ICX17:8] is possible 00 80 00 80 FFFF 1234 FFFF 4321
FFFF 1234 [ICX:17:8]

ATTENTION:
The number of all digits of the entire ICX string has to be even (also including references; e.g. with
the object reference [CON01:3] the remaining ICX string has to be uneven), otherwise an alert
appears and the ICX string will be reset to the last valid value!

Example (object reference):

The outgoing ICX string:
Variable 1 as integer: VAR01 = 789
[VAR01:4] = 0789
Constant 1 as call number: CON01 = 1234
[CON01:8] = FFFF1234
00 60 00 81 [CON01:8] [VAR01:4]
The resulting ICX string is “00 60 00 81 FFFF 1234 0789”
Example (ICX reference):
The logic module will be triggered by the ICX message “00 62 00 12 FFFF 1234 FFFF 4321”.
The outgoing ICX string:
Offset = 13 Length specification = 4 [ICX13:4] = 1234
Offset = 17 Length specification = 8 [ICX17:8] = FFFF 4321
00 80 00 80 FFFF [ICX13:4] [ICX17:8]
The resulting ICX string is “00 80 00 80 FFFF 1234 FFFF 4321”

454 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Logic module

Configuration via CCT 800

Object initialisation dialogue
With the object initialisation dialogue up to 16 objects of each type (e.g. subscriber or input) can be
configured. All trigger items and thus all conditions and actions can use the same objects. There is one
object initialisation dialogue per logic module.

 Go to: Intercom Server > Logic Modules > sub-folder Intercom Server
 Code: Indication of the objects subscriber (SUB), input (INP), output (OUT), constant (CON), variable
(VAR) and timer (TMR). Further information about objects can be found on page 448.
 Subscribers: In this field, the call number of a subscriber can be entered.
 Inputs: In this field, the call number of an input can be entered.
 Outputs: In this field, the call number of an output can be entered.

ATTENTION:
The state of an output with a non-dialable call number will not be automatically updated!

 Data type (constant): In this drop-down list, the data type of the object constant can be selected.
Further information about data types can be found on page 447.
 Value (constant): In this field, the value of the constant can be entered.
 Optional: In the field Description Constant, a description of the constant can be entered.
 Data type (variable): In this drop-down list, the data type of the object variable can be selected.
Further information about data types can be found on page 447.
 Value (variable): In this field, the value of the variable can be entered.
 Optional: In the field Description Variable, a description of the variable can be entered.

NOTE:
When the data type call number is selected for the object constant or variable, an empty value field
of a configured variable or constant will be filled with “FFFF FFFF”.

 Description Timer: In this field, a description can be entered for the timer to enable the object timer
for use in the condition and action dialogue. The description will be displayed as name of the object
in the condition and action dialogue.

Trigger item dialogue

The trigger item dialogue has eight configurable trigger items, in which each of them defines its own
trigger conditions and executed actions of the logic module. A trigger item contain a condition and an
action. By triggering the logic module, the corresponding trigger item and up to seven others will be
executed. There is one trigger item dialogue per logic module.

3.1/0923 455
Logic module Intercom Server Configuration

Trigger item dialogue

 Go to: Intercom Server > Logic Modules > sub-folder Intercom Server
 Item Name: In this field, the name of the trigger item can be entered. The item name will be displayed
at the sub-folder of the Intercom Server.
 Group ID: In this field, the group ID of the trigger item can be entered (01–99). All trigger items with
the same group ID will be executed together, as soon as the logic module gets triggered by a single
or several trigger items with the same ID. The trigger items will be executed from the first executed
trigger item to the last one (by default 01).
 Optional: In the field Description, a description of the trigger item can be entered.
 Activated: Activate this checkbox to enable the trigger item with its conditions and actions. As long
as the field is deactivated, the trigger item will not trigger the logic module (by default, activated).

Condition dialogue
The operator compares two different operands to determine the truth of the condition. The logic
module will be triggered as soon as the truth value of the sum of all eight conditions has changed.

Condition dialogue
 Go to: Intercom Server > Logic Modules > sub-folder Intercom Server > desired trigger item
 Control field: The control field in the first column shows the current state of the opposite
configuration. If the configuration is complete, the field turns green, otherwise it turns red. If no
configuration is available the field is grey. The control field does not show whether the configuration
is valid but only if it is complete or not.
 Condition: In this drop-down list, the condition to trigger the logic module can be selected. The
following conditions are available:
 IF: The IF condition is true if the result of the operation is true, otherwise it is false.
 IF NOT: The IF NOT condition is true if the result of the operation is false, otherwise it is false.
 AND: The AND condition is true if the result of the operation and all previous operations are true,
otherwise it is false.
 AND NOT: The AND NOT condition is true if at least the result of the operation or any other
previous operation is false, otherwise it is false.
 OR: The OR condition is true if the result of the operation or any other previous operation is true,
otherwise it is false.
 OR NOT: The OR NOT condition is true if the result of the operation and all previous operations
are false, otherwise it is false.
 Operand 1: In this drop-down list, an object or ICX message can be selected, which will be compared
with the operand 2 (operand 1 and operand 2 must not be the same object references). The following
options are available:
 Object: Compare the object value with the operand 2.

456 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Logic module

ATTENTION:
 If the object “timer” is selected, the field operand 2 will be disabled and the object will always
be compared with the value 0.0!
 The object “constant” is not available for operand 1!

 ICX: Compare an incoming ICX message with the operand 2.

 Operator: In this drop-down list, the operator for the comparison can be selected. The following
operators are available:
Operator Description
== Equal to: The operator determines whether equality exists between two operands.
!= Not equal to: The operator determines whether inequality exists between two operands.
Examples: VAR01 = 6
Equal to Not equal to
VAR01 == 6 true VAR01!= 4 true
VAR01 == 2 false VAR01!= 6 false
Greater than: The operator compares two operands to determine if operand 1 is greater than
>
operand 2.
Less than: The operator compares two operands to determine if operand 1 is less than operand
<
2.
Greater than or equal to: The operator compares two operands to determine if operand 1 is
>=
greater than or equal as operand 2.
Less than or equal to: The operator compares two operands to determine if operand 1 is less
<=
than or equal as operand 2.
Examples: VAR01 = 6
Greater than Less than
VAR01 > 1 true VAR01 < 9 true
VAR01 > 12 false VAR01 < 5 false
Greater than or equal to Less than or equal to
VAR01 >= 6 true VAR01 <= 6 true
VAR01 >= 4 true VAR01 <= 7 true
VAR01 >= 10 false VAR01 <= 2 false
Change of object value: The operator compares the current state of an object of operand 1 with
the state value of operand 2. The operation is only ever true for the moment when the state of
the selected object has changed and is equal to operand 2. Further information about the state
==> of objects can be found on page 448.
Recommendation:
 At a comparison of two objects (e.g. SUB01 ==> OUT03) the “OR” condition should be used.
 Positive conditions should be used (IF, AND, OR).
Examples: Change of object value
Situation 1: Subscriber
Incoming call request of an emergency call at SUB01. The state value of the subscriber
changes to 2.
Condition
SUB01 ==> 2 true SUB01 ==> 3 false
Situation 2: Timer
Timer TMR01 has expired. The state value of the timer changes to 0.
Condition
TMR01 ==> 0 true TMR01 ==> 0 false (when timer is running)

3.1/0923 457
Logic module Intercom Server Configuration

Restrictions
 For the object timer used as operand 1 only the operators equal to, not equal to and change of object
value are available:
== 0.0: The timer is not running
!= 0.0: The timer is running
==> 0: The timer has expired
 For “ICX” used as operand 1 only the operators equal to and not equal to are available.
 Operand 2: In this drop-down list, either an object, a selectable value or an ICX message can be
entered. The operand 2 will be compared with the operand 1 (data type of operand 1 and operand 2
must not be the same). The operand 2 will be configured the following way:
 Object: Select an object, provided an object is also selected for operand 1.

NOTE:
It is not possible to select the same object for operand 1 and operand 2 within the same
operation.

 ICX: Enter an ICX message, provided for operand 1 ICX is selected. The ICX message can consist
of a single or several referenced objects, referenced ICX messages or wildcards. Further informa-
tion about ICX strings in the logic module can be found on page 450.

NOTE:
The number of all digits of the entire ICX string has to be even (also including references; e.g.
with the object references [CON01:3] the remaining ICX string has to be uneven), otherwise an
alert appears and the ICX string will be reset to the last valid value.

 Value: Enter a selectable value, provided an object is selected for operand 1. The data type of the
value depends on the selected object of operand 1 (e.g. time value or integer).
 Optional: In the field Comment, enter a description for the operation.

Action dialogue
Single or several actions will be executed to change internal variables and send ICX messages. The
action will be triggered as soon as the truth of the condition is known.

Action dialogue
 Control field: The control field in the first column shows the current state of the opposite configura-
tion. If the configuration is complete the field turns green, otherwise it turns red. If no configuration
is available the field is grey. The control field does not show whether the configuration is valid but
only if it is complete or not.
 Case: In this field, the cases true and false are indicated. The state of the cases refers to the truth of
the condition. The cases are used in the following way:
 True: If the condition is true, up to 4 configured actions of the cases true will be executed. Actions
of the case false will not be executed.
 False: If the condition is false, up to 2 configured actions of the cases false will be executed.
Actions of the case true will not be executed.

NOTE:
Under certain circumstances, the case “False” cannot be applied (e.g. for timers and ICX
messages) and is disabled.

458 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Logic module

 Action: In this drop-down list, the action can be selected, which will be carried out if the logic module
is triggered. The following actions are available:
 Set: An object value will be set to a certain value.
 Add: A value will be added to an object value.
 Subtract: A value will be subtracted from an object value.
 Send ICX: An ICX message will be sent.

ATTENTION:
The maximum and minimum value of an object cannot be exceeded!

 Variable: In this drop-down list, a variable or timer can be selected for the computational operations.

NOTE:
The drop-down list variable is disabled if the option “send ICX” is selected in the drop-down list
action.

 Value:
 In this field, enter a selectable value, referenced ICX message or an object if the action “set”,
“add” or “subtract” is selected (the data type depends on the selected object).
 In this field, enter an ICX message if the action “send ICX” is selected. The ICX string can consist
of a single or several referenced objects, referenced ICX messages or wildcards.
Further information about ICX strings in the logic module can be found on page 450.

NOTE:
The number of all digits of the entire ICX string has to be even (also references; e.g. with the
object reference [CON01:3] the remaining ICX string has to be uneven), otherwise an alert
appears and the ICX string will be reset to the last valid one.

 Delay: In this field, an up to 6-digit value (consisting of numbers 0–9) to delay an outgoing ICX
message according to the configured time can be entered. The value has to be entered (max. 6553.5
seconds).

NOTE:
 Only the sending of the ICX string will be delayed, but not the parameter values of the objects it
contains. The parameter values are set at the time when the logic module entry is triggered
(configured condition is set to true or false).
 The delay function is only available if the entry “send ICX” is selected in the drop-down list action.

 Optional: In the field Comment, a description of the operation can be entered.

Control the logic module via ICX messages

Besides the trigger item, the logic module can also be triggered via ICX messages.

NOTE:
For further information about the configuration of ICX messages, see the product manual
“ICX Protocol”.

Block settings for the logic module

It can be determined, whether outgoing ICX messages of the triggered logic module will be sent to all
Intercom Servers within the system or only to Intercom Servers with the same block number. The block
number refers to the Intercom Server with the triggered logic module.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Block settings

3.1/0923 459
Logic module Intercom Server Configuration

 ICX Logic: In this drop-down list, the send option of outgoing ICX messages can be selected.
The following sending options are available:
 GEV / CNET: All Intercom Servers within the system.
 Active Block: All Intercom Servers with the same block number, as the Intercom Server with the
triggered logic module.

460 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration EventLOG

EventLOG

 Save ICX messages in the Intercom Server

Feature PRO 800 6.0 – save ICX messages in the Intercom Server
PRO 800
Incoming and outgoing ICX messages of an IP or serial interface can be saved in the Intercom
LICENCE L-LOG Server directly without the need of an external equipment. The ICX messages storage can be
read out i.e. with the program ComLOG. This function is available with the following licences:
 L-LOG: Saves ~ 100,000 ICX messages 1)
PRO 800

LICENCE L-LOG5
 L-LOG5: Saves ~ 5,000 ICX messages 1)
 L15-LOG (only for Intercom Server GE 150): Saves ~ 500 ICX messages 1)
1) Note: The number of storable ICX messages depends on the length of the respective ICX
PRO 800

LICENCE L15-LOG messages. Further information about the length of ICX messages can be found in the prod-
uct manual “ICX Protocol”.

ICX messages are stored in a ring buffer of the Intercom Server. The used licence defines the size of
the ICX message storage. As soon as the storage is exceeded, the oldest ICX messages will be
overwritten. See the following illustration:

ages
ess
m
X
IC

0
st
or
ag
e
lim
it
Store ICX messages Read-out ICX messages

NOTE:
 The data part of an ICX message that is stored in the ICX message storage is restricted to 58 bytes. If
the ICX message is longer, all data exceeding the maximum storage size will be discarded.
 To store ICX messages from control desks in EventLOG, a configuration needs to be performed. Go
to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab IP/RS232 - ICX > field ICX 1 connection or ICX 2
connection. Disregard a red licence key symbol in the field Lic, as it relates to the connection to
external systems. Continue with configuration.
 Further information on reading-out ICX messages can be found in the product manual “ComLOG”.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab TCP/IP
 In the drop-down list Type of connection, select a connection type to enable the checkbox Log (except
for “Pelco” and “Milestone XProtect”).

3.1/0923 461
EventLOG Intercom Server Configuration

 Go to: Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab RS232

 In the drop-down list Type of connection, select an interface protocol to enable the checkbox Log
(except for “Ultrak”).
 Log: Activate this checkbox to save ICX messages of the respective interface in the Intercom Server.

462 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

 SIP functions

SIP features
 Up to 1,120 SIP subscribers per VirtuoSIS Master
 Up to 32 calls between SIP subscribers per VirtuoSIS Instance

Configuration overview
For the SIP configuration, the terms “incoming” and “outgoing” are based on VirtuoSIS as reference
point:

outgoing

incoming SIP server

VirtuoSIS configuration principle

Example
Microphone signals from a SIP telephone will be received from VirtuoSIS (incoming) and the loud-
speaker signals will be sent from VirtuoSIS (outgoing).

NOTE: Max. audio channels at group calls, All Calls or conferences

With SIP-C and SIP-T-subscribers, max. 128 concurrently active audio channels per VirtuoSIS Master
are possible (at group calls, All Calls or conferences; this number will be reduced by 32 possible
conversations per VirtuoSIS instance):
 Conversation: SIP to SIP subscriber – 2 audio connections required.
 Conversation: SIP to IoIP subscriber – 1 audio connection required.
 All Call or group call: Per initiator or receiver as SIP subscriber – 1 audio connection required
(i.e. 1 initiator with 10 receivers are equal to 11 required audio channels).
 Conference: Per initiator or receiver as SIP subscriber – 1 audio connection required.

ATTENTION: Incoming SIP calls

Incoming SIP calls will not be initiated or cause error messages if called numbers have more than 28
digits and/or contain symbols other than “0” to “9” as well as “+”, “*”, “#” and “T”. This applies to
SIP clients and SIP trunks (SIP-C and SIP-T).

3.1/0923 463
 SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

Global SIP settings

The global SIP settings will be applied for all SIP trunks (see page 466) and SIP-C subscribers (see
page 484) of the SIP master. The following global SIP settings are available:
Function Description
VirtuoSIS Master > SIP Settings
Serial number This field shows the serial number of the VirtuoSIS Master.
Hostname This field shows the host name of the VirtuoSIS Master. 1)
RTP Port Range [min.
In these fields, the pool of usable RTP ports can be defined.
value] and [max. value]
Only configurable up to VirtuoSIS version 8.1. With VirtuoSIS version 9.0, this
function is permanently active. From VirtuoSIS version 9.1, this function is no longer
srvlookup available for the global SIP settings; the SRV Lookup function for the SIP trunk can be
configured individually for the primary and secondary host (see ”Standard trunk
configuration” on page 468).
In this field, the local IP network address can be entered. The externip will only apply
localnet
to communication with IP addresses outside the range of localnet. 2)
In this field, enter a source IP address for SIP messages (if NAT is enabled), if
externip needed. Enter as IPv4, IPv6 address or as hostname, optionally with a port number
separated by “:” (for IPv6 with the IP address enclosed in "[]").
In this field, the SIP listener port can be configured (”5060” by default). This port is
UDP bindport only used if at least one SIP client (SIP-C) or SIP trunk (SIP-T) is configured for this
protocol.
J In this field, the SIP listener port can be configured (”5060” by default). This port is
PRO 800 TCP bindport only used if at least one SIP client (SIP-C) or SIP trunk (SIP-T) is configured for this
LICENCE
PRO9U protocol.
J In this field, the SIP listener port can be configured (”5061” by default). This port is
PRO 800 TLS bindport only used if at least one SIP client (SIP-C) or SIP trunk (SIP-T) is configured for this
LICENCE
PRO9U protocol.
Activate this checkbox to force the client certificate checks when using SIP over TLS.
This applies to both SIP-C subscribers and SIP trunks. This setting is applied globally.
If the checkbox is deactivated, the validity of the certificate is not checked. This is
Client certificate
required for reasons of compatibility, since no client certificates were checked with
verification
VirtuoSIS Version 8.1 and earlier. For reasons of system security, it is recommended
to use the client certificate check for VirtuoSIS from version 9.0.
For further information about certificates, see page 517.
Activate this checkbox to automatically start a loud speaking conversation, e.g. for
V group calls. Calls to stations with fix privacy setting stay private. The feature is only
VirtuoSIS Mode answer call active for SIP-C and in outgoing direction. By default this function is active. But on
LICENCE
L-SIS-11 Intercom servers which were migrated from VirtuoSIS versions before 11.0 it is
inactive.

S Min. SIP registration In this field, the minimum registration period in seconds can be entered within which
expiry [s] SIP subscribers have to re-register on VirtuoSIS (“60” by default).
In this field, the default registration period in seconds can be entered if no default
S Default SIP registration
registration period is configured at the SIP subscriber or if VirtuoSIS re-registers on a
expiry [s] SIP trunk (“120” by default).
S Max. SIP registration In this field, the maximum registration period in seconds can be entered within which
expiry [s] SIP subscribers must re-register on VirtuoSIS (“3600” by default).

1)CCT 800 version 8.0 or higher will not show the host name with VirtuoSIS version 7.1. To show the host name in
CCT 800, VirtuoSIS has to be upgraded to version 8.0 or higher and the console configuration has to be run
again (see also product manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”).
2)While entering an IP address, also enter the appropriate subnet mask separated by a slash (e.g. “192.168.168.0/

255.255.255.0”).

464 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

Certificates for TLS

F Feature VirtuoSIS 8.0 – Encryption of data transmission and audio (SIPS)
With this feature, it is possible to use encrypted data transmission (TLS).

For encrypted data transmission (TLS), certificates are required. The encrypted transmission is
configurable for SIP-C and SIP-T. To activate encrypted data transmission, the cryptographic protocol
TLS has to be selected for respective SIP client or SIP trunk and valid certificates have to be imported
and sent to VirtuoSIS.
For information on client certificate verification, see page 517.

Activate the cryptographic protocol TLS for SIP clients:

1. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Settings
2. In the drop-down list Protocol, select the encrypted data transmission protocol TLS.
3. Activate the checkbox SRTP to transmit audio data and video data encrypted.

Activate the cryptographic protocol TLS for SIP trunks:

1. Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired Trunk
2. In the drop-down list Protocol, select the encrypted data transmission protocol TLS.
3. Activate the checkbox SRTP to transmit audio data and video data encrypted.

Import of certificates:
1. Go to: VirtuoSIS Master > File Management
2. Click on the button Host or CAs. The following dialogue appears:

Certificates for TLS

 Import: Click the button Import to import a host certificate. The FileOpen dialogue automatically
filters for the file formats ”.pem” and ”.crt”. If a host certificate has already been imported, the
existing certificate is replaced by importing again.
 Remove: If you would like to remove a host certificate, mark the host certificate to be removed and
click on the button Remove.
 Cancel: Click on the ”Cancel” button to cancel the host configuration.

3.1/0923 465
SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

ATTENTION: Imported certificates for TLS

 Only one host certificate can be used.
 A certificate can not be used as a host certificate and as a certificate authority at the same time.
 The validity of the imported certificate is not checked!
 If there are substantive amendments to the certificate, the certificate will not be updated in CCT
800. The certificate has to be imported/replaced.
 The file name of the certificate can only consist of the following characters: a–z, A–Z, 0–9. Special
characters are not allowed (such as # &! <> () '`' Ö ö Ö Ö Ü).
 The (changed) certificates are only applied after sending the configuration to the VirtuoSIS.

SIP trunk (SIP-T)

General information
The SIP trunk card allows an easy integration of SIP telephone systems.

Principle of the integration of SIP telephones in VirtuoSIS

An overview of all available SIP-T functions can be found on page 6.

SIP trunk licences

To use the full range of functions of the SIS-SIP-T cards, the cards must be licenced in CCT 800.
The following SIP trunk licences are available:
 L-SIS-SIPT8B: Licence for SIP trunk, 8 channels, feature level B
 L-SIS-SIPT1D: Licence for SIP trunk, 1 channel, feature level D
 L-SIS-SIPT8D: Licence for SIP trunk, 8 channels, feature level D
For further information about licencing see page 96.

466 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

Example of use SIP-T

NOTE:
For applications, for example conferences, which require the T-key (“*“ on a SIP device), direct
dialling codes may be configured, e.g. 2000=7T1.

The following examples describe the different use cases and the required configuration.

General configuration of the example

 VirtuoSIS with SIS-SIP-T and SIS-IP-8 card
 All 8 channels of the SIS-SIP-T card are licenced
 The channels “1” to “5” are combined to trunk “88”
 The channels “6” to “8” are combined to trunk “89”

Configuration example with a SIS-SIP-T and SIS-IP-8 card

Case 1
 Configuration: only default configuration.
 The number of a free channel (e.g. channel “1” with the number “401”) and the phone number have
to be dialled to reach the SIP telephone.
Which number is dialled
What you dial
to the third-party SIP server
401 2011 2011

Pros and cons:

– You always have to dial the number of a channel (e.g. “401”) before a phone call.
+ Automatic use of a free channel.
+ No additional configuration required.

Case 2
 Configuration for trunk “88” (Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks): pre-dialling “88”.
 “88” to select the trunk (channel “1” to “5”) and the phone number have to be dialled to reach the
SIP telephone.
Which number is dialled
What you dial
to the third-party SIP server
88 2011 2011

3.1/0923 467
SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

Pros and cons:

– You always have to dial the pre-dialling number (e.g. “88”) before a phone call.
+ You don‘t have to worry about channel numbers.
+ Automatic use of a free channel.

Case 3
 Configuration for trunk “88” (Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks): code number “20”.
 If the SIP number starts with the code number or if the code number is the phone number, you don‘t
have to select a channel or a trunk. The Intercom station establishes a connection with the
SIP telephone automatically.
Which number is dialled
What you dial
to the third-party SIP server
2011 2011

Pros and cons:

– No further Intercom numbers, which start with the code number (e.g. code number “20”:
Intercom number “2013” are possible).
– You have to configure each phone number or the first digits of the phone numbers.
+ You only have to dial the phone number.
+ Automatic use of a free channel.

Case 4
 Configuration for trunk “89” (Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks): pre-dialling “89” and dial prefix
“+31”.
 With this configuration, you reach SIP telephones in a defined region. “89” to select the trunk
(channel “1” to “5”) and the phone number have to be dialled.
Which number is dialled
What you dial
to the third-party SIP server
89 2011 +31 2011

Pros and cons:

– All calls from this trunk have the same prefix and can only reach SIP telephones from this
region (e.g. dial prefix “+31”: only regions with dial prefix “+31” can be reached).
+ Automatic dial of prefixes.

Standard trunk configuration

NOTES: Global SIP settings

For information about the configuration of the global SIP settings, see page 464. These SIP settings
will be applied for all SIP trunks and SIP subscribers of the respective VirtuoSIS Master.

The following configuration steps are possible:

 Add SIP trunk – see below
 SIP trunk configuration – see below
 Channel configuration – see page 473
 Auto dialler mode – see page 477

Add SIP trunk

To add a SIP trunk, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks
2. Right click and select the option “Add trunk”.

NOTE: Max. 99 SIP trunks per VirtuoSIS Master

A maximum of 99 SIP trunks can be added per VirtuoSIS Master.

468 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

ATTENTION:
 To prevent issues, it's important to assign unique server IDs in systems with multiple instances.
 For systems with several instances that use a SIP trunk (SIP-T card) or a Symphony Bridge (SYM-
BRIDGE card), the configuration of all instances of a VirtuoSIS master must be received in a single
process (in a single *.cctx file). This will avoid conflicts with the automatic assignment of IDs.

Standard trunk configuration

The following SIP trunk settings are available:
Function Description
Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks
[Master] - Instance - In this drop-down list, select the VirtuoSIS Instance of the VirtuoSIS Master, to which
Description the SIP trunk is to be assigned.
Trunk ID This field shows the SIP trunk ID.
Trunk Name In this field, enter the desired SIP trunk name.
Trunk Configuration Click on this button to open the SIP trunk configuration dialogue (see next table).

Function Description
Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired trunk > tab SIP Settings
Primary host
SIP server IP address/ In this field, enter the IP address or DNS name of the SIP server. It is possible to enter
hostname 1) IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. 3)
In this field, the destination port of the SIP server can be changed (e.g. port “5060” for
SIP server port 1) UDP/TCP).
Transport protocol 1) In this drop-down list, the transport protocol for data transmission can be selected.
Activate this checkbox to use DNS SRV lookups.
 Checkbox is activated: The hostname of the primary host is resolved via DNS SRV
DNS SRV lookup lookup.
 Checkbox is not activated: The hostname of the primary host is resolved via A or
AAAA data records and the port configured in the SIP trunk is used.
Secondary host
Secondary host Activate this checkbox to activate the secondary host.
SIP server IP address/
In this field, the IP address or DNS name of a second SIP server can be entered.3)
hostname 1) 2)
In this field, the destination port of the SIP server can be changed (e.g. port “5060” for
SIP server port 1) TCP/UDP).
Transport protocol 1) In this drop-down list, the transport protocol for data transmission can be selected.
Activate this checkbox to use DNS SRV lookups.
 Checkbox is activated: The hostname of the and secondary host is resolved via
DNS SRV lookup SRV records.
 Checkbox is not activated: The host names are resolved via A or AAAA data
records and the port configured in the SIP trunk is used.
SIP OPTIONS Ping
Monitors the availability of the SIP trunk at periodic intervals. A connection error can
Ping interval to monitor
thus be displayed on a control desk if a call request with line monitoring is configured
destination status [s]
for the SIP subscriber.
Registration
Registration Activate this checkbox if the registration to a SIP provider should be carried out.
SIP server IP address/ In this field, the SIP registration address can be entered. It is possible to enter IPv4
hostname 1) or IPv6 addresses or host names.

3.1/0923 469
 SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

In this field, the destination port of the SIP server can be changed (e.g. port “5060” for
SIP server port
UDP/TCP).
DNS SRV lookup Activate this checkbox to support DNS SRV lookups.
This checkbox activates the “line” parameter in the “contact” field of SIP INVITE
messages. This should be returned by the registrar in the request URI and is used to
Use line parameter
identify the endpoint. It is recommended to only disable this setting, if the server is
incompatible.
In this field, the expiry time sent in the register process can be configured.
This field is not mandatory and is set to 0 by default. If the value here is left as 0 or
Registration expiry [s] empty, the settings for the default SIP registration expiry configured under Project >
VirtuoSIS Master > SIP settings > Default SIP registration expiry [s]
will apply (see page 464).
Username 1) In this field, the user for registration can be entered.
In this field, the contact user for registration can be entered. Sets the SIP contact
Contact user
header's user portion of the SIP URI this will affect the extension reached in dialplan.
J
PRO 800 Authentication user In this field, the authentication user for registration can be entered.
LICENCE
PRO9U
In this field, the password for registration is entered. This password is used to
authenticate against the remote SIP proxy 8).
Password By default, the password is hidden behind asterisks “*”. To show the password in
plain text, click the checkbox to the right of the password field. Click the checkbox a
second time to hide the password again.
In this field, the domain for registration can be entered. When the domain is entered,
Domain
the host of the URI is set from “user@host” to “user@domain”.
Call handling
Activate this checkbox to include the P-Asserted-Identity header in the INVITE
message for an outgoing call. This is sometimes required by the remote station for
identity verification purposes (e.g. for public SIP trunk providers). To be able to use
P-Asserted-Identity
this function properly, the call number provided by the provider must be configured
as caller ID in the dial plan for outgoing calls
(e.g. “1,Set(CALLERID(num)=+43662856221)”).
V Refreshing display text for remote subscribers when calling via SIP trunk using the
VirtuoSIS Remote-Party-ID SIP header “Remote Party ID” (e.g. at call transfer in case of busy or privacy).
LICENCE
L-SIS-11 Configurable from VirtuoSIS version 13.2. Default: active.
In this field, the user can be entered the value replacing the user in the “From”
From user
header field of outgoing SIP packets.
In this field, the domain can be entered that replaces the domain in the “From”
From domain
header field of outgoing SIP packets.
Outgoing authentication Activate this checkbox to enable outgoing authentication.
Username In this field, the user for outgoing authentication can be entered.
In this field, the password for outgoing authentication can be entered.
By default, the password is hidden behind asterisks “*”. To show the password in
Password
plain text, click the checkbox to the right of the password field. Click the checkbox a
second time to hide the password again.
Incoming authentication Activate this checkbox to enable incoming authentication.
Username In this field, the user for incoming authentication can be entered.

In this field, the password for incoming authentication can be entered 8).
Password By default, the password is hidden behind asterisks “*”. To show the password in
plain text, click the checkbox to the right of the password field. Click the checkbox a
second time to hide the password again.
Media
 Activate this checkbox to send “183 Session Progress” messages at incoming calls
 Early media
(see page 479).
SRTP Activate this checkbox to encrypt the transmission of audio data and video data.

470 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

In this drop-down list, the usage of NAT (“Network Address Translation”) can be
selected:
 yes: Force behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581”. Symmetric RTP support is enabled.
 no: Enable behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581” if requested by the remote
station.Symmetric RTP support is disabled.
 force_rport: Force behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581” and disable symmetric RTP
NAT
support.
 comedia: Enable behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581” if the remote side requests it and en-
able symmetric RTP support.
When choosing “yes“, “force_rport“ or “comedia“, Comfort Noise packets open the
connection through NAT or a firewall, to enable RTP data traffic. The procedure
complies to RFC 3389.
In this drop-down list, one of the following transmission protocols for DTMF tones
can be selected:
DTMF mode
 RFC 2833: Signals are transmitted according to the RFC 2833 protocol.
 SIP Info: Signals are transmitted according to the SIP protocol.
Video codec In this field, the configured video codec is displayed.
In these drop-down lists, the priority of the audio codecs can be selected that be used
Audio Codec 1 - 5 (1 = highest, 5 = lowest). When initiating a call, the device uses the highest priority
codec, which matches a codec from the opposite device.
Volume adjustment In these drop-down lists, the audio level for incoming calls over the SIP trunk can be
incoming [dB] adjusted.
Volume adjustment out- In these drop-down lists, the audio level for outgoing calls over the SIP trunk can be
going [dB] adjusted.
Dialplan
Activate this checkbox to playback the pre-recorded audio ID “178”during ringing at a
calling Intercom station (SIP response code “180” must be received from the called
 Force ringing (outgoing)
phone). Further information about importing pre-recorded audio can be found
on page 398.
Change outgoing dialplan Click on this button to add user-specific dial plan lines to the Asterisk dial plan for
and Change incoming
dialplan outgoing or incoming calls (see page 480). 6)

Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired trunk > tab Telephone Settings
Password
In this field, a password can be entered, which must be dialled on the phone to initi-
ate a call via this SIP trunk (1 to 4 digits) 7) 8).
Password incoming By default, the password is hidden behind asterisks “*”. To show the password in
plain text, click the checkbox to the right of the password field. Click the checkbox a
second time to hide the password again.
In this field, the waiting time can be entered, after which the next sequence is to be
Waiting time (Password) dialled if the current call has not been accepted.
[s]  Enter single digit number: waiting time in minutes
 Enter multi digit number: waiting time in seconds
Timeouts
In this field, the time can be entered in seconds after which the telephone interface
Hang up after [s]
hangs up when the call has been terminated.
In this field, the time can be entered in seconds after which the speech direction will
Max. time simplex [s] be switched during a simplex conversation unless the button “*” is not pressed
(timer will be reset).
In this field, enter the time in seconds, after which a call over the selected SIP trunk be
Dialling timeout [s]
initiated automatically.
Pre-dialling
In this field, a trunk prefix for placing international calls can be entered (e.g. “+43”).
Dial prefix This prefix is pre-dialled for each outgoing call. Allowed characters: “0” to “9”, “*”,
“#” and “+”

3.1/0923 471
SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

In this field, a button sequence to select a certain trunk (valid for all channels) can be
Pre-dialling
entered, which is not part of the outgoing called number.
In this field, up to 100 pre-dialling codes can be entered that will be pre-dialled
Code numbers automatically at each outgoing call of the Intercom station (several definitions are
separated via commas).
Intercom Settings
Activate this checkbox to dial the button “0” automatically at the telephone interface
for incoming calls over the SIP trunk (e.g. for initiating a call request). As of VirtuoSIS
11.0, this option additionally allows incoming calls to call destinations in non-numeric
Dial 0 at incoming call
form e.g. a SIP INVITE “INVITE sip:s@<IP address>:<Port>;transport=TCP;line=<value>
SIP/2.0”, which includes the lower-case character “s”, to be used. This is utilised when
the call targets number is unknown from the context used.
In this field, the block number of the Intercom Server can be entered that is connected
over this SIP trunk to show display texts, which were sent via long ICX messages in
Caller ID IS-block the telephone mode, across LAN borders. E.g. to transmit display texts of a SIP
device, which is allocated to Intercom Server block “1” (VirtuoSIS), to a SIP station,
which is allocated to Intercom Server block “2” (GE 800). 4)
DTMF Settings
Activate this checkbox to enable after-dialling for the called telephone (see page 483).
After-dial from telephone
This configuration is only used if the call is made using a pooled channel.
 fix: The SIP trunk is permanently in DTMF after-dial mode.
 x s/min: If “77” is entered on the station in after-dial mode, the DTMF after-dial
DTMF after-dial mode mode is activated for this SIP trunk. After the configured time, the SIP trunk
switches back into the Intercom after-dial mode. Possible selections: 8 s, 15 s,
30 s, 1 min, 2 min and 4 min (8 s by default).
1) Mandatory fields
2) The second SIP server will only be used if the first SIP server is not available.
3)
Host syntax examples: “10.10.0.1”, “[1234::1234]” or “sip.commend.com”.
4) A configuration is only possible if the checkbox IAX/SIP-T - Caller-ID Information at Interfaces > Data
interfaces > tab TCP/IP is activated.
5)
CCT 800 version 8.0 or higher will not show the host name with VirtuoSIS version 7.1. To show the host name
in CCT 800, VirtuoSIS has to be upgraded to version 8.0 or higher and the console configuration has to be run
again (see also product manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”).
6)
The dial plan feature is only intended for experienced Asterisk users.
7) The password needs to be transferred before the intercom number (included in the INVITE): <external trunk
number><password incoming><intercom number>.
8)
Details on the characters allowed when assigning passwords, see page 516.

472 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

Configuration of channels for SIP trunks

Channels can be assigned to a SIP trunk. For a call via the SIP trunk, the first available and assigned
channel is used automatically for the incoming or outgoing call. In the auto dialler mode, the respective
channel is selected automatically without the possibility to select the channel freely. The following
channel settings are available:
Function Description
Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Channels > tab Common
Channel > Usage Indicates usage within the selected SIP trunk.
Channel > Trunk assign- In this drop-down list, select the SIP trunk to which the corresponding channel is to
ment be assigned.
In this drop-down list, select how the SIP channel reacts to an incoming call. Select
V Ringing or Auto Answer. Additionally go to Subscriber > Entitlements > tab
Privacy and activate the option Fix as calling station.
VirtuoSIS Incoming call behaviour
LICENCE In addition, go to Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > trunk and in the section Media
L-SIS-11
activate the checkbox Early Media, to play server-generated audio while ringing; if
the checkbox is deactivated, the SIP phone will manage audio playback.
In this field, a call number can be entered, which be reserved for this channel.
Reservation incoming At an incoming call from this call number, this channel will be used for the connec-
extension
tion. 1) 2)
Activate this checkbox to configure the channel in auto dialler mode (see page 477).
 Auto Dialler Mode In auto dialler mode, outgoing calls will be established automatically to the pre-
defined telephone numbers.
1)
If for every channel a call number is configured, no calls from undefined call numbers can be accepted.
2)
Characters admissible for telephone numbers: 0 to 9, *, # and +, up to 16 characters.

Function Description
Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Channels > tab Video
In this drop-down list, the video mode of the respective channel is configured.
 Deactivated: The video function is deactivated.
Mode  Camera and Monitor: Incoming and outgoing video stream is activated.
 Camera: Incoming video stream is activated.
 Monitor: Outgoing video stream is activated.
Camera Number In this field, a unique camera number (1-9999) must be assigned to the camera.

During an active conversation, a configured virtual output can be set through a channel. An individually
configured DTMF sequence can be sent to the respective SIP server by switching the virtual output.
F Function Description
Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Channels > tab Action Sequences
Activate this checkbox to create a virtual output for the respective channel.
Action Sequence 1 – 4
Activating the checkbox enables the columns Call number OUT and DTMF sequence.
In this field, the call number of the virtual output can be entered. This output is listed
Call number OUT 1 – 4
in CCT 800 under Outputs > General Settings.
In this field, an individual one- or multi-digit DTMF sequence consisting of the
DTMF-Sequence 1 – 4 characters 0 – 9, *, #, A – D can be entered. The DTMF sequence may consist of a
maximum of 16 characters.

ATTENTION: Call number action sequence output

Dialable call number required if action sequences are used across VirtuoSIS Instances.

Example: Transmission of DTMF sequence “1*A” via a channel

The DTMF sequence can be used for various actions on the third-party system (e.g., voice menu).

3.1/0923 473
SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

Example: Recording the DTMF sequence "1 * A" via a channel

Requirements for transmitting the DTMF sequence on a channel:
 There must be an active call connection between the Intercom station EE 900A and the third-party
SIP telephone on the channel.
 A door opener that triggers the virtual output 9999 must be configured for channel 1 with call
number 109.
 Cancel conversation:
 Automatically after door is opened: requires the checkbox “Cancel Call” in the door opener
dialogue to be activated and the value in the column “After [s]” to be at least 6 seconds.
 Manually by a call participant: requires the checkbox “Cancel Call” in the door opener dialogue to
be deactivated.
1. Intercom station EE 900A calls the third-party SIP telephone on channel 1 (call number 109).
2. The pre-configured door opener button is pressed on the Intercom station EE 900A.
3. Virtual output 9999 is activated.
4. DTMF sequence “1*A” is transmitted to the third-party SIP telephone.

CompanyFlex trunks

VirtuoSIS
Feature VirtuoSIS 13.0 – Telekom Deutschland CompanyFlex
LICENCE L-SIS-13 This feature facilitates the use of CompanyFlex trunks from Telekom Deutschland GmbH.

VirtuoSIS 13.0 now supports connection to CompanyFlex – a specialized type of SIP-T trunk offered by
Telekom Deutschland GmbH. Using CompanyFlex requires a licence for VirtuoSIS v13.x or higher. For
further information about licencing, see page 96. Additionally, certain settings for CompanyFlex differ
from those of a standard SIP-T trunk.

GOOD TO KNOW: Comfort noise

Comfort noise packets open the connection through NAT or a firewall, to enable RTP data traffic.
This feature is always active. The procedure complies with RFC 3389.

NOTE: Remote-Party-ID for CompanyFlex trunks

The SIP header “Remote-party-ID” is not available for CompanyFlex trunks.

The following configuration steps are possible:

 Add CompanyFlex trunk – see below
 CompanyFlex trunk configuration – see below

474 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

 Channel configuration – see page 473

 Auto dialler mode – see page 477

Add CompanyFlex trunk

To add a CompanyFlex trunk, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks
2. Right click and select the option “Add trunk”.

NOTE: Max. 99 CompanyFlex trunks per VirtuoSIS Master

A maximum of 99 CompanyFlex trunks can be added per VirtuoSIS Master.

CompanyFlex trunk configuration

The following CompanyFlex trunk settings are available:
Function Description
Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks
[Master] - Instance - In this drop-down list, select the VirtuoSIS Instance of the VirtuoSIS Master, to which
Description the CompanyFlex trunk will be assigned.
Trunk ID This field shows the CompanyFlex trunk ID.
Trunk Name In this field, enter the desired CompanyFlex trunk name.
Trunk Use In this drop-down list, select CompanyFlex Trunk.
Click on this button to open the trunk configuration dialogue for CompanyFlex (see
Trunk Configuration
next table).

Function Description
Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired trunk > tab CompanyFlex Settings
Telephony Credentials
In this field, enter the CompanyFlex ID. This ID is used in the background to connect
Outbound Proxy/
to the Telekom SIP servers: “<CompanyFlex ID>.primary.companyflex.de” and
CompanyFlex-ID
“<CompanyFlex ID>.secondary.companyflex.de”.
In this field, enter the Registration Phone Number of the CompanyFlex trunk to
Registration Phone
register and authenticate it with the Telekom. This number is listed in the user's
Number/Telephony
CompanyFlex account and is entered as an E.164 formatted number with + as the
Username
country-code prefix (e.g. +49).
Telephony Password In this field, enter the password for the CompanyFlex account.
Show Telephony Pass-
Activate this checkbox to show the telephony password.
word
In this field, enter the number to be displayed on the called telephone.
When outbound calls (i.e. from an intercom station to a Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN) number) are made, the called telephone will display the number of
Outgoing Phone Number the calling party, e.g. to call the caller back. This number must be one of the call
numbers (with or without extension) assigned to the CompanyFlex account and
might be called “Anlagenanschlussrufnummer” or “Blockrufnummer”. This number
is entered as an E.164 formatted number with + as the country-code prefix (e.g. +49).
Show “Phone Number Activate this checkbox to display the phone number and DDI on the receiver. This
and “Direct Dial IN (DDI)” facilitates calling back directly to the Intercom station from the previously called
on the receiver telephone in the PSTN.
SIP OPTIONS Ping
Ping interval to monitor Enables periodic checking of the connection to the primary and secondary SIP
destination status [s] servers. If enabled, only values of 60 seconds or greater are allowed.

3.1/0923 475
SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

Incoming Phone Call Handling

Right click and select the option “Add Phone Number Block”. Enter the phone
Phone Number Blocks 1) number and direct dial number in the respective fields Phone Number and Direct Dial
In (DDI). Then select the call number from the Intercom Call Number drop-down list.

Individual Phone Right click and select the option “Add Individual Phone Number” and enter the
number in the “Phone Number” field. Then select the call number from the Intercom
Numbers 1) Call Number drop-down list.
Media
CompanyFlex supports SIP trunks connected via TLS/SRTP or TCP/RTP. In the case of
TLS/SRTP, the use of CompanyFlex trunks may possibly require a modification to the
Protocol
security settings in the console configuration. For further information, see product
manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.
Volume adjustment
In this field, select the incoming volume adjustment from the drop-down list.
incoming [dB]
Volume adjustment
In this field, select the outgoing volume adjustment from the drop-down list.
outgoing [dB]

Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired trunk > tab Telephone Settings
The Telephone Settings tab is identical to the tab for configuring SIP-T trunks/channels see page 471.
1)
Inbound calls will be directed to the VirtuoSIS' PSTN call number. To forward this number to an Intercom
subscriber, a list of extensions and targets can be configured. These numbers are entered as E.164 formatted
numbers with + as the country-code prefix (e.g. +49).

Incoming Phone Call Handling

Inbound calls, which are calls from the PSTN to the Intercom server, are directed to the Telekom
account's public telephone number(s). These numbers can be configured or located individually. The
Telekom differentiates between Rufnummernblock (number block) and Einzelrufnummer (individual
phone number), and multiples of both can be configured.

Example: Rufnummernblock / Phone Number Blocks

This is the base call number associated with the Telekom account. The number must be dialled with an
extension when calling from the PSTN. The
extensions can be configured to map to an Intercom subscriber’s Intercom call number. For example,
the customer’s Telekom account has the Rufnummernblock +49 911 216 486 62. A phone in the PSTN
calling to +49 911 216 486 62 1 will be forwarded to the VirtuoSIS via the CompanyFlex trunk. Since a
mapping has been configured for this base call number with extension 1 to Intercom station 1003, the
PSTN caller will be connected to that specific Intercom station.
In contrast, if a phone in the PSTN calls +49 911 216 486 62 1010 and extension 1010 has no mapping,
the PSTN caller will be connected to Intercom station 1010 through the Intercom system as a “number
to be dialled”.

Example: Einzelrufnummer / Individual Phone Numbers:

This is a call number associated with the Telekom account. The number has no extension and can be
mapped to an Intercom station via its Intercom call number. For example, The customer’s Telekom
account has the Einzelrufnummer +49 228 536 679 63. When a phone in the PSTN calls this number,
the call will be forwarded to the VirtuoSIS via the CompanyFlex trunk. Here, a mapping to Intercom
station 1001 has been configured for this Einzelrufnummer and thus the caller from the PSTN will be
connected to that specific Intercom station.

PSTN phone number matching:

VirtuoSIS will try to match the called PSTN phone number according to the following rules:
 If no matching base number is found, the full PSTN call number is forwarded to the Intercom system
as the “number to be dialled”, which will likely be rejected if no corresponding Intercom call number
exists. However, if “Dial 0 at incoming call“ is configured, this may be a valid configuration.
 If the Einzelrufnummer is configured with mapping, the respective Intercom station is called.

476 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

 If the Rufnummernblock is configured, the extension is compared against the configuration.

 If a mapping is configured for base call number + extension, the respective Intercom station is called.
 If no mapping is configured for base call number + extension, the extension is forwarded as “number to
be dialled” to the Intercom system.

 Auto Dialler Mode

NOTE: Requirement
To carry out the following configuration, the checkbox Auto Dialler Mode at Interfaces >
SIS-SIP-T > Channels > tab Telephone settings must be activated (see page 473).

In auto-dialler mode, calls and call requests can be transferred automatically to pre-defined telephone
numbers over the SIP trunk. The telephone numbers and the order in which these telephone numbers
are dialled can be configured via dial sequences. If the call is not answered or the telephone is busy,
the call will be transferred to next telephone number in the dial sequence. The following settings are
available:
Function Description
Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Channels > desired channel
Password
In this field, a password can be entered, which must be dialled on the phone to accept
the incoming call (1 to 4 digits) 5).
Password outgoing By default, the password is hidden behind asterisks “*”. To show the password in
plain text, click the checkbox to the right of the password field. Click the checkbox a
second time to hide the password again.
In this field, a password can be entered, which must be dialled on the phone to
initiate a call over this channel (1 to 4 digits) 6) 7).
Password incoming By default, the password is hidden behind asterisks “*”. To show the password in
plain text, click the checkbox to the right of the password field. Click the checkbox a
second time to hide the password again.
In this field, the waiting time can be entered, after which the next sequence be dialled
Waiting time (Password) if the current call has not been accepted.
[s]  Enter single digit number = waiting time in minutes
 Enter multi digit number = waiting time in seconds
Timeouts
In this field, the time can be entered in seconds after which the telephone interface
Hang up after [s]
hangs up when the call has been terminated.
In this field, the time can be entered in seconds after which the speech direction will
Max. time simplex [s]
be switched during a simplex conversation (timer will be reset).
In this field, enter the time in seconds, after which a call over the selected SIP trunk
Dialling timeout [s]
will be initiated automatically.
Pre-dialling
In this field, a trunk prefix for placing international calls can be entered (e.g. “+43”).
Dial prefix
This prefix is pre-dialled for each outgoing call.
In this field, the button to select a certain trunk (valid for all channels) can be entered,
Pre-dialling
which is not part of the outgoing called number.
Intercom Settings
Activate this checkbox to automatically dial the “0” key on the telephone interface for
incoming calls via the SIP trunk (e.g. to trigger a call request). As of VirtuoSIS 11.0,
Dial 0 at incoming call this checkbox also allows extension numbers that contain the lowercase letter “s”. If
the option is activated, the following SIP Invite can be sent: “INVITE sip:s@<IP
address>:<Port>;transport=TCP;line=<value> SIP/2.0”.

3.1/0923 477
SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

In this field, the block number of the Intercom Server can be entered that is connected
over this SIP trunk to show display texts, which were sent via long ICX messages in
Caller ID IS-block the telephone mode, across LAN borders. For example, to be able to transfer the
display text of a SIP device between connected Intercom servers 1).
DTMF Settings
Activate this checkbox to enable after-dialling for the called telephone (see page 483).
After-dial from telephone
This configuration is only used if the call is made using a pooled channel.
Activate this checkbox to permanently put the SIP trunk into DTMF after-dial mode:
 Checkbox activated: DTMF after-dial mode is activated for the respective channel.
DTMF after-dial mode
 Checkbox deactivated: Intercom after-dial mode is activated for the respective
channel.2)
Telephone numbers
In this field, an up to 24-digit telephone number can be entered that be dialled auto-
Telephone number 1 - 8 matically (entry of “0” to “9”, “*” and “#” possible). The pre-defined telephone num-
bers will be dialled via dial sequences (see below).
Sequences
In this field, an up to 15-digit dial sequence can be entered (entry of “1” to “8”
Sequence 1 - 8 possible for telephone numbers). For further information about executing dial
sequences see page 478. 3) 4)
1) A configuration is only possible if at Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab TCP/IP the checkbox IAX/SIP-T -Caller-ID
Information is activated.
2)
If there is an incoming call on the channel, the DTMF after-dial mode can be activated for 8 seconds on the
respective channel by dialling “77”.
3) By means of adding “9” at the end of the dialling sequence, the respective call is switched to the 1st call number
of the sequence again if this call is not answered by the last call number of the sequence (e.g. “12121219”).
4)
Telephone numbers can be dialled multiple times per dial sequence.
5) The password must be transferred after dialling the channel, during the ringing phase.
6)
The password must be transferred before the intercom number (included in the INVITE): <external trunk num-
ber><password incoming><intercom number>.
7)
Details on the characters allowed when assigning passwords see page 516.

Trigger dial sequence

The different dialling sequences are activated with inputs via dialling simulation to which e.g. a time
switch can be connected. Follow the instructions below:

Configuration CCT 800

1. Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input initiates dialling
2. Right click on the desired input and select the option “Add input initiates dialling”.
3. Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input initiates dialling > desired input
4. In the drop-down list Subscriber 1, select the telephone interface for which the dialling sequence be
switched over.

478 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

5. In the drop-down list Dial/Key next to the desired input level (e.g. “Short”), enter the code “XX9T99”
and the number of the dialling sequence (e.g. “XX9T992” to activate dialling sequence 2).

Trigger dial sequence

NOTES: Existing call

 With the prefix “XX“, an existing conversation (built up by dialling the interface call number) is
cancelled before switching the dialling sequence. Otherwise, the sequence would not be changed.
 “XX” has no effect on an existing call request. The call remains and is transferred to the new
dialling sequence.

In the example above (screenshot), one input triggers the switch-over of the dialling sequences 1 and
2 for the subscriber 1 (telephone interface):
 Level input “Break” dialling sequence 1 is active

 Level input “Short” dialling sequence 2 is activeEarly media while ringing

ATTENTION: Simultaneous dialled codes

Make sure that two inputs cannot dial a code at the same time. This could happen e.g. if codes for
“short” and for “open” are configured for several inputs. If one input closes and the other opens at
the same time, it cannot be guaranteed if the “open” code or the “short” code was dialled first,
because always the code dialled last becomes effective.

Feature PRO 800 6.1 – Early media while ringing

VirtuoSIS
With early media it s possible to send pre-recorded audio to calling phones during ringing.
LICENCE PRO6U When a phone is calling to an Intercom station and the call is not acknowledged (e.g. station
is busy), the SIP response code “180 – Ringing” will be sent to the calling phone while ringing.
In addition, the called Intercom station also sends an early media stream that contains pre-
recorded audio. This audio stream will be played back at the calling phone for the pending call
(e.g. as calm down signal).

NOTE: SIP response code has to be interpreted

The calling phone must be able to interpret the SIP response code “180 – Ringing”.

To use early media, follow the instructions below:

Configuration SIP-T
1. Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks
2. Click on Trunk Configuration.

3.1/0923 479
SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

3. Activate the checkbox early media.

4. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Pre-recorded audio
5. Assign the ID “178” to the pre-recorded audio that be sent in the early media stream.

GOOD TO KNOW: Only ID “178” can be used for early media

For an early media stream, only the pre-recorded audio with ID “178” can be used. By default, a
standard system tone will be played back if no custom pre-recorded audio is used. For more
information about pre-recorded audio, see page 398.

6. Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Channels > tab Common

7. Activate the checkbox Dial 0 at incoming call.

GOOD TO KNOW: Call request required to send early media stream

To send an early media stream, a call request must be triggered by the calling phone. With the
function “Dial 0 at incoming call”, the button 0 is dialled automatically at the telephone interface to
trigger the call request in the Intercom system.

Configuration SIP-C
1. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Settings
2. Activate the checkbox early media.
3. Activate the checkbox Dial 0 at incoming call.

GOOD TO KNOW: Call request required to send early media stream

To send an early media stream, a call request must be triggered by the calling phone. With the
function “Dial 0 at incoming call”, the button 0 is dialled automatically at the telephone interface to
trigger the call request in the Intercom system.

4. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Pre-recorded audio

5. Assign the ID “178” to the pre-recorded audio that be sent in the early media stream.

GOOD TO KNOW: Only ID “178” can be used for early media

For an early media stream, only the pre-recorded audio with ID “178” can be used. By default, a
standard system tone will be played back if no custom pre-recorded audio is used. For more
information about pre-recorded audio, see page 398.

Example of use dial plan SIP-T

NOTE: Adjust dial plans for VirtuoSIS 9.1

Project-specific designed dial plans for SIP-C/SIP-T (incoming/outgoing) calls must be checked for
compatibility and adapted before an update to VirtuoSIS 9.1 is carried out to ensure proper operation.

NOTE: Maximum dial plan length

In CCT 800 project-specific dial plans can be entered.
 Navigate to Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > column Trunk Configuration > Dialplan.
 In the fields Add outgoing and Add incoming dial plans with up to 30,000 characters can be
entered.

Example 1: Modify display text and shown call number

In this example, the “Caller ID” should be changed to “Intercom” and the country code (e.g. “+41”)
should be added to the displayed number. For this, carry out the following configuration:

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired trunk
 In the area Dialplan, click on the button Add outgoing.

480 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

 For example, enter the following commands:

For both VirtuoSIS 9.0 and 9.1:
1,Set(CALLERID(name)=Intercom)
2,Set(CALLERID(num)=+41${CALLERID(num)})
 Click on the button Accept.

Dial plan configuration window in CCT 800

Example 2: Hide first four call number characters

In this example, the first four characters of the phone number are to be hidden. To do this, follow these
configuration steps::

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired trunk
 In the area Dialplan, click on the button Add outgoing.
 For example, enter the following command:
For both VirtuoSIS 9.0 and 9.1:
1,Set(CALLERID(num)=${CALLERID(num):4})
 Click on the button Accept.

Example 3: Hide the first digit of the called extension

In this example, the first digit should be hidden from the called extension.
To do this, proceed as follows:

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired Trunk
 In the area Dialplan, click on the button Add incoming.
 For example, enter the following command:
For both VirtuoSIS 9.0 and 9.1:
1,Goto(${EXTEN:1},2)
 Click on the button Accept.

Example 4:
In the following example, the 3-digit number of the subscriber to be called is to be determined in the
Intercom system from the SIP header. E.g. from SIP “sip:[email protected]“
to address “777”:

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired trunk
 In the area Dialplan, click on the button Add incoming.
 For example, enter the following command.
Up to VirtuoSIS 9.0:
1,Dial(IAX2/SIS-IAX-GW/01${CUT(CUT(PJSIP_HEADER(read,To),@,1),:,2):-3}))
n,Hangup()

3.1/0923 481
SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

From VirtuoSIS 9.1 onwards:

1,Goto(${CUT(CUT(PJSIP_HEADER(read,To),@,1),:,2):-3},2)
 Click on the button Accept.

Example 5:
In this example, the call is forwarded to another subscriber depending on the number dialled. If the di-
alled number ends with “78”, then “101” is dialled via the trunk with the ID “04”, if this ends with “80”,
then “103” is dialled, also via the trunk with the ID “04”. If the dialled number does not end with “78”
or “80”, the call is hung up immediately. In addition, any “+“ characters in the caller's number are re-
placed by “00”:

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired trunk
 In the area Dialplan, click on the button Add incoming.
 For example, enter the following commands. “04” is the Trunk-ID.
Up to VirtuoSIS 9.0:
1,Set(CALLERID(num)=${STRREPLACE(CALLERID(num),"+","00")})
n,Set(toExten=${CUT(CUT(PJSIP_HEADER(read,To),@,1),:,2):-2})
n,GotoIf($[ ${toExten} = 78 ]?dial101)
n,GotoIf($[ ${toExten} = 80 ]?dial103)
n,Hangup()
n(dial101),Dial(IAX2/SIS-IAX-GW/04101)
n,Hangup()
n(dial103),Dial(IAX2/SIS-IAX-GW/04103)
n,Hangup()

From VirtuoSIS 9.1 onwards:

1,Set(CALLERID(num)=${STRREPLACE(CALLERID(num),"+","00")})
n,Set(toExten=${CUT(CUT(PJSIP_HEADER(read,To),@,1),:,2):-2})
n,GotoIf($[ ${toExten} = 78 ]?dial101)
n,GotoIf($[ ${toExten} = 80 ]?dial103)
n,Hangup()
n(dial101),Stasis(cis-ac,trunk,04,101)
n,Hangup()
n(dial103),Stasis(cis-ac,trunk,04,103)
n,Hangup()
 Click on the button Accept.

Example 6:
Show complete number incl. Intercom call number at provider connections with P-Asserted-Identity:

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired trunk
 In the area Call handling, activate the checkbox P-Asserted-Identity and leave the field From user
empty.
 In the area Dialplan, click on the button Add outgoing.
 For example, enter the following commands.
From VirtuoSIS 9.1 onwards:
1,Set(CALLERID(num)=0043123456789${CALLERID(num)})
 Click on the button Accept.

482 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

Example for the function “After-Dial from telephone”

In the following example, a wallmount station is mounted next to a door and is operated by VirtuoSIS.
This wallmount station has the call number “801” and is connected to a VoIP server via the trunk “21”.
On the other side, a SIP telephone is operated by a 3rd-party VoIP server. This SIP telephone has the
call number “6000” and is connected to VirtuoSIS via the trunk “841”.
If now a call from the SIP telephone (“6000”) is initiated to the wallmount station (“801”), it is possible
to trigger the door opener, which is connected to the wallmount station (“801”), using the after-dial
function via the SIP telephone (“6000”) (incoming call). However, if a call from the wallmount station
(“801”) is initiated to the SIP telephone (“6000”), it is not possible to trigger the door opener, which is
connected to the wallmount station (“801”), using the after-dial function via the SIP telephone (“6000”)
(outgoing call). To allow after-diallings via the SIP telephone (“6000”) in case a call is initiated from the
wallmount station (“801”), the checkbox After-Dial from telephone has to be activated (see page 473).

Example setup for a trunk between VirtuoSIS and a VoIP server

3.1/0923 483
 SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

SIP subscriber card (SIP-C)

 Feature PRO 800 4.0 - SIP-C

This feature allows the use of SIP-C cards.

General information

Example of a VirtuoSIS system

The SIP subscriber card for VirtuoSIS allows an integration of SIP devices into your Intercom system.
Use your Commend SIP station or a 3rd-party telephone as normal Intercom device with numerous
Intercom features. The integration of your SIP station is only a few CCT 800 mouse clicks away.
An overview of all available SIP-T functions can be found on page 6.

Restrictions
The following VirtuoSIS Intercom features are not available for SIP devices
 Configuration of SIP devices via CCT 800
 Firmware upgrade
 DSP features (e.g. audio monitoring or microphone-speaker surveillance)

SIP-C licences
To use the full range of functions of the SIP-C subscriber cards, these cards must be licenced in CCT
800. The following SIP-C licences are available:
 L-SIS-SIP-8A: Licence for 8 SIP subscribers, feature level A
 L-SIS-SIP-2B: Licence for 2 SIP subscribers, feature level B
 L-SIS-SIP-8B: Licence for 8 SIP subscribers, feature level B
 L-SIS-SIP-8C: Licence for 8 SIP subscribers, feature level C
 L-SIS-SIP-2D: Licence for 2 SIP subscribers, feature level D

484 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

 L-SIS-SIP-8D: Licence for 8 SIP subscribers, feature level D

For further information about licencing see page 96.

Examples of use
The option to select “Ringing” for incoming calls in VirtuoSIS in combination with early media enables
flexible usage scenarios. See the examples:

Privacy call
Caller Receiver

Intercom Server S3
with VirtuoSIS
Station Station
series id5 series id5

The called station needs to accept an incoming call to establish a conversation.

Call request
Caller Receiver

Intercom Server S3
with VirtuoSIS
Station Station Station
series WS 300 series id5 series EE 900

The calling station gets a calm down message, the status is displayed via pictograms.

3.1/0923 485
SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

Parallel call
Caller Receivers

Customized Solutions
station based on Intercom Server S3
ET 908H with VirtuoSIS
Station
series id5

Station
series id5

Call other stations from one station either via peer-to-peer or via VirtuoSIS.

Preview video
Caller Receiver

Intercom Server S3
with VirtuoSIS
Station
series id5
Station
series od10

Transmit video before answering the call.

Calm down message (Early media)

Caller Receiver

Intercom Server S3
with VirtuoSIS
Station
series id5
Station
series od10

Play a calm down message on the caller until the called station answers.

486 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

Pictograms
Caller Receiver

Intercom Server S3
with VirtuoSIS
Station Station
series WS 300 series id5

Pictogram functions

Tür
Läuten Sprechen AFIL
öffnen

Pictograms signalling conditions to the caller.

NOTE: Callers get the status “on-hold”

 Symphony Control Desk Service feature “on-hold”
 Classic control desk feature “Classic call parking”
From VirtuoSIS version 13.2 SIP-C callers get the status “on-hold” for call requests. Callers with dis-
play will show a visual notification.

Configuration

NOTE: Global SIP settings

For further information about the configuration of the global VirtuoSIS Master settings, see page 464.
These SIP settings apply for all SIP trunks and SIP subscribers of the VirtuoSIS Master.

 ATTENTION: Character set for special characters

CCT 800 automatically recognises the system language and character set being used. To avoid a
misinterpretation of the special characters (e.g. for SIP applications), the desired character set can be
selected in CCT 800 as follows:
1. Go to: VirtuoSIS Master > General Settings
1. In the drop-down list Character Set VirtuoSIS, selected the desired character set.

The following SIP-C settings are available:

V VirtuoSIS

LICENCE L-SIS-11 Feature VirtuoSIS 11.x - Refreshing display text via Remote-Party-ID
Refreshing display text for SIP-C subscribers using the SIP header “Remote Party ID” (e.g. at call
transfer in case of busy or privacy). This function is always active.

Function Description
Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Authentication

J Activate this checkbox if you want to use this SIP account. Related incoming ports are
SIP account enabled
opened (e.g. 5060). By default, the SIP account is disabled.

3.1/0923 487
 SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

User ID In this field, the number of the subcriber is shown.

J In this mandatory field, enter an authentication ID independent of the telephone num-
Authentication ID
ber. This increases the security of your SIP account.
PRO 800

LICENCE
PRO9U
In this mandatory field, enter a password that a SIP device must use to register at the
Password
server 2).
By default, the password is displayed masked with the asterisk “*”. To display the
Show “Password” password in plain text, click the checkbox. Click the checkbox a second time to hide
the password again.
In this field, the MAC (Media Access Control) address can be entered, which is a
MAC Address prerequisite for using the station as a control desk with Symphony Control Desk
Service.
Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Settings
In this drop-down list, the transport protocol for outgoing data packets over the SIP
Protocol
account can be selected.
 SRTP Activate this checkbox to encrypt the transmission of audio data and video data.
In this drop-down list, one of the following authentication types can be selected:
 none: The IP address and the port of the caller are checked and an authentication
after the Invite (during call establishment) is required.
 port: Only the IP address of the caller is checked and an authentication after the
Invite (during call establishment) is required, but the call request also may come
Insecure 1) from another port.
 invite: The IP address and the port of the caller are checked, but an Invite is also
accepted without authentication.
 port + invite: Only the IP address of the caller is checked, the call request also may
come from another port and an Invite is also accepted without authentication.
In this drop-down list, the use of NAT (“Network Address Translation”) can be
selected:
 yes: Force behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581”. Symmetric RTP support is enabled.
 no: Enable behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581” if requested by the remote station.
 NAT Symmetric RTP support is disabled.
 force_rport: Force behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581” and disable symmetric RTP
support.
 comedia: Enable behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581” if the remote side requests it and
enable symmetric RTP support.
In this drop-down list, one of the following transmission protocols for DTMF tones
can be selected:
DTMF Mode
 RFC 2833: Signals are transmitted according to the RFC 2833 protocol.
 SIP Info: Signals are transmitted according to the SIP protocol.
1) Only available up to VirtuoSIS version 8.1.
2)
Details on the characters allowed when assigning passwords see page 516.

488 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Settings

In this field, the interval for the SIP subscriber monitoring via SIP OPTIONS can be
Polltime [s]
changed. The checkbox Polling active must be activated.
Polling active Activate this checkbox to monitor the availability of SIP stations at regular intervals.
Activate this checkbox to send “183 Session Progress” messages at incoming calls.
 Early Media
For more information, see page 479.
In this drop-down list, select how the SIP subscriber reacts to an incoming call. Select
“Ringing” or Auto Answer“. If “Ringing” is selected, go to Subscriber >
V Entitlements > tab Privacy and activate the option Fix as calling station.
VirtuoSIS Incoming call behaviour In addition, go to Subscriber > Station properties > SIP Terminals > tab
LICENCE
L-SIS-11 Settings and in the section Media activate the checkbox Early Media, to play server-
generated audio while ringing; if the checkbox is deactivated, the sip station decides
about audio playback during the ringing phase.
Dial 0 at incoming call Activate this checkbox to dial the button “0” automatically for incoming calls.
Dialplan Add outgoing
Click on this button to add user-specific dial plan lines to the Asterisk dial plan for
and Dialplan Add incom-
outgoing or incoming calls (see page 491).
ing
Volume adjustment Out-
In these drop-down lists, the audio level for outgoing or incoming calls can be
going [dB] and Volume
adjusted.
adjustment Incoming [dB]

Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Video

In this drop-down list the video mode of the respective subscriber is configured.
 Deactivated: The video function is deactivated.
Mode  Camera and Monitor: Incoming and outgoing video stream is activated.
 Camera: Incoming video stream is activated.
 Monitor: Outgoing video stream is activated.
Camera Number 1) In this field, a unique camera number (1 to 9999) must be assigned to the camera.

Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Codecs

Video Codec Here, the video codec used is displayed.
In these drop-down lists, the priority of the audio codecs can be selected that be used
Audio Codec (1 = highest, 5 = lowest). When initiating a call, the device uses the highest priority
codec, which matches a codec from the opposite device.

Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Action Sequences
Activate this checkbox to create a virtual output for the respective subscriber. By
Action sequence 1 – 4 activating the checkbox, the columns “Call number OUT” and “DTMF sequence” are
enabled.
In this field, the call number of the virtual output can be entered, which are treated as
Call number OUT 1 – 4 extended clients (see also “Extended clients” on page 248). This output is listed in
CCT 800 under Outputs > General Settings.
In this field, an individual DTMF sequence consisting of the characters 0 – 9, *, #,
DTMF-Sequence 1 – 4 A – D can be entered. The DTMF sequence may consist of a maximum of 16
characters.
1)To check the assignment, the SIP video camera number used is displayed in the following places in CCT 800:
 Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Video > Column Camera Number or
Interfaces > SIS-SIP- T > Channels > tab Video > Column Camera Number: Here, the camera number
is configured.
 Subscriber > Station properties > Cameras: Here, a line is displayed for each SIP subscriber in
SIP camera mode.

3.1/0923 489
SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

During a conversation, a configured virtual output can be set through a SIP station channel.
An individually configured DTMF sequence can be sent to the respective SIP terminal by switching the
virtual output.

NOTE: Usable call numbers and action sequences

If multiple instances are used, the numbers of the virtual output must be a dialable number.

Example: Transmission of DTMF sequence “1*A” via a SIP-Terminal

The DTMF sequence can be used for various actions on the SIP terminal device.

Example: Transmission of DTMF sequence “1*A” via a SIP-Terminal

Requirements for transmitting the DTMF sequence on a channel:
 There must be an active call connection between the EE 900A Intercom station and the
WS 301V I CM.
 A door opener that actuates virtual output 9999 must be configured for SIP subscriber 1
 Cancel conversation:
 Automatically after door is opened: requires the “Cancel Call” checkbox in the Door Opener
dialogue to be activated and the value in the “After [s]” column to be at least 3 seconds.
 Manually by a call participant: requires the “Cancel Call” checkbox in the Door Opener dialogue
to be deactivated.

1. The EE 900A Intercom station calls Intercom station WS 301V I CM (call number 109).
2. The pre-configured door opener key is pressed on the EE 900A Intercom station.
3. Virtual output 9999 is activated.
4. DTMF sequence “1*A” is transmitted to the WS 301V I CM Intercom station.

490 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

Example of using dial plan SIP-C

NOTE: Adjust dial plans for VirtuoSIS 9.1

Project-specific designed dial plans for SIP-C/SIP-T (incoming/outgoing) calls must be checked for
compatibility and adapted before an update to VirtuoSIS 9.1 is carried out to ensure proper operation.

NOTE: Maximum dial plan length

In CCT 800 project-specific dial plans can be entered.
 Navigate to Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Settings > column
Dialplan.
 In the fields Add outgoing and Add incoming dial plans with up to 30,000 characters can be
entered.

Example 1: Modify display text

In this example, the caller ID for outgoing calls will be modified. For this, carry out the following
configuration:

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals
 In the column Dial plan configuration, click on the button Add outgoing.
 For example, enter the following command:
1,Set(CALLERID(name)=CallerID-OverWrittenOutgoing)

ATTENTION: Priorities
Start with priority “1” only if the volume adjustments are not used (otherwise, start with “n” to
number entries automatically in ascending order)!

 Click on the button Accept.

Dial plan configuration window in CCT 800

Example 2: Add a condition

In this example, the condition for the SIP device “101” is added, which defines that the call will be
accepted and a pre-recorded audio file will be played back automatically until the caller ends the call.
For this, carry out the following configuration:

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Settings
 In the column Dial plan configuration, click on the button Add incoming.
 For example, enter the following command:
1,GotoIf($["${CALLERID(num)}"="101"]?play:dial)

3.1/0923 491
SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

n(play), Answer()
n,Milliwatt()

NOTES: Meaning of the commands

 “play:dial” means that, if the condition is “true”, the audio file will be played back (“play”) or, if
the condition is “false”, the default dial plan will be executed (“dial”).
 In this example, “Milliwatt” is a test tone.

 Click on the button Accept.

492 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

K SIP-Video
Feature VirtuoSIS 9.1 – SIP-Video
With this feature it is possible to use SIP Video. Video codec H.264 is supported from feature
level B.

Camera number
The camera numbers are used to identify the video cameras. To do this, select how SIP video is to be
used in a drop-down list in the tab Video at Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals (for
SIP-C) or Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Channels (for SIP-T). The possible values are “Deactivated”,
“Camera and Monitor”, “Camera” and “Monitor”.

“Camera” or “Camera and Monitor”

If “Camera” or “Camera and Monitor” is selected, the column Camera Number is activated for this sub-
scriber/channel in the tab Video. A camera number that is not yet used in the Intercom system is en-
tered, which is to be used for this subscriber/channel. To check the assignment or to get an overview
of the configuration, the SIP video camera number used is displayed in the following places in CCT 800:
 Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Video > Column Camera Number
 Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Channels > tab Video > Column Camera Number

Subscriber > General > tab Naming > Column Assignment camera number
This area shows which subscriber is using which camera number.
Subscriber > Station properties > Cameras
In addition to the IP cameras already configured, a line is displayed for each SIP subscriber in SIP
camera mode, with SIP subscriber (in I/S-P) and the camera number. All other fields are deactivated.

“Monitor” or “Camera and Monitor”

If the user selects “Monitor” or “Camera and Monitor”, a video function is automatically created in
Subscriber > Video for this subscriber and the column Subscriber > General> tab Naming >
Column Assignment monitor module for this subscriber is deactivated. The video function for a
subscriber who has selected “Monitor” or “Camera and Monitor” for SIP video cannot be deleted.

Changes to existing configuration

If a camera number has already been configured for a SIP client and changes from “Deactivated” or
“Monitor” to “Camera” or “Camera and Monitor” in the drop-down list SIP video, a message box
appears with the following content: “A camera is already assigned to this subscriber. Do you want to
remove this assignment? [Yes No]” By clicking on [Yes], the camera number assignment is deleted and
replaced by the SIP video camera number.

If a video function has already been configured for a SIP client and/or a monitor module is assigned
and the configuration changes to “Monitor” or “Camera and Monitor” in the area SIP Video, a message
box appears with the following content: “A video function is already available for this subscriber. Do
you want to remove it? [Yes No]” By clicking on [Yes], the subscriber’s video function is reset and the
SIP subscriber’s own address is entered in the monitor module assignment.

Video-Codec
The video codec is configured automatically. The video codec is displayed in the following areas:
 Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Codecs
 Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > trunk name > area Media

The following variants can be used to integrate video streams:

3.1/0923 493
SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration

Scheme with Symphony devices

This variant offers the following properties:
 Video is managed by the VirtuoSIS Master.
 Easy configuration of routers/firewalls.
 Use of SIPS and SRTP encryption.

Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > SIP terminals > tab Authentication
 Activate the desired Intercom station in the column SIP Account enabled.
 Select the desired mode in the drop-down list Mode on the tab Video. In the tab Codecs, the
corresponding configuration is shown in the column Video Codec.
 Enter a camera number that is not used in the system yet.

Scheme with Symphony devices

This variant is used when only Symphony devices are operated. The audio stream (blue line) and video
stream H.264 (orange line) are controlled centrally via VirtuoSIS.

Scheme mixing system

This variant is used when Intercom stations are operated with the video codec MJPG or H.264.
The audio stream (blue line) and the H.264 video stream (orange line) are controlled centrally via
VirtuoSIS, whilst the Intercom stations are transmitted directly between the individual microphone
units.

This variant offers the following properties:

 Mixed operation of MJPEG and H.264 video streams.

494 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions

 Gradual migration of existing Intercom solutions according to the Symphony standard is

guaranteed.

Configuration CCT 800

 For further information, see “Video” on page 377.
 For further information, see the product manual “ID5 TD / ID5 TD CM“.

Scheme mixing system

3.1/0923 495
 Symphony Bridge Intercom Server Configuration

Symphony Bridge

B Feature VirtuoSIS 11.x and SYM-BRIDGE – Symphony Cloud

With this feature, connections to Symphony Cloud can be established.
VirtuoSIS

LICENCE SYM-BRIDGE

The advantages of an On-Prem Intercom system can be combined with those of Symphony Cloud via
Symphony Bridge. This enables triggering calls from the On-Prem Intercom server to the cloud as well
as callbacks from the cloud to the On-Prem Intercom server. All communication that takes place
between VirtuoSIS and Symphony Cloud is of course encrypted using the latest standards. For further
information, see symphony.commend.com.

Requirements and restrictions

 For Symphony Bridge, the following Intercom servers can be used as the gateway: VirtuoSIS in a
virtualised environment (e.g. VMware vSphere, Nutanix Acropolis Hypervisor (AHV) or Microsoft
Hyper-V), S3 and S6/S6-R.
 VirtuoSIS must have an Internet connection. Make sure that your firewall is not blocking any of the
ports used. For further information, see page 498 as well as product manual “VirtuoSIS Setup
Guide”.
 The connection to Symphony Cloud is encrypted using certificates. For this purpose, VirtuoSIS must
be synchronised with a valid time (NTP).
 Recommended software/firmware versions:
PRO 800 min. 6.4 Build 3
VirtuoSIS min. 11.1.6
 Connection for gateway to On-Prem Intercom server: NET, LAN, GEV, CNET-W, CNET-E1, S0
 Supported On-Prem Intercom servers: VirtuoSIS, S6, S3, GE800, GE300, G8-IP32, IS300, GE700U
 VirtuoSIS must be licenced with a licence “L-SIS-11”, “L-SIS32-11” or later.
 The licence “L-SYM-BRIDGE” is required.
 All SYM-BRIDGE cards must be configured in the same VirtuoSIS instance. A maximum of 14 cards
can be used.
 The call number of a SYM-BRIDGE channel can only be assigned to one call target or Symphony
Cloud ring group.

NOTES:
 A SYM-BRIDGE channel can be used in several Symphony Cloud ring groups simultaneously.
 A Symphony Bridge can also be used by all Intercom servers networked with VirtuoSIS.

496 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Symphony Bridge

Symphony Bridge connecting to Symphony Cloud

The numbers in the graph show different stages of Symphony Bridge setup steps. Furthermore it
shows versatile networking options of Symphony Cloud with Intercom servers and stations.

Symphony Mobile Client od10 id5

▲ Northbound ▼ Southbound
3 Gateway 1 Trunk 6 On-Prem device

▲ Northbound ▼ Southbound
4 Call targets 5 On-Prem device

2  Gateway claimed

On-Prem device
connected to gateway

On-Prem device connected to On-Prem device connected to

On-Prem Intercom server, On-Prem Intercom server,
networked with gateway networked with gateway

Explanation:
1. Configure trunk 5. Gateway provides On-Prem device properties
2. Claim gateway 6. Add On-Prem devices to ring groups
3. Configure gateway
4. Select Symphony Cloud call targets for the
gateway in CCT 800

3.1/0923 497
Symphony Bridge Intercom Server Configuration

Configuring Symphony Bridge

Setting up the infrastructure

Follow these steps to configure VirtuoSIS to call a station in a Symphony Cloud ring group via a
connection with Symphony Cloud. The following example setup consists of a station and an Intercom
server with VirtuoSIS, which are using SYM-BRIDGE to connect to Symphony Mobile Client via
Symphony Cloud.

Switch Router

Station Symphony Mobile Client

Firewall configuration (IPv4)

Depending on your network topology, all traffic may be blocked by a firewall. Open these ports for
mainly outgoing traffic to Symphony Cloud. The specified port numbers are default values. Other
values can be configured for some of these ports. For further information, see also
https://manuals.commend.com/symphony-cloud/online-help_en-uk.

Restricting firewall rules to specific hostnames is not recommended, as additional hosts can be added
to Symphony Cloud at any time for redundancy and scaling. Therefore, do not infer the firewall rules
from observing the network traffic. Customers whose firewall policy is incompatible with this
procedure may contact Technical Support for assistance.
Intercom server with VirtuoSIS
Ports Ports
Protocol Host(s) Purpose
(local) (remote)
Gathering network
DHCP  68 (UDP)
 67 (UDP) <DHCP service>
configuration
Network name reso-
DNS  dynamic 53 (UDP/TCP) <DNS service>
lution
NTP  dynamic 123 (UDP) pool.ntp.org 1) Time synchronisation
Certificate Revoca-
HTTP  dynamic 80 (TCP) crl.commend.services
tion List
*.commend.services
Claiming and config-
HTTPS/TLS  dynamic 443 (TCP) *.blob.core.windows.net
uration
*.commend.com
*.commend.services
Call signalling
SIPS/TLS  dynamic
 5061 (TCP) *.cloudapp.azure.com
(SIP clients/trunk)
*.trafficmanager.net
*.commend.services
Call signalling
SIPS/TLS  9900 (TCP) dynamic *.cloudapp.azure.com
(SYM-BRIDGE)
*.trafficmanager.net
*.commend.services Call media
SRTP  10000-50000 (UDP)2) 10000-50000 (UDP)
*.cloudapp.azure.com (audio/video)

498 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Symphony Bridge

*.azure-devices-provisioning.net Claiming and

MQTT/TLS  dynamic 8883 (TCP)
*.azure-devices.net configuration
 Incoming connection;  Outgoing connection;   Incoming and outgoing connection
1) The address of the NTP server is configurable.
2)
Ports are configurable; Cloud hosts will return UDP traffic on the same port as the outgoing traffic came in.
This should be used for dynamic firewall rules.

NOTE:
 Configuring even more restrictive firewall rules is possible. In case customers want to implement
this, they can contact Commend technical support for further assistance.

ATTENTION:
 For systems with several instances it is important to take care of unique server IDs.
 For systems with several instances that use a SIP trunk (SIP-T card) or a Symphony Bridge
(SYM-BRIDGE card), the configuration of all instances of a VirtuoSIS master must be received in a
single process (in a single *.cctx file). This will avoid conflicts with the automatic assignment of
IDs.

NOTE:
Do not perform any configuration changes in Symphony Cloud while the update from VirtuoSIS 10
to VirtuoSIS 11 is running.

For further information on setting up a connection between the Intercom server and Symphony Cloud,
see the product manuals “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide” and “VirtuoBRO”.

Network configuration
At the station
Configure IPv4 and, if necessary, IPv6 addresses as well as the DHCP and DNS servers. IoIP-stations
must be configured using IPStationConfig. For further information, see page 132. For Symphony MX
devices, see the respective product manual for the Symphony MX device, for Symphony BF devices,
see the product manual “Symphony BF”. If a third-party SIP phone is used, refer to the relevant product
manual.
At the Intercom server
Assign at least an IP address and the DNS server and the NTP server must be configured. The
configuration can be carried out via VirtuoBRO or using the console. For further information, see the
product manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.

NOTE:
VirtuoBRO provides tools for troubleshooting Intercom server connectivity. The function
Symphony Cloud Network Check checks various aspects of the connection and displays results
in a clearly arranged manner. For further information, see the product manual “VirtuoBRO”.

In Symphony Cloud web portal

A Symphony Cloud web portal account is required to connect the Intercom server. For further
information, see https://commend.services and https://manuals.commend.com/symphony-cloud/
online-help_en-uk.

Connect the Intercom station to the Intercom server

At the Intercom server
 Establish a connection with CCT 800 to the Intercom server. For further information, see page 74.
 Receive the Intercom server configuration. For further information, see page 82.
 Licence the Intercom server and the SIP-C subscriber card. For further information, see page 96.
 Navigate to Intercom Server > Cards.

3.1/0923 499
Symphony Bridge Intercom Server Configuration

 Select a SIP-C subscriber card for a free slot.

 Load the licence of the subscriber card.
 Configure the stations connected to the SIP-C subscriber card. For further information, see page 484.
 Send the Intercom server configuration.
At the station
IoIP stations, Symphony MX devices, Symphony BF devices or a SIP-compatible telephone of a
third-party vendor can be connected to the Intercom server. IoIP-stations must be configured using
IPStationConfig. For further information, see page 132. For Symphony MX devices, see the respective
product manual for the Symphony MX device, for Symphony BF devices, see the product manual
“Symphony BF”. If a third-party SIP phone is used, refer to the relevant product manual.

Checking the connection status of the station via VirtuoBRO

 Start VirtuoBRO
 Connect to the Intercom server.
 Navigate to stations. If the call station is successfully connected, this is indicated in the column
Status with the status “Connected”. For further information, see the product manual of the station
and the product manual “VirtuoBRO”.

Connect the On-Prem-Intercom server to Symphony Cloud

For the steps in VirtuoBRO and your Symphony Cloud account, follow the instructions in the product
manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide“ and the product manual “VirtuoBRO“.

Connecting to Symphony Bridge

In Symphony Cloud web portal
 Log in to Symphony Cloud web portal
 Navigate to Configuration > VoIP TRUNKS to the tab “Trunks”.
 Click the button Add VoIP Trunk.
 Click the button VirtuoSIS Trunk.
 Enter a name for the VirtuoSIS trunk. Then a claiming code is displayed on the right side area of the
window. Click the button Copy to copy the claiming code to the clipboard. It is also sent to the
configured email address.
At the Intercom server

NOTES:
 Only one trunk can be used with one VirtuoSIS master.
 When the first SYM-BRIDGE card has been set up in a VirtuoSIS master, its configuration settings
become available in CCT 800.
 For all SYM-BRIDGE cards, slots in the same VirtuoSIS instance must be selected.

 Establish a connection with CCT 800 to the Intercom server. For further information, see page 74.
 Receive the Intercom server configuration. For further information, see page 82.
 Navigate to Intercom Server > Cards.
 Select a SYM-BRIDGE interface card in a free slot. For further information, see page 113.
 Licence the SYM-BRIDGE interface card. For further information, see page 96.
 Send the Intercom server configuration.
 Navigate to Interfaces > SYM-BRIDGE > Bridges > #.

500 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Symphony Bridge

 Enter the claiming code from your Symphony Cloud account in the field Claiming code.

NOTE: Validity of the claiming code

 The validity period of the claiming code is limited. However, you can request a new claiming code
at any time in your Symphony Cloud account.
 A claiming code can only be used once.

 Click the button Claim VirtuoSIS. A green check mark next to the button Claim VirtuoSIS indicates
that the process was successful.

ATTENTION: Backup after successful claiming is mandatory

After the one-time claiming process has been carried out and the Intercom server has been granted
permission to connect to the relevant Symphony Cloud account, a backup of the Intercom server
configuration is essential in order to be able to perform a recovery if necessary. A description of
this process can be found in the product manual “VirtuoBRO”.

 Configure the use of Network Address Translation in the field NAT:

 yes: Force behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581”. Symmetric RTP support is enabled.
 no: Enable behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581” if requested by the remote station. Symmetric RTP
support is disabled.
 force_rport: Force behaviour according to “RFC 3581” and disable symmetric RTP support.
 comedia: Enable behaviour according to “RFC 3581” if the remote side requests it and enable
symmetric RTP support.
When choosing “yes“, “force_rport“ or “comedia“, Comfort Noise packets open the connection
through NAT or a firewall, to enable RTP data traffic. The procedure complies to RFC 3389.
 In the Caller-ID IS-Block input field, enter the block number of the Intercom server networked via LAN
in order to transmit display texts from devices of connected Intercom servers in the direction of SYM-
BRIDGE. A correct block configuration is essential. For further information, see page 421.
With default value (“00”) set, the display text if calling over a SIS-LAN-connection is the channel text.
To read the channel text, navigate to Interfaces > SYM-BRIDGE > Channels > column
Description.

Checking the Symphony Bridge connection status

At the Intercom server
 To check the current status of your SYM-BRIDGE, make sure the connection to your Intercom server
works. For further information, see page 74.
 Navigate to Interfaces > SYM-BRIDGE > Bridges > Trunk.
 Click the button Update Status. The display at Symphony Bridge Status Information, which displays
the connection status between the Intercom server and Symphony Cloud is updated. The diagram
shows the status of two connection types:
 IoT: Indicates the status of your connection for data exchange with Symphony Cloud (Internet of
Things).
 SIP: Indicates the status of your SIP connection.
Initially, both fields show . In the event of an error you will see . Both connections are operational
when they are marked with . In case of an error, hover over it with the mouse pointer, and an error
message will be displayed:
 Error 19: Check the TCP-connection to your Intercom server. For further information, see page 74.
 Error 24: Check the password entered and try again. For further information, see page 53.

There are more error codes which may be helpful for technical support with finding issues.

NOTE:
The button Update Status updates all fields displaying the status of the connection to Symphony
Cloud, e.g. display of Symphony Cloud ring groups in Interfaces > SYM-BRIDGE > Channels,
column Call Target.

3.1/0923 501
Symphony Bridge Intercom Server Configuration

NOTE:
Values highlighted in red in the column Call Target indicate that the Symphony Cloud contact has
been removed from the Symphony Cloud configuration. In this case, the ID is displayed instead of
the display name and the cell background turns red. Solve this manually by adding the Symphony
Cloud contact again or deleting it.

NOTE:
Updating the status with the Update Status button can take a few minutes.

In Symphony Cloud web portal

 Navigate to Configuration > DEVICES.
 The previously created trunk is shown in the list, complemented with the term Gateway.

502 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Symphony Bridge

Call destinations between the On-Prem-Intercom server and

Symphony Cloud

B Feature VirtuoSIS 11.x and SYM-BRIDGE – Symphony Cloud

With this feature, On-Prem devices can be used with Symphony Cloud.
VirtuoSIS

LICENCE SYM-BRIDGE

Stations and their properties are displayed in Symphony Mobile Client and can be called directly.

Switch Router

Symphony MX Symphony Mobile Client

device

Virtual representation of the On-Prem devices

in the Symphony Cloud Plattform

Ring group with mobile phones

On-Prem devices (both Android and iOS mobile
connected to the devices) and On-Prem devices
gateway connected to the gateway

On-Prem devices connected to the gateway

are represented in the Symphony Cloud Plattform as
virtual devices, to make them cloud-enabled

NOTE:
These subscribers, which are reachable via VirtuoSIS, are provided to Symphony Cloud as call
targets:
 SIS-SIP-C
 SIS-IP
 Gx-IP
 Gx-GED
 Gx-GET
 Gx-AUD
 Gx-TEL
 Gx-TEL4

NOTE: Uploading the configuration data to Symphony Cloud

Configuration data of On-Prem devices from the gateway are sent to Symphony Cloud when the
following events occur:
 After claiming of a VirtuoSIS trunk.
 After sending a configuration by CCT 800.
 After a restart of the VirtuoSIS master.
Store the passwords of networked VirtuoSIS Intercom servers in the secure password storage of
the claimed VirtuoSIS, to enable uploading of the configuration to Symphony Cloud. For further
information, see the product manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.

3.1/0923 503
Symphony Bridge Intercom Server Configuration

Configuring call targets

In Symphony Mobile Client
Symphony Mobile Client is available for Android and iOS mobile devices and enables the use of the
SYM-BRIDGE functionality on the mobile device.
 Install Symphony Mobile Client from Google Play Store or Apple App Store.
 Navigate to Configuration > DEVICES in Symphony Cloud web portal.
 Click the button .
 In the dialogue, click on the button Add placeholder device. An input field opens.
 Assign a name and click the button Add placeholder device.
 Select the placeholder device just created in the list. A new dialogue with several tabs opens in the
right-hand area.
 Open Symphony Mobile Client and tap the button Scan QR Code. A preview of the camera image is
displayed.
 In the tab Overview scan the QR code via Symphony Mobile Client to claim the device. The process
may take a few seconds.

NOTE:
Symphony Mobile Client can only be claimed in a single Symphony Cloud account at a time. In case
Symphony Mobile Client has already been claimed, it must be removed from that account first
before it can be claimed again.

To be able to communicate with a cloud call target it must be assigned to a Symphony Cloud ring group
together with the claimed VirtuoSIS Master (gateway) in the Symphony Cloud account under
Configuration > Ring Groups. For further information, see the Online Help.

NOTE:
A VirtuoSIS VoIP trunk can be used in several Symphony Cloud ring groups at the same time.

Configuring ring groups

Symphony Cloud ring groups enable the assignment of Symphony Cloud contacts and are used to
manage permissions. They can be set up in Symphony Cloud web portal.
 Claimed

od5

Receiving station
 Member of ring group A
or
Door station
 Call button to ring group A

Ring group A with Symphony Cloud contacts

Call button at station

calls ring group

Ring group B with Symphony Cloud contacts

504 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Symphony Bridge

To allow calls from VirtuoSIS to Symphony Cloud and vice versa, set up a configuration like this:
Calls in
both directions

 Claimed  Claimed  Claimed  Claimed

Receiving station
 Member of ring group
„Mobiles A“
or
Door station
 Button to ring group
Gateway Symphony Cloud On-Prem device Symphony Cloud „Mobiles A“
contacts connected contacts
to gateway

Symphony Cloud ring group „General permission“ Symphony Cloud ring group „Contacts“
enables calls initiated through VirtuoSIS (mandatory) enables calls initiated by Symphony Cloud contacts (assigns contacts)

Symphony Cloud ring groups are used to manage permissions for calls to Symphony Cloud.

 The Symphony Cloud ring group General Permission contains the trunk (whose designation
contains the supplement Gateway) as well as the Symphony Cloud contacts. The Symphony Cloud
contacts are getting permission to establish calls using the trunk.
 Assigned to the Symphony Cloud ring group Contacts are the VirtuoSIS devices and the Symphony
Cloud contacts, which should be enabled to call each other. By adding them to this Symphony Cloud
ring group, the contacts are displayed in the contact list of Symphony Mobile Client.
In Symphony Cloud web portal
Connect the stations to the Intercom server available for calls of Symphony Cloud:
 Navigate to Configuration > RING GROUPS.
 Click the button Add ring group.
 Enter a name for the Symphony Cloud ring group and confirm. The new Symphony Cloud ring group
appears in the list.
 Include cloud stations in the newly created Symphony Cloud ring group by clicking on the newly
created ring group. A new dialogue with several tabs opens in the right-hand area.
 Click the Devices tab.
 Click on the button to open the dialogue for adding a device. The list of available devices is
displayed in a newly opened popup.
 Select the VirtuoSIS trunk.
 Add further call destinations to the VirtuoSIS trunk that should be accessible via SYM-BRIDGE.
At the Intercom server
The cloud stations of the Symphony Cloud ring group are assigned as call destinations to the Intercom
server with the following steps:
 Establish a connection with CCT 800 to the Intercom server. For further information, see page 74.
 Receive the Intercom server configuration. For further information, see page 82.
 Navigate to the tab Interfaces > SYM-BRIDGE > Channels > Common > tab General.
 In the drop-down list Call Target for the number of the SYM-BRIDGE channel, select the cloud station
that is to be used for calls.
 Either an individual Symphony Cloud contact can be selected here. Individual Symphony Cloud
contacts are distinguished by the prefix “Device”. The list is sorted in alphabetical order.
 Or an entire Symphony Cloud ring group is selected, if a call to the respective number of the SYM-
BRIDGE channel is to be routed to all of the Symphony Cloud ring groups cloud stations.
Symphony Cloud ring group entries are distinguished by the prefix “Ring Group:”. The list is
sorted in alphabetical order.
 Cloud stations of the type door station that ring to the same Symphony Cloud ring group can also
be selected.

3.1/0923 505
Symphony Bridge Intercom Server Configuration

 The default value “incoming call” dedicates the channel for use in calls from Symphony Cloud to
call targets on the Intercom server to avoid busy situations.

GOOD TO KNOW: Searching for a call target

To search for a call target in the field Call Target, proceed as follows:
 Double-click on the field Call Target to be able to edit the text in the field. The content is then
marked and can be overwritten.
 If you are searching for a device, start the entry with “Device:”; if you are searching for a ring
group, start the entry with “Ring Group:”.
 Continue typing and enter the first letters of the name of the device or the ring group. The name
is automatically completed as you type.
 Accept the suggested name with Enter or discard the entry with Esc.

NOTES:
 Make sure to maintain a balanced ratio between channels that are reserved for incoming calls
(incoming) and those that are assigned to Symphony Cloud contacts (outgoing).
 If all channels are set to Symphony Cloud contacts (used outgoing), then the first channel in idle is
used for the incoming call. This may lead to a busy situation for the assigned Symphony Cloud
contact.
 Check the ratio by navigating to Interfaces > SYM-BRIDGE > Bridges. See the column Channel
usage (outgoing / incoming).
 SYM-BRIDGE channels have to share the same configuration (e.g. video), since incoming calls can
use channels set to “incoming call”. For further information, see the note on page 509.

Defining the names, which are used to display the stations in Symphony Cloud contact lists.
 Navigate to Subscriber > General.
 In the field Description enter the identification for Symphony Cloud.
 in the field Display text EE 811A & Camera enter the identification for Symphony Mobile Client.
 Send the Intercom server configuration. Calls from the Intercom server can now be received by
devices in Symphony Cloud.

506 3.1/0923
 Intercom Server Configuration Symphony Bridge

Examples of use Symphony Bridge

Group Ringing for SIP-C, SIP-T and SYM-BRIDGE

B Feature VirtuoSIS 11.x and SYM-BRIDGE – Symphony Cloud

 With this feature, SIP stations can act as receivers for Group Ringing. IoIP devices and SIP devices
VirtuoSIS
can be combined in a group.
LICENCE SYM-BRIDGE

From VirtuoSIS 11.1 VirtuoSIS supports the feature Group Ringing for SIP-C, SIP-T and SYM-BRIDGE.
For further information about Group Ringing, see page 319.
Groups configured Ring groups configured in
in VirtuoSIS Symphony Cloud

1
Call transfer after
10 seconds

Stations Stations Symphony Mobile

with SIP with IoIP Client
technology technology
Symphony Bridge
channel 112
2

Stations Stations Symphony Cloud

with SIP with IoIP Symphony Mobile
technology technology Client

Door station 3

Stations Stations
with SIP with IoIP Symphony Mobile
technology technology Client

Configuration
At the Intercom server
 Add subscribers to groups. Navigate to Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls / Zones.
 For the receivers assign subscribers in the fields Group 0 to Group 89. For further information, see
page 271.
 Configure Direct dialling for the initiator. Navigate to Subscriber > Direct dialling.
 In the field Direct dialling enter the group number preceded with code 0=98, e.g. 0=9801, if key 0
should initiate a call to group 01. For further information, see page 271.
 Configure a door opener for the initiator. For further information, see page 316.
 Configure call transfer. For further information, see page 320.

3.1/0923 507
Symphony Bridge Intercom Server Configuration

Door opener
To receive a direct call including door opening from a station with Symphony Mobile Client, carry out
the following steps. The example explains them using a station series WS 300 and WS 200.

Switch Router

Symphony MX Symphony Mobile Client

device

Each call button on a

subscriber calls a certain
mobile device, on which Ring group with mobile phones
the Symphony Mobile (both Android and iOS mobile
Client is installed. devices)

Call button on subscriber calls

ring group from two mobile phones
on which the Symphony Mobile Client
is installed.

Preparations
On the entire system
Perform the steps for basic configuration. For further information, see page 498.

Configuration for Symphony MX devices (WS 300)

 Configure door opening and feedback in the web interface of the stations Activity settings.
 Door opening: Create an activity that reacts to the trigger “DTMF Tone received”, DTMF Tone 1.
 Feedback: Set the value of Action to Send DTMF Tone, DTMF Tone 2.
 For further information, see the respective product manual for the Symphony MX device.

Configuration for classic series stations (WS 200)

At the Intercom server
 Establish a connection with CCT 800 to the Intercom server. For further information, see page 74.
 Receive the Intercom server configuration. For further information, see page 82.
 Assign Symphony Cloud call targets to SYM-BRIDGE channels. For further information, see
page 503.
 Configure direct dialling for those SYM-BRIDGE channels, that are assigned to cloud call
destinations. For further information, see page 212.
 Configure a door opener for the station. For further information, see page 316.
 Configure the response for successful door-opening. To do this, navigate to Intercom Server >
Cards.
 Add a SIS-8E8A card to any slot to get 8 virtual inputs and the 8 virtual outputs.
 Navigate to Inputs > General Settings.
 Enter a name for the input in the field Description.
 Navigate to Outputs > General Settings.
 In the line of the output to be used for the column Input, link the configured door opener input for
submitting the response.

508 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Symphony Bridge

 Configure the ICX message. Navigate to Inputs > ICX at Input and select the door opener from the
tree stucture.
 For the status Short, enter the values for the ICX message that sends the DTMF tone 2: Task 60, Type
8A and Data consisting of the number to be called (four digits, fill up empty spaces from the left with
F) followed by 02. The ICX message sent is equivalent to 004000 TTTT 0002 8A in the short message
format or 006000 8A TTTT 02 in the long message format (where TTTT is the number to be called).
For further information, see the product manual “ICX Protocol”.
 Send the Intercom server configuration.

Video
To receive a call including door opening from a station with video by the Symphony Mobile Client, carry
out these steps. The example explains the configuration using a Symphony MX device.

Switch Router

Symphony MX Symphony Mobile Client

device

Each call button on a

subscriber calls a certain
mobile device, on which Ring group with mobile phones
the Symphony Mobile (both Android and iOS mobile
Client is installed. devices)

Call button on subscriber calls

ring group from two mobile phones
on which the Symphony Mobile Client
is installed.

Preparations
On the entire system
Perform the steps for setting up the infrastructure. For further information, see page 498.

Configuration
At the station

NOTE:
The station must not be claimed in Symphony Cloud for the following configuration steps.
A claimed station can be removed from Symphony Cloud again by clicking the button trash can in
the menu DEVICES.

 Establish a connection with CCT 800 to the Intercom server. For further information, see page 74.
 Receive the Intercom server configuration. For further information, see page 82.
 Navigate to Interfaces > SYM-BRIDGE > Channels > tab Common.
 The list of SYM-BRIDGE channels with their assigned call destinations is displayed.

3.1/0923 509
Symphony Bridge Intercom Server Configuration

 Read the value from the column Call Number / Channel of the desired call destination, which is
displayed in the column Call Target. This is used in the next step as the call number of the contact
to be created.

NOTE:
Perform the following steps in order to enable Symphony Cloud contacts to receive video. These
settings are also recommended for SYM-BRIDGE channels, which are reserved for incoming calls:
 Navigate to Interfaces > SYM-BRIDGE > Channels > tab Video.
 Set Mode to “Camera and Monitor”.
 Enter a unique camera number (1-9999) in the field Camera Number. It is possible to just copy
the content of the column Call Number to the column Camera Number in order to conveniently
create unique entries.

 Open the configuration interface of the station using Commend Set-UP or log into the web interface.
For further information, see the respective product manual for the Symphony MX device.
 Create a contact with the call number of the SYM-BRIDGE channel. For further information, see the
respective product manual for the Symphony MX device.
 Configure feedback for successful door opening. Make sure that the video function is activated. In
the web interface of the station switch to SIP > Advanced Settings.
 In the SIP Servers section select the server. Connection details are displayed.
 Activate the switch Video enabled.
 Perform additional configurations as desired. For further information, see the respective product
manual for the Symphony MX device.
At the Intercom server
 Establish a connection with CCT 800 to the Intercom server. For further information, see page 74.
 Receive the Intercom server configuration. For further information, see page 82.
 Configure a door opener for the station. For further information, see page 316.
 Configure DTMF pass-through. Navigate to the newly created door opener entry.
 Make sure that the value 1 is selected in the field Button.
 Configure a door opener for the SYM-BRIDGE channel which is used to reach the Symphony Mobile
Client. For further information, see page 316.
 Configure DTMF pass-through. Navigate to the newly created door opener entry.
 Make sure that the value 2 is selected in the field Button.
 Activate Video. Navigate to Interfaces > SYM-BRIDGE > Channels > Video tab.
 In the drop-down list Mode for the SYM-BRIDGE channel number, select the option “Monitor”.
 Navigate to Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Video.
 In the dropdown-list Mode of the call number, select the option “Camera”.
 In the field Camera Number, enter a unique camera number (1-9999).

NOTE:
Copy the column Call Number to the column Camera Number, to quickly assign unique camera
numbers.

 Send the Intercom server configuration.

 Video streams can now be transmitted via Symphony Bridge.

510 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Symphony Bridge

Forwarding parallel calls to an On-Prem control desk to Sympho-

ny Cloud
Calls in the queue of an On-Prem control desk can be forwarded to Symphony Cloud contacts.
The example explains the configuration using stations series WS 300 as callers and a station series id5
as control desk, which forwards its calls.

id5
(role: control desk)

Switch Router

Symphony Mobile Client

Symphony MX
device
(role: caller)

Mobile phones with

Symphony Mobile Client
(both Android and iOS
mobile devices)
The On-Prem control desk queues incoming
calls to forward them to a SYM-BRIDGE channel.

Preparations
On the entire system
Perform the steps for setting up the infrastructure. For further information, see page 498.

Configuration
At the stations

NOTE:
The station must not be claimed in Symphony Cloud for the following configuration steps.
A claimed station can be removed from Symphony Cloud again by clicking the button trash can in
the menu DEVICES.

 Open the configuration interface of the station using Commend Set-UP or log into the web interface.
For further information, see the respective product manual for the Symphony MX device.
 Create a contact for the control desk. For further information, see the respective product manual for
the Symphony MX device.
 Configure a button so that it calls the contact. For further information, see the respective product
manual for the Symphony MX device.

3.1/0923 511
Symphony Bridge Intercom Server Configuration

 Repeat the last step for all calling stations.

At the Intercom server
 Establish a connection with CCT 800 to the Intercom server. For further information, see page 74.
 Receive the Intercom server configuration. For further information, see page 82.
 Add the control desk function. For further information, see page 332.

NOTE:
In order to receive a notification in case of connection issues to Symphony Cloud, perform the
following steps:
 Navigate to Subscriber > Line monitoring > tab Line monitoring.
 Activate the checkbox Line monitoring for one of the SYM-BRIDGE channels.
 Navigate to Subscriber > Call Request > tab Trigger.
 Right click a SYM-BRIDGE channel and select Add Call Request. CCT 800 displays the tab
Parameter and the checkbox Line monitoring gets accessible.
 Activate the checkbox Line monitoring.
 Navigate to Subscriber > Call Request > Station > tab Control Desks.
 Right click and choose an entry from the menu Add Control Desk.

 Configure a call request. Navigate to Subscriber > Call Request > tab Trigger.
 Right click the calling station and select Add Call Request. In the navigation a new submenu appears.
 Set the Trigger key values to configure key functions.
 Navigate to Subscriber > Call Request > subfolder Station.
 Select Add Control Desk from the context menu and choose the control desk which should be called.
 Navigate to Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter.
 Tick the checkbox Call transfer direct dialling for the calling station.
 Repeat these steps for all calling stations.
 Configure a call transfer for the control desk. Navigate to Subscriber > Control Desks > subfolder
control desk > Call transfer.
 Set the value for Group to “3”, the Function to “Call transfer direct dialling” and the Parameter call
number to “0”. For further information, see page 354.
 Navigate to Subscriber > Direct dialling.
 Configure direct dialling for the calling stations to the control desk. Enter an “=” in the field Direct
dialling and add the “0” to the left and the number of the SYM-BRIDGE channel to the right,
e.g. “0=2097“. For further information, see page 212.

512 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Symphony Bridge

Automatic SYM-BRIDGE channel selection

If a SYM-BRIDGE channel is busy, calls can be forwarded in series over other SYM-BRIDGE channels
to reach the Symphony Cloud contacts. The example explains the configuration using stations series
Symphony MX.

Switch Router

Symphony MX
device Symphony Mobile Client

1
Each call button on 2
an intercom station calls
a SYM-BRIDGE channel. Ring group with
If that channel is in use, mobile phones
a different channel is chosen (both Android
and iOS mobile devices)
on two SYM-BRIDGE
channels

NOTE:
If a call has been directed to a Symphony Cloud contact, it can not be retracted to the Intercom server
and its stations.

Preparations
On the entire system
Perform the steps for setting up the infrastructure. For further information, see page 498.

Configuration
At the station

NOTE:
The station must not be claimed in Symphony Cloud for the following configuration steps. A
claimed station can be removed from Symphony Cloud again by clicking the button trash can in
the menu DEVICES.

 Open the configuration interface of the station using Commend Set-UP or log into the web interface.
For further information, see the respective product manual for the Symphony MX device.
 Create a contact with the call number of the SYM-BRIDGE channel, which provides connection to the
Symphony Cloud contacts. For further information, see the respective product manual for the
Symphony MX device.
 Repeat the last step for all calling stations.
In Symphony Cloud web portal
 Navigate to RING GROUPS.
 Click the button Add ring group.
 Enter a name for the Symphony Cloud ring group and confirm. The new Symphony Cloud ring group
appears in the list.
 Click on the newly created ring group to add cloud stations. A new dialogue with several tabs opens
in the right-hand area.

3.1/0923 513
Symphony Bridge Intercom Server Configuration

 Click the Devices tab.

 Click on the button + to open the dialogue for adding a device. The list of available devices is
displayed in a newly opened popup.
 Select and add the VirtuoSIS trunk.
 Repeat the last two steps for all Symphony Cloud contacts.

At the Intercom server

 Establish a connection with CCT 800 to the Intercom server. For further information, see page 74.
 Receive the Intercom server configuration. For further information, see page 82.
 Navigate to Interfaces > SYM-BRIDGE > Channels.
 Select the Symphony Cloud ring group in the column Call Target for at least two SYM-BRIDGE
channels.
 Navigate to Subscriber > General > tab Naming.
 Enter the call number of the the next SYM-BRIDGE channel in the secretary chain in the field
Secretary number of the SYM-BRIDGE channels.
 Enter the timeout in seconds after which the call will be transferred in the field Secretary waiting
time when busy [s] of the subscriber.

NOTE:
To configure the busy tone, either
 navigate to Subscriber > Signal Tones - DSP-Stations and select an option in the column Busy
tone or
 navigate to Intercom Server - Block XX > General and select a music channel in the field busy
under Waiting signals. For further information, see page 206, page 398 and page 287.

 In the field Secretary Description the description of the secretary station will be displayed, which is
entered in the field Secretary Number. The description can be changed in the field Description.
 Repeat the last three steps for all SYM-BRIDGE channels of the secretary chain.

NOTE:
Enter the first SYM-BRIDGE channels calling number in the field Secretary number of the last
SYM-BRIDGE channel to close the loop.

 Navigate to Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Talk into, Priority call, call transfer, Recall
request.
 Activate the field Call transfer as calling station for all calling stations.
 Activate the fields Call transfer as calling station and Call transfer as called station for all
SYM-BRIDGE channels of the secretary chain.
 Send the Intercom server configuration.

514 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Symphony Bridge

Forwarding parallel calls to an On-Prem control desk to Sympho-

ny Cloud with automatic SYM-BRIDGE channel selection
To avoid situations where the line is busy, further SYM-BRIDGE channels can be added. The previous
example, “Automatic SYM-BRIDGE channel selection” on page 513 is supplemented by the configura-
tion for a secretary chain, which automatically selects a free SYM-BRIDGE channel.

1
2
Mobile phones with
Symphony Mobile
Client (both Android
If a SYM-BRIDGE channel is busy, and iOS mobile devices)
the next free channel is automatically
chosen to forward the call.

Each call button on an intercom

station calls the On-Prem control desk, which
holds them in a waiting queue.

Preparations
On the entire system
Perform the steps for forwarding parallel calls that arrive at the control desk to Symphony Cloud. For
further information, see page 511.

Configuration
Perform the steps for the Intercom server configuration for a secretary chain. For further information,
see page 513.

3.1/0923 515
IT security Intercom Server Configuration

IT security
As a provider of security-specific solutions, Commend has a tradition of passionate commitment to
security, both physical and digital. We are acutely aware of what is at stake, as users depend – and in
extreme cases even stake their lives – on the reliability of our systems. Where cyber security is
concerned, we make every effort to ensure cyber security best practices in the design, production and
rigorous testing of every component to rule out exploitable vulnerabilities as much as possible.
The following sections describe configuration steps required to maintain cyber security.

Password management
Using a secure password is essential to ensure basic-level protection and to prevent unauthorised
access. For this reason, ensure that you change the default password for each Commend system device
before using it for the first time. The password must comply with your company’s IT security policy and
related requirements. A good rule of thumb for a secure password is “length before complexity”.
A password should meet the following requirements:
 A minimum of 8 characters
 A mix of numbers, symbols (if applicable) and uppercase and lowercase letters
 Password should not include user names or dictionary words

A password generator can help you to generate randomised secure passwords. Online services are
available that allow you to check how often a particular password is being used, and if it complies with
security standards.

Another way to ensure a maximum of security is to change the password regularly. This is especially
important for passwords that are used on a daily basis.
Recommendation: Use a dedicated software tool for managing your passwords.

Password rules
Several functions of the VirtuoSIS intercom server can be password-protected to prevent unauthorised
use. These rules apply for assigning passwords. For configuration details, follow the links below:
Access
User account in Linux / VirtuoSIS, see page 93 All UTF-8 characters, max. length: 64.
User account management in CCT 800, see page 34 All ASCII characters, max. length: 35.

Configuration
IP connection to Intercom server, see page 74 All ASCII characters, max. length: 8.
ASCII characters 0-9, a-z, A-Z and special
Intercom server configuration, see page 53
characters (except: <, > und ´), max. length: 64.
IP station configuration, see page 142 All UTF-8 characters, max. length: 126.

Interfaces
SIP subscriber (SIP-C), see page 487 All UTF-8 characters.
All UTF-8 characters, max. length: 64.
SIP trunk (SIP-T), see page 469 (Telephone Settings and Auto Dialler mode: 0-9. #,
T; max. length: 4)

516 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration IT security

Ports
In order to be able to transport user data such as audio and video, some ports of the Commend
Intercom systems must be enabled for network traffic. However, the number of enabled ports should
be reduced to an absolute minimum.

Used ports on GE300, GE800 and IS300 Intercom Servers

The following applications or configurations require unlocked ports:
 CCT 800
 ICX
 IoIP participants
 LAN / WAN network connections
 NTP / SNTP client
 RTP / RTCP streaming for recording
 SNMP / GET
 SNMP / TRAPS

For ports used by VirtuoSIS, see the product manual ”VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”: VirtuoSIS Ports.

Certificates
Public-key certificates provide security for data transmission between SIP clients, SIP trunks and serv-
ers. As a result, SIP data packages are transported encrypted via the network protocol TLS. By activat-
ing SRTP, also sensitive audio data can be transported encrypted.
The following information is included in X.509 certificates:
 Explicit name of the issuer
 Explicit name of the owner
 Period of validity from-to
 Length of the public key

3.1/0923 517
IT security Intercom Server Configuration

 Encryption algorithm RSA

Schematic illustration for encryption using certificates

GOOD TO KNOW: Naming of certificates

Commend recommends unique names for certificates, for example:
 Host certificates: “hostname_serial-number.pem”
 CAs: “issuer_usecase.crt”

GOOD TO KNOW: Determining the encryption algorithm to use

 VirtuoSIS supports state-of-the-art key lengths and encryption algorithms.
 About determining the supported encryption algorithms in VirtuoSIS, see the chapter “Asterisk CLI”
in manual “VirtuBRO”.
 Commend recommends to use elliptic curve encryption.
 For possible maximum key lengths for subscribers, see the manuals “Symphony BF” and “Sym-
phony MX”.

GOOD TO KNOW: Client certificate verification

If the client certificate verification is enabled for SIP, the certificate of SIP subscribers is checked by
VirtuoSIS when a SIP subscriber registers using TLS. This certificate verification validates the chain of
trust but does not verify the Common Name (CN) and the Subject Alternative Name (SAN) in the X.509
certificate of the subscriber.

To activate TLS and import certificates, see page 465. The instructions how to import a certificate for a
SIP client can be found in the respective product manual.

518 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

Appendix

Station tests
The station tests are started as follows:
 Keep button F pressed.
 Press the button for the desired test (e.g. 1 for test “1”).
 Release button F.
 Release the button for the test.
Each test is cancelled by pressing the button X.

Station tests for stations with dot-matrix display

 Test 1 (display test): A test picture appears in the display (slanting lines).
 Test 2 (button test): “DIAGNOSTIC Keyboard” and the button which is pressed at the Intercom
station is indicated in the display.
 Test 6 (only with DSP 800 stations; test for line errors): “DIAGNOSTIC Communication” and a
number is indicated (counts upward every 10000 error free messages, max. 99).
 Test 7 (line quality): “DIAGNOSTIC Levelmeter” and a dB value is indicated in the display. Activate
this test during a conversation to display the microphone level at the called station.
 Test 8 (test tone): During conversations or music reception, a test tone is output from the
loudspeaker. If a conversation to this station is built-up and the T button is pressed, the test tone is
output via the microphone, which means it is audible at the conversation partner. DSP software min.
3.0 required.
 Test 9 (ambient volume measurement): In the display “DIAGNOSTIC Soundlevel” and the sound
pressure in dB is displayed. DSP software min. 3.0 required.

ATTENTION:
The station tests not mentioned here are for internal purposes only! Do not activate them. They can
affect the behaviour of the station!

Station tests for 4-wire stations EE 411

 Test 1 (display test with “888888”): With this test the display can be tested.
 Test 2 (dialling test): With this test the dialling of the station can be queried.
 Test 3 (input/output test): The 4 digits show the status of the station internal inputs and outputs
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active, order: IN1, IN2, OUT1, OUT2 from the right to the left).
 Test 4 (display test with all segments): With this test all segments of the display are switched on, so
that possible defects of the display can be diagnosed.
 Test 5 (indication software version / station type): *V02.0* means: station software version 02.0.

Station tests for 2-wire stations EE 311A

The tests 1 to 5 are like the tests of a station EE411:
 Test 8 (test tone): During conversations or music reception, a test tone is output from the
loudspeaker. If a conversation to this station is built-up and the T button is pressed, the test tone is
output via the microphone, which means it is audible at the conversation partner. DSP software min.
V3.0 required.
 Test 9 (ambient volume measurement): In the display “T9:” and the sound pressure in dB is
displayed. DSP software min. V3.0 required.

3.1/0923 519
Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

Restriction of audio blocks for IP subscriber cards

Each IP subscriber card has a maximum of 16 audio blocks (independent of the card type), which will
be distributed dynamically. An audio block is required for several functions on an IP subscriber card,
(e.g. a simplex call, 7TT conference, All Call, speech recording). The required number of audio blocks
vary from function to function and will be calculated individually for each IP subscriber card. As result,
it is possible that the maximum number of available audio blocks will be exceeded for the same
function at one IP subscriber card, but not necessarily at any other IP subscriber card. If no sufficient
number of audio blocks is available on an IP subscriber card, this function will not be supported.

Affected Intercom Server and IP subscriber cards

This restriction applies for the following Intercom Server and IP subscriber cards:
 IS 300/GE 300/GE 800
 Gx-IP32
 Gx-IP-8
 Gx-IP-4
 VirtuoSIS
 SIS-IP-8

GOOD TO KNOW: Not valid for VirtuoSIS 8.0 and newer

These restrictions only apply for
 VirtuoSIS (version 7.1 and older)
 SIS-IP-8

Affected Intercom functions

The following Intercom functions require audio blocks on an IP subscriber card:
 Call (Simplex/Duplex/OpenDuplex®) (see page 521)
 Alarm (see page 521)
 All Call or group call (see page 522)
 7T conference (see page 523)
 7TT conference (see page 524)
 6T radio conference (see page 524)
 Speech recording (IoIP or RTP) (see page 525)

NOTE:
These functions can be mixed on the same IP subscriber card. The required number of audio blocks
will be added up and not exceed a number of 16 audio blocks – otherwise, the complete
functionality cannot be guaranteed for certain functions.

520 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

Call type (Simplex/Duplex/OpenDuplex)

Required number of audio blocks per call type:
Required number of audio blocks per
Call type Comment
IP subscriber card
Simplex 1
For caller and called individually
Duplex 2 (provided that the called is on an IP
subscriber card)
OpenDuplex 2

To calculate the required number of audio blocks, use the following formula:
Required audio blocks in total per subscriber card = ABX
ABX number of audio blocks for all outgoing and incoming calls on the respective IP subscriber
card (decimal)

Example
1 Simplex call and 2 OpenDuplex®calls on IP subscriber card “A”:

Number of Simplex calls 1) Number of OpenDuplex®calls 2)

IP subscriber card A 1 (1) 2 (4)
1)
Required audio blocks ABX1
2) Required audio blocks ABX2

Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card A = ABX1 + ABX2 =

= 1 + 4 = 5 audio blocks
 5 audio blocks required; 16 audio blocks available

Alarm
Required number of audio blocks for an alarm:
Required number of audio blocks per
Action Comment
IP subscriber card
Feed-in 1 Only one per alarm
Independent of the total number for
Receive 1
all receiver

To calculate the required number of audio blocks, use the following formula:
Required audio blocks in total per subscriber card = ABX + ABY
ABX availability of a feed-in on the respective IP subscriber card (decimal)
ABY availability of at least one receiver on the respective IP subscriber card (decimal)

Example
Alarm with 6 participants (1 speaker, 5 listener), split on 2 IP subscriber cards:

Number of speaker 1) Number of receiver 2)

IP subscriber card A 1 (1) 2 (1)
IP subscriber card B 0 (0) 3 (1)
1)
Required audio blocks ABX
2) Required audio blocks ABY

3.1/0923 521
Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card A = ABX + ABY =

= 1 + 1 = 2 audio blocks
 2 audio blocks required; 16 audio blocks available

Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card B = ABX + ABY =

= 0 + 1 = 1 audio block
 1 audio block required; 16 audio blocks available

All Call or group call

Required number of audio blocks for an All Call or group call:
Required number of audio blocks per
Action Comment
IP subscriber card
Trigger 1 Only one per alarm
Independent of the total number
Receiver 2
for all receivers
Playback of pre-recorded audio
1 Per receiver
(ID: 0 – 159)
Playback of pre-recorded audio
0 No audio block required
(ID: 160 – 191)
Independent of the total number
Playback of calm down signal 1
for all receivers

To calculate the required number of audio blocks, use the following formula:
Required audio blocks in total per subscriber card = ABW + ABX + ABY + ABZ
ABW availability of a trigger on the respective IP subscriber card (decimal)
ABX availability of at least one receiver on the respective IP subscriber card (decimal)
ABY number of receivers, which receive the pre-recorded audio (ID 0 – 159) on the respective IP
subscriber card (decimal)
ABZ availability of at least one receiver, which receives a calm down signal on the respective IP
subscriber card (decimal)

Example
All Call with 1 trigger and 8 receivers, split on three IP subscriber cards. Playback of pre-recorded audio
with ID “25” and a calm down signal:

Number of trigger 1) Number of receiver 2)

IP subscriber card A 1 (1) 1 (2) (1) (1)
IP subscriber card B 0 (0) 4 (2) (4) (1)
IP subscriber card C 0 (0) 3 (2) (3) (1)
1)
Required audio blocks ABW
2)
Required audio blocks ABX, ABY, ABZ

Required audio blocks for

= ABW + ABX + ABY + ABZ =
IP subscriber card A
= 1 + 2 + 1 + 1 = 5 audio blocks
 5 audio blocks required; 16 audio blocks available

522 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

Required audio blocks for

= ABW + ABX + ABY + ABZ =
IP subscriber card B
= 0 + 2 + 4 + 1 = 7 audio blocks
 7 audio blocks required; 16 audio blocks available

Required audio blocks for

= ABW + ABX + ABY + ABZ =
IP subscriber card C
= 0 + 2 + 3 + 1 = 6 audio blocks
 6 audio blocks required; 16 audio blocks available

7T conference
Required number of audio blocks for a 7T conference:
Required number of audio blocks per
Action Comment
IP subscriber card
Speak 1 Only one per 7T conference
Independent of the total
Listen 1
number for all listeners

To calculate the required number of audio blocks, use the following formula:
Required audio blocks in total per IP subscriber card and 7T conference = ABX + ABY
ABX availability of a speaker on the respective IP subscriber card per 7T conference (decimal)
ABY availability of at least one listener on the respective IP subscriber card per 7T conference
(decimal)

Example
7T conference with 6 participants (1 speaker, 5 receiver), split on 2 IP subscriber cards:

Number of trigger 1) Number of receiver 2)

IP subscriber card A 1 (1) 2 (1)
IP subscriber card B 0 (0) 3 (1)
1) Required audio blocks ABX
2) Required audio blocks ABY

Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card A = ABX + ABY =

= 1 + 1 = 2 audio blocks
 2 audio blocks required; 16 audio blocks available

Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card B = ABX + ABY =

= 0 + 1 = 1 audio block
 1 audio block required; 16 audio blocks available

3.1/0923 523
Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

7TT conference
Required number of audio blocks for a 7TT conference:
Required number of audio blocks per
Action Comment
IP subscriber card
Participate 1 Per participant

ATTENTION:
In order to avoid an exceed of the maximum available audio blocks, not more than three 7TT
conference participants be configured at the same time per IP subscriber card!

To calculate the required number of audio blocks, use the following formula:
Required audio blocks in total per IP subscriber card and 7TT conference = ABX + 2 x ABY
ABX sum of 7TT conference participants on all IP subscriber cards per 7TT conference (decimal)
ABY number of 7TT conference participants on the respective IP subscriber card (decimal)

Example
7TT conference with 6 participants, split on 2 IP subscriber cards
Total number of 7TT conference
Number of 7TT conference participants 2)
participants 1)
IP subscriber card A 4 (4)
6 (6)
IP subscriber card B 2 (2)
1)
Required audio blocks ABX
2)
Required audio blocks ABY

Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card A = ABX + 2 x ABY =

= 6 + 2x4 = 14 audio blocks

 14 audio blocks required; 16 audio blocks available

Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card B = ABX + 2 x ABY =

= 6 + 2x2 = 10 audio blocks

 10 audio blocks required; 16 audio blocks available

6T radio conference
Feed-in of a 6T radio conference
Required number of audio blocks for feed-in:
Required number of audio blocks per
Action Comment
IP subscriber card
Feed-in 1 Per feed-in

To calculate the required number of audio blocks, use the following formula:
Required audio blocks in total per subscriber card and 6T radio conference = ABX
ABX number of 6T radio conference feed-ins on the respective IP subscriber card per 6T radio
conference (decimal)

Receiver of a 6T radio conference

Required audio blocks for receiver:

524 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

Required number of audio blocks per

Action Comment
IP subscriber card
Receive 1 Per receiver
Per different received
Receive audio channel 1
radio channel

To calculate the required number of audio blocks, use the following formula:
Required audio blocks in total per subscriber card = ABY + ABZ
ABY number of 6T radio conference receiver on the respective IP subscriber card per 6T radio
conference (decimal)
ABZ number of different received radio channels on the respective IP subscriber card per 6T radio
conference (decimal)

Example
6T radio conference with 4 receivers and 3 different received radio channels, split on 2 IP subscriber
cards. A feed-in is not configured on this IP subscriber cards:
IP subscriber card A IP subscriber card B
Receiver 1 Receiver 2 Receiver 3 Receiver 4
Received radio channels 6T1, 6T2 6T1, 6T3 6T2, 6T3 6T2, 6T3

Number of feed-in 1) 0 (0) 0 (0)

Number of receiver 2) 3 (3) 1 (1)

Number of received radio
3 (3) 2 (2)
conferences 3)
1)
Required audio blocks ABX
2)
Required audio blocks ABY
3) Required audio blocks ABZ

Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card A = ABX + ABY + ABZ =

= 0 + 3 + 3 = 6 audio blocks
 6 audio blocks required; 16 audio blocks available

Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card B = ABX + ABY + ABZ =

= 0 + 1 + 2 = 3 audio blocks
 3 audio blocks required; 16 audio blocks available

Speech recording (IoIP or RTP)

Required number of audio blocks for speech recording:
Required number of audio blocks per
Recording type Comment
IP subscriber card
Simplex 1
Duplex/OpenDuplex 3
Alarm 1 Per active recording type
All Calls/Group Calls 1
6T-Conference 1

3.1/0923 525
Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

ATTENTION:
 In order to avoid an exceed of the maximum available audio blocks, not more than five speech
recorders be configured for Duplex/OpenDuplex®calls at the same time per IP subscriber card!
 If the RTP speech recording function is configured on the same IP subscriber card as the a recorded
call, no audio blocks are required for this speech recorder!

To calculate the required number of audio blocks, use the following formula:
Required audio blocks in total per subscriber card = ABX
ABX number of audio blocks for the speech recorders on the respective IP subscriber card
(decimal)

ATTENTION:
In addition to the required audio blocks for speech recording, audio blocks are also required for the
recorded types (e.g. Simplex, alarm) – see page 520!

Example
2 speech recorders record 2 OpenDuplex®calls on IP subscriber card “A”; 2 speech recorders record 1
OpenDuplex®and 1 Simplex call on IP subscriber card “B”:

Number of OpenDuplex®
Number of recorders 1) Number of Simplex calls 2)
calls 3)
IP subscriber card A 2 (6) 0 (0) 2 (4)
IP subscriber card B 2 (3) 1 (1) 1 (2)
1)
Required audio blocks ABX
2) Required audio blocks ABY1
3)
Required audio blocks ABY2

Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card A = ABX + ABY1 + ABY2 =

= 6 + 0 + 4 = 10 audio blocks
 10 audio blocks required; 16 audio blocks available

Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card B = ABX + ABY1 + ABY2 =

= 4 + 1 + 2 = 7 audio blocks
 7 audio blocks required; 16 audio blocks available
ABY1,2 Number of audio blocks for all outgoing and incoming calls on the respective IP subscriber
card (decimal; see page 521).

Number of audio channels in networks

These numbers of audio channels are available for concurrent calls:
7 kHz
3,5 kHz 7 kHz comp. 16 kHz
Networking type uncomp. Note
(G.711) (G.722) (2x G.722)
(2x G.711)
G8-NET NET calls are always
32 n/a 32 32
(NET) uncompressed
G8-NET
32 8 32 32
(LAN/WAN)

526 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

Calls using G8-LAN use

G8-LAN
32 8 16 16 twice the resources on
(LAN/WAN)
NET
G3-LAN
32 8 32 32
(LAN/WAN)
GEP-LAN Peer-to-Peer: 8 calls in 7
8 4 4 4
(L3-LAN4, IS300, IP32) kHz and 16 kHz
G7-LAN
16 3 8 n/a
(Generation 1)
G7-LAN/WAN
16 8 n/a n/a
(Generation 2)

These numbers of audio channels are available for concurrent broadcasts (Feed-in 4T/6T, All Call 7T
etc.):
7 kHz
3,5 kHz 7 kHz comp. 16 kHz
Networking type uncomp. Note
(G.711) (G.722) (2x G.722)
(2x G.711)
G8-NET NET calls are always
64 n/a 32 32
(NET) uncompressed
G8-NET
64 8 32 32
(LAN/WAN)
G8-LAN
64 8 32 32
(LAN/WAN)
G3-LAN
64 8 32 32
(LAN/WAN)
GEP-LAN
8 4 4 4
(L3-LAN4, IS300, IP32)
G7-LAN
16 3 8 n/a
(Generation 1)
G7-LAN/WAN
16 8 n/a n/a
(Generation 2)

Notes:
 The value of the participant with the lower number of channels always applies (e.g. when networking
between G8-LAN and IS300, the channel number of the GEP-LAN applies).
 All channel numbers relate to the entire server (i.e. if 16 calls are already active on a G8-LAN card,
no further calls are possible on a second G8-LAN card).
 The number of calls does not depend on the number of logical LAN/WAN connections (except
G7-LAN Generation 1).
 Compressed 7 kHz and uncompressed 16 kHz calls can be combined (e.g. 8x 7 kHz and 24x 16 kHz).
 In the case of all calls/group calls, an additional channel is required for the gong.

3.1/0923 527
Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

Licencing note
Starting with CCT 800 5.1, a key icon is indicated instead of a notice dialogue when for certain features
a licence is missing or insufficient:

 → The required licence for a certain feature is not available. In case of a missing licence,
configuration is not possible.
 → More Intercom clients are configured than licences are available on a subscriber card. This key
icon is only indicated when the firmware version PRO 800 5.0 or lower is installed on the
respective Intercom Server.

GOOD TO KNOW: Tool tips

With CCT 800 6.1 or higher, tool tips show information about missing licences for individual functions.
Move the cursor over the indicated key icon in order to display the tool tip.

In the following table, you will find all functions that require one or more licences:
Intercom Server

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Required
Path in CCT 800 Feature
licence

General Settings > tab

Connection SA101 Lx-*ICX             
General
Cards CSA Lx-PRO5(U)             
Lx-PRO2(U)
L15-G3-GET
G15 cards in Intercom L15-G3-8E8A
            
Server GE 300 L15-G3-16A
L15-G3-16E
L15-G3-TEL
SIP-C Lx-PRO4(U)             
G3 cards in Intercom
L15-GE300             
Server GE 150
SNMP SNMP Lx-PRO3(U)             
Logic module > desired Lx-PRO4(U)
Logic module             
Intercom Server L-LOGIC-8
Subscriber menus Phonebook view Lx-PRO6(U)             
External subscriber list Lx-*ICX             
Intercom Server - Block XX
Delete transferred calls
General >
at destination control Lx-PRO2(U)             
tab Control desk system
desk at end of transfer
Group options PTT Mode Lx-PRO4(U)             
Time zones for
Time zones Lx-PRO6(U)             
subscribers

528 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

IP Settings

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Required
Path in CCT 800 Feature
licence

Address Conflict Detec-

IP - Settings Lx-PRO5(U)             
tion
Outputs
ICX at output ICX interface Lx-*ICX             
Inputs
ICX at input ICX interface Lx-*ICX             
Input message > desired
input > tab Network V24-Call number Lx-*ICX             
Monitoring
Network
Lx-LAN-x
IP - Connections >
Lx-WAN-x
desired connection > tab LAN-connection             
Lx-NETLANx
LAN-connections
Lx-NETWANx
IP - Connections >
Lx-WAN-x
desired connection > tab WAN-connection             
Lx-NETWANx
WAN-connections
Interfaces
Data interfaces > tab
Lx-PRO5(U)             
Apps
Data interfaces > tab
Parallel call number Lx-*ICX             
RS232, TCP/IP, Apps
Data interfaces > tab Length ICX-messages:
Lx-PRO2(U)             
RS232 and TCP/IP “Always long“
Data interfaces > tab Port (Moxa), IP Address
Lx-*ICX             
RS232 (Moxa)
L15-LOG
Log L-LOG             
L-LOG5
L15-LOG
Data interfaces > tab
Log L-LOG             
TCP/IP
L-LOG5
Lx-ICX
L-IS3-ICX
Type of connection Lx-IF-ICX             
L-IF-PELCO
L-IF-MILEST
SIS-SIP-T > Trunk >
Protocol, Early Media Lx-PRO6(U)             
desired trunk
Dial plan Lx-PRO5(U)             
Deutsche Telekom
L-SIS-13             
CompanyFlex

3.1/0923 529
Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

Subscriber

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Required
Path in CCT 800 Feature
licence

General > tab Display

Display time Lx-PRO6(U)             
time
Call Disabling Invert call barring Lx-PRO2(U)             
F-button-based direct
Direct Dialling Lx-PRO5(U)             
dialling
L-EX-AF-OUT
Audio-Features > tab Separate control
(only for             
General loudspeaker
EX 7000)
Lx-PRO6(U)
DSP-Features > tab
Line-out / External, L-EX-AF-OUT
Micro-phone,             
loudspeaker gain (only for
Loudspeaker, Tones
EX 7000)
Lx-PRO2(U)
RTP Configuration RTP configuration             
L-IP_REC-1
Interface
Lx-*ICX             
synchronisation
Calling history Calling history Lx-PRO2(U)             
Station properties > tab
Intercom Client IC200I IC200I(-x)             
Common
Intercom Client ICCAA L-ICCAA(-x)             
Non-Audio Client
L-ICCNA(-x)             
ICCNA
Invert key 0 and T Lx-PRO2(U)             
AC 200I, RTP server, CD
Lx-PRO2(U)             
Series
EE 380, EE 380A, Axis
Lx-PRO3(U)             
WS
EE 980 Lx-PRO4(U)             
Station properties > tab
Hebrew Lx-PRO2(U)             
Extended Settings
Station properties >
desired station series >
desired subscriber > But- PA functions Lx-PRO6(U)             
ton-/Indication function
> tab PA functions
Station properties >
Button function Lx-PRO2(U)             
desired station series
Remote control CD Lx-PRO3(U)             
Remote Control EE 380,
EE 380A, EE 980, ICCAA, Lx-PRO6(U)             
ICCNA
Station properties > AF
series > tab Line moni- Line monitoring L-AF-LM             
toring
L-EX-AF-OUT
Station properties > Ex OUT 1 (voltage-
(only for             
stations > tab Outputs regulated output)
EX 7000)

530 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

Subscriber

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Required
Path in CCT 800 Feature
licence

Station properties > Number of modules for

Intercom Clients > tab Intercom Client IC200I L-DD202(-x)             
General (module 1 to 4)
Number of modules for
Intercom Client ICCAA L-ICCDDA(-x)             
(module 1 to 8)
Number of modules for
Intercom Client ICCAA Lx-PRO5(U)             
(module 5 to 8)
Number of modules for
Station properties > IP-
non-audio IC200I L-DD202(-x)             
Terminals > tab Common
(module 1 to 4)
Number of modules for
non-audio ICCAA (mod- L-ICCDDA(-x)             
ule 1 to 8)
Number of modules for
non-audio ICCAA (mod- Lx-PRO5(U)             
ule 5 to 8)
Station properties > IP-
Terminals > tab Extended subscribers Lx-PRO2(U)             
Extended subscribers
Dummy ports Lx-PRO4(U)             
Station properties >
Show only time (large) Lx-PRO2(U)             
Monitors > tab Monitor
Station properties > SIP-
SIP client L-SIS-SIP-x             
Terminals > tab Settings
Protocol, Early Media,
Lx-PRO6(U)             
Dial 0 at incoming call
Dial plan Lx-PRO5(U)             
Speech recording > tab
Audio channel-Alloca- ICX messages Lx-*ICX             
tion
Speech recording > tab Call, alarm, All Call/
Lx-PRO4(U)             
Recording group call, conference
Control Desks > tab IP/ ICX connection,SA101
Lx-*ICX             
RS232 -ICX connection
Control Desks > tab Call
Timeout Lx-PRO5(U)             
distribution - day/night
Call Request > tab De-
Amount of presses Lx-PRO2(U)             
bounce for releasing call
Video > tab General Control via ICX Lx-*ICX             
Number of monitors for
Video > tab Monitor Intercom Client IC200I L-VM201(-x)             
(monitor 1)
Number of monitors for
Intercom Client IC200I L-ICCVA(-x)             
(monitor 1 to 2)

3.1/0923 531
 Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

Number of monitors for

Intercom Client IC200I Lx-PRO(5U)             
(monitor 2)
Remote Stations > tab
ICX connection Lx-*ICX             
Remote Station
Reception of multiple
Receiver Music / Radio
radio conferences for Lx-PRO5(U)             
conference
SIP

 Configuration changes without restart

Configuration changes of certain Intercom subscriber functions can be applied in the Intercom Server
without a restart. The icon is displayed in the product manual “Intercom Server Configuration” next
to this feature. In the table below, the following restrictions apply to the respective Intercom Server
firmware versions:
 Feature requires no restart at configuration change
 Feature requires a restart at configuration change

NOTE:
 As of PRO 800 6.1, if configuration changes have been made, ICX synchronisation messages are
output at ICX interfaces assigned to a control desk without a warm start.

Intercom Server

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

Switch off times Release T-Key             

Intercom Server - Block XX
Time zones Description             
Difference to UTC (+/- HH:MM)             
Automatic DST adjustment             
VirtuoSIS Master
General Settings SSH Port             
Network Settings > tab
NET networking allowed 1)             
Network
Network Settings > tab DNS
Name Server(s)             
Settings
Domain             
Search             
Parameters
Optional parameters 900             
901             
902             
903             
904             

532 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

Parameters

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

905             
906             
907             
908             
909             
910             
911             
912             
913             
914             
915             
916             
917             
918             
919             
920             
921             
ICX parameter > desired
Function: Add parameter             
subscriber
Function: Remove parameter             
Function: Add entry             
Function: Remove entry             
1)
An existing NET connection is not interrupted, when a function is deactivated. After restarting VirtuoSIS, NET
networking is no longer possible.

Outputs
General Settings Description             
Display text EE 811A & camera             
Plan ID             
Template ID             
Inputs
General Settings Description             
Display text EE 811A & camera             
Plan ID             
Template ID             
Key switches input Key 1)             
Input message Function: Add input message             
Input message > tab
Break             
Triggering

3.1/0923 533
Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

Inputs

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

15k             
5k6             
1k5             
Short             
Reactivation time Emergency calls
            
and Errors [s]
Automatic end of call Emergency
            
calls [s]
Reactivation time Normal calls [s]             
Automatic end of call Normal calls
            
[s]
Calls quits input             
Input message > tab Call
Active 1             
types
Active 2             
Error             
Input message > tab Input becomes inactive when call
            
Operations for Active 1 is still active
Acknowledgement when input is
            
still active
Acknowledgement when input is
            
still inactive
Snapshot             
Input message > tab Input becomes inactive when call
            
Operations for Active 2 is still active
Acknowledgement when input is
            
still active
Acknowledgement when input is
            
still inactive
Snapshot             
Input message > tab Input becomes inactive when call
            
Operations for Error is still active
Acknowledgement when input is
            
still active
Acknowledgement when input is
            
still inactive
Snapshot             
Input message > desired input
Function: Add Control Desk             
> tab Control Desks
Function: Remove Control Desk             
Active 1             
Active 2             
Error             

534 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

Inputs

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

Input message > desired input

Function: Add output             
> tab Attendant contacts
Function: Remove output             
Active 1             
Active 2             
Error             
Switch type             
1)
Requires restart of the device.

Network
IP-Connections > tab LAN
Function: Add LAN-connection             
connections
Function: Delete LAN-connection             
IP Address of Destination Intercom
            
Server
Port no.             
Intercom Server blocks             
1)
ID number subscriber             
Idle time [s]             
Fallback mode             
Input for status-indication             
DSCP             
IP-Connections > tab WAN
Function: Add WAN-connection             
connections
Function: Delete WAN-connection             
Pre-dialling code             
IP Address of Destination Intercom
            
Server
Port no.             
Intercom Server blocks             
ID number subscriber 1)             
Idle time [s]             
Fallback mode             
Input for status-indication             
DSCP             
Allow ICX commands             
Block lock             
IP-Connections > tab WAN
Level 1 to Level 15             
hierarchy levels
1)
Requires restart of the connections. Active calls or conferences will be cancelled.

3.1/0923 535
Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

Interfaces

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

SIS-SIP-T > desired trunk Basic SIP Trunk configuration             

Advanced SIP Trunk configuration             
Dial plan configuration             
Volume adjustment             
General
Subscriber > General > tab
Description             
Naming
Camera control             
Display text EE 311A/411             
Display text EE 811A & camera             
Secretary Number             
Secretary Waiting time when busy
            
[s]
Plan ID             
Template ID             
Subscriber > General > tab
Display time             
Display time
Time zone             
Date format             

Entitlements
Subscriber > Entitlements >
Permission privacy             
tab Privacy
Fix as calling station             
Fix as called station             
Music on waiting (Busy/Privacy)             
4 kHz as privacy tone             
Permission privacy via tilting             
LED when private             
Subscriber > Entitlements >
tab Talk into, Priority call, Intrusion when private             
call transfer, Recall Request
Intrusion when busy             
Allow intrusion             
Priority call             
Call transfer as calling station             
Call transfer as called station             
Receive Recall Request             
No busy tone at talk in (conference)             

536 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

Entitlements

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

Subscriber > Entitlements >

Release keypad despite alarm             
tab Alarm, Common
Alarm 1 receiver             
Receive Chime-signal             
Auto. disconnection             
Minute tone             
Disable After-Dialling             
Conversations as call request             
Audiocom             
No Group Call during call             
Hide subscribers from F1-menu             
No contrast adjustment             
Subscriber specific ICX messages             

Line monitoring
Subscriber > Line
monitoring > tab Line Line-monitoring             
monitoring
Offline at line fault             

3.1/0923 537
Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

All Calls / Group Calls / Zones

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

Subscriber > All Calls/Group

All Call initiator             
Calls/Zones
All Call receiver             
“Gr. 0” to “Gr. 59”             
“Gr. 70 Zn.11” to “Gr. 89 Zn. 30”             
Call Disabling
Subscriber > Call Disabling Hierarchy             
WAN Hierarchy             
Invert call barring             
Direct Dialling
Subscriber > Direct Dialling Direct Dialling             
Toggle Mode             
Disconnect on release             
Audio-Features
Subscriber > Audio -
Mode HE 505             
Features > tab General
Duplex mode             
Separate control loudspeaker             
Subscriber > Audio-Features
> tab Duplex, Simplex, Full Duplex active             
Duplex
Duplex mode             
Duplex limit             
Simplex active             
Simplex mode             
Simplex limit             
Full Duplex active             
Full Duplex mode             
Full Duplex limit             
Subscriber > Audio-Features
Handset active             
> tab Handset, Music, All Call
Handset mode             
Handset limit             
Music active             
Music mode             
Music limit             
All Call active             
All Call mode             
All Call limit             

538 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

Audio-Features

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

Subscriber > Audio-Features

Gong active             
> tab Gong, Tones, Buzzer
Gong mode             
Gong limit             
Tones active             
Tones mode             
Tones limit             
Buzzer active             
Buzzer mode             
Buzzer limit             
Subscriber > Audio-Features
> tab Feedback, Radio, 6T Feedback active             
Headset
6T Feedback mode             
6T Feedback limit             
Radio active             
Radio mode             
Radio limit             
Headset active             
Headset mode             
Headset limit             
DSP-Features
Subscriber > DSP-Features >
Template (LED + TFT)             
tab General
Lock AEC             
AEC gain 1)             
High volume duplex mode             
IN2 at ext. mic.             
IN2 at PPT-button of handset             
Dynamic noise cancellation 1)             
Recording via handset 1)             
Disable loudspeaker equalization 1)             

3.1/0923 539
Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

DSP-Features

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

Subscriber > DSP-Features >

Function Relay 1             
tab Surveillance
Relay Transfer EB2E2A 2)             
Loudspeaker-/Microphone
            
Surveillance cycle time
Microphone ALM             
Check only once             
Loudspeaker-/Microphone
            
Surveillance retry time [s]
Loudspeaker-/Microphone
            
Surveillance volume
Reduction -18dB             
Red lamp             
Subscriber > DSP-Features >
Audio Monitoring trigger             
tab Audio Monitoring
Audio Monitoring time [s]             
Audio Monitoring permanent             
Short integration             
Red lamp             
Audio Monitoring Off             
Subscriber > DSP-Features >
Microphone Frequency response
tab Microphone,             
mode 3)
Loudspeaker,Tones
Internal microphone gain             
External microphone gain             
Gooseneck microphone gain             
Line-In gain             
Headset microphone gain             
Line-out/External loudspeaker gain             
Keypad tones             
Special Tone 1             
Special Tone 2             
Start beep mode             
Sidetone             

540 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

DSP-Features

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

Subscriber > DSP-Features >

IVC 1)             
tab Voice control
Threshold - High             
Threshold - Low             
Level “low” at start of Intercom
            
Server
Level “low” when button is pressed             
Reduction             
ICX messages at dB-level changing             
Range 1: 0 - < level             
Range 2:             
Range 3: >= level             
1)
Requires restart of the device with PRO 800 6.1.
2)
Requires restart of the device with PRO 800 6.1 if the entry “OUT1 + OUT2” is selected.
3) Requires restart of the device with PRO 800 6.1 if the entry “MIC480” is selected.

NOTE:
 After configuration changes at Subscriber > DSP-Features, a restart of the station type ET 901 is
always required.
 After configuration changes at Subscriber > DSP-Features using PRO 800 6.0, a restart of each
station type is required.

Signal Tones-DSP Stations

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4

Path in CCT 800 Feature

Subscriber > Signal Tones-

DSP Stations > tab Signals, Dialling tone             
Tones 1
Error tone             
Busy tone             
Busy tieline             
Acknowledgement             
Acknowledgement Off             
Access control             
Subscriber > Signal Tones-
DSP Stations > tab Signals, Privacy             
Tones 2
Ringtone access control             
Ringtone             

3.1/0923 541
Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

Signal Tones-DSP Stations

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

Minute tone             
Waiting signal microphone mute             
Waiting signal for further
            
connection
Initiate ringing             
Subscriber > Signal Tones-
DSP Stations > tab Signals, Reception ringing             
Tones 3
Reception alarm with low priority             
Reception alarm with high priority             
Initiator call request             
All Call             
Group Call             
Chime-signal             

Station properties
Subscriber > Station proper-
Dialling of button on hook-off             
ties > tab Handset
EE 900A
Subscriber > Station proper-
Allow blinking output during a call             
ties > EE900A > tab Outputs
Subscriber > Station proper-
Hide idle menu help             
ties > EE900A > tab Display
IP-Terminals
Subscriber > Station proper-
ties > IP-Terminals > tab Terminal IP Address             
Common
Port No.             
Dynamic registration             
MAC-Address             
Subscriber > Station proper-
ties > IP-Terminals > tab Ex- Bandwidth kBit             
tended Settings
Databandwidth kBit             
Card poll time             
Station poll time             
VOX-Control             
VOX-Follow up time             
DSCP             
Jitter Buffer Start Delay             
No decrement of Jitter Buffer             
Deactivate switch LEDs             

542 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

SIP-Terminals

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

Subscriber > Station proper-

ties > SIP-Terminals > tab Port No.             
Common
Protocol             
Password             
Codec 1             
Codec 2             
Codec 3             
Codec 4             
Codec 5             
DTMF mode             
Polltime             
Polling active             
early media             
Dial 0 at incoming call             
Volume adjustment Outgoing [dB]             
Volume adjustment Incoming [dB]             
Dial plan configuration             
Alarm triggering
Subscriber > Alarm trigger-
Function: Add alarm trigger             
ing
Subscriber > Alarm trigger-
Function: Add new entry             
ing > desired subscriber
Group             
Priority             
Disconnect             
Attendant contact             
Indication of alarm             
Last subscriber switches off:
            
restart alarm
Receiving stations entitled to talk             
no red lamp during alarm             

3.1/0923 543
Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

Speech recording

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

Subscriber > Speech record-

Conversation             
ing > Recording
Mandatory recording             
Alarm             
Mandatory recording             
All/Group Call             
Mandatory recording             
Feed-in
Subscriber > Feed-in > Music Display text EE 311A/411             
Display text EE 811A & camera             
Control Desks
Subscriber > Control Desks
Buzzer-mode             
> tab Buzzer
Buzzer during conversation
            
Normal call
Buzzer during conversation
            
Emergency call
Buzzer via output             
Buzzer via output Normal call             
Buzzer via output Emergency call             
Buzzer at station Normal call             
Buzzer at station Emergency call             
Red lamp at buzzer             
Subscriber > Control Desks
Loudspeaking call             
> tab Call conversion
Privacy call             
Busy             
Ringing from door             
Convert to call type             
Subscriber > Control Desks
> tab Tone generator for 01 - Normal Call             
Buzzer
02 - Emergency Call             
04 - Active 1             
05 - Active 1             
06 - Active 2             
07 - Active 2             
08 - Error             
09 - Error             

544 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

Control Desks

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

12 - Active 1             
14 - Active 2             

Call Requests
Subscriber > Call Request Function: Add Call Request             
Symphony Control Desk: Add Call
            
Request for classic control desk
Subscriber > Call Request >
Trigger key 1             
tab Trigger
Call type for trigger key 1             
Snapshot at key 1             
Trigger key 2             
Call type for trigger key 2             
Snapshot at key 2             
Trigger key 3             
Call type for trigger key 3             
Snapshot at key 3             
Subscriber > Call Request >
tab De-bounce for releasing Amount of presses             
call
Time for stable press until call is
            
released [s]
Time for resetting debounce mode
            
[s]
Subscriber > Call Request >
Calm down signal normal call             
tab Parameter
Calm down signal emergency call             
Line-monitoring             
Automatic acknowledgement of
            
line fault
Snapshot at line-fault             
Cancel on site with [X]             
Call Transfer Direct Dialling             
Disable After-Dialling             
Subscriber > Call Request > Automatic end of call Normal calls
            
tab Pre-recorded audio [ID]
Automatic end of call Emergency
            
calls [ID]
Call Suppression Normal calls [ID]             
Call Suppression Emergency calls
            
[ID]
Call release confirmation Normal
            
Call [ID]

3.1/0923 545
Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

Call Requests

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

Call release confirmation Emer-

            
gency Call [ID]
Subscriber > Call Request >
Reactivation time Emergency calls
tab Automatic end of call/             
and Errors [s]
Reactivation
Automatic end of call Emergency
            
calls [s]
Reactivation time Normal calls [s]             
Automatic end of call Normal calls
            
[s]
Subscriber > Call Request >
Normal call             
tab Call type
Emergency call             
Line fault             
Subscriber > Call Request >
desired subscriber > tab Function: Add Control Desk             
Control Desks
Function: Remove Control Desk             
Normal call             
Emergency call             
Line fault             
Subscriber > Call Request >
desired subscriber > tab Function: Add Output             
Attendant contacts
Function: Remove Output             
Normal call             
Emergency call             
Line fault             
Parking             
Switch type             

Door opener
Function: Add door opener
Subscriber > Door opener             
function
Subscriber > Door opener >
Simplex during opening             
tab Door open
Time for door opener [s]             
Automatic open             
Automatic open when private             
after [s]             
Cancel call             
after [s]             
Authorisation group             

546 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

Door opener

VirtuoSIS 10.x
VirtuoSIS 11.x
VirtuoSIS 12.x
VirtuoSIS 13.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
PRO 800 6.3
PRO 800 6.4
Path in CCT 800 Feature

Subscriber > Door opener >

Control Station             
tab Control Station
Number of attempts             
Duration control station call [s]             
Only control station can open             
Subscriber > Door opener >
Waiting information             
tab Waiting information
Subscriber > Door opener >
desired subscriber > tab Function: Add Output             
General
Function: Remove Output             
Button             
Relay toggle             
Access code(s)             
Subscriber > Door opener >
desired subscriber > Function: add new group             
Forwarding Group-ringing
Function: remove current group             
Transfer-Group             
Target No.             
Time [s]             

3.1/0923 547
Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

Restrictions for configuration

The following restrictions have to be observed for configuration:
Feature level Maximum number of inputs Up to PRO 800 1.1
4 changed buttons per input (at up to 5
Input changes button of a subscriber -
subscribers)
Input initiates dialling at a subscriber At up to 5 subscribers -
Individual F2 menu / Favourites 1) 40
255 entries per subscriber
Protection against feed back 1020 disabled calling numbers per subscriber 123
1020 disabled calling numbers / functions per
Selective disabling of functions 123
subscriber
Direct dialling selective 339 direct dialling targets per subscriber 41
Direct dialling general 339 direct dialling targets 41
339 definitions per subscriber card. One defi-
nition is one or more activations at ”active
Output contacts 41
at”, one entry at ”PA-Numbers” and one
entry at ”Call no. / Function”
123 per subscriber, minus 2 per allocated
Access codes -
output
Call requests 509 control desks per subscriber card 61
Output contacts for call requests 509 per subscriber card 61
Input messages 509 control desks per input/output card 61
Output contacts for input messages 509 per input/output card 61
Tieline 61 code numbers per Intercom Server -
1)
A maximum of 135 different user-defined texts can be created (per Intercom Server-Block). Once all these
texts are created, it is not possible to create a new entry at “Individual F2 menu” and “Direct dialling settings /
Favourites”.

Restrictions for radio authorisation channels

If for the radio conferences the authorisation channels “41” to “48” are used, certain group calls are
disabled.
Radio conference Disabled group calls
6T41 66, 75, 83
6T42 67, 76, 84
6T43 68, 77, 85
6T44 69, 78, 86
6T45 70, 79, 87
6T46 71, 82, 88
6T47 72, 83, 89
6T48 73, 84, 90

548 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

Memory capacity of the Intercom Server

Installed subscriber cards, input/output cards and certain features require memory in the main memory
of the Intercom Server. For storage of these customer-specific functions, a maximum of 256 kB is
available for an Intercom Server GE300 and GE800 per housing. This value may not be exceeded.

NOTE:
Used memory is shown at Intercom Server > Cards for each Intercom Server separately.

Required memory
General Intercom functions
Protection against +2 bytes per saved call
8 bytes per subscriber with feedback protection
feedback number
+2 bytes per saved call
Disabling of functions 8 bytes per subscriber with disabled functions
number
+6 bytes per direct dialling
Direct dialling selective 8 bytes per subscriber with direct dialling
target
+6 bytes per direct dialling
Direct dialling general 8 bytes
target
Output contact 8 bytes per with output contacts +6 bytes per output contact

Plug-in cards
G3-GED-4, G8-GED-4 400 bytes per card
G3-GET-4, G8-GET-4 392 bytes per card
G3-8E8A, G8-8E8A 1024 bytes per card
G3-16E, G8-16E 1024 bytes per card
G3-16A, G8-16A 1024 bytes per card
G3-V24, G8-V24 160 bytes per card

Door control
Door station 26 bytes per door station
+4 bytes per output +2 bytes
Access control 8 bytes per card with door opener contacts
per code

Control desk functions

Control desk 62 bytes per control desk
+28 bytes per calling
subscriber
8 bytes per per card from which call requests are
Call request from a station +4 bytes per allocated control
initiated
station
+4 bytes per output contact
+28 bytes per initiating input
8 bytes per card from which input messages are +4 bytes per allocated control
Input messages
initiated station
+4 bytes per output contact

Alarm
+4 bytes per alarm
Alarm function 8 bytes per alarm initiator
+6 bytes per transfer level

Video
+2 bytes general memory
Video connection 28 bytes per station that has an allocated monitor
for video

3.1/0923 549
 Appendix Intercom Server Configuration

Radio conference, music

Feed-in music programs 24 bytes per music program
Feed-in radio channels 24 bytes per radio channel

Stations with input level detection

GOOD TO KNOW: What is the purpose of an input level detection?
The input level detection is required for the automatic detection of a connected direct dialling module.
If a direct dialling module (WSDD 53V or WSDD 59V) is detected, this module can be allocated to the
respective station in the configuration software CCT 800. Further information about direct dialling
modules can be found on page 218.

The following station types have an input level detection:

EE 7000D ET 962A 1) WS 800PD WS 210VICM

EE 7000D AF 1) ET 962H 1) WS 800FD WS 210VICA

EE 7000I 1) WS 800FDMD WS 210VIDA
ET 970A
EE 7000I AF 1) ET 970H 1) WS 800VD WS 210VIM
EE 900A WS 200PD WS 810PD WS 500VICM

EF 962A 1) WS 200VD WS 810FD WS 800PI

1) WS 200PDCM WS 200PI WS 800FI
EF 962H
EF 963A WS 200VDCM WS 200VI WS 800FI PS1

ES 962H 1) WS 210VD WS 200PICM WS 800VI

ET 908A WS 500VDCM 1) WS 210VI WS 800VI PS1
WS 210VDCM WS 200VICA WS 200VICM
ET908H

WS 200PICA WS 210VDM WS 210VDDA WS 810PI

WS 810FI
1) With PRO 800 6.1 or higher, the connection of a direct dialling module is possible.

 Safe mode
If one or more errors in the Intercom Server configuration prevent it from operating properly, safe
mode always ensures a successful restart of the Intercom Server and its operation in a reduced form.
Certain configured functions are not available while the Intercom Server is in the safe mode. If the
Intercom Server is restarted in safe mode, a part of the stored Intercom Server configuration will be
disabled, but the connection between the Intercom Server and the connected PC remains active.

ATTENTION:
The firmware download (downgrade and upgrade) cannot be performed during the safe mode. The
respective Intercom Server has to be initialised first (see page 56)!

Indication of the safe mode state

The CCT 800 program will only indicate whether the Intercom Server is currently in safe mode or not.
It will not display the specific error that triggered the safe mode. The current state of the safe mode will
be displayed in the receive dialogue 1 and the card dialogue 2 in the program CCT 800.

550 3.1/0923
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix

1 Receive dialogue
Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Intercom Server > Receive
 Receive the Intercom Server configuration of the respective Intercom Server (see page 80). If the In-
tercom Server is operating in the safe mode, the following dialogue appears:

The safe mode is indicated by:

 The status bar of the respective Intercom Server is coloured magenta.
 In the column State, the message “Safe Mode” is displayed for the respective Intercom Server.

2 Card dialogue
Configuration CCT 800
 Go to: Intercom Server > Receive
 Receive the Intercom Server configuration of the respective Intercom Server (see page 80).
 Go to: Intercom Server > Cards
 If the Intercom Server is operating in the safe mode, the following dialogue appears:

The safe mode is indicated by:

 The field Server-ID is coloured magenta.
 Hover the cursor over the coloured field “Server-ID” to indicate an info message that the respective
Intercom Server has been started in safe mode.

Troubleshooting
The following possibilities are available:
 Patch all existing errors of the affected CCT 800 file and send the Intercom Server configuration to
the respective Intercom Server (see page 82).
 Send a previous version of an error-free backup of the affected Intercom Server configuration to the
respective Intercom Server.
 Contact the technical support.

3.1/0923 551
Technical Support Intercom Server Configuration

Technical Support
For further information about our products and services, visit:

www.commend.com

552 3.1/0923